Lanco Referral 2014 7200 Including Attachments

1.
Short description
The proposed action is for the construction and operation of Berth 14A within the inner harbour of Bunbury
port to facilitate the export of up to 15million tonnes of coal per annum. This proposed development is
consistent with the overarching Bunbury Port Authority Structure Plan (TME 2009) prepared in accordance
with the requirements of the City of Bunbury Town Planning Scheme. A maximum of 2.7 million cubic
metres of material is proposed to be removed from Berth 14A of which a maximum of 1.9 million cubic
metres is proposed to ocean disposal.
001 Referral of proposed action v July 2013
1.2
Latitude and longitude
Degrees, minutes, seconds
Degrees, minutes, seconds
A GIS shape file of the project boundary has also been provided to the Department of the Environment.
1.3
Locality and property description
The project is located near the Bunbury township in Western Australia. The project is located on the
former Bunbury Power Station site within an L shaped area portion of land surrounded by the Inner
Harbour Basin to the south and west, Leschenault Inlet to the east and Koombana Bay to the north.
Adjoining the site to the south east is the Alcoa and Worsley facilities which exports Alumina whilst on the
western side of the inner harbour is woodchip and mineral sands facilities.
A map of the proposed location is included as Attachment 1.
1.4
Size of the development

footprint or work area
(hectares)
Approximately 30 hectares
1.5
Street address of the site
Leschenault Drive, Bunbury.

Western Australia
1.6
Lot description
Table 1 below describes the land tenure of the site.
Land owner/Primary interest holder
1.7
Lot
Deposited plan
Local Government Area and Council contact (if known)
Bunbury LGA
1.8
Time frame
Construction is likely to commence in the third quarter of 2015 with the site being operational in April
2017, subject to the relevant approvals and availability of required resources. The export quantity of coal
would progressively increase until the full capacity of 15 Million tonnes per annum is achieved.
Dredging activities are proposed to commence in October 2015 and last for up to a maximum of 40 weeks
dependent on the equipment used, final engineering design and engagement of a dredging contractor.
Although considered unlikely, due to the highly weathered condition of the basalt rock, if fracturing is
required, an additional 5 weeks may be added to the dredging schedule.
1.9
Alternatives to proposed
action
No
Yes, you must also complete section 2.2
1.10
Alternative time frames etc
No
Yes, you must also complete Section 2.3. For each alternative,
location, time frame, or activity identified, you must also complete
details in Sections 1.2-1.9, 2.4-2.7 and 3.3 (where relevant).
1.11
State assessment
No
Yes, you must also complete Section 2.5
1.12
Component of larger action
No
Yes, you must also complete Section 2.7
1.13
Related actions/proposals
No
Yes, provide details:
1.14
1.15
Australian Government
funding
No
Great Barrier Reef Marine

Park
No
Yes, provide details:

Yes, you must also complete Section 3.1 (h), 3.2 (e)
2.1 Description of proposed action
The proposed action is for the construction and operation of Berth 14A within the inner harbour of Bunbury
Port to facilitate the export of up to 15 million tonnes of coal per annum as a multi user terminal. The Bunbury
Port is an existing operating harbour and the proposal is consistent with the IHSP (TME 2009).
The Project supports the export of coal from the proposed expansion of the Griffin Coal operations in the Collie
Basin through the Project.
In order to process this increased volume of coal, new transport facilities, a handling plant and berthing
arrangements are required at Bunbury Port to mobilise the coal from the mine to the ship.
The proposed action is also being assessed by the WA Environmental Protection Authority (Assessment No.
1886) and includes the coal handling facility including a new rail loop, enclosed stockpile shed, conveyor
systems, ship loading facilities and a new berth. It is proposed that the new rail loop would allow the delivery
of coal-loaded wagons to be unloaded and then return empty to the mine to be re-loaded again.
To increase flexibility and maintain efficiency, the coal handling facility is designed to receive coal by rail and
unload either directly to a berthed ship or to the enclosed stockpile shed. It is proposed that the enclosed shed
will allow up to a six day supply of stockpiled coal. The stockpiled coal would act as a buffer between the
unloading and loading processes to ensure a waiting ship is loaded as quickly as possible, as well as allowing
train unloading to proceed if a ship is not available.
The capital dredging of Berth 14A and its approach is necessary to provide sufficient space to allow bulk
carriers to enter and depart the new berth. Dredging works includes both marine and terrestrial footprints that
may include some rock fracturing in limited areas. Construction also requires construction of wharf facility and
armoured slope protection at the entrance of the basin and other open areas with suitable local materials. It is
estimated that a maximum of 1.9million cubic metres of material will be disposed of at sea (Refer to
Attachment 1).
The key characteristics of the proposed action are identified in Table 2 below and the project overview figures
in Attachment 1.
Marine components
Description
#
3
3
Environmental Protection (Sea Dumping) Act 1981
Terrestrial components
Description
Picture 1 The proposed location for Berth 14A within the Inner Harbour of Bunbury Port.
2.2 Alternatives to taking the proposed action
The no project alternative was considered however without the proposed export facility, there is currently no
feasible scope for the export of coal from the Collie Basin of Western Australia.
2.3 Alternative locations, time frames or activities that form part of the referred action
In general terms a number of alternatives were considered to the proposed arrangements. Investigation of
utilising the Port of Albany was considered, but suitable berths and land were not available.
The Bunbury Port Inner Harbour Structure Plan Scoping Document (BPIHSPSC, 2011) considered the
alternative of extending Port facilities into Koombana Bay itself rather than further development of the Inner
Harbour. From an environmental perspective, this was considered a less than optimal option as it would require
extensive excavation and dredging of basalt rock including significant drilling and blasting. It was also identified
that recreational boating activity would be impeded by infrastructure.
An alternative to the developing of Berth 14 and Coal Storage and Loading Facilities within the Inner Harbour
of the existing Bunbury Port is the construction of a new greenfield facility. This alternative was rejected on
both environmental and economic grounds. The preference of expanding existing facilities at an operational
port as opposed to the construction of a new greenfield facility is considered to be clear without further
detailed environmental assessment at this stage.
2.4 Context, planning framework and state/local government requirements
The Bunbury Port Authority has completed a Structure Plan for the Bunbury Port Inner Harbour (TME 2009)
under the City of Bunbury planning requirements and has recently submitted the Strategic Referral to the
Environmental Protection Authority (EPA) of Western Australia. The Structure Plan is a policy document to
guide development and decision making within the Inner Harbour and conforms to the strategic planning
requirements under the
. Preparation of the Structure Plan has involved
considerable community consultation, technical/scientific investigations and briefings of decision makers. Much
of this work was undertaken under guidance of a steering committee (comprising representatives of the City of
Bunbury, Department of Planning, Main Roads WA, WestNet Rail and the Board of the Bunbury Port Authority).
The proposed action is consistent with this Structure Plan.
The proposed action has considered the Greater Bunbury Regional Scheme and it is wholly contained within
the port installations reserved lands.
A sea dumping permit for the project was submitted in March 2013 under the
and is currently being updated based on a request for further information. This permit
includes a detailed assessment of the proposed dredge location and the proposed dredge disposal site (refer to
Attachment 1).
2.5 Environmental impact assessments under Commonwealth, state or territory legislation
A public environment review (PER) was assessed by the Western Australian EPA under s38 of the
. The project was considered at the EPA Board meeting of 18 April 2013 and
the report and recommendations was issued by the EPA in July 2013. Draft conditions for the project have
been prepared.
During the preparation of the PER, consultation has been undertaken with the local community and relevant
stakeholders. The issues raised during the consultation have been considered in the preparation of the PER.
Consultation activities undertaken have included:
" project briefings to government agencies and authorities
" community information session held in Bunbury in September 2011 and December 2012
" establishment of a project website
" public review of the PER from Wednesday 21 November 2012 to Wednesday 16 January 2013
" preparation of a submissions report on the comments received during the public review period.
Consultation will continue to occur prior to and during construction works.
Details of the OEPA assessing officer is:

Matt Spence
Environmental Officer
Office of Environmental Protection Agency
08 6145 0819
Matt.spence@epa.gov.au
Copies of the PER and all the technical reports can be found via the Project website.
http://www.griffincoal.com.au/operationlibrary.html
As discussed in Section 2.4, a Sea Dumping Permit for the disposal of the dredged material has been submitted
to DEC.
2.6 Public consultation (including with Indigenous stakeholders)
Public consultation has been undertaken as described in Section 2.5.

A copy of the submissions report prepared following the conclusion of the PER public review period has been
attached as a summary of the consultation undertaken and the issues raised (Attachment 2).
2.7 A staged development or component of a larger project
This development is currently being considered in the context of the larger Bunbury Port Inner Harbour
Structure plan which is currently being assessed in parallel process with the Western Australia EPA.
An EPBC Act Protected Matters Report was generated on 1 May 2014. The Report was generated for a radius
of 10 km from the centre of the proposed action and is included as Attachment 3.
3.1 (a) World Heritage Properties
Description
There are no known World Heritage properties at or surrounding the proposed project location.
Nature and extent of likely impact
Not applicable
3.1 (b) National Heritage Places

Description
There are no known National Heritage Places at or surrounding the proposed project location.
Not applicable
3.1 (c) Wetlands of International Importance (declared Ramsar wetlands)

Description
There are no known Wetlands of International Importance at or surrounding the proposed project location.
Not applicable
10
3.1 (d) Listed threatened species and ecological communities

Description
There are 52 listed threatened species identified in the Protected Matters Report and these are detailed in
Attachments 4, 5 & 6. Of the 52 species identified, two are known to occur, four are likely to occur and a further
four possibly occur in the area covered by the Protected Matters Report:
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
(Baudins Black Cockatoo) known to occur.

(Carnabys Black Cockatoo) known to occur.
(blue whale) likely to occur.
(southern right whale) likely to occur.
(humpback whale) likely to occur.
(loggerhead turtle) likely to occur.
(green turtle) possibly occurs.
(Australian sea-lion) possibly occurs.
(shy albatross) possibly occurs.
(Australiasian Bittern) possibly occurs
(Western Ringtail) possibly occurs.
Additional information for each of these species is included in Section 3.3. of this Referral.
Two threatened ecological communities were identified in the EPBC search, neither community was recorded
during the flora surveys undertaken on the site (Refer to Attachment 4).
The assessment of the nature and extent of likely impacts of the proposed development on the listed threatened
species that are likely to occur, or possibly occur, is informed by the
.
BIRDS
The site is within the modelled range of all three threat-listed black-cockatoos known to occur in the Swan
Coastal Plains, but only Baudins and Carnabys Black-Cockatoos have been confirmed as using the site for nonbreeding season foraging (i.e. the Forest Red-tailed Black-Cockatoo
was not identified on site,
nor was there suitable habitat for the species).
During a site inspection in August 2011, a mixed flock of Baudins and Carnabys Black Cockatoos (~6 birds in
total) were observed foraging on galls in an
thicket in the extreme SE corner of the site. There is
no breeding habitat (large hollow-bearing Eucalyptus trees) present on the site for black-cockatoos, and though
the birds may range up to 15km from their nest site when foraging, the nearest known breeding sites for Baudins
Black-Cockatoo are >20km south of Bunbury (SEWPaC 2011b).
Baudins Black-Cockatoo breeds in the eucalypt forests of the south-west, but in the non-breeding season
(Autumn-Winter) flocks migrate north to the central and northern parts of the Darling Scarp and the southern
Swan Coastal Plain, Perth hills and south coast (SEWPaC 2011b). Carnabys Black-Cockatoo breeds in the
wheatbelt and some locations along the south and west coasts, and in the non-breeding season (late SummerAutumn-Winter) move towards the coast (SEWPaC 2011b). During the non-breeding period, birds assemble into
flocks (sometimes mixed flocks of the two species) and move through the landscape searching for food and
water.
11
Table 3 Application of the Matters of National Environmental Significance Significant Impact

Guidelines 1.1 to the Baudins Black Cockatoo.
Impact Criteria
Lead to a long-term decrease in
the size of a population
Significant
Impact Likely
(Y/N)
N
Reduce the area of occupancy of

an important population
Fragment an existing population

into two or more populations
Adversely affect habitat critical to
the survival of a species
Disrupt the breeding cycle of an
important population
Modify, destroy, remove, isolate or

decrease the availability or quality
of habitat to the extent that the
species is likely to decline.
Result in invasive species that are
harmful to a vulnerable species
becoming established in the
vulnerable species habitat.
Introduce disease that may cause
the species to decline
Interfere substantially with the
recovery of the species.
N
N
Justification
The project is not of a nature and scale, or in a location, that will
lead to a long-term decrease in the size of any population of the
Baudins Black Cockatoo.
lead to a reduction in the area of occupancy of an important
population.
The project is not of a nature and scale that the population of the
Baudins Black Cockatoo will be fragmented.
The project does not disturb habitat critical for the survival of the
species.
There are no known breeding sites at or adjacent to the
proposed activity. The nearest known breeding sites are greater
than 20km south of Bunbury (SEWPaC 2011).
While the project involves disturbance of some foraging habitat,
it is less than 1hectare and is not considered high quality.
The project will not plausibly result in the introduction of invasive

species that may cause the population of Baudins Black
Cockatoo to decline.
The project will not plausibly introduce disease that may cause
the population of the Baudins Black Cockatoo to decline.
The project is not at a location, or of a nature or scale that the
recovery of the Baudins Black Cockatoo will be compromised.

Guidelines 1.1 to the Carnabys Black Cockatoo.
Impact Criteria
Significant
Impact Likely
(Y/N)
N


Modify, destroy, remove, isolate
or decrease the availability or
quality of habitat to the extent
that the species is likely to decline.
N
N
N
Justification
Carnabys Black Cockatoo.
population.
The project is not of a nature and scale that the population of
Carnabys Black Cockatoo will be fragmented.
species.
There are no known breeding colonies at or adjacent to the
proposed development location.
While the project involves disturbance of some foraging habitat,
it is less than 1hectare likely to be utilised during the non
breeding season and is not considered high quality.
species that may cause the population of the Carnabys Black
Cockatoo to decline.
12

N
N
the population of the Carnabys Black Cockatoo to decline.
recovery of the Carnabys Black Cockatoo will be compromised.
The shy Albatross is endemic to Australia and ranges over all Australian coastal waters below 25 S. It is most
commonly observed over the shelf waters around Tasmania and southeastern Australia. Most adult Shy
Albatrosses remain in the waters off southeast Australia all year round, and seldom venture more than 600km
from the breeding colony. Breeding occurs on Albatross Island, Bass Strait, and Mewstone and Pedra Branca, off
southern Tasmania. No Shy Albatrosses breed outside of the Australian Fishing Zone (AFZ), however, they do
disperse to areas outside of the AFZ, with immature shy Albatross migrating as far as South Africa.
Guidelines 1.1 to the Shy Albatross.
Impact Criteria
Significant
Impact Likely
(Y/N)
N


N
N
N
N
Justification
Shy Albatross.
population.
The project is not of a nature and scale that the population of Shy
Albatross will be fragmented.
species.
While the project involves disturbance of habitat, the habitat to
be disturbed does not represent habitat that is likely to be used
by individual Shy Albatross.

species that may cause the population of the Shy Albatross to
decline.
the population of the Shy Albatross to decline.
recovery of the Shy Albatross will be compromised.
In Australia, the Australasian Bittern occurs in terrestrial wetlands and estuarine habitats, mainly in the temperate
southeast and southwest. It favours wetlands with tall dense vegetation, where it forages in still, shallow water
up to 0.3 m deep, often at the edges of pools or waterways, or from platforms or mats of vegetation over deep
water. It favours permanent and seasonal freshwater habitats, particularly those dominated by sedges, rushes
and/or reeds growing over muddy substrates (SEWPaC 2011a). Suitable, though marginal, habitat (saltmarsh,
aquatic herbfield and reed beds) is present in the Preston River estuary along the eastern edge of the study area.
There are few known sites for this species between Perth and Busselton, and few records since the 1960s in the
region.
During targeted surveys during January 2012, no Australasian Bitterns were recorded.
13

Guidelines 1.1 to the Australasian Bittern.
Impact Criteria
Significant
Impact Likely
(Y/N)
N


N
N
N
N
Justification
Australasian Bittern.
population.
The project is not of a nature and scale that the population of shy
albatross will be fragmented.
species.
There are no known breeding sites at or adjacent to the
proposed activity.
The proposed action is unlikely to modify, destroy, remove,
isolate or decrease the availability or quality of habitat to cause
the species to decline.

species that may cause the population of Australasian Bittern to
decline.
the population of the Australasian Bittern to decline.
recovery of the of Australasian Bittern will be compromised.
WHALES
A range of anthropogenic activities have the potential to degrade habitat important to the survival of whales, or
impact whales directly. These activities may degrade habitat by operating at times that coincide with the presence
of whales, or they may occur when whales are absent, but degrade habitat suitability on a permanent or semipermanent basis. These activities may include:
"
"
"
"
"
"
changing water quality and pollution (e.g. runoff from land based agriculture, oil spills, outputs from
aquaculture)
acoustic disturbance (e.g. commercial and recreational vessel noise, and seismic survey activity)
changes to water flow regimes causing extensive sedimentation or erosion or altered currents in near shore
habitat (e.g. canals and dredging).
entanglement (e.g. in marine debris, fishing and aquaculture equipment).
built structures that impact upon habitat availability and/or use (e.g. marinas, wharves, aquaculture
installations, mining or drilling infrastructure)
physical injury and death from ship strike
It is not considered plausible that the proposed project will lead to pollution or changes in water quality that will
affect whales. While dredging is proposed as part of this project, dredging is in the Inner Harbour only which is
not utilised by whales. The see disposal site has been chosen so flow regimes are not altered (refer to Sea
Dumping Permit submitted to DEC). The proposed project is not an aquaculture or fishing activity and will not
introduce any marine debris into the environment.
With respect to acoustic pollution, the proposed project does not involve seismic survey activity, however
additional vessel noise will be introduced as a result of additional ship movements to and from the loading and
berthing facility. The area of the proposed project is an existing Port Facility and as such acoustic disturbance is
already present. In terms of cumulative impacts, acoustic impacts are not cumulative in magnitude, but additional
14
shipping movements will increase the frequency of disturbance. Whether whales are more likely to habituate to
an acoustic disturbance or avoid an area if the frequency of disturbance increases is unknown. This disturbance is
only relevant during the periods that whales are present. The piling method proposed for this action has been
designed to take into consideration the sensitive marine environment and no hammer piling will be undertaken.
The built structures themselves are within the confines of the Inner Harbour itself and as such they are not in
habitat utilised by any whales. Physical injury from ship strikes is rare in Australia, although is known to occur.
Overall, it is concluded that the impacts of the proposed project as described, will not significantly impact the blue
whale, humpback whale or southern right whale. This conclusion is based on assessment of the proposed project
against
. (Table 7 to 9) and
the Marine Fauna Studies undertaken (Attachment 6)
Within Geographe Bay, Blue Whales have been observed in the southern section of the shallow bay adjacent to
Cape Naturaliste which is approximately 60 kilometres to the south west of the proposed action.
Guidelines 1.1 to the Blue Whale
Impact Criteria
Significant
Justification
Impact Likely
(Y/N)
N
lead to a long-term decrease in the population of blue whales.
N
The blue whale's Australian area of occupancy extends to all
the species
Australian oceanic areas. However, there are key feeding areas
(the Bonney Upwelling, the Perth Canyon and the Duntroon
Basin) that could be considered critical areas for the survival of
this species. The cumulative area of these key sites is
approximately 29,300 km. The proposed project will not directly
or indirectly impact. The spatial scale of the project is
insignificant with respect to the area of occupancy of the species.
N
blue whales will be fragmented.
N
While the project involves disturbance of habitat, the project is
remote from areas that are considered key habitat the Perth
Canyon, the Bonney Upwelling (South Australia/Victoria) and
Duntroon Basin (South Australia). Blue whales also prefer
offshore waters rather than nearshore and/or enclosed waters
Disrupt the breeding cycle of a
N
There are no known breeding grounds for blue whales in
population
Australia, and the project is not of a nature or scale that
migration to and from breeding grounds will be measurably
affected.
Modify, destroy, remove, isolate or N
During the construction phase, the project may affect indirectly
habitat that is utilised by blue whales if sea dumping of dredge
spoil is the required option. The spatial scale of the project is
insignificant with respect to the area of habitat for the species.
Nonetheless, identification of any at sea spoil disposal options
will include detailed consideration of potential habitat used by
the blue whale.
N
harmful to a critically endangered
species that may cause the population of blue whales to decline.
or endangered species becoming
established in the endangered or
critically endangered species
habitat.
N
the population of blue whales to decline.
Interfere with the recovery of the
N
species.
recovery of blue whales will be compromised.
15
Humpback Whales are known to occur in the wider Project area within Geographe Bay. Their northbound
migration takes them up the Western Australian coast between mid-June and mid- July while their return
southbound migration occurs during September and October. Further information on the Humpback Whale and
their migratory pathways in the vicinity of Geographe Bay is shown in Attachment 6.
Guidelines 1.1 to the Humpback Whale
Impact Criteria
Significant
Impact Likely
(Y/N)
N




N
N
N
N
Justification
lead to a long-term decrease in the size of any population of
Humpback Whales.
The Western Australia Humpback Whale population extends
along the entire west coast and into the southern ocean. The
spatial scale of the project is insignificant with respect to the area
of occupancy of the species.
Humpback Whales will be fragmented.
remote from breeding and calving areas.
In Western Australia, the key breeding and calving ground is off
the Kimberley Coast. The project is not of a nature or scale that
migration to and from breeding grounds will be measurably
affected.
During the construction phase, the project may affect indirectly
habitat that is utilised by Humpback Whales during their
migration. The project is however in a location that is not known
to be directly used by Humpback Whales. It is not considered
plausible that the scale of the habitat disturbance will lead to the
species decline.
species that may cause the population of Humpback Whales to
decline.
the population of Humpback Whales to decline.
recovery of Humpback Whales will be compromised.
Southern Right Whales only occur within Geographe Bay in low densities with only ten and four pods sighted in
Geographe Bay in 2007 and 2008 respectively (Gedamke
2008).
Guidelines 1.1 to the Southern Right Whale
Impact Criteria
Significant
Impact Likely
(Y/N)
N

the species
Justification
The project is not at a nature or scale that could plausibly lead
to a long-term decrease in the size of any population of the
Southern Right Whale.
Southern Right Whales are distributed in the southern
hemisphere generally between 20S and 60S. The spatial scale
of the project is insignificant with respect to the area of
occupancy of the species.
The proposed activity does not feasibly create a barrier to
16

population
habitat.
species.
N
N
N
N
N
movement either directly or indirectly.

The habitat at and adjacent to the proposed development
location is not critical habitat for the species.
Within their broader geographic range, Southern Right Whales
in Australia concentrate in certain areas to breed. None of
these areas are at or adjacent to the proposed project location.
remote from breeding and calving areas. The spatial scale of
the project is insignificant with respect to the area of
The project will not plausibly result in the introduction of
invasive species that may cause the population of Southern
Right Whales to decline.
the population of southern right whales to decline.
recovery of southern right whales will be compromised.
MARINE TURTLES
Impacts on marine turtles can arise at nesting beaches and habitat directly adjacent to these nesting beaches,
and in areas used for foraging. Marine turtles nest in sub-tropical and tropical environments and as such there are
no nesting habitats for marine turtles in the Bunbury region. Potential impacts on marine turtle nesting habitat
will not be considered.
While both green and loggerhead turtles may be present in the Bunbury region, the region is not identified as an
important foraging area for either species. Important foraging and resting areas for marine turtles in Western
Australia include Shark Bay, Exmouth Gulf and the Pilbara and Kimberley coasts to the Northern Territory border.
Potential impacts on marine turtles in foraging and resting areas include:
"
"
"
Bycatch in fisheries.
Direct mortality from dredging.
Coastal infrastructure and development (including industrial, residential and tourism development).
The first potential impact is not relevant to the current proposal. Mortality from dredging operations is known
from Queensland, particularly in the regions where the abundance of marine turtles is high (for example adjacent
to major rookeries) (Greenland et al., 2001). Given the very low abundance of turtles in the region of the
proposed project compared to other locations where mortalities are recorded, the chance of interaction between
dredging equipment and marine turtles in the current instance is extremely unlikely. Nonetheless, should it be
deemed necessary a suite of operational management strategies can be applied to mitigate risk and these are
documented in Section 4 of this Referral.
Overall, it is concluded that the impacts of the proposed project as described, will not significantly impact the
green or loggerhead turtles. This conclusion is based on assessment of the proposed project against
. (Tables 10 and 11)
Guidelines 1.1 to the Loggerhead Turtle
Impact Criteria
Significant
Impact Likely
(Y/N)
N
N
Justification
The project is not at a nature or scale that could plausibly lead
to a long-term decrease in the size of a population of the
Loggerhead Turtle
The loggerhead turtle has a global distribution throughout
17
the species

population

habitat.


species.
tropical, sub-tropical and temperate waters. The spatial scale of

the project is insignificant with respect to the area of
The proposed activity does not feasibly create a barrier to
movement either directly or indirectly.
Based on the current state of knowledge, no Biologically
Important Areas (BIA) have been identified for the loggerhead
turtle in the region. Important foraging and resting areas for
marine turtles in Western Australia include Shark Bay, Exmouth
Gulf and the Pilbara and Kimberley coasts to the Northern
Territory border.
There is no nesting of Loggerhead Turtles in the region.
While the project will lead to disturbance of sub-tidal marine
habitat, the project is not of a scale that will decrease the
availability or quality of habitat to the extent that the species is
likely to decline. Based on the current state of knowledge, no
Biologically Important Areas (BIA) have been identified for the
Loggerhead Turtle in the region.
Port projects including those of a larger scale, and in areas
adjacent to nesting areas where the abundance of loggerhead
turtles is relatively high (e.g. central Queensland), have not
been implicated in the introduction of invasive species that are
harmful to a species. The project will not plausibly result in the
introduction of invasive species that may cause the population
of green turtles to decline.
turtles is relatively high (e.g. central Queensland), have not
been implicated in the introduction of disease. The project will
not plausibly introduce disease that may cause the population
of green turtles to decline.
recovery of loggerhead turtles will be compromised.

Guidelines 1.1 to the Green Turtle
Impact Criteria
Significant
Impact Likely
(Y/N)
N


N
N
Justification
Green Turtles.
Green Turtles can migrate more than 2600 km between their
feeding and nesting grounds.
Green Turtles will be fragmented.
species. Based on the current state of knowledge, no Biologically
Important Areas (BIA) have been identified for the green turtle in
the region.
There is no nesting habitat for Green Turtles in the region.
While the project will lead to disturbance of sub-tidal marine
habitat, the project is not of a scale that decreases the availability
or quality of habitat to the extent that the species is likely to
decline. Based on the current state of knowledge, no Biologically
18



Important Areas (BIA) have been identified for the green turtle in
the region.
adjacent to nesting areas where the abundance of green turtles is
relatively high (e.g. Queensland), have not been implicated in the
introduction of invasive species that are harmful to a species. The
project will not plausibly result in the introduction of invasive
species that may cause the population of Green Turtles to
decline.
turtles is relatively high (e.g. Queensland). The project will not
plausibly introduce disease that may cause the population of
Green Turtles to decline.
recovery of Green Turtles will be compromised.
PINNIPEDS
The Australian sea-lion is the only pinniped species to be considered here. The main threat to the Australian Sealion is mortality due to interactions with fisheries, aquaculture and entanglement with marine debris. Overall, it is
concluded that the impacts of the proposed project as described, will not significantly impact the Australian sealion. This conclusion is based on assessment of the proposed project against
. (Table 12).
Guidelines 1.1 to the Australian Sea-Lion.
Impact Criteria
Significant
Impact Likely
(Y/N)
N


N
N
N
Justification
Australian Sea Lions.
While an estimate of the exact area of occupancy was not
identified, it is known that the species extends in Western
Australia from the Houtman Abrohlhos Islands south and then
east into South Australia where most of the population is found.
Given this distribution and the identification of key areas for the
species well remote from the proposed project location, it is not
considered plausible that the proposed project will reduce the
area of occupancy.
Australian Sea Lion will be fragmented.
species.
While the project involves disturbance of habitat, the habitat to
be disturbed does not represent habitat that is likely to be used
regularly by individual Australian sea lions.

species that may cause the population of the Australian sea-lion
to decline.
19

the population of the Australian sea-lion to decline.

recovery of the Australian sea-lion will be compromised.
TERRESTRIAL MAMMALS
The Peppermint
has been planted on the site which is a known key element for the Western
Ringtail and the site is within the broadly known range of the species. Field surveys did not detect any indirect
signs (dreys, scats) that the species is present on the site. . Overall, it is concluded that the impacts of the
proposed project as described, will not significantly impact the Western Ringtail Possum. This conclusion is based
on assessment of the proposed project against
. (Table 13) and Attachment 5.
Guidelines 1.1 to the Western Ringtail Possum
Impact Criteria
Significant
Impact Likely
(Y/N)
N


N
N
Justification
Western Ringtail Possum.
population.
The will not lead to the fragmentation of any existing populations
of the Western Ringtail Possum.
species.
The site does not contain any suitable breeding habitat.
No quality habitat for the Western Ringtail Possum will be

impacted on as a result of the proposed action.

species that may cause the population of the Western Ringtail
Possum to decline.
the population of the Western Ringtail Possum to decline.
recovery of the Western Ringtail Possum will be compromised.
20
3.1 (e) Listed migratory species

Description
There are 35 listed migratory species identified in the EPBC search and these are detailed in Attachment 4. Of the
species that are listed as migratory, four have been recorded at the site or at adjacent sites, four is likely to occur
and one possibly occurs in the area covered by the EPBC search:
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
Apus pacificus (fork-tailed swift) likely to occur (flyover only).

Merops ornatus (rainbow bee-eater) known to occur.
Actitis hypoleucos (common sandpiper) known to occur
Hydroprogne caspia (Caspian Tern) known to occur
Halliaeetus leuogaster (White-bellied Sea- Eagle) known to occur
Ardea alba (Great Egret) known to occur
(blue whale) likely to occur.
(southern right whale) likely to occur.
(humpback whale) likely to occur.
Additional information is included in Attachment 5 (Level 2 Surveys Waterbirds and Western Ringtail; Parsons
Brinckerhoff 2012) and Section 3.1 (d).
An action is likely to have a significant impact on a migratory species if there is a real chance or
possibility that it will:
"
"
"
substantially modify (including by fragmenting, altering fire regimes, altering nutrient cycles or altering
hydrological cycles), destroy or isolate an area of important habitat1 for a migratory species
result in an invasive species that is harmful to the migratory species becoming established in an area of
important habitat for the migratory species, or
seriously disrupt the lifecycle (breeding, feeding, migration or resting behaviour) of an ecologically
significant proportion of the population of a migratory species.
In the case of the migratory species known or likely to occur within the site our adjacent areas, it is unlikely that
the project will lead to the significant disruption of the lifecycle of an ecologically significant proportion of the
population of a migratory species, or result in an invasive species that is harmful to the migratory species
becoming established in an area of important habitat for the migratory species.
In Australia, a number of sites have been rated for their significance for shorebirds, but none of these sites occur
within or immediately adjacent to the study area. In addition to this, in the national inventory of known high tide
roosts, or targeted national wader survey sites, no sites occur within or immediately adjacent to the site.
Refer to Attachment 5 (Level 2 Surveys Waterbirds and Western Ringtail; Parsons Brinckerhoff 2012) for further
information on the likely impact.
An area of important habitat for a migratory species is: a) habitat utilised by a migratory species occasionally or
periodically within a region that supports an ecologically significant proportion of the population of the species, and/or
b) habitat that is of critical importance to the species at particular life-cycle stages, and/or c) habitat utilised by a
migratory species which is at the limit of the species range, and/or d) habitat within an area where the species is
declining.
21
3.1 (f) Commonwealth marine area

(If the action is in the Commonwealth marine area, complete 3.2(c) instead. This section is for actions taken outside the
Commonwealth marine area that may have impacts on that area.)
Description
The proposed action includes disposal of dredged material within a Commonwealth marine area. This is discussed
in Section 3.2 (c).
Refer to Section 3.2 (c)
3.1 (g) Commonwealth land

(If the action is on Commonwealth land, complete 3.2(d) instead. This section is for actions taken outside Commonwealth
land that may have impacts on that land.)
Description
There are no Commonwealth lands to be disturbed or developed as part of the proposed project. Further no
indirect impacts on Commonwealth land are plausible.
Not applicable
3.1 (h) The Great Barrier Reef Marine Park

Description
The proposed action is not located in or near the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park.
Not applicable
3.1 (i) A water resource, in relation to coal seam gas development and large coal mining development
Description
The proposed action is not for coal seam gas or a large coal mine.
Not applicable
22
3.2 (a)
Is the proposed action a nuclear action?
No
Yes (provide details below)
If yes, nature & extent of likely impact on the whole environment
3.2 (b)
Is the proposed action to be taken by the

Commonwealth or a Commonwealth
agency?
No
If yes, nature & extent of likely impact on the whole environment
3.2 (c)
Is the proposed action to be taken in a

Commonwealth marine area?
No
If yes, nature & extent of likely impact on the whole environment (in addition to 3.1(f))
The proposed action includes a maximum of 1.9 million cubic metres to be disposed of within a
Commonwealth marine area.
This impact has been assessed in an application for a Sea Dumping Permit which has been provided to the
Department of Environment in March 2013. Please refer to this application for a detailed assessment of the
nature and extent of any likely impacts.
3.2 (d)
Is the proposed action to be taken on

Commonwealth land?
No
If yes, nature & extent of likely impact on the whole environment (in addition to 3.1(g))
3.2 (e)
Is the proposed action to be taken in the

Great Barrier Reef Marine Park?
No
If yes, nature & extent of likely impact on the whole environment (in addition to 3.1(h))
3.3 (a) Flora and fauna
This section discusses flora and fauna listed under the EPBC Act as well as additional species (where relevant).
Additional information is presented in Attachments 4, 5 & 6 which includes the following flora and fauna
reports which were undertaken for the PER Assessment:
"
"
"
Parsons Brinckerhoff (November 2012) Development of Berth 14A at Bunbury Port: Flora and Fauna
Assessment.
Parsons Brinckerhoff (November 2012) Level 2 Surveys. Waterbirds and Western Ringtail, Bunbury Port,
Western Australia.
Wave Solutions (April 2012) Marine fauna studies. Bunbury Port Berth 14 Expansion and Coal Storage
and Loading facility (Assessment No. 1886)
23
FLORA
The vegetation of the site is predominately exotic however does include some small areas of degraded remnant
or pioneering native vegetation. There is very little native vegetation within the boundaries of the study area
and most of what remains is extensively degraded by weed evasion.
None of the vegetation on the site is listed under the EPBC Act as a Threatened Ecological Community or
Threatened Species.
Further information on the flora of the study site is discussed in sections 3.3 (c) and 3.3 (e) of this Referral.
FAUNA
Terrestrial fauna
A total of 62 bird species, three mammals and two frog species were recorded in the study area during the
August 2011 survey of the site (Refer to Attachment 4). The field surveys also confirmed the presence of the
EPBC listed Baudins Black Cockatoo and Carnabys Black Cockatoo.
Key species have briefly described below but are detailed further in Attachments 4,5 & 6.
The site is within the modelled range of all three threat-listed black-cockatoos known to occur in the Swan
Coastal Plains, but only Baudins and Carnabys Black-Cockatoos have been confirmed as using the site for nonbreeding season foraging (i.e. the Forest Red-tailed Black-Cockatoo
was not identified on
site, nor was there suitable habitat for the species).
During a site inspection in August 2011, a mixed flock of Baudins and Carnabys Black-Cockatoos (~6 birds in
total) were observed foraging on galls in an
thicket in the extreme SE corner of the site. There is
no breeding habitat (large hollow-bearing Eucalyptus trees) present on the site for black-cockatoos, and
though the birds may range up to 15km from their nest site when foraging, the nearest known breeding sites
for Baudins Black-Cockatoo are >20km south of Bunbury (SEWPaC 2011b).
Baudins Black-Cockatoo breeds in the eucalypt forests of the south-west, but in the non-breeding season
(Autumn-Winter) flocks migrate north to the central and northern parts of the Darling Scarp and the southern
Swan Coastal Plain, Perth hills and south coast (SEWPaC 2011b). Carnabys Black-Cockatoo breeds in the
wheatbelt and some locations along the south and west coasts, and in the non-breeding season (late
Summer-Autumn-Winter) move towards the coast (SEWPaC 2011b). During the non-breeding period, birds
assemble into flocks (sometimes mixed flocks of the two species) and move through the landscape searching
for food and water.
No known remnant habitat for the Western Ringtail is present within the study area. Additionally, there were
also no obvious signs (dreys, scats) found during the August 2011 site visit (Parsons Brinckerhoff 2012a;
Attachment 5). However, the site features extensive plantings of Peppermint
, a key element
of known Western Ringtail habitat, and the site is within the broadly known range of the species (Leschenault
Peninsula and the Collie River form the northern boundary) (SEWPaC 2011). Consequently, it was judged that
there may be a small likelihood that Western Ringtail may have reached the site from nearby natural
populations, and that it would be prudent to conduct two simple spotlight surveys of suitable habitat on site to
establish its presence or absence.
The combination of lack of evidence of possums from spotlighting surveys and the lack of obvious indirect
signs (dreys, scats) indicates that it is unlikely that this species occurs within the Berth 14A study area.
24
In Australia, the Australasian Bittern

occurs in terrestrial wetlands and estuarine habitats,
mainly in the temperate southeast and southwest. It favours wetlands with tall dense vegetation, where it
forages in still, shallow water up to 0.3 m deep, often at the edges of pools or waterways, or from platforms or
mats of vegetation over deep water. It favours permanent and seasonal freshwater habitats, particularly those
dominated by sedges, rushes and/or reeds growing over muddy substrates (SEWPaC 2011a).
Suitable, though marginal, habitat (saltmarsh, aquatic herbfield and reed beds) is present in the Preston River
estuary along the eastern edge of the study area. There are few known sites for this species between Perth
and Busselton, and few records since the 1960s in the region.
Targeted waterbirds surveys in January 2012 did not record any signs of the Australasian Bittern.
Marine Fauna
The proposed action is located in an area that is utilised by many marine species including protected marine
megafauna such as dolphins, whales, pinnipeds, turtles, sharks and marine birds. A summary of these key
species is given below with a more detailed assessment identified provided in Attachment 6.
While not identified as a threatened or migratory species in the EPBC Protected Matters search, the town of
Bunbury has an established residential population of Bottlenose Dolphins (
). These dolphins
occur in Koombana Bay and are included in swim with the dolphin tours operated by the Bunbury dolphin
discovery centre. The dolphins usually spend their time in the area around the "Cut" (Arcangeli and Crosti,
2009).
The calving grounds for the Western Australian population of humpback whales are between Broome and the
Northern end of Camden Sound. Migration occurs along the Western Australian coast, with migration
bottlenecks where the majority of the humpback whale population passes within 30 km from the coast occur in
the area of Geraldton/Abrolhos Islands, and Point Cloats to North West Cape.
Resting areas are used by cow-calf pairs and attendant males during the southern migration (September and
October). These whales appear to use sheltered bays to opportunistically rest during migration to the feeding
grounds and include in Western Australia the following: Exmouth Gulf, Shark Bay, Geographe Bay, and waters
adjacent to the Houtman Abrolhos Islands.
Loggerhead turtle nest on beaches and use various marine habitats for foraging. In Australia, the loggerhead
Turtle occurs in the waters of coral and rocky reefs, seagrass beds and muddy bays throughout eastern,
northern and western Australia (Limpus et al. 1992). While nesting is concentrated in southern Queensland and
from Shark Bay to the North West Cape in Western Australia, foraging areas are more widely distributed.
Loggerhead Turtles choose a wide variety of tidal and sub-tidal habitat as feeding areas and individual animals
show fidelity to both their foraging and breeding areas (Limpus 2008). Loggerhead Turtles are carnivorous,
feeding primarily on benthic invertebrates in habitat ranging from nearshore to 55 metres (Plotkin
, 1993).
Loggerhead turtles are one of the most commonly sighted turtles south of Perth, with resident adult and large
sub adult turtles sometimes found (WA DEC, 2010).
Green Turtles are found in tropical and subtropical waters throughout the world. They usually remain within
the 20C isotherms, although individuals may also stray into temperate waters. Nesting occurs on beaches in
tropical and subtropical regions. Green Turtles spend their first five to ten years drifting on ocean currents.
During this pelagic (ocean-going) phase, they are often found in association with current lines and rafts of
25
algae such as the brown algae

. Once green turtles reach 30 to 40 cm curved carapace length, they
settle in shallow benthic foraging habitats such as tropical tidal and sub-tidal coral and rocky reef habitat or
inshore seagrass beds. Sub-tropical and tropical seagrass beds are generally recognised as the most important
foraging habitat (Brand-Gardner et al., 1999).
Australian Sea Lions are endemic to Australia and occur in coastal habitats, waters and islands offshore from
South Australia and Western Australia, however most of the population (86%) is found in South Australia with
the remainder found in Western Australia.
Australian Sea Lions feed on the continental shelf in the region, most commonly in depths of 20 - 100 m. The
species hauls out (or rests) and breeds on rocks and sandy beaches on the sheltered sides of islands,
although there are some small colonies on the Australian mainland.
The key breeding locations for the Australian sea-lion are all in South Australia and include: Dangerous Reef
and Lewis Island (Southern Eyre Peninsula), North and South Page islands, West Waldegrave and Olives
Islands (Western Eyre Peninsula), Seal Bay (Kangaroo Island) and Purdie Island (Nuyts Archipelago).
3.3 (b) Hydrology, including water flows
Offshore of SW Australia, the currents are dominated by the Leeuwin Current. The Leeuwin Current is a density
driven current running shore parallel from the NE towards the SW in offshore waters with depths greater than
50 m. Inshore, in shallower water, the currents follow the winds, which are often shore parallel, at close to
3% of the wind speed. During summer the dominant wind direction is south to south-west, and its persistence
forms what is now called the summer Cape Current. In winter the dominant wind direction is westerly, though
northerly winds frequently occur. In winter, winds are more variable with occasional calms and strong storm
winds.
During summer, differential heating and cooling across the coastline results in a land-sea breeze diurnal cycle
being superimposed on the regional pattern. Easterly winds of approximately 5ms-1 occur in morning and south
south-westerly winds of approximately 15ms-1 in afternoon and late evening.
The tides in the area are mixed with both diurnal and semi-diurnal components, forming a spring tide pattern,
with a spring range on the order of 80 cm. Tidal currents in the area are generally small, and currents are
dominated by the local winds.
A detailed hydrodynamic model has been completed for the project and presented in the PER. Generally, the
inner harbour of Bunbury Port, where dredging is to occur is considered a low dispersive environment. A full
copy of this report is provided on the proponents website.
http://www.griffincoal.com.au/operationlibrary.html
Surface water throughout the Project area drains into the Inner Harbour or a few small artificial wetlands on
site. Offsite surface water receptors include:
Koombana Bay Beach to the north, which is zoned as recreational land use, and is followed by the Indian
Ocean
"
the inner harbour to the south
"
Vittoria Bay to the east
Pelican Point wetlands approximately 1.3 km
"
3.3 (c) Soil and Vegetation characteristics
The soils within the vicinity of the berth are highly altered from the diversion of the Preston River in 1968/9
and land reclamation when the inner harbour was constructed.
Geological information obtained from the Geological Survey of Western Australia (GSWA) 1:50,000 Urban
Geology Series Map, Bunbury-Burekup indicate Lots 1, 2, 428 and 429 are located within coastal dune
formations of calcareous quartz Safety Bay Sand, overlying Tamala Limestone. The foreshore areas of the
Project area, adjacent to the water's edge, have been mapped as alluvial deposited Safety Bay Sands. Part of
26
Lots 2 and 963 are predominately reclaimed estuary, and as such, the filling of some areas has occurred using
dredge spoil and bottom ash.
The typical sediment encountered onsite is summarised in the Table 14.
Source: Coffey Environments (2009)

The area in which dredging is to occur and the lay down area for the Berth 14 Facility comprises sand and silty
sand. The surface sediments of Koombana Bay are almost exclusively silty mud. The future Berth 14 channel
contains sediment that has a high risk of forming acid sulphate soils (ASS). The land adjacent to the berth
where the material handling facility is proposed to be located has a low risk of forming ASS. On site
investigations have been undertaken for Lot 1, and parts of Lot 2 and 3. The investigation found potential ASS
from 7 10 mBGL, 1 to 4 metres in thickness, 3.8 7 metres below the water table. Minimal potential ASS was
detected in surface soils. Further information is provided in the Sea Dumping Permit which has been submitted
to the Department of Environment.
There is very little native vegetation within the boundaries of the site, the vegetation which does exist is
extensively degraded. The little remnant native vegetation falls broadly into two groups:
"
Draft Scrub (
ssp.
) over weeds Coastal
shrublannds on shallow sands.
"
Thickets of
and
Acacia shrublands on taller dunes.
The vegetation characteristics are further described above in Sections 3.1(d) and 3.3 (a) and detailed in
Attachment 4.
3.3 (d) Outstanding natural features
There are no outstanding natural features at or directly adjacent to the proposed project.
3.3 (e) Remnant native vegetation
There is very little remnant native vegetation to be impacted by the proposed action. Less than 2ha of native
vegetation is likely to be impacted and this is either highly disturbed or planted.
Further information on the remnant native vegetation of the site is described in Attachment 4.
3.3 (f) Gradient (or depth range if action is to be taken in a marine area)
The continental shelf off Bunbury is relatively wide and gently sloping. The mean water depth in Koombana
Bay is 7 metres with microtidal tides (maximum range 1.3 metres). There are natural features in Koombana
Bay that provide significant bathymetric relief.
The location of the proposed dredge material placement is located at approximately - 22 m CD and is
approximately 13 km northwest of proposed Berth 14A (Refer to Attachment 1 for figures).
3.3 (g) Current state of the environment
27
The landscape at and surrounding the Proposal area has been extensively altered by port and industrial
activities, including the clearing of native vegetation, the alteration of natural landform and native soil profile,
and the construction of the Inner Harbour with associated previous dredging activities.
3.3 (h) Commonwealth Heritage Places or other places recognised as having heritage values
Not applicable
3.3 (i) Indigenous heritage values
No known Indigenous heritage values will be impacted on by the proposed action. To the east of the site, the
Preston River has been identified as a Registered Site of Aboriginal significance under the WA Department of
Aboriginal Affairs (DAA) database however this will not be impacted on by the proposed action.
3.3 (j) Other important or unique values of the environment
The project is adjacent to the Leschenault Estuary system which has high environmental and cultural heritage
values. This area is not to be disturbed by the proposed project, and no indirect impacts on the Leschenault
Estuary system will occur.
3.3 (k) Tenure of the action area (eg freehold, leasehold)
Leasehold from Bunbury Port Authority.

3.3 (l) Existing land/marine uses of area
The Bunbury Port is currently a busy operating facility with more than 13 million tonnes handled annually.
Currently, the main exports through the Port are alumina, woodchips and mineral sands, with caustic soda the
chief import. Bunbury Port is a feature of the diverse Bunbury cityscape and has developed alongside other
changes to the landscape. The Port environment is characterised by storage sheds, loading equipment and
ships and is visible from many points around the city.
The Project area has been identified in the IHSP (BPA 2009) which identifies the Project area for the following
indicative land uses general industry (Coal storage), high impact uses and .waterway.
Greater Bunbury Region Scheme
3.3 (m) Any proposed land/marine uses of area
The proposed land and marine uses of the area is for port infrastructure to facilitate the loading of ships for the
export of bulk material. This proposed use is consistent with the current zoning scheme, consistent with
surrounding uses both historic and current.
28
A draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP) (refer to Attachment 7) has been prepared
containing management and mitigation methods associated with the dredging and construction activities near
the marine environment. Once a dredging contractor is engaged this draft DSDMP will be finalised.
The DSDMP includes all relevant issues, a specific focus is the mitigation of potential impacts to dolphins in the
Inner Harbour. A key consideration for mitigation already identified is utilising the winter months for these high
impact activities which represents the period when dolphins are least abundant in the Inner Harbour.
Impacts to the marine water quality from the development of the Project are associated with the dredging and
piling activities required for the construction of the facility. Reduced water quality from dredging and dredge
material placement operations can potentially affect benthic primary producers in the zone of impact through
increased turbidity, reduced light attenuation and sedimentation.
Environmental monitoring and management response strategies to address these issues are summarised below
and further detailed within Attachment 7:
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
Dredge plume extent:

"
validation of hydrodynamic modelling at the commencement of dredging using real data.
"
monitoring of dredge plume throughout the dredging program through data loggers and mobile
monitoring/mapping of dredge plume with Conductivity Temperature Depth (CTD) and
Nephelometric Turbidity Units (NTU) casts.
Underwater noise:
" a underwater noise monitoring implementation plan at the commencement of rock fracturing (if
required)
" visual inspection of marine mammals within the potential zone of noise influence for piling
operations
" monitoring program during any rock fracturing activities
Turbidity from dredge plumes:
" establishment since December 2011 of three data loggers to collect water quality information
" collection of time series turbidity data during dredging
" monitoring of turbidity at spot sampling stations with CTD casts and water samples for metal
analysis to be collected at the same time
" reports prepared every two weeks for submission to the regulator and TACC.
Water and sediment quality:
" validation of model during commencement of dredging
" water and sediment quality surveys at sites within Koombana Bay at four weekly intervals during
construction.
Bottlenose Dolphin population:
" passive acoustic baseline monitoring program
" visual monitoring before and after dredging.
Visual monitoring of marine turtles by trained observer having experience in marine fauna or a qualified
Marine Mammal Observer (MMO) during dredging
Marine megafauna during rock fracturing (if required):
" visual monitoring from a team of land and boat based observers
" passive acoustic monitoring
Coastal benthic habitats:
" baseline coverage of benthic communities
" review of water and sediment monitoring program which includes stations near benthic habitat
adjacent to the Cut in Koombana Bay.
Ocean placement of dredge material:
" validation of the extent of the dredge plume during the early stages of placement to ensure
predictions are accurate
" vessel logs detailing disposal of dredge material to be retained by dredging contractor
" sonar observations taken during placement activities to ensure material is evenly distributed across
the placement area
" placement of dredge material to be conducted by capping the mound with coarser grain material
29
following dredging and dredge material placement a characterisation of the bathymetry/biota of

dredge mound and surrounds determined using remote sensing methods.
Transit of Vessels
" Lanco to inspect dredging contractor operations
" weekly operations report to be provided to Lanco by the dredging contractor
Introduced marine pests (IMPs)
" vessel clearance for IMPs
" management of ballast water for vessels from international waters shall be managed in accordance
with the Quarantine Act 1908 and Quarantine Regulations 2000. Domestic vessels must obtain
approval from the Harbour Master prior to ballast water being discharged within port waters.
Waste management
Hazardous substances management
Emergency response
Maritime safety
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
A marine Sampling and Analysis Plan (SAP) for the dredge footprint has been prepared and approved by the
DSEWPaC (Wave Solutions 2012b).
A marine environmental management plan (MEMP) has been developed in close collaboration with BPA to
provide an auditable commitment to practical and achievable strategies and design standards for the
management of Berth 14A during the operation phase. The MEMP has identified environmental values (EVs),
environmental quality objectives (EQOs) and associated environmental levels of ecosystem protection (LEP)
identified by the EPA (2000) have been used as guidance for the environmental framework of the MEMP.
Bunbury Port has been an operational Port for many years. This PER has suggested an interim Moderate LEP
(Lanco management) (refer to Figure 1) for a 250 m radius around the operational area of the Project. An
interim moderate LEP (BPA management) has also been identified within the inner harbour. The identified LEPs
overlap due to use of the inner harbour by other port users however the management of this is under the
operational control of the Port.
The marine environmental performance objective for operation of Berth 14A has been divided into four key
areas, of which the following are relevant to marine environmental quality:
"
Operational discharges.
"
"
Spills and leaks

"
"
"
"
Maintenance activities.
"
"
30
The site of the proposed development is substantially weed invaded. Appropriate weed control measures will
be implemented to reduce the risk of spreading this species in accordance with the Western Australian
.
A draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP) (Attachment 7) has been prepared and will be
finalised and implemented for dredging works. The DSDMP has a significant focus on dolphins in the Inner
Harbour. The proponent has undertaken extensive consultation with the Dolphin Discovery Centre during the
environmental assessment process (from May 2011) which will continue during and after construction phase to
establish management measures for the protection of the dolphins population. These measures will be included
in the Construction Management Plan.
Currently, there are no specific project level measures proposed to mitigate the risk of ship strike.
The Australian Government is working on improving the management of ship strikes in its waters with
reference to actions identified in the United States guidance document for minimising the risk of ship strikes,
endorsed by the Marine Environment Protection Committee (MEPC) of the International Maritime Organisation
(IMO), at its meeting in July 2009. As a first step, the Australian Government is gathering information to assess
the risks and impacts of ship strikes on cetaceans in Australian waters to help to inform a National Ship Strike
Reduction Strategy. The proponent will assist with Strategy where requested.
The following management actions pertaining to invasive marine species (IMS) are proposed:
"
"
Vessel clearance to achieve clearance (of containing marine species of concern), all vessels and
equipment will undergo a risk assessment prior to mobilisation based on a format endorsed by the
Department of Fisheries (DoF). Risk assessments are required to be submitted to DoF at least 14 days
prior to departure for a determination of the risk level.
Ballast water management ballast water management for vessels from international waters shall be
managed in accordance with the Quarantine Act 1908 and Quarantine Regulations 2000; and AQIS
(2011) Australian Ballast Water Management Requirements.
Disturbance of ASS may be minimised or avoided through further investigations to delineate the occurrence of
ASS. Where disturbance of ASS is unavoidable (at depths >7 mBGL), an ASS Management Plan may be
required to manage earthworks and dewatering for dredging activities and the construction of deep footings.
No areas of know Indigenous Heritage will be impacted on by the Proposal however Lanco will continue to
liaise with the WA Department of Indigenous Affairs (DIA) during the preparation of construction
environmental management plan (CEMP) to include any management items should an unknown item be
identified during construction.
31
Identify whether or not you believe the action is a controlled action (ie. whether you think that significant impacts on the
matters protected under Part 3 of the EPBC Act are likely) and the reasons why.
No, complete section 5.2

Yes, complete section 5.3
The proposed project is not considered to be a controlled action as it is unlikely to have a significant impact on
any Matters of National Environmental Significance.
This conclusion is supported by information presented in sections 3 and 4 of this Referral.
Matters likely to be impacted

World Heritage values (sections 12 and 15A)
National Heritage places (sections 15B and 15C)
Wetlands of international importance (sections 16 and 17B)
Listed threatened species and communities (sections 18 and 18A)
Listed migratory species (sections 20 and 20A)
Protection of the environment from nuclear actions (sections 21 and 22A)
Commonwealth marine environment (sections 23 and 24A)
Great Barrier Reef Marine Park (sections 24B and 24C)
A water resource, in relation to coal seam gas development and large coal mining development
(sections 24D and 24E)
Protection of the environment from actions involving Commonwealth land (sections 26 and 27A)
Protection of the environment from Commonwealth actions (section 28)
Commonwealth Heritage places overseas (sections 27B and 27C)
32
NOTE: If a decision is made that a proposal needs approval under the EPBC Act, the Environment Minister will also decide
the assessment approach. The EPBC Regulations provide for the environmental history of the party proposing to take the
action to be taken into account when deciding the assessment approach.
Yes
6.1
Does the party taking the action have a satisfactory record of responsible
environmental management?
No
YES
Provide details
Lanco Resources Australia Pty Ltd has no record of environmental management in

Australia however Griffin Coal which is a wholly owned subsidiary operation has a
satisfactory record of responsible environmental management for operations in
Western Australia.
6.2
Has either (a) the party proposing to take the action, or (b) if a permit has been
applied for in relation to the action, the person making the application - ever been
subject to any proceedings under a Commonwealth, State or Territory law for the
protection of the environment or the conservation and sustainable use of natural
resources?
NO
If yes, provide details
6.3
If the party taking the action is a corporation, will the action be taken in accordance
with the corporations environmental policy and planning framework?
YES
33
If yes, provide details of environmental policy and planning framework
Lanco Resources Australia has focused HSE systems and polices in various construction
and related activities. These systems are implemented at all project sites. These HSE
procedures are documented exhaustively and implemented extensively in all projects.
The performance indicators for HSE are evaluated and monitored on quarterly basis.
The specific objectives of HSE at all project sites is as follows:
o
o
o
o
o
o
Successfully implement the HSE Policy.

Non-conformities related to System / Health, Safety & Environment in projects
shall be identified and corrected, with action aimed to prevent recurrences.
Achieve Quality Output with Safe, Environment friendly Activities.
The Safety & Health of all employees must receive prime consideration
throughout all phases of work
Safe guarding Environment must be aimed by addressing hazards and control
measures.
Ensuring Material, Equipment & Activity confirming to project specifications,
customer requirements, Applicable Drawings, Applicable, Ensure compliance
with all applicable laws, statutory requirements, codes of practices and
standards set forth by LITL.
In essence NO SAFETY NO WORK.
The Lanco Corporate Occupational Health, Safety & Environment Policy Statement is as
follows:
We are committed to safeguarding the Health and Safety of all our employees and
protect our Environment through:
" Institutionalising of HSE Management process, with HSE organisation
" Regularly communicating, educating and imparting training on safety, health,
hygiene and environmental to all employees, contractors, contractor staff and
consultants or visitors
" Specifically and ensuring high standards of Safety and Environment at our site
during construction and operation of our power plants etc.
" Evaluating the HSE performance of our employees and contractors against the HSE
requirements
" Foster continual improvement, benchmark our HSE performance through adopting
best practices with commitment to compliance of all applicable legal and other
requirements
" Committed to conserve our natural resources and minimizing potentially harmful
effects resulting from our operations and to implementing improvements
associated with prevention of pollution, injury and illness
" Conducting Periodic Audit and Risk assessment by competent team
" Making the HSE Policy widely known to all employees, contractors and interested
parties and periodically reviewing the same for improvement
This Health and Safety and Environment Policy will be applied throughout LANCO
group via a set of documented company-wide and local policies and procedures.
6.4
Has the party taking the action previously referred an action under the EPBC Act, or
been responsible for undertaking an action referred under the EPBC Act?
NO
Provide name of proposal and EPBC reference number (if known)
34
(For the information provided above)
*Arcangeli, A. And Crosti, R. (2009) The short-term impact of dolphin-watching on the behaviour of bottlenose
dolphins (
) in Western Australia.
.
http://www.oers.ca/journal/Volume%202/200921arcangeli.pdf (accessed 12/05/2011).
*Attard, C.R.M., Beheregaray, L.B., Jenner, C., Gill, P., Jenner, M., Morrice, M., Bannister, J. LeDuc, R. and
Moller, L. (2010) Ge netic diversity and structure of blue whales (
) in Australian feeding
aggregations.
11: 24372441.
*Barros, N.B. and Wells, R.S. (1998) Prey and feeding patterns of resident bottlenose dolphins (
) in Sarasota Bay, Florida.
79:1045-1059.
BPIHSPSD (2011)
February 2011.
*Brand-Gardner, S.J., Lanyon, J.M. and C.J. Limpus, C.J. (1999). Diet selection by immature green turtles,
, in subtropical Moreton Bay, South-East Queensland.
47 (2):181191.
Gedamke J., Rafic M. and Hinten G. (2008). Progress report on cetacean research, January 2008 to December
2008, with statistical data for the calendar year 2008. Department of Environment and Conservation
Goode, B. and Harris, J. (2008)
A report prepared for the Bunbury Port Authority.
Greenland, J.A., Limpus, C.J. and Currie, K.J. (2002)
Queensland Environmental Protection Agency. 73pp.
*Hanson, M.T. and Defran, R.H. (1993) The behaviour and feeding ecology of the Pacific coast bottlenose
dolphin,
.
. 19:127-142.
*Limpus, C.J., Miller, J.D., Parmenter, C.J., Reimer, D., McLachlan, N. and Webb. R. (1992) Migration of green
and loggerhead
turtles to and from eastern Australian rookeries.
19(3):347-358.
Limpus, C.J. (2008)
Caretta caretta
. Queensland Environment Protection Agency. http://www.derm.qld.gov.au/register/p02785aa.pdf
(accessed 12//05/2001).
Parsons Brinckerhoff (2012a)
Unpublished report prepared for Lanco Resources Australia.
Parsons Brinckerhoff (2012b)
. Unpublished report prepared for Lanco Resources Australia.
*Pirzl, R., Patenaude, N.J., Burnell, S. and Bannister, J. (2009) Movements of southern right whales (
) between Australian and subantarctic New Zealand populations.
25(2): 455461.
*Plotkin, P.T., M.K. Wicksten, M.K. and Amos, A.F. (1993) Feeding ecology of the loggerhead sea turtle
in the northwestern Gulf of Mexico.
. 115(1):1-5.
35
*Recher, H.F., Holmes, R.T., Davis, W.S. and Morton, S. (1983) Foraging behaviour of Australian herons.
. 6:1-10.
*Richards, R. (2009) Past and present distributions of southern right whales (
36: 447-459.
).
SEWPaC (2011a). Species Profile and Threats (SPRAT) Database, Department of Sustainability, Environment,
Water, Population and Communities, Canberra. Available from: http://www.environment.gov.au/sprat.
Accessed Thu, 6 Oct 2011 14:47:06 +1100.
SEWPAC (2011b). Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999 draft referral guidelines for
three threatened black cockatoo species: Carnabys cockatoo (endangered)
Baudins cockatoo (vulnerable)
; Forest red-tailed black cockatoo (vulnerable)
. Department of Sustainability, Environment, Water, Population and Communities,
Canberra.
SWMRP (2011)
Thompson McRobert Edgeloe (TME) (2009). Bunbury Port Inner Harbour Structure Plan. Prepared for Bunbury
Port Authority
WA DEC (Western Australia Department of Environment and Conservation) (2010)
, DEC (Perth) http://www.naturebase.net/content/view/2462/1401 (accessed
12/05/2011).
Wave Solutions (April 2012a)
Wave Solutions (April 2012b)
*Denotes peer reviewed journal article
Much of the information used to underpin this Referral is from peer reviewed journal articles that are publicly
available. Augmenting this information is the use of information contained in the Species Profile and Threats
Database (SPRAT) which is administered by the Commonwealth Government. Where uncertainties in
information exist, this has been acknowledged in the relevant section of this Referral where that information
has been presented.
The EPBC Act Protected Matters Report was conducted on the 1 May 2014.
The PER and supporting technical reports prepared for this proposed action has been reviewed and assessed
by the WA Office of Environmental Protection.
36
"
attached
You must attach
"
Title of attachment(s)
Attachment 1 Project
overview
figures, maps or aerial photographs

showing the location of the project in
respect to any matters of national
environmental significance or important
features of the environments (section 3)
"
Attachment 1 Project
overview
copies of any state or local government

approvals and consent conditions (section
2.5)
N/A
figures, maps or aerial photographs

showing the project locality (section 1)
GIS file delineating the boundary of the
referral area (section 1)
If relevant, attach
Refer to project website

http://www.griffincoal.co
m.au/operationlibrary.htm
l
copies of any completed assessments to

meet state or local government approvals
and outcomes of public consultations, if
available (section 2.6)
copies of any flora and fauna investigations
and surveys (section 3)
"
technical reports relevant to the

assessment of impacts on protected
matters that support the arguments and
conclusions in the referral (section 3 and 4)
"
Attachment 4 Flora and

Fauna Assessment
Attachment 5 Level 2
Waterbird and Western
Ringtail Possum Survey
Attachment 6 Marine
Fauna Studies
Attachment 4 Flora and
Fauna Assessment
Attachment 5 Level 2
Waterbird and Western
Ringtail Possum Survey
Attachment 6 Marine
Fauna Studies
And refer to project
website.
http://www.griffincoal.co
m.au/operationlibrary.htm
l
report(s) on any public consultations

undertaken, including with Indigenous
stakeholders (section 3)
"
Attachment 2 Response
to Submissions Report
37
Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999
Attachment 1 Project Overview Figures
001 Referral of proposed action v August 12
001 Referral of proposed action v August 12
Attachment 2 Response to Submissions Report

(Parsons Brinckerhoff 2013)
Lanco Resources Australia
Bunbury Port Berth 14A Expansion and Coal

Storage and Loading Facility Response to
Submissions Report
20 March 2013
Document information
Client: Lanco Resources Australia

Title: Bunbury Port Berth 14A Expansion and Coal Storage and Loading Facility Response to
Submissions Report
Document No: Lanco_Submission_Report_Rev01_200313.docx
Date: 20 March 2013
Rev
Date
Details
00
11/02/2013
Draft for OEPA review
01
20/03/2013
Final
Author, Reviewer and Approver details

Prepared by:
Emma Dean
Date: 20/03/2013
Reviewed by:
Adam Parker
Date: 20/03/2013
Signature:
Signature:
Approved by:
Adam Parker
Date: 20/03/2013
Signature:
Distribution
Lanco Resources Australia, Parsons Brinckerhoff file, Parsons Brinckerhoff Library
Parsons Brinckerhoff Australia Pty Limited 2013

Copyright in the drawings, information and data recorded in this document (the information) is the property of Parsons
Brinckerhoff. This document and the information are solely for the use of the authorised recipient and this document
may not be used, copied or reproduced in whole or part for any purpose other than that for which it was supplied by
Parsons Brinckerhoff. Parsons Brinckerhoff makes no representation, undertakes no duty and accepts no
responsibility to any third party who may use or rely upon this document or the information.
Document owner
Parsons Brinckerhoff Australia Pty Limited
ABN 80 078 004 798
Level 5 503 Murray Street
Perth WA 6000
PO Box 7181
Cloisters Square WA 6850
Australia
Tel: +61 8 9489 9700
Fax: +61 8 9489 9777
Email: perth@pb.com.au
www.pbworld.com
Certified to ISO 9001, ISO 14001, AS/NZS 4801
A GRI Rating: Sustainability Report 2011
Lanco Resources Australia Bunbury Port Berth 14A Expansion and Coal Storage and Loading Facility
Response to Submissions Report
Contents
Page number
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Introduction
1.1
Background
1.2
Purpose of this report
1.3
Overview of the public environmental review
1.4
Regulatory framework
1.5
Structure and content of this submissions report
Community and stakeholder consultation
2.1
Pre public review consultation
2.2
Consultation during public the public review period
2.3
Ongoing and future communications with the community and stakeholders
Design changes
11
3.1
Changes since Referral to the EPA
11
3.2
Design clarifications since the PER
12
3.3
Environmental Management Plans
15
Consideration of submissions
21
4.1
Overview of submissions
21
4.2
Response to frequently raised issues submissions
21
Conclusion
47
List of tables
Page number
Table 1.1
Table 2.1
Table 3.1
Structure and content of the Response to Submissions report

Summary of ongoing and future communications
Source contributions and levels of exceedance of noise limits with a 98 dB(A) ship
loader
5
8
12
Parsons Brinckerhoff | Lanco_Submission_Report_Rev01_200313.docx
List of figures
Page number
Figure 1.1
Figure 3.1
Figure 3.2
Assessment procedure for Public Environmental Review

Original proposal layout submitted to EPA within the Section 38 Referral
Possible monitoring locations relative to moderate and high levels of ecological
protection
List of appendices
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
Appendix F
Public review advertisement

Summary of submissions
Example of stockpile management plan for Ewington Operations
Draft dredging and spoil disposal plan - Rev 4
Air quality memo (March 2013), Air quality assessment (February 2013)
Project process flow description
ii Parsons Brinckerhoff | Lanco_Submission_Report_Rev01_200313.docx
4
11
17
1. Introduction
1.1
Background
Lanco Resources Australia Pty Ltd (referred to as Lanco) proposes to construct and operate a coal handling
and export facility at Berth 14A within the Inner Harbour of Bunbury Port. The facility has the potential to
export up to 15 million tonnes of coal per annum. The proposal is consistent with the Bunbury Port Authority
Structure Plan (2009). Coal will be sourced from Lanco Collie Basin operations and transported via rail to the
port facility.
The proposal occupies an area approximately 30 hectares in size and includes the following:
dredging of berth approach and pocket
construction of Berth 14A to accommodate bulk carriers
construction of a new rail spur to service Berth 14A
materials handling infrastructure including train unloading, conveyors, stackers, storage and ship
loading facilities.
A Public Environmental Review (PER) was on public exhibition between 21 November 2012 and 15 January
2013, in accordance with the EPA Guidelines for Preparing a Public Environmental Review. The public
review period set for this Proposal was 6 weeks however given the review period included the Christmas
period, an additional 2 weeks was added. During this period, submissions were invited from anyone with an
interest in the project, including members of the public and government agencies. These submissions have
been considered and are addressed in this report.
1.2
Purpose of this report
This report documents and considered the submissions received on the PER and outlines Lancos response
to the submissions. This report also provides an overview of the REF (refer to Section 1.3), an outline of the
consultation activities undertaken during the preparation and the public review of the PER (refer to Chapter
2), a summary of the issues raised in the submissions and Lancos response (Refer to Chapter 4) and the
next steps and future consultation activities (refer to Chapter 5).
1.3
Overview of the public environmental review
1.3.1
Project justification
The local consumption of coal from the Griffin Coal operations in Collie is limited to the existing power plants
in the South West region. It is estimated that Griffin Coal through the expansions of their Muja and Ewington
operations has the potential to produce up to 20 million tonnes of coal per annum which is far beyond the
local consumption requirements. Based on these projections it is estimated that there is a mine life resource
in excess of 50 years in providing for domestic consumption, reserve resource and development of
alternative markets.
The demand of sub bituminous coal in the Asian economies has increased in recent years and the viability of
the Griffin coal mine is centred on its potential to export coal after meeting the local demand. In order to
efficiently export material from Collie, it is important to create the requisite port and rail infrastructure for
evacuation of coal from the mines.
Currently, Bunbury Port does not export coal from any of the existing berths however the IHSP has identified
Berth 14A for coal export. The proposed export quantity proposed to be exported from Berth 14A, almost
doubles the current export capacity within the Port.
The Project has several benefits to the local economy including additional revenue, employment creation
(during both construction and operation) and provision of additional services to support the operations.
1.3.2
Summary of the project
The Project is for the establishment of a coal export facility at Berth 14A within the Inner Harbour of Bunbury
Port. It is envisaged that the Project will provide for the export of up to 15 million tonnes per annum (Mtpa) of
coal at the berth with a maximum loading rate of 8000 tonnes per hour (tph) for both in loading and out
loading. The Project will include the following key components:
land infrastructure
materials handling facilities including the development of a new rail loop and wagon unloading
facilities
fully enclosed shed for the stockpiling of coal
below and above ground conveyor system
administration and welfare building
spares store and workshop
coal storage buffer bin
water treatment facilities
marine infrastructure
a single berth located within the Inner Harbour of Bunbury Port for coal ship loading using one
shiploader
construction of Berth 14A to accommodate bulk carriers
dredging of the Berth 14A approach and berth pocket
rock armour slope protection for the Berth as well as Berth 14A ship arrival and departure basin.
Sheet piling to retain land may also be considered during detailed design with impressed current
cathodic protection used to protect immersed steel from corrosion in the marine environment.
This project description is based on the concept engineering design completed to date with options to be
further designed and evaluated during the detailed design phase.
1.3.3
Conclusions of the public environmental review
The PER identified a range of potential environmental impacts as a result of the Project. These impacts
primarily relate to the marine environment and the cumulative impact of noise. The PER has recommended
numerous management measures to avoid or reduce these potential impacts. In consideration of the
recommended management and mitigation measures, it is unlikely that the Project will have any long term
negative impacts on the environment.
The Project is expected to have social and economic benefits for the Bunbury and South West region of
Western Australia through increased employment opportunities during both the construction and operational
phases of the project.
2 Parsons Brinckerhoff | Lanco_Submission_Report_Rev01_200313.docx
Various measures and commitments are recommended to avoid and/or manage the identified impacts
associated with construction and operation of the Project. Many of these will be incorporated in the final
CEMP and the operating environmental management system.
1.4
Regulatory framework
The Project has been considered under both Western Australian and Commonwealth legislation.
An EBPC Referral under the Environmental Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999 (EPBC Act)
has been submitted to the Department of Sustainability, Environment, Water, Populations and Community
(SEWPaC) for consideration. As it is proposed to dispose of the dredge material within Commonwealth
waters a Sea Dumping Permit under the Sea Dumping Act 1981 (Sea Dumping Act) will also be submitted to
SEWPaC in February for their consideration.
This Report only deals with the response to the Western Australian approval process which is being
assessed in accordance with Section 38 of the Environmental Protection Act 1986 (EP Act). The
determination process under Section 38 is illustrated in Figure 1.1.
Figure 1.1
Assessment procedure for Public Environmental Review
1.5
Structure and content of this submissions report
The structure and content of the submissions report is summarised in Table 1.1
Table 1.1
Structure and content of the Response to Submissions report
Chapter
Description
Chapter 1 Introduction
Outlines the background and need for the project and purpose of the
report, and summarises the key findings of the REF. this chapter also
provides an outline of the determination process for the project.
Chapter 2 Community and stakeholder

consultation
Documents the consultation activities undertaken by Lanco during the

public review of the PER.
Chapter 3 Design
Provides a description of the design changes since the referral to the

EPA in April 2011.
Chapter 4 Consideration of submissions
Provides Lancos response to key issues raised.
Chapter 5 Conclusions and next steps
Presents the conclusions of the report and documents the next steps.
2. Community and stakeholder

consultation
2.1
Pre public review consultation
The consultation activities undertaken prior to the preparation of the PER included:
Project briefings with key government agencies during August and September 2011.
Ongoing liaison with Bunbury Port Authority.
Information updates on the Griffin coal website
Community information session on 1 September 2011
A detailed summary of the consultation undertaken during the preparation of the PER is outlined in
Chapter 4 of the PER.
2.2
Consultation during public the public review period
The PER was placed on public review from 21 November 2012 to 16 January 2013. The activities and
consultation undertaken during this period are summarised below.
2.2.1
Review venues
Hard copies of the PER were placed on public review at the following locations:
Bunbury City and Regional Library, Bunbury
State Library of Western Australia, Perth
Environmental Protection Agency, Perth
An electronic copy of the complete document was available through the Griffin Coal website
(www.griffincoal.com.au ). Details on the Project were also available on the EPA consultation website.
2.2.2
Advertisements
Advertisements of the PER public review, including a link to the Griffin Coal and EPA websites were
placed in the following papers:
The West Australia Wednesday 21 November 2013 & Monday 7 January 2013
The South West Times Thursday 22 November 2013 & Thursday 10 January 2013
These advertisement requested submissions on the PER from anyone with an interest in the Project. A
copy of the newspaper advertisement is provided in Appendix A.
2.2.3
Community information session
A community information session was held at Koombana Bay Sailing Club on Monday 3 December 2012
from 3pm to 7pm. The purpose of the information session was to allow community and stakeholders to
discuss the project with the PER Authors, marine specialist, designers and the Proponent.
An advertisement was put in the South West Times on 29th November 2012 and an email invitation sent
to key government agencies and industry groups.
At the community information session a display was provided to summarise the key points of the project
and the PER process. Hard copies of the PER were on display and copies were available to take away on
CDs. Information from the EPAs guidance An invitation to comment... were available as a handout.
During four hours over ninety people attended the community information session. Five copies of the PER
were distributed via CD and approximately thirty copies of the handout were distributed.
2.2.4
Receipt of submissions
All submissions were directed to the OEPA, collated and forwarded to Lanco for summarising and
response. A summary of all the submissions received and the OPEA comments on preliminary key
environmental factors and issues were received on 17 January 2013.
2.3
Ongoing and future communications with the

community and stakeholders
Lanco is committed to engaging in ongoing communications with community, industry and government
agencies during the detailed design, construction and operation phase of the project. Table 2.1 below
summarises the proposed future communications.
Table 2.1
Summary of ongoing and future communications
Stakeholder
Ongoing and future communication
Bunbury Port Authority (BPA)
BPA are a key stakeholder for this project and Lanco are in
constant communications with them during the current
detailed design phase.
The proposed environmental management plans will be
developed in consultation with BPA.
A development application for the project will be lodged in
2013 with BPA.
Bunbury Port Technical Advisory and Consultative

Committee (TACC)
Lanco will work with Bunbury Port Authority in establishing a

TACC for dredging works.
Department of Health
Meeting 11 February 2013 to discuss the project and future

communications.
Reporting on the results from monitoring of potential
contaminates which are of a public health concern.
Department of Health have requested an invitation to the
TACC.
Department of Fisheries
Meeting 1 February 2013 to discuss the project and future

communications.
Department of Environment and Conservation
Meeting in February 2013 to discuss the noise exceedences

of the project.
Stakeholder
Ongoing and future communication

Review and approval of the construction dust management
plan.
Part V approvals
Department of Water
Licence application discussions for groundwater allocation
SEWPaC
EPBC Referral decision

Sea Dumping Permit application (March 2013)
Alcoa
Consultation during the preparation of relevant management

plans.
Bunbury Fibre Exports
Consultation during the preparation of relevant management

plans including a transport management plan
Cetacean research unit
Ongoing consultation on the results of marine monitoring
Dolphin Discovery Centre
Lanco is committed to building on existing monitoring by

utilising the Dolphin Discovery Centre and building on data
collected as part of the SWMRP.
A draft of this Response to Submissions Report was sent to
the Dolphin Discovery Centre for comment prior to finalising.
Murdoch University
A draft of this Response to Submissions Report was sent to

the Dolphin Discovery Centre for comment prior to finalising.
RecFishWest
Lanco will continue to consult with RecFishWest who also

represent charter boat operators on the dredging activities
and potential impacts on fisheries.
3. Design changes
3.1
Changes since Referral to the EPA
The Project was originally referred to the EPA in April 2011. Based on the BPA structure plan it was
proposed to construct a large stockpile along the eastern boundary of the site with a conveyor system to
a single wharf structure (refer to Figure 3.1).
Since then the design has progressed and been refined however the general layout has remained. The
draft PER was based on a two shed option parallel to the north western boundary however after
consultation with BPA their preference was to retain access to the east of the proposed wharf and provide
storage capacity for a potential second berth. Therefore the shed was relocated back to the original
position shown in Figure 3.1.
The site boundary has changed slightly near the berth and around the proposed enclosed stockpiles. The
changes to the boundary area the berth were to accommodate the proposed dredge footprint, this area
was further defined once more detail on the bathometry on the inner harbour was known. The footprint
along the eastern portion of the site was reduced as it was determined that the large shed did not need to
be as wide as first proposed.
Figure 3.1
Original proposal layout submitted to EPA within the Section 38 Referral
11
3.2
Design clarifications since the PER
A flow description has been provided in Appendix F of this report to provide an overall description of how
the Project will operate.
The section below describes sections of the design where further information is now known.
3.2.1
Pile driving
Lanco are aware of the potential underwater noise impacts on marine fauna during the construction of the
berth and jetty structure. The construction methodology for the project will be designed to reduce these
potential impacts wherever possible. The underwater noise modelling prepared for the PER (Technical
Report 7A) assessed driving of poles and therefore is considered a conservative assessment.
It has been determine that for the construction of the jetty, piles will be driven via hammering only for
landside works. Piles for the marine works will be socketed and/or pinned reducing the impact to marine
fauna.
The final pile driving methodology will be determined once construction contractors have been engaged.
The preferred tenderer has experience in undertaking drilling in marine environments and where noise
and vibration impacts need to be considered a rotary piling machine has been used. The description
below is the general methodology proposed for marine piling works.
a pre-drilled hole will be drilled to insert a steel liner on the ground
a pile hole will be drilled to the size and depth as per final engineering drawings
a steel casing will be screwed into position
after installation of the permanent casing, the excavation of the pile hole inside the casing will
continue into the founding material.
3.2.2
Ship loaders
The PER and the associated noise impact assessment (Technical report 16) assessed two ship loaders.
It is now proposed to use only one ship loader and preliminary modelling has shown that there is now
likely to be no exceedances at all receivers with a 98dB(A) ship loader (refer to Table 3.1).
Table 3.1
Location
Source contributions and levels of exceedance of noise limits with a 98 dB(A) ship loader
Source contribution dB(A)
Total dB(A)
Noise limit
dB(A)
Exceedance
Ship loader
Balance of
Plant
R1
22
27
28
30
N/A
R2
26
28
30
30
N/A
R3
26
29
31
37
N/A
R4
22
26
27
30
N/A
R5
21
26
27
30
N/A
Finalisation of the modelling will be completed for the Part V approvals.
12
3.2.3
Shed design
The current design has five dust collectors proposed for train unloading, storage shed, transfer towers
and ship loading areas. The dust collectors are specified for 100% operational availability providing
adequate redundancy for the fans and the bag houses to be removed/replaced without any interruption to
the dust extraction.
The stockpiles are required to be enclosed in a storage shed and are intended to provide a buffer for
approximately 4 ship loads to satisfy high demand situations.
Shed infrastructure would include:
a pair of rail mounted stacker/reclaimers operating off a common central bund,
fire detection and suppression system,
wash down water system and drainage water collection,
a spray system for suppressing dust and reduce the risk of spontaneous combustion.
The shed will be a lightweight steel framed and clad enclosure with end walls, mounted on piles. Total
shed length is 750 m, subject to simulation model verification. In first phase shed length of 275m will be
constructed with provision of possible extension to total length of 750m. Approximate width and height are
proposed to be 100m and 35m respectively.
Ground Improvement to Storage Sheds
To separate the coal from the underlying soil and to facilitate drainage of the leachate from the coal, a
ground contacting reinforced cement concrete (RCC) slab or flexible pavement shall be provided. Ground
improvement will be carried out, if required, based on the soil condition to reduce the overall settlement
and also the differential settlements arising from the natural variability of the ground beneath the slab.
Shed Foundations
The shed foundations are subject to significant vertical and horizontal loads arising from the shed
superstructure, the operational loads from the stacker re-claimer as well as the effects of soil squeeze
from the coal stockpile. The pile foundation for shed shall be designed as end bearing based on soil
condition and basalt level. In view of lateral loads due to wind and seismic forces, the piles shall be
designed to carry the negative skin friction loads which may also arise from the effects of the coal
stockpile and the bending arising from soil squeeze.
A drainage gully shall be incorporated into the base on one side of the shed to facilitate removal of coal
leachate.
Superstructure
The building shall be designed to all relevant Australian Standards, requirements of the Building Code of
Australia. Following parameters will decide the basis of designThe importance level as defined by the BCA is Level 2
The building classification for each structure will be chosen in accordance with the definitions
provided in the BCA.
The structures shall be designed for a 50 year design life.
Lighting protection and earth bond as per AS/NZS 1768
13
Design loads - Permanent loads, Imposed (Live) loads, Service loads, Material loads, Conveyor belt
materials loads, Conveyor belt tension loads, Equipment loads, Blocked Chutes and Overfilled Bins,
Thermal loads, Wind loads, Seismic design, Hydrostatic loads, Emergency loads shall be considered
as per AS/NZS 117.
3.2.4
Water management
The final water management plan for the site is still being developed however the concept for the water
management system. Below is a brief description of the water treatment process that will be employed for
Berth 14A.
All operational areas will be bunded to prevent contamination of areas outside of the operational
lease.
Run off water from bunded areas will be collected and pumped into Waste Water Treatment Plant
within the site to be recycled back into the system.
Treated water will be used for dust suppression, wash down and fire fighting where appropriate.
The sump pumps will start on high level signal in the sump. Once the water management study is
complete, every bunded area will be looked individually to ensure that the sump pumps are capable
of removing the water from the bunded area.
Treatment ponds will be sized for 100 year event and the storm water will be recycled back to the
system where possible.
3.2.5
Spontaneous combustion/fire management
Work is currently being undertaken to determine the risk of the Collie coal to combust and in what
conditions. The results of this study are likely to be known by the end of March 2013. Once these details
are known the risk can be reduced and managed through the design process and a detailed management
plan. The specific stockpile management will be developed in considering the design and environmental
variables for the site and will be of a similar detail to that used on Lancos Ewington asset (Appendix C).
To gain understanding of the properties of the coal, it is proposed R70 and SponComSIM tests are
conducted. The R70 test has been industry standard for assessing spontaneous combustion in Australia
since 1978 and as such is well established with understood benchmarks. Conducting this test will align
the coal sample with known types of similar rank and properties. The R70 test is conducted on dry
samples and is started from a set temperature of 40 C.
R70 testing does not allow for the as mined conditions of moisture content and ambient temperature. For
this reason the SponComSIM test has been developed. The SponComSIM test is used to obtain a
minimum time for spontaneous combustion events to be initiated. The time obtained is for coal that is
present in a loose pile (the worst case scenario) and is equally valid for surface stockpiles and coal in
storage (such as shipping holds). SponComSIM can also be used to define the time for solid fractured
coal to cause spontaneous combustion events which is important for underground mine pillars or
compacted stockpiles. The test provides a realistic quantification of the spontaneous combustion
propensity of coal by accounting for both the intrinsic and extrinsic influences on coal self-heating
behaviour. This test commences based on the ambient temperature as the start point, and which is
agreed with the client, at the time of sampling.
To be able to interpret the spontaneous combustion test results an understanding of the coal quality is
required. For this we propose to undertake proximate and ultimate analysis and assess the calorific value
of the sample taken from the mine. Additionally, we need to understand the moisture and ash content for
R70 testing to align with known coal types of similar rank and properties.
14
3.3
Environmental Management Plans
Several management plans will be prepared during the construction and operation phases of this project.
An overall construction environmental management plan (CEMP) will be prepared prior to any
construction works whilst an environmental management plan or system will be prepared for the ongoing
operation of the facility.
Each plan will include several sub-plans providing more detail on a technical issue. Section 3.3.1 and
3.3.2 provide more information or clarification than what was presented in the PER.
3.3.1
Construction
Detailed site investigation (DSI)

A DSI will be undertaken for the study area to verify the results of the desktop preliminary site
investigation (PSI). The results for the DSI will inform any remediation work, if required, and specific
construction methodology to manage any potential contamination threat.
Noise management plan
A construction noise management plan will be prepared for approval by DEC prior to any out of hours
works (7am to 7pm Monday to Saturday) being undertaken. This plan will consider the use of sound
attenuating pile driving hammers and the timing of such works to coincide with existing high background
noise levels.
Dust management plan
Once the construction methodology is understood, a dust management plan will be prepared by the
qualified air specialist in consultation with the contractor to the satisfaction of the DEC.
The dust management plan will include measures to supress dust generated during construction and may
include:
methods for management of emission being incorporated into project inductions, training and prestart talks.
Limit vehicle movements to designated entries and exits, haulage routes and parking areas. Site
exits would be fitted with hardstand material, rumble grids or other appropriate measures to limit the
amount of material transported off-site (where required).
Visually monitor dust and where necessary implement the following measures:
Apply water (or alternate measures) to exposed surfaces that are causing dust generation.
Surfaces may include unpaved roads, stockpiles, hardstand areas and other exposed surfaces
(for example recently graded areas).
Appropriately cover loads on trucks transporting material to and from the construction site.
Securely fix tailgates of road transport trucks prior to loading and immediately after unloading.
Prevent where possible, or remove, mud and dirt being tracked onto sealed road surfaces.
Limit vehicle speeds along unsealed construction access routes to limit dust generation.
Limit the area and duration of exposed or unconsolidated areas.
Ensure plant and machinery is regularly checked and maintained in a proper and efficient condition.
15
Traffic management plan

A traffic management plan will be prepared during construction to manage any impacts on the existing rail
and road networks. This plan will be developed in consultation with port users, Main Roads, BPA and
DoT.
The plan will be designed to avoid construction traffic using the local road network during peak periods.
Consideration will also be made to ensure existing port users arent significantly disrupted during the
construction of the proposal.
Dredging and spoil disposal management plan
The draft dredging and spoil disposal management plan included in the PER (Technical Report 10) has
been updated to incorporate comments received from Department of Transport, Department of Fisheries
and to include details on the offshore placement site (Refer to appendix D).
Once a dredging contractor is engaged this management plan will be finalised
3.3.2
Operation
Spontaneous combustion management plan

Based on the results of a current study being undertaken by the University of Queensland to determine
the risk of the collie coal to combust, a spontaneous combustion management plan will be completed.
The spontaneous combustion management plan is likely to include management of stockpiles consistent
with what is currently being undertaken in their Griffin Coal operation (Refer to Appendix C). Other
management measures proposed include thermal and infra red imaging systems to pre-detect
combustible coal and water misting systems.
Transport management plan
A transport management plan would be developed in consultation with the rail operator, BPA and other
port users to ensure the Lanco operations do no significantly impact on any existing operations.
Marine environmental management plan (MEMP)
The draft MEMP prepared for the PER will be finalised in consultation with the OEPA who will lead
consultation with key agencies where necessary.
To provide further clarification on future monitoring, a figure has been prepared showing locations in the
vicinity of Berth 14A where monitoring may be undertaken to ensure environmental values including
ecosystem health and recreation are preserved (Refer to Figure 3.2). The justification for these locations
are:
P1 is near the mouth of Berth 14A as near field site to Lanco port operations
P2 is an existing inner harbour monitoring site for which baseline data has been gathered every six
weeks since December 2011 for water quality.
P3 and P4 are on both sides of the navigation channel outside the entrance in the High Protection
Area and represent near-field effects for the bay system adjacent to the Low Protection Area. Of
these, P3 corresponds ot an existing Koombana Bay monitoring site for which baseline data has
been gathered every 6 weeks since December 2011 for water quality.
16
Figure 3.2
Possible monitoring locations relative to moderate and high levels of ecological

protection
The most appropriate threshold criteria that can be monitored to ensure these values are preserved are
ANZECC Guideline values (ANZECC, 2000) for water quality, NADG Guideline values (NADG, 2009) for
sediment quality and Australian Food Standards Guideline values (ANZFA, 2005) for biomonitoring.
Sampling locations in the vicinity of the development include two sampling locations within the Moderate
Environmental Protection Area and a further two sampling points within the High Environmental
Protection Area. However, the proponent suggests that managing Berth 14A operational activities to meet
ANZECC, NADG or ANZFA (or other) guidelines at these locations is not feasible for the following
reasons:
1.
Inputs from operations at Berth 14A are but one of many sources of potential contamination in a
multi-user port.
2.
Historic exceedances in water quality, sediment quality and food standards guidelines in the port
(Koombana Bay and Inner Harbour) reported in the Technical Appendices to the PER means that
whatever monitoring or management measures are implemented at the scale of Berth 14A during
operations, guideline levels are unlikely to be met at this point in time, prior to the construction of
Berth 14A.
3.
Stringent management measures implemented at Berth 14A will be adopted, however managing
exceedances at this port requires a more holistic approach that considers all contributions to
contaminant levels in the Port. The MEMP proposed by the proponent will be more effective by
17
managing operations to meet end of pipe targets unless a discrete source of contamination can be
identified and managed (i.e. coal on beaches).
For all of these reasons, the BPA is best placed to monitor and manage impacts on the marine
environment as a result of port operational activities. Further information on each of these points is
provided below.
Inputs from Operations at Berth 14A are but one of many sources of contamination in a multi-user port:
Identifying point source inputs in a multi-use port using such an approach is almost impossible. There are
currently seven different berths within the port that load and unload a diversity of different products
including Alumina, Aluminium Hydroxide, Mineral Sands, Silica Sands, Spodumene, Woodchips, Caustic
Soda, Methanol and Petroleum Coke. Each of these berths represents a different point source of
contamination to the marine environment within the port.
As well as contaminants introduced by each of the different tenants and products within the Port, further
inputs to the Port are introduced by outflow of suspended sediment and water from the adjacent
Leschenault Estuary. Such inputs as well as frequent anthropogenic sediment re-suspension from vessel
traffic (in particular tug boats) means that water and sediment quality is highly variable on short spatial
and temporal scales. Given this variability, designing and implementing an effective monitoring program
to characterise the marine environment and detect inputs from different point sources (particularly given
the small size of the inputs expected from Berth 14A) will be particularly challenging.
Setting outcomes based conditions during operations of Berth 14A should focus instead on setting end of
pipe targets for Berth 14A operations as proposed in the MEMP submitted to the EPA for assessment.
Historic exceedances in water quality, sediment quality and food standards guidelines in the port
(Koombana Bay and Inner Harbour) reported in the PER technical reports means that whatever
monitoring or management measures are implemented at the scale of Berth 14A during operations,
guideline levels are unlikely to be met.
Water Quality Monitoring
Water quality in the marine environment is typically assessed against ANZECC Guidelines (ANZECC,
2000).
A number of historic exceedances in water quality against ANZECC Guideline levels have been reported
in Koombana Bay and the Inner Harbour as reported in:
Table 7 of Technical Report 3: Marine Environmental Quality Studies
Sections 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 of Technical Report 3: Marine Environmental Quality Studies
Exceedances in Water Quality parameters during baseline water quality monitoring undertaken by the
proponent for the Berth 14A Activities are reported in:
Table 3 of Technical Report 19: Koombana Bay Baseline Marine Monitoring Report
Sediment
Sediment Quality in the marine environment is typically assessed against National Assessment
Guidelines for Dredging and Ocean Disposal (NAGD, 2009) but can also be assessed against the
Guidelines for Ecological Investigation Levels under Assessment Levels for Soil, Sediment and Water
(DoE, 2003) and the Human Health Investigation Level A (HIL-A) for Standard Residential land use
under Assessment Levels for Soil, Sediment and Water (DoE, 2003).
18
A number of exceedances in sediment quality against these guidelines have been identified within the
Inner Harbour and Koombana Bay as reported in:
Sections 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 of Technical Report 3: Marine Environmental Quality Studies
Biomonitoring
Biomonitoring is undertaken to monitor the safety of seafood for human consumption. In accordance with
NAGD Guidelines, the (NAGD, 2009), the Bunbury Port Authority has commenced a long term monitoring
program to document the status of any contaminants of concern in biota over time using the Blue Mussels
(Mytilus edulis). The level of contaminants in mussel tissue was assessed against Australian Food
Standards Guidelines (ANZFA, 2005).
A number of exceedances in contaminant levels within mussel tissue have been observed against the
Australian Food Standards as reported in:
From the large number of environmental studies undertaken to date (including Historic Studies and
studies undertaken by the proponent) to characterise the marine environment in Bunbury Port and
surrounds, it can be clearly demonstrated that there are historic exceedances in water quality, sediment
quality and biomonitoring results against Australian Guideline levels. In this context, requesting the
proponent manage activities at Berth 14A to ensure Guideline levels are met across the entire port is
challenging.
As stated above, the monitoring and management measures outlined in the sub-plans of the MEMP are
structured to manage end of pipe targets during Berth 14A operations measured against relevant
ANZECC, NAGD and ANZFA Guidelines. Ensuring these end of pipe targets are met will ensure there is
no significant impact on the marine environment associated with Berth 14A Activities.
Management measures implemented at Berth 14A will have little impact on managing exceedances at
this port, given other sources of contamination to the Port. The MEMP proposed by the proponent will be
more effective by managing operations to meet end of pipe targets unless a discrete source of
contamination can be identified and managed (i.e. coal on beaches).
Given the exceedances observed across the port to date and the multiple point sources for contaminants
from the multi-use port, no matter what management measures are implemented at the scale of Berth
14A, this will not ensure Guideline levels for water quality, sediment quality and biomonitoring are met.
Rather, by meeting the end of pipe targets defined in the MEMP, the proponent and the EPA can be
confident that the impacts associated with Berth 14A activities are being effectively managed by the
proponent.
The exception to this end of pipe management approach is related to instances where discrete point
sources for contaminants can be identified (as would be the case for coal contamination). Where discrete
point sources can be identified and attributed to the proponent, monitoring and management has been
proposed to be undertaken (outlined in the monitoring section of the Operational Spills and Leaks
Subplan (Section 5.2) of the MEMP). In this instance, it is feasible to monitor for coal at adjacent beaches
(Koombana Beach and Power Station Beach) and implement management measures as appropriate.
For all of the reasons outlined above, the Bunbury Port Authority is the appropriate organisation to
manage exceedances against Guideline values in a multi-user port such as Bunbury, ensuring the
environmental values (including ecosystem health and recreational amenity) in the vicinity of the port are
maintained.
19
4. Consideration of
submissions
4.1
Overview of submissions
4.1.1
Number of submissions received
A total of 43 submissions were received during the public review period, which included 25 submissions
from the general public. A detailed breakdown of the submissions is provided in Appendix B.
Of the 43 submissions received, 207 sub-issues were raised within key environmental factor issues. The
most frequently raised issues related to air quality, noise, marine fauna, marine environmental quality,
groundwater and human health and amenity, the response to these submissions are discussed in Section
3.2.
4.2
Response to frequently raised issues submissions
4.2.1
Issue 1 Air quality
Issue 1A The proposal will create additional dust to residential areas, especially Pelican Point East
Response
An air quality assessment was undertaken as part of the PER process by Advanced Environmental Dynamics Pty
Ltd (Technical Paper 9, Volume 2B of the PER).
This report determined that the project would not exceed the cumulative ambient air quality goal for dust deposition
derived from the NSW DECCW criteria. Modelling of the air quality, including dust deposition, determined that the
future ambient air quality environment would not be significantly different from the current situation.
The project does not include any open stockpile or material handling, all coal is stored inside a large shed,
approximately 750m x 100mx 45m in size and all conveyors are enclosed. It is considered best practice within
Australia to cover coal stockpiles.
21
Issue 1B The train unloading areas, conveyor systems, transfer points, the main transfer sheds and storage sheds all require
dust extraction systems to reduce dust emissions. Would like assurances that such facilities will not allow coal
pieces or dust to escape.
Response
All coal conveying and storage facilities are designed to minimise or restrict dust or coal pieces to escape. Following
measures have been incorporated in design:
Rail unloader station will be enclosed in a steel-framed and clad structure, with dust extraction and collection
system.
All conveyors will be fully enclosed in steel clad gantries, with provision for controlled wash-down of spillage.
Transfer chutes and loading skirts shall be fully enclosed and fitted with misting sprays to suppress dust
emissions at transfer points and dust extraction of conveyors at transfer points using local ducted ID bag filter
to collect any remaining airborne dust.
The stockyard shall be fully enclosed in a steel frame and clad building and dust emissions shall be minimised
through the use of a dust suppression spray water system with provision for negative pressurisation and dust
extraction. Stockpile construction shall be by luffing stacker/reclaimers designed to minimise the drop height.
The shiploader shall be fitted with fully enclosed galleries, a washdown system and a telescoping spout
designed to minimise the drop height of material into the holds of vessels through the loading cycle.
Issue 1C No consideration has been given to the environmental impacts associated with a coal or coal dust induced fire.
Response
Fire detection and suppression system have been considered to take care of coal or coal dust induced fire.
Additionally CO gas detection system has been considered to monitor coal and avoid chances of fire.
Issue 1D Potential cross contamination of coal on other Port users is an issue. Air quality control measures need to be
identified and regularly monitored. A dust management plan for operation and construction should be implemented
to DEC reporting requirements. The following management actions should be considered:
The 'no visible dust' comment be replaced with 'not to exceed particulate concentrations at the proponent's lease
boundary and the Port Reserve Boundary'.
Real-time dust concentration monitoring system be installed and maintained that allows operation personnel to
constantly monitor any dust emitted.
Coal dust spills must be prevented and recovered immediately with disposal to an approved waste facility
proper dust extraction systems
spray tower
covering of coal stockpiles and loading mechanisms
washing of train wagons after discharge to prevent coal pieces dropping on the rail line
if health standard are breached DoH should be included in the response processes.
Response
The segregation of products by way of operational technology is such that the probability of cross contamination is
low as products adjacent to the facility are enclosed and have dust management systems as is Lanco's facility.
Stringent management plans for dust control will be implemented for both operation and construction. The
management plans will include monitoring requirements in liaison with BPA at the boundary and also at existing
monitoring locations throughout Bunbury.
It will also be a challenge to design/implement a real-time monitoring program in particular that differentiates
between the coal facility emissions and non-facility emissions including those from neighbouring port users and
including 'natural' dust levels such as than due to the sea spray.
22
Issue 1E Aspects on the air quality modelling (Technical Paper 9) are unclear including:
use of 30th highest day
why MODIS data was essential for meteorological analysis
significant differences between the peak concentrations shown in Table 13.2 (Technical Paper 9) and the
measured peaks.
applying the air quality criteria only to total ambient concentrations, not those due to a single operation. The total
including all existing concentrations must be submitted for approval
a statement in the PER that Data for PM2.5 concentrations are not available' however measurement of PM2.5 have
been recorded by DEC at Bunbury since 1997, and PM10 since 1999
a number of errors have been identified in technical report tables. For example Table 8 reports several Stirling
Street PM10 values exceeding TSP values. Table 5 of Appendix A reports salt deposition rates in excess of the
total.
Response
Note that a careful and considered model validation exercise was undertaken for the purposes of describing the
existing environment. One of the key weakness of the assessment lies in the estimation of the dust emissions from
port activities for which emission factors are not readily available (such as for wood chip handling, mineral sands,
etc.).
Due to the number of previous assessments that have been undertaken in relation to these activities, it was felt that
it was better to maintain a measure of consistency between this and previous studies in relation to the development
of the emission estimates. However, it is noted that in previous studies, monitoring data was used to help 'refine'
emission estimates for these materials. The alternative to our approach of validating our model for the existing
environment was to adjust downwards emission factors for these materials until the results obtained from the model
were more representative of monitoring data at the monitoring locations. Our approach is more transparent in that
rather than adjusting downwards emission factors until we get results which better matched the monitoring data, we
have used emission factors as previously adopted and assessed the model results against monitoring data.
Naturally the degree of over estimation of the model results when compared with available monitoring data was
spatially variable and thus the use of a single percentile across the domain is a simplification.
An alternate approach would have been to consider the monitoring data only as an accurate description of the
existing environment and to compare model predicts of project impacts with observations. This approach was
considered. However, the limited number of observational points does not allow for the development of regional
contour plots of the existing environment which aid in interpretation. Rather than denoting the results as the 30th
highest, we alternately could have denoted them as the maximum of the 'calibrate' model. Presenting the maximum
results of the uncalibrated model would not have been representative of actualised impacts over this period. If the
maximum of the uncalibrated model have been presented, the relative contribution of dust from the project would be
even less than that which was presented.
In order to move forward with the PER, we have prepared and included in a memo in Appendix E the results for the
maximum predicted 24-hour average concentrations of PM10, TSP, and PM2.5 in contrast to the results of the
calibrated dispersion model which was based on the 30th highest 24-hour average (PER air quality technical report).
Presented in Table 1 (of the memo presented in Appendix E) is a summary of results at receptor locations for the
Existing Environment scenario. In contrast to Table 11 of the PER air quality technical report, the results presented
in this memo are for the maximum 24-hour average concentrations of TSP, PM10 and PM2.5 (based on 6 years of
meteorology) as opposed to the 30th highest 24-hour average concentration that was presented in Table 11 of the
technical report.
Also included in Table 2 of the memo in Appendix E, is a reproduction of part of Table 8 of the PER air quality
technical report which contains the percentiles of the 24-hour average concentration of TSP and PM10 based on
monitoring data from the BPA monitoring network. The maximum (or 100th percentile values) are highlighted in blue
text within this table.
A comparison of results from the dispersion modelling (Table 1) and the 100th percentile 24-hour concentrations
from the monitoring data (Table 2) highlights the over-prediction of ground-level impacts by the dispersion modelling.
The MODIS analysis was not essential for the meteorological analysis but was used elsewhere in the studies to
support the PER. As AED developed the wind fields for the coastal modelling (Appendix E of the Technical Report 9
of the PER) consideration of the MODIS analysis (for this purpose) ensured that a wide range of meteorological
conditions were captured. For consistency, these same years of meteorology were used for the AQ assessment.
Other air quality assessments often include a single year of 'typical' meteorology. It is noted the Guidance document
recommends two or more years. What is considered 'typical' can be difficult to define and choice of year(s) is often
arbitrary. AED typical uses between 3 and 5 years of meteorological fields to ensure that a wide range of
meteorological conditions are covered by the model. Consideration of the MODIS analysis is one option for
identifying high and low every meteorological conditions.
23
Issue 1E The air quality report prepared for the PER (Technical Report 9 of PER and Appendix E of this Report) does not
include a Table 13.2. It has hoped that the additional information presented in the memo included in Appendix E of
this report clarifies any outstanding issues.
Cumulative impacts were assessed in Section 5 future environment of Technical Paper 9 of the PER air quality
(Refer to Appendix E of this report).
Revised plots for the future environment (i.e. cumulative impacts) scenario (for Project Scenario A) based on the
maximum predicted 24-hour average concentration of PM10, TSP and PM2.5 have been prepared in the memo
included in Appendix E of this report (Figure 1 to 3).
Note also that the relative contribution of the project to existing levels of dust was presented in Table 16 (Project
Scenario A) and Table 18 (Project Scenario B) of the PER (Technical Report 9 and included in Appendix E of this
report).
We have further reviewed data from DEC for the period from 2002 through 2011 for PM2.5 and PM10.
The assessment has used a background level for PM2.5 of 16.9 micrograms per m3 for the 24 hour average. This
exceeds the average of the 95th percentile 24 hour average for the period 2002-2011 of 14.8 micrograms per m3
and is thus the value adopted is conservative.
The assessment has used an estimate for background levels for PM10 of 21.2 micrograms per m3 based on 70th
percentile of the BPA monitoring data. Data from the DEC website suggests an average 75th percentile 24 hour
average concentration of PM10 for the period 2002 through 2011 of 20.7 micrograms per m3. Thus the use of 21.2
micrograms/m3 is consistent with what would have been obtained using DEC data.
We had not included a background estimate for the annual average PM2.5 but noted that this was likely to be
elevated due to the marine environment. DEC data confirms that this is indeed the case with the annual average
concentration of PM2.5 ranging from 7.6 through 9.2 micrograms/m3 between 2002 and 2011 with an average of 8.5.
It is noted that the ambient air criteria is 8 micrograms/m3. Note that the project contribution to the PM2.5 annual
average is less than 0.1 micrograms/m3. Note that the detail in the contour plot presented in Figure 22 of Technical
Report 9 in the PER would be 'lost' if a background estimate of (say) 8 micrograms/m3 were added to the results.
Table 5 Appendix A (Technical Report 9 of the PER) salt deposition rates are as per 'ATA Environmental (2006):
Bunbury Port Authority - Results of Deposition Dust Monitoring Bunbury Port. Version 2, Report No: 2005/232'.
AED has presented the reference data and has not re-interpreted the data.
Table 8 has been corrected and an updated Air Quality report has been provided as Appendix
Reference: EHPC Archives for Ambient Air Quality NEPM annual reporting 2002 to 2011, Western Australia Air
monitoring Reports, Available online at http://www.scew.gov.au/archive/air/aaq-nepm-reporting.html
Issue 1F Concerned that the management of construction dust has not been addressed.
Response
Construction of the Lanco port facilities will not involve any construction techniques that are unusual or unique. Thus
dust management will be conventional with minimal risk that normal measured to limit dust generation will not work
satisfactorily. The main risk will be in bulk earthworks where water spraying and stabilisation of finished but
disturbed areas will be undertaken.
A construction dust management plan will be prepared to the satisfaction of DEC prior to any construction work.
24
4.2.2
Issue 2 Noise
Issue 2A Concerned about the level and management of noise during operation.
Response
The noise modelling undertaken for the proposal indicated that when the Proposal is considered in isolation it can
comply with the assigned noise levels.
Compliance for the cumulative impact is dependent on port operating conditions in addition to prevailing weather
conditions. It was determined that under worse case conditions there may be an exceedence up to 20% of the time.
During the detailed design phase, Lanco will work with the noise specialist to reduce any impact.
Lanco are working with DEC, OEPA, BPA to comply.
Issue 2B Concerned that not all noise impacts have been considered, such as additional train movements and train horns as
it approached the two rail crossings entering the port.
Response
Noise from trains has been assessed at a screening level using the guidance provided in the Implementation
Guidelines for State Planning Policy 5.4.
Details relating to the rail crossings is also outside scope of the PER and will be discussed with the owner of the rail
during any future upgrade works..
Issue 2C Concerned about the risk of con-compliance during night time hours causing unacceptable levels of community
disturbance and potentially putting pressure to implement restrictions on night time loading activities for all port
users, including the proponent. The proponent should investigate options to reduce the sound power levels of the
ship loaders or look at alternative low noise loader technology.
Sound attenuating pile driving hammers need to be considered by the proponent to mitigate the noise. Also,
consideration as to the hours in which pile driving is done should coincide with the times of the day in which noise
from the port is masked by traffic noise from major roads near the port boundary.
Also concerned about vibration impacts from pile driving at Pelican Point.
Response
During the detailed design further information will be provided on the actual shiploaders proposed to be used. The
sound power levels used in the noise modelling are considered conservative.
It is now proposed to use only one ship loader which is likely to result in a 1-2 dB reduction in noise levels stated in
the PER, depending on the receiving location however the proposal would need to be remodelled to confirm this
(refer to Section 3.2.2).
The construction methodology will consider sound attenuating pile driving hammers however it has been determined
that for the construction of the jetty, piles will be driven via hammering only for landside works. Piles for the marine
works will be socketed and/or pinned reducing the impact to marine fauna (refer to Section 3.2.1).
Based on the separation distance between the piling operations and Pelican Point (approx. 3 km) the vibration from
piling is very unlikely to result in any adverse impacts at this location.
25
Issue 2D The proponent should report actual noise emission levels of the existing operations at the port and clearly indicate if
the existing noise emissions comply with the noise regulations or not.
Response
Further analysis of the existing noise emissions from Bunbury Port conclude that both noise measurements and
noise modelling demonstrate that existing port noise levels can significantly exceed the assigned noise levels. The
basis for this is a result of the following:
The most recent measured noise data for Bunbury Port was collected during May and July 2010. The data was
collected for use in verifying the Port Noise Model.
The data comprises operator attended, spot noise readings collected during the night-time period (between
midnight and 3 a.m.) under calm to very light wind conditions.
The measurements were recorded at locations where noise from port operations was clearly audible and
dominant, and in the absence of any significant extraneous background noise.
Measurements were not recorded at the specific receptor locations identified for the Port Noise Model because
either port operations were inaudible or did not sufficiently dominate noise emissions to provide a reliable
comparison between measured and predicted noise levels.
The most relevant recordings were taken around the Leschenault Inlet, along Koombana Drive and Stirling Street,
i.e. in the vicinity of receptors R1 to R3. Noise levels (LA10) varied between 45 dB(A) and 52 dB(A), depending on
location, prevailing wind conditions and port operating conditions. These levels can be confidently attributed to
activities within the inner harbour area.
The measured levels clearly indicate significant exceedances of the night-time assigned noise levels in this
locale. The magnitude of the exceedances and contributors to exceedances also vary depending on location,
prevailing wind conditions and port operating conditions.
Noise levels measured under similar conditions in previous years are similar in magnitude in this locale. (Ref:
1153213-1-200 Page 2/2 )
Reliable measurements of port noise emissions at other locations (eg Pelican Point) have not been made
because of difficulty in isolating port related noise from extraneous background noise. However, the reliable data
obtained elsewhere was used to verify the Port Noise Model which was shown to be accurate within 3 dB. The
model, therefore, provides a reasonable prediction of noise emissions from port operations.
The latest revision of the Port Noise Model (2010) predicts noise levels at all considered receptors (R1 to R5)
which can exceed the assigned noise levels. Predicted exceedances can be attributed to both individual activities
within the port and to cumulative contributions from multiple, simultaneous activities.
An estimate of the likelihood of night-time exceedances of the assigned noise levels was produced as part the
2010 Port Noise Model update. This was based on port utilisation rates and analysis of historical wind data. This
estimate has recently been revised, based on information supplied by Bunbury Port Authority, to provide a more
up to date assessment of risk associated with port activities. (However, the noise model has not been updated
nor have verification measurements been recorded.) The most recent assessment of risk indicates that the
probability of exceedances of the assigned noise levels is between 3% and 16% depending on the receiving
location.
Issue 2E The proponent should demonstrate how it will work with Bunbury Port Authority to comply with the Environmental
Protection (Noise) Regulations 1997 (noise regulations).
Response
Lanco are continuing to work with BPA and DEC to achieve compliance with the noise regulations.
Issue 2F Noise during construction will require stringent management as there may be a significant degree of exceedance.
Work outside of 7am to 7pm Monday to Saturday would require a submission of a noise management plan. This
process is likely to be controlled by DEC.
Response
Lanco are aware of their obligations in preparing a noise management plan and will comply with DEC requirements.
In preparing this plan Lanco will consult with other Port users in the immediate vicinity of Berth 14A.
26
Issue 2G The assigned noise level in the fourth column of Table 14.4 for receiving location R3 seems incorrect
Response
This is an error.
The assigned noise level should be 42 LA10dB(A) at receiver R3.
Issue 2H The proposal has the potential to contribute to cumulative noise impact due to both port expansion operations and
increased frequency of rail line movements. Studies should be considered together, as opposed to separately, so as
to ensure that the net operational impact will be considered cumulatively on the same local receptors.
It is likely that the proposal will result in exceedence of the permitted noise levels and will need to be addressed at
the design stage to implement controls to ensure operation noise does not exceed statutory requirements.
Response
It is not possible to consider rail noise and port operation noise together for the following reasons:
a) the nature of the noise is different port operational noise is generally continuous in nature while train noise is
intermittent
b) human response to these different sources of noise is different the combined noise level therefore has little
meaning
c) the assessment methodologies are different in both cases for example industrial noise is assessed using
statistical noise descriptors (eg LA10 noise levels which represent the noise level exceed for 10% of the
assessment period) whereas rail noise is assessed using the average noise level (LAeq). It is not possible to
add these different measurement parameters because they measure different things. Assessment periods are
also different (i.e. definitions of day, night etc).
27
4.2.3
Issue 3 - Marine Fauna
Issue 3AManagement of biosecurity should be considered a must have requirement and include:
1.
a requirement that prior to entry to the project area, all commercial vessels be managed to prevent
the introduction of introduced marine pests
2.
ensuring an introduced Marine Pest Management Strategy is in place prior to the commencement of
the project.
Response
It is the responsibility of the Bunbury Port Authority (BPA) to develop a introduce pest management plan. BPA
conduct regular introduced marine pests (IMP) surveys of the Port area and have done so since 1996.
The management of IMP is addressed in the Draft Marine Environment Management Program (Technical Report 11
of the PER). Vessels entering the port from international waters strictly observe International Maritime
Organisations ballast water exchange protocols so that the risk of introduced marine organisms is low
Separating project attributable impacts for IMPs from other IMP impacting processes/source in a commercial port
would also be unfeasible in an IMP monitoring program implemented by the proponent.
Lanco will coordinate with BPA on marine pest management.
In regards to vessels used during dredging works, Lanco would consult with Department of Fisheries for appropriate
inspection of the dredge vessel.
Issue 3B Would like an opportunity to provide comment on the proposed spoil disposal site to assess any potential impact on
fishing operations and habitat.
Response
The PER illustrates the location of the proposed dredge spoil disposal site (refer to figure 5.2 in the PER).
The proposed dredge material placement ground has been situated to minimise impacts to benthic habitat and
associated fisheries and their habitat.
Issue 3C The PER only discusses an observation zone for dolphins during dredging but the proponent should implement
precautions in relation to all marine mammals.
A 300m observation zone is appropriate for dredging activity however it is not appropriate for actives that involve
very loud sudden noises such as pile driving.
The 10km study area to the north and west of the work site should be extended to the south given dolphin
movement patterns.
Response
Please refer to Appendix D of this report for the updated Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan
(DSDMP). (Technical Report 10, Appendix 10 of the PER). Sub Plan 5, Sub Plan 6 and Sub Plan 7 of this
document discuss commitments for all marine fauna monitoring and reporting.
In relation to a 300m observation zone, the proponent disagrees with the comment. The configuration of the Berth
14A layout provides a physical land barrier to mitigate noise emissions piling. Conservative modelling for pile driving
has been conducted using real noise data provided by the modeller, and thresholds for impact have been thoroughly
discussed with peer reviewer as outlined in the Peer Review Report (Technical Report 3, Appendix 7E of the PER)
Mitigation measures for pile driving have been outlined in the Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan
(DSDMP) (Appendix D of this report). Sub Plans 5-7 discuss commitments for Marine Fauna Monitoring and
Reporting. Since the modelling of the worst case scenario for pile driving, the design and construction methodology
has progressed and it is proposed that piles will not be hammered (Refer to Section 3.2.1)
An adaptive management process is committed to in the DSDMP Section 5 - Management Framework with reporting
to a Technical Advisory Committee (including representative of the Dolphin Discovery Centre) during the
construction phase.
The nominated project area encompasses the area where project activities are proposed and project attributable
impacts are likely to occur, it is considered appropriate for the purpose of this assessment. This area extends further
28
Issue 3C to the north and west as this is where the proposed dredge material placement ground is located in Commonwealth
waters. Dredge attributable impacts might also extend in this direction due to prevailing SW winds in the region and
north flowing capes current. Benthic habitat mapping was completed for the entire project area to increase
knowledge of the region and encompass this region. There are expected to be no impacts on marine fauna or other
environmental factors outside of this area.
Issue 3DThe PER should include the presence of Blue Penguins within its marine fauna considerations as there are regular
sightings throughout the year.
Response
The blue penguin is also known as the little penguin. This species (Eudyptula minor) was discussed in the draft
PER. Local information provided by the Dolphin Discovery Centre was included in the draft PER specifically
section 2.4.1 of the Marine Fauna Report includes the following: While no recorded published information on the
presence of little penguins nesting along the Bunbury foreshore could be found, anecdotal information from the
Bunbury Dolphin Discovery Centre identified that penguins may utilise the Bunbury foreshores as nesting habitat.
Issue 3E Reference to relevant literature, including relevant publications must be considered, including all possible
management and mitigation measures supported by peer reviewed scientific studies to avoid and minimise any
impacts to cetaceans as a result of the proposal.
The summary is inadequate and out of date, particularly noting the significance of the area from crabs and finfish in
near shore and estuary areas. Recommends that it be revised to include current information on commercial,
recreational (including Charter Boat Operators) and customary fishing, and include particular reference to the State
of the Fisheries and Aquatic Resources Report 2011/12 and Spatial distribution of shore-based fishers in the greater
Perth Metropolitan area over summer 2010/2011. Final NRM Report - Project No. 09040, November 2011.
Response
This and other source material available at the time was utilised by the authors for the preparation of the technical
report which was included in the PER. Relevant source material (additional to the identified reference) published by
the Department of Fisheries and referred to in the draft PER include:
Bellchambers, L.M., Smith, K.D. and Harris, D. 2006. An Assessment of the Blue Swimmer Crab Fishery in
Geographe Bay. Fisheries Research Report No. 158, Department of Fisheries, Western Australia.
Fletcher, W. J., & Santoro, K. (2010). State of the Fisheries and Aquatic Resources Report 2009/10.
Department of Fisheries, Western Australia.
Harris. D.C., Joll, L.M. and Watson, R.A. (1999) The Western Australian Scallop Industry. Fisheries Research
Report 114.
Huddleston, V. (2006). Assessment of western rock lobster strategic management options: a social
assessment of coastal communities hosting the western rock lobster fishing fleet. Fisheries Management
Paper No. 211, (211).
Kangas, M. I. (2000). Synopsis of the biology and exploitation of the blue swimmer crab , Portunus pelagicus
Linnaeus , in Western Australia Western Australia 6020. Fisheries Research Report 121, (121).
Lenanton, R, StJohn, J, Keay, I, Wakefield, C, Jackson, G, Wise, B, Gaughan, D. (2009). Spatial scales of
exploitation among populations of demersal scalefish: implications for management. WA Department of
Fisheries. Perth: WA Department of Fisheries.
Sumner, N.R., Williamson, R.C., Blight, S.J and Gaughan, D.J. 2008. A 12-month survey of recreational boatbased fishing between Augusta and Kalbarri on the West Coast of Western Australia during 2005-2006.
Fisheries Report 177. Department of Fisheries. 44 pp.
The additional reference referred to was not available at the time the PER was drafted. The draft PER used the
best available information at the time of drafting. The significance of the area for crabs and finfish was discussed in
Technical Report 7 of the PER and drawn from a range of publications by the Department of Fisheries as well as
peer reviewed material and other technical reports.
29
Issue 3F Concerned about the long -term adverse effects on the local Bunbury dolphin population given the importance to
tourism activities and the duration of the dredging campaign and the possible rock fracturing campaign.
There has been a significant increase in the dolphin visits and time spent with the Dolphin Discovery Centre
interaction zone over the final quarter of 2012 compared with the previous 5 years.
Response
The initial screening and scoping for the PER approvals document identified that consideration of potential impacts
on dolphins was a priority with respect to marine ecology. Hence, dolphins were a significant focus of the marine
ecology section of the PER. Lanco have proposed a monitoring approach based on widely used methodologies that
addresses the key questions regarding potential impacts of the proposed project.
It should be noted that the Bunbury dolphin population currently co-exists with existing extensive port facilities.
The long term effects of pile driving on the distribution of dolphin has been studied and no long term displacement of
dolphin species is recorded (Wursig et al., 2000). Should rock fracturing be required during the project, exceedance
zones based on noise impact criteria and thresholds are proposed to mitigate impacts on dolphin populations.
A visual monitoring program is also proposed in partnership with the Dolphin Discovery Centre to build on the data
collected as part of the SWMRP. It is not proposed to undertake the visual survey continuously during the dredging
campaign. However, acoustic monitoring will be undertaken for the duration (also prior and beyond).
The proponent has noted the increase in dolphin visits and if provided with the information, will incorporate it as part
of baseline monitoring. As the proposed project has not commenced, the reported changes in dolphin habitat use
are not project attributable and the proponent at this stage cannot provide information or a point of view as the
causative factors responsible for the reported change in habitat use.
The proponent has continuous baseline passive acoustic monitoring information that has been collected since
August 2011 nearby the DDC interaction zone. This will provide robust information for this period against which to
assess spatial changes in dolphin habitat use
Issue 3G Concerned about the underwater noise impacts to the local dolphin population given that the pile driving, rock
fracturing and its duration is not known at this stage. Any activity which would negatively impact on the population to
the point that they would leave the area is not acceptable.
It should be acknowledged that fish are potentially impacts by noise associated with pile driving and rock fracturing.
An acoustic blanket across the inner harbour entrance should be considered.
Response
Lanco are aware of the potential underwater noise impacts on marine fauna during the construction of the berth and
jetty structure. The construction methodology for the project will be designed to reduce these potential impacts
wherever possible.
It has been determine that for the construction of the jetty, piles will be driven via hammering only for landside works.
Piles for the marine works will be socketed and/or pinned reducing the impact to marine fauna.
The potential impact of the proposed activities on fish has been considered in the PER (refer to Technical Report
7A). Any behavioural impacts from rock fracturing are expected to be very short term and reversible. Assessment of
the impact zone for pile driving indicates that noise generation from this activity will be confined entirely to the Inner
Harbour which is a busy industrial commercial port. The proposed mitigation measures for pile driving and rock
fracturing are focussed on reducing the potential intensity of the disturbance, and as such are relevant for fish as
well.
The use of an acoustic blanket may be considered once a dredging contractor is engaged. Given Berth 14A is within
a working harbour the practical benefits of this potential mitigation tool versus complexities with deployment may not
be achievable.
30
Issue 3H Concerned about the overall period of the rock fracturing, pile driving and dredging program.
Recent local research showed a temporary decline in dolphin abundance in the area during the time of marine
construction of the Binningup Desalination Plant. Noted that if construction works went for a longer period there may
be a decline in Dolphin abundance which will impact the local tourism operations.
Response
An adaptive management process is committed to in the DSDMP Section 5 - Management Framework with reporting
to a Technical Advisory Committee (including representative of the Dolphin Discovery Centre) during the
construction phase (Refer to Appendix D of this report).
The Koombana Bay Baseline Marine Monitoring Report (Technical Report 19, Appendix 11 of the PER) provides
detail on the results of the ongoing monitoring program implemented more than a year ago. This report is iterative as
each six week set of data is incorporated into the dataset. In particular an array of continuous passive acoustic
monitors has provided a detailed baseline data set on dolphin occurrence in the southern area of Koombana Bay
and Inner Harbour against which to detect change during construction and post construction.
The Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP) Sub Plan 5 details commitments to Dolphin
Monitoring with the Dolphin Discovery Centre
Issue 3I Construction activities should be avoided between the following periods:

September to February to ensure impacts on fish spawning and mitigation events are minimised.
October to May for cessation of rock fracturing and caution on dredging due to dolphin breeding.
Early October to end of December at the marine area close to the old Power Station site as it is an important
resting location for dolphins and a regular swim site for the tourism business
High impact construction work should be conducted during June to September for rock fracturing and July or August
for pile driving.
Response
A construction plan has yet to be developed. Once a dredging contractor is engaged a construction schedule can be
developed.
Where possible construction activities will consider periods which may impact on the life cycle of marine fauna.
31
Issue 3J The proponent should develop a monitoring program of appropriate temporal and spatial scale that builds on the
comprehensive and long-term South West Marine Research Program (SWMSP).
Would like the proponent to engage with the SWMSP partners and design a monitoring program that builds on this
long term research.
The Passive Acoustic Monitoring (PAM) techniques proposed to monitor the local dolphin population is not the most
appropriate methodology to evaluate potential impacts in this scenario.
Response
Lanco has developed a monitoring program that is of an appropriate spatial and temporal scale for addressing
potential key impacts related to the proposed project. The monitoring program contains a component able to provide
continuous monitoring of habitat use by dolphins, including, importantly, during the night where other methods are
not effectively feasible. Habitat use by dolphins is known to differ across the diurnal cycle (e.g. Shane et al., 1986;
Benoit-Bird and Wursig, 2004). The Passive Acoustic Monitoring (PAM) method has received international
endorsement in peer review journals on marine mammal ecology and marine impact assessments for many years.
Please refer to http://www.chelonia.co.uk/publications.htm where over 100 journal articles on the method are cited.
For example:
Elliott, R.G. Dawson, S.M. and Henderson, S.D. Acoustic monitoring of habitat use by bottlenose dolphins in
Doubtful Sound, New Zealand. New Zealand Journal Marine and Freshwater Research. New Zealand Journal of
Marine and Freshwater Research iFirst, 2011, 1-13.
Gallus A, Dhne M, Verfu UK, Brger S, Adler S, Siebert U, Benke H (2012). Use of static passive acoustic
monitoring to assess the status of the 'Critically Endangered' Baltic harbour porpoise in German waters. Endang
Species Res 18:265-278.
The PAM technology has also improved sensitivity and specificity well beyond that available using vessel based
monitoring methods. The monitoring program is spatially comprehensive with respect to the potential area of
disturbance, and is consistent with the principles of sound experimental design.
It is proposed that a component of the monitoring program during construction will include the Dolphin Discovery
Centre who are a member of the SWMSP. This will provide validation and useful further interpretation of results
obtained from PAM data.
Lanco is committed to building on existing monitoring by utilising the Dolphin Discovery Centre and building on data
collected as part of the SWMRP.
Published science supports the strong view that the PAM technique is the most appropriate to use to evaluate
potential impacts in the current scenario. The proponent reiterates that the technique is well proven and is now
widely utilised, including within a large number of peer reviewed journal articles, references to a number of which
were included in the draft PER documentation. The technique is directly used to assess the impacts of coastal
development on dolphins.
In contrast to boat-based surveys, PAM techniques are un-confounded as there is no interaction between the
sampler (boat) and the animals which may change their behaviour. As already discussed, PAM techniques also
have the advantage of being able to monitor 24 hours a day. Due to the large amounts of data able to be collected, if
appropriately deployed, they are able to detect fine scale changes in dolphin movement with high certainty.
The proponent agrees that in isolation, the PAM methodology will have difficulty discerning whether acoustic signals
come from a few animals vocalising a lot or many animals vocalising a little. This is why a visual survey of dolphins
will also be undertaken to assess the behaviour of dolphins in the Berth 14A area and assess changes in the
distribution and abundance of individual dolphins at the scale of the proposed development. Refer to Draft Dredging
and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP) Sub Plan 5 (Appendix D of this report). Together, the two
monitoring approaches represent a survey approach that is temporally and spatially relevant with respect to the
scale of the proposed project and of at sufficient resolution to detect ecologically meaningful changes in habitat use
of dolphins in Koombana Bay at and adjacent to the proposed development area.
Issue 3K It is suggested that the proponent contributes funding towards dolphin (cetacean) research that supports the viability
of a dolphin population in perpetuity within Koombana Bay.
Response
Lanco will continue to support the Dolphin Discovery Centre through the sharing of information gathered as part of
the management and monitoring of this project.
Lanco has a defined corporate sponsorship program that may consider applications after project is concluded.
32
4.2.4
Issue 4 Marine Environmental Quality.
Issue 4A
Overflow dredging is not supported unless it could be demonstrated that the overflow would not increase the extent
and visual impact of the dredge plume nor result in turbidity that would negatively impact the marine environment.
Response
The proponent notes the comment. Realistic worst case and conservative overflow dredging has been adopted for
dredge plume modelling as outlined in Appendix 1: Technical Report 1: Indicative Dredge Plan for Modelling.
Please refer to Appendix 4: Technical Report 4: Hydrodynamic and Sediment Transport Modelling which outlines in
detail the results of this modelling and the detailed independent peer review of the modelling exercise.
Please refer to Appendix 10: Technical Report 10: Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP)
Sub Plan 1 which commits to validation of the dredge plume model to be undertaken through field measurements at
commencement of the dredging program.
A commitment is contained in Sub Plan 3 of Appendix 10 to monitor plume extent/intensity/duration in the Zone of
Moderate Impact and Zone of Influence during dredging. Sub Plan 3 outlines adaptive management steps to
address exceedances/anomalies including reduction/cessation of overflow. It is also important to note that reducing
dredge productivity (no overflow) can increase the duration of dredging.
A Technical Advisory Committee (with Bunbury Port as a member) is committed to in the DSDMP - Section 5
Management Framework for reporting and consultation in relation to dredging activities.
Issue 4B
Consideration should be given to the impact of the plume from the capital and maintenance dredging on the nearby
beaches. Modelling results and prediction should be validated following the commencement of construction
Response
The proponent notes the comment. Validation of the model will be undertaken through field measurements at
commencement of the dredging. This commitment is contained within Sub Plan 1 of Appendix 10: Technical Report
10: Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP). Sub Plan 3 of the DSDMP outlines adaptive
management steps to address exceedances/anomalies including reduction/cessation of overflow. It is also important
to note that reducing dredge productivity can increase the duration of dredging.
Issue 4C
Further consideration should be given to optimising the disposal of dredge material such that relatively fine material
is effectively covered by coarser material that more closely matches the particle size found naturally in the area, thus
minimising the potential mobility of the disposal mound.
Response
The proponent agrees with the comment. This commitment has been incorporated in the revised Draft DSDMP Sub Plan 9 which will be provided to the Commonwealth for assessment with the Sea Dumping Permit application.
33
Issue 4D
Concerned that there is no assessment of the marine impacts if a back hoe dredge is deployed instead of a cutter
suction dredge.
Response
The Indicative Dredge Plan for Modelling (Technical Report 1, Appendix 1 of the PER) outlines in detail the
conservative basis for selecting cutter suction dredge (CSD) as a realistic conservative worst case scenario for
dredge plume modelling (in accordance with international best practice environmental assessments where
uncertainty in dredge equipment selection exists at the time of environmental assessment).
The sediment release from this type of dredge is significantly higher than backhoe dredges. Modelling in the
conservative case has been selected as 40 weeks which is longer than probably required using a CSD. A
combination of high release from a CSD and extended timeframe (40 weeks) provides a conservative basis of
assessment for dredge plume effects including capturing a range of seasonal weather conditions. A backhoe dredge
will reduce the intensity of the spill but the duration of dredging will increase.
The Hydrodynamic and Sediment Transport Modelling (Technical Report 4, Appendix 4 of the PER) for the project
outlines in detail the results of this modelling and the detailed independent peer review of modelling scenarios and
methodology.
Issue 4E
An explanation is needed why the wave modelling method was selected as the best approach.
Response
The model used included data from currents, wind patterns and wave energy. Wave energy was modelled in
Koombana Bay as it is likely to re-suspend fresh deposits created be sedimentation of dredge plume suspended
sediments.
The hydrodynamic and sediment transport modelling has been independently reviewed by Des Mills and therefore
the approach is considered appropriate.
Issue 4F
There is a lack of details about the key aspects of the marine environment, including water quality and details on the
effects of cumulative impacts associated with increased poor flushing in an environment. Additional dredge works
may exacerbate any existing problems.
It is recommended that the recent monitoring data be included in the PER for comparative purposes.
Response
The PER provides substantial information on the marine environment. Please refer to the supporting documentation:
Marine Environmental Quality Studies (Technical Report 3, Appendix 3 of the PER) which provides a detailed review
of baseline information on the marine environment. This report also contains:
Appendix 3.A: TSM Mapping Based on MODIS Images Report
Appendix 3.B: Total Suspended Solids Baseline Study
Appendix 3.C: Laboratory Results for Sediment and Water Testing
Appendix 3.D: Acid Sulphate Soil Results and Report
Appendix 3.E: Flushing Study
Assessments of predicted dredging impacts are assessed in Hydrodynamic and Sediment Transport Modelling
(Technical Report 4, Appendix 4 of the PER).
Characterisation of the existing water quality attributes based on sampling plan driven by flushing study is reported
in Koombana Bay Baseline Marine Monitoring Report (Technical Report 19, Appendix 11 of the PER).
Monitoring processes and adaptive management processes during dredging activities are outlined in Sub Plan 1;
Sub Plan 3 and Sub Plan 4 of the Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (Technical Report 10,
Appendix 10 of the PER).
The Koombana Bay Baseline Marine Monitoring Report (Technical Report 19 Appendix 11 of the PER) provides
detail on the results of the ongoing monitoring program implemented more than a year ago. This report is iterative as
each six week set of data is incorporated into the dataset.
34
Issue 4G
There is insufficient information in the PER to enable outcome based conditions to be formulated for the marine
environmental quality. The following issues should be addressed:
The MEMP needs to demonstrate that the correct implementation of the marine environmental quality frameworks
(EQMF) including monitoring sites for water and sediment quality within the moderate environmental protection
area and just outside (high environmental protection area)
A commitment to managing the construction and operation impacts of the proposal to protect environmental
values including ecosystem health and recreation is required. There are threshold criteria associated with these
values that will need to be met at key location in the vicinity of the development. The MEMP needs to identify
these values and where they apply spatially and where they can and cannot be met and the management
strategies that will be implemented if they are not protected.
The MEMP needs to detail the management measures and contingency plans that are proposed to meet the
environmental values, objectives and levels of ecosystem protection during operations; and
Cathodic protection of the sheet pile wall must be considered in relation to ongoing threats to the marine
environmental quality and detailed in the MEMP.
Response
Figure 3.2 of this Report has identified possible monitoring sites which may be identified in the final MEMP however
the benefit of specifying where the water sample is taken is limited due to the impact of existing port activities and
separating out what is Lanco project attributable.
Section 3.2 of this report provides additional clarification in the design of the draft MEMP. Management measures
have been outlined in the draft MEMP as best as possible. It is considered that these are outcome based however
the final MEMP will be prepared in consultation with the OEPA would be lead consultation with key agencies.
The cathodic protection system proposed for the project is impressed current, not sacrificial anode. This system will
not impact negatively on the environment.
Issue 4H
The timber jetty within the Port has been removed and may have changed the wave patterns and current flows in
that part of the bay. The proponent should check if wave pattern and current flow data needs to be updated.
Removal of the piles may have released potential COC
Response
Ongoing wave and current data has been collected as part of the baseline monitoring program by the proponent
(Technical Report 19: Koombana Bay Baseline Marine Monitoring Report).
The Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP) Sub Plan 1 (refer to Appendix D of this report
for the updated report) which commits to validation of the dredge plume model will be undertaken through field
measurements at commencement of dredging. 2012-2013 wave and current data together with BPA data (wind,
current and wave data from Beacon 10 and Beacon 3 if available) will be used to confirm modelling parameters and
validation through field monitoring early in the dredging program to confirm modelling predictions and behaviour of
plume.
COC's will be monitored during construction and if COC's are present then Lanco will adopt appropriate
management actions.
35
Issue 4I
Recommends additional water quality monitoring be undertaken in the vicinity of the Leschenault Cut to ensure there
is no adverse impact on sensitive mangrove communities.
Monitoring should be located on both sides of the entrance to monitor the dredge plume, and mitigation strategies
prepared in the event that the plume does extend to the Leschenault Estuary
Response
There may be some confusion on the terminology regarding location of the Leschenault "Cut". Using accepted local
terminology for place names "The Cut" is located north of Koombana Bay whereas The Plug" is located in the
southwest of Koombana Bay leading to Leschenault Inlet and the mangrove community. For clarification of these
terms, please refer to Figure 2 in the Indicative Dredge Plan for Modelling of (Technical Report 1 of the PER).
Monitoring of Project attributable impacts during the construction phase in the marine environment are addressed in
Technical Report 10: Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP) (Refer to Appendix D of this
report). Sub Plan 4 of the DSDMP identifies two monitoring stations, one on either side of "The Plug" leading to the
Leschenault Inlet and the mangrove community.
Issue 4J
Concerned that there have been no evaluation of the dumping of the dredge spoil in the marine environment.
Response
The disposal of dredged material will be addressed in a separate application. Given the proposed disposal site is in
Commonwealth Waters, a Sea Dumping Permit will be submitted to SEWPaC for consideration and assessment in
February 2013.
There is no bilateral agreement in place for the consideration of this project.
Issue 4K
Concerned about the unknown impacts during dredging including the alternation of sediment pathways and
alteration to water currents.
Response
Extensive characterisation of sediment pathways and currents has been undertaken as outlined in Hydrodynamic
and Sediment Transport Modelling including LiDAR bathymetry, dye flow testing and detailed analysis of waves and
currents to inform the predictions for dredge plume and sediment deposition(Technical Report 4, Appendix 4 of the
PER).
The report also contains a detailed independent peer review. Less than 3mm of dredge material is expected outside
the inner Berth. The Dredge footprint is located inside the inner harbour and so the likelihood of alteration to
sediment and current pathways in Koombana Bay from excavating this area is virtually nil.
36
4.2.5
Issue 5 Ground and surface water quality
Issue 5A
Need for permanent dewatering on site.
Response
The design has progressed since the first draft of the PER and we are now able to state with certainty that no
permanent dewatering will occur.
Issue 5B
Basalt is only 9m thick close to the area to be dredged (WIN bore 20013260) and could be thinner than shown in
Figure 2.2 of the PB Report near the south-western end of the area to be dredged. The section in Figure 2.2 shows
thickening of the basalt in that area that has no basis from available drill hole data. There is a risk that blasting could
fracture the basalt forming pathways for water to flow between the harbour and the Yarragadee aquifer, which
underlies the basalt. The desktop hydrogeological assessment could be seen as not adequately addressing the
perceived risk.
Experienced contractors should be used ensuring they are away of the confining layer of the aquifer.
No information is presented to support the statement that only 20,000m3 of basalt will need to be removed or a
method for disposal.
Response
Win bore 20013260 was indicated on the cross section (Figure 2-2 of the Technical Report), as well as others that
are in the vicinity of the site. Win bore 20013260 is removed from site, while WIN bores on site (20013013 and
23034160) showed basalt in excess of 40m thickness. Therefore the interpretation was done as shown in Figure 22. The risk of fracturing from blasting was considered as very low, but a recommendation for blasting by a blasting
expert/specialist was still included if blasting is deemed necessary.
The exact quantity of basalt to be removed has yet to be determined. Once the quantity of basalt is known the
method of disposal will be finalised in consultation with relevant authorities. The disposal of dredged material will be
addressed in a separate application. Where possible basalt will be reused on site.
Issue 5C
The proponent should investigate the potential impacts on shallow groundwater flows in the area it intends
constructing the coal storing shed as any interruption to the flows may impact the vegetation on the eastern side of
the Port Reserve boarding Vittoria Bay in the Leschenault Estuary.
Site works associated with the decommissioning of any septic tank and leach drain systems should be mindful of
their potential impact on shallow groundwater resources.
Response
This would only be the case if deep, continuous foundations or walls were to be constructed. This is not the case.
Issue 5D
The proponent should carry out groundwater monitoring to detect any impact on the Yarragadee aquifer. Including
close monitoring of water levels in monitoring bore BY3A and any used Yarragadee bores in the Berth 14A area
(including the Port Authority and Power Station sites)
Response
BY3A is a good monitoring point and was monitored in the past by the DoW. This should be re-instated and will be
considered when preparing the environmental management plan for the project.
In general Lanco support monitoring any unused boreholes in the vicinity of the Berth.
37
Issue 5E
All groundwater resources are fully allocated and there will be a need for the operator to secure water from
alternative sources or secure a trade.
Response
It is understood that there are two unused Yarragadee bores available within the vicinity of the site. Lanco will apply
and obtain a licence under the Rights in Water and Irrigation Act 1914 for the decommissioning and
recommissioning under new ownership of these unused Yarragadee bores.
Further discussions have been had with the Department of Water and a license application will be made for use of
the bore, subsequent to this Lanco will engage with immediate area parties based on seeking a water trade.
It is understood that particular companies in the area involved in Mineral Sands production have excess to needs
water available for trade.
Lanco is preparing a water balance program to accommodate the mass total need of approximately 52 mega litres
per annum by means of potable water use, process water use plus water recycling, water harvesting and water
recharge.
For potable water, Bunbury Port Authority purchases water from Bunbury Water Board (Aqwest) and resells it to the
operators of each berth. Under this provision, Lanco will purchase water from BPA. The point of connection is just
outside northern corner of the Alcoa berth (adjacent to Berth 14A).
Issue 5F
Considering the expected Maximum Depth to Groundwater at the site, will appropriate vertical separations to
groundwater be achieved from the base of such infrastructure. Similarly for such water management infrastructure
for wastewater management associated with administration, operation, stormwater management structures
(underground storage tanks, GPT and soak wells), chemical and hazardous substances including fuel and oil
storage (below ground tanks) etc.
Response
The train unloading substructure will be designed as a water retaining structure. The design is proposed to be a
water resisting basement which caters for the uplift forces due to water pressure and is sized to have sufficient mass
and frictional resistance to prevent flotation. The design makes use of a diaphragm wall as part of the permanent
works. The diaphragm walls will be constructed deeper than the formation level for the bottom slab. Once the slab is
connected to the diaphragm wall, it will act as a single structure stopping any material/chemicals/water etc.
interacting with the soils outside the buried concrete structure.
Other underground storage tanks, GPT and soak well will also be designed using prudent standards.
Issue 5G
In regards to leachate management, it is uncertain whether the recycling system is of a type and design that requires
additional measures to eliminate any risk of on-site or off-site contamination during a flood event.
Response
The leachate treatment scheme being developed will ensure that even during a flood event, contaminated water will
not mix with surface water.
Issue 5H
Onsite sewage system is the most practical. It is expected that appropriate buffers to the estuary and harbour are
applied to the sewage system to ensure not nutrients or other contaminates are leached into the natural
environment.
An application will be required to be made to the local authority for approval of the system prior to installation in a
statutory for under the Health Regulations 1974.
Response
Lanco are proposing to use a "Biomax" package sewage treatment plant coupled with a lined wastewater disposal
pond. Effluent will be treated to a Class B standard and will be suitable for use in landscaping.
Buffer Zones around the plant and pond will comply with the requirements of the Department of Health WA.
An application will be made with Bunbury City Council for approval under the Health Regulations Act 1974.
38
Issue5I
Parameters of any water being discharged into the harbour are not defined. In addition to TSS and TDS parameters
being confirmed, the proponent must commit to ensuring no discoloured (black) water enters with the marine or
nearby riverine or estuarine water bodies). Water quality for infiltration also needs to be defined.
It is recommended that further information is provided in the Water Management document on surface water
drainage and the capacity of the infiltration basin and frequency of the storm events.
Response
The final water management plan for the site is still being developed however the concept for the water
management system. The final water management plan will confirm parameters of any water being discharged into
the inner harbour.
Please refer to Section 3.2.4 of this report for more information on the concept plan.
Issue 5J
Expects structures such as the workshop and spare store facility where hazardous chemicals and fuels are used
and stored to have a hardstand for wash-down runoff can be caught and treated.
Response
Designs of the relevant facilities will meet storage handling and transport requirements for all hazardous chemicals
and fuels sufficient to meet regulatory requirements.
Issue 5K
It is unclear what the capacity of the infiltration basin/ponds will be. The frequency of storm events for these ponds is
not stated, therefore, it is unclear how often the overflow from runoff from hardstand areas may discharge into the
harbour and/or estuary from surface water drainage cannot be adequately assessed using the information provided
in the Water Management document (2011).
Response
The runoff water from bunded areas are collected and pumped into waste water treatment plant within the site to be
recycled back into the system. The sump pumps will start on high level signal in the sump. Once the water
management study is complete, every bunded area will be looked individually to ensure that the sump pumps are
capable of removing the water from the bunded aread.
An enquiry form has been sent to DEC to initiate the process for a works approval for the waste water treatment
plant.
Issue 5L
Fit for purpose water use needs to be considered for dust suppression, fire suppression, rail unloading works,
irrigation and wash-down activities. Technical Report 18 does address fit for use however it is labelled as preliminary
Response
Fit for purpose water will be used for dust suppression, fire suppression, rail unloading works, irrigation and washdown activities.
39
4.2.6
Issue 6 Human health and amenity
Issue 6A
The proponent should consider the need for the preparation of a health risk assessment.
Statements and comments addressing potential 'impacts on public health' are recommended to be integrated to the
document under the appropriate headings particularly in relation to potential hazards or nuisances.
Response
A HIA is not considered necessary given that the site is located within a working port and the zoning is consistent
with the proposed use. Ongoing consultation will be undertaken with the Department of Health so the risks of the
project are fully understood.
The need for a HIA has been further discussed with the Department of Health at a meeting on 11 February 2013 and
they have confirmed that this approached is appropriate.
Issue 6B
The Port of Bunbury need to be confident that they can manage the risks from mosquitoes and mosquito-borne
diseases on public health and the associated impacts.
BPA should have sufficient resources to continue mosquito management for the future of the development.
Response
This is outside the scope of the PER however Lanco will work with BPA to ensure the project does not contribute to
any impacts.
Issue 6C Risk of spontaneous combustion
Response
Further investigations are currently being undertaken by the University of Queensland School of Mining and
Metallurgical to determine the risk of the coal to spontaneously combust. The results of this study are expected in
March 2013 and will be used to inform the detailed design and the management of coal.
Griffin Coal mines have been operating since 1927 and are well versed in mitigating such issues. Stockpile and
storage management are the best methods to remove such risks.
Lanco currently exports 750,000 tonnes via Kwinana Bulk Terminal without incident. During the detailed design
phase this risk will be further reduced through the use of technology such as water misting, infra-red detection
cameras and use of appropriate building materials.
Issue 6D Concerned that some pollutants such as fine particulate matter and heavy metals such as mercury will increase the
risk of ill health in local communities and through accumulation on the food chain.
Assessment of potential contamination of the dredged material on public health needs to be assessed
Response
Characterisation of dredge sediments has been conducted in accordance with National Assessment Guidelines for
Dredging and screening levels for all contaminants of potential concern including mercury (average and range at
least an order of magnitude below guidelines) are below screening levels outlined in the guidelines.
The material is therefore deemed to be suitable for unconfined disposal.
The Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP) Sub Plan 4 (refer to Appendix D of this report)
discusses commitments for Water and Sediment quality monitoring during dredging.
Air quality emissions from the operations are addressed in the Air Quality- Dust Emissions (Technical Report 9 of
the PER). The Marine Environment Management Plan also outlines monitoring during ongoing operations postconstruction.
40
Issue 6E No consultation or discussion with Department of Health (DoH) in relation to the number of potentially hazardous
material and chemicals. It is also noted that there has been no investigation (at this stage) as to the extent of
contamination or of the potential threat to public health.
All identified Chemical of Potential Concern (CoPC) are to be investigated and appropriate management plans
developed, including an asbestos management plan.
Response
A terrestrial sampling and analysis plan has been prepared and it is proposed that detailed site investigations works
will commence over the next few months and prior to construction.
Once the results of the detailed site investigations works are known consultation will be undertaken with DoH.
If asbestos is identified during the detailed site investigations an Asbestos management plan shall be prepared prior
to any site works
Issue 6F Ensure that boat users of Koombana bay are not impacted by the proposal.
Response
All vessels destined for the Lanco berth will be under the control of the BPA when transiting the approach channel to
the Harbour. The dredging is only for the immediate approach to the berth and for the berthing pocket. Thus there
will be no impact on other recreational vessels within Koombana Bay
Issue 6G To further mitigate the visual impact of the proposal, it is recommended that all buildings proposed have an external
cladding that is non-reflective and coloured in a neutral earth tone to blend in with the landscape as far as
practicable.
Response
During the detailed design phase, measures to reduce the visual impact of the proposal including the finishes will be
considered.
41
4.2.7
Issue 7 Other issues
Issue 7A
The community would like to be consulted on the future plans for Bunbury Port
Response
Community consultation on the future Port operations is the responsibility of BPA and is outside the scope of the
PER.
Issue 7B
Emergency management response plans will be formulated by the BPA and other relevant responsible public
authorities where appropriate, in order to response to and adequately cope with all quantified risks.
Response
Lanco will continue to liaise with BPA on relevant management plans. During both the design stage and operations a
full risk assessment, Lanco will undertake a risk assessment of its operations as well as how those operations may
be impacted by and on by others within the Port of Bunbury
Issue 7C
Potential fire impact assessment is inadequate in forms of fire safety risk and environmental impacts associated with
a fire.
Response
Lanco has prepared a management program which is in use for the management of coal stockpiles open to
atmosphere, along with fire and safety management plans at other ports (Refer to Appendix C of this report).
This demonstrates Lancos intimate knowledge of the product they have been mining since 1927.
For the project, any combustion process occurring inside the shed will be managed by evacuation of the combustible
material and managed by protocols still to be prepared.
It is proposed to incorporate thermal and infra-red imaging systems to pre-detect combustible coal and remove it
prior to delivery. The materials of the shed construction are proposed to not be susceptible and the water misting
systems inside the shed will reduce the risk.
Run off from deluge system will be contained within the sites run off processes. This will be further enhanced by
engaging a specialised qualified Combustion Engineers to ensure advanced methodology and practices are world
class and lead to a highly safety based operation.
Issue 7D
Management and mitigation measures should be identified for how inhibiting access will be addressed for social
and/or economic impacts to fishers
Response
The proposed construction area at Berth 14A is currently off-limits to fishing as it forms part of the Bunbury Port
Inner Harbour. While the draft PER identified that information on the fine spatial scale of fishing activity was
generally lacking, the Port itself is not known to be a focus of any commercial fishing activities. There is a low level
of recreational fishing effort, but this recreational fishing experience is substitutable locally with other locations.
42
Issue 7E
Other port locations, such as Kwinana would be more suitable to export coal has they are not boarded by residential
areas.
Response
During the preparation of the PER several other options were considered however Bunbury was considered the
most suitable as the site was appropriately zoned and it is an existing port.
Issue 7F
A referral under the EPBC Act would be required.
Response
A referral under the EPBC Act was submitted to SEWPaC for consideration in 2011.
A Sea Dumping Permit will also be submitted to SEWPaC and at such time a determination of the EPBC Referral
will be made.
Issue 7G
The PER does not consider the requirements of State Coastal Planning Policy 2.6 (SPP 2.6) and Development
Control Policy 1.8 Canal Estates and Other Artificial Waterway Developments (DC 1.8). Whilst SPP 2.6 exempts
port facilities from requiring a foreshore reserve to allow for physical processes/coastal hazards, such development
must be considered within a coastal hazard risk management and adaption planning measures have been agreed
to. The development must be designed to withstand a 1 in 100 annual exceedance probability event and to
accommodate sea level rise of 0.9 metres.
Proper costal setback assessment and long term coastal management plans are important
Response
The water management study and design of the proposal takes into account 1 in 100 year event.
The proposal does not impact on any open space/recreational land however Lanco will continue to liaise with BPA
on the long term management of this coastal area.
Issue 7H
Concern about the traffic delays train blockage of other port access roads during construction and operation.
Lengthy delays to traffic ingress and egress is unacceptable.
Concerned that the default closure of Estuary Drive may come into effect with this proposal.
It is recommended that discussions with the BPA, DoT, WAPC and Main Roads WA be undertaken regarding the
potential impact of the proposal on Estuary Drive.
Response
The train unloading facility is located in a location where it should not interfere with traffic access to other port users
however Lanco will consult with Port users to determine a train time schedule management plan.
The closure of Estuary Drive has not been considered as part of this PER however a traffic management plan will be
prepared during construction and will be discussed with relevant stakeholders.
Issue 7I
The notification of public comment is not acceptable, affected parties should be directly notified. Consultation over
December/January holiday periods is not acceptable.
Response
Consultation has been undertaken in accordance with the EPA guidelines.
Advertisements were placed in the SW Times and The West at the commencement of the public review and a week
prior to the closing date.
The public review period was extended by two weeks (to eight weeks) due to the Christmas Period.
43
Issue 7J
In addition to the consultation already undertaken, the following stakeholders should be consulted during the
detailed design phase, preparation of management plans and during constructions phases:
Gnaarla Karla Booja native title claim group
Department of Health
Murdoch researches on the short and long term impacts on the dolphins.
Response
Lanco will continue to liaise with these groups.
Recent meetings have been held with Department of Health (11 February 2013) and Department of Fisheries (4
February 2013).
Issue 7K
Port users would like the opportunity to review a Construction Environmental Management Plans (CEMP)
Response
Lanco will consult with relevant port users during the preparation of the CEMP
Issue 7L
Concern that Bunbury will not see any economic benefits from the project as it offers very little long term
employment or benefits to the local community.
Response
During operation, approximately 70 staff would be required to operate the facility on a rotational shift basis. An
additional 16 staff may be required to assist with administrative support services.
There is also likely to be several indirect employment benefits. Furthermore the project will permit expanded
operations at the Collie Operations with potential to add up to 1000 extra positions to the companys employment.
Width the increase in production and personnel at mine, increased staff will be required for Rail operations as well
as other services support within the Port Of Bunbury and surrounding areas. Lanco and Griffin are investigating
advanced technologies for improved operations therefore it is anticipated that skilled positions will be required, this
in turn will lead to improvements within the specialised education sectors and a large number of sundry support
businesses. Given the demands placed on families by FIFO operations we believe we are offering gainful
employment opportunities whilst maintaining lifestyle and family values.
Issue 7M
Data collected from the assessment, management and monitoring of this project should be may publicly available.
Response
Where required, data will be made available where it contributes to the positive future management and assessment
of the local environment.
Issue 7N
Advises that the coal identified in the PER for export is subject to the Collie Coal (Griffin) Agreement Act 1979 (State
Agreement). Under the State Agreement proposal relating to the development of the coal resources are subject to
approval by the Minister for State Development. Requests for the export of the coal resource are subject to approval
from the state are also subject to Minister's consent.
Clause 25 of this agreement provided the Minister must consent to any agreement for the sale of coal for export
from the State.
Response
This is outside the scope of the PER.
44
Issue 7O
Some sections of the dune area in the northern portion of the site may be impacted by the proposed works and it is
known that Aboriginal burial remains exist within the dune systems in the Bunbury area and are likely to be
considered sites to which Section 5 of the Aboriginal Heritage Act 1972 applies.
It is recommended that the proponent consider undertaking an archaeological assessment, if an assessment hasn't
already occurred, for the northern section of the project area, if impacts to the original dune system are proposed to
be undertaken.
Response
Lanco has further consulted with the Department of Indigenous Affairs (DIA) on this issue and a requirement will be
included in the CEMP that if excavation of the dunal system is required specialist advice will be sort. During
construction if any remains are found, work in the area will stop immediately and DIA will be contacted.
Issue 7P
Land values in the East Bunbury and Pelican Point area will be significantly lowered due to increased noise, dust
and road congestion.
Response
There is no evidence to suggest that the project will lead to an decrease in land values.
Noise modelling at Pelican Point demonstrates no exceedences.
Lanco are working with BPA to ensure the facility complies with the noise criteria set by DEC.
Issue 7Q
Concerned that no soil sampling, analysis and reporting has been undertaken. Would like a comprehensive
sampling and analysis of soil quality be undertaken prior to Ministerial consent being provided.
Response
A detailed site investigation (DSI) will be completed prior to any earthworks being undertaken on the site.
Preparation of a DSI is not a requirement of the PER.
Issue 7R
No management and mitigation measures have been provided to manage entrapment of fauna in trenches.
Response
The environmental management plan prepared for the site will include a requirement to regularly inspect trenches
during construction for fauna.
Issue 7S
There is reference made to artificial wetlands in the PER. There are no artificial wetlands in the Port Reserve area
either in or adjacent to the proponents proposed operational lease area.
A landscape management plan should be required as a condition of approval if not completed and approved prior.
Should consider indirect impacts on the remaining vegetation and fauna habitat from erosion and/or contamination.
Response
It is acknowledged that there are no constructed artificial wetlands however given past disturbances to the site areas
of low depressions are creating habitats representative of wetlands however they are not natural features.
45
5. Conclusion
This response to submissions report has documented and responded to the submissions received on the
PER for Berth 14A Bunbury Port and outlines Lancos responses to the submissions.
Lanco has considered all the issues arising from the submissions and provided a written response to each
issue (Appendix B) in addition to the summary prepared in Chapter 4.
In consideration of these responses, it is proposed that the Project as described in Chapter 5 of the PER and
as altered in the design changes identified in Chapter 4 of this report should be submitted for determination.
47
Appendix A
Public review advertisement
ABN: 98 008 667 632
The West Classifieds

Phone: 13 22 80 Fax:(08) 9482 9040
Email: classifiedadvertising@thewest.com.au
Order Id: 1750040
You can now place your advertisement or notice online by going to TheWestClassifieds.com.au
Please note that not all classifications are available online and that all online ads require credit card payment.
This document may contain privileged or confidential information that is intended for use by the addressee only. If you are not the addressee or responsible for
delivering mail to the addressee, you may not copy, print, or deliver this document to anyone else. If you receive this document in error, please notify us immediately.
Page 2 of 2
Appendix B
Summary of submissions
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
1.01
Air quality and

noise
Public
submission
The proposal will create dust and noise for

the residents of pelican point, especially in
the prevailing southwest sea breeze.
1.02
Cumulative
impact
Public
submission
Concerned about burning the coal in

inefficient power stations in India.
Recommends that the carbon tax should
apply to all coal exports.
2.01
Air quality and

noise
Public
submission
Concerned about the existing noise and dust

problems associated with the inner harbour
and is opposed to the Project
3.01
Air quality
Public
submission
Concerned that the Project will add to the

dust already generated by the woodchip
operation.
Issue
Response
Assessments for both dust and noise were undertaken as part of the Public
Environmental Review (PER) process.
It was determined that the proposal would not exceed the cumulative
ambient air quality goal for dust deposition derived from the NEPM and NSW
DECCW criteria. The Project does not use open stockpile or material
handling, all Coal is stored inside a 750m x 100mx 45m - approximate - shed
and all conveyors are enclosed. Lanco has committed to remove the dust by
fully covering the product at port.
Noise receiver R5 is located at Pelican Point and the noise modelling
determined that there would be no noise exceedence during operation at this
point.
The Lanco Group is committed to mitigate the impact of its business on the
environment and local communities and undertakes continuous improvement
of its business processes to achieve this. The purpose of this project is not to
ship coal to any specific region and is more aligned to ensuring the
sustainability of the Collie Coal Industry and the Operations of Griffin Coal in
the South West. At present Collie Coal is exported to Korea, which has
amongst the highest levels of Environmental Management in Asia. Lanco
does build and operate Power Stations in India as a large Independent
Power Provider, within that remit our Power Division is constructing the next
Generation of Super Critical Coal Fired Power stations designed to reduce
Carbon emissions to lowest levels of any form of energy generation using
Hydrocarbon based fuel. We are committed to ensuring responsible use of
fuel and technology.
The application of carbon tax on coal to be exported is outside the scope of
this PER.
It was determined that the proposal would not exceed the air quality criteria
set by the DEC.
The noise modelling undertaken for the proposal indicated that when the
Proposal is considered in isolation it can comply with the assigned noise
levels however compliance for the cumulative impact is dependent on port
operating conditions in addition to prevailing weather conditions and it was
determined that under worse case conditions only there may be an
exceedence up to 20% of the time.
During the detailed design phase, Lanco will work with noise specialist to
reduce the impact, Lanco are working with DEC/EPA/BPA to comply.
Modelling of the air quality, including dust deposition, determined that the
future ambient air quality environment would not be significantly different
from the current situation.
B-1
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
4.01
Air quality
Public
submission
5.01
5.02
6.01
7.01
Air quality
Noise
Human health
Air quality
Public
submission
Public
submission
Public
submission
Public
submission
Issue
Response
Opposes the Project due to increase in dust
Concerned about coal dust and requests

control measures properly and regularly
monitored. Includes impacts on local and
tourists facilities.
Stringent management plans for dust control will be implemented for both
operation and construction.
These management plans will include monitoring requirements.
The Project does not use open stockpile or material handling, all Coal is
stored inside a 750m x 100mx 45m - approximate - shed and all conveyors
are enclosed. Lanco has committed to remove the dust by fully covering the
product at port.
Concerned about noise from the facility at

the Port and the increased transport noise
determined that under worse case conditions there may be an exceedence
up to 20% of the time.
Concerned about the health impacts from

pollution caused by the Project. Opposes the
project
A HIA is not considered necessary given that the site is located within a
working port and the zoning is consistent with the proposed use.
Air and Noise Impact Assessments have been undertaken and which
address any potential issues relating to these factors.
product at port.
Concerned about increases to the odour and

dust as a result of the project.
There is no evidence to suggest that odour will be in issue for this proposal.
product at port.
B-2 Parsons Brinckerhoff | Lanco_Submission_Report_Rev01_200313.docx
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
8.01
Air quality and

noise
Public
submission
Concerned about the cumulative impacts

from the Project on noise and dust.
9.01
Air quality
Public
submission
Concerned about the dust impacts on the

residential areas of East Bunbury. Would
like to be consulted on the future plans for
Bunbury Port.
Issue
10
10.01
General
Pubic submission
Opposes the Project as it offers very little

long term employment or benefits to the local
community in comparison to the
environmental damage proposed.
10
10.02
Marine fauna
Public
submission
Concerned about the noise impacts on

marine mammals and the potential
exceedences during operation.
Response
Environmental Review (PER) process. It was determined that the proposal
would not exceed the cumulative ambient air quality goal for dust deposition
derived from the NEPM and NSW DECCW criteria. The Project does not use
open stockpile or material handling, all Coal is stored inside a 750m x 100mx
45m - approximate - shed and all conveyors are enclosed. Lanco has
committed to remove the dust by fully covering the product at port.The noise
modelling undertaken for the proposal indicated that when the Proposal is
considered in isolation it can comply with the assigned noise levels however
compliance for the cumulative impact is dependent on port operating
conditions in addition to prevailing weather conditions and it was determined
that under worse case conditions there may be an exceedence up to 20% of
the time.During the detailed design phase, Lanco will work with noise
specialist to reduce the impact, Lanco are working with DEC/EPA/BPA to
comply.
Project does not use open stockpile or material handling, all Coal is stored
inside a 750m x 100mx 45m - approximate - shed and all conveyors are
enclosed. Lanco has committed to remove the dust by fully covering the
product at port.
During operation, approximately 70 staff would be required to operate the
facility on a rotational shift basis. An additional 16 staff may be required to
assist with administrative support services.
There is also likely to be several indirect employment benefits. Furthermore
the project will permit expanded operations at the Collie Operations with
potential to add up to 1000 extra positions to the companys employment.
With the increase in production and personnel at mine, increased staff will be
required for Rail operations as well as other services support within the Port
Of Bunbury and surrounding areas. Lanco and Griffin are investigating
advanced technologies for improved operations therefore it is anticipated that
skilled positions will be required, this in turn will lead to improvements within
the specialised education sectors and a large number of sundry support
businesses. Given the demands placed on families by FIFO operations we
believe we are offering gainful employment opportunities whilst maintaining
lifestyle and family values.
An underwater noise assessment has been undertaken assessing the impact
on marine mammals. This assessment was based on hammering pile driving.
The design has further progresses and the marine piles will not be hammer
driven hence reducing the
B-3
Sub
No.
10
Issue
No.
10.03
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
Air quality
Public
submission
Concerned that dust emissions have not

been estimated during the construction
phase of the project and the risk of
spontaneous combustion.
Issue
10
10.04
Marine
environment
Public
submission
Concerned about the unknown impacts

during dredging including the alternation of
sediment pathways and alteration to water
currents.
Notes that the dredging program of 40 weeks
is unacceptable.
10
10.05
Design
Public
submission
Concerned that the assessment was

undertaken on a concept design and there
are many unknowns
Soil quality contamination
Perdaman
Chemicals and
Fertilisers
11
11
11.01
11.02
Marine
environment
Perdaman
Chemicals and
Fertilisers
Concerned that no soil sampling, analysis

and reporting has been undertaken. Would
like a comprehensive sampling and analysis
of soil quality be undertaken prior to
Ministerial consent being provided
Concerned that there have been no
evaluation of the dumping of the dredge spoil
in the marine environment.
Understands that SEWPaC had referred the
proposal back to the EPA in accordance with
the bilateral agreement and therefore a
marine impact assessment is needed
Response
Further investigations are currently being undertaken by the University of
Queensland School of Mining and Metallurgical to determine the risk of the
coal to spontaneously combust. The results of this study are expected by 4
March 2013 and will be used to inform the detailed design and the
management of coal.
Griffin Coal mines have been operating since 1927 and are well versed in
mitigating such issues. Stockpile and storage management are the best
methods to remove such risks. Lanco currently exports 750,000 tonnes via
Kwinana Bulk Terminal without incident. Regardless of this we have put in
place various technologies and study outputs to ensure we provide a safe
and secure environment for operations.
The proponent notes the comment. Extensive characterisation of sediment
pathways and currents undertaken as outlined in Appendix 4: Technical
Report 4: Hydrodynamic and Sediment Transport Modelling including LiDAR
bathymetry, dye flow testing and detailed analysis of waves and currents to
inform the predictions for dredge plume and sediment deposition. The report
also contains a detailed Independent peer review. Less than 3mm of dredge
material is expected outside the inner Berth. The Dredge footprint is located
inside the inner harbour and so the likelihood of alteration to sediment and
current pathways in Koombana Bay from excavating this areas is virtually nil.
Lanco and its engineering consultants are experienced in the planning,
design and operation of coal export and import terminals and while the
information available for the PER is conceptual it is based on this wide
background of experience. It is considered that the proposed management
procedures and commitments of the Proponent and the requirements to meet
regulatory standards will be adequate.
A detailed site investigation (DSI) will be completed prior to any earthworks
being undertaken on the site.
Preparation of a DSI is not a requirement of the PER.
The disposal of dredged material will be addressed in a separate application.
Given the proposed disposal site is in Commonwealth Waters, a Sea
Dumping Permit will be submitted to SEWPaC for consideration and
assessment in February 2013.
There is no bilateral agreement in place for the consideration of this project.
A EPBC Referral has already been submitted to SEWPaC.
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
11
11.03
Marine
environment
Perdaman
Chemicals and
Fertilisers
Concerned that there is no assessment of

the marine impacts if a back hoe dredge is
deployed instead of a cutter suction dredge.
11
11.04
Marine
environment
Perdaman
Chemicals and
Fertilisers
No information on the method of disposal of

dredged basalt material has been provided.
11
11.05
Fire
management
Perdaman
Chemicals and
Fertilisers
Potential fire impact assessment is

inadequate in forms of fire safety risk and
environmental impacts associated with a fire.
11
11.06
Air quality
Perdaman
Chemicals and
Fertilisers
No consideration has been given to the

environmental impacts associated with a coal
or coal dust induced fire at the proposed
facility.
Issue
Response
Technical Report 1 of the PER (Indicative Dredge Plan for Modelling)
outlines in detail the conservative basis for selecting cutter suction dredge
(CSD) as a realistic conservative worst case scenario for dredge plume
modelling (in accordance with international best practice environmental
assessments where uncertainty in dredge equipment selection exists at the
time of environmental assessment). The sediment release from this type of
dredge is significantly higher than backhoe dredges. Modelling in the
conservative case has been selected as 40 weeks which is longer than
probably required using a CSD. A combination of high release from a CSD
and extended timeframe (40 weeks) provides a conservative basis of
assessment for dredge plume effects including capturing a range of seasonal
weather conditions. A backhoe dredge will reduce the intensity of the spill but
the duration of dredging will increase.
Please refer Technical Report 4: Hydrodynamic and Sediment Transport
Modelling which outlines in detail the results of this modelling and the
detailed independent peer review of modelling scenarios and methodology.
The exact quantity of basalt to be removed has yet to be determined. Once
the quantity of basalt is known the method of disposal will be finalised in
consultation with relevant authorities. The disposal of dredged material will
be addressed in a separate application. Given the proposed disposal site is
in Commonwealth Waters, a Sea Dumping Permit will be submitted to
SEWPaC for consideration and assessment in February 2013.
Lanco has prepared a management program which is in use for the
management of coal stockpiles open to atmosphere, along with fire and
safety management plans at other ports (Refer to Appendix C of this report).
This demonstrates Lancos intimate knowledge of the product they have
been mining since 1927.
For the project, any combustion process occurring inside the shed will be
managed by evacuation of the material and managed by protocols still to be
prepared.
During the detailed design phase it is proposed to incorporate thermal and
infra-red imaging systems to pre-detect combustible coal and remove it prior
to delivery. The materials of the shed construction are proposed to not be
susceptible and the water misting systems inside the shed will reduce the
risk.
Run off from deluge system will be contained within the sites run off
processes. This will be further enhanced by engaging a specialised qualified
Combustion Engineers to ensure advanced methodology and practices are
world class and lead to a highly safety based operation.
Fire detection and suppression system have been considered to take care of
coal or coal dust induced fire. Additionally CO gas detection system has
been considered to monitor coal and avoid chances of fire.
B-5
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
11a
11.07
Marine
environment
Perdaman
Chemicals and
Fertilisers
(Cardno)
12
12.01
Design
Bunbury Fibre
Exports (BFE)
12
12.02
Design
Bunbury Fibre
Exports (BFE)
12
12.03
Contamination
Bunbury Fibre
Exports (BFE)
Construction
Bunbury Fibre
Exports (BFE)
12
12.04
12
12.05
Contamination
Bunbury Fibre
Exports (BFE)
12
12.06
Operation EMS
Bunbury Fibre
Exports (BFE)
Issue
An explanation is needed why the wave
modelling method was selected as the best
approach.
Would like to see an anti-clock wise train
rotation so no loaded wagons past the BFE
wood chip stockpile.
The train unloading/ train movements must
not interfere with BFE traffic access to the
BFE mill site and the train must pull up prior
to the BFE entry access.
Train blockage of the BFE access road and
lengthy delays to traffic ingress and egress is
unacceptable. Lanco have still to inform BFE
of the time it will take for a train to clear the
BFE access road.
Concerned that open coal wagons may lead
to fugitive coal dust to be hazardous to the
BFE stockpile (contamination) as it passes in
unloaded condition with southerly winds.
Open wagons may have coal dust and
pieces washed off along track and crossing
during heavy rain.
Construction of the rail crossing at the BFE
entrance may cause traffic delays.
Concerned that fugitive coal in the form of
solid pieces may be deposited on rail line
and BFE access crossing. This may lead to
coal being caught in BFE Truck tyre treads
and bought on site and lead to stockpile
contamination.
Request washing of wagons after discharge
to prevent this occurrence.
Requests constant inspection of rail crossing
at BFE entrance to identify and remove
fugitive coal pieces.
Response
In relation to Koombana Bay, waves are largely responsible for sediment
transport/ dredge plume distribution. Currents are extremely low and average
velocities are <0.1m/sec. Hence the dredge plume generally has relatively
low spatial distribution compared to other regions where currents are high.
The hydrodynamic and sediment transport modelling has been independently
reviewed by Des Mills and therefore the approach is considered appropriate.
Subject to final approval by BPA, the trains will run in an anti-clockwise
direction so no loaded wagons pass the BPE wood chip stockpile.
The train unloading facility is located in a location that it should not interfere
with BFE traffic access as the train will pull up prior to the BFE entry access.
Lanco will consult with BFE and other Port users to determine the train time
schedule management plan
It is proposed that trains will run in an anti-clockwise direction subject to final

approval from BPA and therefore loaded trained will not travel past the BFE
stockpile.
Any construction will pose a possible interruption for any activity on the rail
loops. Lanco will in conjunction with BFE facilitate a transport management
plan to remove or reduce such impacts and as a minimum schedule works to
avoid interruption of BFE road access.
To avoid this, it is proposed that the trains will be based on anti-clockwise
configuration which is the same as the current alumina trains. Fully loaded
wagons with coal will not be crossing BFE access crossing, only empty
wagons will be crossing. Wagon viberators will be installed on the unloading
hopper, so that empty wagon will be free from coal pieces/ coal particles.
Regular inspections as required to manage risks that may arise.
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
Issue
Response
Would like assurances that storage

sheds/facility will not allow coal pieces or
dust to escape, especially where the shed is
in close proximity to BFE stockpile.
The coal stockpile is in a fully enclosed shed with design accommodating the
containment of coal. Under normal operations of building and reclaiming
stockpile, coal should be contained within the building. The design does not
support the escape of coal by other mechanical means such as wind or rain.
12
12.07
Air quality
Bunbury Fibre
Exports (BFE)
13
13.01
Project support
Public
submission
Comfortable with what is proposed
Noted
13
13.02
Recreational
access
Public
submission
Are frequent boat users of Koombana Bay

and would like to ensure that this area is not
impacted.
All vessels destined for the Lanco berth will be under the control of the BPA
when transiting the approach channel to the Harbour. The dredging is only
for the immediate approach to the berth and for the berthing pocket. Thus
there will be no impact on other recreational vessels within Koombana Bay
Concerned about the dust impacting them at

Pelican Point Lakes Estate. Would like
further explanation on how the air pollution
will be contained other that to say it will be as
per EPA guidelines and regulations
are enclosed, unlike other materials currently stockpiled at Ports Lanco has
committed to remove the dust by fully covering the product at port.
14
14.01
Air quality
Public
submission
14
14.02
General
Public
submission
Concerned that the PER only deals with the

Port environment and not any residential
areas.
Whilst the PER concentrates its assessment on the land directly affected by
the proposal. An assessment of the residential areas was considered for air
and noise impacts. Refer to Chapters 13 and 14 of the PER.
Public
submission
Concerned that not all noise impacts have

been considered, such as additional train
movements.
AQWEST
Basalt is only 9m thick close to the area to be

dredged (WIN bore 20013260) and could be
thinner than shown in Figure 2.2 of the PB
Report near the south-western end of the
area to be dredged. The section in Figure 2.2
shows thickening of the basalt in that area
that has no basis from available drill hole
data. There is a risk that blasting could
fracture the basalt forming pathways for
water to flow between the harbour and the
Yarragadee aquifer, which underlies the
basalt.
Noise from trains has been assessed at a screening level using the guidance
provide in the Implementation Guidelines for State Planning Policy 5.4. A
more detailed analysis could be undertaken using noise modelling, but based
on the results from the screening assessment, it is unlikely that this would
warrant the extra effort.
Win bore 20013260 was indicated on the cross section (Figure 2-2 of the
Technical Report), as well as others that are in the vicinity of the site. Win
bore 20013260 is removed from site, while WIN bores on site (20013013 and
23034160) showed basalt in excess of 40m thickness. Therefore the
interpretation was done as shown in Figure 2-2. The risk of fracturing from
blasting was considered as very low, but a recommendation for blasting by a
blasting expert/specialist was still included if blasting is deemed necessary.
AQWEST
No information is presented to support the

statement that only 20,000m3 of basalt will
need to be removed.
This information is based on existing geotechnical information. A detailed

geotechnical investigation is currently being undertaken which will confirm
the amount of basalt to be removed. This information should be available in
late February 2013.
14
15
15
14.03
15.01
15.02
Noise
Groundwater
Groundwater
B-7
Sub
No.
15
16
16
Issue
No.
15.03
16.01
16.02
Environmental
Factor
Groundwater
Dredge
material
Marine fauna
Submitter
AQWEST
Issue
Requests that if the project goes ahead there
should be a requirement for the proponent to
carry out groundwater monitoring to detect
any impact on the Yarragadee aquifer.
Including close monitoring of water levels in
monitoring bore BY3A and any used
Yarragadee bores in the Berth 14A area
(including the Port Authority and Power
Station sites)
Bunbury Port
Authority (BPA)
The Port Authority would not support

overflow dredging unless it could be
demonstrated by the proponent that the
overflow would not increase the extent and
visual impact of the dredge plume nor result
in turbidity that would negatively impact the
marine environment.
Bunbury Port
Authority (BPA)
Concerned about the underwater noise

impacts to the local dolphin population given
that the pile driving, rock fracturing and its
duration is not known at this stage. Any
activity which would negatively impact on the
population to the point that they would leave
the area is not acceptable.
Response
BY3A is a good monitoring point and was monitored in the past by the DoW.
This should be re-instated and will be considered when preparing the
environmental management plan for the project.
In general Lanco support monitoring any unused boreholes in the vicinity of
the Berth.
Realistic worst case and conservative overflow dredging has been adopted
for dredge plume modelling as outlined in Technical Report 1 of the PER
(Indicative Dredge Plan for Modelling).
Technical Report 4 of the PER (Hydrodynamic and Sediment Transport
Modelling) outlines in detail the results of this modelling and the detailed
independent peer review of the modelling exercise.
Technical Report 10 of the PER (Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal
Management Plan (DSDMP) Sub Plan 1) commits to validation of the dredge
plume model to be undertaken through field measurements at
commencement of the dredging program.
A commitment is contained in Sub Plan 3 of Appendix 10 to monitor plume
extent/intensity/duration in the Zone of Moderate Impact and Zone of
Influence during dredging. Sub Plan 3 outlines adaptive management steps
to address exceedances/anomalies including reduction/cessation of overflow.
It is also important to note that reducing dredge productivity (no overflow) can
increase the duration of dredging.
A Technical Advisory Committee (with Bunbury Port as a member) is
committed to in the DSDMP - Section 5 Management Framework for
reporting and consultation in relation to dredging activities.
The construction methodology for the project will be designed to reduce
these potential impacts wherever possible. The underwater noise modelling
prepared for the PER (Technical Report 7A) assessed driving of poles and
therefore is considered a conservative assessment.
It has been determine that for the construction of the jetty, piles will be driven
via hammering only for landside works. Piles for the marine works will be
socketed and/or pinned reducing the impact to marine fauna.
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
16
16.03
Air quality
Bunbury Port
Authority (BPA)
16
16.04
Air quality
Bunbury Port
Authority (BPA)
16
16
16
16.05
16.06
16.07
Groundwater
Groundwater
Noise
Bunbury Port
Authority (BPA)
Bunbury Port
Authority (BPA)
Bunbury Port
Authority (BPA)
Issue
Concerned that the potential impact on
nearby existing port lease holder sites is not
explored. Potential cross contamination of
coal dust is an issue.
Requests that 'no visible dust' comment be
replaced with 'not to exceed particulate
concentrations at the proponent's lease
boundary and the Port Reserve Boundary'.
Recommends real-time dust concentration
monitoring system that allows operations
personnel to constantly monitor any dust
emitted.
Expects the proponent to install sufficient air
quality monitoring devices around its lease
area to ensure that emissions from its
operations are constantly monitored to
prevent impacts outside its lease boundaries.
Given the concerns about the potential
breach of the Yarragadee aquifer, desktop
hydrogeological assessment undertaken
could be seen as not adequately addressing
the perceived risk.
The proponent should investigate the
potential impacts on shallow groundwater
flows in the area it intends constructing the
coal storing shed as any interruption to the
flows may impact the vegetation on the
eastern side of the Port Reserve boarding
Vittoria Bay in the Leschenault Estuary.
Concerned about the risk of con-compliance
during night time hours causing
unacceptable levels of community
disturbance and potentially putting pressure
to implement restrictions on night time
loading activities for all port users, including
the proponent. The proponent should
investigate options to reduce the sound
power levels of the ship loaders or look at
alternative low noise loader technology
Response
Dust monitoring will be further discussed with BPA and a management plan
prepared in consultation with DEC.
Lanco will work with BPA in preparing an air quality monitoring program.
There are challenges associated with differentiating between sources of dust.
The information examined in the desk top study is adequate to demonstrate

a significant thickness of basalt in the area for dredging. Previous heavy
blasting of the basalt to create the original Harbour did not fracture the basalt
layer to cause aquifer water quality problems so there is no reason to believe
the risks with this operation are excessive. charges will be sized to break
near surface rock rather than open cracks deep into the rock layer
This would only be the case if deep, continuous foundations or walls were to
be constructed. This is not the case.
During the detailed design further information will be provided on the actual
shiploaders proposed to be used. The sound power levels used in the noise
modeling are considered conservative.
It is now proposed to use only one ship loader which is likely to result in a 1-2
dB reduction in noise levels stated in the PER, depending on the receiving
location however the proposal would need to be remodeled to confirm this
(refer to Section 3.2.2).
B-9
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
16
16.08
Heritage
Bunbury Port
Authority (BPA)
Issue
The Port agrees with the recommendation
that consultation should be undertaken with
the Gnaarla Karla Booja native title claim
group to update them in regard to the project
and to advise them of the site's revision
under the AHA
Bunbury Port
Authority (BPA)
Parameters of any water being discharged

into the harbour are not defined. In addition
to TSS and TDS parameters being
confirmed, the proponent must commit to
ensuring no discoloured (black) water enters
with the marine or nearby riverine or
estuarine water bodies). Water quality for
infiltration also needs to be defined.
16
16
16.09
16.10
Surface Water
Marine
Monitoring
Report
Bunbury Port
Authority (BPA)
16
16.11
IMS
Bunbury Port
Authority (BPA)
16
16.12
Marine Fauna
Bunbury Port
Authority (BPA)
16
16.13
Marine
Bunbury Port
Authority (BPA)
B-10
The timber jetty within the Port has been

removed and may have changed the wave
patterns and current flows in that part of the
bay. The proponent should check if wave
pattern and current flow data needs to be
updated.
Removal of the piles may have released
potential COC
IMS surveys undertaken by the Bunbury Port

Authority conducted in May 2012 did not
identify any species of concern in the
harbour areas.
Over 4 decades of dredging campaigns in
the harbours there has been no observable
impact on the dolphin population either in
distribution or abundance
The emphasis on marine pest management
by the proponent is a 'must have
requirement'
Response
Noted
Filtered water and water in excess of the capacity of the basins will discharge
to the harbour. No discoloured (black) water will be allowed to enter with the
marine or nearby riverine or estuarine water bodies.
With regard to TSS, TDS and water quality for infiltration, PB should examine
the permissible values for these parameters in compliance to Australian
Environmental norms and the same can be used here and accordingly
surface water management plan will be prepared.
Ongoing wave and current data has been collected as part of the baseline
monitoring program by the proponent (Appendix 11: Technical Report 19:
Koombana Bay Baseline Marine Monitoring Report). Please refer to
Appendix 10: Technical Report 10: Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal
Management Plan (DSDMP) Sub Plan 1 which commits to validation of the
dredge plume model will be undertaken through field measurements at
commencement of dredging. 2012-2013 wave and current data together with
BPA data (wind, current and wave data from Beacon 10 and Beacon 3 if
available) will be used to confirm modelling parameters and validation
through field monitoring early in the dredging program to confirm modelling
predictions and behaviour of plume.
COC's will be monitored during construction and if COC's are we will adopt
appropriate management actions.
This has been noted
Noted.
Lanco will work with BPA on marine pest management.
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
16
16.14
Noise
Bunbury Port
Authority (BPA)
16
16.15
Terrestrial
vegetation
Bunbury Port
Authority (BPA)
16
16.16
Traffic
Bunbury Port
Authority (BPA)
16
16.17
Human health
Bunbury Port
Authority (BPA)
17
17.01
Noise
Public
submission
17
17.02
Air quality
Public
submission
Issue
The piling noise during construction has the
potential to negatively impact the amenity of
residents in the nearby East Bunbury
residential area. Sound attenuating pile
driving hammers need to be considered by
the proponent to mitigate the noise. Also,
consideration as to the hours in which pile
driving is done should coincide with the times
of the day in which noise from the port is
masked by traffic noise from major roads
near the port boundary.
There is reference made to artificial wetlands
in the PER. There are no artificial wetlands in
the Port Reserve area either in or adjacent to
the proponents proposed operational lease
area.
The project has the potential to interrupt
traffic flows on roads with rail crossings due
to the expected increase in train movements
into and out of the Port.
The proposal has a number of actual and
potential impacts outside its operational
footprint within the Port. Whilst the
Department of Health is not a DMA for the
purposes of the proposed, it would be
strongly suggested that the proponent
consider undertaking a health impact
assessment.
Concerned that the proposal will create more
noise for residents of Pelican Point,
especially given that this is a 24hr/ 7 day a
week operation.
Also concerned that increased traffic will
impact on the noise
Concerned about the dust impacts even if

sprinklers are used.
Response
The use of pile driving hammers is now not proposed in marine areas. Refer
to Section 3.2.1 of this report
It is acknowledged that there are no constructed artificial wetlands however

given past disturbances to the site areas of low depressions are creating
habitats representative of wetlands however they are not natural features
Train movements outside of the Port have not been assessed as part of this
PER however will be considered during the upgrade works for the rail line.
working port and the zoning is consistent with the proposed use. Air and
Noise Impact Assessments have been undertaken and which address any
potential issues relating to these factors.
No exceedances where noted from Pelican Point (Noise receiver 5) during

the assessments undertaken during the PER.
Assessments for the impacts of dust were undertaken as part of the Public
DECCW criteria.
product at port.
B-11
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
Issue
Response
The assessment of traffic outside the boundary of the facility is outside the
scope of the PER.
A traffic management plan will be developed during construction to manage
deliveries and construction workforce traffic. The closure of Estuary Drive is a
matter for the BPA as this is within their scope for the overall Port Structure
plan, this project does not impact on that area of the Port Operations.
Noted
17
17.03
Traffic
Public
submission
Concerned that traffic via road to the site will

congest an already very busy road set up.
Does not want Estuary Drive closed as it is
the direct access to Bunbury for all residents
of Pelican Point and suburbs further to the
north.
18
18.01
General
Public
submission
Oppose the exportation of coal through

Bunbury Port
Public
submission
Concerned about the minute coal dust that

will invade the port and residential areas of
East Bunbury.
DECCW criteria.
product at port.
Cetacean
Research Unit Murdoch
University
Concerned about the long -term adverse

effects on the local Bunbury dolphin
population given the importance to tourism
activities and the duration of the dredging
campaign and the possible rock fracturing
campaign.
A report for the Southern Seawater
Desalination Plant in Binningup noted that 'if
acoustic disturbance was associated with a
coastal development of long duration eg over
many months or several years, dolphins may
not return to the impacted area'
Believes that the conclusion that there will be
no long-term effects is unjustified and that an
appropriate monitoring program should be
implemented.
The initial screening and scoping for the PER approvals document identified
that consideration of potential impacts on dolphins was a priority with respect
to marine ecology. Hence, dolphins were a significant focus of the marine
ecology section of the PER. Lanco have proposed a monitoring approach
based on widely used methodologies that addresses the key questions
regarding potential impacts of the proposed project.
It should be noted that the Bunbury dolphin population currently co-exists
with existing extensive port facilities.
The long term effects of pile driving on the distribution of dolphin has been
studied and no long term displacement of dolphin species is recorded
(Wursig et al., 2000). Should rock fracturing be required during the project,
exceedance zones based on noise impact criteria and thresholds are
proposed to mitigate impacts on dolphin populations. A visual monitoring
program is also proposed in partnership with the Dolphin Discovery Centre to
build on the data collected as part of the SWMRP.
18
19
B-12
18.02
19.01
Air quality
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
Sub
No.
19
19
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
Issue
19.02
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
Cetacean
University
Disappointed that the proponent does not

plan to develop a monitoring program of
appropriate temporal and spatial scale that
builds on the comprehensive and long-term
South West Marine Research Program
(SWMSP).Would like the proponent to
engage with the SWMSP partners and
design a monitoring program that builds on
this long term research
19.03
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
Cetacean
University
Will the proposed visual survey be

continuous during the 40 week dredging
campaign?
Response
The proponent disagrees with the comment. The respondent has clearly and
correctly identified that they have a conflict of interest with respect to
providing advice on dolphin monitoring as they are a service provider with a
specific preferred methodology. The proponent has developed a monitoring
program that is of an appropriate spatial and temporal scale for addressing
potential key impacts related to the proposed project. The monitoring
program contains a component able to provide continuous monitoring of
habitat use by dolphins, including, importantly, during the night where other
methods are not effectively feasible. Habitat use by dolphins is known to
differ across the diurnal cycle (e.g. Shane et al., 1986; Benoit-Bird and
Wursig, 2004). The Passive Acoustic Monitoring (PAM) method has received
international endorsement in peer review journals on marine mammal
ecology and marine impact assessments for many years. Please refer to
http://www.chelonia.co.uk/publications.htm where over 100 journal articles on
the method are cited. For example:Elliott, R.G. Dawson, S.M. and
Henderson, S.D. Acoustic monitoring of habitat use by bottlenose dolphins in
Doubtful Sound, New Zealand. New Zealand Journal Marine and Freshwater
Research. New Zealand Journal of Marine and Freshwater Research iFirst,
2011, 1-13.Gallus A, Dhne M, Verfu UK, Brger S, Adler S, Siebert U,
Benke H (2012). "Use of static passive acoustic monitoring to assess the
status of the 'Critically Endangered' Baltic harbour porpoise in German
waters". Endang Species Res 18:265-278.The PAM technology has also
improved sensitivity and specificity well beyond that available using vessel
based monitoring methods. The monitoring program is spatially
comprehensive with respect to the potential area of disturbance, and is
consistent with the principles of sound experimental design. It is proposed
that a component of the monitoring program during construction will include
the Dolphin Discovery Centre who are a member of the SWMSP. This will
provide validation and useful further interpretation of results obtained from
PAM data. This committed to in The proponent is committed to building on
existing monitoring by utilising the Dolphin Discovery Centre and building on
data collected as part of the SWMRP.
The proponent notes the comment. It is not proposed to undertake visual
survey continuously during the dredging campaign. However, acoustic
monitoring will be undertaken for the duration (also prior and beyond).
Additionally, marine mammal observers will be on board/adjacent to the
dredge during the dredges operation.
Should rock fracturing be required, the visual monitoring program outlined in
Management Plan (DSDMP) Sub Plan 7 will be implemented.
B-13
Sub
No.
19
B-14
Issue
No.
19.04
Environmental
Factor
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
Submitter
Cetacean
University
Issue
The Passive Acoustic Monitoring (PAM)

techniques proposed to monitor the local
dolphin population is not the most
appropriate methodology to evaluate
potential impacts in this scenario.
Questions why the proposed monitoring
program isn't based on the long-term
SWMRP and notes that PAM is difficult to
discern whether the acoustic signals come
from a few animals vocalising a lot or many
animals vocalising a little.
Response
The proponent disagrees with the comment. The published science referred
to above supports the strong view that the PAM technique is the most
appropriate to use to evaluate potential impacts in the current scenario. The
proponent reiterates that the technique is well proven and is now widely
utilised, including within a large number of peer reviewed journal articles,
references to a number of which were included in the draft PER
documentation. The technique is directly used to assess the impacts of
coastal development on dolphins.
In contrast to boat-based surveys, PAM techniques are un-confounded as
there is no interaction between the sampler (boat) and the animals which
may change their behaviour. As already discussed, PAM techniques also
have the advantage of being able to monitor 24 hours a day. Due to the large
amounts of data able to be collected, if appropriately deployed, they are able
to detect fine scale changes in dolphin movement with high certainty.
The proponent agrees that in isolation, the PAM methodology will have
difficulty discerning whether acoustic signals come from a few animals
vocalising a lot or many animals vocalising a little. This is why a visual survey
of dolphins will also be undertaken to assess the behaviour of dolphins in the
Berth 14A area and assess changes in the distribution and abundance of
individual dolphins at the scale of the proposed development. Refer to
Technical Report 10: Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan
(DSDMP) Sub Plan 5. Together, the two monitoring approaches represent a
survey approach that is temporally and spatially relevant with respect to the
scale of the proposed project and of at sufficient resolution to detect
ecologically meaningful changes in habitat use of dolphins in Koombana Bay
at and adjacent to the proposed development area.
Sub
No.
19
20
Issue
No.
19.05
20.01
Environmental
Factor
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
General
20
20.02
Terrestrial
Fauna
20
20.03
Terrestrial
Fauna
Submitter
Cetacean
University
DEC
(Environmental
Management
Branch and
South West
Region)
DEC
(Environmental
Management
Branch and
South West
Region)
DEC
(Environmental
Management
Branch and
South West
Region)
Issue
The SWMRP was documented that the inner

harbour, including Berth 14A, is an important
area for Bunbury dolphins and is an
important area for the individual dolphins that
the Bunbury Dolphin Discovery Centre rely
on for their dolphin provisioning program.
Any negative impact on these dolphins could
have severe consequences on the viability of
the Bunbury Dolphin Discovery Centre. This
highlights the need for a monitoring program
that relies on identifying and tracking
individual dolphins over time in order to
evaluate the possible changes in abundance,
individual habitat use and individual
movement patterns in response to dredging.
Response
The draft PER discussed the use of the Inner Harbour, including Berth 14A
by dolphins. A robust baseline data set from PAM method for dolphin habitat
use both at the DDC and the inner harbour commencing in August 2011 will
provide a strong measure for impact assessment in respect to localised
dolphin abundance at a specific site. The proponent acknowledges that the
habitat at Berth 14A will be altered permanently due to construction activities
but it is further noted that the habitat has already been profoundly modified in
this area over many years and yet a relatively large dolphin population still
exists in Koombana Bay and environs. Based on SWMRP dolphin census,
the dolphin population consumes more than 2 tons of fish/day. This suggests
that the Bunbury dolphin population is resilient and robust and that it is most
unlikely that the Berth 14A disturbance footprint will alter the Bunbury dolphin
population abundance or health. Key threatening processes to the dolphin
population are likely to be prey abundance and water quality. Neither process
is likely to be affected by the Berth 14A development in a significant
way.Please also refer to Sub Plan 5 of Technical Report 10 of the PER: Draft
Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP).
Visual monitoring of dolphins will be undertaken in collaboration with the
Dolphin Discovery Centre (who are a member of the SWMRP). This will
validate results obtained from PAM and provide significant "granularity" on
the interpretation of individual dolphin use across the PAM data set.
Additionally, it will provide information on the use of the Inner Harbour area
by individual dolphins, with the Berth 14A area being a focus for such
monitoring.
The Bunbury Port Inner Harbour Structure

Plan endorses the Berth 14 activity and
covers a larger area
Noted
Management and mitigation measures

presented in Section 7.4.1.1 and 7.4.1.3 of
the PER will allow Baudin's and Carnaby's
cockatoos to continue to forage in the port
area
Noted
No management and mitigation measures

have been provided to manage entrapment
of fauna in trenches
The environmental management plan prepared for the site will include a
requirement to regularly inspect trenches during construction for fauna.
B-15
Sub
No.
20
20
20
20
Issue
No.
20.04
20.05
20.06
20.07
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
Marine Fauna
DEC
(Environmental
Management
Branch and
South West
Region)
Issue
Response
The PER only discusses an observation

zone for dolphins during dredging but the
proponent should implement precautions in
relation to all marine mammals.
Please refer to Technical Report 10: Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal
Management Plan (DSDMP). Sub Plan 5, Sub Plan 6 and Sub Plan 7. These
discuss commitments for Marine Fauna Monitoring and Reporting
Marine Fauna
DEC
(Environmental
Management
Branch and
South West
Region)
Accepts a 300m observation zone is

appropriate for dredging activity however it is
not appropriate for actives that involve very
loud sudden noises such as pile driving.
The proponent disagrees with the comment. Please refer to Technical Report
3: Marine Environmental Quality Studies- Appendix 7E Underwater Noise
Modelling and Independent Peer Review process. The configuration of the
Berth 14A layout provides a physical land barrier to mitigate noise emissions
including in particular piling. Conservative modelling for pile driving has been
conducted using real noise data provided by the modeller, and thresholds for
impact have been thoroughly discussed with peer reviewer as outlined in the
Peer Review Report.
Mitigation measures for pile driving have been outlined in Technical Report
10: Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP). Sub
Plans 5-7 discuss commitments for Marine Fauna Monitoring and Reporting.
An adaptive management process is committed to in the DSDMP Section 5 Management Framework with reporting to a Technical Advisory Committee
(including representative of the Dolphin Discovery Centre) during the
construction phase.
Noise
DEC
(Environmental
Services Group)
The proponent should demonstrate how it

will work with Bunbury Port Authority to
comply with the Environmental Protection
(Noise) Regulations 1997 (noise regulations).
Lanco are continuing to work with BPA and DEC to demonstrate compliance
with the noise regulations.
Noise
DEC
(Environmental
Services Group)
The proponent should provide more detailed

information as to the current noise
environment associated with the existing port
facilities.
Some of the information in relation to the existing port facilities is commercial

in confidence. A general discussion on the existing environment is provided
in response to issues 2D in Section 4.2.2.
20
20.08
Noise
DEC
(Environmental
Services Group)
20
20.09
Noise
DEC
(Environmental
Services Group)
B-16
The proponent should report actual noise

emission levels of the existing operations at
the port and clearly indicate if the existing
noise emissions comply with the noise
regulations or not.
The assigned noise level in the fourth
column of Table 14.4 for receiving location
R3 seems incorrect
Existing operations at the port have the opportunity to exceed the noise
regulations. Refer to Section 4.2.2 for more information.
This is an error.
The assigned noise level should be 42 L A10dB(A) at receiver R3.
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
20
20.10
Air quality
DEC
(Environmental
Services Group)
20
20.11
Air quality
DEC
(Environmental
Services Group)
20
20.12
Water
DEC
(Environmental
Services Group)
20
20
20.13
20.14
Air quality
Air quality
Issue
The train unloading areas, conveyor
systems, transfer points, the main transfer
sheds and storage sheds all require dust
extraction systems to reduce dust emission.
Industry best practice technology should be
employed for all dust mitigation engineering.
Coal dust spills must be prevented and
recovered immediately with disposal to an
approved waste facility
The superficial water table is intersected
between ground heights of 0.5 to 1.2m AHD.
Dewatering of the superficial groundwater is
likely to expose potential ASS.
DEC
(Environmental
Services Group)
They are numerous shortcomings in the

reporting of the modelling work, which would
have been avoided if the Guidance Notes
has been followed. For example Section
13.1.1 refers to a 'MODIS analysis'. The
details of this are not evident and it remains
unclear why availability of MODIS data was
essential for a meteorological analysis.
DEC
(Environmental
Services Group)
The use of the 30th highest day, presumably

for the six years of modelling is not justified
anywhere, apart from a general statement
that is 'based on the findings of a model
comparison with existing data'The
distribution of 30th highest daily averages
around the source region is likely to be very
different to the distribution of the highest
daily averages, be it on a six or one-year
time base.
Response
Currently 5 dust collectors have been proposed for train unloading, storage
shed, transfer towers and ship loading areas. The dust collectors are
specified for 100% operational availability providing adequate redundancy for
the fans and the bag houses to be removed/replaced without any interruption
to the dust extraction.
Coal dust spills will be recovered and disposed to an approved waste facility.
No permanent dewatering is proposed.

The MODIS analysis was not essential for the meteorological analysis but
was used elsewhere in the studies to support the PER. As AED developed
the wind fields for the coastal modelling (Appendix E of Technical Report 9)
consideration of the MODIS analysis (for this purpose) ensured that a wide
range of meteorological conditions were captured. For consistency, these
same years of meteorology were used for the AQ assessment. Other air
quality assessments often include a single year of 'typical' meteorology. It is
noted the Guidance document recommends two or more years. What is
considered 'typical' can be difficult to define and choice of year(s) is often
arbitrary. AED typical uses between 3 and 5 years of meteorological fields to
ensure that a wide range of meteorological conditions are covered by the
model. Consideration of the MODIS analysis is one option for identifying high
and low every meteorological conditions.
Technical Report 9 has been reviewed again, with some minor changes
made (Refer to Appendix E of this report). It is considered that the report
meets the requirements as outlined in the Guidance Notes.
Note that a careful and considered model validation exercise was undertaken
for the purposes of describing the existing environment. One of the key
weakness of the assessment lies in the estimation of the dust emissions from
port activities for which emission factors are not readily available (such as for
wood chip handling, mineral sands, etc.).
Due to the number of previous assessments that have been undertaken in
relation to these activities, it was felt that it was better to maintain some
measure of consistency between this and previous studies in relation to the
development of the emission estimates. However, it is noted that in previous
studies, monitoring data was used to help 'refine' emission estimates for
these materials. The alternative to our approach of validating our model for
the existing environment was to adjust downwards emission factors for these
materials until the results obtained from the model were more representative
of monitoring data at the monitoring locations. Our approach is more
B-17
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
20
20.15
Air quality
DEC
(Environmental
Services Group)
20
20.16
Air quality
DEC
(Environmental
Services Group)
20
B-18
20.17
Air quality
DEC
(Environmental
Services Group)
Issue
There are significant differences between the

peak concentrations shown in Table 13.2 (of
the technical paper) and measured peaks.
Such differences must be reviewed and
analysed, so that accurate background
estimates may be included in concentration
and deposition projections.
Air quality criteria apply only to total ambient
concentrations, not those due to a single
operation. While the incremental effect of an
operation many be small, the total including
all existing concentrations must be submitted
for approval
The PER indicates that there will be dust
emissions associated with the construction
phase of the proposal, however no
assessment of the effect of these emissions
is presented.
Response
transparent in that rather than adjusting downwards emission factors until we
get results which better matched the monitoring data, we have used emission
factors as previously adopted and assessed the model results against
monitoring data. Naturally the degree of over estimation of the model results
when compared with available monitoring data was spatially variable and
thus the use of a single percentile across the domain is a simplification. An
alternate approach would have been to consider the monitoring data only as
an accurate description of the existing environment and to compare model
predicts of project impacts with observations. This approach was considered.
However, the limited number of observational points does not allow for the
development of regional contour plots of the existing environment which aid
in interpretation. Rather than denoting the results as the 30th highest, we
alternately could have denoted them as the maximum of the 'calibrate'
model.
Presenting the maximum results of the uncalibrated model would not have
been representative of actualised impacts over this period. If the maximum of
the uncalibrated model have been presented, the relative contribution of dust
from the project would be even less than that which was presented.
To progress the PER, the memo presented in Appendix E of this Report
includes results for the maximum predicted 24-hour average

concentrations of PM10, TSP, and PM2.5 in contrast to the results of
the calibrated dispersion model which was based on the 30th highest
24-hour average (PER air quality technical report).
There is no table 13.2 in the Technical Report. We have been unable to gain
clarification from DEC as to what this refers to however it is hoped that
information presented in the memo of Appendix E provides the mecessary
clarification.
These were presented in Section 5 of the Technical report (Refer to

Appendix E of this Report)
Construction of the Lanco port facilities will not involve any construction
techniques that are unusual or unique. Thus dust management will be
conventional with minimal risk that normal measured to limit dust generation
will not work satisfactorily. The main risk will be in bulk earthworks where
water spraying and stabilisation of finished but disturbed areas will be
undertaken.
Sub
No.
20
20
21
Issue
No.
20.17
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
Air quality
DEC
(Environmental
Services Group)
Issue
The PER states that 'Data for PM2.5

concentrations are not available' however
measurement of PM2.5 have been recorded
by DEC at Bunbury since 1997, and PM10
since 1999.
20.18
Air quality
DEC
(Environmental
Services Group)
A number of errors have been identified in

technical report tables. For example Table 8
reports several Stirling Street PM10 values
exceeding TSP values. Table 5 of Appendix
A reports salt deposition rates in excess of
the total.
21.01
Noise and
vibration
Public
submission
Concerned about the noise impacts on

Pelican Point Lake Estate, particularly at
night. Also concerned about the any
reverberation from pole driving which may
affect their property and lake retaining wall
Response
Noted and we have since reviewed data from DEC for the period from 2002
through 2011 for PM2.5 and PM10.
The assessment has used a background level for PM2.5 of 16.9 micrograms
per m 3 for the 24 hour average. This exceeds the average of the 95th
percentile 24 hour average for the period 2002-2011 of 14.8 micrograms per
m3 and is thus the value adopted is conservative.
The assessment has used an estimate for background levels for PM10 of 21.2
micrograms per m3 based on 70th percentile of the BPA monitoring data.
Data from the DEC website suggests an average 75th percentile 24 hour
average concentration of PM10 for the period 2002 through 2011 of 20.7
micrograms per m3. Thus the use of 21.2 micrograms/m 3 is consistent with
what would have been obtained using DEC data.
We had not included a background estimate for the annual average PM2.5 but
noted that this was likely to be elevated due to the marine environment. DEC
data confirms that this is indeed the case with the annual average
concentration of PM2.5 ranging from 7.6 through 9.2 micrograms/m3 between
2002 and 2011 with an average of 8.5. It is noted that the ambient air criteria
is 8 micrograms/m3. Note that the project contribution to the PM2.5 annual
average is less than 0.1 micrograms/m 3. Note that the detail in the contour
plot presented in Figure 22 of the technical report would be 'lost' if a
background estimate of (say) 8 micrograms/m3 were added to the results.
Reference: EHPC Archives for Ambient Air Quality NEPM annual reporting
2002 to 2011, Western Australia Air monitoring Reports, Available online at
http://www.scew.gov.au/archive/air/aaq-nepm-reporting.html
Table 8 has been corrected. Refer to Appendix E of this report.
Based on the separation distance between the piling operations and Pelican
Point (approx. 3 km) the vibration from piling is very unlikely to result in any
adverse impacts at this location.
B-19
Sub
No.
21
21
22
22
23
B-20
Issue
No.
21.02
21.03
22.01
22.02
23.01
Environmental
Factor
Air quality
Traffic
Air quality
Noise
Air quality
Submitter
Issue
Response
Pubic submission
Would like to know what bunding

arrangements are proposed to stop coal dust
as this dust will affect their quality of life
The storage sheds will be closed on all sides and designed to best practice
standards to reduce the impacts of coal dust. The Project does not use open
stockpile or material handling, all Coal is stored inside a 750m x 100mx 45m
- approximate - shed and all conveyors are enclosed.
Lanco has committed to remove the dust by fully covering the product at port.
Public
submission
Concerned about the number of additional

trains and what is being done to ensure the
road traffic will not be blocked for long
periods
The assessment of train movements outside the boundary of the facility is

outside the scope of the PER.
An assessment of the potential impact of additional train movements on the
local road network will be undertaken during the rail upgrade assessment
which is outside the scope of this PER.
Public
submission
Concerned about fine coal dust impacting

Pelican Point unless they are dealt with by
proper extraction and secondary treatment
through a spray tower. Notes that the coal
stockpiles and the loading mechanisms
should be covered to prevent contamination
to other port users.
The coal stockpiles and conveyor systems are fully enclosed.
Public
submission
Concerned about noise impacts, especially

train horns as it approaches the two rail
crossings entering the port. Request
restricted times be considered during night
time.
Also concerned about the noise generated
from the unloading, storing and transferring
of coal.
This is outside scope of the PER and will be discussed with the owner of the
rail during any future upgrade works. The operations for unloading will be
underground and via an unloading process that requires bottom discharge of
the coal wagons whilst they move through the unloading facility, all
conveyors will operated within noise limitations and coal transferred to
stockpile will be inside the building. With these considerations the generation
of unusually high noise levels is mitigated.
The unloading station is proposed to be built within a building enclosure to
limit noise generation and this has been factored into the noise modelling
Concerned about dust impacts of the project

for the residents of Bunbury, Pelican Point
and Eaton.
Public
submission
Sub
No.
23
24
25
26
Issue
No.
23.01
24.01
25.01
26.01
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
Issue
Response
Noise
Public
submission
Concerned about the noise problem.
The noise modelling undertaken for the proposal indicates that when the
Support
Bunbury
Wellington
Economic
Alliance (BWEA)
Welcomes the proposal to export coal and

has confidence that the project can proceed
in an environmentally acceptable way, and
deliver social and economic benefits for the
South West Region and the State.
Noted
Public
submission
Opposes the proposal due to the dust

problems it will cause for City of Bunbury
Environmental Review (PER) process. It was determined that the proposal
would not exceed the cumulative ambient air quality goal for dust deposition
derived from the NEPM and NSW DECCW criteria. The Project does not
use open stockpile or material handling, all Coal is stored inside a 750m x
100mx 45m - approximate - shed and all conveyors are enclosed. Lanco has
committed to remove the dust by fully covering the product at port.
Dolphin
Discovery Centre
Concerned about the potential short and long

term impacts on the dolphins which will need
to be addressed during the planning phase.
Impacts from rock fracturing, pollution,
incidents involving vessels/plant equipment,
trapping or drowning due to dredging and
dolphin food sources.
The proponent notes the comment. Please refer to commitments in

Management Plan (DSDMP). Sub Plan 5 -Sub Plan 7 discuss commitments
for Marine Fauna Monitoring and Reporting. This includes close consultation
during dredging and construction activities committed to in the DSDMP
Section 5 - Management Framework with reporting to a Technical Advisory
Committee (TACC) including a representative of the Dolphin Discovery
Centre during the construction phase.
Air quality
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
B-21
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
26
26.02
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
Dolphin
Discovery Centre
26
26.03
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
Dolphin
Discovery Centre
26
26.04
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
Dolphin
Discovery Centre
26
B-22
26.04
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
Dolphin
Discovery Centre
Issue
Major concern is about the overall period of
the rock fracturing, pile driving and dredging
program. Recent local research showed a
temporary decline in dolphin abundance in
the area during the time of marine
construction of the Binningup Desalination
Plant. Noted that if construction works went
for a longer period there may be a decline in
Dolphin abundance which will impact the
local tourism operations.
Refer to Baseline information on the
abundance and distribution of marine mega
fauna off the Southern Seawater
Desalination Plant Binningup, Western
Australia)
Propose caution on dredging and a complete
cessation of rock fracturing from October
through to May which is dolphin breeding
season.
Ideally would like high impact work to be
conducted during June to September with
rock fracturing and pile driving to be
undertaken during July or August.
Considers the increase in vessel traffic to be
low risk for fauna collisions.
Consideration should be given to using an

acoustic blanket across the Inner Harbour
entrance during the rock fracturing process.
Response
The proponent notes the comment. Please refer to commitments in
Management Plan (DSDMP). Sub Plan 2 discuss commitments with respect
to Monitoring of Underwater Noise and related management and mitigation
strategies. The DSDMP also includes commitment to close consultation with
the DDC via the TACC during dredging and construction activities. Sub Plan
2 refers to commitments regarding monitoring and reporting for underwater
noise and marine fauna. An adaptive management process due to
uncertainty in relation to rock fracturing requirements at this stage of the
development is also committed to in DSDMP Section 5 - Management
Framework with reporting to a Technical Advisory Committee (TACC)
including a representative of the Dolphin Discovery Centre during the
construction phase.
The construction methodology has not yet been finalised. Once the dredging
contractor is engaged consideration of any seasonal impacts can be made, if
feasible.
Noted
An acoustic blanket was considered as outlined in Technical Report 3:
Marine Environmental Quality Studies- Appendix 7E Underwater Noise
Modelling and detailed Independent Peer Review. The practical benefits of
this potential mitigation tool versus complexities with deployment in an active
port suggested this was not a useful approach.
There exists uncertainty in the need for rock fracturing (extent/duration) at
this stage. Therefore the commitments outlined in Technical Report 10: Draft
Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP) Sub Plan 2 with
respect to Monitoring of Underwater Noise and related management and
mitigation strategies have been tailored as fit for purpose based on
independent advice and current uncertainties in relation to need for rock
fracturing.
The DSDMP Section 5 - Management Framework adopts an adaptive
management approach. It is envisaged this will be done in consultation with
the DDC via the Technical Advisory Committee (TACC) which will include a
representative of the Dolphin Discovery Centre during the construction
phase. This process will ensure practical and effective options can be further
considered as the construction progresses and details on rock fracturing
Sub
No.
26
26
26
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
26.04
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
Dolphin
Discovery Centre
Dolphin Discovery Centre staff have

experience suitable to undertaking the
Marine Fauna Observation position.
The proponent notes the comment. Please refer to Technical Report 10:
Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP) Sub Plan 5
which details commitments to undertaking visual monitoring of dolphins with
the Dolphin Discovery Centre.
26.05
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
Dolphin
Discovery Centre
The Dolphin Discovery Team should be seen

as a source of long term information on
dolphin presence and dolphin interaction
within the local area.
Consultation with the tourism based Dolphin Discovery Centre has regularly
occurred during the preparation of the PER and will continue during the
preparation of management plans and during construction.
26.06
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
Dolphin
Discovery Centre
Issue
Concerned about the economic impacts on

the tourism business if the dolphins are
displaced away from the southern end of
Koombana Bay.
Response
requirements (should rock fracturing be required) can be considered.
An adaptive management process is committed to in the DSDMP Section 5 Management Framework with reporting to a Technical Advisory Committee
(including representative of the Dolphin Discovery Centre) during the
construction phase.
Please also refer to Technical Report 19: Koombana Bay Baseline Marine
Monitoring Report which provides detail on the results of the ongoing
monitoring program implemented more than a year ago. This report is
iterative as each six week set of data is incorporated into the dataset. In
particular an array of continuous passive acoustic monitors has provided a
detailed baseline data set on dolphin occurrence in the southern area of
Koombana Bay and Inner Harbour against which to detect change during
construction and post construction.
Please also refer to Technical Report 10: Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal
Management Plan (DSDMP) Sub Plan 5 which details commitments to
Dolphin Monitoring with the DDC.
B-23
Sub
No.
26
26
26
B-24
Issue
No.
26.07
26.08
26.09
Environmental
Factor
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
Submitter
Issue
Dolphin
Discovery Centre
Would like the marine area close to the old

Power Station to the protected as it is an
important location for dolphins from early
October through to the end of December as
a resting location. It is also a regular swim
site for the tourism business.Concerned that
it may be a restricted area during
construction.
Response
The area referred to is presumed to be on the western side of Hamilla Point
along Power Station Beach. The eastern side is where Berth 14A
construction activity including dredging will occur and it will be a No-Go area
during construction.Please refer to Technical Report 10: Draft Dredging and
Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP) Sub Plan 4 which discusses
commitments for Water and Sediment quality monitoring during dredging.
The area referred to in Koombana Bay (adjacent to Power Station Beach) is
a key water and sediment quality monitoring site and where ongoing baseline
monitoring has been conducted for more than a year (Technical Report 19:
Koombana Bay Baseline Marine Monitoring Report) and where impact
monitoring will be conducted during dredging. This includes two water and
sediment monitoring stations (WSQ 5 and WSQ 6) and continuous water
quality logger (OBS1).Close consultation during dredging and construction
activities is committed to in the DSDMP Section 5 - Management Framework
with reporting to a Technical Advisory Committee (TACC) including a
representative of the Dolphin Discovery Centre during the construction
phase.
Dolphin
Discovery Centre
The South West Marine Research Centre

(SWMR) are well qualified and internationally
recognised for their expertise in dolphin
research and impact assessment
It is noted the SWMR a research unit of Murdoch University funded by

Industry is an expert in the research and study of Dolphins within the
Koombana Bay Area. It will be under advisement the we consider a funded
engagement with any party suitably qualified in both monitoring, reporting
and advising towards impacts on any number of Marine species.
Dolphin
Discovery Centre
Murdoch researchers and colleagues should

be consulted with when discussing the short
and long term impacts on the dolphins. The
SWMR have significant baseline data and
their input into the design of visual
monitoring programs is considered essential
to ensure validity.
The proponent notes the comment. Appropriate qualified marine scientists

were involved in the preparation of the draft PER, and the proponent will
continue to utilise relevant scientific expertise which may include, but not be
limited too, the identified research group.
The proponent would welcome the significant baseline data mentioned and
will appropriately acknowledge the use of this data, and to this end will
approach, the identified research group.
Sub
No.
26
26
26
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
26.10
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
Dolphin
Discovery Centre
26.11
26.12
Marine fauna
(turtles)
Marine fauna
(penguins)
Dolphin
Discovery Centre
Dolphin
Discovery Centre
Issue
The report mentions a 10km study area to

the north and west of the work site however it
is recommended that this be extended to the
south given dolphin movement patterns.
Response
The nominated project area encompasses the area where project activities
are proposed and project attributable impacts are likely to occur, it is
considered appropriate for the purpose of this assessment. This area
extends further to the north and west as this is where the proposed dredge
material placement ground is located in Commonwealth waters. Dredge
attributable impacts might also extend in this direction due to prevailing SW
winds in the region and north flowing capes current. Benthic habitat mapping
was completed for the entire project area to increase knowledge of the region
and encompass this region. There are expected to be no impacts on marine
fauna or other environmental factors outside of this area.
In regards to marine fauna, monitoring approaches will focus on detecting
project attibutable impacts using complementary methods, passive acoustic
monitoring and visual monitoring. These methods are focussed on
Koombana Bay and the Inner Harbour to detect any Project attributable
impacts on dolphin populations.
Should be noted that there is no resident

population of turtles in the South West or
specifically Koombana Bay.
The proponent notes the comment It is agreed that there are no resident
populations of turtles in the south west region or specifically in Koombana
Bay, and this is consistent with the information presented in the Draft PER.
Due to anecdotal reports of (likely mobile) marine turtle occurrences in the
region, Sub Plan 6 has been included in Technical Report 10: Draft Dredging
and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP) as a precaution.
The PER should include the presence of

Blue Penguins within its marine fauna
considerations as there are regular sightings
throughout the year.
The blue penguin is also known as the little penguin. This species (Eudyptula
minor) was discussed in the draft PER. Local information provided by the
Dolphin Discovery Centre was included in the draft PER specifically section
2.4.1 of the Marine Fauna Report includes the following: While no recorded
published information on the presence of little penguins nesting along the
Bunbury foreshore could be found, anecdotal information from the Bunbury
Dolphin Discovery Centre identified that penguins may utilise the Bunbury
foreshores as nesting habitat.
B-25
Sub
No.
26
27
27
27
27
27
B-26
Issue
No.
26.13
27.01
27.02
27.03
27.04
27.05
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
Issue
Response
The proponent has noted this observation and if provided with the
information, will incorporate it as part of baseline monitoring. As the proposed
project has not commenced, the reported changes in dolphin habitat use are
not project attibutable and the proponent at this stage cannot provide
information or a point of view as the causative factors responsible for the
reported change in habitat use.
iterative as each six week set of data is incorporated into the dataset.
The proponent has continuous baseline passive acoustic monitoring
information that has been collected since August 2011 nearby the DDC
interaction zone as outlined in Technical Report 19. This will provide robust
information for this period against which to assess spatial changes in dolphin
habitat use
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
Dolphin
Discovery Centre
Should be noted that there has been a

significant increase in the dolphin visits and
time spent within the DDC interaction zone
over the final quarter of 2012 compared with
the previous 5 years.
Human health
Dr George Crisp
Member Doctors
for the
Environment
A Health Impact Assessment (HIA) should be

undertaken by the health department to
examine the local and wider impacts to
prevent and minimise future health costs and
suffering.
Given the project is located within an existing Port, it is considered that a HIA
is not required.
The proposed dust controls and associated modelling demonstrate
compliance with regulations at the Port boundaries any long term cumulative
effects of the Port should be address by BPA for all port users.
Approvals
Dr George
CrispMember
Doctors for the
Environment
Local marine impacts from dredging and land

impacts should trigger a referral under the
EPBC Act as threatened species such as
black cockatoos are impacted.
A referral under the EPBC Act has already been submitted to SEWPaC.It is
noted that the comment refers to marine impacts and that black cockatoo
habitat is not found in marine environments.
Fisheries
Dr George Crisp
Member Doctors
for the
Environment
The impacts on local fisheries and

recreational amenity should be considered
and the destination of dredge material must
be identified prior to this approval.
The impact on local fisheries has been considered in the preparation of the
PER and consultation undertaken with the Department of Fisheries.
The proposed dredge material site has been identified in the PER however
as it is located in Commonwealth waters is subject to Federal approval.
A Sea Dumping Permit will be submitted to SEWPaC in February 2013.
Climate change
Dr George Crisp
Member Doctors
for the
Environment
15 million tonnes of coal is a very significant

contribution to global emissions. The impacts
of this increase in coal output should be
assessed for there direct contribution to the
global burden of ill health.
The assessment of global emissions is outside the scope of this PER. The
project is only for the transportation of coal.
Economic risk
Dr George Crisp
Member Doctors
for the
Environment
Concerned about the economic risk once

externalised costs (ill health, water use and
pollution and climate change) are included.
Economic Risk and Amenity risks have been considered with the possible
closure of mining operations at Collie due to a lack of commercial viability of
operations. Without a sustainable level of production economic rationale with
respect to returns on investment would jeopardise Energy Generation within
the State and put at risk a considerable number of jobs within the immediate
and surrounding communities.
Sub
No.
27
27
28
28
Issue
No.
27.06
27.07
28.01
28.02
Environmental
Factor
Air quality
Contamination
General
Noise
Submitter
Dr George Crisp
Member Doctors
for the
Environment
Dr George Crisp
Member Doctors
for the
Environment
City of Bunbury
City of Bunbury
Issue
Response
Concerned that for some pollutants such as

fine particulate matter, there is no safe
threshold and any increase in air pollution
will increase risks of ill health in local
communities.
There are significant risks to local

communities from mercury and other heavy
metals through air and water pollution or via
accumulation in the food chain.
Characterisation of dredge sediments has been conducted in accordance

with National Assessment Guidelines for Dredging and screening levels for
all contaminants of potential concern including mercury (average and range
at least an order of magnitude below guidelines) are below screening levels
outlined in the guidelines.
The material is therefore deemed to be suitable for unconfined disposal.
The Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP) Sub
Plan 4 (refer to Appendix D of this report) discusses commitments for Water
and Sediment quality monitoring during dredging.
Air quality emissions from the operations are addressed in the Air QualityDust Emissions (Technical Report 9 of the PER). The Marine Environment
Management Plan also outlines monitoring during ongoing operations postconstruction.
No objection or immediate concerns with the

proposal as it falls within BPA land complies
with the intent of the 'Port Installations
Reserve' under the Greater Bunbury Region
Scheme (GBRS).
The proposal has the potential to contribute
to cumulative noise impact due to both port
expansion operations and increased
frequency of rail line movements. Studies
should be considered together, as opposed
to separately, so as to ensure that the net
operational impact will be considered
cumulatively on the same local receptors.
It is likely that the proposal will result in
exceedence of the permitted noise levels
and will need to be addressed at the design
stage to implement controls to ensure
operation noise does not exceed statutory
requirements.
Noted
It is not possible to consider rail noise and port operation noise together for
the following reasons:
a) The nature of the noise is different port operational noise is generally
continuous in nature while train noise is intermittent
b) Human response to these different sources of noise is different the
combined noise level therefore has little meaning
c)
The assessment methodologies are different in both cases for
example industrial noise is assessed using statistical noise descriptors
(eg LA10 noise levels which represent the noise level exceed for 10% of
the assessment period) whereas rail noise is assessed using the
average noise level (LAeq). It is not possible to add these different
measurement parameters because they measure different things.
Assessment periods are also different (i.e. definitions of day, night etc).
B-27
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
28
28.03
Environmental
Management
28
28.04
Environmental
Health
City of Bunbury
Issue
The proponent should ensure that all
construction and operational environmental
management plans are thoroughly detailed
and implemented in-line with the best
available management practices to the
satisfaction of relevant state and
commonwealth agencies.
Environmental management plans will be developed during the detailed

design phase and will adopted best available management practices.
City of Bunbury
Supports the need for the preparation of a

health risk assessment, if deemed necessary
by the Department of Health (WA)
Given the project is located within an existing Port, it is considered that a HIA
is not required.
The proposed dust controls and associated modelling demonstrate
compliance with regulations at the Port boundaries
28
28.04
Noise
City of Bunbury
28
28.05
Air quality
City of Bunbury
28
28.06
Leachate
Management
City of Bunbury
28
28.07
Waste
City of Bunbury
28.08
Emergency
Management
28
B-28
City of Bunbury
Noise during construction will require

stringent management as there may be a
significant degree of exceedance. Work
outside of 7am to 7pm Monday to Saturday
would require a submission of a noise
management plan. This process is likely to
be controlled by DEC.
The operation will be a prescribed premises
under state Environmental Protection
Regulations 1987, it is anticipated that the
DEC will enforce all necessary pollution
controls in accordance with the
Environmental Protection Act 1986.
In regards to leachate management, it is
uncertain whether the recycling system is of
a type and design that requires additional
measures to eliminate any risk of on-site or
off-site contamination during a flood event.
In relation to the site sewage treatment and
effluent disposal system it is anticipated that
an application will be required to be made to
the local authority for approval of the system
prior to installation in a statutory for under the
Health Regulations 1974.
It is assumed that emergency management
response plans will be formulated by the
BPA and other relevant responsible public
authorities where appropriate, in order to
response to and adequately cope with all
quantified risks.
Response
Noted. The Proponent recognises this and will comply to requirements
Noted. The Proponent recognises this and will comply to requirements
The leachate treatment scheme being developed will ensure that even during
a flood event, contaminated water will not mix with surface water.
An application will be made to the local authority for approval of the sewage
treatment and effluent disposal system prior to installation as per Health
Regulations 1974.
Lanco will continue to liaise with BPA on relevant management plans. During
both the design stage and operations a full risk assessment, Lanco will
undertake a risk assessment of its operations as well as how those
operations may be impacted by and on by others within the Port of Bunbury.
Sub
No.
28
28
Issue
No.
28.09
28.10
Environmental
Factor
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
Marine fauna
(dolphins)
Submitter
Issue
Response
City of Bunbury
All possible management and mitigations

measures supported by peer reviewed
scientific studies should be investigated and
implemented to avoid and minimise any
impacts to cetaceans as a result of
implementing and operating the proposal.
The proponent notes the comment. Please refer to Appendix 10: Technical
Report 10: Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP).
Sub Plan 4 discusses commitments for Water and Sediment quality
monitoring during dredging.
Please refer to Appendix 3: Technical Report 3: Marine Environmental
Quality Studies- Appendix 7E Underwater Noise Modelling and detailed
Independent Peer Review
Please refer to Appendix 4: Technical Report 4: Hydrodynamic and Sediment
Transport Modelling which outlines in detail the results of this modelling and
the detailed independent peer review of modelling scenarios and
methodology.
City of Bunbury
It is suggested that the proponent contributes

funding towards dolphin (cetacean) research
that supports the viability of a dolphin
population in perpetuity within Koombana
Bay.
Lanco will continue to be supportive of the Dolphin Discovery Centre through

the sharing of information gathered as part of the management and
monitoring of this project. Lanco believes it improper to fund organisations
that have a direct interest in commercial matters as it may generate a conflict
of interest and create a bias when it comes to considered professional
advice. Lanco has a defined corporate sponsorship program that may
consider applications after project is concluded.
28
28.11
Structure Plan
City of Bunbury
28
28.12
Structure Plan
City of Bunbury
28
28.13
Structure Plan
City of Bunbury
29
29.01
Support
WAPRES
Has ongoing objections to the closure of

Estuary Drive. Concerned that the default
closure of Estuary Drive may come into
effect with this proposal.
Supports a fast train link into the CBD
terminating near the Silos complex as shown
on the structure plan map. The City of
Bunbury would expect that the proposal will
not compromise the feasibility of a fast train
in the medium to long term.
Main Roads WA has indicated that with the
loss of Estuary Drive as an alternative route
into/out of the city that the impacts on the
Australind Bypass road will be such that is
will likely fail by the year 2030. It is
recommended that discussions with the BPA,
DoT, WAPC and Main Roads WA should be
undertaken regarding the potential impact of
the proposal on Estuary Drive.
Acknowledges the economic and social
benefits arising from implementation of this
proposal and support in-principle the export
of coal through Bunbury Port.
The closure of Estuary Drive has not been considered as part of this PER.
Noted.
This is outside of the scope of this PER.
A traffic management plan will be prepared during construction and will be

discussed with relevant stakeholders.
Noted
B-29
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
29
29.02
Contamination
WAPRES
30
30.01
General
Department of
Water
30
30.02
General
Department of
Water
30
30.03
Department of
Water
30
30.04
Groundwater
Department of
Water
30
30.05
Groundwater
Department of
Water
30
30.06
Water
Department of
Water
B-30
Issue
Concerned about the risk of contamination
from coal dust. Contamination of the port
woodchip stockpile with coal dust would
jeopardise their export business.
Are unclear as to how many exceedences,
specifically coal dust, will be avoided or
would be managed to ensure no impact on
the neighbouring stockpile. Any exceedence
may threaten their business.
All points raised in original correspondence
have been addressed however it is not clear
if the deletions were made to remove
inconsistencies and potentially difficult
concepts (i.e. that the train unloading station
may require permanent dewatering) rather
than tackling directly
Supporting information for the PER should
be supported by up to date information. Eg
Technical Paper 14 - use of incorrect
groundwater extraction volumes within 2km.
Should be noted that the rail line within the
project is within an ESA area that supports
the Preston River and Lechenault Estuary.
Under the Rights in Water and Irrigation Act
1914 there is also a need to obtain a license
for the decommissioning of the unused
Yarragadee bores. There are at least 2
bores involved.
Believes the confining layer of the aquifer
being compromised is greatest risk and
experienced contractors should be used
ensuring they are away of its importance
Fit for purpose water use needs to be
considered for dust suppression, fire
suppression, rail unloading works, irrigation
and wash-down activities. Technical Report
18 does address fit for use however it is
labelled as preliminary
Response
product at port.
The design has progressed since the first draft of the PER and we are now
able to state with certainty that no permanent dewatering will occur.
Noted - it is not expected that the Technical Papers will be updated at this
stage.
Noted
Noted. This has been raised with the BPA the owners of the bore license.
BPA have indicated they will rescind their rights to these bores and
decommission them prior to Lanco commencing construction".
No contractors have currently been engaged on this project however
contractors to be used would have experience in undertaking similar work.
Fit for purpose water will be used for dust suppression, fire suppression, rail
unloading works, irrigation and wash-down activities.
Sub
No.
30
30
Issue
No.
30.07
30.08
Environmental
Factor
Groundwater
Groundwater
Submitter
Department of
Water
Department of
Water
30
30.09
Surface Water
Department of
Water
30
30.10
Surface Water
Department of
Water
Issue
All groundwater resources are fully allocated

and there will be a need for the operator to
secure water from alternative sources or
secure a trade.
Considering the expected Maximum Depth

to Groundwater at the site, will appropriate
vertical separations to groundwater be
achieved from the base of such
infrastructure. Similarly for such water
management infrastructure for wastewater
management associated with administration,
operation, stormwater management
structures (underground storage tanks, GPT
and soak wells), chemical and hazardous
substances including fuel and oil storage
(below ground tanks) etc.
Expects structures such as the workshop
and spare store facility where hazardous
chemicals and fuels are used and stored to
have a hardstand for wash-down runoff can
be caught and treated.
Site works associated with the
decommissioning of any septic tank and
leach drain systems should be mindful of
their potential impact on shallow
groundwater resources.
Response
It is understood that there are two unused Yarragadee bores available within
the vicinity of the site. Lanco will apply and obtain a licence under the Rights
in Water and Irrigation Act 1914 for the decommissioning and
recommissioning under new ownership of these unused Yarragadee bores.
The ground water mapping system of the Department indicates groundwater
is available and that once actual water usage is determined an application
will be made.
Alternatively Bunbury Port Authority purchases water from Bunbury Water
Board (Aqwest) and resells it to the operators of each berth. Under this
provision, we will purchase water from BPA. The point of connection is just
outside northern corner of the Alcoa berth (adjacent to Berth 14A).
The train unloading substructure will be designed as a water retaining

structure. The design is proposed to be a water resisting basement which
caters for the uplift forces due to water pressure and is sized to have
sufficient mass and frictional resistance to prevent flotation. The design
makes use of a diaphragm wall as part of the permanent works. The
diaphragm walls will be constructed deeper than the formation level for the
bottom slab. Once the slab is connected to the diaphragm wall, it will act as a
single structure stopping any material/chemicals/water etc. interacting with
the soils outside the buried concrete structure.Other underground storage
tanks, GPT and soak well will also be designed using prudent standards.
Designs of the relevant facilities will meet storage handling and transport
requirements for all hazardous chemicals and fuels sufficient to meet
regulatory requirements.
Noted - this would be considered in the construction environmental

management plan.
B-31
Sub
No.
31
31
31
31
B-32
Issue
No.
31.01
31.02
31.03
31.04
Environmental
Factor
Coastal
processes
Dredging
Dredging
Dredging
Submitter
Issue
Response
Department of
Transport
A proper coastal setback assessment and

long term coastal management plan are
important to protect the new development
from damage by coastal hazards and the
shore facing north into Koombana Bay
The area referred to is part of the open space/recreational area and therefore
not Lanco responsibility. Where appropriate, Lanco will provide input into a
BPA coastal management plan if required.
Department of
Transport
Consideration should be given to the impact

of the plume from the capital and
maintenance dredging on the nearby
beaches.
The proponent notes the comment in relation to capital dredging.

Maintenance dredging is managed by Bunbury Port Authority. Please refer to
(DSDMP). Sub Plan 3 discusses commitments for Dredge Plume monitoring
during capital dredging and outlines the adaptive management response
where exceedances/anomalies occur.
Department of
Transport
Consideration should be given to

determining a 'best estimate' which may
allow more efficient management of the
environmental impacts during and following
construction. Over estimation of the potential
impacts can have the flow on effect of
placing monitoring sites in ineffective
locations or result in ineffective selection of
management options.
Technical Report 1: Indicative Dredge Plan for Modelling outlines the

methodology adopted for realistic worst case scenario for modelling.
Technical Report 4: Hydrodynamic and Sediment Transport Modelling
includes a detailed independent peer review which also addresses this issue.
(DSDMP). Section 8 of DSDMP discusses the methodology used to
determine sampling stations location through flushing study and sediment
sampling of the bay to provide interpolated grid of Particle Size Distribution (a
major correlate of sediment concentrations of constituents of potential
concern in benthic environments) across Koombana Bay.
Technical Report 19: Koombana Bay Baseline Marine Monitoring Report
which provides detail on the results of the ongoing monitoring program
implemented more than a year ago. This report is iterative as each six week
set of data is incorporated into the dataset.
Sub Plan 4 of the DSDMP discusses commitments for Water and Sediment
quality monitoring during dredging.
Department of
Transport
Where possible initial modelling results and

predictions of impacts should be validated
following the commencement of construction.
Where predictions significantly differ from
those actually monitored, management plans
should be revised accordingly.
The proponent notes the comment. Validation of the model will be

undertaken through field measurements at commencement of the dredging.
This commitment is contained within Sub Plan 1 of Technical Report 10:
Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP). Sub Plan 3
of the DSDMP outlines adaptive management steps to address
exceedances/anomalies including reduction/cessation of overflow. It is also
important to note that reducing dredge productivity can increase the duration
of dredging.
Sub
No.
31
31
Issue
No.
31.05
31.06
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
Dredging
Department of
Transport
Dredging
Department of
Transport
31
31.07
General
Department of
Transport
32
32.01
Rail
movements
Alcoa
32
32.02
Environment
Management
Alcoa
Issue
Further consideration should be given to
optimising the disposal of dredge material
such that relatively fine material is effectively
covered by coarser material that more
closely matches the particle size found
naturally in the area, thus minimising the
potential mobility of the disposal mound.
The proponent agrees with the comment. This commitment has been
incorporated in the revised Draft DSDMP - Sub Plan 9 which will be provided
to the Commonwealth for assessment with the Sea Dumping Permit
application.
Model predictions should be validated

against post-construction monitoring data. It
is recommended that a statement or
commitment to this be included within the
main report, along with an indicative postconstruction monitoring plan.
The proponent notes the comment. Validation and monitoring of Project

attributable impacts during the construction phase in the marine environment
are addressed in Technical Report 10: Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal
Management Plan (DSDMP) - Sub Plan 1 and Sub Plan 3. The Marine
Environment Management Plan contains the commitments for monitoring
post-construction.
All collected data and data analysis should

be made publicly available to aid in the
assessment and management of future
projects.
Increased rail movements and unloading
activities should not impact on Alcoa's rail
activities, create significant safety risks, rail
congestion or conflicts with surrounding
community during operation or construction.
Currently there is insufficient information to
allow Alcoa to determine the precise
implications of the proposed rail changes
Would like to opportunity to review the
Construction Environmental Management
Plan (CEMP) prior to it being finalised. Of
particular concern is the prevention of soil
and groundwater contamination, noise
management, dust management and surface
water management.
Response
Where required, data will be made available where it contributes to the

positive future management and assessment of the local environment.
Detailed design is currently being undertaken. Lanco will commit to continue

to engage with Alcoa in regards this projects rail movements
Lanco will consult with Alcoa and other port users during the preparation of
the CEMP.
B-33
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
32
32.03
Air quality
32
33
32.04
33.01
Noise
Human health
Issue
Response
Alcoa
To reach the air quality controls, Alcoa

believes this will require Lanco to commit to
best practice engineering controls during
both construction and operational phases.
Lanco are committed to undertaking best practice engineering controls.

These will be finalised during the detailed design phase and include stringent
site access and works controls, site monitoring and independent validations
of measurement samples.
Alcoa
Key port stakeholders would like the

opportunity to review the noise management
plan prior to its finalisation and the
commencement of construction.
Lanco will consult with Alcoa during the preparation of the noise
management plan.
Concerned that hazardous coal dust is being

transported and unloaded so close to
unprotected residential areas which is a
significant health and environmental concern
DECCW criteria which considers public health. The Project does not use
open stockpile or material handling, all Coal is stored inside a 750m x 100mx
45m - approximate - shed and all conveyors are enclosed.
Public
submission
33
33.02
Noise
Public
submission
The additional transportation and unloading

of coal would greatly exacerbate the noise
pollution in the East Bunbury area
33
33.03
Traffic
Public
submission
Transportation should be by rail not road.
The port development proposal detailed in the PER is based on delivery of

coal by rail to the port.
Public
submission
Kwinana would be a more suitable venue for

coal loading and export as this Port was
originally designed and planned for heavy
industry whereas the Bunbury Port is
bordered by residential areas to the north,
east and south.
During the preparation of the PER several other options were considered
however Bunbury was considered the most suitable as the site was
appropriately zoned and it is an existing port.
33
B-34
33.04
Alternatives
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
33
33.05
Fire
Public
submission
Coal storage carries a major fire risk
Response
Further investigations are currently being undertaken by the University of
Queensland School of Mining and Metallurgical to determine the risk of the
coal to spontaneously combust. The results of this study are expected by 4
March 2013 and will be used to inform the detailed design and the
management of coal.
Griffin Coal mines have been operating since 1927 and are well versed in
mitigating such issues. Stockpile and storage management are the best
methods to remove such risks. Lanco currently exports 750,000 tonnes via
Kwinana Bulk Terminal without incident. Regardless of this we have put in
place various technologies and study outputs to ensure we provide a safe
and secure environment for operations.
Land values in the East Bunbury and Pelican

Point area will be significantly lowered due to
increased noise, dust and road congestion.
There is no evidence to suggest that the project will lead to an decrease in

land values.
Noise modelling at Pelican Point demonstrates no exceedences.
Lanco are working with BPA to ensure the facility complies with the noise
criteria set by DEC.
33.06
Land value
Public
submission
34
34.01
Air
quality/Human
Health
Public
submission
34
34.02
Economic risk
Public
submission
33
35
35
35.01
35.02
Air quality and

dust
Consultation
Issue
Concerned about impacts on coal dust,

including health risks, visual impacts and
environmental pollution (like Newcastle in
NSW).
Concern that Bunbury will not see any
economic benefits if Port fees are going to
be waived as the media has reported for
Lanco at Freemantle Port.
The proposal should not be compared to Newcastle which has open

stockpiles.
The proposal is a fully enclosed shed adopting best practice management
and design to ensure any impacts are reduced.
This is outside the scope of this PER
Public
submission
Concerned that not enough work has been

done on noise or dust levels. Concerned that
what has been prepared is only estimates.
Further to the Part IV Approvals, approvals are also required under Part V of
the Act which will require additional information being prepared and
assessed on the detailed design.
Prior to construction a development application will also need to be lodged
with Bunbury Port Authority
Public
submission
The notification of public comment has been

woeful. Believes that any affected party
should be directly notified and not an
assumption that everyone reads the SW
Times.
To be notified via a letter from our local MP
and over the XMAS New Year break is
unacceptable.
Consultation has been undertaken in accordance with the EPA guidelines.

Advertisements were placed in the SW Times and The West at the
commencement of the public review and a week prior to the closing date.
The public review period was extended by two weeks (to eight weeks) due to
the Christmas Period.
B-35
Sub
No.
36
Issue
No.
36.01
Environmental
Factor
Air quality
Submitter
Issue
Response
Public
submission
Concerned about the impact that coal dust

will have on the wider environment, personal
living space and value of properties.
Based on insight into the workings of the

Griffin Coal Ewington mine the crushing
facilities have inadequate dust suppression
and Lanco have little concern for the effect of
dust on its workers or the community of
Collie. It is not unreasonable to question how
long the commitment to covered wagons will
last.
Lanco will meet the requirements of its environmental approvals and also
meet Ministerial requirements pertaining to this PER.
36
36.02
Air quality
Public
submission
36
36.03
Economic
Public
submission
37
37
B-36
37.01
37.02
Dredging
Water quality
Department of
Fisheries
Department of
Fisheries
Can Lanco finance the project?
The finance of the Project is outside the scope of the PER
Requests no dredging be undertaken

between the months of September to
February to ensure impacts on fish spawning
and mitigation events are minimised.
Where possible Lanco will consider these impacts
Recommends additional water quality

monitoring be undertaken in the vicinity of
the Leschenault Cut to ensure there is no
adverse impact on sensitive mangrove
communities.
Monitoring should be located on both sides
of the entrance to monitor the dredge plume,
and mitigation strategies prepared in the
event that the plume does extend to the
Leschenault Estuary
There may be some confusion on the terminology regarding location of the

Leschenault "Cut". Using accepted local terminology for place names "The
Cut" is located north of Koombana Bay whereas "The Plug" is located in the
southwest of Koombana Bay leading to Leschenault Inlet and the mangrove
community. For clarification of these terms, please refer to Figure 2 in the
Indicative Dredge Plan for Modelling of (Technical Report 1 of the PER).
Monitoring of Project attributable impacts during the construction phase in
the marine environment are addressed in Technical Report 10: Draft
Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP) (Refer to Appendix
D of this report). Sub Plan 4 of the DSDMP identifies two monitoring stations,
one on either side of "The Plug" leading to the Leschenault Inlet and the
mangrove community.
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
37
37.03
Dredge spoil
disposal site
Department of
Fisheries
37
37.04
Consultation
Department of
Fisheries
Biosecurity
Department of
Fisheries
37
37.05
Issue
Requests the opportunity to provide
comment on the proposed dredge spoil
disposal site to assess any potential impact
on fishing operations and habitat.
Recommends Lanco liaise with key fishing
stakeholder groups to identify mitigation
strategies to minimise the disruption to
existing fishing activity prior to construction.
These should include WA Fishing Industry
Council, Recfishwest and the local
community.
The PER should articulate the requirement
that prior to entry to the project area, all
commercial vessels be managed to prevent
the introduction of introduced marine pests.
37
37.06
Biosecurity
Department of
Fisheries
Lanco should ensure an Introduced Marine

Pests Management Strategy is in place prior
to the commencement of the project. An
Introduced Marine Pests Monitoring Program
also needs to be prepared to the satisfaction
of the EPA.
37
37.07
Consultation
Department of
Fisheries
Were not invited to project briefings in

August/September 2011. It is important that
they are invited to future project briefings
Response
The PER illustrates the location of the proposed dredge spoil disposal site.
The proposed dredge material placement ground has been situated to
minimise impacts to benthic habitat and associated fisheries and fisheries
important habitat.
Rechfishwest were consulted during the public review period. Consultation
will continue with stakeholder groups during the development of the
management plans
The proponent notes the comment. Please refer to Appendix 10: Technical
Report 10: Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP)
Sub Plan 12 Introduced Marine Pests developed in consultation with
Department of Fisheries.
(DSDMP) Sub Plan 12 Introduced Marine Pests developed in consultation
with Department of Fisheries.
The proponent disagrees with the request to develop an IMP Monitoring
Program. This is the responsibility of the Bunbury Port Authority who conduct
regular IMP surveys of the Port area. This is addressed in the Marine
Environment Management Program. Separating Project attributable impacts
for IMPs from other IMP impacting processes/source in a commercial port
would also be unfeasible in an IMP monitoring program implemented by the
proponent.
Noted.
Further consultation was undertaken with Fisheries on 1 February 2013.
B-37
Sub
No.
37
37
B-38
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
37.08
Marine
environmental
quality
37.09
Marine
environmental
quality
Submitter
Issue
Response
Department of
Fisheries
The PER lacks details about the key aspects

of the marine environment, including water
quality and details on the effects of
cumulative impacts associated with
increased poor flushing in an environment.
Additional dredge works may exacerbate any
existing problems.
The proponent disagrees with the comment. Please refer to the supporting
documentation: Technical Report 3: Marine Environmental Quality Studies
which provides a detailed review of baseline information on the marine
environment. This report also contains Appendix 3.A: TSM Mapping Based
on MODIS Images Report
Appendix 3.B: Total Suspended Solids Baseline Study
Appendix 3.C: Laboratory Results for Sediment and Water Testing
Appendix 3.D: Acid Sulphate Soil Results and Report
Appendix 3.E: Flushing Study
Assessment of predicted dredging impacts are assessed in Technical Report
4: Hydrodynamic and Sediment Transport Modelling.
Characterisation of the existing water quality attributes based on sampling
plan driven by flushing study is reported in Technical Report 19: Koombana
Bay Baseline Marine Monitoring Report.
Monitoring processes and adaptive management processes during dredging
activities are outlined in Sub Plan 1; Sub Plan 3 and Sub Plan 4 of Technical
Report 10: Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan.
Department of
Fisheries
Recommends that recent monitoring data, in

addition to historical data, be included in the
PER for comparative purposes.
The proponent notes the comment. Please refer to Technical Report 19:
Koombana Bay Baseline Marine Monitoring Report which provides detail on
the results of the ongoing monitoring program implemented more than a year
ago. This report is iterative as each six week set of data is incorporated into
the dataset.
Sub
No.
37
37
Issue
No.
37.10
37.11
Environmental
Factor
Marine Fauna
Marine Fauna
Submitter
Issue
Department of
Fisheries
Reference to relevant literature, including

relevant Department publications must be
included. Particularly A 12 month survey of
recreational fishing in the Leschenault
Estuary of WA during 1998 (Malseed, B.E,
Sumner, N.R and Williamsom, P.C. 2000,
Fisheries Research Report 120)
Department of
Fisheries
The summary is inadequate and out of date,

particularly noting the significance of the
area from crabs and finfish in near shore and
estuary areas. Recommends that it be
revised to include current information on
commercial, recreational (including Charter
Boat Operators) and customary fishing, and
include particular reference to the State of
the Fisheries and Aquatic Resources Report
2011/12 and Spatial distribution of shorebased fishers in the greater Perth
Metropolitan area over summer 2010/2011.
Final NRM Report - Project No. 09040,
November 2011.
Response
This and other source material available at the time was utilised by the
authors for the preparation of the technical report which was included in the
draft PER. Relevant source material (additional to the identified reference)
published by the Department of Fisheries and referred to in the draft PER
include: Bellchambers, L.M., Smith, K.D. and Harris, D. 2006. An
Assessment of the Blue Swimmer Crab Fishery in Geographe Bay. Fisheries
Research Report No. 158, Department of Fisheries, Western Australia.
Fletcher, W. J., & Santoro, K. (2010). State of the Fisheries and Aquatic
Resources Report 2009/10. Department of Fisheries, Western Australia.
Harris. D.C., Joll, L.M. and Watson, R.A. (1999) The Western Australian
Scallop Industry. Fisheries Research Report 114. Huddleston, V. (2006).
Assessment of western rock lobster strategic management options: a social
assessment of coastal communities hosting the western rock lobster fishing
fleet. Fisheries Management Paper No. 211, (211). Kangas, M. I. (2000).
Synopsis of the biology and exploitation of the blue swimmer crab , Portunus
pelagicus Linnaeus , in Western Australia Western Australia 6020. Fisheries
Research Report 121, (121). Lenanton, R, StJohn, J, Keay, I, Wakefield, C,
Jackson, G, Wise, B, Gaughan, D. (2009). Spatial scales of exploitation
among populations of demersal scalefish: implications for management. WA
Department of Fisheries. Perth: WA Department of Fisheries. Sumner, N.R.,
Williamson, R.C., Blight, S.J and Gaughan, D.J. 2008. A 12-month survey of
recreational boat-based fishing between Augusta and Kalbarri on the West
Coast of Western Australia during 2005-2006. Fisheries Report 177.
Department of Fisheries. 44 pp.
The additional reference referred to was not available at the time the PER
was drafted. The draft PER used the best available information at the time of
drafting. The significance of the area for crabs and finfish was discussed in
Appendix 9C and drawn from a range of publications by the Department of
Fisheries as well as peer reviewed material and other technical reports.
B-39
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
37
37.12
Access
Department of
Fisheries
37
37.12
Marine Fauna
Department of
Fisheries
38
38.01
General
Department of
State
Development
39
39.01
Consultation
Public
submission
39
39.02
General
Public
submission
B-40
Issue
Management and mitigation measures
should be identified for how inhibiting access
will be addressed. Should include potential
social and/or economic impacts to fishers.
The PER must acknowledge that fish are

potentially impacted by noise associated with
pile driving and rock fracturing. Where
possible these activities should be avoided
during spawning times.
Advises that the coal identified in the PER for

export is subject to the Collie Coal (Griffin)
Agreement Act 1979 (State Agreement).
Under the State Agreement proposal relating
to the development of the coal resources are
subject to approval by the Minister for State
Development. Requests for the export of the
coal resource are subject to approval from
the state are also subject to Minister's
consent.
Clause 25 of this agreement provided the
Minister must consent to any agreement for
the sale of coal for export from the State.
Common practice of having submission
periods held over the December/January
holiday periods are against
public/community/family interest.
Does not support any aspect of a project
which burns coal.
Response
The proponent disagrees with the comment. The proposed construction area
at Berth 14A is currently off-limits to fishing as it forms part of the Bunbury
Port Inner Harbour. While the draft PER identified that information on the fine
spatial scale of fishing activity was generally lacking, the Port itself is not
known to be a focus of any commercial fishing activities. There is a low level
of recreational fishing effort, but this recreational fishing experience is
substitutable locally with other locations.
The proponent notes the comment. Appendix 7.E includes information on the
potential impact of the proposed Activities on fish. Any behavioural impacts
from rock fracturing are expected to be very short term and reversible.
Assessment of the impact zone for pile driving (Appendix 7.E) indicates that
noise generation from this activity will be confined entirely to the Inner
Harbour which is a busy industrial commercial port. The proposed mitigation
measures for pile driving and rock fracturing are focussed on reducing the
potential intensity of the disturbance, and as such are relevant for fish as
well.
This is outside the scope of the PER
The public review period was between 21 November and 16 January. This is
consistent with the EPA guidelines and extended for two weeks to take into
consideration the holiday period.
The project does not consume/burn any coal as it is a supply chain project.
The final use of coal may be to burn and or crush for use in other processes.
In all cases these are outside the scope of the PER
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
40
40.01
Coastal
planning
40.02
Terrestrial
vegetation
40
Department of
Planning
Issue
The PER does not consider the requirements
of State Coastal Planning Policy 2.6 (SPP
2.6) and Development Control Policy 1.8
Canal Estates and Other Artificial Waterway
Developments (DC 1.8). Whilst SPP 2.6
exempts port facilities from requiring a
foreshore reserve to allow for physical
processes/coastal hazards, such
development must be considered within a
coastal hazard risk management and
adaption planning measures have been
agreed to. The development must be
designed to withstand a 1 in 100 annual
exceedance probability event and to
accommodate sea level rise of 0.9 metres
The detailed design and the water management study takes into
consideration a 1 in 100 year event.
Department of
Planning
A landscape management plan should be

required as a condition of approval if not
completed and approved prior.
A landscape management plan will be completed following finalisation of the

detailed design and prior to construction. The plan will incorporate the
recommendations of the terrestrial flora and fauna assessments in addition to
general protection and maintenance of existing vegetation during
construction and operation.
40
40.03
Visual impact
Department of
Planning
40
40.04
Surface Water
Department of
Planning
To further mitigate the visual impact of the

proposal, it is recommended that all buildings
proposed have an external cladding that is
non-reflective and coloured in a neutral earth
tone to blend in with the landscape as far as
practicable.
Section 1.7 of the Water Management
document (2011) incorrectly refers to ANZ
Guidelines for Fresh and Marine Water
Quality, this should be referenced as
ANZACC.
Response
During the detailed design phase, measures to reduce the visual impact of
the proposal including the finishes will be considered.
This document included in the PER is preliminary and is currently being

updated and this error will be amended in the final report.
B-41
Sub
No.
40
40
40
40
B-42
Issue
No.
40.05
40.06
Environmental
Factor
Surface Water
Surface Water
Submitter
Issue
Response
Department of
Planning
It is unclear what the capacity of the

infiltration basin/ponds will be. The frequency
of storm events for these ponds is not stated,
therefore, it is unclear how often the overflow
from runoff from hardstand areas may
discharge into the harbour and/or estuary
from surface water drainage cannot be
adequately assessed using the information
provided in the Water Management
document (2011).
The run off water from bunded areas are collected and pumped into Waste
Water Treatment Plant within the site to be recycled back into the system.
The sump pumps will start on high level signal in the sump. Once the water
management study is complete, every bunded area will be looked individually
to ensure that the sump pumps are capable of removing the water from the
bunded area.
Department of
Planning
It is recommended that further information is

provided in the Water Management
document on surface water drainage and the
capacity of the infiltration basin and
frequency of the storm events.
Water management study is being carried out currently. It is envisaged that

the ponds will be sized for 100 year event and the storm water will be
recycled back to the system providing the outcome of the study is favourable
to the idea.
40.07
Surface Water
Department of
Planning
40.08
Terrestrial
vegetation
Department of
Planning
It is recommended that the proposal and

technical reports on water management and
hydrology are referred to the Department of
Environment and Conservation and the
Department of Water for their advice and
recommendations on the impacts of the
proposal on the harbour and estuary.
Indirect impacts on the remaining vegetation
and fauna habitat from erosion and/or
contamination during operation of the port
has not been adequately addressed in the
PER documentation.
This should be addressed through an
operational and ongoing environmental
management plan.
The final water management plan will be forwarded to DoW and DEC for
their review and comment prior to construction.
It is not proposed to discharge any water into the estuary.
It is proposed that all hardstand areas will be bunded and therefore any
erosion and/or contamination during operation will be significantly reduced.
Management of these issues will be considered further in the preparation of
an EMP
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
40
40.09
Sewage
41
41.01
Support
42
42.01
General
42
42.02
Dredging
Submitter
Department of
Planning
Public
submission
Department of
Health
Department of
Health
42
42.03
Contamination
Department of
Health
42
42.03
Dredging
Department of
Health
Contamination
Department of
Health
42
42.04
Issue
Response
Onsite sewage system is the most practical.

It is expected that appropriate buffers to the
estuary and harbour are applied to the
sewage system to ensure not nutrients or
other contaminates are leached into the
natural environment.
Lanco are proposing to utilise a "Biomax" package sewage treatment plant

coupled with a lined wastewater disposal pond. The effluent will be treated to
a Class B standard and will be suitable for use in landscaping. Buffer Zones
around the plant and pond will comply with the requirements of the
Department of Health WA.
Believes that the proposal will benefit the

city.
Noted
Department of Health (DOH) would be

included in the list of identified stakeholders.
There is no mention of any sampling of the
dredged material to determine any potential
contamination of the dredged material. There
has been no assessment of the potential
impacts of risks to public health from these or
other substances.
Concerned about the number of potentially
hazardous material and chemicals which
have been identified however no consultation
or discussion with DOH in relation to these
findings. It is also noted that there has been
no investigation (at this stage) as to the
extent of contamination or of the potential
threat to public health
It is important to monitor the sediments to
ensure metals do not increase due to the
disturbance by the dredging contractors.
All identified Chemicals of Potential Concern
(CoPC) are to be investigated and
appropriate mitigation/management plans
developed. Such management plans should
include comprehensive sampling and
monitoring programs to map extent of
contamination and effectiveness of clean
up/mitigation operations.
DoH would welcome the opportunity to
comment on all reports and
recommendations
Noted. Lanco met with DoH on 11 February 2013.

Sampling of the dredged footprint has been undertaken in accordance with
the Marine sediment sampling and analysis report (Technical Report 8 of the
PER). This report has been reviewed and approved by SEWPaC.
A sampling and analysis plan has been prepared and it is proposed that
detailed site investigations works will commence over the next few months
and prior to construction.
Once the results of the detailed site investigations works are known
consultation will be undertaken with DoH.
A draft DSDMP has been prepared for the dredging works. Once a dredging
contractor is engaged, this report will be finalised. Refer to Appendix D of this
report.
Once the Detailed Site Investigation has been undertaken management

plans can be developed.
Lanco will consult with Department of Health in the preparation of these
plans.
B-43
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
42
42.04
Dredging
Department of
Health
42
42.05
Contamination
Department of
Health
42
42.06
Contamination
Department of
Health
42
42.07
Public Health
Department of
Health
42
42.08
Public Health
Department of
Health
B-44
Issue
The report failed to assess the remobilisation of potentially harmful
contaminates currently 'contained' within the
sediment. The PER has not address any
management program to mitigate public
health which includes:- Contaminates with a
significant human health implication:- What
mandatory standards, guidelines are to be
used to assess when human health is at
risk- If required, what 'trigger' levels are to
be utilised to determine when further
investigation, monitoring and corrective
actions and control -- Measures to mitigate
the risks- Which agencies/departments will
be responsible to manage/audit the
monitoring programs (s)- Responsibility for
the cost of the monitoring; and- Time frames
for monitoring
Concerned with the presence of
Organochlorines (OCs) within the proposed
area. OC's are resistant to degradation so
they persist in the environment for a long
period of time and have a greater chance of
posing a risk to the public.
The extent of asbestos contamination is to
be determined and will require the
development of an asbestos management
plan to guide its removal and disposal.
A Health Impact Assessment (HIA)
evaluation with respect to the impact on
Public Health throughout the project should
be considered.
Statements and comments addressing
potential 'impacts on public health' are
recommended to be integrated to the
document under the appropriate headings
particularly in relation to potential hazards or
nuisances.
The EPA/Proponent should consider
incorporating HIA and/or Public Health
Assessment (PHA) principles into the PER
decision making process.
Response
The project was discussed with representatives from the DoH on 11

February 2013. The results of the technical reports were discussed and it
was determined that the level of assessment undertaken and the
management and mitigation measures proposed are appropriate.
Lanco will continue to engage with DoH.
Noted. If required, appropriate management plans will be completed.
If asbestos is identified during the detailed site investigations an Asbestos

management plan shall be prepared prior to any site works
working port and the zoning is consistent with the proposed use. This has
been agreed with DoH.
Air and Noise Impact Assessments have been undertaken and which
address any potential issues relating to these factors.
The EPA generated the Environmental Scoping Document. The proponent

has complied within the context of the requirement set by the OEPA
Sub
No.
Issue
No.
Environmental
Factor
Submitter
42
42.09
Air quality
Department of
Health
42
42.10
Air quality
Department of
Health
42
42.11
Public Health
Department of
Health
42
42.12
Public Health
Department of
Health
The proponent must ensure that the

proposed infrastructure and site works do not
create additional mosquito breeding habitat.
The water management plan still in development will consider this.
Department of
Indigenous
Affairs
Some sections of the dune area in the

northern portion of the site may be impacted
by the proposed works and it is known that
Aboriginal burial remains exist within the
dune systems in the Bunbury area and are
likely to be considered sites to which Section
5 of the Aboriginal Heritage Act 1972
applies.
It is recommended that the proponent
consider undertaking an archaeological
assessment, if an assessment hasn't already
occurred, for the northern section of the
project area, if impacts to the original dune
system are proposed to be undertaken.
Lanco has further consulted with the Department of Indigenous Affairs (DIA)
on this issue and a requirement will be included in the CEMP that if
excavation of the dunal system is required specialist advice will be sort.
During construction if any remains are found, work in the area will stop
immediately and DIA will be contacted.
43
43.01
Indigenous
Heritage
Issue
The proponent should ensure that the
proposed dust management and monitoring
plans are implemented in a timely fashion
and comply with DEC reporting
requirements.
Request DEC provide feedback to DOH on
the implementation of the Dust Management
Plan and if health standards are breached
DOH should be included in the response
processes.
Reporting on results from the monitoring of
potential contaminants which are of a public
health concern should be in a prompt and
timely manner.
The Port of Bunbury need to be confident
that they can manage the risks from
mosquitoes and mosquito-borne diseases on
public health and the associated impacts.
BPA should have sufficient resources to
continue mosquito management for the
future of the development.
Response
Noted. The Dust Management Plan will be prepared and submitted to DEC
for approval prior to construction.
Noted. This will be a requirement of future management plans
This is outside of the scope of the PER and the proponent
B-45
Appendix C
Example of stockpile management plan for Ewington Operations
The Griffin Coal Mining

Company Pty Ltd
Coal Handling Plant Stockpile Management Plan
Coal Handling Plant

Stockpile
Management Plan
Title
GCM-PLN-CPP- 0004 CHP Management Plan
Revision
0
Date Reviewed
30/11/2012
Owner
Coal Processing & Port
Logistics Manager
Page
1 of 5

Company Pty Ltd
Ewington Operations Stockyard Management

Ewington Operations Stockpile Areas are designed around the CHP to maximise efficiencies to
produce coal through the Bin. Below are the Stockpile names, ash type, capability and percentage:
Stockpile
Ash type
Ash %
Maximum capacity
GoBay
High Ash
Above 9.5%
20,000 Tonnes
Bills (overflow stockpile)
Low Ash
5-6.5%
N/A
RomRamp
Low Ash
5-6.5%
6,000 Tonnes
Horrys Stockpile
Medium Ash
6.5-9%
150K-200K Tonnes
Verve (Muja)
N/A
N/A
880 Tonnes
Surveying is conducted once per month or when a stockpile has been completely emptied.
An overview of the stockpile locations can be found in Annex A.
Raw Coal Stockpile

Coal stockpile profiles are planned by the mine geology or engineering departments to prevent
excessive dust gener ation and sl umping, especially in wet weather. They also need t o provide safe
access and working areas for stockpiling and other machinery. Spontaneous combustion, especially
of product coal, is prevented by providing good drainage and an organised reclaim process to
minimise the time that coal is kept in the stockpile.
Loose coal has a natural angle of repose in a stockpile of 37.5. At angles greater than 37.5 coal
slopes will collapse and bury any personnel and equipment if disturbed. The angle of repose will vary
somewhat with the coal moisture content and size distribution.
8216 ANGLE OF REPOSE.AI

The physical properties of coal also change in wet weather. Rain tends to l ubricate coal, and will
cause stockpiles to rill and collapse in heavy rain if they are not maintained properly. Edges need to
be battered back to a safe angle. Dozers and other machinery need to travel to and from the
stockpiles along specified routes to avoid creating a zone of crushed coal at the stockpile base.
Hazards in Reject and ROM Stockpile Operations

Material from conveyors falling onto equipment or people.
Mechanical or structural failure of conveyor components, causing components to fall onto
equipment or people.
Dozer or other mobile equipment colliding with fixed plant.
Title
Revision
0
Date Reviewed
30/11/2012
Owner
Logistics Manager
Page
2 of 5

Company Pty Ltd
Collisions between vehicles and other vehicles or mobile equipment.

Collisions between vehicles and pedestrians.
Truck reverses over ROM stockpile face.
Equipment fire due to:
-
equipment malfunction
operating on heated area or spontaneous combustion materials push-out.
Stockpile subsidence:
-
slumping onto persons on foot

burying equipment.
Personnel exposed to fumes:

-
persons on foot
equipment operators while operating equipment.
Heated coal and/or spontaneous combustion.
Controlling Hazards
General Stockpile Requirements
Signage must be in place to remind operators of the call-up procedure before entering the
Reject or ROM Stockpiles.
The tasks to be performed must be clearly understood.
Intentions must be communicated clearly too all relevant personnel: control room operator,
other equipment operators etc.
Any persons working on or around a stockpile must carry an operational two-way radio.
Adequate equipment and area lighting must be in place prior to conducting tasks on or around
stockpiles.
Designated light vehicle and equipment park up areas must be maintained around the
stockpile.
No person must operate a dozer on stockpiles unless they authorised or under training.
CHPP supervisor to supervise work required on s/pile management and a risk assessment and JSA
must be completed if outside normal operating duties; e.g. access with dozer to a lumpy stockpile or
blockage around the cross conveyor.
Dust and noise monitoring is in accordance with current site procedures.
Once feeding has commenced from a stockpile all normal hazard controls must be in place such as
windrows.
Sampling
Sampling requires individuals to take care in ensuring they do not climb onto stockpiles; the use of a
loader to take a sample should be used where possible. When survey is required the dozer must roll
the coal over to ensure easy access for pick-ups.
Title
Revision
0
Date Reviewed
30/11/2012
Owner
Logistics Manager
Page
3 of 5

Company Pty Ltd
Monitoring
Daily monitoring occurs at all stockpiles by the Coal Pl ant Supervisors. An inspection is c ompleted
daily and t he oncoming night shift production supervisor must read and si gn the daily inspection
sheet.
Atmosphere Management
The atmosphere or atmospheric air is composed of approximately the following gases, combined as a
mixture, their composition being of equal proportions at all altitudes and at all parts of the earth's
surface:
GAS
VOLUME
Oxygen
20.93%
Nitrogen
78.11%
Carbon Dioxide
0.03%
Inert Gases
0.93%
Water Vapour
Variable
The composition of the atmosphere may therefore be considered as being, oxygen 21%, and nitrogen
79% plus water vapour (depending on humidity). It is colourless, odourless and tasteless and,
although it is non-flammable, it will support combustion.
Therefore the procedure for monitoring for flammable or toxic gas is to use a measuring instrument to
monitor oxygen levels and also to detect the presence of a concentration of flammable or toxic
contaminants.
Spontaneous Combustion Management

Removal of heated coal in stockpile:
1. Use Front End Loader to remove coal from the stockpiles
2. Layout in open area 50mm in height
3. Allow to cool
4. Monitor frequently
Use of water on Heated Coal in stockpiles
1. Water is not to be used unless heated coal is in stage 3
2. Water must not run into existing stockpile that heated coal is being removed from.
Title
Revision
0
Date Reviewed
30/11/2012
Owner
Logistics Manager
Page
4 of 5

Company Pty Ltd
ANNEX A
Title
Revision
0
Date Reviewed
30/11/2012
Owner
Logistics Manager
Page
5 of 5
Appendix D
Draft dredging and spoil disposal plan - Rev 4
Bunbury Port Berth 14 Expansion and Coal

Storage and Loading Facility (Assessment No.
1886)
Technical Report 10: Draft Dredging and

Spoil Disposal Management Plan
Prepared for Lanco Resources Australia Pty Ltd
Prepared by Wave Solutions
9 February 2013
Suite 1, 475 Scarborough Beach Road Osborne Park, WA 6017

PO Box 1756, Subiaco, WA 6904
Phone: +61 (08) 9204 0700Fax: +61 (08) 9244 7311
Email: enquiries@wavesolutions.com.auWeb: www.wavesolutions.com.au
Standard Report
Project Brief
Job Number
2419 Bunbury Port: Berth 14 Environmental Approvals
Work Pack
11 Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan
Project Brief
This document has been prepared as a best practice initiative to

dredge management as well as a vehicle for addressing statutory
approvals and de velopment condition requirements associated with
the Berth 14A Public Environmental Review (PER). The document
outlines management and mitigation measures for dredging to be
implemented on the Bunbury Port Berth 14 development.
Client Contact
Pranab Thakur
Client Address
Lanco Resources Australia Pty Ltd

c/- GPO Box G474
PERTH WA 6841
Document Reference
2419-011-001-001
Prepared By
KW/ MD/ DO
Signature
Reviewed By
Kris Waddington
Signature
Approved By
Damian Ogburn
Signature
Document Status
Rev
Date
Description
08/05/2012
Client Review
23/05/2012
First Draft
26/10/2012
Second Draft Response to initial Regulator comments
19/11/2012
Post EPA Marine Branch Mtg
20/11/2012
Post EPA Comments
9/02/2013
Updated to include details of Offshore Placement & Fisheries
Disclaimer
This document has been produced on behalf of, and for the exclusive use of the nominated
recipient, and is issued for the purposes of the proposed works only. Wave Solutions accepts
no responsibility or liability whatsoever in respect to use of this document by any third party.
Table of Contents
1
Introduction .............................................................11
1.1
Project Description ........................................................... 11
Area of Interest .......................................................14
2.1
2.2
2.3
Port Development ............................................................. 14

Current Operation of the Port .......................................... 15
Previous Dredging and Disposal Programs .................... 15
3
4
Technical Studies ...................................................17

Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan .18
4.1
4.2
4.3
Purpose and Scope........................................................... 18

Operational Objectives ..................................................... 18
Implementation ................................................................. 19
Management Framework .......................................20
5.1
5.2
5.3
National Assessment Guidelines ..................................... 20

State Assessment Guidelines .......................................... 20
Legislation and Approvals ............................................... 20
5.4
Technical Advisory and Consultative Committee .......... 22
Dredging Proposal .................................................23
6.1
6.2
Location and Volumes ...................................................... 23

Dredging Methodology ..................................................... 24
6.3
6.4
6.5
Dredge Schedule ............................................................... 25

Dredge Material Placement Grounds ............................... 26
Dredge Material ................................................................. 26
6.6
Placement Ground ............................................................ 34
Potential Impacting Processes .............................35
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
Barge Mounted Back Hoe Dredge.................................... 35

Cutter Suction Dredging and Overflow ........................... 35
Vessel Transit.................................................................... 35
Dredge Material Placement .............................................. 35
Underwater Noise.............................................................. 36
Potential Impact on Existing Environment ..........37
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
4.3.1
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.4.1
6.2.1
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.5.4
Capital Dredging ..................................................................................15

Maintenance Dredging .........................................................................16
Existing Dredge Material Placement Grounds......................................16
Responsibilities ....................................................................................19
Commonwealth ....................................................................................20
State.....................................................................................................21
Conditions of Approval .........................................................................21
TACC Meeting Outcomes ....................................................................22
Rock Excavation ..................................................................................25
Physical Characteristics .......................................................................26

Marine Dredge Footprint COPCs .........................................................30
Terrestrial Dredge Footprint .................................................................32
Dredge Material COPC Summary ........................................................33
2419-011-001-001
Page iii
5-February-2013
8.1
Coastal Processes ............................................................ 37
8.2
Water Quality ..................................................................... 42
8.3
Sediment Characteristics ................................................. 59
8.4
Marine Fauna and Significant Species ............................ 61
8.5
Marine Fisheries Resources............................................. 68
8.6
Benthic Habitat.................................................................. 69
8.7
Introduced Marine Pests................................................... 74
9
10
Key Receptors ........................................................76

Environmental Management Sub-plans ...............78
10.1
Adaptive Management ...................................................... 78
10.2
Monitoring of Dredge Plume Extent ................................ 80
10.3
Management of Underwater Noise................................... 82
10.4
Water Quality ..................................................................... 84
10.5
Marine Fauna ..................................................................... 91
10.6
Benthic Habitats ................................................................ 98
10.7
At Sea Placement of Dredge Material ............................ 101
10.8
Dredging Operations Management ................................ 105
8.1.1
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.2.7
8.2.8
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.5.1
8.5.2
8.6.1
8.6.2
8.7.1
8.7.2
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.2.1
10.3.1
10.4.1
10.4.2
10.5.1
10.5.2
10.5.3
10.6.1
10.7.1
10.7.2
Existing Environment ...........................................................................37

Baseline Marine Water Quality Monitoring Program ............................45
Predicted Dredge Plume ......................................................................50
Predicted Dredge Plume during Dredging Campaign ..........................51
Zone of Moderate Impact (ZoMI) and Ambient Turbidity ......................53
Zone of Influence (ZoI) and Ambient Turbidity .....................................54
Seasonal, Wave and Wind Effects on Turbidity ...................................55
Chemical Water Quality .......................................................................56
Potential Impact ...................................................................................60
Potential Impacts..................................................................................64
Previous Surveys .................................................................................74
Continuous Improvement Process ....................................................78

Sub-plans - Management Actions and Preventative Measures ........79
Monitoring Dredge Plume Extent: Sub-plan 1 ...................................80
Underwater Noise Monitoring: Sub-plan 2 ........................................82
Turbidity from Dredge Plumes: Sub-plan 3 .......................................84
Chemical Water and Sediment Quality: Sub-plan 4 ..........................88
Bottlenose Dolphins: Sub-plan 5 .......................................................91
Marine Turtles: Sub-plan 6................................................................94
Rock Fracturing (blasting) on Marine Megafauna: Sub-plan 7 ..........95
Benthic Habitats in Koombana Bay: Sub-plan 8 ...............................98
Ocean Placement Activities: Sub-plan 9 .........................................101
Transit of Vessels: Sub-plan 10 ......................................................103
2419-011-001-001
Page iv
5-February-2013
10.8.1
10.8.2
10.8.3
10.8.4
10.8.5
10.8.6
11
Atmospheric Noise: Sub-plan 11.....................................................105

Introduced Marine Pests: Sub-plan 12 ............................................106
Waste Management: Sub-plan 13...................................................109
Hazardous Substances Management: Sub-plan 14 ........................110
Emergency Response: Sub-plan 15 ...............................................112
Maritime Safety: Sub-plan 16 ..........................................................114
References ............................................................115
2419-011-001-001
Page v
5-February-2013
List of Figures
Figure 1: Project area including dredge footprint, existing and proposed dredge spoil
disposal locations and existing BPA anchorages. .................................................... 13
Figure 2: Locality plan of the Port of Bunbury. ......................................................... 14
Figure 3: Indicative diagram showing bathymetry of Berth 14 before and after
dredging (Evans and Peck, 2009). ........................................................................... 23
Figure 4: Proposed port and Berth 14A layout. ........................................................ 24
Figure 5: Examples of backhoe and cutter suction dredges (Source: Jan de Nul). .. 25
Figure 6: Qualitative assessment of sediment types within the dredge footprint. ..... 28
Figure 7: Particle size distribution within dredge footprint. ....................................... 29
Figure 8: Sediment induration (hardness) results through the dredge profile at Berth
14A at different boreholes and depth of first encounter of basalt layer (WML
Consultants, 2009). .................................................................................................. 29
Figure 9: Average total organic carbon (TOC) within the proposed dredge footprint.
Error bars represent standard error. ......................................................................... 33
Figure 10: Particle size distribution of sediment samples collected from the offshore
disposal location and the proposed dredge footprint. ............................................... 34
Figure 11: Geomorphology of the Project area integrated with LiDAR bathymetry. . 38
Figure 12: Wave heights recorded from Beacon 3 (top) and Beacon 10 (bottom). .. 39
Figure 13: Current roses for Beacon 3 for summer (left) and winter (right). The roses
indicate the direction to which the current is flowing as oceanographic convention
(to). ........................................................................................................................... 40
Figure 14: Wind roses for the Bunbury Outer Harbour for 2008 and 2010 showing
average wind speed (m/s) and direction and inter-annual variation in quarterly
statistics. The roses indicate the direction from which the wind is blowing as
meteorological convention........................................................................................ 42
Figure 15: Spatial pattern for e-folding times in May and November 2009. .............. 45
Figure 16: Water quality, wave and current loggers are located at ABS1, OBS1 and
OBS2 in Koombana Bay. ......................................................................................... 46
Figure 17: Sampling stations on flushing map.......................................................... 47
Figure 18: An example map-form presentation of: a) the predicted Zone of Influence
and the predicted zones of High Impact and Moderate Impact associated with
channel dredging (represented by the black line) from EAG 7. ................................ 48
Figure 19: Predicted Zone of Influence boundary represented by the 2 mg/L contour
................................................................................................................................. 49
Figure 20: Predicted Zone of Moderate Impact represented by the 10 mg/L contour
................................................................................................................................. 49
Figure 21: Contours showing depth-averaged TSS concentrations exceeded 25% of
the time for Scenario 1 based on a 40 week simulation. Concentrations are in excess
of ambient TSS concentrations. 10 mg/L contour represents Zone of Moderate
Impact (ZoMI) ........................................................................................................... 50
Figure 22: 12-hour time sequence of depth-averaged dredge plume behaviour for
Scenario 1. ............................................................................................................... 51
Figure 23: Location of time-series extraction points (Location A-D) and baseline
monitoring site (M).................................................................................................... 51
Figure 24: Time series of depth-averaged concentrations for the four locations for
Scenario 1. Concentrations are in excess of ambient TSS concentrations. ............. 53
2419-011-001-001
Page vi
5-February-2013
Figure 25: 95%ile (red) 90%ile (green) and 80%ile (yellow) turbidity (TSS mg/l)
statistics at the three logging stations from December 2011-October 2012 and the
predicted 10 mg/L 80%ile dredge plume (Zone of Moderate Impact). ...................... 53
Figure 26: Time series of predicted dredge plumes at selected locations in
Koombana Bay and the 80%ile (red line) for baseline turbidity at each of those sites.
................................................................................................................................. 54
Figure 27: Zone of Influence and respective continuous monitoring sites. ............... 55
Figure 28: Wave height and turbidity profile from continuous acoustic logger in
central Koombana Bay ............................................................................................. 56
Figure 29: Water sampling quality locations (8) on predicted Zone of Influence
dredge plume. .......................................................................................................... 57
Figure 30: Mean and 95% confidence limits for results of baseline water quality
monitoring for metals and chlorophyll at harbour (low) and bay (moderate) during
2012 baseline monitoring program. Red arrows are suggested key metals for
monitoring. ............................................................................................................... 58
monitoring for metals at harbour (low) and bay (moderate) during 2012 baseline
monitoring program. ................................................................................................. 58
Figure 32: Surface sediment median particle size contours and sampling stations in
Koombana Bay. ........................................................................................................ 60
Figure 33: Predicted sediment deposit at end of 40 week dredge operations
assuming final density of 400 kg/m3. ........................................................................ 61
Figure 34: a) seasonal patterns in dolphin abundance and b) birth rates in
Koombana Bay and the broader region. Source: SWMRP newsletter. .................... 62
Figure 35: Seasonal distribution of adult female dolphins around the Koombana Bar
region. Source SWMRP newsletter. ......................................................................... 63
Figure 36: Spectrum of underwater noise impacts from no response through stress,
distress and system failure. ...................................................................................... 65
Figure 37: Noise impact contours worst case propagation scenario derived from
rock fracturing (blasting) activities. Inner orange contour zone of permanent hearing
loss or injury, outer yellow contour, zone of temporary hearing loss. ....................... 66
Figure 38: Noise impact contours mid range propagation scenario derived from
Figure 39: Distribution of benthic habitats across the Project area and showing the
location of the proposed dredge material placement ground.................................... 70
Figure 40: Distribution of seagrasses across the Project area. ................................ 71
Figure 41: Zone of Influence in respect to Benthic Habitat in Koombana Bay.......... 73
Figure 42: Zone of Influence defined for the Berth 14A development and turbidity
logger sites. .............................................................................................................. 86
Figure 43: Decision tree outlining a draft framework for management response in the
event that trigger values are exceeded during water quality monitoring. .................. 87
Figure 44: Water sample stations with respect to dredge plume. WSQ6 is key
indicator site for metals. ........................................................................................... 89
Figure 45: Water and sediment quality spot sampling locations overlayed on
sediment particle size contours in Koombana Bay ................................................... 90
Figure 46: Location and range of passive acoustic loggers within Bunbury Port area.
................................................................................................................................. 93
Figure 47: Dolphin activity recorded by each of the passive acoustic loggers.......... 94
2419-011-001-001
Page vii
5-February-2013
Figure 48: Zone of Influence overlaying the benthic habitat map for Koombana Bay.
............................................................................................................................... 100
2419-011-001-001
Page viii
5-February-2013
List of Tables
Table 1: Key characteristics of the proposed works. ................................................ 12

Table 2: Current berth facilities at the Port of Bunbury. ............................................ 15
Table 3: Previous capital dredging programs. .......................................................... 16
Table 4: Previous maintenance dredging programs. ................................................ 16
Table 5: Environmental factors and objectives relevant to the proposal (OEPA 2011,
Assessment No. 1886). ............................................................................................ 18
Table 6: Western Australian Ministerial Implementation Statement which requires
compliance to the following conditions regarding dredging operations. ................... 21
Table 7: Conditions of approval as set down by the Commonwealth within their final
assessment report for the Berth 14A Project and Sea Dumping Permit. .................. 21
Table 8: TACC representatives chart ....................................................................... 22
Table 9: Indicative dredge volumes and durations. .................................................. 26
Table 10: Physical sample characteristics................................................................ 26
Table 11: Summary of metal results from marine dredge footprint. .......................... 30
Table 12: Inorganic parameter levels within marine dredge footprint ....................... 30
Table 13: Summary of organic parameters results from marine dredge footprint..... 31
Table 14: Summary of metal results from terrestrial dredge footprint. ...................... 32
Table 15: Summary of organic parameters results from terrestrial dredge footprint. 32
Table 16: Baseline and predicted dredge effects on turbidity at Dolphin Discovery
Centre, Power Station Beach and Centre Koombana Bay 5% of the time. .............. 55
Table 17: Turbidity %iles for TSS (mg/l) for central Koombana Bay. ....................... 56
Table 18: Total and dissolved metals in Koombana Bay water (n=6)....................... 59
Table 19: Summary of predicted noise impacts. ...................................................... 65
Table 20: The ten dominant fish species in the shallow sections of Koombana Bay.
................................................................................................................................. 68
Table 21: Interaction summary for the proposed Bunbury Port Berth 14A dredging
and disposal program. .............................................................................................. 76
<HOLD> Insert List of Appendices as applicable.
2419-011-001-001
Page ix
5-February-2013
Acronyms
ABS
ADCP
AHD
ANZECC
AWAC
BHD
BPA
CD
CEMP
CSD
CTD
DEC
DoE
DSDMP
DSEWPaC
EPA
EPBC
LiDAR
LOA
LOR
Lanco
MODIS
NAGD
NTU
PER
PSD
ROV
TACC
TBT
TSS
UCL
WQBMP
2419-011-001-001
Definition
Acoustic Back Scatter method for logging TSS
Acoustic Doppler Current Profiler same as AWAC
Australian Height Datum (+0.54 m above chart datum)- approx. Sea level
Australian New Zealand Environment Conservation Council
Acoustic Wave and Current Profiler same as ADCP
Back Hoe Dredge
Bunbury Port Authority
Chart Datum = Lowest Astronomical Tide (LAT)
Construction Environment Management Plan
Cutter Suction Dredge
Conductivity Temperature Depth measured in marine waters
Department Environment Conservation Western Australia
Department of Environment Western Australia (now DEC)
Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan
Dept. Sustainability Environment Water Population & Community - Cwth.
Environment Protection Agency Western Australia
Environment Protection Biodiversity Conservation Act, 1999
Light Detection And Ranging optical remote sensing technology
Length Over All
Limits of Reporting
Referred as Lanco Resources Australia Pty Ltd
MODerate resolution Imaging Spectroradiometer remote sensing satellite
National Assessment Guidelines for Dredging
Nephelometric Turbidly Units
Public Environmental Review
Particle size distribution sediment grain size measured in microns
Remote Operated Vehicle underwater videography and GPS system
Technical Advisory and Consultative Committee - dredging
Tri-butyl tin
Total Suspended Solids
Upper Confidence Limit
Water quality baseline monitoring program
Page x
5-February-2013
Introduction
Lanco Resources Australia Pty Ltd (Lanco) is undertaking field investigations for the development of a
coal export facility at Berth 14, located within the Port of Bunbury Inner Harbour, Western Australia.
The proposal includes capital dredging, involving both marine and land based footprints to complete
the marine elements of the development. This document outlines management and mitigation
measures for dredging to be implemented on the Bunbury Port Berth 14A development.
1.1
Project Description
Construction and operation of a coal export terminal at Berth 14 within the Inner Harbour of Bunbury
Port will facilitate the export of up to 15,000,000 tonnes per annum (tpa) of coal for power generation
in India and other countries. In order to handle this increased volume of coal, a ne w rail loop,
materials handling infrastructure and berthing arrangements are required at the Bunbury Port.
Whilst outside the scope of this Public Environmental Review (PER), Lanco Resources Australia Pty
Ltd (Lanco) also plans to expand the production capacity of the Griffin Coal Mine from under
5,000,000 to 20,000,000 tpa to meet local market demand for coal and allow the export of up to
15,000,000 tpa. of Griffin coal. The current rail network to the Port has limited capacity, so there is
also a need to duplicate the line from the Collie Basin to the Port.
This PER only assesses the works associated with the Port; separate assessments will be
undertaken for works associated with the mine expansion and upgrade of the existing rail line from
the Collie Basin to Bunbury Port.
Works assessed in this PER are summarised in Table 1. These works include: a coal handling facility
including a new rail loop, two enclosed stockpile sheds, conveyor systems, ship loading facilities, and
a new berth (including dredging of the seabed). It is proposed that the new rail loop would
accommodate a train length of 950 m of coal loaded wagons to be unloaded at a rate of 8,000 tonnes
per hour.
To increase flexibility and maintain efficiency, the proposed coal handling facility is designed to
receive coal by rail and unload either directly to a berthed ship, or to the proposed enclosed stockpile
sheds. The enclosed sheds would allow up to a five day supply of stockpiled coal. The stockpiled coal
would act as a buffer between the unloading and loading processes to ensure a waiting ship is loaded
as quickly as possible, as well as allowing train unloading to proceed if a ship is not available.
The proposed dredging of Berth 14 a nd its approaches is necessary to provide sufficient space to
allow bulk carriers to enter and depart the new berth. Dredging works below sea level are estimated
to take up to 40 weeks plus five weeks for rock removal if rock is encountered and would include both
marine and terrestrial footprints. The berth will have a local berth pocket and the side slopes for the
berthing area will be stabilised using a rock or a precast revetment to suit the design slopes.
The key characteristics of the proposed works are identified in Table 1. Construction of the Project is
required to be completed in 2014 for the export of coal.
2419-011-001-001
Page 11
5-February-2013
Table 1: Key characteristics of the proposed works.

Marine Components
Description
Berth pocket
Berth pocket dredged to - 12.7 m Chart Datum (CD) to
accommodate Panamax sized vessels.
Associated approach navigational area dredged to - 12.2 m CD.
Dredge footprint is approximately 11.5 ha, including both
terrestrial and marine areas.
Dredging
Dredge volume of up t o 1,900,000 m. Underwater rock
fracturing (blasting) may be required to remove 20,000 m of
Capital
rock.
Maintenance
Required approximately every 2-3 years.
Dredge material placement
Final dredging quantities will be determined as the final
ground
designs for Berth 14 are prepared.
An offshore dredge material placement ground has been
identified in Commonwealth waters and, as such, does not
form part of this assessment.
Suitability of this site, as well as the disposal of dredge
material, will be assessed by the Department of
Sustainability, Environment, Water, Population and
Communities under the Environmental Protection (Sea
Dumping) Act 1981. Other disposal options include the
landside placement of material for reuse for onsite
construction requirements
Berth structure
Likely to comprise of a r einforced concrete jetty structure
supported on circular steel piles. The piles will be
constructed by installing the steel tubes as a bored pile
casing removing soil within the tube until basalt is reached,
rock sockets typically penetrating 2 to 3 diameters into sound
basalt will be bored into the rock using auger type equipment
and after base cleaning the piles will be filled with reinforced
concrete.
The jetty structure will be fitted with fenders, rails for the ship
loaders, handrails lighting and all other ancillaries for safe
operation.
Terrestrial Components
Description
Materials handling
Train unloader, conveyors, stackers, coal storage facility and
infrastructure
ship loading equipment.
Rail
New rail loop and unloading station within the site boundary
to the northwest of the Preston River.
Throughput (design capacity) 15,000,000tpa.
Construction period
Approximately 18 months.
Water requirements
Still to be d etermined as designs for the Berth 14 are still
under preparation.
Vegetation loss
Approximately 6 ha of disturbed native vegetation will be
removed.
Terrestrial ground
Approximately 30 ha.
disturbance
The marine components of the project include deepening of the seabed at Berth 14 through dredging
of sediments and potentially, rock fracturing (blasting) of the underlying material. The berth pocket is
proposed to be dr edged to approximately - 12.7 m CD and navigational areas to approximately 12.2 m CD to accommodate bulk carriers with at least 225 m LOA. They will access the berth via the
existing shipping channel through Koombana Bay (Figure 1). The total volume of material required to
be removed for establishment of the berth is estimated to be up t o 2,700,000 m of which up t o
1,900,000 m may be placed at sea. The dredging and rock excavation program is estimated to last
up to 45 weeks. It is estimated that up to 20,000 m of rock excavation may be required to finalise
dredge depths within the berth pockets.
2419-011-001-001
Page 12
5-February-2013
Figure 1: Project area including dredge footprint, existing and proposed dredge spoil disposal
locations and existing BPA anchorages.
2419-011-001-001
Page 13
5-February-2013
Area of Interest
The Port of Bunbury is located in Koombana Bay on the south-western coast of Western Australia
and is operated by the Bunbury Port Authority. Sandy beaches extend along the coast to the north
and south of the Port. The Leschenault Estuary is located to the northeast of the Port and the
Leschenault Inlet, a remnant of the estuary is located to the southwest. Both of these water bodies are
connected to Koombana Bay via man made channels. These features are shown on the locality plan
below (Figure 2).
Figure 2: Locality plan of the Port of Bunbury.
2.1
Port Development
The development of the Bunbury Port commenced with the construction of the original wooden jetty in
the Outer Harbour in 1864. Jetty extensions continued between 1900 and 1952 and the breakwater
was extended in a north easterly direction between 1906 and 1961 (PWD, 1978). The construction of
a spur groyne near the breakwater abutment on the ocean side (Western Spur) commenced in 1948
and was later extended in 1961. This spur although very effective in trapping littoral sand was soon
saturated. A further spur groyne (Eastern Spur) was constructed in 1949 by extending the original
main breakwater in a north-easterly direction to increase the sand trap (PWD, 1978).
In 1951, the natural outlet for Leschenault Estuary to the ocean at Point MacLeod was closed to
eliminate the accumulation of river silt in the port area and mitigate risk of flooding in the township. At
the same time, a connection to the ocean was cut through the sand dunes opposite the mouth of the
Collie River (The Cut). In 1968-69, the Preston River downstream of the Australind Road bridge was
realigned to allow for the construction of the Inner Harbour.
The Outer Harbour was for many years the focus of shipping trade for Bunbury. However, due to its
operational constraints, limited expansion potential, and proximity to the Bunbury central business
district, there was a necessity to shift the principal port focus to a location that was more sheltered,
more readily accessed by land transport and with substantial room for expansion. This resulted in the
development of the Inner Harbour and progressive acquisition of adjoining land to provide for
expansion.
2419-011-001-001
Page 14
5-February-2013
In 1969, the Western Australian government approved the expansion of the Inner Harbour including
deepening to -12.2 m CD. This involved removing approximately 6,750,000 m of material by cutter
suction dredge, most of which was used to reclaim large tidal wetland areas around the Inner Harbour
providing land for four berths. The basalt rock underlying the turning basin and entrance channel at
varying depths was unable to be r emoved with the dredger. This led to drilling, rock fracturing
(blasting) and removal of the bedrock in 1974.
On completion of the Inner Harbour in 1976, a channel was cut at Point MacLeod (The Plug) to allow
water circulation to this body of water and passage of boats to and f rom Koombana Bay. These
modifications resulted in the renaming of the water bodies; the smaller isolated water body at Point
MacLeod is now known as the Leschenault Inlet and the main water body to the north is known as the
Leschenault Estuary (see Figure 2).
2.2
Current Operation of the Port
The Bunbury Port is divided into two primary commercial areas; the Outer Harbour and the Inner
Harbour. The port has seven berths totalling 1,485 m in length that are capable of handling ships with
an overall draft of up t o 11.6 m in the Inner Harbour. The current berth facilities at the port are
summarised in Table 2.
The major products imported through the port are caustic soda, methanol, vegetable oils, phosphate
and potash, and petroleum coke. The products exported are alumina, aluminium hydroxide, mineral
sands, silica sands, silicon dross, spodumene (lithium based mineral) and woodchips. Mineral sands
include ilmenite, rutile and leucoxene (containing titanium), xenotime and m onazite (containing rare
earth metals) and industrial minerals zircon, kyanite and garnet.
Table 2: Current berth facilities at the Port of Bunbury.
Berth
Location
Berth Facilities
Berth 1 Outer Harbour Primarily export of mineral sands.
Berth 2 Outer Harbour General purpose berth equipped with facilities for discharging
methanol from tankers.
Berth 3 Inner Harbour
Primarily woodchip loading.
Bulk loading of alumina and bulk discharging of caustic soda.
General purpose berth with mobile road hoppers for loading of
mineral sands, silica sand and silicon dross. As well as bulk
discharge of petroleum coke, phosphate and potash, and
vegetable oils.
Specialised bulk alumina loading and discharging of bulk caustic
soda.
General purpose berth with shiploader connected to bulk storage
shed and road hoppers for loading of aluminium hydroxide,
mineral sands, silica sand and spodumene. As well as
discharging of phosphate and potash, and vegetable oils.
2.3
Previous Dredging and Disposal Programs
Numerous dredging programs have been undertaken at the Port of Bunbury as part of the
development of berths and shipping channels as well as maintenance of navigational depths.
2.3.1
Capital Dredging
The records of capital dredging associated with the development of the Outer Harbour are not
presently available. There may not be any factual accounts of dredging volumes or disposal areas for
the Outer Harbour development.
The Inner Harbour was developed during two capital dredging programs. In the early 1970s
approximately 7,400,000 m of material was removed and us ed for reclamation works. In 1991, the
Inner Harbour basin was extended with the removal of approximately 2,000,000 m of material, which
was used for development of land to the east of the Inner Harbour. The capital dredging programs
undertaken at the port are summarised in Table 3.
2419-011-001-001
Page 15
5-February-2013
Table 3: Previous capital dredging programs.

Year
Disposal Location
1971-75
Reclamation for port development
1991
Land disposal
Total
2.3.2
Approximate Volume (m)

7,400,000
2,000,000
9,600,000
Maintenance Dredging
Since completion of the breakwater and spur groyne extensions in 1961 and construction of Berths 1
and 2, regular maintenance dredging has been undertaken. To date, at least 8,100,000 m of dredge
material has been removed as summarised in Table 4.
Since 1988, records show maintenance dredging of 400,000 to 600,000 m by trailer suction hopper
dredges on a t hree to four year cycle. This is an av erage and reasonably steady rate of
210, 000 m/year. Sand is also removed from sand traps by land based plant with weed cleared from
the shipping channel in smaller volumes through trawling.
Table 4: Previous maintenance dredging programs.
Year
Disposal Location
1965-66
1966-67
1967-68
1969-70
1971-72
1973-74
1974-75
1975-76
1976-77
1977
1979
1982
1985
1988-89
1990
1992
1994
1997
2001
2004
2007
2008
2010
Total
Reclamation
Reclamation
Southern dredge material placement grounds
Eastern section of existing dredge material placement grounds
Pumped to ocean side of breakwater
Existing dredge material placement grounds
2.3.3
Approximate
Volume (m)
Unknown
70,000
Unknown
Unknown
76,630
320,000
6,200
Unknown
17,000
19,000
Unknown
300,000
140,000
1,650,000
627,000
900,000
416,518
656,000
665,500
506,354
603,123
1,040,250
165,000
8,178,575
Existing Dredge Material Placement Grounds
The existing dredge material placement grounds have been in use since at least 1976 (PWD, 1978).
The dredge material placement grounds were originally 1,000 m long north to south and 400 m wide
east to west and were located, in part, inshore of the present placement ground location. The grounds
have been shifted to the west and expanded to the north and west. The locations of the previous and
existing dredge material placement grounds are shown in Figure 1 and the material placed at the
grounds from maintenance dredging is listed in Table 4.
2419-011-001-001
Page 16
5-February-2013
Technical Studies
The Environmental Scoping Document (Assessment No. 1886) (PER Appendix B) prepared by the
Western Australian Office of the Environmental Protection Authority (OEPA) for the Project identifies
the requirement for factor specific scopes of work to be conducted to inform the environmental impact
assessment process for Bunbury Port Berth 14A Development for Coal Storage and Loading Facility.
Desktop reviews of available information and detailed baseline studies conducted in the Project area,
industry expert consultation and predictive modelling address these scopes of work and i nform the
environmental risk assessment. The following technical reports for Bunbury Port Berth 14A
Development for Coal Storage and Loading Facility contain the results of the studies conducted for
the relevant scopes of work identified in the Environmental Scoping Document and are relevant to this
draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP):
PER Appendices
A- Commonwealth Referral of Proposed Action
B- Environmental Scoping Document (Assessment No. 1886)
Technical Reports
1.
Indicative Dredge Plan for Modelling
2.
Site Selection for Offshore Placement of Dredge Material
3.
Marine Environmental Quality Studies
4.
Hydrodynamic and Sediment Transport Modelling
5.
Benthic Habitats near Bunbury, Western Australia
6.
Benthic Primary Producer Habitat Loss Assessment
7.
Marine Fauna Studies
8.
Marine Sediment Sampling and Analysis Report (and Plan)
9.
Air Quality- Dust Emissions
10.
Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan
2419-011-001-001
Page 17
5-February-2013

4.1
Purpose and Scope
Lanco is implementing this Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP) as a best
practice initiative to dredge management as well as a vehicle for addressing statutory approvals and
development condition requirements associated with the Berth 14 Public Environmental Review
(PER). The draft DSDMP follows guidance outlined within the NAGD (Commonwealth of Australia
2009a), and requirements for dredging impact assessment described within the Western Australian
Environmental Protection Authorities Environmental Assessment Guideline No. 7 Marine Dredging
Proposals (EPA, 2011).
The draft DSDMP includes the following information:
Overall Management Framework, including:
o Commonwealth guidance;
o State approvals and permits;
o Conditions of approval (PER Assessment Report); and
o Role of the Technical Advisory and Consultative Committee (TACC).
Description of the dredging works, including:
o Dredge location and volumes for disposal;
o Dredge methodology;
o Dredge schedule; and
o Material characterisation.
Description of the existing environment;
Description of potential impacts;
Management strategies and actions;
o Proposed monitoring arrangements and management response; and
o Capital works dredge management.
This draft DSDMP has been prepared to support the proposed management and m onitoring
measures proposed within the Berth 14 PER. The finalised DSDMP will address requirements of
regulatory approvals and conditions of approval outlined within the PER assessment report, and
Commonwealth approvals as required in support of a Commonwealth Sea Dumping Permit.
4.2
Operational Objectives
This draft DSDMP identifies a range of operational, monitoring and management measures proposed
for implementation during the development of the Berth 14 project. These measures are aimed at
maintaining environmental and socioeconomic objectives for the Project area.
OEPA for the Project identifies relevant factor specific environmental objectives (Table 5). The
objectives also include potential social impact considerations.
Assessment No. 1886).
Environmental Factors
EPA Objective
To maintain the quality of waters, sediment and/or biota so
Marine Environmental Quality that the environmental values, both ecological and social, are
protected.
To maintain marine ecological integrity through protection,
Marine Benthic Habitats
management and improved knowledge of benthic habitats,
including benthic primary producer habitats.
To maintain the abundance, diversity, geographic distribution
and productivity of fauna at species and ecosystem levels
Marine Fauna
through the avoidance or management of adverse potential
impacts and improvement in knowledge.
2419-011-001-001
Page 18
5-February-2013
The objectives for these environmental factors are guided where appropriate by relevant regulatory
guidance material including:
Australian and New Zealand Guidelines for Fresh and Marine Water Quality (ANZECC, 2000);
National Assessment Guidelines for Dredging (Commonwealth of Australia, 2009a);
State Water Quality Management Strategy Document No.6 (Government of Western
Australia, 2004);
Environmental Protection Authority Position Statement No. 7: Principles of Environmental
Protection (EPA, 2007);
Background Quality for Coastal Marine Waters of Perth, Western Australia (McAlpine et al., 2005);
Perth's Coastal Waters: Environmental Values and Objectives, Environmental Protection
Authority Position Statement (EPA, 2000);
State Environmental (Cockburn Sound) Policy (2005);
Revised Draft Environmental Protection (Cockburn Sound) Policy (EPA, 2002);
Pilbara Coastal Water Quality Consultation Outcomes: Environmental Values and
Environmental Quality Objectives (DoE, 2006);
Environmental Assessment Guideline 3: Protection of benthic primary producer habitat in
Western Australia (EPA, 2009);
Matters of National Environmental Significance Significant Impact Guidelines (DSEWP&C, 2009);
National Biofouling Management guidance for Non-trading Vessels (Commonwealth of
Australia, 2009);
A guideline for managing the potential impacts of dust and associated contaminants from land
development sites contaminated sites remediation and other related activities (DEC, 2011);
and
Draft Environmental Protection Authority Environmental Assessment Guideline No. 4:
Towards Outcome-based Conditions (EPA, 2009).
4.3
Implementation
The draft DSDMP implementation process is designed as an operational management plan for
potential environmental and social impacts within operational management of the dredging and
excavation process for the Berth 14A development.
4.3.1
Responsibilities
<HOLD> Further information on responsibilities required to be provided by Lanco.

Contact Details
<HOLD> Applied to finalisation of a working document for management, to be updated upon final
DSDMP.
2419-011-001-001
Page 19
5-February-2013
Management Framework
Dredging and disposal of dredge material for the Bunbury Port Berth 14A development is to be
managed under both Commonwealth and State legislation, including relevant conditions of
development approval based upon the assessment of the Berth 14 PER. In support of these formal
instruments are the management, monitoring and reporting standards outlined within the National
Assessment Guidelines for Dredging ((NAGD), Commonwealth of Australia, 2009a) and the . The
following sections detail the requirements of the NAGD, Commonwealth and State regulatory
authorities with regards to dredging approvals and permits.
This section also details the role of the Technical Advisory Consultative Committee (TACC), for
dredging and outlines the broader management framework developed by Lanco in discharging their
environmental commitments.
5.1
National Assessment Guidelines
The process by which dredge operations are to be managed by Lanco will follow those outlined within
the NAGD. The NAGD recognises the strong association between dredging and the economic viability
of many of Australias port developments, and on-going trade opportunities. The coordinated and
timely approach to environmental investigations, permitting, management and approvals is
considered important to maximising economic opportunity, whilst maintaining sustainability of our
coastal resources (Commonwealth of Australia, 2009a).
5.2
State Assessment Guidelines
The OEPA draws upon information presented by proponents in the context of relevant regulatory
frameworks and t he advice of relevant regulators, both Commonwealth and State, during its
assessment of dredging proposals (EPA, 2011). These environmental issues include sea dumping,
contaminated site assessments and protection of wildlife. Proponents are responsible for addressing
the requirements of all relevant legislative and regulatory frameworks and guidance issued by other
agencies.
The Environmental Assessment Guideline for Marine Dredging Proposals (EAG 7) (EPA, 2011) is
specifically designed to ensure that the predicted extent, severity and duration of impacts to benthic
habitats associated with significant dredging activities, which are subject to formal environmental
impact assessment by the EPA, are presented in a clear and consistent manner.
5.3
Legislation and Approvals
The following sections outline the legislative framework under which this dredging is to be managed.
This includes routine approvals and applications directly related to dredging and disposal and
conditions of approval specifically developed for application to this Project via the PER process.
5.3.1
Commonwealth
5.3.1.1
Sea Dumping Act
The Sea Dumping Act 1981 (Sea Dumping Act) implements Australias obligations under the Protocol
to the Convention on the Prevention of Marine Pollution by Dumping Wastes and other Matter, 1972
(the London Protocol). Under the Sea Dumping Act, the NAGD (Commonwealth of Australia, 2009a)
sets out the framework for the assessment and permitting of the ocean disposal of dredged material.
Status of Approval: Lanco have submitted an application for for a Sea Dumping Permit for ocean
disposal of dredge material. Once the assessment is completed, and if the application is approved,
the permit and its associated conditions will be incorporated into the draft DSDMP management
strategies. Details will be provided following assessment of the Sea Dumping Permit. <HOLD>
5.3.1.2
Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act
For all sea dumping activities that are the subject of a permit application under the Sea Dumping Act,
the Department of Sustainability Environment Water Population and Community (DSEWPaC) will
2419-011-001-001
Page 20
5-February-2013
make a determination (in accordance with Section 160 of the Environment Protection and Biodiversity
Conservation Act 1999 (EPBC Act) whether approval is also required under this Act. The Minister will
consider whether the action will have significant impact on the environment. The EPBC Act promotes
the conservation of biodiversity by providing strong protection for:
Listed species and c ommunities in Commonwealth areas (this includes listed threatened
species and ecological communities, listed migratory species and listed marine species);
Cetaceans (all whales, dolphins and porpoises) in Commonwealth waters and outside
Australian waters; and
Protected areas (World Heritage properties; Ramsar wetlands; Biosphere reserves;
Commonwealth reserves; Great Barrier Reef Marine Park; and conservation zones.
Status of Approval: An EPBC referral has been provided to DSEWPaC. Relevant matters of
National Environmental Significance are considered within the Sea Dumping permit approval process,
and detailed within Section 8.4.1.1 of this draft DSDMP. The outcomes of the EPBC review and
determination of assessment requirements have been used to scope t his draft DSDMP regarding
management of Matters of National Environmental Significance
<HOLD> To be adopted from the Commonwealth assessment report generated for the finalised Sea
Dumping Permit. Finalised conditions will be incorporated within the monitoring, management and
response measures. Details of approval conditions will be provided within Appendix.
5.3.2
State
<HOLD> Approvals and permits to conduct capital dredging in WA to be incorporated here. The draft
DSDMP would be amended as required to reference conditions of approval for the PER. Detailed
conditions of approval will be provided within Appendices.
5.3.3
Conditions of Approval
The following tables summarise the conditions of approval obtained from the OEPA (Table 6) and
Commonwealth Government (Table 7) based upon the finalised PER Assessment Report and Sea
Dumping Permit approval. The relevant requirements are detailed and a reference to the section of
the draft DSDMP which addresses them is provided. Complete conditions of approval are
incorporated within Appendix <HOLD>.To be c ompleted post PER and Sea Dumping Permit
approval.
Table 6: Western Australian Ministerial Implementation Statement which requires compliance
to the following conditions regarding dredging operations.
Condition
Section
Condition
Section of
DSDMP
assessment report for the Berth 14A Project and Sea Dumping Permit.
Condition
Section
2419-011-001-001
Condition
Page 21
Section of
DSDMP
5-February-2013
5.4
Technical Advisory and Consultative Committee
Under the NAGD, development of a Technical Advisory and Consultative Committee (TACC) is
required to assist in the consultation process required for the Sea Dumping Permit application.
Appendix C of the NAGD states that The TACC is intended to assist port, other proponents and the
Determining Authority to access local knowledge and reconcile various stakeholder interests. A
TACC is to be established for the Berth 14A Project. The role of the TACC is to provide:
Continuity and direction and effort in protecting the environment;
A forum where issues and concerns can be discussed and resolved;
Review management of dredging and dumping activities, and permitting arrangements);
Recommendations to the proponent and the determining authority as necessary or
appropriate;
Coordination of multiple uses and users; and
The principal mechanism for communication and community engagement.
The TACC includes representatives from: <HOLD>
Koombana Bay Sailing Club

<HOLD>
<HOLD>
Table 8: TACC representatives chart
5.4.1
TACC Meeting Outcomes
<HOLD>
2419-011-001-001
Page 22
5-February-2013
Dredging Proposal
6.1
Location and Volumes
The marine components of the Project include deepening of the seabed at Berth 14A through
dredging of sediments and potentially, rock fracturing (blasting) of the underlying material. The berth
pocket is proposed to be dredged to approximately -12.7 m CD with berth approach areas dredged to
approximately -12.2 m CD to accommodate bulk carriers with at least 225 m LOA. They will access
the berth via the existing shipping channel through Koombana Bay (Figure 1).
The footprint of the swing basin and its approaches are currently located in very shallow water
(approximately -3m CD), with the berth and wharf frontage to be ex cavated from the present land
frontage. Historical aerial photography identifies these shallow waters as including part of the original
Leschenault Estuary and shoreline sand dune system. The Inner Harbour was separated from the
northern estuary system during port development and reclamation processes occurring since the
1950s.
The total volume of material required to be removed for establishment of the berth is estimated to be
up to 2,700,000 m of which up to 1,900,000 m may be placed at sea. The dredging and rock
excavation program is estimated to last up to 45 weeks. It is estimated that up to 20,000 m of rock
excavation may be required to finalise dredge depths within the berth pockets (Figure 3).
Figure 3: Indicative diagram showing bathymetry of Berth 14 before and after dredging (Evans
and Peck, 2009).
The proposed indicative layout of Berth 14A is presented in Figure 4.
2419-011-001-001
Page 23
5-February-2013
Figure 4: Proposed port and Berth 14A layout.
6.2
Dredging Methodology
At this early stage of design, the preferred method for dredging and removal of material is to conduct
land based excavation down to approximately sea level. This would be removed for construction use
in the adjoining terrestrial footprint of the Project in consultation with Bunbury Port Authority. Backhoe
dredge (BHD) and/or cutter suction dredge (CSD) (Figure 5) may then be used to remove material
from the marine and land footprint for disposal at the proposed off-shore disposal ground. Some
potential exists for the occurrence of basalt rock at depth near the limits of the proposed design.
Should rock be present this material may be fractured and barge mounted excavators would be used
to remove material to arrive at the final design profile. The rock material would be used for
construction purposes.
The proposed indicative steps during the dredge operations are outlined below:
Jumbo size backhoe dredger (BHD) loading into hopper barges;
BHD: Loads direct into barges as for offshore disposal;
Large Cutter Suction Dredger (CSD) loading all material other than rock direct into split
hopper barges; and
CSD Working: Hopper barge will commence overflowing after about 20 minutes then for the
remainder of the loading time overflowing will take place through a hopper overflow system at
about 4 to 5 m below water level.
CSD will be direct-loading into hopper barges. There will be no s ide-casting or double
handling of dredge material for subsequent pick-up to hopper barges.
2419-011-001-001
Page 24
5-February-2013
Example of backhoe dredge
Example of cutter suction dredge

Figure 5: Examples of backhoe and cutter suction dredges (Source: Jan de Nul).
6.2.1
Rock Excavation
Exposed rock at Casuarina Point, which forms the western boundary of Koombana Bay, includes a
mixture of basalt and limestone. Elsewhere throughout Bunbury and its surrounds, these rock layers
are overlain by sands and estuarine muds. The Bunbury basalt layer exists at varying depth
throughout the Bunbury Port area.
Experience based on the extensive rock removal work undertaken in the area during previous capital
dredging projects indicates rock fracturing (blasting) by explosives may be required to remove basalt
if it is encountered at the lower depths of the dredge profile in Berth 14A. Marine drilling and rock
fracturing (blasting) is a slow process and it is expected that a four boom jack up marine drilling and
3
rock fracturing (blasting) barge would be able to fragment approximately 7,500 m /week, drilling 24
hours per day. Rock fracturing (blasting) would be confined to daylight hours and the instantaneous
charge limited to a maximum of 50 kg per delay using precision rock fracturing (blasting) techniques.
Rock material would be used for construction fill. During the initial rock fracturing (blasting), a
maximum instantaneous charge (MIC) not exceeding 28 kg (ANFO equivalent) is proposed.
6.3
Dredge Schedule
<HOLD> Insert a high level GANT Chart when schedule is better defined.
Schedule to be discussed with relevant agencies in Department of Fisheries and T ACC prior to
confirmation with dredge contractor.
A previous study undertaken by Evans & Peck (2009) for the Bunbury Port Authority for the
development of the proposed Project provides general detail and order of magnitude estimates of
material to be removed for the Berth 14A construction. Table 9 indicates the indicative volumes of
material to be dredged and an estimated duration (from Technical Report 1).
2419-011-001-001
Page 25
5-February-2013
Table 9: Indicative dredge volumes and durations.

3
Material
Indicative Volume (m )
Dry excavation
800,000 to land disposal
Marine Sediments
1,150,000
Weakly Cemented
590,000
Cemented Material
168,000
Total to Ocean Disposal
1,908,000
Basalt Rock
Indicative Duration
40 weeks
A total of 5 weeks rock
fracturing (blasting) and
BHD Grab
20,000
It is assumed that a l arge CSD will direct cut material and alternately load two large self propelled
3
hopper barges (3,700m ) for disposal at a proposed offshore placement ground. Based on a typical
speed of 10 k nots, placement time of 10 minutes and a m ooring time of 5 minutes, the cycle time
available to go t o and from the proposed dredge material placement ground is 90 and 60 m inutes
respectively, for the two hopper barges. These calculations are based on the location of the proposed
placement ground approximately 13 km northwest from the Berth 14A construction site. Average
3
production for ocean disposal is conservatively assumed to be 10,000 m /day including allowance for
weather.
6.4
Dredge Material Placement Grounds
The location of the proposed dredge material placement ground in relation to the development and
the existing BPA dredge material placement ground is shown in Figure 1. The site is located at
approximately 22 m CD. The site is approximately 8.5 km directly west from the nearest shoreline
and approximately 13 km north-west of the entrance to the Inner Harbour. It is separated from the
shore by a reef complex and is on the northern side of submarine sediment fan or delta. It appears to
be in a depression between two submarine sediment fans. Sediment in the area is coarse sand. Any
movement of sediment placed in the area is therefore likely to be confined. It also occurs well offshore
and seaward of existing inshore reefs.
Site selection assessments have been undertaken confirming the preferred location of the spoil
ground (Technical Report 2).
6.5
Dredge Material
The following provides details of the physical and chemical characteristics of the material to be dredged.
6.5.1
Physical Characteristics
Unconsolidated surface marine sediments in the dredge footprint to a depth of 2.0 m were physically
characterised in the field; details are provided within Table 10. A summary of particle size description
(PSD) results are presented in Figure 7 and Figure 10 for samples within the marine area of the
dredge footprint. The results identify that the upper unconsolidated sediments within the dredge area
are dominated by fine to medium sand fractions (70%), with lesser silt and clay sized materials (30%).
PSD appears generally consistent across sites within the upper profile of the dredge area, consisting
of unconsolidated marine sands, silts and clays.
Table 10: Physical sample characteristics.
Sample Depth
Field
Presence of Shell
ID
(m)
Texture
SED6
0-0.5
Clay loam
Nil
SED6
0.5-1.0
Light clay
Nil
SED6
1.0-1.9
Nil
SED9
SED9
0-0.4
0.4-0.8
Medium
clay
Sand
Sand
2419-011-001-001
Shell fragments
Shell fragments
Page 26
Presence of
Organics
Fibrous material
and some twigs
Fibrous material
and some twigs
Fibrous material
and some twigs
Few twigs
Few twigs
Odour Detected
Slightly anoxic
Anoxic
Anoxic
Nil
Nil
5-February-2013

Sample Depth
Field
Presence of Shell
ID
(m)
Texture
SED14
0-0.5
Light clay
Nil
SED14 0.5-0.8
Light clay
Nil
SED18
0-0.5
Light
Nil
medium
clay
SED18 0.5-1.0
Medium
Nil
clay
SED18 1.0-2.1
Sand
Multiple bivalve
shells
SED23
0-0.5
Clay loam
Nil
SED23 0.5-1.0
Light
Nil
medium
clay
SED23 1.0-1.8
Sand
Nil
SED46
0-0.5
Clay loam
Nil
SED46 0.5-0.9
Clay loam
Nil
SED71
0-0.4
Clay loam
One bivalve shell
SED71
0.4-1.1
Sand
SED76
0-0.5
SED76
0.5-1.0
Light
medium
clay
Heavy clay
SED76
SED82
1.0-1.8
0-0.5
Heavy clay
Sandy clay
SED82
0.5-1.2
Sand
SED86
SED86
0-0.5
0.5-1.0
SED86
1.0-1.6
Clay loam
Light
medium
clay
Sandy clay
SED90
SED90
SED102
0-0.5
0.5-1.2
0-0.5
Clay
Sand silt
Sandy clay
SED102
0.5-1.1
Sand
SED106
SED106
SED107
SED107
0-0.5
0.5-1.1
0-0.5
0.5-1.0
Clay loam
Loamy sand
Clayey sand
Loamy sand
SED107
1.0-1.9
Loamy sand
Fine shell
fragments
Nil
Nil
Nil
Fine shell
fragments
Fine shell
fragments
Two shells
Few shell
fragments
Few shell
fragments
One mussel shell
Nil
Some bivalve
shells
Some shell
fragments
Nil
One bivalve shell
Shell fragments
Some shell
fragments
Some shell
fragments
Presence of
Organics
Multiple twigs
Multiple twigs
Nil
Odour Detected
Some fibrous
material
Nil
Slightly anoxic
Nil
Fibrous material
and two twigs
Low anoxic
Slightly anoxic
Nil
Fibrous organics
Fibrous organics
Fibrous material
and one twig
Nil
Nil
Slightly anoxic
Anoxic
Nil
Fibrous material
and two twigs
Slightly anoxic
Some fibrous
material
Two small twigs
Fibrous material
Nil
Very low anoxic
Nil
Nil
Nil
Fibrous material
High fibrous
material
Anoxic
Anoxic
High fibrous
material
Fibrous material
Fibrous material
Some twigs
Anoxic
Anoxic
Anoxic
Very low anoxic
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Slightly anoxic
Nil
Very low anoxic
Nil
Nil
Nil
Slightly anoxic
Anoxic
Slightly anoxic
Nil
Nil
To confirm the composition of the deeper sediment profile within the footprint, a q ualitative
assessment of core logs sampled in previous studies as well as during the current baseline sediment
sampling program was undertaken. The indicative sediment profile is shown in Figure 6. Silt and clay
fractions are expected to increase within the dredge profile with depth.
2419-011-001-001
Page 27
5-February-2013
Figure 6: Qualitative assessment of sediment types within the dredge footprint.

CLS: Clay loam sandy (30-35% clay); MHC: Medium heavy clay (50% or more clay); SCL:
Silty clay loam (20-30% clay); and BA: Basalt (McDonald and Isbell, 2009).
The PSD was analysed from four samples taken from each of three sediment cores from within the
dredge footprint. In addition, PSD results from previous studies (n = 30) undertaken within the Project
area was extracted, adjusted to Australian Height Datum (AHD) and a dded to the data collected in
this study. The average percentage passing across the depth profile is shown in Figure 7 .
2419-011-001-001
Page 28
5-February-2013
100%
Percenatge Passing
80%
60%
>500m PSD
250-500m PSD
125-250m PSD
40%
63-125m PSD
30-63m PSD
10-30m PSD
<10m PSD
20%
0%
Depth Below AHD (m)
Figure 7: Particle size distribution within dredge footprint.

Sediment induration (hardness) results through the dredge profile at Berth 14A at different boreholes
and depth of first encounter of basalt layer (WML Consultants, 2009) are presented in Figure 8. The
results suggest the bulk of the material within the dredge footprint is weakly cemented (<100 kPa).
Borehole 6 (BH 6) where weathered basalt was encountered in previous studies near the bottom of
the dredge profile was investigated in the current environmental assessment using a stem core auger
drill used for sediment sampling profile on the terrestrial footprint. Rock was encountered within < l m
of the proposed bottom of the dredge area at BH 6 location only in the current field sampling exercise.
The material was crumbly and greenish in appearance and resembled highly weathered basalt
material confirming previous reports.
45
Basalt encountered
40
35
Penetration Test
30
25
Moderately
cemented
20
15
BH1
10
BH2
BH3
5
0
BH4
0
10
12
14
16
BH6
Depth Below AHD (m)
Figure 8: Sediment induration (hardness) results through the dredge profile at Berth 14A at
different boreholes and depth of first encounter of basalt layer (WML Consultants, 2009).
2419-011-001-001
Page 29
5-February-2013
6.5.2
Marine Dredge Footprint COPCs
Sediments within the existing marine footprint of the proposed development at Berth 14A are
considered suitable for unconfined ocean disposal (Technical Report 8). Although some elevated TBT
levels have been recorded, detailed analysis following the Phase 3 sampling protocols provided within
the NAGD, have confirmed 95%UCL concentrations are below the nominated disposal guidelines. All
metals, organic compounds, and radionucleides meet the criteria for ocean disposal without the need
for further testing.
6.5.2.1
Metals
A summary of the metal results from the marine dredge footprint is provided in Table 11. All metals
were below the relevant screening level
Table 11: Summary of metal results from marine dredge footprint.
Screening
Standard
Units
Mean
Level
Deviation
Aluminium
mg/kg
13,652
10,489
Antimony
mg/kg
2
1.2
0.9
Arsenic
mg/kg
20
8.1
5.9
Cadmium
mg/kg
1.5
0.1
0.1
Chromium
mg/kg
80
23.7
15.8
Cobalt
mg/kg
4.5
2.9
Copper
mg/kg
65
13.1
9.7
Iron
mg/kg
17,756
12,479
Lead
mg/kg
50
9.1
5.7
Manganese
mg/kg
128
70.8
Mercury, total
mg/kg
0.2
0.0
0.0
Nickel
mg/kg
21
8.8
7.2
Selenium
mg/kg
0.4
0.2
Silver
mg/kg
1
<0.1
Vanadium
mg/kg
33.2
22.4
Zinc
mg/kg
200
32.4
19.9
6.5.2.2
95% UCL
16,696
1.4
9.8
0.1
28.3
5.4
15.9
21,378
10.8
149.3
0.0
10.9
0.4
<0.1
39.8
38.2
Inorganics
Total nitrogen had a mean of 1,500 mg/kg with concentrations ranging from 70 to 4,020 mg/kg.
Total phosphorous had a mean of 360 mg/kg with concentrations ranging from 43 to 680mg/kg.
No criteria are defined within the NAGD for nutrient parameters. The results are summarised in
Table 12.
Table 12: Inorganic parameter levels within marine dredge footprint
Parameter
Units
Min
0.22
Total Organic Carbon
%
Total Nitrogen
%
0.01
Ammonium
mg/kg
1.00
Nitrate
mg/kg
0.50
Nitrite
mg/kg
0.50
Total Phosphorus
mg/kg
43.00
Available Phosphorus
mg/kg
3.00
Cyanides
mg/kg
<0.5
6.5.2.3
Max
9.46
0.40
12.00
4.00
0.50
680.00
96.00
<0.5
Average
3.25
0.15
4.62
0.66
0.50
336.76
35.32
<0.5
Organochlorine and Organophosphate Pesticides
Organophoshate pesticides were below the LOR (<10 ug/kg).

With the exception of DDD and DDE, all organochlorine pesticides were below the LOR (<1 ug/kg).
DDD and DDE organochlorine pesticides were reported above the LOR in 3 samples. However,
normalisation of results to 1% TOC resulted in values below the NAGD screening criteria
(2 ug/kg).
2419-011-001-001
Page 30
5-February-2013
Calculation of the 95% UCL for the overall DDE concentration within dredge footprint was
0.58 ug/kg.
Sediments are compliant to the NAGD guideline criteria. The results are summarised in Table 13.
6.5.2.4
Organotins
TBT concentrations above the laboratory limits of reporting (LOR) were recorded at most
sites. At 2 s ampling locations one sample following normalisation to 1% Total Organic
Carbon (TOC) reported concentrations above the criteria.
Phase 3 t esting (raw sediment and el utriate analysis) was undertaken to collect additional
information from this section of the dredge footprint. Sampling density followed that required
within the NAGD.
Normalised TBT concentrations from sites reassessed following Phase 3 requirements
ranged between 0.2 ug/kg and 6.4 ug/kg, resulting in a mean concentration of 2.1 ug/kg and
95% UCL of 4.5 ug/kg. These results returned compliant concentrations as compared to the
NAGD screening criteria of 9 ug/kg.
The 24 samples submitted for elutriate analysis at SED100, SED102, SED104 and SED106
also reported water quality concentrations below the LOR (<0.002 ug/L) from all samples.
TBT within the sediments to be dredged represent concentrations below the nominated
guideline criteria established within the NAGD. The results are summarised in Table 13.
6.5.2.5
Hydrocarbons
All TPH fractions remained below the laboratory limits of reporting at all sites.
6.5.2.6
PAHs
Minor concentrations of fluoranthene, pyrene, benzo(a)anthracene and chrysene were

recorded at SED46 (0-0.5m). Similar concentrations of fluoranthene and pyrene were recorded
at SED71 (0-0.5m). There are no NAGD screening levels for individual PAHs for comparison to
criteria.
Total reportable PAHs (normalised to 1% TOC) remained below the LOR for all sites (< 170 ug/kg)
and well below the NAGD screening level criteria for total PAHs (10,000 ug/kg). The results are
Table 13: Summary of organic parameters results from marine dredge footprint.
Screening
Standard
Units
Mean
Level
Deviation
%
3.2
2.5
Organotins
Monobutyltin as Sn
g/kg
<0.5
Dibutyltin as Sn
g/kg
0.5
0.6
Tributyltin as Sn
g/kg
9.0
13.8
50.6
PAHs
Pyrene
g/kg
4.9
0.4
Benz(a)anthracene
g/kg
4.8
0.6
Chrysene
g/kg
4.8
0.6
Total PAH
g/kg
10,000
<20
OC Pesticides
pp-DDE
g/kg
2.2
0.2
0.3
pp-DDD
g/kg
2.0
0.3
0.7
2419-011-001-001
Page 31
95% UCL
3.9
<0.5
0.7
28.5
5.0
5.3
<20
0.3
0.6
5-February-2013
6.5.2.7
Radionucleides
Radionucleides (alpha) remained below the LOR at 0.6 Bq/g. Beta radiation was detected well
below the NAGD screening (35 Bq/g), recording a mean of 0.125 Bq/g.Sediments are
compliant to the NAGD criteria.
6.5.3
Terrestrial Dredge Footprint
A summary of the metal results from the terrestrial dredge footprint is provided in Table 14. All metals
were below the relevant screening levels.
6.5.3.1
Metals
Table 14: Summary of metal results from terrestrial dredge footprint.

Screening
Standard
Units
Mean
Level
Deviation
Aluminium
mg/kg
1,352.8
1,785.5
Antimony
mg/kg
2
<2
Arsenic
mg/kg
20
3.3
2.3
Cadmium
mg/kg
1.5
0.04
0.03
Chromium
mg/kg
80
25.2
8.6
Cobalt
mg/kg
0.8
0.7
Copper
mg/kg
65
1.1
1.7
Iron
mg/kg
3,276.3
3,408.9
Lead
mg/kg
50
1.8
1.0
Manganese
mg/kg
51.6
54.6
Mercury, total
mg/kg
0.2
<0.02
Nickel
mg/kg
21
1.8
1.2
Selenium
mg/kg
0.06
0.08
Silver
mg/kg
1
0.03
0.04
Vanadium
mg/kg
7.1
6.8
Zinc
mg/kg
200
1.2
1.2
Screening level (effects range-low) from the NODGDM (DE&H, 2002)
6.5.3.2
95% UCL
5,888.5
<2
7.2
0.1
41.2
1.9
5.0
9,145.0
2.6
193.0
<0.02
4.0
0.12
0.04
19.8
2.7
Organotins, Pesticides and Hydrocarbons
A summary of the organic parameters for the terrestrial dredge footprint is provided in Table 15. The
results of the analysis for organic parameters indicate the following:
For all locations, the raw TBT levels were below the NAGD screening levels (9 g/kg). Raw
TBT levels were also below the laboratory limits of reporting (LOR) (<0.5 g/kg). According to
NAGD guidelines, samples less than the laboratory limits of reporting will remain as half of
the LOR.
All TPH fractions remained below the laboratory limits of reporting at all sites;
Fluoranthene, pyrene, benzo(a)anthracene and chrysene were below the laboratory limits of
reporting (<10 g/kg) at all locations. There are no NAGD screening levels for individual
PAHs for comparison to criteria;
Total reportable PAHs (normalised to 1% TOC) remained below the LOR for all sites
(< 170 g/kg) and well below the NAGD screening level criteria for total PAHs (10,000 ug/kg);
Organophoshate pesticides were below the LOR (<10 g/kg);
All organochlorine pesticides were below the LOR (<1 g/kg) at all locations.
Table 15: Summary of organic parameters results from terrestrial dredge footprint.
Screening
Standard
Units
Mean
Level
Deviation
%
0.6
1.1
Organotins
Monobutyltin as Sn
g/kg
0.29
0.19
Dibutyltin as Sn
g/kg
<0.5
-
2419-011-001-001
Page 32
95% UCL
1.9
0.2925
<0.5
5-February-2013
Tributyltin as Sn
PAHs
Pyrene
Benz(a)anthracene
Chrysene
Total PAH
OC Pesticides
pp-DDE
pp-DDD
6.5.3.3
g/kg
<0.5
<0.5
g/kg
g/kg
g/kg
g/kg
10,000
<10
<10
<10
<170
<10
<10
<10
<170
g/kg
g/kg
2.2
2
<1
<1
<1
<1
The total organic carbon (TOC) averaged 2.2% (0.24 SE, n= 96 samples) across the dredge
footprint. In the marine footprint, TOC averaged 3.2% (0.32 SE, n= 54 samples) while in the
terrestrial footprint, TOC averaged 0.6% (0.18 SE, n=38 samples). Figure 9 shows average TOC by
sampling interval across the dredge footprint. Comparatively higher TOC is found in the marine
footprint as typically expected in estuarine environmental conditions.
4.5
4
TOC Content (%)
3.5
3
2.5
2
1.5
1
0.5
0
0-0.5
0.5-1.0
Marine
1.0-2.0
0-1.5
1.5-3
3.0-6.0
6.0-9.0
9.0-12.0
Terrestrial
Depth below AHD (metres)
Figure 9: Average total organic carbon (TOC) within the proposed dredge footprint. Error bars
represent standard error.
6.5.4
Dredge Material COPC Summary
Contaminant assessment of the material to be excavated below sea level in both the terrestrial and
marine dredge footprints at Berth 14A indicate that it is compliant with NAGD (Commonwealth of
Australia 2009a) criteria and on this basis is assessed as suitable for unconfined ocean disposal.
2419-011-001-001
Page 33
5-February-2013
6.6
Placement Ground
Sediment characterisation at the proposed dredge material placement ground has also been
determined.
Sediment grab samples were collected from the proposed dredge material placement ground. The
portion of large, coarse sediment (> 500 m) was high in comparison to the dredge area. The fine
grain percentage was very low across all of the samples with an a verage of less than 5% below
250 m (fine sand to clay fractions). Comparison of particle size distribution of sediments at the
disposal ground and area to be dredged is provided within Figure 10.
100%
90%
80%
Percentage Passing
70%
>500m PSD
250-500m PSD
60%
125-250m PSD
50%
63-125m PSD
30-63m PSD
40%
10-30m PSD
30%
<10m PSD
20%
10%
0%
Placement Ground
Dredge Footprint
Figure 10: Particle size distribution of sediment samples collected from the offshore disposal
location and the proposed dredge footprint.
2419-011-001-001
Page 34
5-February-2013
Potential Impacting Processes
The following potential impact summary has been identified through the consideration of predictive
modelling (hydrodynamic and sediment transport; underwater noise propagation; benthic habitat
mapping) and conclusions from detailed field and desktop studies. The findings of a project specific
risk assessment have also been adopted in characterising potential impacts is undertaken in the
corresponding PER for Berth 14
The proposed dredging works identified in Technical Report 1 (Indicative Dredge Plan for Modelling)
present several physical processes whereby potential environmental impacts may arise. Manipulating
these processes by way of changed dredge methodology, productivity, duration etc. may alter the
predicted impacts.
7.1
Barge Mounted Back Hoe Dredge
To conduct the dredging as proposed in Technical Report 1, a barge mounted Back Hoe Dredge
(BHD) excavator may be used during the early phase of dredging. This method provides access for
the cutter suction dredge operations to establish a working position for the bulk of the dredge works.
Large dredge buckets will remove material from the seabed and transfer it to waiting hopper barges.
BHD is a c omparatively low energy dredging process, with recovered material remaining in a bu lk
form, unlike cutter suction dredging which breaks down bed materials during cutting, transport and
pumping into smaller size materials. The release of fine materials forming turbidity plumes from the
BHD method is comparatively limited.
7.2
Cutter Suction Dredging and Overflow
For purposes of sediment transport modelling in the environmental assessment, a conservative base
case for dredging has been assumed using a Cutter Suction Dredge (CSD) for the entire excavation
of Berth 14A below sea level as outlined in the Indicative Dredge Plan. The process of cutter suction
dredging generates comparatively minor turbidity plumes from the cutter head, with the majority of
material being entrained within the suction pumps and disposed to waiting hopper barges.
It is the overflow from the hopper barges as they are filled with dredged sediment from the CSD which
presents the primary release point of fine sands, silts and clays to the water column in the dredging
process. This fine fraction release material disperses under prevailing hydrodynamic forces (wind
forcing, wave action, currents and tides) away from the dredge area as a water column turbidity plume
and benthic deposition front. The overflow from hopper barges typically commences approximately
20 minutes after commencement of pumping from the CSD. Overflow allows for the increased loading
of dredged solids in the hopper barge. Based on the characteristics of the dredge material at Berth
14A, it is expected that the overflow will continue for a period of 25-30 min as the hopper barge fills up
with solids.
The loaded hopper barge then departs to unload at the dredge material placement site and an empty
hopper barge comes to position and commences to fill from the CSD. Dredging using the CSD
process will extend up to a 40 week period under the Indicative Dredge Plan. Dredging operations are
programmed for 24hrs/day with an average operational period of 16 hours in a 24 hour cycle. Short
periods of shutdown would be anticipated for maintenance, refuelling and miscellaneous processes.
7.3
Vessel Transit
The transit of hopper barges from the dredge to the disposal area will increase Port traffic. Support
vessel traffic is also likely to increase within the inner and outer harbour areas, as well as along the
route to the proposed spoil ground. The vessels will be of predominately heavy displacement design,
operating at slow speeds.
7.4
Dredge Material Placement
Barges will place dredged material at the approved offshore dredge material placement location.
Placement of dredged material will be based on a geo-referenced grid network, allowing the hopper
barge to place the material in each grid cell, ensuring regular placement of dredge material across the
2419-011-001-001
Page 35
5-February-2013
placement ground. As outlined in the Indicative Dredge Plan (Technical Report 1), two barges may
operate during the project, with a load placement every 1.5-2hrs. Disposal of dredge material in
approximately 200 ha dredge material placement area is proposed in Commonwealth waters as
outlined in Technical Report 2 (Site Selection and Assessment for Offshore Placement of Dredge
Material). GPS located placement of each load at the placement ground is expected to take 5-10 min.
Placement will generate a dispersion plume, with the majority of material entrained to the seabed
during the disposal process. The resulting disposal plume and erosion analysis is assessed in the
Sea Dumping Permit.
The dispersion of the plume upon placement is expected to be short-term (<40 weeks), with 75% of
effects restricted to within 250 m of the placement ground and 95% of effects restricted to within
1,500 m of the placement ground. Hydrodynamic modelling also indicates declines in water quality
are likely to be short-term and intermittent within the Zone of Influence.
7.5
Underwater Noise
The operation of the BHD, CSD, hopper barges and miscellaneous shipping will increase the
underwater noise profile of the southern reaches of Koombana Bay and Bunbury Port in general
during the Berth excavation phase. Should basalt rock materials not suited to removal by CSD be
encountered in the dredge footprint, then drilling and rock fracturing (blasting) may be undertaken.
The rock fracturing (blasting) may occur over a 5 week period depending upon material volumes and
rock type encountered during the conclusion of the dredging process.
2419-011-001-001
Page 36
5-February-2013
Potential Impact on Existing Environment
This section outlines the existing environment of the Project Area and potential impacts as defined by
relevant technical studies. The interaction summary consolidates the impacting issues so that
monitoring and management strategies can be focused on critical areas of importance to ensure that
the predicted project specific environmental objectives (outcomes) contained within the PER are
achieved.
8.1
Coastal Processes
8.1.1
Existing Environment
Koombana Bay is formed by a l ong breakwater that extends out from Point Casuarina. Prior to the
construction of the breakwater, the embayment was formed by the basalt rock outcrop off Casuarina
Point and submerged rock reef that extends in a northeast direction (PWD, 1978). Construction of the
breakwater commenced in 1870, construction of a spur groyne in 1949 and further extensions to 1961
(PWD, 1978). Koombana Bay has a m ean depth of 7 m with a dredged shipping channel,
approximately 250 m wide and 13 m deep, running north to south across the bay. The northwest
corner of the bay has also been dredged to create the Outer Harbour.
Bunbury, adjacent to Casuarina Point, effectively marks a natural boundary between the sandy coast
of Geographe Bay to the south and the rock ridge and coastal lagoon sequence that lies between
Bunbury and Mandurah to the north (Searle and Semeniuk, 1985). The continental shelf in this region
is relatively broad and shallow, with shelter from the prevailing southwest ocean swells provided by
the Leeuwin-Naturaliste ridge. Although some rock features can be obs erved, they are typically
present on the shore itself, or patchy in nature.
8.1.1.4
LiDAR Bathymetry and Multispectral Satellite Imagery
Analysis of subsea laser (LiDAR) bathymetry and multispectral satellite imagery of the coastal
seafloor area adjacent to Bunbury indicates a complex sequence of submerged remnants of coastal
and riverine features, many of which are lithified and partially covered by unconsolidated sediment
(Figure 11).
South of Casuarina Point the sequence begins with a sandy sediment apron approximately 0.5 to
0.75 km wide that includes the sandy beach extending along the shore. This apron overlies a broad
3.5 km wide, shallow submerged rock platform close to the shore. The inner half of the platform differs
in its topographic patterns from the second half further offshore, which suggests they may be of
different geological age or have different modes of formation. The two platforms are also separated by
bare seabed.
The inner platform terminates abruptly at an east-west line close to the southern shore of Koombana
Bay and merges with the basaltic topography. Seaward of the platform are two relict barrier systems
separated by flattish expanses of apparent interdune swale or lagoonal basins. The ridge systems are
roughly parallel to the modern shore and approximately 3.5 km and 5 km offshore from the modern
coastline.
North of Casuarina Point, the platform has an i rregular surface and extends further seaward with
some dissection by forms resembling drainage channels. These may be a broad palaeochannel at the
confluence of the Collie and Preston rivers. The channel appears to be a transport pathway and
sediment sink for material being moved off the inner shelf. Immediately north of the channel, two ridge
systems terminate on a broad flattish surface that may have been coastal wetland or alluvial flats in
the past. The inner ridge is difficult to discern and may merge with the platform. The outer ridge
system forms a fan shaped series of ridges and s wales curving north east towards the shore. The
seabed is bare in many of the swales as well as along the outer edge of the most seaward ridge.
2419-011-001-001
Page 37
5-February-2013
Figure 11: Geomorphology of the Project area integrated with LiDAR bathymetry.
8.1.1.5
Tides
The tides at Bunbury are micro-tidal and mixed diurnal-semidiurnal character (although predominantly
diurnal), which is typical of south Western Australia. Tides have a t ypical range of 0.5 m or less
2419-011-001-001
Page 38
5-February-2013
between highs and lows. Fluctuations due to pressure systems, storm surges or coastal waves can
create larger fluctuations in water level. T idal levels at Bunbury Harbour were obtained from the
Bunbury Port Authority. The spring-neap cycle is apparent, with a spring tide range of about 60 cm.
8.1.1.6
Waves and Currents
Wave data has been analysed from Beacon 3 an d Beacon 10 locations (Figure 12) located within
Koombana Bay. There is a seasonal variation in the peak significant wave heights, with the largest
waves occurring during the winter months. At Beacon 3, there is a s easonal variation in the peak
significant wave heights, with the large waves occurring during the winter months. The local sea
component wave heights are generally higher than the swell component. Peak sea heights reach 2 m,
and the swell component has peak wave heights on the order of 1.5 m (Figure 12). The swell
component has a period in the range of 12 to 14 seconds, whereas the sea component is much less,
on the order of 3 to 4 seconds. The waves generally propagate from the southwest, west and north
directions. Data from Beacon 10 do es not capture ocean swell due to its sheltered location in
Koombana Bay. The swell component is minimal since offshore swell rarely propagates to the inner
harbour due to the sheltered location. Locally generated sea component wave heights are generally
low in Koombana Bay but can reach nearly 1 m at times (Figure 12). The sea component period is on
the order of 2 seconds.
Figure 12: Wave heights recorded from Beacon 3 (top) and Beacon 10 (bottom).
Current data was also analysed from Beacon 3 and Beacon 10. Current roses were developed for the
Beacon 3 data for the combined 2009-2010 period for the summer (December to March) and winter
(June to September) periods (Figure 13). The roses show that during the summer the currents are
generally to the east-northeast, due to the prevailing winds. In the winter months, the current direction
is more varied, and aligns with the east-northeast to west-southwest direction. The depth averaged
currents are low and generally in the range of 4 to11 cm/s, and occasionally peaking above 20 cm/s.
2419-011-001-001
Page 39
5-February-2013
Figure 13: Current roses for Beacon 3 for summer (left) and winter (right). The roses indicate the
direction to which the current is flowing as oceanographic convention (to).
8.1.1.7
Wind
Long term wind data is available from several gauges within the Project area. Wind roses indicate
that winds from October through March for each year exhibit similar patterns, with winds from the
southeast and o ccasionally the southwest. In the other months, the winds are predominantly
lighter and from the east, but high winds will occur occasionally from all directions. There is a
strong sea breeze effect which is evident in the wind data. The wind speed peaks each afternoon
as the winds rotate from the north to the west. The winds continue to rotate counter-clockwise
through the night, repeating the pattern.
2419-011-001-001
Page 40
5-February-2013
2419-011-001-001
First Quarter 2008
Second Quarter 2008
Third Quarter 2008
Fourth Quarter 2008
Page 41
5-February-2013
First Quarter 2010
Second Quarter 2010
Third Quarter 2010
Fourth Quarter 2010
Figure 14: Wind roses for the Bunbury Outer Harbour for 2008 and 2010 showing average wind
speed (m/s) and direction and inter-annual variation in quarterly statistics. The roses indicate the
direction from which the wind is blowing as meteorological convention.
8.2
Water Quality
8.2.1
8.2.1.1
Depth Profiling
Depth profiling showed little variability in temperature, dissolved oxygen, pH and conductivity levels
across sample locations, both within Koombana Bay and offshore, and throughout the profile during
the sampling period (July to August 2011). River flows were low at this time. Mean temperature levels
within Koombana Bay ranged from 14.9C to 15.9 C. Mean dissolved oxygen levels within the bay
ranged from 7.1 to 8.3 mg/L (87.5 to 106.8 ODO%), reducing slightly with depth (delta = 1.2 mg/L).
There was little variation (< 0.1 pH units) in pH for both the Koombana Bay and offshore locations
with averages of 8.1 and 8.2 respectively.
2419-011-001-001
Page 42
5-February-2013
Mean conductivity levels within Koombana Bay ranged from 52,124 to 53,920 S/cm with slightly
higher levels recorded at the surface. At the offshore locations, average conductivity levels were
53,962 S/cm with little variation across the sampling dates and through the profile.
Turbidity levels within Koombana Bay were more variable. Turbidity levels within Koombana Bay
ranged from 9.6 to more than 300 NTU, with higher levels and variability in depths greater than 4 m.
The high turbidity levels measured close to the seafloor confirmed the presence of a nepheloid layer
in Koombana Bay during July and August. Turbidity was less variable at the offshore locations
ranging from 7.1 to 113.5 NTU, with some variability at the surface. For full details of depth profiling of
key water quality parameters (turbidity, salinity, dissolved oxygen) see Technical Report 3.
8.2.1.2
MODIS Imagery Analysis
Analysis of historic MODIS images provided an understanding of regional quarterly Total Suspended
Matter (TSM) statistics in marine waters of the Project area and s urrounds. Generally, the highest
average TSM levels within Koombana Bay were recorded during the third (July to September) and
fourth (October to December) quarters with TSM levels between 10 and 30 mg/L. The second quarter
(April to June) had the lowest TSM levels and lowest variation in the bay ranging from 4 to 15 mg/L.
The first quarter (January to March) had high variability with average TSM ranging from 2 to 30 mg/L.
For full details of MODIS imagery analysis see Technical Report 3.
8.2.1.3
Nutrients
Analysis of nutrients from previous water quality studies indicate the following exceedances in the
ANZECC (2000) Guidelines for Fresh and Marine Water Quality - Estuaries of SW Australia:
Nitrate-nitrate levels at the Inner and Outer Harbour surface waters in 2002;
Ammonium levels at all sampling locations in 1998, and Inner Harbour in 2006;
Orthophosphate levels at all sites in 2002, and Inner and Outer Harbour in 2006; and
Total phosphate levels at all sites in 2002 and 2004.
Chlorophyll a levels exceeded the guidelines at Inner Harbour surface waters and dredge material
placement ground bottom waters in 2002, and Inner and Outer Harbour in 2004.
Higher nutrient levels in the Inner and O uter Harbour are indicative of a w ider spread source than
activities within the port alone. Chlorophyll-a is a potential measure of available phytoplankton. The
major nutrients that govern phytoplankton growth are phosphorus and nitrogen. From the previous
monitoring surveys conducted in the port, there does not seem to be a s trong correlation between
nutrient and chlorophyll-a levels within the port area. However, this lack of direct correlation is typical
of plankton-nutrient dynamics in coastal systems. For full details of analysis of previous reports see
Technical Report 3.
8.2.1.4
Metals
Analysis of metals from previous baseline and routine water sampling indicates the following
exceedances in the environmental guideline (low reliability trigger value) (ANZECC, 2000):
Total aluminium levels at all sites during both baseline studies; and
Total aluminium levels at all sites during routine sampling, and selenium at all sites in during
November 2010 routine sampling.
The only exceedance of metals during both baseline studies and r outine sampling undertaken in
th
November 2010 was total aluminium. The 95 percentile of total aluminium levels in the Inner
Harbour was not significantly different to the reference sites suggesting that activities within the Inner
Harbour are not elevating ambient seawater levels. For full details of analysis of previous reports see
Technical Report 3.
8.2.1.5
Oceanic Exchange Study
To assist in spatially informing the design of the baseline water quality monitoring program (BWQMP)
and to assist in interpreting results of the BWQMP, a m odelling assessment of water flushing (i.e.
residence) time for Koombana Bay and the Bunbury Inner Harbour was conducted. The analysis was
conducted using the 3D hydrodynamic and transport model developed for the Bunbury Inner harbor
dredge plume analysis (Technical Report 4). Residence time was measured in terms of e-folding time
2419-011-001-001
Page 43
5-February-2013
where e-folding refers to exponential decay, the timescale for a quant ity to decrease to 1/e of its
previous value. The analyses indicated that e-folding times were relatively fast in the Bay, ranging
from 4 t o 6 d ays, and relatively slow in the Inner Harbour, ranging from 40 t o 90 days. This is
consistent with the geometry of Koombana Bay and the Inner Harbour. The bay is open to the
adjacent ocean, allowing for large-scale wind driven circulation to flush the area while the harbour has
a restricted entrance, limiting the flushing rate.
The analysis also indicated that the e-folding time varies seasonally, and also depends on the wind
characteristics occurring over the period of interest as shown in Figure 15. Full details of analysis are
provided in Technical Report 3, Appendix 3.E.
May 2009
2419-011-001-001
Page 44
5-February-2013
November 2009
Figure 15: Spatial pattern for e-folding times in May and November 2009.
8.2.2
Baseline Marine Water Quality Monitoring Program
the requirement to conduct a bas eline water quality monitoring program (BWQMP) to characterise
baseline marine physical and chemical water criteria occurring in the Project area which
encompasses Koombana Bay and the Inner Harbour.
To characterise seasonal continuous time series trends in baseline water quality and oceanographic
conditions in the area predicted to be potentially affected by dredging, two water quality loggers and
rd
an AWAC were deployed in Koombana Bay on t he 23 of December 2011 ( Figure 16). The water
quality loggers (OBS1 and OBS2) measure water quality parameters including turbidity (NTU),
dissolved oxygen (DO), conductivity, temperature and depth against time. The AWAC (ABS1) collects
current and wave profiling (height, velocity, direction) against time while post-processing of the
acoustic backscatter (ABS) signal from the AWAC is used to derive profiles of turbidity throughout the
water column at the site. The wave, current and TSS measurement capabilities of the AWAC also
enable the investigation of the relationship between physical processes and TSS variability. The
location of these loggers is based on the conservatively predicted extent of the 5 mg/l dredge plume
contour (5% of the time) from modelling (Figure 19). ABS1, OBS1 and OBS2 are located at the
boundaries of the expected impact zone. The water quality loggers are equipped with anti-fouling
devices to mitigate the risk of marine biofouling of the optical and dissolved oxygen sensors. The
AWAC (1 MHz) is configured to provide adequate precision for post processing for derivation of
turbidity from acoustic back scatter while capturing the key characteristics of wave and current profiles
with sufficient resolution (number of depth interval bins) and sampling rate for use in hydrodynamic
model re-validation. The loggers are serviced and data downloaded at approximately six week
intervals.
2419-011-001-001
Page 45
5-February-2013
Figure 16: Water quality, wave and current loggers are located at ABS1, OBS1 and OBS2 in
Koombana Bay.
Spot sampling was conducted at each of eight prescribed sites shown in Figure 17 at the time of
service of the loggers. Sampling design location was based on the Koombana Bay flushing study (see
example in Figure 15) to incorporate potential hotspots of reduced water quality. An YSI Multiparameter Water Quality Sonde consisting of sensors to measure temperature, conductivity, pH,
turbidity (NTU) and dissolved oxygen levels with depth was used to obtain the depth-profile for these
parameters at each location. Continuous depth profiles were recorded at each site.
2419-011-001-001
Page 46
5-February-2013
Figure 17: Sampling stations on flushing map

At each site a 1 litre Van Dorn water sampler was used to obtain a water sample approximately 1 m
above the seabed. C ollected water samples at each site were placed in labelled lab supplied
containers as follows:
Transferred directly to 200 ml containers for total and dissolved metals analysis;
Transferred directly to 500 ml for chlorophyll-a and TSS analysis. Dredge Plume
Management Zones (EAG 7)
The EPA has developed a spatially-based zonation scheme for proponents to use as a common basis
to describe the predicted extent, severity and duration of impacts associated with their dredging
proposals (EPA, 2011). Environmental Assessment Guideline 7 (EAG 7) sets out the preferred
approach for presenting impacts of dredging proposals that are subject to formal environmental
impact assessment. The scheme consists of three zones that represent different levels of impact:
EAG7 outlines the proposed framework for monitoring. These are described in Figure 18.
2419-011-001-001
Page 47
5-February-2013
Figure 18: An example map-form presentation of: a) the predicted Zone of Influence and the predicted
zones of High Impact and Moderate Impact associated with channel dredging (represented by the
black line) from EAG 7.
The equivalent Zone of Influence (ZOI) for dredging at Berth 14A is shown in Figure 19. Please refer
to Technical Report 4 to determine how these were derived. The 2 mg/L contour has been selected
as the boundary of the ZOI for the Berth 14A development as this concentration of total suspended
solids is approximately the lowest limit of visible detection which is appropriate for Koombana Bay
where social impacts are of key concern as no impacts on benthic habitat are anticipated due to its
absence in the Bay. The modelling predicts the extent of the Zone of Influence depicted in Figure 19
may occur 5% of the time (95%ile). Dredging will be managed through this management plan to
conform to the predicted Zone of Influence as outlined in the sub plans below.
2419-011-001-001
Page 48
5-February-2013
The Zone of Moderate Impact (ZOMI) for dredging at Berth 14A is shown in Figure 20. Please refer
to Technical Report 4 to determine how these predicted dredge plumes were derived. The 10 mg/L
contour has been selected as the boundary of the ZOMI for the Berth 14A. This is equivalent to the
ANZECC criteria for Water Quality Guideline trigger values for turbidity levels in estuarine systems of
approximately 6 N TU based on t he calibration derived in the baseline water quality monitoring in
Koombana Bay. The modelling predicts the extent of the Zone of Moderate Impact may occur 25% of
the time. Dredging will be managed through this management plan to conform to the predicted Zone
of Influence as outlined in the sub plans below.
2419-011-001-001
Page 49
5-February-2013
8.2.3
Predicted Dredge Plume
Hydrodynamic and Sediment Transport modelling to assess the impacts of dredging on the
surrounding environment has been undertaken and is described in PER Technical Report 4.
Modelling simulations were run for 2009 as this year displayed representative winds and ot her
meteorological conditions. Modelling simulations indicate that the dredge plume will remain mostly
within the Inner Harbour and south eastern portion of Koombana Bay as shown in Figure 21 and
Figure 22. The dredge plume is predicted to largely be contained within the inner harbour and
infrequently extend outside of the Inner Harbour and partly along Koombana and P ower Stations
beaches.
Figure 21: Contours showing depth-averaged TSS concentrations exceeded 25% of the time
for Scenario 1 based on a 40 week simulation. Concentrations are in excess of ambient TSS
concentrations. 10 mg/L contour represents Zone of Moderate Impact (ZoMI)
2419-011-001-001
Page 50
5-February-2013
Figure 22: 12-hour time sequence of depth-averaged dredge plume behaviour for Scenario 1.
8.2.4
Predicted Dredge Plume during Dredging Campaign
Time-series extracts from four key locations (Figure 23) have been presented from the model (Figure
24). The predicted time-series data shows the highly variable plume concentrations that can be
expected, with extended periods of respite during the earlier phases of dredging. Based on the
Indicative Dredge Plan (Technical Report 1), and dredge material characterisation information, the
highest turbidity concentration is predicted to occur near the end of the dredging operations and
corresponds to the times when clay lenses are likely to be encountered in the deeper section of the
sediment profile.
Figure 23: Location of time-series extraction points (Location A-D) and baseline monitoring
site (M).
2419-011-001-001
Page 51
5-February-2013
The highest TSS concentrations from the four time-series extract locations in Koombana Bay are
predicted to occur at Location B, which is to the west of the dredge operations offshore of Koombana
Beach. In that area, the simulations indicate that suspended sediment concentrations remain below
20 mg/L for the majority of the dredge campaign, increasing to a mean of 30-40 mg/L, with shorter
period spikes nearing 16 0mg/L.
The impacts are predicted to be less in the other areas of Koombana Bay, with Location A having the
second highest recordings in this modelling output. At this location, the concentrations generally do
not exceed 5 mg/L except when the clay lenses are encountered during which the concentrations
reach 20 mg/L for brief periods and spikes up to 60 mg/L.
2419-011-001-001
Page 52
5-February-2013
Figure 24: Time series of depth-averaged concentrations for the four locations for Scenario 1.
Concentrations are in excess of ambient TSS concentrations.
Comparison of predicted dredge plume effects against measured TSS levels baseline at M in the
middle of Koombana Bay (Figure 23) is presented as percentiles in Table 16. M1 was initially
selected to represent the potential impact of turbidity as it is within the zone of influence and
represents a gradient point on the pathway to social amenity receptors and potentially sensitive
benthic habitats identified in Koombana Bay (Technical Report 5).
8.2.5
Zone of Moderate Impact (ZoMI) and Ambient Turbidity
The summary results of turbidity in the baseline monitoring program conducted from December
2011 at 3 stations in Koombana Bay using continuous turbidity loggers are shown in Figure 25.
The predicted Zone of Moderate Impact (ZoMI) predicted for the dredge plume (equivalent to the
80%ile dredge plume contours) is also shown in Figure 25. The logging stations used for baseline
monitoring sit outside the predicted ZoMI. It is apparent that the background values within the bay
are generally higher than that predicted for the ZoMI. The modelling suggests that the Zone of
High Impact will be contained within the Inner Harbour.
Figure 25: 95%ile (red) 90%ile (green) and 80%ile (yellow) turbidity (TSS mg/l) statistics at the three
logging stations from December 2011-October 2012 and the predicted 10 mg/L 80%ile dredge plume
(Zone of Moderate Impact).
2419-011-001-001
Page 53
5-February-2013
The predicted Zone of Moderate Impact (Figure 25) is therefore the anticipated boundary of
potential ecologic effect on benthic habitats. H owever, no ben thic habitat is found within in or
adjoining the dredge influence area in the ZoMI. No ecological effect on benthic habitat due to
dredging at Berth 14A is therefore anticipated.
Time series predictions of the dredge plume showing the effect of clay lenses in the dredge profile
on resultant dredge plumes is shown in Figure 26. The 80%ile for baseline turbidity at each of
those sites is also indicated on t he relevant graph to support the inference that risk of turbidity
impacts on benthic habitats is very low.
Figure 26: Time series of predicted dredge plumes at selected locations in Koombana Bay and the
80%ile (red line) for baseline turbidity at each of those sites.
8.2.6
Zone of Influence (ZoI) and Ambient Turbidity
The Zone of Influence (ZoI) is more relevant to the proposed construction activities in relation to
Koombana Bay. The extent of the predicted visible plume is a community sensitive issue and the
protection of recreational and aesthetic values in Koombana Bay in an area with high community
focus is a key matter of potential concern in relation to dredging Activities at Berth 14A. As
discussed, the boundary of the ZOI for the Berth 14A dredging activity has been established as the
approximate limit of the visible plume (2 mg/L contour) predicted to occur 5% of the time (
Figure 27).
2419-011-001-001
Page 54
5-February-2013
Figure 27: Zone of Influence and respective continuous monitoring sites.

The sum effect of background and predicted dredge plume effects in the ZoI (events occurring 5% of
the time) at each of these logging sites is shown in Table 16.
Centre, Power Station Beach and Centre Koombana Bay 5% of the time.
Site
Baseline
Dredge
Sum Effect
AWAC
14
5
19
DDC
19
2
21
PSB
95
50
145
These results indicate that the predicted effect of dredging on turbidity in the ZoI in Koombana Bay
will be variable and is predicted to increase TSS for approximately 5% of the time as follows:
Dolphin Discovery Centre - 19 to 21 mg/L.

Centre of Koombana Bay 14 to 19 mg/L
Power Station Beach 95 to 145 mg/L
In relative terms the largest effect is predicted at Power Station beach which already incurs relatively
high background turbidity values of 95 mg/L.
8.2.7
Seasonal, Wave and Wind Effects on Turbidity
Seasonal variation in %iles in the results is shown in Table 17. Spring is the most turbid period and
summer the clearest. Differences at a significantly relevant detectable level of change (95%ile)
between spring (10.8 mg/l) and summer (6.6 mg/l) is approximately 30%.
2419-011-001-001
Page 55
5-February-2013
Table 17: Turbidity %iles for TSS (mg/l) for central Koombana Bay.
Results of continuous wave height and turbidity profiling in Central Koombana Bay from
December 2011 t hrough October 2012 are shown in Figure 28. There is a s ignificant positive
relationship between wave height and turbidity (TSS). A significant positive relationship was also
found between wind speed and turbidity with a lag phase.
Figure 28: Wave height and turbidity profile from continuous acoustic logger in central Koombana Bay
8.2.8
Chemical Water Quality
The outputs of the hydrodynamic and sediment transport modelling predict the dredge plume will
only extend seaward of the Inner Harbour mouth for approximately 25% of the dredge period so
the level of risk to predicted water quality outcomes for turbidity effects on be nthic areas may
largely be confined to the industrialised Inner Harbour basin. However, whilst dredging plumes
are not predicted to affect benthic habitats due to their distance from the Berth 14A dredge
footprint, the extended dredge period combined with the low flushing regime in Koombana Bay
that results from low tides and c urrents has the potential to induce changes in other physicochemical and biological characteristics of water quality during the dredging period and for a short
period thereafter.
The analysis of dredge sediments under the NAGD (see Technical Report 8) concluded that
2419-011-001-001
Page 56
5-February-2013
chemical contaminants of potential concern (COPCs) do not occur at concentrations in which

dredging attributable COPC impacts to benthic fauna or water quality are anticipated. The dredge
material was therefore determined to be suitable for unconfined disposal. However, based upon
what is known of the dredge sediment chemical characteristics, there is potential for increased
organic matter and as sociated nutrients and dissolved materials other than COPCs contained
within the pore water and fine sediments of the dredge material to be mobilised to the water
column during dredging. An increase in nutrients and other chemical characteristics may result in
a build up of algal blooms etc. in areas of Koombana Bay where lower flushing occurs.
The flushing study examining residence time of water in Koombana Bay and the Inner Harbour
indicates e-folding times of 4-6 days in Koombana Bay and 40-90 days in the Inner Harbour.
Results also indicated that the e-folding time can vary, and depends on the wind characteristics
occurring over the period of interest. Therefore flushing simulations were conducted for a range of
conditions to estimate the range of variability (e.g. Figure 15). This assessment predicted a
spatially distributed range of water flushing rates within the study area and assists in identifying
potential hotspots for adverse water quality in Koombana Bay resulting from lower water
flushing rates. Monitoring of key water quality criteria, other than turbidity, in low flushing areas
will enable improved risk management in the dredging program to provide certainty in achieving
predicted environmental outcomes for the project.
These hotspots may also serve as risk indicators for adverse water quality as a r esult of
dredging. A program of chemical and physical water quality monitoring is proposed for key
receptor locations within the adjacent Koombana Bay area and areas identified as low flushing
potential hotspots that are considered useful risk indicator sites. These will be monitored during
baseline (BWQMP) and dredging periods.
Figure 29: Water sampling quality locations (8) on predicted Zone of Influence dredge plume.
2419-011-001-001
Page 57
5-February-2013
Figure 30: Mean and 95% confidence limits for results of baseline water quality monitoring for metals
and chlorophyll at harbour (low) and bay (moderate) during 2012 baseline monitoring program. Red
arrows are suggested key metals for monitoring.
0.035
Concentration (mg/L)
0.03
0.025
0.02
0.015
0.01
Manganes
e (Total)
Aluminium
(Total)
Zinc (Total)
Zinc
(Dissolved)
Nickel
(Total)
Nickel
(Dissolved)
0.005
at harbour (low) and bay (moderate) during 2012 baseline monitoring program.
The key metals that may be influenced by acid sulphate effects of sediment during dredging are
aluminium and iron. pH may also be affected but given the strong buffering effects of seawater, are
unlikely to be significant. This is because the dredge material will be taken directly to ocean disposal
and significant oxidation of potential acid sulphate soil (including the suite of acid volatile sulphides),
generating acidity, is most unlikely. However, impacts on a fish health have been found in recent
dredging operations in other jurisdictions and mobilisation of metal suites in acid volatile sulphides in
the water column have been implicated in the impact. Particular metals of concern are aluminium and
iron. Baseline values for these metals are shown in
Table 18.
2419-011-001-001
Page 58
5-February-2013
Table 18: Total and dissolved metals in Koombana Bay water (n=6)
To monitor and manage this risk, proposed trigger levels for further investigation in the Zone of
Moderate Impact at WSQ5 (Figure 29) are:
pH < 7.0
Aluminium Total >0.1 mg/L
Aluminium Dissolved > 0.05 mg/L
Iron Total > 0.2 mg/L
Iron Dissolved > 0.1 mg/L
8.3
Sediment Characteristics
8.3.1
Koombana Bay is predominantly comprised of bare sand and silt with the exception of a line of reef
on the north-eastern margin of the bay. Sediment in the shipping channel is predominantly less than
26 m with a high organic content (28-35%) (SKM, 2001). The nearshore environment in the Bunbury
region is highly modified. The opening of the Leschenault Estuary to the Indian Ocean at The Cut in
1951 and the realignment of the Preston River to allow for the construction of the Inner Harbour
removed the capacity for normal estuary sediment filtration processes to occur in the lower reaches of
the Leschenault Estuary. The Cut also transformed the Leschenault Estuary from a tidally influenced
estuary to an estuary dominated by wave influences (McComb et al. 2001; DoW 2007). Nowadays,
the discharge of water is directly from the central mud-basin of the estuary. It is estimated that of the
average 170,000 m of sediment that is estimated to accumulate annually in Koombana Bay, over
50% of this sediment is fine silt material, suggesting delivery from the estuary via The Cut (SKM 2001,
3
Shore Coastal 2009). Analysis of siltation rates suggests 45,000 m /yr is deposited in the sand trap
3
and Outer Harbour, while 125,000 m /yr is deposited in the Main Channel and Inner Harbour. The
rates appear to be primarily driven by high mean wave heights and influenced by winter water level
fluctuations (Shore Coastal 2009).
The PSD characteristics of existing surface sediments in Koombana Bay were assessed via field
survey. An interpolated sediment map of surficial sediment PSD in Koombana Bay is shown in Figure
32. The centre of the bay is characterised by fine silt (<65 m) while fine sand (66-250 m) occurs
along Koombana Beach, along the entrance to the Inner Harbour and a long Power Station Beach.
Fine sand also occurs between McKenna Point and the shipping channel. Medium (250-500 m) and
coarse (501-800 m) sand occur at the opening of The Cut.
Sediment in the shipping channel is predominantly less than 26 m with a high organic content (2835%) (SKM, 2001).
2419-011-001-001
Page 59
5-February-2013
Figure 32: Surface sediment median particle size contours and sampling stations in Koombana
Bay.
8.3.2
Potential Impact
marine dredge footprints at Berth 14A indicate that it is compliant with NAGD (2009) criteria and on
this basis is assessed as suitable for unconfined ocean disposal. Consequently, potential impacts
arising from contaminants of potential concern (COPC) on sediments in Koombana Bay as a result of
dredging Berth 14A is assessed as very low. This will be confirmed by taking benthic grab samples of
sediments at the same sites as the stations used for spot monitoring in the BWQMP (Figure 32).
Dispersion modelling results using a conservative assumption for final density of dredge plume
material of 400 kg/m3 indicates that sedimentation is not predicted to be a critical issue in the capital
dredging program for Berth 14A. Sedimentation outside the Inner Harbour from the dredging
operation is predicted to not exceed 1 mm (Figure 33). Moreover, evidence of the existing distribution
of fine fraction sediments within Koombana Bay indicates that the central portion of the Bay including
the shipping channel may present a natural location of increased deposition of fine fraction materials
and potentially exacerbated by maintenance dredging and s hipping operations (Figure 32). This
location remains remote from benthic habitats, and offshore from important recreational and local
tourism ventures such as the Dolphin Discovery Centre.
Sedimentation risks to the environment of Koombana Bay from dredging are considered to be minor.
Consequently, sediment deposition monitoring is not proposed for environmental purposes.
2419-011-001-001
Page 60
5-February-2013
Figure 33: Predicted sediment deposit at end of 40 week dredge operations assuming final
3
density of 400 kg/m .
8.4
Marine Fauna and Significant Species
8.4.1
8.4.1.1
Protected Matters Report
An EPBC Act Protected Matters Report was generated on t he April 12, 2011 for the Project. The
protected matters report identified 36 listed threatened species, four of which are likely to occur and
a further three that possibly occur in the area covered by the Protected Matters Report:
Balaenoptera musculus (blue whale) likely to occur;
Eubalaena australis (southern right whale) likely to occur;
Megaptera novaeangliae (humpback whale) likely to occur;
Caretta caretta (loggerhead turtle) likely to occur;
Chelonia mydas (green turtle) possibly occurs;
Neophoca cinerea (Australian sea-lion) possibly occurs; and
Thalassarche cauta cauta (shy albatross) possibly occurs.
No threatened ecological communities were identified in the EPBC Protected Matters Report. There
are 29 listed migratory species identified in the EPBC Protected Matters Report. Twenty of the
migratory species are also listed as threatened. Of the species that are listed as migratory (but not
threatened), one has been recorded at the site, two are likely to occur and two possibly occur in the
area covered by the EPBC search as detailed below:
Ardeamodesta (great egret) likely to occur;
Apuspacificus (fork-tailed swift) likely to occur (flyover only);
Meropsornatus (rainbow bee-eater) possibly occurs;
Haliaeetusleucogaster (white-bellied sea-eagle) possibly occurs; and
Actitishypoleucos (common sandpiper) known to occur.
2419-011-001-001
Page 61
5-February-2013
A desktop review of marine fauna was undertaken by the Centre for Marine Futures (CMF) at the
University of Western Australia (UWA, 2011). The review assessed the current status of marine
megafauna known to occur in the vicinity of the Project area and is summarised below. Full details are
available in Technical Report 7.
Cetaceans Whales and Dolphins
A number of cetacean species are known to utilise the Project area. Locally, Koombana Bay has a
resident bottlenose dolphin population. Other species that may regularly occur on a seasonal basis in
or adjacent to Koombana Bay and Geographe Bay include humpback whales, blue whales and
southern right whales. Bottlenose dolphins and h umpback whales are two key marine megafauna
species that commonly occur in close proximity to the development area. Koombana Bay is home to a
resident population of bottlenose dolphins while humpback whales are known to migrate within two
kilometres of the coastline in this area during the months of September and October on their
southbound migration to Antarctica.
Approximately 196 individual resident bottlenose dolphins occur in and around Koombana Bay.
Dolphins are apex predators that are dependent on sustainable fish populations as their food source.
The large population of resident dolphins would be a significant factor in structuring the fish
assemblages of the local marine area. Dolphin abundance varies seasonally in Koombana Bay and
environs, with greater numbers of dolphins apparent during summer and aut umn (Figure 34). Birth
rates are also thought to vary seasonally, with a peak in calving activity during February and March
(Figure 34). The birthing season is a c ritical time to dolphin populations as newborn calves are
particularly vulnerable to disturbance.
Figure 34: a) seasonal patterns in dolphin abundance and b) birth rates in Koombana Bay and
the broader region. Source: SWMRP newsletter.
The distribution of adult female dolphins within their apparent home range has also been
demonstrated to vary seasonally. During winter, the sighting density of female dolphins was fairly
evenly distributed across the Project area, while in summer and autumn, the density of female dolphin
sightings was concentrated in Koombana Bay and around the mouth of the Leschenault Estuary
(Figure 35).
Eight dolphin deaths have been recorded in the inner waters around Bunbury in recent years. These
inner waters encompass the Leschenault Estuary and Inlet, the Inner and Outer Harbour and the
Collie and Brunswick rivers (Murdoch University Press Release, 2009). The cause for these dolphin
deaths is the focus of a d olphin health investigation as part of the SWMRP (SWMRP Newsletter).
These eight dead dolphins were part of a group of 16 which almost exclusively ranged within the inner
waters in Bunbury (Murdoch University Press Release, 2009). There appears to be no clear trend in
the timing of the deaths and the cause remains unknown.
2419-011-001-001
Page 62
5-February-2013
Figure 35: Seasonal distribution of adult female dolphins around the Koombana Bar region.
Source SWMRP newsletter.
Humpback Whales migrate along the Western Australian between their feeding grounds in the
Southern Ocean and t heir calving grounds in the Kimberley (Jenner et al, 2001). Their northbound
migration takes them up t he Western Australian coast between mid-June and mid-July while their
return southbound migration, accompanied by calves, occurs during September and O ctober
annually, with a peak in the Bunbury region during the first two weeks in October (Jenner et al, 2001).
While southbound migratory whales are consistently sighted within 20 nm of the coastline, fewer
northbound whales are sighted within this distance from the coast (Jenner et al, 2001). Further
information on the humpback whale migratory pathways in the vicinity of Geographe Bay is provided
within Technical Report 7.
A number of other cetacean species have been recorded in the region, but the Project area does not
appear to represent a frequent or regular habitat for the following species; minke whales, false killer
whales, long finned pilot whales and Grays beaked whales.
Turtles
Two species of marine turtle are known to occur in southern Western Australian waters (loggerhead
turtle and leatherback turtle), and there is anecdotal evidence that green turtles may also occur.
Importantly, the southern Western Australian region does not constitute important nesting habitat for
any species of marine turtle.
Pinnipeds Sea Lions and Seals
The Australian sea lion and the New Zealand fur seal may migrate through Koombana Bay and
Geographe Bay though they are not found as residents in the Project area. While it is plausible that
sea lions may transit through the region, such occurrences are extremely rare.
Sharks
Two species of conservation significance, the great white shark (Carcharodon carcharias) and
western population of the grey nurse shark (Carcharias taurus), may occur in the Bunbury region.
Western Australian waters are thought to be a potential migratory pathway for great white sharks
migrating between South Australia, the Southern and Indian oceans, and South Africa.
The grey nurse shark has a br oad inshore distribution, primarily in subtropical to temperate waters
around continental landmasses (Last and Stevens, 2009). Grey nurse sharks tend to be found on the
continental shelf from the surf zone down to at least 190 m (Last and Stevens, 2009). The west coast
population of grey nurse shark is predominantly found in the south-west coastal waters of Western
Australia with aggregations tending to occur in basalt canyons off the coast.
Penguins
Little Penguins (Eudyptula minor) breed across southern Australia and the islands of New Zealand.
Little Penguins usually breed on offshore islands or less commonly, along parts of the mainland coast
that are inaccessible to mammalian predators. While no r ecorded published information on t he
presence of little penguins nesting along the Bunbury foreshore could be found, anecdotal information
from the Bunbury Dolphin Discovery Centre identified that penguins may utilise the Bunbury
2419-011-001-001
Page 63
5-February-2013
8.4.2
Potential Impacts
8.4.2.1
Cetacean Whales and dolphins
Cetaceans are vulnerable to various anthropogenic activities including entanglement in certain fishing
apparatus, boat strike, pollution (including acoustic pollution), and eco-tourism (Hall et al., 2000;
Constantine, 2001; Kennish, 2002; Vanderlaan and Taggart, 2007; Weilgart, 2007; Jenkins et al.,
2009). Such disturbances can result in the direct mortality of cetaceans or various indirect impacts
including changes to social structures and/or alienation from key habitats (Chilvers et al., 2003;
Weilgart 2007). A range of anthropogenic activities also have the potential to degrade habitat
important to the survival of cetaceans, or impact cetaceans directly. These activities may alter habitat
use by operating at times that coincide with the presence of whales, or they may occur by degrading
habitat suitability on a permanent or semi-permanent basis when cetaceans are absent. The
excavation of the shallow dredge footprint and development of infrastructure for Berth 14A will
permanently alter the habitat in that immediate area.
It is considered unlikely that the proposed project will lead to pollution or changes in water quality that
will adversely affect cetaceans. While dredging is proposed as part of this project, dredging is to be
located within the Inner Harbour. This area is not frequented by whales, though dolphins frequent the
area. The proposed dredge material placement ground is in offshore waters with placement to occur
over short periods during the length of dredging.
A program using a continuous passive acoustic monitoring array to assess dolphin use patterns at the
entrance to the inner harbour and surrounds during baseline and dredging periods has commenced.
In addition a baseline dolphin habitat use pattern assessment for the existing area at Berth 14A is
also proposed using visual identification methods. This information will be integrated with the passive
acoustic array information to improve overall interpretation of the effect on dolphins due to the
permanent alteration of the Berth 14A area.
8.4.2.2
Underwater Noise
The potential impact of anthropogenic noise on a marine animal depends on the level of noise
exposure. At low and moderate exposure levels, underwater noise may cause a c hange in the
behaviour of a marine animal. At high exposure levels, underwater noise can induce a reduction in
hearing sensitivity, physical injury or death. The impact of noise exposure generally depends on a
number of factors relating to the physical and spectral characteristics of the sound (e.g., the intensity,
peak pressure, frequency, duration, duty cycle), and relates to the animal under consideration (e.g.,
hearing sensitivity, age, gender, behavioural status, prior exposures). The type and level of the impact
also depends on whether the noise consists of single-pulse, multiple-pulse or non-pulsed sounds
(Southall et al., 2007).
The potential scale of effects of underwater noise on marine life is presented in Figure 36. The
following three effect groups are of major significance:
Lethal effects: life threatening physical injuries, including death and severe physical injury.
Sub-lethal effects: non-life threatening physical injuries, and in particular auditory damage.
Behavioural effects: include perceptual, stress and indirect effects of which the most common
is avoidance of an area.
2419-011-001-001
Page 64
5-February-2013
Figure 36: Spectrum of underwater noise impacts from no response through stress, distress
and system failure.
More detail on the project specific underwater noise modelling methods, assessment and predicted
outcomes are provided in Technical Report 7, Appendix 7.E.
8.4.2.3
Noise Propagation
Of the activities described within the excavation process for the Berth 14A dredge footprint, rock
fracturing (blasting) is considered the most acute noise propagation source (to a distance of ~1000 m
from source). The potential adverse physical impacts on marine fauna from piling is predicted to be
restricted to approximately 20 m from source, while cutter suction dredging, backhoe dredging and
drilling prior to blasting result in predicted permanent injury noise impact contours less than 1 m from
the source (Table 19).
Underwater noise modelling and assessment for the project has considered two conservative
potential source locations for rock fracturing (blasting) activity, (if required) for the Berth 14A dredge
footprint. Source location 1, near the entrance to the inner harbour is considered as the worst case for
underwater noise propagation resulting from rock fracturing (blasting). Source location 2, situated mid
way within the proposed dredge footprint, and away from line of sight to the inner harbour entrance is
considered as a mid-range propagation site. The distances nominated within the impact table (Table
19) represent distance where marine mammals may experience permanent hearing loss or other
injury. The area of permanent hearing loss and injury, along with the zone where marine mammals
may experience temporary hearing loss are plotted in Figure 37 and Figure 38 for both source
location scenarios.
Table 19: Summary of predicted noise impacts.
Noise generating activity
Source Location 1
Source Location 2
Rock fracturing (blasting)
990 m
630 m
Piling
20 m
20 m
Cutter Suction Dredging
<1 m
<1 m
Backhoe Dredging
<1 m
<1 m
Drilling
<1 m
<1 m
In the event that rock fracturing (blasting) is required for the project, then site specific noise model
validation and monitoring measures are proposed as described in Section 10.3. The Management
and mitigation measures outlined in Section 10.3 have also been proposed should rock fracturing
(blasting) be required on the project.
8.4.2.4
Increased Background Noise Levels
Typical ambient noise levels in Koombana Bay are likely to vary considerably with changes in
shipping traffic and weather conditions and during activities such as periodic maintenance dredging.
2419-011-001-001
Page 65
5-February-2013
The operation of the cutter suction dredge and associated marine plant will reflect a similar
underwater noise profile to existing harbour operations, and p eriodic maintenance dredging, though
the proposed dredging operations will extend for several months, between 4 to 10 times the duration
of previous maintenance dredging activities.
As shown in Figure 36, increase in a baseload noise profile may induce behavioural effects such as
avoidance, abandonment or displacement. While it is difficult to predict the response of marine
mammals to an increase in background noise conditions the occurrence of sustained dolphin
populations within operational industrial areas such as Fremantle, Kwinana and Western Australias
urbanised estuaries suggests a temporary affect is likely, perhaps leading to a level of habituation to
increased noise profiles over the duration of dredging.
Figure 37: Noise impact contours worst case propagation scenario derived from rock
fracturing (blasting) activities. Inner orange contour zone of permanent hearing loss or injury,
outer yellow contour, zone of temporary hearing loss.
2419-011-001-001
Page 66
5-February-2013
Figure 38: Noise impact contours mid range propagation scenario derived from rock
8.4.2.5
Vessel movements
Activity of vessels during the construction phase will predominantly be within the Inner Harbour area,
with the exception of dredge hopper barges that will transit between the Inner Harbour area and the
proposed offshore disposal location approximately 13 kilometres north-west of the Inner Harbour.
Dredges are effectively stationary during dredging activity so the likelihood of them striking marine
fauna is remote. Dredge hopper barges will use the existing shipping channel to transit through
Koombana Bay and out to the area adjacent to the nominated ship anchoring areas for vessels
waiting to enter Bunbury Port. In 2010 there were 402 ships that entered and departed Bunbury Port
with associated support vessels. There is no reported incidence of ships or tugs striking whales in the
history of Bunbury Port. Slow displacement type vessels such as hopper barges and t ugs are not
considered to pose a s ignificant risk to megafauna including whales (Laist et al., 2001). No
interactions between dredge vessels and marine fauna have been recorded during maintenance
dredging activity or previous capital dredging programs in Bunbury Port. The agility of dolphins and
limited use of fast moving support vessels within the dredging works is thought to preclude risk of
collisions with these fauna.
Management measures focused on m inimising interaction with larger cetaceans (whales) during
hopper barge disposal are presented in Section 1.
Marine Turtles
While loggerhead and potentially green turtles may be present in the Bunbury region, the region is not
identified as an important foraging area for either species. Important foraging and resting areas for
marine turtles in Western Australia include Shark Bay, Exmouth Gulf and the Pilbara and Kimberley
coasts to the Northern Territory border. Mortality from dredging operations is known from
Queensland, particularly in the regions where the abundance of marine turtles is high (for example
adjacent to major rookeries) (Greenland et al., 2002). Given the very low abundance of turtles in the
region of the proposed project compared to other locations where mortalities are recorded, the
chance of interaction between dredging equipment and marine turtles in the current instance is
extremely unlikely and so no specific monitoring of marine turtles is proposed. However, mitigation
measures are proposed for minimising interactions with significant marine fauna in general.
2419-011-001-001
Page 67
5-February-2013

The main threat to the Australian Sea-lion and the New Zealand fur seal is mortality due to
interactions with fisheries, aquaculture and entanglement with marine debris. Overall, it is concluded
that the impacts of the proposed project as described, will not significantly impact the Australian sealion and so no specific monitoring or management of pinnipeds is proposed.
Sharks
Impacts to shark species ostensibly arise from fisheries that either target shark species or interact
with shark species as by-catch. Impacts attributable from the proposed dredging operations are not
are not considered significant and so no specific monitoring or management of shark species is
proposed.
Shy Albatross
Threats to the shy albatross are principally related to incidental capture and subsequent mortality in
various commercial fishing apparatus. Overall, it is concluded that the impacts of the proposed project
as described, will not significantly impact the shy albatross and so no specific monitoring or
management of the shy albatross is proposed.
Penguins
Introduced mammalian predators (e.g. foxes, dogs and cats) are considered to be the most significant
threat to penguins on land. It is clear that indirect threats, such as habitat loss through weed invasion,
erosion, grazing and housing developments, have had an impact on the distribution and abundance of
penguins in some areas (Harris and Bode, 1981). The scale of foreshore disturbance as a result of
the current project is not considered to be significant in terms of penguin habitat use in the region.
Nonetheless, foreshore inspections will be undertaken prior to construction work to identify the
presence of any penguins. No further monitoring or management of Penguins is proposed.
8.5
Marine Fisheries Resources
8.5.1
In a detailed study of fish assemblages in Koombana Bay and Leschenault Estuary, Potter et al.
(2000) identified the ten numerically dominant fish species in the shallow sections of Koombana Bay
(including adjacent to Koombana Beach and Power Station Beach). These are presented in Table 20.
Numerically, these ten species represent approximately 93.2% of the total fish assemblage recorded
in Koombana Bay.
Species
Numerical Abundance (%)
Lesueurina platycephala (flathead pygmy stargazer)
24.8
Aldrichetta forsteri (yelloweye mullet)
16.7
Sillago bassensis (western school whiting)
15.4
Contusus brevicaudus (prickly toadfish)
14.9
Favonigobius lateralis (goby)
8.1
Atherinomorus ogilbyi (silverside)
3.3
Arripis georgiana (Australian herring)
3.1
Sillago schomburgkii (yellowfin whiting)
3.0
Ammotretis elongates (short finned flounder)
2.0
Pelsartia humeralis (sea trumpeter)
1.9
A Review of Commercial and Recreational Fishing Activity in the Bunbury region in the south west
region of Western Australia (UWA, 2011) is provided in Technical Report 7, Appendix 7.C. Most
targeted species and the fisheries that exploit them operate at much broader spatial scales than the
Project area, therefore, relevant fisheries are identified on the basis of their regional presence.
Fisheries data that is collected by the Department of Fisheries is at a br oad scale that makes it
difficult to identify significant fisheries at the scale of Koombana Bay. This lack of spatial resolution in
fisheries data is an i ssue that is common in inshore fisheries in Western Australia in general and
indeed the rest of the country (McPhee, 2008).
2419-011-001-001
Page 68
5-February-2013
Potential Fisheries
The locations of all Western Australian managed fisheries were reviewed initially to determine which
fisheries were likely to overlap spatially with the project area (Technical Report 7). From this review it
was identified that 12 fisheries had potential to occur at the Project area. However, the fishery with the
greatest potential to be affected by development activities is the blue swimmer crab fishery.
Blue Swimmer Crab
The blue swimmer crab fishery was identified as being particularly important in the Bunbury region.
The blue swimmer crab is known to occur in Koombana Bay and the Leschenault estuary where they
emigrate from the estuary into Koombana Bay in autumn and return in spring. These movements are
related to water temperature differences between the estuary and the embayment (Meagher 1971).
The blue swimmer crab is known to spawn in Koombana Bay (Kangas, 2000). The mean monthly
densities of crabs in nearshore, shallow waters of Leschenault Estuary were highest between midspring and mid-autumn and declined to very low or zero levels during winter and early spring (Potter
and de Lestang, 2000). Commercial crabbing occurs around Bunbury with these areas likely
important given the restrictions on commercial crabbing in other regions such as Geographe Bay and
the Peel Harvey inlet. The catch of blue swimmer crabs by recreational fishers within the Bunbury
region is substantial and centred on the Leschenault Estuary.
8.5.2
Potential Impacts
Threats to existing fisheries in the Bunbury region are not predicted from dredging activities. The
effects of dredging on water quality are not predicted to extend across a large area in Koombana Bay.
The extent of the dredge plume (turbidity) will be monitored during dredging and m anagement
measures applied. Areas identified as risk indicators of other water quality criteria will be monitored as
discussed previously. There is not predicted to be any effects on benthic habitats or other critical fish
habitats in the Bunbury area as a result of the dredging program. No specific monitoring or
management of fisheries is proposed during dredging.
8.6
Benthic Habitat
8.6.1
8.6.1.1
Habitat Survey
Over 240 km of benthic habitat was surveyed across the Project area (Figure 39). Biotic coverage
was typically low compared to surrounding areas with an average of 32.0% biotic coverage observed
across the Project area. As expected, biotic coverage of reef (51.1% 2.2% SE) and sand inundated
reef (52.8% 2.2%) was higher than biotic coverage of sand (25.0% 1.1% SE).
A map of benthic habitats occurring across the Project area is shown in Figure 39. A full description of
benthic habitat surveys undertaken across the Project area is provided in Technical Report 5.
2419-011-001-001
Page 69
5-February-2013
Figure 39: Distribution of benthic habitats across the Project area and showing the location of
the proposed dredge material placement ground.
Seagrass
Seagrasses observed during the survey of benthic assemblages included Posidonia spp., Amphibolis
spp., Thalassodendron pachyrhizum and Halophila ovalis. All seagrasses occurred a c onsiderable
distance from shore in at least 9 metres water depth (Figure 40). No seagrasses occurred in
Koombana Bay, the area predicted to be impacted by dredging activities.
2419-011-001-001
Page 70
5-February-2013
Figure 40: Distribution of seagrasses across the Project area.

8.6.1.2
Koombana Bay
Benthic biota occurring in Koombana Bay (an area of 400 ha) are of particular interest as these
communities are nearest the proposed dredging activity, and may potentially be impacted by the
dredge plume. Results from the benthic surveys conducted for the Project indicate Koombana Bay is
dominated by sand and silt with only one area of reef comprising approximately 15 hectare occurring
on the eastern margin of the bay, extending south of The Cut (Figure 39).
2419-011-001-001
Page 71
5-February-2013
Sand habitats occurring in Koombana Bay were observed to have trace amounts of foliose and turf
algae occurring on t hem during the survey. The reef habitat occurring on t he eastern margin was
observed to have 29.1% biotic coverage and was dominated by foliose algae (22.0%), though canopy
algae (5.8% coverage of Ecklonia radiata) also occurred. Sand habitats occurring within Koombana
Bay had low biotic cover (<2%). While no sponges were observed in Koombana Bay, sponge gardens
(6.0% coverage) were observed on the reef areas just north of Koombana Bay and The Cut.
8.6.1.3
Offshore Dredge Material Placement Ground
The proposed offshore dredge material placement ground is shown in Figure 39. Habitats occurring at
the proposed offshore dredge material placement ground (an area of approximately 200 ha) are of
particular interest as they will be impacted by the dredge material placement activities. The offshore
disposal location is situated approximately 13 kilometres to the north-west of the entrance to Bunbury
Port inner-harbour (Technical Report 2 - Site Selection and Assessment for Offshore Placement of
Dredge Material).
The multi-spectral satellite image obtained for the Project area indicated a lack of discrete substrata at
the offshore disposal location, with ROV surveys confirming that sand was the only substrata
occurring in the proposed disposal location. This sand area, covering an area of approximately
1200 ha was intensively sampled to identify a suitable disposal location. This offshore area had an
average 12.2% biotic coverage with biotic groups present including Amphibolis griffithii, Posidonia
angustifolia and turf algae. A 200 ha area with lower biotic cover (6.3%) from within this domain was
selected as the proposed dredge material placement ground (See Figure 39).
8.6.2
Potential Impacts
8.6.2.1
Dredge Turbidity Plume
Outputs from the hydrodynamic model are shown in Figure 22. The area predicted to be impacted by
the sediment plume from dredging activities is predominantly restricted to the south-eastern half of
Koombana Bay. Within this area, benthic habitats are limited to a limestone reef area occurring on the
north-eastern margin of the bay. This community predominantly consist of canopy forming and foliose
algae. Outputs from the hydrodynamic and sediment transport model indicate these habitats are likely
to be exposed to 2-5 mg/L of suspended sediments above ambient levels 5% of the time as a result of
dredging activities.
Ambient levels of suspended sediment in the predicted dredge plume area routinely exceed 20 mg/L
due to shipping traffic, discharge from the Leschenault estuary and wind driven sediment
resuspension in Koombana Bay. In addition, similar benthic communities that occur to the north of
Koombana Bay adjacent to The Cut are routinely exposed to levels of turbidity exceeding cumulative
levels predicted to occur during dredging. Consequently there is predicted to be no l oss of benthic
habitat as a result of dredging (Technical Report 6). This is a significant finding for the project, limiting
the potential for longer term impacts from an environmental perspective for dredging operations.
Microphytobenthos (microscopic photosynthetic algae) may also occur on bare sand and marine silts
within Koombana Bay. The occurrence of microphytobenthic communities are known to be negatively
affected by reductions in light availability, reductions in temperature and increases in sediment
resuspension (Barranguet et al. 1998; Sundbck et al. 2000; Schreiber and Pennock 1995). The low
light climate and frequent wind driven and anthropogenic sediment re-suspension in Koombana Bay
is characteristic of low microphytobenthic communities and s o microphytobenthic communities are
expected to contribute little to benthic productivity in the Project area. Furthermore, due to the rapid
turnover rates of microphytobenthos (in the order of days), any microphytobenthic communities
disturbed due to indirect effects of dredging activities will quickly recover.
8.6.2.2
Habitat Loss Assessment
Dredge Footprint
While benthic habitats are not considered at risk of impact or degradation as a result of dredging
operations at Berth 14A, monitoring of several sentinel sites within the algal reef system of northeastern Koombana Bay, and reference locations north of the Cut will be undertaken during and after
the dredging program.
2419-011-001-001
Page 72
5-February-2013
Figure 41: Zone of Influence in respect to Benthic Habitat in Koombana Bay

Offshore Placement Ground
For the offshore placement ground there will be loss of up t o 200 ha of seagrass with an average
cover of 6.3%. The location of the offshore disposal ground has been chosen to minimise the impact
on adjacent benthic habitats and s ensitive receptors. The loss of benthic habitat as a r esult of
offshore disposal activities will be as sessed as part of the Sea Dumping Permit application to the
Commonwealth. Monitoring and management at the disposal ground is not incorporated within this
draft DSDMP.
Loss of seagrass outside of the offshore placement ground due to indirect effects of a r eduction in
water quality and increased sedimentation is considered unlikely. The dispersion of the plume upon
placement is expected to be short-term (<40 weeks), with 75% of effects restricted to within 250 m of
the placement ground and 95% of effects restricted to within 1,500 m of the placement ground.
Benthic biota in the vicinity of the placement ground are restricted to <10% coverage of Amphibolis
spp. and Posidonia spp.. Research undertaken on bot h of these seagrass groups in temperate
Western Australian ecosystems have indicated that they are reasonably resilient to short term light
limitation likely to occur during the dredging program. Further, sedimentation outside of the placement
ground due to placement Activities was estimated to be <0.1 mm over 12 months and so is unlikely to
have an ecological effect on benthic communities. This indicates that indirect loss of biota outside of
the placement area driven by reductions in water quality or increased sedimentation is unlikely.
2419-011-001-001
Page 73
5-February-2013
8.7
Introduced Marine Pests
Introduced marine pests (IMP) are those species introduced into, or translocated within Australian
waters that pose a s ignificant risk to environmental values, biodiversity, ecosystem health, human
health, fisheries, aquaculture, shipping, ports or tourism (DAFF, 2009). The non-deliberate
introduction of marine pests occurs in two main ways either through ballast or biofouling.
In Australia, there are existing protocols in place to minimise the risk of the introduction of marine
pests and to ensure the early detection if an i ncursion occurs. Since the Australian Quarantine
Inspection Service (AQIS) introduction of mandatory ballast water regulations, where ballast water
must be ex changed outside territorial waters (12 nautical miles off the Australian coast, including
islands), risk of IMP from international ballast has been greatly reduced. However, there is no
domestic ballast water regulation and many Australian ports have not been surveyed for IMPs.
There is now a global understanding that the risk from ballast while still considerable may have been
overstated relative to biofouling. Biofouling species contribute approximately 75% of the introduced
species we currently have in Australia, therefore unmanaged biofouling is currently the greatest risk.
In 2009, the Commonwealth of Australia released a series of guidance documents setting out a
consensus view of effective biofouling management practices. These include the National Biofouling
Management Guidelines for Non-trading Vessels (Commonwealth of Australia, 2009b); and National
Biofouling Management Guidelines for Commercial Vessels (Commonwealth of Australia, 2009c). The
purpose of the documents was to provide guidance and recommendations for practical management
options for the management of biofouling hazards associated with vessels and equipment.
Further to Commonwealth requirements for waters in their jurisdiction, Western Australian has
requirements for State waters regarding introduced marine pests. The Department of Fisheries (DoF)
is the lead agency for marine biosecurity in Western Australia. Biosecurity is underpinned by the Fish
Resources Management Act 1994 and Fish Resources Management Regulations 1995.
Also under the Port Authorities Act 1999 and Port Authorities Regulations 2001, the Harbour Master
of each port has powers to manage marine pests or suspected pests. The Harbour Master can deny
entry or order the departure of any vessel that contains marine pests, is leaking oil or poses any other
marine pollution risk to the harbour.
8.7.1
Previous Surveys
Whilst national protocols have not identified the Bunbury Port as one of the eighteen Australian ports
to be s urveyed as part of the National System for the Prevention and Management of Marine Pest
Incursions, it is clearly a significant Port catering for both commercial and r ecreational activities.
Therefore the Bunbury Port Authority has commissioned regular invasive marine species surveys in
the Bunbury Port every two years since 1998. Three survey areas, the Outer Harbour, Inner Harbour
and Koombana Bay, have been surveyed as they have areas considered at high risk for containing
introduced marine species. These areas have:
Frequent and persistent domestic and international vessel activity (commercial and
recreational);
Permanent artificial structures (e.g. moorings, berths and pylons);
Reduced flow or high residence times of the water column; and
Known intertidal and subtidal habitat characteristic of the region.
A total of 37 species have been identified as species of concern for this specific area according to the
National System for the Prevention and Management of Marine Pest Incursions. These species were
targeted in the biennial surveys.
The survey undertaken in 2006 identified one species, the Japanese Goby, in the Inner Harbour. A
single new introduced species was observed during this survey, namely the bryozoan (Zoobotryon
verticillatum) in moderate numbers in the Outer Harbour and low numbers in the Inner Harbour (SKM,
2006).
2419-011-001-001
Page 74
5-February-2013
The summer survey of 2008 (December 2008) identified the possible presence of two of the 37
targeted species. Both of these were dinoflagellates. One was an empty Alexandrium tamarense cyst
and the other was vegetative cells of A. catenalla. Neither toxicity assessment nor confirmation of
species/strain identification by recognised authorities on these notably cryptogenic species was
undertaken. Neither species were identified in the winter survey undertaken in September 2009
(SKM, 2009). This would suggest that these species, while present, remain in low concentrations
throughout alternate seasons. An additional target IMP of concern, Acartia tonsa, was suspected
during the Part II survey. Samples were sent to the University of Tasmania for further assessment, but
at the time of writing the report the final species confirmation was outstanding.
8.7.2
Potential Impacts
Different types of vessels provide different risks for the introduction of marine species. High risk
vessels are generally those that are slow moving, have numerous spaces where marine species can
gain purchase, and come in close contact with the sea bottom (DoF, 2009). Some of these vessels
stay in a single area for months, enhancing the opportunities for species to settle at the source and
then be introduced to new regions. Such high risk vessels include dredges, supply boats, drilling rigs
and some fishing boats (DoF, 2009).
The potential for marine pest introductions during dredging has previously been addressed as part of
development approvals under the Environmental Protection Act 1986. Increasingly, if a dr edge is
being brought into Western Australia for a dredging program, one of the Ministerial Conditions is that
it be surveyed for introduced marine species before it is allowed to dredge (DoF, 2009).
2419-011-001-001
Page 75
5-February-2013
Key Receptors
To assist in concluding the impact of a di sturbance or development upon t he environment, key

receptors have been identified. These receptors can be considered as being potentially sensitive to
the proposed dredging and disposal processes, and may be subject to some form of acute interaction
or long term pressure. Table 21 provides summary of key project receptors identified by recent
studies which demonstrate a level of impact requiring monitoring and/or mitigation. From the results of
these investigations and impact descriptions above, a concise description of the significance of this
interaction is provided. The categories of key impact receptors applied to the Berth 14A capital
dredging program include:
Benthic habitats key primary producers and structure forming benthos within the study area;
Marine megafauna species of specific conservation concern, including dolphins;
Physical alteration potential changes in water quality and sediment resulting from the
process of dredging; and
Other users recreational, fisheries, tourism ventures etc.
Table 21: Interaction summary for the proposed Bunbury Port Berth 14A dredging and
disposal program.
Category
Interaction
Benthic Habitats
Macro algal
A finger of shallow macroalgal dominated reef extends south of The Cut
communities
for a distance of ~ 1km. These communities represent the nearest
sensitive benthic habitat receptors to the proposed dredging activities.
Modelling defines that minor increases in turbidity/TSS are predicted to a
concentration of 2-5mg/L at the 5% exceedance probability. Some
potential for minor increased deposition regimes and l ight reductions
may exist. These changes in light and depositional regimes are not
expected to impact benthic habitat during dredging operations with
modelling suggesting only minor changes in TSS, deposition and light
regimes.
Significant Species
Megafauna
The most significant pathway for the impact upon significant marine
species (primarily dolphins) will be v ia the process of rock fracturing
(blasting). Modelling indicates a l ocalised zone of high impact
(permanent hearing loss or injury) within the inner harbour, extending a
zone of moderate impact (temporary hearing loss) within the outer
harbour and southern reaches of Koombana Bay. Some level of
interaction may also be applicable to large cetaceans during transit of
hopper barges to and from the offshore disposal ground.
The effects of reduced water quality and increases in ambient noise
profile due to dredge operation may potentially affect behaviour and
utilisation of the study area by dolphins. If realised, such impacts present
both ecological and economic issues for management. However, given
that a relatively high level of habituation to anthropogenic disturbance
can be demonstrated by regional dolphin populations, alterations in
behaviour which influence economic viability of the Dolphin Discovery
Centre and associated tourism revenue may be of potentially greatest
concern (see other users).
Management and monitoring is proposed to mitigate impacts to dolphins
during rock fracturing (blasting). Management measures are proposed to
limit interactions with larger cetaceans during dredge disposal.
Chemical and Physical changes
Invasive species
The use of dredges and marine plant from overseas or elsewhere in
Australia has the potential to introduce invasive marine species.
Management and mitigation measures are proposed. A risk assessment
2419-011-001-001
Page 76
5-February-2013
Water quality
to determine the risk that a vessel or associated equipment is harbouring

introduced marine pests (IMPs) will be un dertaken in accordance with
DoF requirements. An ongoing IMP monitoring program for exists for the
Port of Bunbury.
Water quality within Koombana Bay along its southern and eastern
foreshores are likely to experience sustained low level increases in
turbidity during the dredging period. Such increases will present visual
changes to water clarity. In addition, the sustained entrainment of
organically enriched sediments within the water column has the potential
to release nutrients and other materials leading to increased algal
productivity and potential fluctuations in dissolved oxygen. The study
area experiences broad fluctuations in water quality during the year.
However, the sustained elevations in turbidity are likely to exceed natural
processes during the dredging program on a l ocal scale. An ongoing
baseline water quality monitoring program (BWQMP) was established in
December 2011 to provide baseline information for the Project area.
A program of monitoring and management is proposed to enable key
water quality conditions to be monitored, in particular ecological
conditions and water quality conditions suited to primary and secondary
contact for recreational purposes. Continuous monitoring of the turbidity
plume against baseline and reference conditions at key locations is
proposed. A series of selected risk indicator sites to be monitored
periodically against baseline and reference conditions for a r ange of
selected water quality criteria is proposed.
Other users
Recreational
users and tourism
operations
Koombana Bay is utilised by recreational users for swimming, water

sports and c oastal leisure pursuits. Key areas of visitation include
Koombana Beach, Power Station Beach, the marina and a djacent
waters for sailing and pleasure craft use. Bunbury is also the focal point
of Dolphin based tourism within the region, led by the Dolphin Discovery
Centre on K oombana Beach. Dolphin interactions occur on Koombana
Beach, and at locations nearer The Cut.
Modelling indicates that 75% of the time the plume will extend only 23km north of the inner harbour entrance, affecting a small percentage of
Power Station Beach. Beaches adjacent to the dolphin discovery centre
and the majority of Koombana Bay will remain largely unaffected by the
dredge plume, however, modelling does predict that turbid waters will
migrate along the beaches of Koombana Bay less than 25% of the time,
with concentrations exceeding 5 to 10 mg/L. Peak levels may approach
160 mg/L.
As noted in the section above (significant species), turbidity as well as
increased background noise may elicit as yet undefined behavioural
responses to the local Dolphin population. Such effects may impact upon
the economic sustainability of recreational and tourism ventures and
their connected businesses over an extended dredge program (up to 40
weeks).
Monitoring and management of water quality is proposed. The ongoing
observation of dolphins, and use of passive monitoring techniques will
assist management in defining the effects associated with dredging
operations.
A visual monitoring program for dolphins is proposed to occur prior to
and following development activities. This monitoring program, proposed
to be undertaken in conjunction with the Dolphin Discovery Centre will
examine the effects of development activities on t he distribution and
prevalence of individual dolphins in and around the development area.
2419-011-001-001
Page 77
5-February-2013
10
Environmental Management Sub-plans
Environmental monitoring and management response strategies adopted within this draft DSDMP are
defined within the following sub-plan sections:
1. Monitoring of Dredge Plume Extent
2. Management of Underwater Noise
3. Water Quality
o Turbidity
4. Water and Sediment Quality
o Chemical
5. Marine Fauna
o Bottlenose Dolphins
6. Marine Fauna
o Marine Turtles
7. Marine Fauna
o Potential Impact of Rock Fracturing (blasting) on Marine Megafauna
8. Benthic Habitats in Koombana Bay
9. Ocean Placement of Dredge Material
o Disposal Activities
o Transit of Vessels
11. Dredging Operations, Management
o Atmospheric Noise
o Introduced Marine Species
o Waste Management
o Hazardous Substances, Spills and Leaks
o Emergency Response
o Maritime Safety
The scope of monitoring and management has been prioritised based upon the predicted interactions
between impact and receptor as summarised within Section 5.
10.1
Adaptive Management
A combination of telemetered and in-field survey techniques will collect and collate the data directly. A
tiered response strategy proposed for management during dredging is provided in Figure 43.
The development and dredging site is restricted in space making movement to alternative dredging
locations limited. However, there are opportunities to move to different sections of the dredge profile
which have varying levels of fines. Other effective options available for practical intervention would
be based upon reductions in dredge productivity, such as reducing production rates, limiting over flow,
ceasing overflow, or ceasing dredging. The adoption of such methods would require careful attention
to the significance of impacts, the additional costs placed upon dredging, and the extension of the
dredge schedule. Such changes, while potentially addressing short-term issues may indirectly
influence other potential impacts, such as economic loss associated with reduced recreational
amenity, or conduct of tourism ventures.
10.1.1
Continuous Improvement Process
Lanco strive for continual improvement of environmental management. Regular communication with
State and C ommonwealth environmental agencies, and the TACC are important tools for obtaining
up-to-date information on environmental management and best practice initiatives for Lanco to
consider and adopt.
2419-011-001-001
Page 78
5-February-2013
Lanco will record and track all dredging works and any incidents recorded during dredging activities.
These incidents and t heir corrective actions will be reviewed on a weekly basis by Lanco and the
dredging contractor. Close out reports will be completed following the completion of dredging and
distributed to the project TACC as lessons learnt recommendations for consideration during future
dredging operations.
10.1.1.1 Involvement with the TACC
Incidents will be reported to the TACC as they occur. Lessons learnt and continuous improvement
discussions will be held during each TACC meeting as a standing agenda item.
10.1.2
Sub-plans - Management Actions and Preventative Measures
This section contains the sub-plans that describe the specific management actions and preventative
measures that will be implemented during dredging works at Berth 14A. This will be implemented to
mitigate the risk to achieve predicted environmental outcomes and manage the impacts from dredge
related activities.
The sub-plans outline specific management objectives and performance criteria that can measure the
relative success of an implemented plan. These sub-plans also detail specific monitoring and
reporting requirements associated with the potential environmental impacts. The results of the
monitoring will be used to assess the effectiveness of management actions and site compliance with
performance indicators.
Each sub-plan is intended to stand alone as a detachable page, detailing the specific management
actions and preventative measures relevant to each issue. The sub-plan format is presented below for
reference purposes.
Sub-plan #: Title
Topic
Predicted
Outcome
Management
Objective
Statutory
Requirement or
Guidance
Performance
Criteria
Implementation
Strategy
Monitoring
Reporting
Management
Response on
Contingency
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
Relevant management action.

Outcome predicted from risk assessment process identified through PER.
A specific desired management outcome.
Relevant statutory requirements or guidance.
To ensure outcomes associated with management outcomes are met.
The methods or specific tasks to be utilised to achieve the nominated
performance criteria
Methods or specific tasks to be utilised to determine the effectiveness of
the implementation strategy.
To report to relevant recipient at appropriate frequency
The actions to be implemented if monitoring indicates performance
criteria are not being met.
The frequency of the techniques or the timing of their implementation.
Person/agency responsible for implementation.
Page 79
5-February-2013
10.2
Monitoring of Dredge Plume Extent
10.2.1
Monitoring Dredge Plume Extent: Sub-plan 1
A hydrodynamic model has been applied to assess the predicted dredge plume attributable to the
proposed dredging operations at Berth 14A. Available data has been applied in developing and
calibrating this model to maximise the level of accuracy. However, it is important that the findings
adopted from this model are validated by field measurements during dredging, particularly in the initial
stages to determine frequency of dredge plume mapping.
Validation of the hydrodynamic modelling of the predicted dredge plume by dredge plume mapping
shall be undertaken as soon as dredging commences.
Sub-plan 1: Monitoring of dredge plume extent
Topic
Monitoring of the dredge plume to validate the predicted outcomes of the
hydrodynamic modelling.
Predicted
Actual dredge plume dispersion does not vary significantly from the
Outcome
predicted dredge plume generated by the hydrodynamic model as
outlined within the PER.
Management
Dredge plume conforms with predicted values from dredge model..
Objective
Statutory
National Water Quality Management Strategy: Guidelines for Fresh and
Requirement or
Marine Water Quality (ANZECC, 2000).
Guidance
Performance
Turbidity monitoring of dredge plume distribution and intensity over time
Criteria
Implementation
Prior to dredging (COMPLETED):
Strategy
- Determine predicted dispersion of the dredge plume for the
dredging activities through hydrodynamic modelling.
- Undertake one week of field sampling for turbidity (NTU) and
Total Suspended Solids (TSS) in a grid pattern throughout Inner
Harbour and Koombana Bay prior to dredging commencing to
establish existing conditions.
- Collection and synthesis of wind data from existing
meteorological stations in Bunbury region.
Monitoring
Auditing and
Reporting
Management
Response
2419-011-001-001
During the initial four weeks of dredging:

- Dredge plume mapping conducted in first four weeks
- Water samples shall be collected:
From the hopper barge overflow;
Within the extent of the visible dredge plume; and
50 m beyond the extent of the visible dredge plume.
These samples shall be analysed for TSS, particle size
distribution and particle settling speed.
- Collection of wave, current and t ide data from data loggers
deployed within Koombana Bay.
- For dredging operations, barge overflow rates shall be collected.
The data loggers deployed as part of the water quality monitoring (see
Sub-plan 3) will provide data on the dredge plume throughout the
dredging program.
Mobile monitoring/mapping of dredge plume with CTD and N TU casts
and analytes as per current BWQMP program of stations
A report summarising the model validation process including predicted
and actual dredge plume outputs to be delivered to the Regulator/TACC
as soon as possible upon commencement of dredging.
Should the model validation process determine substantial variation from
the predicted dredge plume, reconsideration of impact potential and
associated monitoring and management controls would be initiated via
Page 80
5-February-2013
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
the lead monitoring consultant, client, contractor and advised to the

Regulator/TACC.
Hydrodynamic model validation program will be started one week prior to
commencement of dredging to establish existing conditions and will
continue for four (4) weeks following the commencement of dredging.
Proponent
Dredge contractor
Page 81
5-February-2013
10.3
Management of Underwater Noise

10.3.1
Underwater Noise Monitoring: Sub-plan 2
A noise model has been applied to assess the predicted underwater noise levels attributable to rock
fracturing (blasting) which may be required as part of the development of Berth 14A. Available data
has been applied in developing and calibrating this model to maximise the level of accuracy. However
it is important that if rock fracturing (blasting) is required, underwater noise measurements are
undertaken to validate the noise model predictions and c onfirm that the proposed management
measures are appropriate.
Sub-plan 2: Management of underwater noise levels.
Topic
Monitoring of underwater noise levels to validate the predicted outcomes
of the noise modelling.
Predicted
Actual underwater noise levels does not vary significantly from predicted
Outcome
noise levels generated from the noise model as outlined within the PER.
Management
No injury to dolphins or other conservation significant fauna due to
Objective
underwater noise from rock fracturing (blasting).
Statutory
The Project will require dredging operations and piling works, with the
Requirement or
potential for drill and blast operations, which have the potential to result in
Guidance
noise impacts on marine fauna.
Performance
When determining if the level of variation of the underwater noise levels is
Criteria
substantial from the predicted levels, sensitive receptors and t heir
respective tolerance limits have been identified refer to Technical Report
7. The relationship between the actual measured transmission loss from
the site, receptors and t heir tolerance limits, and predicted transmission
loss will be used to validate the model if rock fracturing (blasting) is
required.
Implementation
Implementation Plan:
Strategy
An Underwater Noise Monitoring Implementation Plan shall be prepared
prior to the commencement of rock fracturing (blasting), if required. The
plan should outline the proposed methodologies, implementation
strategies and i ssue response protocols for the proposed noise
monitoring program with reference to the guidance presented in the PER.
Dredge Schedule to be discussed with relevant agencies in Department
of Fisheries and TACC prior to confirmation with dredge contractor.
Prior to piling operations:
Visual inspection of presence of dolphins within the potential zone of
noise influence and surrounds. Soft start-up of piling machinery to
enable adjustment and adapt ive response in the event that dolphins are
in the area. It should be noted that the governing criteria identified within
the PER for all non-rock fracturing (non-blasting) activities are only
predicted to be exceeded in the areas directly adjacent to the works.
Prior to rock fracturing (blasting):
A selection of near field underwater noise measurements may be
undertaken in order to confirm the source noise levels for each activity. It
should be noted that the governing criteria identified within the PER for all
non-rock fracturing (non-blasting) activities are only predicted to be
exceeded in the areas directly adjacent to the works.
During rock fracturing (blasting):
In contrast to the less noise intensive activities, it was predicted that rock
fracturing (blasting) has the potential to result in exceedances of the
governing criteria at distances of up to 1 km from the source location. It is
therefore important to measure the underwater sound transmission loss
characteristics of the site in order to validate the assumptions and
outcomes of the noise modelling. This monitoring would occur at the
outset of rock fracturing (blasting) operations in accordance with the
methodologies described in the Underwater Noise Monitoring
2419-011-001-001
Page 82
5-February-2013
Monitoring
Reporting
Management
Response
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
Implementation Plan.
Near field underwater noise measurements for each major construction
activity in order to validate the source noise levels.
Underwater pressure levels for each blast should be measured for at
least three or four offset distances simultaneously in order to measure the
transmission loss characteristics of the site (for a particular transect) such
as:
- Location 1 (Near Field): between 10 m and 50 m from blast centre;
- Location 2: 500 m from blast centre;
- Location 3: 1,000 m from blast centre; and
- Location 4: 2,000 m from blast centre.
The monitoring should remain in place until full production rock fracturing
(blasting) has commenced (i.e. ramp up/testing etc is complete).
The report containing full details of the measured underwater noise levels
for each construction activity/plant item would be prepared for the
proponent, as appropriate.
The underwater blast noise levels would be reported in the form of a site
law analysis. The site law analysis would be compared with the predicted
transmission loss characteristics of the site. Any significant discrepancies
would inform a review of the exclusion zones and management strategy
for potential underwater noise impacts.
the predicted underwater noise levels, review of exclusion zones and
management strategy for rock fracturing (blasting) activities would be
initiated.
Noise model validation may be undertaken during the commencement of
rock fracturing (blasting). Rock fracturing (blasting), if required, is likely to
be at the end of the dredging program.
Proponent
Rock Fracturing (blasting) contractor
DEC
Initial rock fracturing (blasting) works may benefit from a r amp up i n charge size such that
management zones can be confirmed and pr ogressively refined with increases in production rates.
Such information may lead to defining a maximum charge level which best limits the extent of impact
zones, whilst maximising operational productivity, and reducing the duration of rock fracturing
(blasting) works.
The underwater noise predictions for rock fracturing (blasting) would be validated onsite using two
boat-based acoustic monitoring stations that would simultaneously measure the underwater noise
emissions from key construction activities.
A land based monitoring station is also recommended in order to measure near field noise levels. This
information would be processed in the form of revised impact contours.
2419-011-001-001
Page 83
5-February-2013
10.4
Water Quality
The liberation of dredge material into the water column from dredging operations may impact on water
quality adjacent to the dredge footprint. Monitoring shall be undertaken to measure water quality
parameters for one year prior to dredging commencing and throughout the dredging program.
Background and port operational activities may also contribute to turbidity and other water quality
indicators and need to be considered in any potential management responses during construction
activities for Berth 14A.
10.4.1
Turbidity from Dredge Plumes: Sub-plan 3
Time series data shall be collected from fixed stations and used to characterise the dispersion of
dredge derived turbidity plumes within Koombana Bay.
Sub-plan 3: Water quality Turbidity
Topic
Monitoring of marine water quality to detect any impacts of dredging
operations.
Predicted
Predicted dredge plume generated from the hydrodynamic model as
Outcome
Management
- Dredging activities will be managed to ensure the predicted zones
Objective
of impact are achieved and that water and sediment quality
impacts are minimized to the greatest extent practicable.
Statutory
EAG 7 - Environmental Assessment Guideline for Marine Dredging
Requirement or
Proposals
Guidance
Marine Water Quality (ANZECC, 2000)
Background Quality for Coastal Marine Waters of Perth, Western Australia
(McAlpine et al, 2005)
Perth's Coastal Waters: Environmental Values and O bjectives,
Environmental Protection Authority Position Statement (EPA, 2000)
Performance
The table below lists baseline turbidity criteria (TSS mg/l) at the Zone of
Criteria
Moderate Impact (95%ile) and the Zone of Influence (80%ile) for each of
the data logger locations, the predicted dredge effects and s um effect of
both background and dredging effects.
Site
AWAC 95%ile
DDC 95%ile
PSB 95%ile
AWAC 80%ile
DDC 80%ile
PSB 80%ile
Baseline
14
19
95
9
6
9
Dredge
5
2
50
5
2
10
Sum Effect
19
21
145
14
8
30
Analysis of data from loggers will be used to monitor overall performance

during dredging operations
Implementation
Strategy
2419-011-001-001
Prior to dredging:
- Three (3) data loggers were established in December 2011 to
collect existing water quality information at key receptor locations
prior to the commencement of dredging (Figure 42). This includes
one AWAC, located within the centre of Koombana Bay (ABS 1)
and two optical turbidity sensors established offshore from
Koombana Beach near the Dolphin Discovery Centre (OBS 2) and
offshore of Power Station Beach (OBS 1).
During dredging:
- Time series turbidity data will be collected from these three
stations to monitor the dispersion of dredge turbidity plumes within
Koombana Bay.
Page 84
5-February-2013
Monitoring
Reporting
Management
Response
During dredging operations, data from these three stations will be

downloaded every four weeks to assess conformance of predicted
turbidity levels from dredging and previous baseline data in
Koombana Bay.
- Monitoring of turbidity at spot sampling stations with CTD casts and
water samples for metal analysis will be conducted at the same time.
- Exceedances in turbidity attributable to dredging will be determined as
soon as practicable, enabling efficient implementation of management
measures to mitigate impacts to benthic habitat and social amenity.
- Reports every two weeks for submission to the regulator and TACC
presenting TSS results against the performance indicators.
- Significant anomalous conditions reported as required
If a t urbidity plume is detected, wave height, wind and rainfall data will
analysed to determine if the elevated/anomalous values are due to natural
variation (such as Cut discharge and wind/wave seabed re-suspension),
or other effects including Port operations or dredging.
If TSS levels attributable to dredging exceed the performance indicators
for seven (7) days, applicable management options shall be identified.
The dredge operations management and c orrective actions shall be in
accordance with the dredge contractors CEMP and final DSDMP. A
decision tree outlining a draft framework for management response in the
event that trigger values are exceeded is presented in Figure 43.
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
It should be noted that slowing down or stopping dredging to mitigate

visual amenity or recreational water quality impacts would require careful
consideration and s upport from the TACC. This level of intervention may
only facilitate to extend the impacting process, rather than expediting its
completion and recovery of recreational, economic and public use goals.
Rather than the intervention in productivity, high TSS concentrations
impacting amenity and recreational water quality may be addressed by
issuing public notices, and advising of potentially extended reductions in
water clarity and suitability for recreational pursuits.
Water quality monitoring shall be undertaken prior to the commencement
of dredging to determine background levels as outlined in the BWQMP.
Turbidity monitoring shall be undertaken throughout the dredge program
to monitor potential dredge plumes.
Proponent
Dredge contractor
Page 85
5-February-2013
Figure 42: Zone of Influence defined for the Berth 14A development and turbidity logger sites.
2419-011-001-001
Page 86
5-February-2013
Regular Water Quality

Monitoring Using ABS and OBS
Compared to water
quality management
triggers for each area
Trigger not Exceeded
Continue Dredging
and Monitoring Plan
Timeframe
Trigger value
exceeded
Verify
values
Trigger value not

Exceeded
Within 24 hours:
Review observed
levels relative to
reference sites
Verify
values
Reference sites
indicate
exceedance due
to other factor
Within 48 hours:
Visually ID source
of exceedance
(Visual Inspection
or MODIS)
Verify
values
Exceedance
due to some
other factor
(i.e. Outflow
from adjacent
river system)
Dredging
identified as
source of
exceedance
The dredging
TACC should
be notified of
exceedance
between 84
and 108 hours
of the
exceedance
occurring
Within 72 hours:
Confirm
exceedance using
vessel based
surveys
Verify
values
Trigger value not

Exceeded
Within 84 hours:
Relocate dredge
to another part of
dredge footprint
(i.e. move from
clay to sand)
Verify
values
Trigger value not

Exceeded
Verify
values
Trigger value not

Exceeded
Verify
values
Trigger value not

Exceeded
Trigger value
exceeded
Within 96 hours:
Reduce overflow
on dredge
Trigger value
exceeded
Within 108 hours:
Reduce dredge
productivity until
water quality
objectives
achieved
Figure 43: Decision tree outlining a draft framework for management response in the event that
trigger values are exceeded during water quality monitoring.
2419-011-001-001
Page 87
5-February-2013
10.4.2
Chemical Water and Sediment Quality: Sub-plan 4
Vessel based monitoring shall be undertaken to collect chemical water and sediment quality data.
Sub-plan 4: Water and Sediment quality Chemical
Topic
Monitoring of marine water and sediment quality to detect any impacts of
Predicted
Water and sediment quality parameters monitored shall be assessed
Outcome
against baseline values. Water trigger values for further investigation are:
pH < 7.0
Management
- Aquatic animal health not at risk due to adverse water and
Objective
sediment quality impacts from the Project
- Dredging activities will be managed to ensure the predicted
zones of impact are achieved and that water and sediment quality
Statutory
Requirement or
Guidance
Background Quality for Coastal Marine Waters of Perth, Western
Australia (McAlpine et al, 2005)
Perth's Coastal Waters: Environmental Values and Objectives,
Performance
- Dredging will managed in conformance with predicted Zone of
Criteria
Influence (Figure 44) criteria for management for recreation and
aesthetic values.
- Dredging will be m anaged in conformance with pH, aluminium
and iron triggers in the water column at reference points
- Sediment will be monitored and non-conformance with baseline
values interpreted and reported
Implementation
Prior to dredging:
- Undertake in situ measurements for water and sediment quality
Strategy
parameters in accordance with the Baseline Monitoring Program
(WQBMP) (In Progress).
During dredging:
- Initial model validation period of monitoring during
commencement of dredging
- Water quality surveys will be c onducted during routine service
periods at sites within Koombana Bay (Figure 45) at four weekly
intervals.
Monitoring
Prior to dredging:
During dredging:
commencement of dredging (Figure 44)
- Water and sediment quality surveys will be c onducted during
routine service periods at sites within Koombana Bay (Figure 45)
at four weekly intervals.
Reporting
Summary reports will be provided upon receipt of laboratory results and
reported to the MRG.
Should water quality investigations conclude an absence of significant
fluctuations with the potential to impact ecological processes or human
use, and that plumes do NOT migrate over sensitive receptor locations (a
predicted outcome based upon dr edge plume modelling) during initial
phase of dredging then the implementation of the program will be scaled
2419-011-001-001
Page 88
5-February-2013
Management
Response
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
back to service intervals.

Changes to water quality will be assessed using the adopted performance
indicators. Where water quality conditions exceed the performance
indicators over two consecutive occasions management options will
considered by the MRG. Potential options may include:
- Consideration of baseline/background variation;
- Move the location of the dredge within the dredge footprint;
- Reduction in hopper barge overflow;
- No hopper overflow dredging;
- Shutdown to allow for water quality improvement; or
- Restriction in waterway use.
Modest changes in water quality are unlikely to require the high level
intervention of dredge productivity controls. Monitoring is likely to continue
to further define temporal and s patial scales of impact. However, in the
event that acute changes in water quality are experienced the full
spectrum of dredging intervention, including dredge shut down would be
explored. Such impacts may be related to drastic reductions in dissolved
oxygen, or occurrence of potential algal bloom activity.
Validation at commencement of dredging and subsequently at service
intervals or where an investigation is warranted
Proponent
Dredging Contractor
Figure 44: Water sample stations with respect to dredge plume. WSQ6 is key indicator site for metals.
2419-011-001-001
Page 89
5-February-2013
Figure 45: Water and sediment quality spot sampling locations overlayed on sediment particle size
contours in Koombana Bay
2419-011-001-001
Page 90
5-February-2013
10.5
Marine Fauna
Lanco and its contractors will seek to expedite the dredging schedule, ensuring that the campaign will
be conducted so that it achieves the required engineering and navigational objectives in the shortest
time possible in accordance with the dredge log.
Two periods of increased operational sensitivity have been identified for dredging operations within
the Bunbury Region. One relates to environmental concerns and the other is socio-economic. These
time windows have been identified not as shut down periods per se, but periods of increased
sensitivity, monitoring and operational scrutiny.
Tourism/recreation
The recreational amenity of the Bunbury beaches is considered of concern during the peak holiday
periods surrounding the Christmas School Holidays and the Easter Break.
Dolphin calving
Dolphin calving and the occurrence of dolphins in general peaks during summer and autumn months
each year. These periods are considered particularly important to recruitment, and a time for
increased diligence with regards to potential impacting activities and m onitoring for dolphin
occurrence. Based upon available information presented within the draft DSDMP, a preferential
window for undertaking high impact activities, such as rock fracturing (blasting) would be the July to
October period.
10.5.1
Bottlenose Dolphins: Sub-plan 5
Sub-plan 5: Dolphins
Topic
Change in distribution and/or abundance of bottlenose dolphins as a
result of dredging.
Predicted
- There will be no detectable change in the abundance, diversity,
Outcome
geographic distribution or productivity of bottlenose dolphins at a
species or ecosystem level.
- There will be an improvement in knowledge regarding the spatial
distribution of dolphin populations in the environs of the inner
harbour and Koombana Bay through the use of passive acoustic
loggers.
- There may be changes in habitat use of dolphins around the
Berth 14A area.
Management
- No harm to bottlenose dolphins due to dredging activities.
Objective
Statutory
- Environment Protection Biodiversity Conservation (EPBC)
Requirement or
Regulations (2000).
Guidance
Performance
No significant detectable changes in dolphin movement patterns in
Criteria
Project area based on passive acoustic monitoring
Implementation
- A passive acoustic monitoring program implemented to determine
Strategy
a 1-year baseline relative abundance and distribution of dolphins
in the Inner Harbour and Koombana Bay.
- A visual monitoring program to be implemented before and after
the dredging program to characterise behaviour of dolphins and
assess changes in the distribution and abundance of individual
dolphins at the scale of the proposed development.
- The length of the dredging campaign should be minimised as far
as practicable.
- The Dredging Contractor is to be required to check for the
presence of turtles and other significant marine fauna, particularly
within the path of dredging. Prior to commencing dredging and
disposal, the Dredging Contractor must check for significant
marine fauna from within a 300 metre monitoring zone of the
dredge area.
- Dredging and disposal activities may only commence if no
2419-011-001-001
Page 91
5-February-2013
dolphins have been observed in the monitoring zone.

If any dolphins are sighted in the vicinity of the dredge footprint,
dredging and dumping activities must not commence until after
the last dolphin mammal is observed to leave the monitoring zone
- If dolphins are observed to enter the dredge footprint during
dredging then adaptive management response protocols will
need to be developed with the TACC.
- The dredgers pump will start operation only after the cutter head
touches the seabed and stop working on clearing the sea bed
Any change in the distribution or abundance of dolphins in Koombana
Bay and the Inner Harbour area as a result of the proposed development
activities will be assessed using a c ombination of passive acoustic and
visual monitoring methods.
-
Monitoring
Passive Acoustic Monitoring:

Passive acoustic monitoring is continuous and can simultaneously cover
a wide spatial scale (including separate locations). The use of acoustic
monitor also allows assessment of habitat use and behaviour during the
night which is not possible with visual monitoring. To assess the
distribution of dolphins in Koombana Bay and the Inner Harbour, three
passive acoustic loggers were deployed in August 2011 (Figure 46).
These loggers provide a baseline of dolphin abundance and spatial
distribution in the Project area.
Visual Monitoring to Detect Impacts:
A visual survey of dolphins will be undertaken to assess the behaviour of
dolphins in the Berth 14A area and assess changes in the distribution and
abundance of individual dolphins at the scale of the proposed
development. Four years of boat-based surveys have been undertaken in
the Bunbury region as part of the South-west Marine Research Program
(SWMRP). Additional visual monitoring program is proposed to be
undertaken in collaboration with the Bunbury Dolphin Discovery Centre
and will complement work undertaken to date as part of the SWMRP.
Data will be collected by experienced marine dolphin observers familiar
with the dolphin population in the area to assess the effect of the
development on dolphin abundance, distribution and habitat use at Berth
14A and environs.
Reporting
Management
Response
Together, the two monitoring approaches represent a survey approach

that is temporally and spatially relevant with respect to the scale of the
proposed project and of at sufficient resolution to detect ecologically
meaningful changes in habitat use of dolphins in Koombana Bay at and
adjacent to the proposed development area.
- A record of the monitoring must be es tablished and maintained
by the Dredging Contractor.
- In the event of an incident involving dolphins, the Dredging
Contractor must notify Lanco.
The TACC will be not ified of any dolphin incidents and Lanco will liaise
directly with DEWHA and State regulatory authorities (DEC) regarding the
matter.
As detailed within the impact assessment, the habituation of resident
dolphin populations to changes in water quality and noise background
levels is considered plausible. Appropriate management responses need
to be considered by the TACC if significant deviations from expected
dolphin behaviour or related activities (e.g. tourism) occur.
Where impacts are defined as being sub-lethal, management would be
best served allowing operations to continue unhindered, rather than
delaying dredging, or reducing productivity, which would only serve to
extend the potential period of impact prior to respite and recovery.
2419-011-001-001
Page 92
5-February-2013
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
Should dolphin observations record lethal impacts associated with the

dredge operations, TACC shall be informed and consulted
- The passive acoustic monitoring program was implemented in
August 2011 and will continue until dredging activities commence
(expected to be for a period of at least 12 months).
- The passive acoustic monitoring program will continue during
dredging.
- The visual survey is proposed to occur for a per iod of up to 20
days prior to development and up to 20 days following
development.
Proponent
Dredging Contractor
DEC
2419-011-001-001
Page 93
5-February-2013
Koombana Bay East (C-Pod Site 1)
30
Dolphin Beach (C-Pod Site 2)
25
Inner Harbour (C-Pod Site 3)
20
15
31/03/2012
17/03/2012
3/03/2012
18/02/2012
4/02/2012
21/01/2012
7/01/2012
24/12/2011
10/12/2011
26/11/2011
12/11/2011
29/10/2011
15/10/2011
1/10/2011
17/09/2011
3/09/2011
10
20/08/2011
Average number of clicks per minute
35
Day
Figure 47: Dolphin activity recorded by each of the passive acoustic loggers.
10.5.2
Marine Turtles: Sub-plan 6
Marine fauna such as turtles are mobile and can generally avoid impacted areas for the duration of
dredging activities. However, maintenance dredging occurring elsewhere in Australia has caused a
small number of turtles to be killed by being hit by the dredge or being entrained by the dredge head.
Should turtles be s ighted in the Project dredging area during the dredging campaign, and this is
considered most unlikely, management and operational practices will be adopted to mitigate such
interactions. These management and operational practises include the possible use of turtle excluding
devices on t he dredge head to reduce the possibility of capture and/or controlling of the dredge
pumps to reduce operation while the dredge head is off the sea floor.
Sub-plan 6: Turtles
Topic
Co-occurrence of dredging activities and turtles
Predicted
- There will be no change in the abundance, diversity, geographic
Outcome
distribution and productivity of fauna at species and ecosystem
levels.
Management
No harm to marine turtles as a result of dredging activities.
Objective
Statutory
Environment Protection Biodiversity Conservation (EPBC) Regulations
Requirement or
(2000).
Guidance
Performance
No change in the abundance, diversity, geographic distribution and
Criteria
productivity of fauna at the species level.
Implementation
- The proponent is to consider the application of turtle exclusion
Strategy
devices on t he dredge heads if appropriate for the duration of
works.
- The Dredging Contractor is to implement procedural controls to
minimise off-bed suction time if appropriate.
- The length of the campaign should be minimised as far as
practicable.
- The Dredging Contractor will be r equired to check for the
presence of turtles and other marine fauna, particularly within the
path of dredging. Prior to dredging and disposal, the Dredging
Contractor must check for within a 300 metre monitoring zone of
the dredge operation.
- Dredging and disposal activities may only commence if no turtles
2419-011-001-001
Page 94
5-February-2013
have been observed in the monitoring zone.

If turtles are sighted in the monitoring zone, dredging activities
must not commence until after the last turtle is observed to leave
the monitoring zone, or until thirty minutes after the last sighting.
Visual monitoring by trained observer having experience in marine fauna
or a qualified Marine Mammal Observer (MMO).
- In the event of an incident involving turtles, the Dredging
- The TACC will be notified of any turtle incidents and Lanco will
liaise directly with DEWHA and S tate regulatory authorities
regarding the matter.
- Any marine mammal fatality will be reported as per the Marine
mammal sighting Report Form
The crew will be trained in spotting turtles during dredging activities.
-
Monitoring
Reporting
Management
Response
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
10.5.3
Throughout the day time. After 7 weeks of continuous dredging if no

sighting is observed then this is reduced
Proponent
Dredging Contractor
DEC
Rock Fracturing (blasting) on Marine Megafauna: Sub-plan 7
The requirement for rock fracturing (blasting) during development activities will be established
following a detailed geotechnical survey of the dredge footprint. Should rock-fracturing be required,
the following management strategies will be implemented to mitigate the risks to marine megafauna
associated with rock-fracturing activities.
Sub-plan 7: Marine Megafauna
Topic
Marine megafauna co-occurring during rock fracturing (blasting) activities.
Predicted
- No change in the abundance, diversity, geographic distribution or
Outcome
productivity of marine megafauna at species and ecosystem
levels.
distribution of dolphin populations in the environs of the Inner
Harbour and Koombana Bay.
Berth 14A area.
Management
Adopt industry best-practise measures to minimise the risk of harm to
Objective
marine megafauna should rock fracturing (blasting) be required.
Statutory
Requirement or
Regulations (2000).
Guidance
Performance
- No detectable impact of rock fracturing (blasting) activities on
Criteria
marine megafauna populations in the Project area.
- No marine megafauna present within defined exceedance zones
during rock fracturing (blasting) activities.
- No harm or injury to individual marine megafauna due to rock
fracturing (blasting) activities.
Implementation
- Validation of noise modelling will be undertaken as described in
Strategy
Sub-plan 2
- The scheduling of any rock fracturing (blasting) will occur to
minimise interactions with marine megafauna within the modelled
exceedance zones and Inner Harbour. In particular, rock
fracturing (blasting) should be a voided during peak calving
months when dolphins may be more vulnerable to disturbance.
- Should rock fracturing (blasting) be required, a visual observation
program will be implemented to monitor the location of marine
2419-011-001-001
Page 95
5-February-2013
mammals within Koombana Bay and the Inner harbour area.

Marine mammal detection and monitoring is proposed to be
conducted in collaboration with the Bunbury Dolphin Discovery
Centre. Marine mammal observations will occur for approximately
half an hour before (during the period that the last blast-holes are
being charged and the drilling platform is moved off the blast) and
half an hour after the time of each detonation.
No detonation will occur if a m arine mammal is detected within
the modelled Exceedance Zones or the Inner Harbour, and
should be de layed until the animals move, or are moved, out of
the Zone.
Rock fracturing (blasting) should be s cheduled to commence in
locations where impacts on Koombana Bay are minimised due to
shielding by the land mass (i.e. as far inside the proposed berth
pocket as possible).
Careful planning of the rock-fracturing to minimise the size of the
charge. During the initial rock fracturing (blasting) an MIC not
exceeding 28 kg (ANFO equivalent) should be used, with a view
to ramping up t he peak underwater pressure pulse while
monitoring rock fracturing (blasting) pressure levels.
Additional mitigation measures that may be considered to reduce impacts

of rock fracturing (blasting) include:
- Where practicable, use of explosive products with lower
detonation velocities. However, this would require more
explosives to achieve the same blast result.
- Use of detonating caps with built-in time delays, as this effectively
reduces each detonation into a series of small explosions.
- Use of a procedure ("decking the charge") which subdivides the
charge in one blast-hole into a s eries of explosions with drill
patterns restricted to a minimum separation from any other
loaded hole.
- Over drilling the holes to ensure fracturing of the rock.
- Use of gravel (road base) or similar material to stem the blasthole to the seabed level after the charge is in place. Noting that
appropriate confinement of each hole is very important as an
unconfined blast has been shown to have significantly higher
noise levels than the confined equivalent.
- Staggering the detonation for each blast-hole in order to spread
the explosive's total overpressure over time.
- Matching, to the extent possible, the energy needed in the work
effort of the borehole to the rock mass to minimise excess
energy vented into the water column.
- Use of acoustic deterrent devices. The use of acoustic deterrent
devices and or physically removing fauna from an established
exclusion zone should be carefully considered in the context of
their potential impacts (e.g. will these measures result in
additional or equivalent impacts to the works themselves).
Monitoring
2419-011-001-001
It is noted that the assumed design for rock fracturing (blasting)

incorporates some of the above elements, and that any changes from the
assumed design will require further assessment of potential impacts.
Visual Monitoring:
In the event that rock fracturing (blasting) is required, a team of land and
boat-based observers could be based near the perimeter of the
Exceedance Zone and in close proximity to the works. The main task of
the visual observers would be t o perform the visual monitoring of the
exceedance zones around the entrance to the inner harbour and in the
immediate vicinity of the works. This operator will be a qualified Marine
Mammal Observer (MMO).
Page 96
5-February-2013

Passive acoustic monitoring refers to the detection of animals by listening
to the sounds that they make. Passive acoustic monitoring will also be
used to detect visual monitoring methods. While visual monitoring is
subject to the limitation that it can only detect animals at the surface,
passive acoustic monitoring can detect submerged animals if they make
detectable sounds. Marine mammals use underwater sounds to navigate,
feed and communicate. These sounds will be monitored using
hydrophones as part of the passive acoustic monitoring of marine
megafauna.
Reporting
Management
Response
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
The use of these complementary approaches for monitoring marine

mammals will provide the most robust approach for detecting of marine
mammals within the area of interest.
Weekly reporting on the results of the rock fracturing (blasting) activity to
the TACC will occur during the rock fracturing (blasting) program (should
rock fracturing (blasting) be required).
Scheduling of rock fracturing (blasting) to minimise temporal interactions
with dolphins.
Should rock fracturing (blasting) be observed, no detonation to occur
while dolphins are within specified exceedance zones.
Weekly reporting as specified above should rock fracturing (blasting) be
required.
Proponent
Rock Fracturing (blasting) Contractor
DEC
Page 97
5-February-2013
10.6
Benthic Habitats
10.6.1
Benthic Habitats in Koombana Bay: Sub-plan 8
Impact predictions have concluded that benthic habitat community loss is not considered a significant
risk. Benthic habitats within the area of influence from dredging activities are restricted to the northeastern margin of Koombana Bay. These benthic habitats occur on a l imestone reef complex and
predominantly consist of foliose algae, with lower densities of canopy forming algae (Ecklonia
radiata), and low densities of filter feeders (predominantly sponges).
Sub-plan 8: Benthic Habitats in Koombana Bay
Topic
Coastal Benthic Habitats
Predicted Outcome
No loss of benthic habitat due to dredging as outlined in the WA EPAs
EAG No. 3. (this should be the outcome predicted from our studies )
Management
No benthic habitat will be affected by dredging due to remoteness from
Objective
dredge site, background turbidity values and limited plume dispersion.
Statutory
- Western Australian EPAs EAG No. 3 Protection of Benthic
Requirement or
Primary Producer Habitats in Western Australias Marine
Guidance
Environment.
- Western Australian EPAs EAG No. 7 Marine Dredging
Proposals.
Performance
- N/A.
Criteria
Implementation
Prior to dredging:
Strategy
- Determine baseline coverage of benthic communities
occurring in the Project area and potentially affected by
development activities (completed).
- Identify sentinel sites suitable for the monitoring of benthic
habitats during and following the dredge program. These
should include impact and reference sites.
- Delineate zones of high impact, zones of moderate impact and
zones of influence during the dredge program.
Monitoring
During dredging:
- Water and S ediment Quality Monitoring Program includes
stations near to benthic habitat adjacent to the Cut in
Koombana Bay (Figure 48)
Reporting
- N/A.
Management
It is not envisaged that impacts attributable to dredging operations will
Response
be reflected in changes to benthic habitat structure or health. Should
these locations demonstrate impacts, consideration of extended
habitat monitoring would be developed in coordination with the TACC.
Frequency/timing
N/A.
Responsibility/
Proponent
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
Page 98
5-February-2013
2419-011-001-001
Page 99
5-February-2013
2419-011-001-001
Page 100
5-February-2013
10.7
At Sea Placement of Dredge Material
10.7.1
Ocean Placement Activities: Sub-plan 9
Within the dredge footprint, up t o 1.9 M m of sediment will be removed from below sea level and
disposed of in the proposed offshore dredge material placement ground. To minimise the amount of
dredge material required to be disposed on at sea, opportunities for onshore placement and beneficial
use of dredge material have been investigated as outlined in Appendix G of the Sea Dumping Permit
3
Application. Approximately xxxxm of suitable material from the top of the dredge footprint has been
identified as suitable for construction fill in the lanbase facilties for Berth 14A. However, the balance of
the material is composed of silty sand interspersed with clay lenses and is considered unsuitable for
beneficial use such as construction fill or beach nourishment.Sea disposal of dredge material is
required for the balance of the material to be removed from the dredge footprint and the proposed
offshore dredge material placement ground has been selected to minimise impacts on t he
surrounding ecosystem as described in Technical Report 2 Site Selection for Offshore Placement of
Dredge Material. The dredge material placement ground comprises an area of approximately 200 ha.
Impacts to the spoil ground and adjacent areas will be reduced through disposal of the dredge spoil in
such a manner as to uniformly spread it over the spoil ground. This is achieved through deposition
patterns that vary with the prevailing current direction. Uniform distribution of the spoil also maximises
the potential capacity of the disposal area and reduces off-site impacts associated with material
winnowing and mobilisation. More details will be provided in the Sea Dumping Permit Application.
Sub-plan 9: Ocean Placement of dredge material
Topic
Predicted
- Loss of benthic habitat with an average cover of 6.3% from within
Outcome
the proposed dredge material placement ground due to
smothering.
- No loss of benthic habitat from outside the proposed dredge
material placement ground due to placement activities.
Management
- Conformance with Sea Dumping Permit requirements.
Objective
Statutory
- Environment Protection Biodiversity Conservation (EPBC) Act
Requirement or
(1999).
Guidance
- National Assessment Guidelines for Dredging (NADG 2009).
Performance
- Deposition of dredge material at proposed offshore disposal
Criteria
location within boundaries of proposed area.
- Project attributable loss of seagrass beds outside spoil ground
area
Implementation
Prior to Dredging and Dredge Material Placement:
Strategy
- Detailed habitat surveys and modelling of benthic habitats have
been undertaken at proposed offshore disposal location
(completed).
- Greater number of benthic habitat sites surveyed in vicinity of
proposed offshore disposal location to increase certainty in
habitat predictions (completed).
- Clear physical, biological, economic and operational criteria used
to select a s uitable dredge spoil disposal location (refer to
Technical Report 2 - Site Selection and Assessment for Offshore
Placement of Dredge Material).
- Hydrodynamic modelling undertaken to determine the direct and
indirect impacts of disposal activities on be nthic habitats in the
vicinity of the dredge material placement ground (completed).
- Loss assessment undertaken to determine loss of benthic habitat
at proposed dredge material placement ground upon sediment
placement.
- Wave and c urrent generated shear stress acting on dr edge
material following placement calculated (completed).
2419-011-001-001
Page 101
5-February-2013
Monitoring
Reporting
Management
Response
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
Erosion rate of dredge material calculated and when combined

with shear stress will allow determination of re-suspension and
dispersion of dredge material upon placement (completed).
- Bathymetry of proposed dredge material placement ground
determined using LiDAR or multispectral techniques to provide a
baseline bathymetric profile (completed).
During Dredging and Dredge Material Placement:
- Placement of dredge material within the placement ground is
evenly distributed through GPS assisted placement.
- Validation of the extent of dredge plume during the early stages
(within the first month) of placement to ensure predictions of
plume extent are accurate. Monitoring will particularly focus on
validating the extent of the plume to the east (inshore) of the
placement ground as:
i)
Hydrodynamic modelling of disposal activities indicates
the plume is expected to extend furthest in this direction,
and
ii)
Most of the sensitive receptors (including the Binningup
desalination plant and greatest density of benthic
habitats) occur to the east of the placement ground.
- Vessel logs detailing disposal of dredge material to be kept by the
dredging contractor.
- Sonar observations taken during placement activities to ensure
the material is evenly distributed across the placement area
- Placement of dredge material to be conducted by capping the
mound with coarser grain dredge material (PSD as a function of
dredge profile) so as to bury finer grain silt/clay material to
improve long term mound stability
- Minimize the effect on o ther users of the marine environment
during the execution of the work scope.
Following Dredging and Dredge Material Placement:
- Characterisation of bathymetry/biota of dredge mound and
surrounds determined using remote sensing methods.
- Dredge logs to be kept by dredging contractor detailing volume
and proximate composition (sand/silt/clay) of material, location
and time of placement of dredge material within the placement
ground.
- Results of characterisation survey of offshore disposal area to be
communicated to TACC and key stakeholders (e.g. BPA) upon
completion of bathymetric surveys and assessment of spoil
mound cap particle size distribution.
- Routine monthly reports of disposal volumes at dredge material
placement ground provided to the approval agency and TACC.
The placement of the dredge material through pumps on t he Hopper
linked to a vertical pipeline reaching down to the sea bed.
Underwater diffuser can be fitted at lower end of the discharge outlet .
- Monthly reporting of disposal volumes to TACC.
Proponent reporting to approval agency.
Dredging contractor vessel operations and disposal volumes.
DSEWPaC
Page 102
5-February-2013
10.7.2
Transit of Vessels: Sub-plan 10
<HOLD> To be reviewed upon appointment of dredge contractor.

Sub-plan 10: Vessel Transit
Topic
Transit of vessels during development.
Predicted
- No incidents or spills to marine environment
Outcome
- No interactions between vessels and marine megafauna
- No time lost due to human injury
- No restriction of vessel access to Bunbury Port
Management
- Zero HSE Project attributable incidents due to transit of Project
Objective
vessels
- No impedance to planned port activities or shipping movements
without prior agreement/arrangements with Bunbury Port
Statutory
- Workplace Health and Safety Act 2007
Requirement or
- EPBC Act
Guidance
- Lancos HSE contract conditions
Performance
Criteria
vessels during development
- Zero collisions between Project vessels and marine megafauna
during transit or disposal activities.
- Zero environmental incidents due to transit of vessels during
development
- Lanco HSE Policy and regular Review
Implementation
- Dredging operations to be conducted so as to minimize the effect
Strategy
on port operations and port users during the execution of the
work scope.
- Suitable qualified vessel masters will be used at all times.
- Vessel master and crew to maintain adequate lookout for marine
megafauna at all times during vessel transit.
- Vessel master to ensure no marine megafauna are nearby (within
100 metres) during release of dredge material.
- Movement of dredging vessels to be coordinated with the BPA.
- Communications procedure between the proponent and the BPA
to be developed.
- Dredges to keep to designated shipping channels at all times
when within port limits.
- Dredging locations, movement of dredging vessels, dredge log
and schedule to be determined in consultation with the BPA.
- Proponent to issue a notice to mariners to advise port users of
dredging vessel operations within the port.
- Existing designated anchorage areas to be used where
appropriate.
- Dredging and related plant equipment to be maintained and
appropriately calibrated by dredging contractor for optimal
performance
Monitoring
- Lanco to inspect dredging contractor operations.
- Routine (weekly) operations reports to be pr ovided to Lanco by
Reporting
- Vessel logs and incident reporting log to be kept by dredging
contractor.
- Emergency Response Reporting Procedures (ERP) to be
activated as required by BPA
- Routine weekly reports to be provided to the BPA by dredging
contractor.
- Routine monthly updates shall be r eported to the approval
agency and TACC.
- Audit by AMSA representatives.
Management
- Limit speed of the hopper barges especially at bad weather
Response
- Vessel crew to be vigilant and communicate incidents.
2419-011-001-001
Page 103
5-February-2013
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
- Monitoring and assessment as described above.

- Routine reporting in accordance with the CEMP.
Proponent.
Dredging Contractor.
BPA
Page 104
5-February-2013
10.8
Dredging Operations Management
10.8.1
Atmospheric Noise: Sub-plan 11
Sub-plan 11: Atmospheric Noise

Topic
Management of nuisance noise
Predicted
Outcome
Management
- Complaints from noise anomalies due t o dredging activities do
Objective
not exceed 15% of BPA monthly complaints register
Statutory
There is no statutory requirement to include noise generated during
Requirement or
dredging operations in noise modelling. However, recognised best
Guidance
practises will be employed during dredging operations to minimise the
impact of atmospheric noise on nearby land users.
Ships noise standards to be followed.
Performance
- Complaints registered with BPA or Lanco due to noise anomalies
Criteria
due to dredging activities.
Implementation
Atmospheric noise to be managed by the proponents Environmental
Strategy
Management Plan.
- The Dredging Contractor must ensure that all equipment is
optimally maintained and operated in a safe and efficient manner.
- Use of best practise measures for noise minimisation including
low noise engines, noise inhibiting covers; dredging contractor to
ensure all dredge and related plant equipment is calibrated
correctly and properly maintained for optimal environmental
performance.
- Any noise complaints received during dredging will be reported to
the TACC immediately by the Dredging Contractor or Lancos
representative.
- Lanco will investigate the complaint and determine what action
can be taken in the event to minimise impact.
Monitoring
The proponent will maintain a noise complaints log book or register,
recording the time and date of each complaint, the name of the
complainant, the nature of the complaint, the action taken and follow up.
Reporting
- Periodic reports to TACC to include any noise complaints
received and detail all follow up actions taken.
- Noise complaints log to be m ade available to TACC upon
request.
Management
Any noise complaints to be followed up by proponent within 48 hours.
Response
Frequency/timing Whenever it exceeds
Responsibility/
Proponent
Responsible
Dredging contractor
Agency
2419-011-001-001
Page 105
5-February-2013
10.8.2
Introduced Marine Pests: Sub-plan 12
With regards to dredging, the impact of introduced marine pests (IMP) may stem from:
An infested dredge vessel being used at the Port leading to the establishment of a v iable
potentially invasive marine pest population;
Vessel becoming infected at Bunbury and servicing another Port; or
When dredging the dredge footprint, IMP are translocated from the Port to the dredge
material placement ground.
Sub-plan 12: Introduced marine pests (IMP)
Topic
Management of potential IMP.
Predicted
- No additional IMP entering and/or becoming established within
Outcome
the Inner Harbour due to Dredging Project.
Management
- Zero Project attributable introductions of previously undetected
Objective
IMP from the National Monitoring Target Species List (NMTSL).
Statutory
General provisions:
- Fish Resources Management Act 1994 and Fish Resources
Requirement or
Guidance
Management Regulations 1995.
- Australian Ballast Water Management Requirement under
Quarantine Act 1908
- National Introduced Marine Pest Identification System
- Any relevant Ministerial Conditions (including a list of introduced
marine pests) imposed under the Environment Protection Act
1986
- The Code of Practice for Anti-fouling and in-water Hull Cleaning
and Maintenance (ANZECC 1997) (currently under review)
- National Biofouling Management Guidance for Non-trading
Vessels (Commonwealth of Australia 2008).
- Port Authorities Act 1999 and Port Authorities Regulations 2001
- Any Ministerial Conditions imposed under Environment Protection
Act 1986.
- Marine Environmental Management Plan
Performance
- Routine IMP survey conducted by BPA
Criteria
- Compliance with risk assessment protocols for Non-Trading
vessels.
Implementation
Vessel Clearance for IMPs:
Strategy
To achieve clearance (of containing marine species of concern), all nontrading vessels and equipment will undergo a risk assessment prior to
mobilisation based on a format endorsed by the Department of Fisheries
(DoF) and by a DoF approved inspector/certifier.
Risk assessments are required to be submitted to DoF at least 14 days
- Vessels and associated equipment determined to pose an
acceptable level of risk of introducing IMP will be issued with a
vessel movement clearance by DoF.
unacceptable level of risk will be required to provide further
information to DoF within a specified timeframe to determine their
final risk ratings.
Vessels and associated equipment determined to pose an unacceptable
level of risk have various management options to facilitate entry into WA
State waters including, but not limited to the following:
- Biofouling inspection performed by an accredited inspector to
demonstrate to DoF satisfaction the absence of IMP; or
- Hull cleaning followed by a biofouling inspection performed by an
accredited inspector to demonstrate to DoF satisfaction the
absence of IMP; or
- Alternative vessel with an acceptable level of risk be proposed for
entry to WA State waters.
Vessel inspections carried out on all vessels deemed to pose an
2419-011-001-001
Page 106
5-February-2013
unacceptable level of risk will need certification including but limited to the
following:
- There is no significant amounts of consolidated sediment on or
within the vessel or associated equipment;
- Ballast water (if any) has been, or will be, managed according to
the Australian Quarantine and Inspection Service (AQIS) ballast
water requirements;
- No invasive marine species or any other species demonstrating
invasive characteristics, have been identified on or within any
vessel or immersible equipment inspected;
- Any cleaning or treatment activities undertaken to address
invasive marine species risk, has been undertaken to an extent
that the vessel or associated equipment is considered to
represent an acceptable level of risk to the WA marine
environment; and
- Vessel and equipment inspections shall be conducted either;
(a) immediately (no more than 7 days) prior to vessel or
equipment departure for the project area; or
(b) within 48 hours following arrival of vessel or equipment within
the project area.
Ballast Water:
Ballast water management for vessels from international waters shall be
managed in accordance with the Quarantine Act 1908 and Quarantine
Regulations 2000; and AQIS (2011) Australian Ballast Water
Management Requirements. Particularly the implicit mandatory ballast
water management requirements stating that the discharge of high-risk
ballast water in Australian ports or waters is prohibited. Where high risk
waters are considered to be all salt water from ports and coastal waters
outside of Australias territorial sea. Masters must also complete the AQIS
Ballast Water Management Summary (AQIS Form 026).
Monitoring
2419-011-001-001
Domestic vessels must obtain the approval of the Harbour Master prior to
ballast water being discharged within port waters. Such approval may be
granted if acceptable to the DoF.
In the event that IMP or significant amounts of fouling organisms or
sediment (as deemed by an Officer of DoF or accredited biofouling
inspector) are found on a vessel or equipment during any inspection, the
requirements may include but are not limited to the following:
- Notification of relevant agencies: DoF must be notified within 24
hours of any known or suspected marine pest detection in
Western Australian State waters.
- DoF will provide direction and advice on management options for
the introduced marine pest detection.
Potential management options include:
- Movement of vessel and/or equipment offshore to a s pecified
water depth until suitable management options have been
identified;
- Removal of vessel or equipment from water for cleaning;
- Appropriate cleaning at a suitable local haul-out location;
- For internal seawater systems, destruction of the suspected living
biofouling via treatment/s using suitable commercial preparations
(e.g. Rydlyme, Conquest or Quatsan, copper sulphate or boiling
water treatments), plus replacement of any remaining blocked
components; or
- In-water cleaning according to the requirements above.
All of these options would be required within specific timeframes and will
be under the direction of DoF.
If cleaning occurs, a pos t clean inspection performed by an ac credited
inspector will be required for submission to DoF for assessment. If DoF is
Page 107
5-February-2013
satisfied that the level of vessel or equipment hygiene represents an

acceptable level of risk and all conditions have been met, a vessel
movement clearance will be issued by DoF, with specific timeframes for
movements.
Reporting
Management
Response
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
Targeted introduced marine pest monitoring may be required in the

location where introduced marine pest was detected (vessel or equipment
berthed) and may be required in areas associated with the vessels
previous movements, as directed by DoF. This monitoring will be at the
companys cost.
The most recent AFC application certificate OR original receipts or
invoices stating the coating type, the volume purchased, vessel name (if
possible) and date of application
Clearance to be obtained by dredge contractor from DOF for dredge and
related plant equipment entering Bunbury Port. This is to be provided to
Lanco.
Should a marine pest be i dentified on a dredge vessel (or equipment),
following its clearance into Australian waters, the Dredge Contractor of
Lanco would immediately notify the agency responsible for the
management of marine pests in Western Australia, and AQIS. Under this
approach an appropriate course of action would be developed.
Prior to entry in the Bunbury Port.
Proponent/ Dredging Contractor for clearance of vessels and equipment.
DoF and AQIS for positive identification and management direction.
Page 108
5-February-2013
10.8.3
Waste Management: Sub-plan 13
Incorrect handling and storage of waste materials aboard the dredge may result in the introduction of
wastes into the marine environment. A process of waste management, handling and storage is to be
implemented so as to minimise the risk of release of waste to the environment.
Sub-plan 13: Waste management
Topic
Minimise the risk of release of waste to the marine environment.
Predicted
No waste to be introduced into the marine environment from dredging
Outcome
operations.
Management
Objective
Statutory
Requirement or
Guidance
Performance
Criteria
Compliance with regulatory requirements and bes t practice waste

material protocols
onboard of the dredge and related plant and
equipment.
Environmental Protection Act 1986 and Environmental Protection
(Controlled Waste) Regulations 2004
Waste Avoidance and Resource Recovery Act 2007
Protection of the Sea (Prevention of Pollution from Ships) Act 1983
based on MARPOL 73/78.
-
Implementation
Strategy
Monitoring
Reporting
Management
Response
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
All waste materials are handled and stored in a safe and

appropriate manner.
There is no environmental impact on, and disturbance to, the
surrounding marine area from waste.
The dredge is maintained in a clean and tidy manner.
Work areas, including the dredge, shall be kept free of loose litter
at all times.
- Waste materials shall be handled and stored in a safe and
environmentally acceptable manner.
- Any waste transferred off the dredge is to be transported to an
approved landfill site. Should recycling facilities be available, they
will be utilised.
- Under no c ircumstances is any waste to be r eleased into the
marine environment or incinerated.
- Hazardous waste (oils, chemicals, etc) will be retained in secure
containers onboard the dredge and removed to an appr opriate
onshore location for transport and disposal by a licensed
controlled waste carrier.
- Sewage and grey water disposed appropriately
Harbour Master of BPA would make visual inspections
- Implement appropriate management and preventative housekeeping measures to reduce the potential for inappropriate waste
disposal
Throughout the dredging program.
Proponent
Dredging Contractor
BPA
Page 109
5-February-2013
10.8.4
Hazardous Substances Management: Sub-plan 14
The handling, transport and use of hazardous substances, including hydrocarbons such as petrol,
hydraulic fluid and engine oil will be managed to minimise the risk of accidental spillage and
subsequent impact on the marine environment.
Sub-plan 14: Hazardous substances management.
Topic
Minimise the risk of release of hazardous substances into the marine
environment.
Predicted
No hazardous substances to be introduced into the marine environment
Outcome
from dredging operations.
Management
Objective
Statutory
Requirement or
Guidance
Performance
Criteria
Implementation
Strategy
Prevent accidental release, leaks or spills of hazardous

substances, including hydrocarbons, to the surrounding marine
environment.
Rapid and complete response to any accidental release, leaks or
spills of hazardous substances, including hydrocarbons.
MARPOL 73-78: International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution

from Ships 1973
Pollution of the Sea (Prevention of Pollution from Ships) Act 1983
Waters by Oil and Noxious Substances Act 1987
Marine and Harbours Act 1981
Emergency Management Act 2005 and Emergency Management
Regulations 2006
Regulations 1987; Environmental Protection (Unauthorised Discharges)
Regulations 2004
-
No contamination of port waters from hazardous substances.

Preparation, review and readiness of the Dredge Contractors
plans, equipment and crew for response to emergency response.
Storage and Handling:

- Minimum volumes of hazardous substances will be s tored
onboard in accordance with relevant Australian standards
(AS1940:2004).
- Maintain the hazardous substances storage area in a clean, safe
and environmentally acceptable manner.
- MSDSs shall be onboard for all hazardous substances.
- Hazardous substances handling is to be c arried out by suitably
trained personnel only.
Vessel Operations:
- High quality, well maintained hydraulic system components
- Only essential maintenance works in the port are permitted.
- No bilge water will be discharged into the water at any time. This
includes any bilge water treated via oily water separators on
arrival at site, all vessels will have bilge water outlets tagged and
closed. All bilge water will either be contained onboard or
discharged onshore and disposed of via a licensed waste
management contractor.
- Inventories of hydrocarbon and c hemicals on and of f vessels to
ensure no unaccounted for losses (spills)
- Contaminated drainage waters will be contained (eg. diverted to a
sump) or will be cleaned to prevent overboard discharge.
Refuelling:
- Refuelling procedure to be developed,
implemented by the Dredge Contactor.
2419-011-001-001
Page 110
documented
and
5-February-2013
Monitoring
Reporting
Management
Response
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
Undertaken in port at suitable facilities and in accordance with

BPA requirements.
Conducted by experienced personnel, using well maintained
equipment and during daytime and not during adverse weather
conditions (that is, high swell, bad visibility, strong winds).
Spill response:
- Spill response procedures to be developed, documented and
- Any fuel and oil spills within Port limits will be managed in
accordance with BPAs oil spill arrangements and procedures.
- Spill kits will be provided and located in close proximity to storage
and operational areas. Personnel shall be trained in the locations
of the spill kits on the dredge and their use.
- Equipment, including hoses and fuel tanks, will be checked prior
to and during refuelling activities. These checks will be recorded
in the vessel log books and will be made available as requested.
- Regular inspections will be undertaken to ensure that the bilge
outlets have not been opened.
- Record (by photograph and document) and investigate any oil
sheens or water discoloured detected during routine visual
inspections of marine waters nearest to dredging.
- Any environmental incident, including spills and leaks will be
reported to the TACC.
- Routine (weekly) operations reports to be provided to Lanco by
- Any oil spills should be reported to the Department of Transport
and the BPA.
- Apply the spill response procedures developed by the Dredge
Contractor.
Proponent
Dredging Contractor
BPA
Page 111
5-February-2013
10.8.5
Emergency Response: Sub-plan 15
Emergency situations or environmental incidents during the dredging operations have the potential to
result in environmental harm which requires management preparedness and response.
Sub-plan 15: Emergency preparedness and response.
Topic
Minimise the risk of emergency situations
Predicted
No emergency situations throughout the dredging operations.
Outcome
Management
- Identify and reduce the potential for emergency situations or
Objective
environmental incident before it occurs to prevent damage to the
surrounding marine environment.
- Respond quickly and effectively in the event of an emergency or
environmental incident.
Statutory
- MARPOL 73-78: International Convention for the Prevention of
Requirement or
Pollution from Ships 1973
- Pollution of the Sea (Prevention of Pollution from Ships) Act 1983
Guidance
- Waters by Oil and Noxious Substances Act 1987
- Marine and Harbours Act 1981
- Emergency Management Act 2005 and Emergency Management
Regulations 2006
- Environmental Protection Act 1986 and Environmental Protection
Regulations 1987
- Environmental Protection (Unauthorised Discharges) Regulations
2004
Performance
- No contamination of marine waters from an emergency situation
Criteria
or environmental incident.
- Preparation, review and readiness of the Dredge Contractors
Implementation
Emergency response:
Strategy
- Ensure that the potential for environmental incidents is prevented
and reduced by implementation of best practice management
throughout the project.
- Emergency response procedures to be developed, documented
and implemented by the Dredge Contactor in consultation with
Harbour Master of BPA.
- Emergency response equipment will be provided and located in
close proximity to storage and operational areas. Personnel shall
be trained in these locations on the dredge and their use.
- For spill response, see Sub-plan 13: Hazardous Wastes.
Monitoring
Reporting
Management
Response
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
2419-011-001-001
Regular inspections will be undertaken to ensure that equipment

is well maintained.
Record (by photograph and document) and investigate any oil
potential environmental incidents detected during routine visual
Lanco to inspect dredging contractor operations.
Dredging Contractor must also retain a r ecord of the incident,
including details of the date, time, nature of the incident,
immediate action taken, cause of the incident and
reporting/notification taken.
Lanco will be responsible for notifying DSEWPC and the TACC of
environmental incidents.
Apply the spill response procedures developed by the Dredge
Contractor.

Proponent
Page 112
5-February-2013
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
Dredge Contractor
BPA
Page 113
5-February-2013
10.8.6
Maritime Safety: Sub-plan 16
The operation of the dredges will be managed to minimise risk of incursion on port shipping
movements or vessel collision thereby managing the risk of impact to the marine environment.
Sub-plan 16: Maritime safety.
Topic
Minimise the risk of incursion on port shipping movements, vessel
collision or founding.
Predicted
No impact on vessel movements or vessel collisions.
Outcome
Management
- Avoid vessel collisions or unsafe vessel operations.
Objective
- No impedance to planned port operations and shipping
movements without approval from BPA.
Statutory
Requirement or
Guidance
Performance
- No time lost to human injury or vessel access to port.
Criteria
- No incidents or spills to marine environment.
Implementation
- Dredging operations will be conducted, so as to minimise the
Strategy
effect on por t operations and port users and to ensure the safe
work execution.
- Dredge operations will be carefully coordinated with the BPA
including adopting existing procedures.
- In consultation with BPA, Dredge Contractor will advise the
expected dredging locations, shipping routes, dredge log and
schedule and anchoring or berthing locations.
- BPA will issue a Notice to Mariners to advise other port users of
the dredging vessels movements and adjust as conditions
change.
- During shipping movements, will advise incoming/outgoing
vessels of the location and operations of the dredges.
Monitoring
- Notice to Mariners, records of BPA communications including
pilotage certificates.
Reporting
Dredging Contractor to keep vessel logs
Management
Response
Apply the spill response procedures developed by the Proponent

or dredging contractor.
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001

Proponent
Dredge Contractor
BPA
Page 114
5-February-2013
11
References
Australia and New Zealand Environment and Conservation Council (ANZECC) (2000).Australian and
New Zealand Guidelines for Fresh and Marine Water Quality. National Water Quality Management
Strategy Paper No 4, Australian and New Zealand Environment and Conservation Council and
Agriculture and Resource Management Council of Australia and New Zealand, Canberra, Australia.
Barranguet C., Kromkamp J., Peene J. (1998). Factors controlling primary production and
photosynthetic characteristics of intertidal microphytobenthos. Marine Ecology Progress Series 173:
117-126.
Chilvers B. L., Corkeron P. J. and Puotinen M. L. (2003). Influence of trawling on the behaviour and
spatial distribution of Indo-Pacific bottlenose dolphins (Tursiops aduncus) in Moreton Bay, Australia.
Canadian Journal of Zoology 81(12):1947-1955.
Commonwealth of Australia (2009a). National Assessment Guidelines for Dredging. Department of
the Environment, Water, Heritage and the Arts. Commonwealth of Australia, Canberra, Australia.
Commonwealth of Australia (2009b). National Biofouling Management Guidance for Non-trading
Vessels.
Commonwealth of Australia (2009c). National Biofouling Management Guidelines for Commercial
Vessels.
Constantine R. (2001). Increased avoidance of swimmers by wild bottlenose dolphins (Tursiops
truncates) due to long-term exposure to swim-with-dolphin tourism. Marine Mammal Science 17(4):
689-702.
Department of Agriculture, Fisheries and Forestry (DAFF) (2009). Marine Pests. Available from:
http://www.daff.gov.au/animal-plant-health/pests-diseases-weeds/marine-pests (Accessed December,
2011).
Department of the Environment and Heritage (DE&H) (2002). National Ocean Disposal Guidelines for
Dredged Material. Environment Australia, Australian Government.
Department of Fisheries (2009). Introduced Marine Species in Western Australia. Published by
Department of Fisheries, Perth, Western Australia.
Department of Water (DoW) (2007).The Leschenault Estuarine System, South-Western Australia,
Condition Statement and Recommendations for Management.
EPA (2011). Environmental Assessment Guideline for Marine Dredging Proposals. EAG No. 7.
Western Australian Environmental Protection Authority
Evans & Peck (2009).Inner Harbour Expansion Berth 14 Option Study Report. Prepared for
Bunbury Port Authority.
Greenland J. A., Limpus D. J. and Currie K. J. (2002). Queensland Marine Wildlife Stranding and
Mortality Database Annual Report 2001-2002 II. Marine Turtles. Queensland Environmental
Protection Agency. 73pp.
Hall M. A., Alverson D. L. and Metuzals K. I. (2000). By-catch: Problems and solutions. Marine
Pollution Bulletin41(1-6): 204-219.
Harris M. P. and Bode K. G. (1981). Populations of Little Penguins, Short-tailed Shearwaters and
other Seabirds on Phillip Island, Victoria, 1978. Emu 81(1): 20-28.
Jenkins R., Brown R. and Phillips M. (2009). Harbour porpoise (Phocoenaphocoena) conservation
management: A dimensional approach. Marine Policy. 33(5): 744-749.
2419-011-001-001
Page 115
5-February-2013
Jenner K. C. S., Jenner M-N.M. and McCabe K. A. (2001).Geographical and temporal movements of
humpback whales in Western Australian waters. APPEA Journal 41: 749-765.
Kangas M. I. (2000). Synopsis of the biology and exploitation of the blue swimmer crab,
Portunuspelagicus Linnaeus. Fisheries Research Report.
Kennish M. J. (2002). Environmental threats and en vironmental future of estuaries. Environmental
Conservation 29: 78-107.
Laist D. W., Knowlton A. R., Mead J. G., Collet A. S. and Podesta M. (2001). Collisions between ships
and whales. Marine Mammal Science 17(1): 35-75.
Last P. R. and Stevens J. D. (2009).Sharks and R ays of Australia.CSIRO Division of Fisheries.
Melbourne.
McComb A. J., Qui S., Paling E. I., Hill N. A. (2001). Sediments of Leschenault Inlet: A comparison
with other estuaries in southwestern Australia. Journal of the Royal Society of Western Australia. 83:
275-284.
McDonald R. and Isbell R. (2009). In Australian soil and land survey field handbook 3rd edition.
National committee on Soil and Terrain.CSIRO Publishing Melbourne.
McPhee D. P. (2008).Fisheries Management in Australia. Federation Press (Annandale).
Meagher T. D. (1971). Ecology of the Crab PortunuspelagicusI (Crustacea: Portunidae) in South
Western Australia. PhD Thesis, Department of Zoology, University of Western Australia.
Meagher T. D. (1971). Ecology of the Crab Portunus pelagicus (Crustacea: Portunidae) in South
Murdoch University Press Release, November 21 2009. Investigation of eight Bunbury dolphin
deaths. Available from: http://media.murdoch.edu.au/Investigation-of-eight-Bunbury-dolphin-deaths
Potter I. C., Chalmer P. N., Tiivel D. J., Steckis R. A., Platell M. E. and Lenanton R. C. J. (2000). The
fish fauna and finfish fishery of the Leschenault Estuary in south-westen Australia. Journal of the
Royal Society of Western Australia 83: 481-501.
Potter I. C. and de Lestang S. (2000). Biology of the blue swimmer crab Portunus pelagicus in
Leschenault Estuary and Koombana Bay, south-western Australia. Journal of the Royal Society of
Western Australia 83: 443-458.
Public Works Department of Western Australia (PWD) (1978). Bunbury Outer Harbour Siltation
Investigations, Public Works Department of Western Australia, Harbours and Rivers Branch, Coastal
Investigations Section.
Schreiber R. A. and P ennock J. R. (1995). The relative contribution of benthic microalgae to total
microalgal production in a shallow sub-tidal estuarine environment. Ophelia 42: 335-352.
Searle, D.J. and Semeniuk, V. (1985). The natural sectors of the inner Rottnest Shelf coast adjoining
the Swan Coastal Plain. Royal Society of Western Australia. Journal 67(3/4) p116-136.
Shore Coastal (2009). Bunbury Harbour Siltation Investigation. Prepared for Bunbury Port Authority.
SKM (2001).Sediment Assessment Assessment of Shipping Channel Sediment Origin. Prepared for
SKM (2001). Sediment Assessment- Assessment of Shipping Channel Sediment Origin. Prepared by
SKM (2006). Marine Pest Species Survey. Fifth Biennial Surveillance of Bunbury Harbour 2006.
Prepared for Bunbury Port Authority.
2419-011-001-001
Page 116
5-February-2013
SKM (2009). Bunbury Port Authority Invasive Marine Species Survey Part II Winter Survey.
Southall B. L, Bowles A. E., Ellison W. T., Finneran J. J., Gentry R. L., Greene C. R. Jr, Kastak D.,
Ketten D. T., Miller J. H., Nachtigall P. E., Richardson W. J., Thomas J. A., Tyack P. L. (2007). Marine
Mammal Noise Exposure Criteria: Initial Scientific Recommendations. Aquatic Mammals 33(4): 411414.
Sundbck K., Miles A., and Gransson E. (2000). Nitrogen fluxes, denitrification and the role of
nucrophytobenthos in microtidal shallow-water sediments: an annual study. Marine Ecology Progress
Series 200: 59-76.
Vanderlaan A. S. M. and Taggart C. T. (2007). Vessel collisions with whales: The probability of lethal
injury based on vessel speed. Marine Mammal Science 23(1):144-156.
Weilgart L. S. (2007). The impacts of anthropogenic noise on cetaceans and implications for
management. Marine Mammal Science 85(11):1091-1116.
WML Consultants (2009). Proposed Berth 14, Bunbury Port- Site Investigation. Prepared for Bunbury
Port Authority.
2419-011-001-001
Page 117
5-February-2013
Appendix 1
<HOLD> Summary table of key trigger values.
2419-011-001-001
Page 118
5-February-2013
Appendix E
Air quality memo (March 2013), Air quality assessment (February
2013)
Advanced Environmental Dynamics

Specialist Consultants
_____________________________________________________________________________
Memorandum
To:
Adam Parker (PB)
From:
Darlene Heuff (AED)
Date:
13 March 2013
Subject:
Response to DEC Comments Air Quality
AED has prepared the following response to comments raised by DEC in relation to the air quality
assessment undertaken in support of the PER prepared for the Berth 14 Expansion and Coal
Storage and Loading Facility project.
Comment 1: The use of 30th highest day is not an acceptable statistic. The explanation by the
proponent is not satisfactory;
Response to Comment 1:
In order to move forward with the PER, we have prepared and included in this memo results for the
maximum predicted 24-hour average concentrations of PM10, TSP, and PM2.5 in contrast to the
results of the calibrated dispersion model which was based on the 30th highest 24-hour average
(PER air quality technical report).
Presented in Table 1 (of this memo) is a summary of results at receptor locations for the Existing
Environment scenario. In contrast to Table 11 of the PER air quality technical report, the results
presented below are for the maximum 24-hour average concentrations of TSP, PM10 and PM2.5
th
(based on 6 years of meteorology) as opposed to the 30 highest 24-hour average concentration
that was presented in Table 11 of the technical report.
Also included below as Table 2, is a reproduction of part of Table 8 of the PER air quality technical
report which contains the percentiles of the 24-hour average concentration of TSP and PM10 based
on monitoring data from the BPA monitoring network. The maximum (or 100th percentile values) are
highlighted in blue text within this table.
A comparison of results from the dispersion modelling (Table 1) and the 100th percentile 24-hour
concentrations from the monitoring data (Table 2) highlights the over-prediction of ground-level
impacts by the dispersion modelling.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Advanced Environmental Dynamics Pty Ltd (ACN 147 226 060)
The Trustee for AED Trust (ABN: 68 934 621 946)
PO Box 266, Ferny Hills, QLD, 4055
Email: enquiries@aedconsultants.com.au
www.aedconsultants.com.au
1
Memorandum: Response to DEC Comments Air Quality

To: Adam Parker (PB)
Date: 13 March 2013
_____________________________________________________________________________
Pollutant
TSP(1,2)
PM10
Beacon 10
Naval
Cadets
Bunbury
BoM
Beacon 3
South
Bunbury
Dolphin
Centre
Workshop
Stirling
Street
Estuary
Drive
Existing Environment: Summary of Results at Receptor Locations, 2005

through 2010. (Units: g/m3 and mg/m2/day) (Compare with Table 11 of the
PER Air Quality Technical Report)
Averaging
Period
Table 1:
24-hour
1
136.7
2
194.9
3
124.1
4
264.5
5
40.5
6
69.0
7
34.0
8
119.6
9
342.1
(1,2)
24-hour
83.9
127.6
78.6
175.6
32.7
49.2
27.4
82.7
222.8
(1,2)
24-hour
29.2
39.0
28.7
56.0
18.9
23.4
18.1
32.7
66.4
PM2.5
Note (1): Maximum Presented

Note (2): Includes background estimates
Note (3): Bold indicates exceedence of the relevant project goal
Table 2:
Monitoring Data: Summary of 24-Hour Average Concentration of TSP and

PM10 for the Period 01/07/08 through 31/12/10(1) (g/m3) (Source: Table 8 of the
PER Air Quality Technical Report)
Stirling Street
TSP
Stirling Street
PM10
Estuary Drive
PM10
Workshop
PM10
Naval Cadet
PM10
100
88.5
57.2
93.5
60.3
87.1
95
40.5
30.7
34.6
29.9
35.4
90
34.8
26.3
28.6
26.3
32.0
85
31.8
24.3
25.6
24.1
29.3
80
29.7
23.0
23.0
21.9
26.7
Percentile
Included in Figure 1 through Figure 3 (below) are contour plots for the maximum 24-hour average
concentration of PM10, TSP and PM2.5, respectively for the Existing Environment scenario.
Based on the monitoring data that was available for this assessment, we do not believe that the
results presented in these figures nor in Table 1 of this memo, are an accurate representation of the
actual impact of emissions of dust from existing port-related activities as these model results are
not supported by the monitoring data. Details of the model calibration that was applied in order to
develop a more realistic representation of the existing air quality environment was presented in
Appendix G of the PER air quality technical report.
_____________________________________________________________________________
2

Date: 13 March 2013
_____________________________________________________________________________
Figure 1:
Existing (Upper) and Future (Lower) Environments (based on Project

Scenario A): The 24-Hour Average Ground-Level Concentration of PM10
based on Six Years of Meteorology.
Notes: Includes a background estimate of 21.2 g/m3

3
The Cumulative Ambient Air Quality Goal is 50 g/m
The area that exceeds the project goal is indicated in the figure as the red dotted area.
3
Contours levels are: 25, 30, 40, and 50 g/m
_____________________________________________________________________________
3

Date: 13 March 2013
_____________________________________________________________________________
Figure 2:

Scenario A): The Maximum 24-Hour Average Ground-Level
Concentration of TSP based on Six Years of Meteorology.
Notes: Includes a background estimate of 26.2 g/m3.

3
The Cumulative Ambient Air Quality Goal is 90 g/m .
3
_____________________________________________________________________________
4

Date: 13 March 2013
_____________________________________________________________________________
Figure 3:

Scenario A): The Maximum 24-Hour Average Ground-Level
Concentration of PM2.5 based on Six Years of Meteorology.
Notes: Includes a background estimate of 16.9 g/m3.

The Cumulative Ambient Air Quality Goal is 25 g/m3.
3
Contours levels are: 18, 20 , and 25 g/m
_____________________________________________________________________________
5

Date: 13 March 2013
_____________________________________________________________________________
Comment 3: This does not appear to have been answered in the response to submissions;
It is not clear to us what the question is referring to. However, we understand that to date,
numerous attempts to seek clarification from the regulators has been unsuccessful.
Nonetheless, we refer to the questioner to the following sources of information which will hopeful
address any outstanding issues in relation to model results and observational data:
Results for the 24 hour maximum concentration of TSP, PM10 and PM2.5 presented in response
to Comment 1 (of this memo).
PER air quality technical report Section 3: Existing Environment
PER air quality technical appendices:

-
Appendix A: Analysis of Ambient Air Data
Appendix G: Dispersion Model Validation for the Period 01/07/08 through 31/12/10.
Appendix H: Existing Environment Results for PM10
Comment 4: The original intent of this recommendation was for the proponent to assess
cumulative impacts this is a standard requirement for air quality assessments. The proponents
response does not clearly address this issue. The cumulative impacts of this proposal need to be
addressed, and hence whether the proposal will have a significant contribution to cumulative
impacts. The response provided has not adequately addressed this issue.
Cumulative impacts were assessed in Section 5 of the PER air quality technical report (Future
Environment).
Revised plots for the Future Environment (i.e. cumulative impacts) scenario (for Project Scenario A)
based on the maximum predicted 24-hour average concentration of PM10, TSP and PM2.5 were
included in Figure 1 through Figure 3 above.
Note also that the relative contribution of the project to existing levels of dust was presented in
Table 16 (Project Scenario A) and Table 18 (Project Scenario B) of the PER air quality technical
report. As the relative contribution of project impacts will be even less than was presented in these
tables for an Existing Environment scenario based on the maximum predicted 24-hour average
concentration as opposed to the 30th highest, these tables have not been updated here.
_____________________________________________________________________________
6

___________________________________________________________________________
Bunbury Port Berth 14 Expansion

and
Coal Storage and Loading Facility
(Assessment No. 1886)
Technical Report 9: Air Quality- Dust
Emissions
PROJECT # 901001
Prepared for:
Parsons Brinckerhoff
On Behalf of:
Lanco Resources Australia
Pty Ltd
503 Murray Street

Perth, Western Australia
C/- GPO G474

4 October 2012
__________________________________________________________________________
Technical Report 9: Bunbury Port Berth 14 Expansion Coal Storage and Loading Facility
Prepared For: Parsons Brinckerhoff
Date: October 26, 2012
___________________________________________________________________________
Tel: +61 400 661 182
Client
Clients Representative
Adam Parker
Client Address
305 Murray Street, Perth, Western Australia, 6000
Project Title
Project / Report Number
Bunbury Port Berth 14 Expansion and Coal Storage

and Loading Facility - Air Quality- Dust Emissions
901001
Authors
Date
Dr Darlene Heuff
26 October 2012
Mr Bipin Bhensdadia
Approved By
Dr Darlene Heuff, Principal Scientist

Revision
Description
Date
0
1
2
3
4
5
Draft Report
Draft Report
Final Report
Final Report v2
Final Report v3
Final Report v4
11/10/2011
12/10/2011
18/11/2011
13/04/2012
09/05/2012
04/10/2012
Key Words
Classification
Air Quality, Port, Coal Terminal
Proprietary
__________________________________________________________________________
Technical Report 9: Bunbury Port Berth 14 Expansion and Coal Loading and Storage Facility
__________________________________________________________________________
Table of Contents
Abbreviations ............................................................................................................................. vi
Units .......................................................................................................................................... vii
1.
2.
3.
Introduction ..........................................................................................................................1
1.1
Project Description ......................................................................................................1
1.2
Study-Specific Limitations...........................................................................................3
Area of Interest ....................................................................................................................4

2.1
Bunbury Port Current Operations ...............................................................................5
2.2
Project-Specific Material Handling ..............................................................................5
2.3
Dust Emission Sources and Engineering Controls .....................................................7
Existing Environment ...........................................................................................................9

3.1
3.1.1
National Legislation ............................................................................................. 10
3.1.2
Western Australian Legislation ............................................................................ 10
3.1.3
New South Wales ................................................................................................ 10
3.1.4
Summary of Project Goals ................................................................................... 11
3.2
Regional Environment and Sensitive Receptor Locations ...................................... 11
3.3
Ambient Air Monitoring Data .................................................................................... 13
3.4
Estimates of Background Levels ............................................................................. 14
3.5
Dust Emission Sources Associated with Existing Activities .................................... 15
3.6
Site-Based Dust Emissions Inventory ..................................................................... 15
3.7
Dispersion Modelling ............................................................................................... 17
3.8
Description of the Current Air Quality Environment ................................................. 18
3.8.1
4.
5.
Regulatory Framework ............................................................................................ 10
Worst-Case Meteorological Conditions ............................................................... 21
Project-Only Impacts ........................................................................................................ 27

4.1
Construction Phase ................................................................................................. 27
4.2
Operational Phase ................................................................................................... 28
4.2.1
Emissions Inventory............................................................................................. 28
4.2.2
Results of the Dispersion Modelling .................................................................... 31
The Future Environment ................................................................................................... 39
__________________________________________________________________________
ii
__________________________________________________________________________
6.
Summary and Recommendations .................................................................................... 45
7.
References ....................................................................................................................... 48
8.
Document Limitations ....................................................................................................... 50
Tables
Table 1:
Key Components of the Proposed Development .. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 2:
Current berth facilities at the Port of Bunbury.........................................................5
Table 3:
Ambient Air Quality NEPM Standards and Goals (2003) .................................... 10
Table 4:
Kwinana EPP Standards and Limits for TSP (1999) ........................................... 10
Table 5:
NSW DECCW Criteria for Dust Deposition (NSW Department of Environment

and Conservation, 2005) ..................................................................................... 11
Table 6:
Project-Adopted Cumulative Ambient Air Quality Goals ..................................... 11
Table 7:
Summary of Sensitive Receptor Locations (refer to Figure 3) ............................ 12
Table 8:
Summary of 24-Hour Average Concentration of TSP and PM10 for the Period
(1)
3
01/07/08 through 31/12/10 (g/m ) .................................................................. 13
Table 9:
Summary of Imports (I) and Exports (E) of Materials through the Port, 1/1/05
through 31/12/10 (tonnes) (summarised from BPA 2011). ................................. 15
Table 10:
Summary of the 24-Hour Average Ground-Level Concentration of PM110 at

3
Receptor Locations. Background of 21.2 g/m is Included. .............................. 19
Table 11:
Existing Environment: Summary of Results at Receptor Locations, 2005 through

3
2
2010. (Units: g/m and mg/m /day) ................................................................... 21
Table 12
Emission Factors and Applied Controls ............................................................... 30
Table 13
Emissions Inventory for Project Related Dust Emission Sources based on

Scenario A ........................................................................................................... 30
Table 14

Scenario B ........................................................................................................... 31
Table 15:
Project Only Impacts Scenario A: Summary of Results at Receptor Locations,

3
2
2005 through 2010. No Background Included. (Units: g/m and mg/m /day) ... 32
Table 16:
Scenario A: Percentage Increase in Existing Levels of Dust Based on Maximum

Project Contribution. ............................................................................................ 32
Table 17:
Project Only Impacts Scenario B: Summary of Results at Receptor Locations,

3
2
2005 through 2010. No Background Included. (Units: g/m and mg/m /day) ... 33
Table 18:
Scenario B: Percentage Increase in Existing Levels of Dust Based on Maximum

Project Contribution. ............................................................................................ 33
__________________________________________________________________________
iii
__________________________________________________________________________
Figures
Figure 1:
Locality plan of the Port of Bunbury including Harbour Layout (Berth Locations
Indicative Only). .....................................................................................................4
Figure 2:
Infrastructure Layout ...............................................................................................7
Figure 3:
Sensitive Receptor Locations .............................................................................. 12
Figure 4:
Export of Material through the Port (kg), 2005-2010. .......................................... 16
Figure 5:
Import of Material through the Port (kg), 2005-2010. .......................................... 16
Figure 6:
Existing Environment: The 5

Highest 24-Hour Average Ground-Level
3
Concentration of PM10 including a Background Estimate of 21.2 g/m . The
3
Project Goal is 50 g/m . Years 2005-2010........................................................ 19
Figure 7:
Existing Environment: Most Affected Area. ......................................................... 20
Figure 8:
Existing Environment: The 30 Highest 24-Hour Average Ground-Level

Concentration of TSP based on Six Years of Meteorology. ............................... 22
Figure 9:
Existing Environment: The 30th Highest 24-Hour Average Ground-Level

Concentration of PM10 based on Six Years of Meteorology. .............................. 23
Figure 10:

Concentration of PM2.5 based on Six Years of Meteorology. .............................. 24
Figure 11:
Existing Environment: The Maximum Annual Average Ground-Level

Figure 12:
Existing Environment: Maximum Monthly Dust Deposition based on Six Years of

Meteorology. ....................................................................................................... 26
Figure 13:
Dust Emission Sources used in the Dispersion Modelling. ................................. 29
Figure 14:
Project-Only Scenario A: Maximum 24-Hour Average Ground-Level

Concentration of TSP based on Six Years of Meteorology. ............................... 34
Figure 15:
Project-Only Scenario A: The Maximum 24-Hour Average Ground-Level

Concentration of PM10 based on Six Years of Meteorology. .............................. 35
Figure 16:
Project-Only Scenario A: The Maximum 24-Hour Average Ground-Level

Figure 17:
Project-Only Scenario A: The Maximum Annual Average Ground-Level

Figure 18:
Project-Only Scenario A: Maximum Monthly Dust Deposition based on Six Years

of Meteorology. ................................................................................................... 38
Figure 19:
Existing (Upper) and Future (Lower) Environments (based on Project Scenario

A): The 24-Hour Average Ground-Level Concentration of PM10 based on Six
Years of Meteorology. ......................................................................................... 40
th
th
__________________________________________________________________________
iv
__________________________________________________________________________
Figure 20:

A): The 24-Hour Average Ground-Level Concentration of TSP based on Six
Figure 21:

A): The 24-Hour Average Ground-Level Concentration of PM2.5 based on Six
Figure 22:

A): The Maximum Annual Average Ground-Level Concentration of PM2.5 based
on Six Years of Meteorology. .............................................................................. 43
Figure 23:

A): Maximum Monthly Dust Deposition based on Six Years of Meteorology. .... 44
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
Abbreviations
%
Percentage
AED
Advanced Environmental Dynamics Pty Ltd
B1
Berth 1
B2
Berth 2
B3
Berth 3
B4
Berth 4
B5
Berth 5
B6
Berth 6
B8
Berth 8
BoM
Australian Bureau of Meteorology
BPA
c.
Circa, approximately
CSIRO
Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organisation
dep
Deposition
Exports
EETM
Emission estimation technique manual
EF
Emission Factor
EPA
Environmental Protection Agency
EPP
Environmental Protection Policy
EPP(Air)
Environmental Protection (Air) Policy 2008
ESA
European Space Agency
FEL
Front end loader
imports
Lanco
LANCO Resources Australia Pty Ltd
MODIS
Moderate-resolution Imaging Spectroradiometer
NASA
National Aeronautics and Space Administration
NEPC
National Environment Protection Council
NEPM
National Environment Protection Measure
NSW
New South Wales
NSW DECCW
New South Wales

and Water
Obs
Observational data
PB
PER
Port
Bunbury Port
Department of Environment, Climate Change
__________________________________________________________________________
vi
__________________________________________________________________________
PM10
Particulate matter less than 10 micrometres in diameter
PM2.5
Particulate matter less than 2.5 micrometres in diameter
SKM
Sinclair Knight Merz
SRTM
Shuttle Radar Topography Mission
TAPM
The Air Pollution Model
TEOM
Tapered element oscillating microbalance
TPM
Total particulate matter
TSP
Total suspend particulates
WD
Wind direction
WS
Wind speed
WSD
Wind Speed Dependent
SECTION BREAK FOLLOWS
Units
C
Degrees Celsius
2
g/m /s
Gram per square meter per month
g/s
Gram per second
Degrees kelvin
Kg
Kilograms
Kg/t
Kilogram per tonne
Kg/year
Kilograms per year
km
kilometre
metre
m/s
Metres per second
g
g/m
ppm
Micrograms
3
Micrograms per cubic metre

Parts per million
__________________________________________________________________________
vii
Technical Report 9: Bunbury Port Berth 14 Expansion Coal Storage and Loading Facility
___________________________________________________________________________
1.
Introduction
Lanco Resources Australia Pty Ltd (Lanco) is undertaking field investigations for the
development of a coal export facility at Berth 14, located within the Port of Bunbury Inner
Harbour, Western Australia. The proposal includes capital dredging, involving both marine
and land based footprints to complete the marine elements of the development. This
document was prepared by Advanced Environmental Dynamics Pty Ltd (AED) who was
commissioned by Wave Solutions to undertake an air quality assessment of the Bunbury Port
Berth 14 development for Lanco.
This air quality assessment has been undertaken in support of the Berth 14 Expansion and
Coal Storage and Loading Facility Public Environmental Review (PER) Document in
accordance with the Environmental Scoping Document (Assessment No. 1886) (PER
Appendix B).
1.1
Project Description
As noted in Section 1 of the PER Document, the Project is for the construction and operation
of Berth 14A within the inner harbour of Bunbury Port to facilitate the export of up to 15 million
tonnes of coal per annum. The Bunbury Port is an existing operating harbour and the
proposal is consistent with the Bunbury Port Authoritys IHSP (TME 2009).
The Project supports the export of coal from the proposed expansion of the Griffin Coal
operations in the Collie Basin through the Project.
In order to process this increased volume of coal, new transport facilities, a handling plant and
berthing arrangements are required at Bunbury Port to mobilise the coal from the mine to the
ship. This PER only assesses the works associated with the Port, a separate assessment will
be undertaken for works associated with the mine expansion and the upgrade of the existing
rail line from Collie to Bunbury Port.
The works assessed in this PER include the coal handling facility including a new rail loop,
two enclosed stockpile sheds, conveyor systems, ship loading facilities and a new berth. It is
proposed that the new rail loop would allow the delivery of coal-loaded wagons to be
unloaded and then return empty to the mine to be re-loaded again.
To increase flexibility and maintain efficiency, the coal handling facility is designed to receive
coal by rail and unload either directly to a berthed ship or to the enclosed stockpile sheds. It is
proposed that the enclosed sheds will allow up to a six day supply of stockpiled coal. The
stockpiled coal would act as a buffer between the unloading and loading processes to ensure
a waiting ship is loaded as quickly as possible, as well as allowing train unloading to proceed
if a ship is not available.
The dredging of Berth 14 and its approach is necessary to provide sufficient space to allow
bulk carriers to enter and depart the new berth. Dredging works includes both marine and
terrestrial footprints that may include some rock fracturing in limited areas. Construction also
requires construction of wharf facility and armoured slope protection at the entrance of the
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
basin and other open areas with suitable local materials. The key characteristics of the
proposed works are identified in Table 1.
Table 1:
Key Components of the Proposed Development
Marine Components
Description
Berth pocket dredged to -12.7m Chart Datum (CD) to accommodate
Panamax sized vessels.
Berth pocket
Associated approach navigational area dredged up to 12.2mCD.

Dredged berth pocket of approximately 10ha, including both terrestrial
and marine areas.
Dredging
Capital
Maintenance
Dredge volume of up to 2.7 million cubic metres (m ). Underwater rock

3
fracturing may be required to remove up to approximately 20,000 m of
rock.
Required approximately every 2- 3 years. To be carried out by BPA.
Final dredging quantities will be determined as the final designs for Berth
14 are prepared.
Spoil disposal
The offshore spoil disposal site has been identified to occur in

Commonwealth waters, and as such does not form part of this
assessment.
Suitability of this site, as well as the disposal of spoil, will be assessed by
the Commonwealth Department of Sustainability, Environment, Water,
Populations and Communities (DSEWPaC) under the Commonwealth
Environmental Protection (Sea Dumping) Act 1981.
Berth structure
Likely to be piled structure, in addition to armoured slope protection at the

entrance of the basin and other open areas with suitable local materials.
Terrestrial components
Description
Material handling
infrastructure
Train unloader, conveyors, stackers, coal storage facility and ship loading
equipment.
Rail
New rail loop and unloading station within the site boundary (refer to
Figure 1.1) to the north west of the Preston River.
Throughput
15 Million tonnes per annum.
Construction period
Water requirements
Still to be determined during the detailed design for the Berth14.
Vegetation loss
Approximately 2ha of native vegetation. Additional vegetation would be

lost however this is either highly disturbed or planted.
Terrestrial ground
disturbance
Approximately 30ha.
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
1.2
Study-Specific Limitations
Complex studies such as the one undertaken here for the assessment of the Berth 14
Expansion Project rely on the accuracy of a wide range of information sources including
regulatory agencies, the public domain, and the client. Invariably assumptions are required to
be made based on consideration of project related information, other relevant assessments
that may have been undertaken and the experience of the assessment team. Every
reasonable effort is made to ensure that the standard of this assessment meets and/or
exceeds the requirements of the relevant Regulators and stakeholders. Nonetheless, in
addition to the general limitations outlined in Section 8 of this report, study-specific limitations
include (but may not be limited to) the following:
The accuracy, completeness and representativeness of third-party supplied data sets
including (but not limited to):
Meteorological data obtained from the Bunbury Port Authority.
Meteorological data obtained from the Australian Bureau of Meteorology.
Terrain Data: 3-arc second (90m) spaced elevation data obtained via NASAs Shuttle
Radar Topography Mission (SRTM) in 2000.
Land Use data: 300 m resolution Globcover land cover map (ESA, 2010).
The accuracy of information contained in the following documents that have been relied upon
quite heavily for information pertaining to current port activities and associated emission rates:
Air Assessments (2009): Bunbury Port Dust Buffer Assessment. Prepared for the Bunbury
Port Authority. March 2009.
Sinclair Knight Merz (2006): Bunbury Port Dust Modelling. Draft report. 5 July 2006.
Report to Bunbury Port Authority.
The completeness, accuracy and representativeness of Client-supplied information including
(but not limited to):
Infrastructure layout.
Project details such as volumes, throughputs etc.
Dust extraction efficiencies.
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
2. Area of Interest
The City of Bunbury is located approximately 150 km south of Perth, Western Australia
(Inset Figure 1) with a population of c. 67,500 (2011) and has a rich maritime heritage. The
resources sector forms an important part of the area, with materials transported from the
Collie Basin and exported to national and international markets.
The Port of Bunbury is located in Koombana Bay on the south western coast of Western
Australia and is operated by the Bunbury Port Authority. Sandy beaches extend along the
coast to the north and south of the Port. The Leschenault Estuary is located to the north east
of the Port and a remnant of the estuary (the Leschenault Inlet) is located to the southwest.
Both of these water bodies are connected to Koombana Bay via man made channels. These
features are shown on the locality plan below (Figure 1).
Figure 1:
Locality plan of the Port of Bunbury including Harbour Layout (Berth

Locations Indicative Only).
B2 B1
B14
B3 B5
B4 B6 B8
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
2.1
Bunbury Port Current Operations
The Bunbury Port is divided into two primary commercial areas; the Outer Harbour and the
Inner Harbour. The port has seven berths totalling 1,485 m in length that are capable of
handling ships with an overall draft of up to 11.6 m in the Inner Harbour. The current berth
facilities at the port are summarised in Table 2.
The major products imported through the port are caustic soda, methanol, vegetable oils,
phosphate and potash, and petroleum coke. The products exported are alumina, aluminium
hydroxide, mineral sands, silica sands, silicon dross, spodumene (lithium based mineral) and
woodchips. Mineral sands include ilmenite, rutile and leucoxene (containing titanium),
xenotime and monazite (containing rare earth metals) and industrial minerals zircon, kyanite
and garnet.
Of particular interest to this assessment is the material handling of alumina, mineral sands,
woodchips, silica sands and spodumene.
Table 2:
Berth
Current berth facilities at the Port of Bunbury

Location
Berth Facilities
Berth 1
Outer harbour
Primarily export of mineral sands.
Berth 2
Outer harbour
General purpose berth equipped with facilities for discharging methanol

from tankers.
Berth 3
Inner harbour
Berth 4
Inner harbour
Berth 5
Inner harbour
General purpose berth with mobile road hoppers for loading of mineral
sands, silica sand and silicon dross. As well as bulk discharge of
petroleum coke, phosphate and potash, and vegetable oils.
Berth 6
Inner harbour
Specialised bulk alumina loading and discharging of bulk caustic soda.
Berth 8
Inner harbour
General purpose berth with ship loader connected to bulk storage shed
and road hoppers for loading of woodchips, aluminium hydroxide, mineral
sands, silica sand and spodumene. As well as discharging of phosphate
and potash, and vegetable oils.
2.2
Project-Specific Material Handling
As previously noted, Lanco is proposing to transport coal via trains from the Collie Basin to
the train unloading facility on a proposed new rail loop to the north of the existing rail lines
adjacent to berths 4, 6 and 8 (Figure 2). Trains will be unloaded within a partially enclosed
shed utilising a bottom dumping system to an under-ground hopper and conveyor system. A
fully enclosed conveyor surfaces to the west of the train unloading facility and joins a central,
fully enclosed main transfer station which is also proposed to include dust extraction.
From the main transfer station coal can be directed to either of the two primary coal storage
sheds where it is noted that the two longer sheds (Shed 2 and Shed 3, Figure 2) form part of
the current proposal while the third (smaller) shed (Shed 1, Figure 2) is included for
demonstration of capability but will be built by a third party and is not subject to this approval.
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
Coal that is being unloaded from the train can be diverted directly to ship load out via a fully
enclosed conveyor system which runs between the two large coal storage sheds. Coal can
also be diverted to ship load out via a fully enclosed conveyor that passes through the larger
sheds but bypasses the coal stacking and reclaiming system that is housed within the sheds.
Alternatively, depending on train unloading and ship loading schedules, coal can be directed
through the main transfer point to the track hopper for stacking in either or both of the two
main coal storage sheds simultaneously.
There are proposed to be two scraper reclaimers per storage shed which will reclaim coal on
an as need basis for transport via enclosed conveyor to ship load out. These too can operate
simultaneously. Water sprays will form part of the dust mitigation measures that are
implemented within the sheds.
AED understands that it is Lancos preference to bypass the stacker/reclaimer system as
frequently as operationally practicable in order to minimise demand on the infrastructure. This
strategy has the added environmental benefit of reducing dust emissions that will be
generated within the sheds during the stacking and reclaiming processes of which a very
small fraction will potentially be released through the ventilation outlets of the sheds dust
extraction system. These dust extractors will have a target efficiency of greater than 99%.
In consideration of the nature and type of air pollutants that will be emitted during the
operation of the proposed Berth 14 facility, the primary air pollutant of stakeholder expressed
concern is dust. The assurance of continuing compliance with ambient air quality objectives
and concerns relating to potential increased dust deposition has been raised to-date during
the preliminary public consultation process.
In particular, for this assessment we will consider the following:
Particulate matter with an aerodynamic diameter less than 10 microns (PM10).
Particulate matter with an aerodynamic diameter less than 2.5 microns (PM2.5).
Total suspended particulate matter (TSP) which includes both the coarse fraction of
suspended dust matter as well as the finer fractions PM10 and PM2.5.
Dust deposition as it pertains to nuisance.
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
Figure 2:
2.3
Infrastructure Layout
Dust Emission Sources and Engineering Controls
Based on the description of material flow from train unloading to ship loading described in the
previous section, the dust generating activities associated with the transport of coal through
Berth 14 include:
Train unloading;
Conveying of material;
Conveyor transfer points;
Stacking of stockpiles;
Reclaiming of product coal from stockpiles; and
Loading of product coal into ships.
Engineer measures that will be incorporated into the design of the infrastructure as they relate
to the management of dust include (but may not be limited to):
Fully enclosed conveyors;
Fully enclosed transfer points;
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
Dust extraction on the main shed feeder transfer station;
Dust extraction system on storage sheds;
Telescopic chute and water sprays at ship load out;
Water sprays in the storage sheds;
Partially enclosed train unloading facility with dust extraction associated with the bottom
dump hopper system.
When compared with other coal terminals throughout Australia, the level of dust mitigation
engineering that has been included in this proposal is considered to be representative of
current industry best-practice technology. The enclosing of stockpiles, conveyors and transfer
points eliminates a significant portion of the potential fugitive dust emissions from entering the
airshed. The dust extraction systems proposed for the train unloading facility, the sheds and
the central transfer station additionally reduces the risk of fugitive emissions.
Based on the nature and extent of the proposed dust mitigation measures, the key dust
emission sources during operations is likely to be associated with ship load-out and
potentially a minor amount of fugitive emission associated with the partially enclosed train
unloading facility.
That noted however, based on current technologies for telescopic chutes (ship loading), the
high moisture content (14%) and low silt content (less than 1.5%) of the product coal, and the
strict adherence to operational procedures, the anticipated level of risk of the release of
fugitive coal emissions from the proposed project is considered low.
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
3.
A description of the existing air quality environment has been developed using a combination
of ambient air monitoring data and the explicit modelling of dust generating activities at the
port.
Within this chapter, project goals are defined based on the consideration of national and state
ambient air quality standards, goals, and criteria.
Dust emission sources associated with current activities at the port are identified and
estimates of dust emissions are undertaken for two scenarios:
Scenario 1: This scenario represents as far as practicable, actual port activities during the
period 01/07/08 through 31/12/10. Model predictions from this scenario have been used
in a model validation exercise through which was determined a suitable reporting
percentile for the model predicted 24-hour average concentrations of TSP and PM 10.
Scenario 2: A worst-case year of port activities was developed based on a review of

actual port volumes for each of the materials of interest. This worst-case year of activities
is then simulated using six years of developed meteorology in order to assess the impact
of variations in meteorology that can occur from year to year. The choice of years (20052010) corresponded to that used in the MODIS analysis (Technical Report 3) and
corresponds to high and low energy years.
In order to provide estimates of current dust levels associated with TSP, PM 10 and dust
deposition, dispersion modelling has been conducted using a combination of The Air Pollution
Model (TAPM) developed by the Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research
Organisation (CSIRO) and the US EPA approved CALMET/CALPUFF (SRC, 2011) modelling
system.
A comparison of model predicted impacts at current tapered element oscillating microbalance
(TEOM) ambient air monitoring locations is also presented.
Finally, the existing air quality environment is described through a combination of predicted
impacts at specific sensitive receptor locations and regional contour plots.
For further information the reader is directed to the following technical appendices:
Appendix 9.A: Analysis of Ambient Air Data
Appendix 9.B: Development of the Emissions Inventory for the Existing Environment
Appendix 9.D: Development of the Meteorological Wind Fields
Appendix 9.F: Pollutant Dispersion Modelling
Appendix 9.G: Dispersion Model Validation for the Period 01/07/08 through 31/12/10
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
3.1
3.1.1
Regulatory Framework
National Legislation
In June 1988, the National Environment Protection Council (NEPC) developed the Ambient
Air Quality National Environmental Protection Measure (NEPM) which set uniform standards
for air quality at the national level and included ambient air quality standards for carbon
monoxide, nitrogen dioxide, ozone, sulphur dioxide, lead and particulate matter as PM 10. The
ambient air quality NEPM was revised in 2003 to include an advisory goal for PM 2.5. The
standards and goals are summarised in Table 3. The ambient air quality NEPM is currently
under review.
Table 3:
Pollutant
Ambient Air Quality NEPM Standards and Goals (2003)

Averaging Period
PM10
PM2.5
3.1.2
Standard/Goal (g/m )
Comment
24-hour
50
5 exceedences per year
24-hour
25
Annual
Goal is to gather
sufficient information to
develop standard
Western Australian Legislation
Total suspended particulates (TSP) are regulated in the Kwinana Region of Western Australia
which is a heavy industrial area approximately 30 km south of the Perth. The Kwinana
Environmental Protection Policy (EPP) defines three areas of interest: Area A is the area
upon which the industrial area is located; Area B is outside area A and is zoned for industrial
use and; Area C which is outside areas A and B and is predominantly for rural and residential
land use. The standards and limits as outlined in the Kwinana EPP are summarised in
Table 4.
Table 4:
Area
Kwinana EPP Standards and Limits for TSP (1999)

1
Standard (g/m )
Limit (g/m )
15-minute
1000
24-hour
150
260
24-hour
90
260
24-hour
90
150
A,B,C
Averaging Period
Note: (1) All values expressed as 0C and 101.3 kPa
3.1.3
New South Wales
There is currently no legislation for the management of nuisance dust neither at the national
level nor within the state of Western Australia. Thus for the purposes of this assessment,
criteria from the New South Wales (NSW) Department of Environment, Climate Change and
Water (DECCW) have been adopted and is summarised in Table 5.
__________________________________________________________________________
10
__________________________________________________________________________
It should be noted however that due to stakeholder perception of nuisance dust, complaints
may occur at levels below the specified criteria.
Table 5:
NSW DECCW Criteria for Dust Deposition

Environment and Conservation, 2005)
Pollutant
Averaging Period
Dust Deposition
3.1.4
Monthly
Criteria
(NSW
Department
of
Comment
4 g/m /month
Project incremental of 2 g/m /month
Summary of Project Goals
The project-goals that have been adopted for this assessment are as summarised in Table 6.
Table 6:
Project-Adopted Cumulative Ambient Air Quality Goals
Pollutant
Averaging Period
TSP
Project Goal
90 g/m
Kwinana EPP Area C
50 g/m
NEPM
24-hour
25 g/m
annual
8 g/m
Monthly
130 mg/m /day
24-hour
PM10
24-hour
PM2.5
Dust Deposition
Source
NEPM
3
(1)
NSW DECCW
Note (1): This is equivalent to 4 g/m /month. Due to the small values of deposition associated with the project, it is
expressed here in mg/m2/day.
3.2
Regional Environment and Sensitive Receptor Locations
Dust emission sources that may contribute to dust loading of the local airshed include (but
may not be limited to):
Activities at the port;
Vehicle movements on public roads;
Non port-related industrial activities;
Natural sources such as sea spray, dust storms, bushfires, etc.
This assessment has focused primarily on the prediction of impacts at key ambient air and
meteorological monitoring locations as well as the presentation of regional contour maps. This
is due to the fact that it is at the tapered element oscillating microbalances (TEOM) monitoring
locations in particular that dispersion model validation may be undertaken, and that the
impacts of the proposed activities at Berth 14 will be quantified. All of the aforementioned
potential dust emission sources may contribute to varying degrees to the concentration of
particulate matter recorded at the Bunbury Port Authoritys (BPA) four TEOM monitoring
locations (Table 7).
Also included in the receptors list in Table 7 is the Dolphin Centre which is located in close
proximity to the Bemax mineral sands facility to the west of Berth 3 (Figure 3).
__________________________________________________________________________
11
__________________________________________________________________________
Figure 3:
Sensitive Receptor Locations
Table 7:
Summary of Sensitive Receptor Locations (refer to Figure 3)
Receptor
Description
(km)
(km)
Estuary Drive TEOM
376.876
6311.839
Stirling Street TEOM
374.722
6311.577
Workshop TEOM
375.822
6311.324
Dolphin Centre TEOM
374.324
6312.324
South Bunbury Primary Monitoring Station (short term only)
373.730
6310.030
Beacon3 Meteorological Monitoring Station
374.024
6315.284
Bunbury Racetrack BoM Meteorological Monitoring Station
373.900
6308.347
Naval Cadets TEOM
373.408
6312.838
Beacon10 Meteorological Monitoring Station
374.781
6312.908
__________________________________________________________________________
12
__________________________________________________________________________
3.3
Ambient Air Monitoring Data
Monitoring data from the BPAs four TEOMS provided useful information pertaining to current
levels of PM10 and TSP. Additionally, meteorological data is collected by the BPA at the
Estuary Drive, Beacon 3 and Beacon 10 monitoring locations (Figure 3).
Reliable dust data is believed to have been obtained since 01/07/08 (personal communication
BPA). Data for this period is summarised in Table 8.
Table 8:
Summary of 24-Hour Average Concentration of TSP and PM 10 for the Period

(1)
3
01/07/08 through 31/12/10 (g/m )
Stirling Street
TSP
Stirling Street
PM10
Estuary Drive
PM10
Workshop
PM10
Naval Cadet
PM10
100
88.5
57.2
93.5
60.3
87.1
(2)
63.5
83.5
54.4
56.8
80.2
(3)
61.5
78.0
47.3
54.8
72.7
(4)
54.2
67.6
44.0
44.6
63.8
(5)
45.5
63.8
43.5
43.0
56.3
(6)
43.6
55.9
40.2
40.7
47.3
(7)
43.2
51.7
39.4
39.2
45.4
95
40.5
30.7
34.6
29.9
35.4
90
34.8
26.3
28.6
26.3
32.0
85
31.8
24.3
25.6
24.1
29.3
80
29.7
23.0
23.0
21.9
26.7
75
27.6
21.4
21.7
20.6
25.3
70
26.2
20.5
20.6
19.5
24.0
60
23.9
18.8
18.6
17.9
21.6
50
22.2
17.5
16.6
16.5
19.6
40
20.1
16.1
15.1
15.1
17.9
30
18.3
14.6
13.5
13.9
16.1
20
16.5
13.0
12.1
12.5
14.3
10
14.2
11.2
10.4
11.1
12.3
Percentile
99.89
99.78
99.67
99.56
99.02
98.69
Note (1): Date for the 28th and 29th of April has been removed due to the influence of a regional event.
Note (2): This percentile is equivalent to the 2nd highest.
Note (3): This percentile is equivalent to the 3rd highest.
Note (4): This percentile is equivalent to the 4th highest.
__________________________________________________________________________
13
__________________________________________________________________________
3.4
Estimates of Background Levels
In general, background levels of pollutants are ground-level concentrations that would occur
in the absence of any anthropogenic emission sources. The natural environment is
complicated by the high presence of sea salts for which there may be significant spatial and
temporal variability (ATA Environmental, 2006).
In general, for similar air quality assessments, a single background value is often applied
across the entire study region. Such an approach however does not take into consideration
any temporal and spatial variability associated with existing emission sources. The use of the
th
70 percentile ground-level concentration (Victorian EPA, 2001) is one approach that has
been used to develop a single-value estimate for background levels. This methodology may
be justified if site specific data suggests that there are no key emission sources that are
identifiable in the vicinity of the monitoring site. However, within the region surrounding the
port we anticipate that ground-level concentrations of pollutants will be both spatially and
temporally varying depending on (for example) receptor location, wind direction, wind speed,
and atmospheric characteristics such as stability and mixed layer depth.
Nonetheless, based on their proximity to key emission sources, for this assessment the
explicit modelling of the port activities is likely to capture the majority of the contribution of
anthropogenic dust emissions that impact at the four BPA TEOM locations. The exception is
likely to be the Naval Cadet TEOM monitoring location which has been found to be potentially
affected by non-port related activities or salts from sea spray (Environmental Alliances, 2011).
Thus for this assessment we have used the Victorian EPA (2001) recommended 70
percentile which suggests the following background levels for PM10 and TSP:
th
A 24-hour average concentration of PM10 of 21.2 g/m ; and
A 24-hour average concentration of TSP of 26.2 g/m .
In the absence of PM2.5 data we have conservatively assumed that background levels of
PM2.5 are 80% of those for PM10 for the 24-hour averaging period. Estimates of PM2.5 are
equally as challenging without site specific information and in light of the high sea salt loading
of the airshed due to the nature of the ambient environment. For the purpose of presenting
results for the annual average concentration of PM2.5, maximum Port related activities only
contributions will be presented.
Background levels of dust deposition are also difficult to estimate as there is limited reliable
data available. Based on information contained in ATA Environmental (2006), a one year dust
deposition monitoring program (June 2004 through July 2005) was undertaken at a total of 8
locations (see also Appendix 9.A). The results of the study found that the NSW DECCW goal
2
of 4 g/m /month was frequently exceeded. However, it was also found that the samples
contained a significant fraction of salts at most locations throughout the year though salt
levels were particularly elevated during the winter months.
As the contribution to dust deposition from natural phenomena will be highly spatially and
temporally varying, for this assessment the focus will be on the presentation of the predicted
levels of deposition due to existing activities at the port and the potential increase in dust
deposition due to the existing port activities and the project.
__________________________________________________________________________
14
__________________________________________________________________________
3.5
Dust Emission Sources Associated with Existing Activities
As noted in Section 2.1, the material handling of mineral sands, wood chips, silica sands,
spodumene and alumina at the port is of particular interest to this study. Thus, potential dust
emission sources associated with existing port activities include:
Ship loading and unloading;
Vehicle movements;
Material handling by front end loader;
On-site processing of wood into woodchips;
Truck loading and unloading;
Conveyors and conveyor transfer points;
Mineral sands processing; as well as
Wind erosion of stockpiles, spillage areas and bare areas.
3.6
Site-Based Dust Emissions Inventory
As noted in Section 2.1, a total of seven berths operate at the port with a variety of materials
imported and exported through the port annually. Although some berths are dedicated to the
handling of specific materials (such as Berth 4 and Berth 6) others handle a variety of
materials (for example Berth 5).
Quantification of dust emissions associated with current activities at the port is complicated by
the variety of both activities (such as wood chip processing and handling, heavy vehicle
movements, bulk material handling, ship loading etc.) and the varying nature of the material
parameters (such as particle size distribution, moisture content, silt content, etc.) associated
with the imported and exported goods (such as alumina, mineral sands, wood chips, etc.)
For this assessment, we have reviewed ship traffic through the port for years 2005 through
2010 (Table 9). Note that Berth 6 did not become operational till 2006 and thus the total
tonnages of alumina through the port were down in 2005 compared with later years (Figure 4
and Figure 5).
Table 9:
Berth
1
3
4
5
6
8
8
8
8
through 31/12/10 (tonnes) (summarised from BPA 2011).
Material
Mineral Sands
Wood Chips
Alumina
Mineral Sands
Alumina
Mineral Sands
Woodchips
Spodumene
Silicon Sands
I
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2005
E
203
865
8,584
56
0
746
215
142
375
2006
I
0
0
0
135
0
0
0
0
0
E
230
964
5,991
53
2,868
795
218
212
248
2007
I
0
0
0
185
0
18
0
0
0
E
234
954
5,788
59
3,488
755
267
228
217
2008
I
0
0
0
249
0
0
0
0
0
E
205
968
5,935
48
3,425
652
287
216
174
2009
I
0
0
0
199
0
0
0
0
0
E
164
821
6,123
48
3,336
499
393
218
201
2010
I
0
0
0
202
0
70
0
0
0
E
126
1,041
6,134
20
3,599
484
433
310
287
__________________________________________________________________________
15
__________________________________________________________________________
Figure 4:
Export of Material through the Port (kg), 2005-2010.
Figure 5:
Import of Material through the Port (kg), 2005-2010.
__________________________________________________________________________
16
__________________________________________________________________________
Emissions estimates for each of the activities at the port have been developed following the
methodology outlined in Air Assessments (2009) and in consideration of the following
information sources:
Air Assessments (2009): Bunbury Port Dust Buffer Assessment. Prepared for the
Katestone Environmental (2007): Proposed Wiggins Island Coal Terminal. Supplementary

Air Quality Impact Assessment Study.
NPI (2011): NPI Emission Estimation Technique Manual for Mining.
Sinclair Knight Merz (2006): Bunbury Port Dust Modelling.
USEPA (1995) AP-42 - Compilation of Air Pollutant Emission Factors, Fifth Edition,
Volume 1 (Chapter 11) including updates October 1998 and October 2002.
A number of the activities such as ship loading, truck dumping, transfer points etc. were
assumed to have a wind speed dependency which varied hourly.
As noted in the chapter introduction, two emissions scenarios were developed. The first
(Existing Environment Scenario 1) attempted to be as representative as practicable of actual
activities at the port during the period 01/07/08 through 31/12/10. This emissions inventory
was used for model validation. The second scenario (Existing Environment Scenario 2) was
based on an assumed worst-case year in relation to volumes of material through the port
and was constructed from actual port shipping movements for 2005 through 2010.
Details of both emissions inventories as well as the methodology used to develop these dust
emission estimates are provided in Appendix 9.B.
3.7
Dispersion Modelling
Dispersion modelling was undertaken using a combination of TAPM, CALMET and CALPUFF
modelling tools for six years of hourly meteorological conditions (2005 through 2010)
(Appendix 9.D).
The model validation scenario covered the period 01/07/08 through 31/12/10 and included
hourly meteorology. The reader is directed to Appendix 9.G for details of the results of this
assessment.
In summary, results of the model validation showed generally good agreement with
observations. However, the model tended to over-predict impacts at the Stirling Street
monitoring site. This is likely due to an over-estimation of wind speed related emission rates
associated with activities at the mineral sands and wood chip facilities located near Berth 3.
Due to the lack of meteorological data from the Stirling Street monitoring location at the time
of the assessment, model calibration was not undertaken and dust emission rates from
activities in this area were not adjusted from those reported in Air Assessments (2009).
Nonetheless, not surprisingly results of the existing activities emissions Scenario 1, suggest
that the region to the south and west of Berth 3 are most affected by activities in this area of
the port. The model was also found to under estimate impacts at the Naval Cadets Monitoring
site. An analysis of the data undertaken by Environmental Alliance (2011), suggested that
__________________________________________________________________________
17
__________________________________________________________________________
data at this location was likely affected by a non-port related dust emissions source to the
west of the site or salts associated with sea spray. No adjustment of emission rates were
made to port-related dust emission sources located in the Outer Harbour.
Based on the findings of the model validation study, for the purposes of quantifying the
existing environment based on the worst-case port-movement scenario (Scenario 2), the
following will be presented:
th
The 30 highest 24-hour average ground level concentration of TSP including a

3
background estimate of 26.2 g/m .
The 30 highest 24-hour average ground level concentration of PM10 including a

3
background estimate of 21.2 g/m .
The 30 highest 24-hour average ground level concentration of PM2.5 including a

3
background estimate of 16.9 g/m (based on the assumption of a background level of
80% that of PM10).
The maximum annual average concentration of PM 2.5. A background level is not included
in the results.
The maximum monthly dust deposition (reported in mg/m /day).
th
th
3.8
Description of the Current Air Quality Environment

th
Presented in Table 10 is a summary of the 5 highest 24-hour average ground-level

concentration of PM10 for each of years 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 and 2010 for the
th
existing environment Scenario 2. Also included in the table is the 30 highest concentration
for the entire six year duration 2005 through 2010 (Table 10).
The modelling suggests that of the receptors presented, the Dolphin Centre is the most
affected by current activities at the port. This is not surprising due to its close proximity to
activities to the south and west of Berth 3 and Berth 5 which includes material handling and
processing of wood chip and mineral sands. As noted in the previous section however, these
impacts are likely to be over-estimated.
Interestingly, results presented in Figure 6 highlight the variability in the reported rank as a
function of year of meteorology (with port activities the same for each year). Also note, that
what would be considered a worst-case year from an impacts point of view varies from
receptor to receptor.
__________________________________________________________________________
18
__________________________________________________________________________
Beacon 10
Naval
Cadets
Bunbury
BoM
Beacon 3
South
Bunbury
Dolphin
Centre
Workshop
Stirling
Street
Summary of the 24-Hour Average Ground-Level Concentration of PM110 at

3
Receptor Locations. Background of 21.2 g/m is Included.
Est. Dr.
Table 10:
Year
2005
44.7
56.8
44.5
90.7
24.7
33.6
23.4
45.1
85.9
2006
48.3
47.7
46.0
104.5
23.9
30.4
22.4
49.9
63.7
2007
58.0
60.4
48.5
117.9
24.5
29.6
23.6
49.3
74.0
2008
38.5
51.4
38.6
108.3
25.7
29.2
23.7
51.7
62.1
2009
51.8
52.7
54.9
57.1
23.2
26.0
22.2
33.6
58.9
2010
30.0
58.7
33.1
76.4
24.7
27.7
23.0
37.2
62.5
2005-2010
48.1
54.3
44.5
98.2
24.6
30.1
23.0
46.3
70.2
Figure 6:
th

3
Concentration of PM 10 including a Background Estimate of 21.2 g/m . The
3
Project Goal is 50 g/m . Years 2005-2010.
Presented in Table 11 is a summary of results at receptor locations for the existing

environment scenario based on worst-case port volumes (Scenario 2). For the percentiles
3
reported the Dolphin Centre is predicted to exceed all but the Project goal of 8 g/m for the
annual average ground-level concentration of PM2.5 noting however that the reported value
does not include an estimate for background levels.
__________________________________________________________________________
19
__________________________________________________________________________
Again it is noted that with the exception of the Dolphin Centre, these receptors are not typical
sensitive receptor locations but have been selected due to the fact that the majority are
monitoring locations. Should elevated levels of dust occur in association with existing port
activities, results of the modelling suggests that it is the Stirling Street monitoring location
which is the most likely of the four TEOM monitoring sites to be affected.
When interpreting the regional contour plots presented in the following, it is important to note
that these figures do not represent snap shots in time and the areal extent of the footprint as
indicated in the figures is never realised on any given day. To illustrate with an example,
consider the effect of a predominantly westerly direction which may result in elevated levels of
dust to the east of the Port, but emissions from the port would not reach locations upwind of
the site (i.e. to the west). Impacts at these locations would require an easterly flow which
would be associated with a different days meteorology. Thus the contour plots presented
th
represent (in this case) the 30 highest 24-hour average ground-level concentration of TSP,
PM10 or PM2.5 at each location within the study region regardless of when during the six years
of meteorology it occurred.
Regional contour plots for TSP, PM10, PM2.5 and dust deposition are presented in Figure 8
through Figure 12. Results from the dispersion modelling do not highlight any significant air
quality issues relating to existing activities at the port with predicted exceedences of the
relevant ambient air criteria predicted to remain in general within or in close proximity to the
boundary of the area containing the Ports Inner and Outer Harbour. The exception may be
the area indicated by the yellow square in Figure 7. It is noted however that the model results
are likely over estimating impacts in this area. Monitoring results obtained from the Stirling
Street TEOM may not be representative of impacts within the air indicated. Should concerns
be raised in relation to air quality in this area, a short term monitoring campaign could be
undertaken to assess the level of realised impacts associated with the port activities in this
area.
Figure 7:
Existing Environment: Most Affected Area.
__________________________________________________________________________
20
__________________________________________________________________________
Beacon 10
29.9
39.6
27.5
65.2
9
101.5
(1)(3)
24-hour
48.2
55.1
44.7
98.9
24.7
30.1
23.1
46.6
70.5
PM2.5
(1)(3)
24-hour
22.3
23.9
21.7
35.9
17.6
18.9
17.3
23.0
28.4
PM2.5
(2)
Annual
0.7
0.9
0.6
3.1
0.1
0.3
0.0
0.9
2.1
Monthly
127.9
76.9
48.4
304.1
4.3
5.2
3.5
38.9
32.0
(2)
Dust Dep
Naval
Cadets
4
145.1
64.5
PM10
Bunbury
BoM
South
Bunbury
81.5
Stirling
Street
2
73.9
(1)(3)
TSP
Estuary
Drive
1
24-hour
Pollutant
Averaging
Period
Dolphin
Centre
Beacon 3
Existing Environment: Summary of Results at Receptor Locations, 2005

3
2
through 2010. (Units: g/m and mg/m /day)
Workshop
Table 11:
Note (1): 30th highest presented

Note (2): Maximum Presented
Note (3): Includes background estimates
Note (4): Bold indicates exceedence of the relevant project goal
3.8.1
Worst-Case Meteorological Conditions
In summary, at this location elevated levels of dust are predicted to occur under both calm
and windy conditions though the latter is more frequent. Calm conditions under a stable
atmosphere (F Class Stability, Appendix 9.G) can lead to a build-up of particulates at low
levels due to relatively poor dispersion. During windy conditions, wind-blown dust plays a
significant role in the predicted elevated levels of dust within the study region.
There was no significant trend in relation to elevated levels of dust and the hour of day
although the model does predict a slightly higher frequency of elevated levels at night
compared with the daytime. Noting however that this biasing of elevated levels during the
night time period was not observed within the Estuary Drive TEOM data.
The reader is directed to Appendix 9.G for more details relating to worst-case meteorological
conditions.
__________________________________________________________________________
21
__________________________________________________________________________
Figure 8:
th

Notes: Includes a Background Estimate of 26.2 g/m3.

__________________________________________________________________________
22
__________________________________________________________________________
Figure 9:

Concentration of PM 10 based on Six Years of Meteorology.

3
__________________________________________________________________________
23
__________________________________________________________________________
Figure 10: Existing Environment: The 30th Highest 24-Hour Average Ground-Level
Concentration of PM 2.5 based on Six Years of Meteorology.

3
__________________________________________________________________________
24
__________________________________________________________________________
Figure 11: Existing Environment: The Maximum Annual Average Ground-Level
Notes: No Background
The area that exceeds the project goal due to activities at the port in isolation of background is
indicated in the figure as the orange hatched area.
3
Contours levels are: 0.25, 0.75 , 3, and 8 g/m
__________________________________________________________________________
25
__________________________________________________________________________
Figure 12: Existing Environment: Maximum Monthly Dust Deposition based on Six
Years of Meteorology.
2
The Cumulative Ambient Air Quality Goal is 130 mg/m /day
2
Contours levels are: 10, 50 , 75, and 130 mg/m /day
__________________________________________________________________________
26
__________________________________________________________________________
4.
Project-Only Impacts
This chapter presents an overview of the methodology and findings of the dispersion
modelling of dust emission sources associated with the project in isolation of existing dust
generating activities at the port.
Relevant appendices include:
Appendix 9.C: Development of the Emissions Inventory for Future Emission Sources
Appendix 9.D: Development of the Meteorological Wind Fields
Appendix 9.F: Pollutant Dispersion Modelling
Appendix 9.G: Dispersion Model Validation for the Period 01/07/08 through 31/12/10
4.1
Construction Phase
Emissions generated during the construction phase of the project (construction of coal
warehouse sheds, administration building, shuttle building and workshop building) are likely to
consists of;
Dust generated by earthworks and vehicle movement
Activities like land clearing ground excavation and cut and fill operations (i.e., earth moving)
can potentially generate dust emissions and these emissions can vary substantially from day
to day, depending on the level of activity, the specific operations, and the prevailing
meteorological conditions.
In the event that adverse meteorological conditions are encountered or high dust generating
activities are undertaken, dust suppression measures will be employed. Dust control
measures primarily include the application of water to control dust emissions. Watering of
temporary roads using water truck and watering of temporary stockpiles using water sprays
will be employed as required.
Dust emissions estimation for the construction phase of the Project has not been undertaken.
Emissions from the combustion of fossil fuels
Minor quantities of NOX, SOX and CO are also expected to be released from the earthmoving
equipment, other mobile vehicles and stationary generators. However emissions from the
combustion of fossil fuels are expected to be minor and have not been explicitly quantified.
Prior to commencing construction works, a detailed construction management plan (CMP) will
be prepared. The CMP will include calculation of site risk assessment/classification score
based on site risk classification assessment chart for generating uncontaminated dust
provided under DECs A guideline for managing the impacts of dust and associated
contaminants from land development sites. Appropriate mitigation measures will be adopted
based on the outcome of site risk assessment/classification score.
__________________________________________________________________________
27
__________________________________________________________________________
4.2
Operational Phase
Emission inventory and results of dispersion modelling for dust emission sources associated
with the operation phase of the project are presented in sections below.
4.2.1
Emissions Inventory
The project-specific dust emissions inventory was developed using the methodology outline in
the NPI (2011). Details of the emissions inventory are presented in Appendix 9.C. A summary
is provided here.
As noted in Section 2.3, dust emission sources associated with the project include:
Fugitive emissions from the partially enclosed train unloading facility;
Conveyors;
Transfer points;
Ship load out; and
Emissions from the dust extraction system associated with the storage sheds.
Since the conveyors are fully enclosed, emissions associated with the conveying of coal have
been assumed to be negligible. Estimates for emissions from the remaining dust emission
sources have been undertaken.
Presented in Figure 13 are the locations of all project-related dust emission sources
considered in this assessment.
Due to the current alignment of the two main sheds, a total of two scenarios were considered.
These project-only emissions scenarios have assumed worst-case 24-hour operations in
which all coal delivered to the port is stacked in one of the two sheds, and ship load out is
assumed to require the operation of the reclaimers within the same shed as the coal stacking
is occurring. This assumption regarding material handling will have the largest potential for
the generation of localized fugitive dusts when compared with the scenario of stacking and
reclaiming from different sheds or the optimal environmental scenario of bypassing all
stacking and reclaiming activities via one of the conveyor bypass options.
Specifically, the Project-only emissions Scenario A assumes all stacking and reclaiming
activities are occurring within Shed 2 while the Project-only emissions Scenario B assumes all
stacking and reclaiming activities are occurring within Shed 3.
__________________________________________________________________________
28
__________________________________________________________________________
Figure 13: Dust Emission Sources used in the Dispersion Modelling.
__________________________________________________________________________
29
__________________________________________________________________________
A summary of the emission factors and controls that have been applied are included as Table
12. Presented in Table 13 are the corresponding emission rates. With respect to the applied
controls, the assessment has taken a conservative approach and assumed that the transfer
points are associated with less controls than is likely to be implemented for the project, i.e.
fully enclosed transfer points with a dust extraction system will achieve a higher level of dust
control than the 85%-95% assumed for this assessment.
Table 12
Emission Factors and Applied Controls
Units
TSP Emission
Factor
(uncontrolled)
Conveyors
Stockpile Loading
Kg/tonne
0.004
PM10
Emission
Factor
(uncontrolled)
0.0017
Stockpile Unloading
Kg/tonne
0.004
0.0017
0%
Based on shed
total
Based on shed
total
99%
Category
Shed Ventilation
Outlets
Control
Reason for control
100%
50%
Fully Enclosed
Water Sprays
-
Main Shed Feeder

Transfer Point
Kg/tonne
0.00011
0.000053
95%
Dust Extraction
System
Enclosure Dust
Extraction
All Other Transfer

Points
Kg/tonne
0.00011
0.000053
85%
Enclosure and water

sprays
Train Unloading
Kg/tonne
0.00011
0.000053
65%
Ship Load Out
Kg/tonne
0.00011
0.000053
75%
Table 13
Partially Enclosed
and Dust Extraction
Telescopic chute
and Water Sprays

Scenario A
Category
Units
Conveyors
TSP
Emission
Rate
-
PM10
Emission
Rate
-
Stockpile Loading
Stockpile Unloading
Shed Ventilation Outlets (total)
g/s
0.035
18.9%
0.015
17.3%
Transfer Points (total)
g/s
0.093
50.4%
0.044
51.4%
Train Unloading
g/s
0.034
18.4%
0.016
18.8%
g/s
0.023
12.3%
0.011
12.5%
g/s
0.184
0.085
Ship Load Out

Total
% of Total
% of
Total
-
__________________________________________________________________________
30
__________________________________________________________________________
Table 14

Scenario B
Category
Units
Conveyors
TSP
Emission
Rate
-
PM10
Emission
Rate
-
Stockpile Loading
Stockpile Unloading
Shed Ventilation Outlets (total)
g/s
0.035
18.5%
0.015
17.0%
Transfer Points (total)
g/s
0.096
51.3%
0.045
52.3%
Train Unloading
g/s
0.034
18.1%
0.016
18.4%
g/s
0.023
12.1%
0.011
12.3%
g/s
0.187
0.087
Ship Load Out

Total
4.2.2
% of Total
% of
Total
-
Results of the Dispersion Modelling
Results of the dust dispersion modelling for impacts associated with project-related dust
generating emission sources is presented in Table 15 for Scenario A and Table 17 for
Scenario B. In presenting these results we have adopted a highly conservative approach and
reported the maximum predicted value for each of the relevant pollutants and averaging
periods for the six years of meteorological conditions simulated (2005 through 2010). This is
th
in contrast to the rank reported for the existing environment which was typically 30 highest in
recognition (and demonstration, Appendix 9.G) of the tendency of the models and applied
emissions estimation methodology to over predict ground-level impacts from these sources.
For the receptor locations presented, results suggest that it is the Dolphin Centre that will be
most affected by dust emissions associated with Berth 14 activities. The Naval Cadets TEOM
is predicted to be the most affected BPA ambient air monitoring location.
Presented in Table 16 for Scenario A and Table 18 for Scenario B is the percentage increase
in existing levels of dust that are predicted to occur based on the maximum project-only
contributions to fugitive dust emissions. It must be noted that the level of the predicted
impacts would not be discernible from current dust levels associated with existing port
activities.
Contour plots for project-only impacts for Scenario A are presented in Figure 14 through
Figure 18. As the results for Scenario B are not significantly different than those of Scenario
A, contour plots based on the results from Project-only Scenario B are not presented.
The results of the dispersion modelling have not highlighted any significant air quality issues
related to project-only dust generating activities.
__________________________________________________________________________
31
__________________________________________________________________________
Pollutant
Beacon 10
Naval
Cadets
Bunbury
BoM
Beacon 3
South
Bunbury
Dolphin
Centre
Workshop
Stirling
Street
Estuary
Drive
Project Only Impacts Scenario A: Summary of Results at Receptor

3
Locations, 2005 through 2010. No Background Included. (Units: g/m and
2
mg/m /day)
Averaging
Period
Table 15:
24-hour
0.4
0.9
0.6
2.7
0.2
0.6
0.1
1.0
3.2
(1)
24-hour
0.4
0.6
0.4
1.7
0.2
0.4
0.1
0.7
2.1
PM2.5
(1)
24-hour
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.3
0.0
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.4
PM2.5
(2)
Annual
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
Monthly
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.3
0.0
0.1
0.0
0.2
0.5
(1)
TSP
PM10
(2)
Dust Dep
Note (1): Maximum presented

Estuary
Drive
Stirling
Street
Workshop
Dolphin
Centre
South
Bunbury
Beacon 3
Bunbury
BoM
Naval
Cadets
Beacon 10
Scenario A: Percentage Increase in Existing Levels of Dust Based on

Maximum Project Contribution.
Averaging
Period
Table 16:
TSP
24-hour
0.6%
1.0%
1.0%
1.8%
0.8%
1.5%
0.4%
1.6%
3.1%
PM10
24-hour
0.8%
1.1%
1.0%
1.8%
0.6%
1.2%
0.4%
1.6%
3.0%
PM2.5
24-hour
0.3%
0.4%
0.3%
0.8%
0.1%
0.3%
0.1%
0.5%
1.2%
PM2.5
Annual
0.4%
0.6%
0.6%
0.6%
1.8%
2.0%
1.3%
1.5%
2.4%
Dust Dep
Monthly
0.1%
0.2%
0.2%
0.1%
0.5%
1.2%
0.4%
0.5%
1.7%
Pollutant
__________________________________________________________________________
32
__________________________________________________________________________
Pollutant
Beacon 10
Naval
Cadets
Bunbury
BoM
Beacon 3
South
Bunbury
Dolphin
Centre
Workshop
Stirling
Street
Estuary
Drive
Project Only Impacts Scenario B: Summary of Results at Receptor

3
Locations, 2005 through 2010. No Background Included. (Units: g/m and
2
mg/m /day)
Averaging
Period
Table 17:
24-hour
0.5
0.8
0.6
2.5
0.2
0.5
0.1
1.0
3.0
(1)
24-hour
0.4
0.5
0.4
1.6
0.2
0.4
0.1
0.7
2.1
PM2.5
(1)
24-hour
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.3
0.0
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.3
PM2.5
(2)
Annual
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
Monthly
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.0
0.1
0.0
0.2
0.5
(1)
TSP
PM10
(2)
Dust Dep

Estuary
Drive
Stirling
Street
Workshop
Dolphin
Centre
South
Bunbury
Beacon 3
Bunbury
BoM
Naval
Cadets
Beacon 10
Scenario B: Percentage Increase in Existing Levels of Dust Based on

Maximum Project Contribution.
Averaging
Period
Table 18:
TSP
24-hour
0.6%
1.0%
0.9%
1.7%
0.8%
1.4%
0.4%
1.6%
3.0%
PM10
24-hour
0.8%
1.0%
0.9%
1.7%
0.7%
1.2%
0.4%
1.6%
2.9%
PM2.5
24-hour
0.3%
0.4%
0.3%
0.7%
0.1%
0.3%
0.1%
0.5%
1.2%
PM2.5
Annual
0.4%
0.6%
0.6%
0.5%
1.8%
1.9%
1.3%
1.5%
2.3%
Dust Dep
Monthly
0.2%
0.2%
0.2%
0.1%
0.5%
1.1%
0.4%
0.5%
1.6%
Pollutant
__________________________________________________________________________
33
__________________________________________________________________________
Figure 14: Project-Only Scenario A: Maximum 24-Hour Average Ground-Level
Notes: No Background Included

3
3
Contours levels are: 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5 and 90 g/m
__________________________________________________________________________
34
__________________________________________________________________________
Figure 15: Project-Only Scenario A: The Maximum 24-Hour Average Ground-Level

Concentration of PM 10 based on Six Years of Meteorology.

3
3
Contours levels are: 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5 and 50 g/m
__________________________________________________________________________
35
__________________________________________________________________________
Figure 16: Project-Only Scenario A: The Maximum 24-Hour Average Ground-Level

3
3
Contours levels are: 0.1, 0.2 , 0.5 and 25 g/m
__________________________________________________________________________
36
__________________________________________________________________________
Figure 17: Project-Only Scenario A: The Maximum Annual Average Ground-Level

3
3
Contours levels are: 0.01, 0.05 , 0.1, and 8 g/m
__________________________________________________________________________
37
__________________________________________________________________________
Figure 18: Project-Only Scenario A: Maximum Monthly Dust Deposition based on Six
Years of Meteorology.

2
2
Contours levels are: 0.1, 0.2 , 0.5, and 2 mg/m /day
__________________________________________________________________________
38
__________________________________________________________________________
5.
The Future Environment
The low level of predicted impacts associated with the project suggests that the operation of
Berth 14 and associated coal handling infrastructure will not lead to a measurable increase in
either suspended or deposited particulate matter at sensitive receptor locations.
Presented in Figure 19 is a contour plot for the 24-hour average ground level concentration of
PM10 for the future environment (based on Project Scenario A) including an estimate of
3
background levels of 21.2 g/m . Note that we have adopted a highly conservative approach
th
and have combined the 30 highest 24-hour average ground-level concentration of PM10 for
the existing environment with the maximum predicted 24-hour average ground-level
concentration due to project-related emissions. In practice, these two predictions are not
th
directly additive. The results are considered conservative as the contour plot for 30 highest
24-hour average concentration for the future environment (existing and project cumulative)
would not be noticeably different to that presented in the upper panel of Figure 19.
Contour plots of the predicted future ambient air quality environment (based on Project
Scenario A) for the 24-hour average ground-level concentration of TSP and PM2.5 are
included as Figure 20 and Figure 21 respectively. The annual average ground-level
concentration of PM2.5 is presented in Figure 22 and the regional contour plot for cumulative
dust deposition is presented in Figure 23. Note that with the exception of the annual average
concentration of PM2.5 and dust deposition all contour plots include an estimate of background
levels. Contour plots for the existing environment are included in the following figures for ease
of comparison.
__________________________________________________________________________
39
__________________________________________________________________________
Figure 19: Existing (Upper) and Future (Lower) Environments (based on Project
Scenario A): The 24-Hour Average Ground-Level Concentration of PM 10
Notes: Includes a Background Estimate of 21.2 g/m

3
3
__________________________________________________________________________
40
__________________________________________________________________________
Scenario A): The 24-Hour Average Ground-Level Concentration of TSP
Notes: Includes a Background Estimate of 26.2 g/m .

3
The Cumulative Ambient Air Quality Goal is 90 g/m .
3
__________________________________________________________________________
41
__________________________________________________________________________
Scenario A): The 24-Hour Average Ground-Level Concentration of PM 2.5

3
__________________________________________________________________________
42
__________________________________________________________________________
Scenario A): The Maximum Annual Average Ground-Level Concentration of
PM2.5 based on Six Years of Meteorology.
3
3
Contours levels are: 0.25, 0.75 , 3, and 8 g/m
__________________________________________________________________________
43
__________________________________________________________________________
Scenario A): Maximum Monthly Dust Deposition based on Six Years of
Meteorology.
2
2
Contours levels are: 10, 50 , 75, and 130 mg/m /day
__________________________________________________________________________
44
__________________________________________________________________________
6.
Summary and Recommendations
AED have conducted an air quality assessment of the impact of emissions of dust associated
with the proposed development by Lanco of a coal storage and loading facility at Berth 14 of
Bunbury Port, Bunbury, Western Australia.
There are a number of different materials that are currently handled at the port. Materials of
particular interest to this study included mineral sands, silica sands, wood chips, alumina and
spodumene.
The most challenging part of the assessment was the quantification of current levels of dust
emissions associated with existing activities. Two scenarios for the existing environment were
developed. The first was designed as far as practicable to represent activities at the port
during the period 01/07/08 through 31/12/10. Results from this scenario were used to
demonstrate the representativeness of the model results when compared with observed
levels of dust from four ambient air monitoring locations that are operated on behalf of the
Bunbury Port Authority. The applied methodology was found to lead to results that over
th
th
predicted observed dust levels. The 98.6 percentile (or 5 highest for one year period) was
found to compare well with observations.
The second emissions scenario developed for the existing activities at the port was based on
the movement of worst-case volumes of materials through the port. This scenario took into
consideration actual ship movements through the port for the period 2005 through 2010 and
the highest year for each Berth was selected. The primary objective of this scenario was to
simulate worst-case existing environment dust emissions which when combined with six
years of hourly meteorology highlighted the inter-annual variability of predicted impacts as
well as the importance of spatial variability with respect to receptor impacts.
Based on the results of the dispersion modelling, no significant air quality issues have been
highlighted in relation to existing activities at the port.
Project Mitigation Measures

The engineering controls that have been proposed to be included as part of the projects
infrastructure include:
Dust extraction system on storage sheds;
Water sprays in the storage sheds;
Partially enclosed train unloading facility with dust extraction associated with the bottom
dump hopper system.
__________________________________________________________________________
45
__________________________________________________________________________
Due to the high level of engineering controls that have been proposed for the Berth 14 coal
handling facility combined with favourable material properties (low silt and high moisture
content), impacts associated with project-related dust emission sources is not predicted to
lead to measureable changes in air quality as would be recorded at any of the four Bunbury
Port Authoritys ambient air monitoring locations.
In practice, the highest risk dust emission source is considered to be associated with ship
load-out and in particular occurrences of a-typical or upset conditions. Therefore careful
consideration of the engineering design of the telescopic chute used for ship load out is
required in order to ensure an optimal environmental outcome.
Also, during operation of the facility and in particular in relation to periods of ship load-out,
adherence to operational procedures that limit fugitive dust emissions must be strictly
enforced. The operational requirement of no visible dust during ship loading should be the
primary environmental objective.
Based on the predicted level of impact at off-site receptor locations, no additional engineering
controls are recommended.
Project-Related Ambient Air Monitoring Program

In consideration of other port users, an on-site ambient air monitoring program that is based
on the collection and analysis of representative dust samples such as that taken using a high
volume sampler (HVS) or via dust deposition gauges (DDG)) as opposed to, or in addition to
continuous dust monitoring (such as a TEOM) at Berth 3 and Berth 4 is recommended.
Due to the close proximity of activities at Berth 4 in particular, we emphasise the need for a
no visible dust operational objective during ship loading and that data recorded by the
monitoring equipment should not be relied upon as the key trigger for the implementation of
increased operational actions.
Note that all monitoring is to be undertaken in accordance with the relevant Australian
Standard:
-
DR AS 3580.14 Methods for sampling and analysis of ambient air - Meteorological

monitoring for ambient air quality monitoring applications. (Draft AS)
AS 2922 Ambient Air Guide for the siting of sampling units
AS 3580.10.1 (2003) Methods for sampling and analysis of ambient air

determination of particulate matter deposited matter gravimetric methods
3580.9.8 (2008) Methods for sampling and analysis of ambient air -Determination of
suspended particulate matter - PM10 continuous direct mass method using a tapered
element oscillating microbalance analyser;
3580.9.3 (2003) Methods for the Sampling and Analysis of Ambient Air
Determination of Suspended Particular Matter Total Suspended Particulate Matter
(TSP) High Volume Air Sampler Gravimetric Method
__________________________________________________________________________
46
__________________________________________________________________________
Due to the scale of off-site impacts associated with the Project, we do not feel that any
additional off-site TEOM monitoring sites are warranted.
It is noted however that should air quality concerns be raised to the west-southwest of the
Port (as indicated in the following figure) an additional PM10 TEOM monitoring and/or high
volume sampling location should be considered that is permanently or temporarily sited within
this area.
__________________________________________________________________________
47
__________________________________________________________________________
7.
References
Bunbury Port Authority. March 2009.
ATA Environmental (2006): Bunbury Port Authority - Results of Deposition Dust

Monitoring Bunbury Port. Version 2, Report No: 2005/232.
BoM (2011): Meteorological data at Bunbury, Mandurah, Capenaturaliste, BusseltonJetty,

BusseltonAero 2005 to 2010, Bureau of Meteorology, Western Australia.
BPA (2011): Ship visits 2005 to 2010, Bunbury Port Authority website
http://www.byport.com.au/
Department of Environment (DoE) (2006): Air Quality Modelling Guidance Notes. Western
Australian Department of Environment, March 2006.
Environmental Alliances Pty Ltd (2007): Review of Ambient Dust Data Collected on behalf
of Bunbury Port Authority.
Environmental Alliances Pty Ltd (2011): Review of Bunbury Port Authority Ambient Dust
Data (2007-2010).
EPA (1992): Development of an Environmental Protection Policy for Air quality at

Kwinana. Environment Protection Policy, Perth, Western Australia, Bulletin 644.
EPA (2003): Implementing Best Practice in proposals submitted to the Environmental

Impact assessment process. Guidance for the Assessment of Environmental Factors. No.
55 December 2003, Western Australia.
ESA, 2010: Globcover land cover map ESA 2010 and UCLouvain, published by
European Space science
Hurley P.J. (2008): TAPM V4. Part 1: Technical Description, CSIRO Marine and
Atmospheric Research Paper No. 25. 59 pp.
Katestone Environmental (2007): Proposed Wiggins Island Coal Terminal. Supplementary

Air Quality Impact Assessment Study. Connell Hatch. July 2007.
National Environmental Protection Council, National Environment Protection Measure for

Ambient Air Quality, 1988, with amendment in 2003
NPI (2011): NPI Emission Estimation Technique Manual for Mining, Version 3, June 2011
NSW Department of Environment and Conservation, Approved Methods for the Modelling
and Assessment of Air Pollutants in New South Wales, August 2005
SRC (2011): CALPUFF Modelling System Version 6 User Instructions, April 2011.
Available at ASG at TRC website http://www.src.com/calpuff/calpuff1.html
Sinclair Knight Merz (2006): Bunbury Port Dust Modelling. Draft report. 5 July 2006.
Report to Bunbury Port Authority.
__________________________________________________________________________
48
__________________________________________________________________________
SRTM (2000): NASAs Shuttle Radar Topography Mission (SRTM), Downloaded from
USGS website http://dds.cr.usgs.gov/srtm/version2_1/SRTM3/Australia/
USEPA (1995): AP-42 - Compilation of Air Pollutant Emission Factors, Fifth Edition,
Volume 1 (Chapter 11) including updates October 1998 and October 2002.
USEPA (2006): Industrial wind Erosion AP42, fifth Edition, Volume I, Chapter 13:
Miscellaneous Sources. 13.2.5 Final Section. November 2006.
Victorian EPA (2001): Victorian Government Gazette, No. 240 Friday 21 December 2001.
__________________________________________________________________________
49
__________________________________________________________________________
8. Document Limitations
Document copyright of Advanced Environmental Dynamics Pty Ltd.
This document is submitted on the basis that it remains commercial-in-confidence. The
contents of this document are and remain the intellectual property of Advanced Environmental
Dynamics and are not to be provided or disclosed to third parties without the prior written
consent of Advanced Environmental Dynamics. No use of the contents, concepts, designs,
drawings, specifications, plans etc. included in this document is permitted unless and until
they are the subject of a written contract between Advanced Environmental Dynamics and the
addressee of this document. Advanced Environmental Dynamics accepts no liability of any
kind for any unauthorised use of the contents of this document and Advanced Environmental
Dynamics reserves the right to seek compensation for any such unauthorised use.
Document delivery
Advanced Environmental Dynamics provides this document in either printed format, electronic
format or both. Advanced Environmental Dynamics considers the printed version to be
binding. The electronic format is provided for the clients convenience and Advanced
Environmental Dynamics requests that the client ensures the integrity of this electronic
information is maintained. Storage of this electronic information should at a minimum comply
with the requirements of the Commonwealth Electronic Transactions Act (ETA) 2000.
Where an electronic only version is provided to the client, a signed hard copy of this
document is held on file by Advanced Environmental Dynamics and a copy will be provided if
requested.
__________________________________________________________________________
50

___________________________________________________________________________
Bunbury Port Berth 14 Expansion

and
Coal Storage and Loading Facility
Air Quality Assessment Technical Appendices
Prepared for:
305 Murray Street
On Behalf of:
LANCO Resources
Australia Pty Ltd
C/- GPO G474
Perth Western Australia
__________________________________________________________________________
Technical Appendicies: Bunbury Port Berth 14 Expansion and Coal Storage and Loading Facility
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Contents
Appendix A
Analysis of Ambient Air Data ..............................................................................8
A.1
Data Locations and Availability ...................................................................................8
A.2
Particulate Matter as PM10 ....................................................................................... 10
A.3
Particulate Matter as TSP ........................................................................................ 14
A.4
Dust Deposition ....................................................................................................... 16
Appendix B
B.1.1
B.2
Development of the Emissions Inventory for the Existing Environment .......... 18

Port Throughputs and Ship Movements .............................................................. 18
Emission Sources, Emission Rates and Applied Controls ...................................... 20
B.2.1
Activities with Wind Speed Dependent Emissions .............................................. 20
B.2.2
Wind Erosion ....................................................................................................... 20
B.2.3
Emission Factors and Controls for Dust Generating Activities ............................ 21
B.3
Emissions Scenarios and Emissions Inventory ....................................................... 27
B.3.1
Emissions Inventory for the Model Validation Period .......................................... 27
B.3.2
Emissions Inventory for the Worst-Case Year..................................................... 30
Appendix C
Development of the Emissions Inventory for Future Emission Sources.......... 32
C.1
Relevant Documentation ......................................................................................... 32
C.2
Project Information................................................................................................... 32
C.3
Emission Sources .................................................................................................... 33
C.4
Emission Factors ..................................................................................................... 36
C.5
Emissions Inventory................................................................................................. 36
Appendix D
D.1
Development of Meteorological Wind Fields ................................................... 38
Overview of The Meteorological Modelling Methodology ........................................ 38
D.2
Meteorological Data Sets Used in the Development of the Meteorological Wind
Fields ................................................................................................................................. 41
D.3
TAPM ....................................................................................................................... 43
D.4
CALMET .................................................................................................................. 43
D.4.1
The 3 Kilometre Resolution CALMET Grid .......................................................... 45
D.4.2
The CALMET Model at One Kilometre Resolution .............................................. 49
D.4.3
The CALMET Model at 100 m Resolution ........................................................... 52
D.5
Developed Wind Fields for the Period 2005 Through 2010 .................................... 55
__________________________________________________________________________
2
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Appendix E
Meteorological Wind Fields used for the Purposes of Driving the Coastal
Hydrodynamic Model ........................................................................................................ 65
E.1
Calibration Period .................................................................................................... 65
E.2
Dredge Log Modelling .............................................................................................. 66
Appendix F
Pollutant Dispersion Modelling ........................................................................ 67
F.1
Dispersion Model ..................................................................................................... 67
F.2
Particle Size Distribution .......................................................................................... 67
F.3
Existing Emission Sources ...................................................................................... 68
F.4
Future Emission Sources......................................................................................... 70
Appendix G
Dispersion Model Validation for the Period 01/07/08 through 31/12/10 .......... 74
G.1
Overview of Results Comparison for PM10 .............................................................. 74
G.2
Comparison of Estuary Drive Data and Model Output ............................................ 75
Appendix H
Existing Environment Results for PM10 ......................................................... 81
Tables
Table 1:
Monitoring Locations, Parameters Monitored, and Data Availability ......................9
Table 2:
Data Availability of Meteorological Data Associated with the TEOM Monitoring

Sites. ......................................................................................................................9
Table 3:
Percentage Data Availability of PM10 24-Hour Average Concentration Estimates,

01/07/08 through 31/12/10. ................................................................................. 13
Table 4:
Percentage data availability 24-hour average concentrations of PM10, 01/07/0831/12/10. ............................................................................................................. 14
Table 5:
Dust Deposition Gauge Results (g/m /month), 06/04 through 08/05 (Source: ATA
2
Environmental, 2006). NSW DECC Goal is 4 g/m /month. Exceedences are
indicated by the Red Text. .................................................................................. 17
Table 6:
through 31/12/10 (tonnes). .................................................................................. 18
Table 7:
Wind Erosion of Stockpiles and Exposed Areas . ............................................. 20
Table 8:
Mineral Sands at Berth 1: Activities, Emission Factors, Controls, and Hours of

Operation............................................................................................................. 22
Table 9:
Woodchips at Berth 3: Activities, Emission Factors, Controls, and Hours of

Operation............................................................................................................. 23
Table 10:
Alumina at Berth 4 and Berth 6: Activities, Emission Factors, Controls, and Hours
of Operation ........................................................................................................ 23
(1)
__________________________________________________________________________
3
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Table 11:

Operation............................................................................................................. 24
Table 12:

Operation............................................................................................................. 24
Table 13:
Wood Chips at Berth 8: Activities, Emission Factors, Controls, and Hours of

Operation............................................................................................................. 25
Table 14:
Spodumene at Berth 8: Activities, Emission Factors, Controls, and Hours of

Operation............................................................................................................. 25
Table 15:
Silica Sands at Berth 8: Activities, Emission Factors, Controls, and Hours of

Operation............................................................................................................. 26
Table 16:
The Bemax Mineral Sands Processing Operations (Berth 3): Activities, Emission
Factors, Controls, and Hours of Operation ......................................................... 26
Table 17:
The Bemax Mineral Sands Processing Operations (Berth 3): Stack Sources and
(1)
Source Characteristics . .................................................................................... 26
Table 18:
Emission Rates (g/s) for the Validation Period 01/07/08 through 31/12/10. ....... 29
Table 19:
Emission Rates (g/s) for the Worst Case Year of Port Activities (2005-2010) .... 30
Table 20:
Project Information used to Develop Worst Case 24 Hour Emissions Scenario . 32
Table 21:
Project Related Dust Emission Sources .............................................................. 35
Table 22:
Emission Factors and Applied Controls ............................................................... 36
Table 23
Emissions Inventory............................................................................................. 37
Table 24:
Monitoring Locations, Parameters Monitored, and Data Availability ................... 41
Table 25:
Percentage Data Availability of Meteorological Data, 2005 through 2010. ......... 42
Table 26:
TAPM Configuration ............................................................................................ 43
Table 27:
CALMET Domain Specifications ......................................................................... 44
Table 28:
Coordinates of Upper Air Data Extracted From TAPM ....................................... 47
Table 29:
Coordinates of Surface Data ............................................................................... 48
Table 30:
Coordinates of Upper Air Data ............................................................................ 50
Table 31:
Table 32:
Coordinates of Upper Air Data Extracted from TAPM ........................................ 54
Table 33:
Table 34:
Summary of Annual Wind Speed Statistics, 2005 through 2010. ....................... 56
Table 35:
Particle Size Distribution used in the Dispersion Modelling. ............................... 67
Table 36:
Source Characteristics of Existing Emission Sources ......................................... 68
Table 37:
Source Characteristics of the Bemax Stacks . .................................................. 69
(1)
__________________________________________________________________________
4
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Table 38:
Source Characteristics of Project-Related Emission Sources Scenario A ....... 70
Table 39:
Source Characteristics of Project-Related Emission Sources Scenario A ....... 70
Table 38:
Source Characteristics of Project-Related Emission Sources Scenario B ....... 72
Table 39:
Source Characteristics of Project-Related Emission Sources Scenario B ....... 72
Table 40
Comparison of Observational Data and Model Output for the 24-Hour Average
Concentration of PM10 for the Model Validation Period 01/07/08 through
31/12/10. ............................................................................................................. 74
Table 41:
Summary of Results for the 24-Hour Average Ground-Level Concentration of

PM10 for the Existing Environment (Maximum Year Scenario) based on Hourly
Meteorology, 2005. ............................................................................................. 81
Table 42:

Meteorology, 2006. ............................................................................................. 81
Table 43:

Meteorology, 2007. ............................................................................................. 82
Table 44:

Meteorology, 2008. ............................................................................................. 82
Table 45:

Meteorology, 2009. ............................................................................................. 83
Table 46:

Meteorology, 2010. ............................................................................................. 83
Table 47:

Meteorology, 2005 through 2010. ....................................................................... 84
Figures
Figure 1:
Location of the Four TEOM Monitoring Sites .........................................................9
Figure 2:
Estuary Drive TEOM and Wind Speed and Wind Direction Monitoring............... 10
Figure 3:
Location of Estuary Drive TEOM Relative to the Port Activities .......................... 11
Figure 4:
Scatter Plot of the Five-Minute Average Concentration of PM10 as a Function of

Wind Direction, Estuary Drive, 01/07/08-31/12/10. ............................................. 11
Figure 5:
Timeseries of the 24-Hour Average Concentration of PM10, Estuary Drive,

3
01/07/08-31/12/10. The Project Goal is 50 g/m . .............................................. 12
__________________________________________________________________________
5
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 6:
Location of Naval Cadet, Stirling Street and Workshop Monitoring Sites Relative
to Port Activities. ................................................................................................. 12
Figure 7:
Fifteen Highest 24-Hour Average Concentrations of PM10, 01/07/08-31/12/10.

3
The Project Goal is 50 g/m . ............................................................................. 13
Figure 8:
Co-located PM10 and TSP TEOMs at the Stirling Street Monitoring Location
(looking east) ....................................................................................................... 14
Figure 9:
Timeseries of the 24-Hour Average Concentration of TSP, Stirling Street,

3
01/07/08-31/12/10. The Project Goal is 90 g/m . .............................................. 15
Figure 10:
Ten Highest 24-Hour Average Concentrations of TSP at the Stirling Street

3
Monitoring Location, 01/07/08-31/12/10. The Project Goal is 90 g/m . ............ 15
Figure 11:
Dust Deposition Monitoring Locations (indicative only), 06/04 through 08/05

(Source: ATA Environmental, 2006). .................................................................. 16
Figure 12:
Export of Material through the Port (kg), 2005-2010. ......................................... 19
Figure 13:
Import of Material through the Port (kg), 2005-2010. .......................................... 19
Figure 14:
Location of Wind Fields Extracted From the 100 m resolution CALMET Domain
for use in Generating Wind Speed Dependent Emission Factors, 2005-2010. .. 21
Figure 15:
Location of WAPRES (Blue) and Bemax (Yellow) Activities near Berth 3. Material
Storage and Handling near Berth 8 (orange). (Indicative only). ......................... 22
Figure 16:
Sample Timeseries of the Emission Rate (g/s) used for the Validation Period
(1)
(01/07/08 through 31/12/10) . Berth 1 Ship Loading (upper) and Berth 4 Ship
Loading (lower). .................................................................................................. 28
Figure 17:
Infrastructure Layout and Dust Emission Sources. ............................................. 34
Figure 18:
Meteorological Modelling Methodology Overview............................................... 39
Figure 19:
Example of Issues Caused by the Simultaneous Use of Observational Data and

Numerically Simulated Wind Fields. Numerical Wind Fields Included (upper) and
Excluded (lower). ................................................................................................ 40
Figure 20:
Location of Monitoring Sites ................................................................................ 41
Figure 21:
Areal Extent of CALMET Domains ...................................................................... 44
Figure 22:
Terrain used for the CALMET 3km Resolution Grid ........................................... 45
Figure 23:
Comparison of Default TAPM land use (left) and ESA Mapped Land Use (right) ...
......................................................................................................................... 46
Figure 24:
Location of Upper Air Data Extracted from TAPM .............................................. 47
Figure 25:
Location of Surface Data ..................................................................................... 48
Figure 26:
Terrain ................................................................................................................. 49
Figure 27:
Comparison of Default TAPM land use (left) and ESA Mapped Land Use (right) ...
......................................................................................................................... 50
__________________________________________________________________________
6
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 28:
Location of Surface Data and Upper Air Data..................................................... 52
Figure 29:
Terrain used in the 100 m Resolution CALMET 100m Grid ............................... 53
Figure 30:
Comparison of Default TAPM land use (left) and Manually Generated Land Use
(right). .................................................................................................................. 53
Figure 31: Location of Surface and Upper Air Data ................................................................ 55

Figure 32:
Location of the Timeseries of Wind Fields Extracted From the Outer Harbour And
Estuary Drive. ...................................................................................................... 56
Figure 33:
Percentile of Annual Wind Speeds, Outer Harbour (upper) and Estuary Drive
(lower), 2005 Through 2010. ............................................................................... 57
Figure 34:
Quarterly Wind Rose Composites for the Six Year Period 2005 through 2010. . 58
Figure 35:
Quarterly Wind Roses, 2005. .............................................................................. 59
Figure 36:
Figure 37:
Figure 38:
Figure 39:
Figure 40:
Figure 41:
Timeseries of Manually Edited Hourly Beacon 10 Data. Calibration Period

01/05/11 through 10/07/2011. ............................................................................. 66
Figure 42:
Location of Existing Emission Sources ............................................................... 69
Figure 43:
Location of Project-Related Emission Sources Scenario 1 ................................ 71
Figure 43:
Location of Project-Related Emission Sources Scenario 2 ................................ 73
Figure 44:
Percentile Plots of the 24-Hour Average Concentration of PM10 for the Model
Validation Period. Estuary Drive (top), Stirling Street (lower left) and Workshop
(lower right). ........................................................................................................ 75
Figure 45:
Atmospheric Stability Class Frequency, 2005 through 2010 (CALMET). ........... 76
Figure 46:
Scatter Plots of Wind Direction versus Concentration of PM10 for the Model
Validation Period. Estuary Drive Observations (upper) and Model Predictions
(lower). ................................................................................................................ 77
Figure 47:
Scatter Plots of Wind Speed versus Concentration of PM10 for the Model
(lower). ................................................................................................................ 78
Figure 48:
Scatter Plots of Concentration of PM10 versus Hour of Day for the Model
(lower). ................................................................................................................ 79
Figure 49:
Scatter Plot of Stability Class versus Concentration of PM 10 for the Model

Validation Period. Model Predictions. ................................................................. 80
__________________________________________________________________________
7
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Appendix A
Analysis of Ambient Air Data
This appendix presents data from the Estuary Drive, Stirling Street, Workshop and Naval
Cadets ambient air (TEOM) monitoring sites for the period 01/07/08 through 31/12/10. This
period was selected based on communication with the Bunbury Port Authority (BPA) that data
prior to this period was believe to be less reliable than that considered here. The objective of
the data review and analysis was not to conduct a detailed quality check and analysis, but to
develop an overview of air quality in the vicinity of the port and to develop conservative
estimates of PM10 and TSP background concentrations. The results of the analysis of the
TEOM data will also be used for comparison with model output in Appendix G.
Also included in this appendix is a brief summary of the results of 12 months of dust
deposition gauge monitoring that was undertaken in 2005-2006 (ATA Environmental, 2006).
A number of previous studies have included a more detailed analysis of the data. The reader
is directed to the documents listed below for more information.
Relevant appendices include:
Appendix G: Dispersion Model Validation for the Period 01/07/08 through 31/12/10
Documentation relevant to this appendix includes (but may not be limited to):
ATA Environmental (2006): Bunbury Port Authority - Results of Deposition Dust

Monitoring Bunbury Port. Version 2, Report No: 2005/232.
Air Assessments (2009): Bunbury Port Dust Buffer Assessment.
Environmental Alliances Pty Ltd (2007): Review of Ambient Dust Data Collected on behalf
of Bunbury Port Authority.
Environmental Alliances Pty Ltd (2011): Review of Bunbury Port Authority Ambient Dust
Data (2007-2010).
A.1
Data Locations and Availability
Presented in the following table is a summary of the data set that was made available for the
purposes of this assessment. The location of the sites is depicted in Figure 1 .
__________________________________________________________________________
8
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 1:
Location of the Four TEOM Monitoring Sites
Table 1:
Monitoring Locations, Parameters Monitored, and Data Availability
Station
Name
Description
Parameters
Monitored
Data Availability
Estuary
Drive
BPA operated met

and particulate
(TEOM) monitoring
station
BPA operated
particulate (TEOM)
monitoring station
BPA operated
particulate (TEOM)
monitoring station
BPA operated
particulate (TEOM)
monitoring station
PM10, WS,
WD
PM10:June2006 June2008
(unreliable dataset)
PM10:July2008 June2011
Met: (see following table)
PM10: July 2008 June2011
TSP: July2008 June2011
Stirling
Street
Workshop
Naval
Cadets
Table 2:
Northings
GDA 94
(Km)
6311.839
374.722
6311.577
PM10
PM10: July 2008 June2011
375.822
6311.324
PM10
PM10: June2009June2011
373.408
6312.838
Data Availability of Meteorological Data Associated with the TEOM

Monitoring Sites.
Station
Estuary Drive
PM10, TSP
Eastings
GDA 94
(km)
376.876
2005
Wind
Speed
0.0
Wind
Direction
0.0
2006
0.0
Year
Temp
RH
Pressure
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2007
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2008
50.3
50.3
0.0
0.0
0.0
2009
99.9
99.9
0.0
0.0
0.0
2010
100.0
100.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Note: Cells have been colour-coded based on percentage availability of data: 0% 50% Red, 50% 75% Orange,
75% 95% Blue, 95 % 100% Green
__________________________________________________________________________
9
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
A.2
Particulate Matter as PM10
Presented in Figure 4 is a scatter plot of the 5-minute average PM10 data from the Estuary
Drive monitoring location as a function of wind direction. Wind direction data is from the 10 m
tower located off Estuary Drive, in close proximity to the TEOM (Figure 2). The data highlights
the influence of emissions of particulate matter associated with activities at the port at this
location with the signal of port activities clearly evident in the wind direction band between c.
250 and 315 degrees (from north) (Figure 3).
Presented in Figure 5 is a time series of the 24-hour average concentration of PM10 calculated
using data obtained from the Estuary Drive monitoring site. The 24-hour average has been
3
obtained using a conservative approach in which only 5-minute data greater than 0.01 g/m
has been included in the averaging period. A 75% data availability criterion was also adopted.
The time series indicates that during the period 01/07/08 through 31/12/10, the NEPM
3
standard of 50 g/m for the 24-hour average concentration of PM10 was exceeded on 5
occasions. (Note that these exceedences were investigated in detail in Environmental
Alliances (2011) and the reader is directed to this report for more information.)
Figure 2:
Estuary Drive TEOM and Wind Speed and Wind Direction Monitoring
__________________________________________________________________________
10
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 3:
Location of Estuary Drive TEOM Relative to the Port Activities

N
(Source Google Maps)
Figure 4:
Scatter Plot of the Five-Minute Average Concentration of PM 10 as a

Function of Wind Direction, Estuary Drive, 01/07/08-31/12/10.
__________________________________________________________________________
11
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 5:
Timeseries of the 24-Hour Average Concentration of PM 10, Estuary Drive,

3
01/07/08-31/12/10. The Project Goal is 50 g/m .
PM10 data is also collected at the Stirling Street, Workshop and Naval Cadet monitoring sites
(Figure 6).
Figure 6:
Location of Naval Cadet, Stirling Street and Workshop Monitoring Sites

Relative to Port Activities.
__________________________________________________________________________
12
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Presented in Table 3 is a summary of the percentage of days for which a 24-hour average
concentration was able to be calculated based on the criteria noted above. Note that the
Naval Cadet TEOM was commissioned in late May, 2009.
Presented in Figure 7 are the 15 highest 24-hour average concentration of PM10 for each of
the four TEOM monitoring locations for the period 01/07/08 through 31/12/10. The project
3
goal (based on the NEPM standard) of 50 g/m has been included in the figure. The plot
indicates that the project goal has been exceeded a total of between 4 to 6 times during this
period depending on the location. Note that the NEPM allows for 5 exceedences per year to
account for natural incidences of elevated levels of PM10 such as those due to dust storms,
bush fires etc.
th
th
Note that exceedences of the project goal that occurred on the 28 and 29 of April 2010
were associated with elevated levels of PM10 (and TSP) recorded at all monitoring sites
indicating that the exceedences were related to a regional event. Future references to the
monitoring data set have had the data for this period removed.
Table 3:
Year
Percentage Data Availability of PM10 24-Hour Average Concentration

Estimates, 01/07/08 through 31/12/10.
Stirling Street
Workshop
Estuary Drive
Naval Cadet
94.6%
91.8%
100.0%
0.0%
2009
98.6%
96.2%
96.4%
53.7%
2010
97.0%
98.4%
97.5%
95.6%
2008
(1)
Note (1): Based on data from 01/07/08 through 31/12/08
Figure 7:
Fifteen Highest 24-Hour Average Concentrations of PM 10, 01/07/08-31/12/10.

3
The Project Goal is 50 g/m .
__________________________________________________________________________
13
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
A.3
Particulate Matter as TSP
TSP data is only available from the Stirling Street monitoring location (Figure 6) which
consists of co-located PM10 and TSP TEOMs (Figure 8). Note that the TEOM units are not
housed in the same cabinet and that the intakes are displaced by a few metres. Port activities
are primarily to the north and northwest at this location.
A summary of data availability based on the 24-hour average concentration of TSP is
presented in Table 4.
The time series of the 24-hour average concentration of TSP presented in Figure 9 and the
10 highest 24-hour average concentrations presented in Figure 10, suggests that the project
3
goal of 90 g/m has been exceeded twice during the period 01/07/08 through 31/12/10.
th
th
These exceedences occurred on the 28 and 29 of April 2010 at which time elevated levels
of PM10 were recorded at all monitoring sites which suggests that the exceedences are
attributable to a regional event. Data for this period has been removed from the dataset.
Table 4:
Percentage data availability 24-hour average concentrations of PM 10,

01/07/08-31/12/10.
Year
2008
Stirling Street
(1)
94.6%
2009
96.7%
2010
97.8%
Note (1): Based on data from 01/07/08 through 31/12/08
Figure 8:
Co-located PM10 and TSP TEOMs at the Stirling Street Monitoring Location
(looking east)
__________________________________________________________________________
14
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 9:
Timeseries of the 24-Hour Average Concentration of TSP, Stirling Street,

3
01/07/08-31/12/10. The Project Goal is 90 g/m .
Figure 10: Ten Highest 24-Hour Average Concentrations of TSP at the Stirling Street
3
Monitoring Location, 01/07/08-31/12/10. The Project Goal is 90 g/m .
__________________________________________________________________________
15
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
A.4
Dust Deposition
Illustrated in Figure 11 are the locations of the eight dust deposition monitoring sites that were
used in a study conducted on behalf of the Bunbury Port Authority for the c. 14 month period
from June 2004 through August 2005 (ATA Environmental, 2006).
Presented in Table 5 are the results of the monitoring program for the total solids and the
amount of salt (as NaCl) that was contained in each sample. Results suggest that the NSW
2
DECCW goal of 4 g/m /month was frequently exceeded. However, the results also suggest
that the samples contained a significant fraction of salts at most locations throughout the year
though salt levels were particularly elevated during the winter months.
Figure 11: Dust Deposition Monitoring Locations (indicative only), 06/04 through 08/05
(Source: ATA Environmental, 2006).
__________________________________________________________________________
16
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Table 5:
Date
Dust Deposition Gauge Results (g/m /month), 06/04 through 08/05 (Source:
2
ATA Environmental, 2006). NSW DECC Goal is 4 g/m /month. Exceedences
are indicated by the Red Text.
Austral Pde East
Total
Salt
24/06/2004
5.1
26/07/2004
4.5
29/08/2004
Austral Pde West

Total
Salt
4.5
8.1
5.1
5.8
28/09/2024
3.2
28/10/2004
26.9
19/11/2004
Koombana Drive
Total
Salt
4.1
1.3
5.4
7.7
9.2
2.4
1.8
7.9
3.4
3.8
1.5
26/12/2004
1.4
26/01/2005
25/02/2005
27/03/2005
Casuarina Drive
Total
Salt
4.4
1.5
4.5
1.5
2.6
5.7
10.1
1.7
3.1
2.4
2.6
3.9
0.7
5.8
2.8
3.3
1.1
0.6
3.3
1.5
0.3
2.2
0.2
12.8
4.8
3.9
0.7
0.8
0.1
4.7
10.8
7.8
0.6
5.5
0.1
4.6
0.1
2.4
0.1
3.6
0.5
3.1
0.2
1.7
0.4
2.9
0.5
29/04/2005
4.1
0.6
1.7
0.8
3.2
0.8
29/05/2005
12.8
6.8
3.1
8.3
5.5
8.3
7.8
28/06/2005
7.6
76.5
1.2
5.9
2.1
26/07/2005
5.9
2.7
2.1
3.9
3.3
6.5
Date
Mary Street
Total
Haig Cres
Salt
24/06/2004
4.5
3.4
26/07/2004
4.6
29/08/2004
28/09/2024
28/10/2004
Total
Estuary Drive
Salt
Total
6.3
4.4
0.9
3.1
5.4
1.3
1.3
1.6
Willis Street
Salt
Total
Salt
4.5
3.4
5.9
1.3
0.7
5.6
1.7
9.3
2.4
3.2
5.7
10.1
1.5
1.8
1.9
1.4
1.9
1.6
0.7
2.5
1.4
2.2
0.7
5.2
0.6
7.1
19/11/2004
1.4
0.5
4.7
1.5
1.6
0.5
1.3
26/12/2004
1.3
0.2
2.3
0.5
2.2
0.2
2.4
0.5
26/01/2005
0.9
0.1
0.8
1.2
0.3
25/02/2005
2.8
0.1
4.1
0.1
1.9
3.6
0.1
27/03/2005
1.4
0.3
2.2
0.3
1.1
0.2
1.9
0.3
29/04/2005
1.2
0.4
2.4
0.4
1.5
0.5
2.7
0.5
29/05/2005
6.8
2.8
8.7
2.1
5.7
0.1
2.8
2.3
28/06/2005
2.5
1.3
3.4
1.7
4.2
1.4
2.8
1.2
26/07/2005
1.7
2.9
2.9
7.9
2.2
4.7
1.7
Notes: Exceedences of the NSW DECC goal of 4 g/m 2/month are indicated by the red text.
Cells highlighted in brown contain suspect data (ATA Environmental, 2006)
__________________________________________________________________________
17
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Appendix B
Development of the Emissions Inventory for

the Existing Environment
This appendix presents the methodology used to develop the site-based emissions inventory
for existing port operations. The current assessment has relied heavily on the methodology
and findings of previous studies. In particular, information was obtained from the following:
SKM (2006): Bunbury Port Dust Modelling. June 2006
Bunbury Port Authority. March 2009.
Bunbury Port Authority website http://www.byport.com.au/
Port Throughputs and Ship Movements
B.1.1
For the purposes of this assessment, AED has reviewed ship movements through the port for
the period 2005 through 2010. Imported and exported tonnages of the materials of particular
interest to this assessment are summarised in Table 6 and presented graphically in Figure 12
and Figure 13 for exports and imports respectively.
Table 6:
Berth
1
3
4
5
6
8
8
8
8
through 31/12/10 (tonnes).
Material
Mineral Sands
Wood Chips
Alumina
Mineral Sands
Alumina
Mineral Sands
Woodchips
Spodumene
Silicon Sands
I
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2005
E
203
865
8,584
56
0
746
215
142
375
2006
I
0
0
0
135
0
0
0
0
0
E
230
964
5,991
53
2,868
795
218
212
248
2007
I
0
0
0
185
0
18
0
0
0
E
234
954
5,788
59
3,488
755
267
228
217
2008
I
0
0
0
249
0
0
0
0
0
E
205
968
5,935
48
3,425
652
287
216
174
2009
I
0
0
0
199
0
0
0
0
0
E
164
821
6,123
48
3,336
499
393
218
201
2010
I
0
0
0
202
0
70
0
0
0
E
126
1,041
6,134
20
3,599
484
433
310
287
__________________________________________________________________________
18
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 12: Export of Material through the Port (kg), 2005-2010.
Figure 13: Import of Material through the Port (kg), 2005-2010.
__________________________________________________________________________
19
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
B.2
Emission Sources, Emission Rates and Applied Controls
This section presents the emission sources, emission rates and assumed controls based on
the location of activities within the port. Due to the nature and extent of the various activities,
emission sources have been grouped by Berth and material for ease of presentation.
Activities with Wind Speed Dependent Emissions
B.2.1
Emissions of dust associated with some activities were assumed to have a slight wind speed
dependency of the form:
EF = E (Ws/5)
1.2
Where EF is the wind speed dependent emission factor, E is the original emission factor which
is assumed to be applicable at wind speeds of 5 m/s, and Ws is the hourly wind speed.
This wind speed dependency was applied to conveyor transfer points, ship loading and
unloading, front end loading, truck dumping, and some general activities and vehicle
movements.
Wind Erosion
B.2.2
Estimates of the amount of dust that is generated as a result of wind erosion of stockpiles,
and exposed areas was based on the formula of Shao et al (1996):
2
PM10 (g/m /s) = k [ Ws (1-(WsT )/(Ws )]
for Ws > WsT
PM10 (g/m /s) = 0
for Ws < WsT
Where Ws is the wind speed and WsT is the wind speed threshold for that substance.
Following the methodology of Air Assessments (2009), the values for the parameters used for
the purposes of the dispersion modelling were as summarised in the following table. Note that
the adopted k values were based on the model validation exercise that was undertaken as
part of Air Assessment study. The value for the Bemax area in particular was noted as high
and lead to an annual emissions rate of 2.0 kg/ha/hr which is an order of magnitude larger
than the NPI default factor of 0.2 kg/hr. (Results of the dispersion modelling, Appendix G,
does suggest that wind erosion may be significantly overestimated.)
Table 7:
(1)
Wind Erosion of Stockpiles and Exposed Areas .
Location
Berth 3 Wood chips
Berth 8 Wood Chips
Emission Rate
(g/m2/s)
Area
(ha)
Control
Hours Applied
1.65 x 10-6
4.0
20%
Wind Speed > 5 m/s
-6
1.65 x 10
2.0
0%
Wind Speed > 5 m/s
Berth 8 Bare area and spillage
-6
4.125 x 10
0.5
0%
Wind Speed > 5 m/s
Bemax Facility
4.125 x 10-6
1.2
0%
Wind Speed > 5 m/s
Note (1): Based on information provided in Air Assessments (2009)
__________________________________________________________________________
20
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Presented in Figure 14 are the locations at which wind fields were extracted from the
CALMET 100 m resolution grid (Appendix D) for the purposes of generating wind speed
dependent emissions.
Figure 14: Location of Wind Fields Extracted From the 100 m resolution CALMET
Domain for use in Generating Wind Speed Dependent Emission Factors,
2005-2010.
B.2.3
Emission Factors and Controls for Dust Generating Activities
Summarised in the following tables are the:
Dust generating activities associated with material handling of mineral sands at the Ports
berths that were included in the dust dispersion modelling;
Uncontrolled emission rate of dust associated with these activities;
Applied controls;
Percentage of the material through the port that is assumed to be handled as indicated;
Whether or not the emissions associated with the activity are assumed to be wind speed
dependent; and
Hours of operation that was assumed to apply to each activity.
For ease of presentation this information has been grouped by Berth and sub-grouped by the
type of material handled i.e. woodchips, mineral sands, silica sands, spodumene or alumina.
There are three additional areas of activities at the port that contribute to overall dust
emissions from the site. These include the WAPRES wood products processing and handling
operations and the Bemax mineral sands processing facility both of which are located near
Berth 3 (Figure 15). The third includes wood chip and materials storage and handling near
Berth 8.
__________________________________________________________________________
21
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 15: Location of WAPRES (Blue) and Bemax (Yellow) Activities near Berth 3.
Material Storage and Handling near Berth 8 (orange). (Indicative only).
Table 8:
Mineral Sands at Berth 1: Activities, Emission Factors, Controls, and Hours

of Operation
Uncontrolled
Emission
Factor
(kg/tonne)
Applied
Control
Percentage
of material
0.03
75%
40%
7-5 weekdays
34.0(1)
0.03
75%
30%
7-5 weekdays
25.5(1)
0.03
75%
60%
7-5 weekdays
0.03
75%
40%
same as ship
@ B1
0.03
75%
40%
same as ship
@ B1
0.03
95%
60%
same as ship
@ B1
Conveyor transfer point
0.03
95%
60%
same as ship
@ B1
Conveyor transfer point
0.03
95%
60%
same as ship
@ B1
Ship loading B1
FEL of mineral sands in
sheds to trucks for export
via B8
0.03
75%
100%
same as ship
@ B1
0.03
75%
Assumed
200 tph
same as ship
@ B8
51.1(1)
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B1
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B1
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B1
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B1
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B1
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B1
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B1
Activity
Truck dumping of mineral
sands in sheds for export
via B1
sands in sheds for export
via B5
sands at road hopper for
transport to silos for
export via B1
FEL of mineral sands in
sheds to trucks for export
via B1
Truck dumping at hopper
to conveyors (for ship load
out - B1)
Transport of mineral
sands from silo to ship
load out B1 via conveyor
WSD
Hours of
operation
Throughput
(tonnes/hour)
Note(1): Based on the maximum annual throughput (2005-2010) of an estimated 85.11 tonnes/hour
__________________________________________________________________________
22
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Table 9:
Woodchips at Berth 3: Activities, Emission Factors, Controls, and Hours of

Operation
Activity
Units
Uncontrolled
Emission
Factor/ Rate(2)
Truck dumping
Front End
loader
Vehicle
Movement,
chippers etc(2)
Vehicle
Movement,
chippers etc(2)
kg/tonne
0.008
80%
100%
kg/tonne
0.008
80%
100%
Hours of
operation
7-5
weekdays
7-5
weekdays
g/s
1.0
n/a
7-5
weekdays
g/s
1.0
n/a
7-5
weekdays
Conveyor
kg/tonne
0.008
60%
100%
same as
ship @ B3
Transfer Point
kg/tonne
0.008
60%
100%
same as
ship @ B3
Ship load out
kg/tonne
0.008
60%
100%
same as
ship @ B3
Applied
Control
Percentage
of material
WSD
Throughput
(tonnes/hour)
378.5(1)
378.5(1)
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B3
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B3
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B3
Note(2): Based on emission rates presented in Air Assessments (2009)
Table 10:
Activity
train unloading
conveyor
transfer point
conveyor
transfer point
Alumina at Berth 4 and Berth 6: Activities, Emission Factors, Controls, and

Hours of Operation
Uncontrolled
Emission
Factor/Rate
(kg/tonne)
0.03
99%
100%
0.03
98%
100%
0.03
98%
100%
Hours of
operation
every 2 hours for
2 hours
every 2 hours for
2 hours
every 2 hours for
2 hours
Control
Percentage
of material
WSD
conveyor
transfer point
0.03
98%
100%
same as ship @
B4
Ship load out
0.03
85%
100%
same as ship @
B4
conveyor
transfer point
0.03
98%
100%
same as ship @
B6
Ship load out
0.03
85%
100%
same as ship @
B6
Throughput
(tonnes/hour)
2,222.1(1)
2,222.1(1)
2,222.1(1)
Based on actual
rates for ships @
B4
Based on actual
rates for ships @
B4
Based on actual
rates for ships @
B6
Based on actual
rates for ships @
B6
Note(1): Based on the maximum annual throughput (2005-2010) of an estimated 2,222.1 tonnes/hour
__________________________________________________________________________
23
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Table 11:

of Operation
Activity
Truck dumping
(exported)
Truck hauling of
imported Mineral
sands from Berth 5
to Bemax Facility
Ship load out/in
Table 12:
Units
Emission
Factor/Rate
Control
Percentage
of material
kg/
tonne
0.03
50%
100%
same as
ship @ B5
g/s
0.43
n/a
n/a
same as
ship @ B5
same as
ship @ B5
kg/
tonne
0.03
50%
100%
WSD
Hours of
operation
Throughput
(tonnes/hour)
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B5
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B5
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B5

of Operation
Uncontrolled
Emission
Factor
(kg/tonne)
Control
Percentage
of material
0.03
75%
100%
same as
ship @ B8
Transfer point
0.03
95%
100%
same as
ship @ B8
Transfer point
0.03
95%
100%
same as
ship @ B8
Ship load out
0.03
75%
100%
same as
ship @ B8
Loading of trucks to Bemax

facility (imported)
0.03
75%
imported
same as
ship @ B8
Activity
Truck dumping (material
trucked from Bemax Facilty)
to road hopper
WSD
Hours of
operation
Throughput
(tonnes/hour)
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B8
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B8
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B8
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B8
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B8
__________________________________________________________________________
24
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Table 13:
Activity
Truck dumping
Front End
loader
Truck dumping
(material
trucked) to road
hopper
Wood Chips at Berth 8: Activities, Emission Factors, Controls, and Hours

of Operation
Uncontrolled
Emission
Factor
(kg/tonne)
Control
Percentage
of material
0.008
85%
100%
7-5 weekdays
157.5(1)
0.008
85%
100%
7-5 weekdays
0.008
65%
100%
same as ship
@ B8
157.5(1)
Based on actual
rates for ships @
B8
WSD
Hours of
operation
Transfer point
0.008
95%
100%
same as ship
@ B8
Transfer point
0.008
95%
100%
same as ship
@ B8
Ship load out
0.008
60%
100%
same as ship
@ B8
Throughput
(tonnes/hour)
Based on actual
rates for ships @
B8
Based on actual
rates for ships @
B8
Based on actual
rates for ships @
B8
Table 14:
Spodumene at Berth 8: Activities, Emission Factors, Controls, and Hours

of Operation
Activity
Uncontrolled
Emission
Factor
(kg/tonne)
Control
Percentage
of material
WSD
Hours of
operation

trucked) to road hopper
0.03
75%
100%
same as
ship @ B8
Transfer point
0.03
95%
100%
same as
ship @ B8
Transfer point
0.03
95%
100%
same as
ship @ B8
Ship load out
0.03
75%
100%
same as
ship @ B8
Throughput
(tonnes/hour)
Based on actual
rates for ships @
B8
Based on actual
rates for ships @
B8
Based on actual
rates for ships @
B8
Based on actual
rates for ships @
B8
__________________________________________________________________________
25
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Table 15:
Silica Sands at Berth 8: Activities, Emission Factors, Controls, and Hours

of Operation
Uncontrolled
Emission
Factor
(kg/tonne)
Control
Percentage
of material

trucked) to road hopper
0.03
75%
100%
same as
ship @ B8
Transfer point
0.03
95%
100%
same as
ship @ B8
Transfer point
0.03
95%
100%
same as
ship @ B8
Ship load out
0.03
75%
100%
same as
ship @ B8
Activity
Table 16:
WSD
Hours of
operation
Throughput
(tonnes/hour)
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B8
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B8
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B8
Based on
actual rates for
ships @ B8
The Bemax Mineral Sands Processing Operations (Berth 3): Activities,

Emission Factors, Controls, and Hours of Operation
Uncontrolled
Emission Factor
(g/s)
Activity
Control
Percentage of
material
WSD
Hours of operation
combination
n/a
7-5 weekdays
combination
0.5
n/a
outside 7-5 weekdays
Table 17:
The Bemax Mineral Sands Processing Operations (Berth 3): Stack Sources
(1)
and Source Characteristics .
Stack Diameter
(m)
Temperature
(K)
Exit Velocity
(m/s)
Modelled Emission
Rate (g/s)
Non Mag Drier
0.90
320.14
12.60
0.47
HT Drier
0.90
325.14
7.40
1.0
Secondary Drier
0.50
311.14
20.50
0.05
ION Blast
1.01
293.14
16.50
0.77
Description
Note (1): Based in information provided in Air Assessments (2009).
__________________________________________________________________________
26
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
B.3
Emissions Scenarios and Emissions Inventory
Two existing scenarios were developed for this assessment. The first scenario considered, as
best as possible, actual port operations during a period for which reliable TEOM data was
available. This scenario forms the basis for the model validation period which is 01/07/08
through 12/31/10. The objective of the model validation scenario was to assess the likely level
of over/under prediction of the model in order to guide selection of the appropriate rank for
the predicted 24-hour average ground level concentration of PM10 (in particular) and TSP.
The second scenario is based on the construction of a worst-case year of port operations
and has been developed based on consideration of the maximum volumes of materials of
interest through each of the berths during the period 2005 through 2010. Based on our review
of the information provided in Section B.1.1 we have selected the following years activities for
the purposes of constructing a worst-case year:
Berth 1: 2008
Berth 5: 2008
Berth 3: 2010
Berth 6: 2010
Berth 4: 2005
Berth 8: 2010
The objective of the worst-case scenario was to highlight the inter-annual variability of the
impact of meteorological conditions on the predicted ground level impacts.
B.3.1
Emissions Inventory for the Model Validation Period
For the purposes of modelling emissions of particulate matter during ship loading and
unloading, we have adopted the methodology utilised by Air Assessments (2009), and have
assumed that ship unloading/loading begins two hours after arrival and ends two hours before
the reported departure time.
Presented in Table 18 is a summary of the emission rates that have been applied for each of
the dust generating activities associated with existing operations at the port for the period
01/07/08 through 31/12/10.
They have been developed using the methodology outlined in the previous sections and
combines both upper estimates of volumes in association with some activities (such as train
unloading) with actual volumes based on actual shipping operations during this same period.
Examples of the temporal variation in the emission rate are presented in Figure 16.
__________________________________________________________________________
27
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 16: Sample Timeseries of the Emission Rate (g/s) used for the Validation
(1)
Period (01/07/08 through 31/12/10) . Berth 1 Ship Loading (upper) and
Berth 4 Ship Loading (lower).
Note (1): Note the different scales
__________________________________________________________________________
28
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Table 18:
Emission Rates (g/s) for the Validation Period 01/07/08 through 31/12/10.
Percentile
Activity
100%
99%
98%
95%
90%
70%
50%
B1 Mineral Sands truck dumping
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.00
B1 Mineral Sands FEL
2.52
1.50
1.02
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
B1 Ship Loading Transfer Point
0.80
0.25
0.15
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
B1 Ship Loading
4.98
1.55
0.96
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
B1 Mineral Sands FEL for Berth 8
1.77
0.67
0.52
0.33
0.13
0.00
0.00
B3 Woodchips Truck Dumping
4.29
2.64
2.44
2.12
1.83
0.99
0.00
B3 Vehicle Movements Woodchips
5.10
3.13
2.90
2.52
2.17
1.18
0.00
B3 Ship Loading Transfer Points Woodchips
3.28
2.05
1.72
1.19
0.65
0.00
0.00
B3 Ship Loading
0.82
0.51
0.43
0.30
0.16
0.00
0.00
63.47
18.27
12.56
6.98
3.73
0.22
0.00
B4B6 Train Unloading
0.19
0.19
0.19
0.19
0.19
0.19
0.09
B4 Alumina Transfer Point Train
1.55
0.77
0.67
0.53
0.42
0.18
0.00
1.55
0.77
0.67
0.53
0.42
0.18
0.00
B4 Alumina Transfer Point Ship Loading
3.18
1.02
0.85
0.64
0.47
0.17
0.05
B4 Ship Loading
1.59
0.51
0.42
0.32
0.24
0.09
0.02
B6 Ship loading
5.19
2.27
1.90
1.40
1.00
0.33
0.00
B5 Truck dumping based on ship times Mineral sands
1.39
0.87
0.43
0.43
0.43
0.00
0.00
B5 Ship loading
4.16
1.96
1.50
0.80
0.21
0.00
0.00
3.44
1.56
1.33
1.14
0.65
0.00
0.00
B8 Ship Loading Transfer Point Mineral Sands
1.46
0.62
0.46
0.25
0.11
0.00
0.00
B8 Ship Loading Mineral Sands
3.64
1.55
1.17
0.63
0.28
0.00
0.00
B8 Mineral Sands FEL imported
0.86
0.17
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
B8 Wood chips Truck dumping
1.84
1.00
0.92
0.79
0.70
0.39
0.00
B8 Truck dumping based on ship times Wood chips
0.46
0.43
0.39
0.38
0.00
0.00
0.00
B8 Ship Loading Transfer Point Woodchips
1.39
0.47
0.28
0.03
0.00
0.00
0.00
B8 Ship Loading Woodchips
1.08
0.53
0.42
0.22
0.00
0.00
0.00
B8 Woodchips Wind Erosion
34.91
5.74
3.82
1.93
0.77
0.00
0.00
B8 Wind Erosion (bare areas)
34.91
5.74
3.82
1.93
0.77
0.00
0.00
B8 truck dumping based on ship times Spodumene
2.26
1.55
1.36
0.34
0.00
0.00
0.00
B8 Ship Loading Transfer Point Spudomene
1.87
0.64
0.21
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
B8 Ship Loading Spudomene
3.48
1.21
0.71
0.10
0.00
0.00
0.00
B8 truck dumping based on ship times Silica sands
3.40
2.39
2.04
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
B8 Ship Loading Transfer Point Silica Sands
1.87
0.64
0.21
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
B8 Ship Loading Silica sands
4.67
1.59
0.52
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Bemax Vehicle Movements
4.10
2.13
1.91
1.54
1.23
0.69
0.44
60.93
17.54
12.06
6.70
3.58
0.21
0.00
B3 Bemax Wind Erosion (open areas)
__________________________________________________________________________
29
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
B.3.2
Emissions Inventory for the Worst-Case Year
Summarised in Table 19 are the emission rates for port activities associated with the worstcase year scenario. Wind speed dependency was included for all relevant activities using
hourly wind fields developed for the period 2005 through 2010.
As was the case for the emission rates associated with the validation period, wind speed
erosion has the largest emission rate.
Table 19:
Emission Rates (g/s) for the Worst Case Year of Port Activities (2005-2010)
Percentile
Activity
100%
99%
98%
95%
90%
70%
50%
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.00
2.52
1.86
1.02
0.58
0.00
0.00
0.00
1.15
0.27
0.17
0.06
0.00
0.00
0.00
B1 Ship Loading
7.21
1.70
1.04
0.37
0.00
0.00
0.00
1.77
0.77
0.63
0.40
0.18
0.00
0.00
4.39
2.82
2.56
2.23
1.93
1.01
0.00
5.22
3.35
3.05
2.65
2.30
1.20
0.00
B3 Ship Loading Transfer Points Woodchips
5.91
2.59
2.13
1.47
0.87
0.00
0.00
B3 Ship Loading
1.48
0.65
0.53
0.37
0.22
0.00
0.00
82.10
23.11
16.33
9.51
5.54
0.92
0.00
0.19
0.19
0.19
0.19
0.19
0.19
0.09
1.62
0.91
0.81
0.65
0.52
0.25
0.00
1.62
0.91
0.81
0.65
0.52
0.25
0.00
3.08
1.40
1.20
0.95
0.74
0.39
0.18
B4 Ship Loading
1.54
0.70
0.60
0.47
0.37
0.19
0.09
B6 Ship loading
8.52
3.10
2.58
1.92
1.39
0.48
0.00
1.27
0.98
0.82
0.43
0.43
0.00
0.00
B5 Ship loading
5.44
2.33
1.83
1.09
0.39
0.00
0.00
3.44
1.49
1.27
0.90
0.60
0.00
0.00
B8 Ship Loading Transfer Point Mineral Sands
4.18
0.69
0.52
0.31
0.16
0.00
0.00
10.45
1.80
1.35
0.81
0.42
0.00
0.00
1.32
0.53
0.33
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
1.84
1.13
1.03
0.89
0.77
0.41
0.00
B8 Truck dumping based on ship times Wood chips
0.46
0.46
0.43
0.38
0.34
0.00
0.00
1.98
0.67
0.47
0.16
0.00
0.00
0.00
1.71
0.78
0.62
0.34
0.00
0.00
0.00
36.13
9.81
6.94
3.98
2.23
0.22
0.00
36.13
9.81
6.94
3.98
2.23
0.22
0.00
B8 truck dumping based on ship times Spodumene
1.91
1.55
1.38
0.59
0.00
0.00
0.00
B8 Ship Loading Transfer Point Spodumene
4.55
0.81
0.44
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
B8 Ship Loading Spodumene
4.95
1.68
1.18
0.40
0.00
0.00
0.00
__________________________________________________________________________
30
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Percentile
Activity
100%
99%
98%
95%
90%
70%
50%
B8 truck dumping based on ship times Silica sands
3.40
2.08
2.04
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
B8 Ship Loading Transfer Point Silica Sands
4.55
0.81
0.44
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
11.39
2.02
1.09
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
4.39
2.82
2.56
2.23
1.93
1.01
0.00
78.81
22.18
15.68
9.13
5.32
0.88
0.00

__________________________________________________________________________
31
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Appendix C
Development of the Emissions Inventory for

Future Emission Sources
This appendix presents the methodology used to develop the project-specific dust emissions
inventory.
C.1
Relevant Documentation
In developing the emissions inventory for project-related dust emission sources, information
was considered from the following sources:
USEPA (1995) AP-42 - Compilation of Air Pollutant Emission Factors, Fifth Edition,
Volume 1 including updates October 1998 and October 2002.
C.2
Project Information
Project-specific information provided by the Client that was used to develop a worst-case 24hour emissions scenario for future Berth 14 dust-generating activities is summarised in the
following table.
Table 20:
Project Information used to Develop Worst Case 24 Hour Emissions

Scenario
Category
Material Parameters
Trains
Parameter
Units
Value
Coal Silt Content
1.3(2)
Coal Moisture Content
14.0(2)
Per day
15
Maximum number of trains

Daily Throughput
Maximum number of ships
Ships
Ship capacity
Tonnes/day
75,000
Tonnes/hour
3,125(1)
Per day
Tonnes/ship
70,000
Ship loading time
Hours/ship
16
Ship load out rate
Tonnes/hour
2,917(3)
Note (1): Based on 24 hours/day. In practice trains will come throughout the day and there will be periods during which train unloading
does not occur. Nonetheless, due to the uncertainty in the train scheduling at this time, it has been assumed that dust
emissions associated with train unloading will occur 24 hours per day. The total airshed loading of dust emissions associated
with this activity is consistent with the appropriate value for the 24- hour load.
Note (2): Based on information provided by Griffith Coal
Note (3): Based on 24 hours/day. Please note the comments associated with Note (1) and the assumptions around airshed loading
over a 24-hour period.
__________________________________________________________________________
32
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
C.3
Emission Sources
Dust emission sources associated with the project include:
Train unloading;
Conveying of material;
Conveyor transfer points;
Stacking of stockpiles;
Reclaiming of product coal from stockpiles; and
Loading of product coal into ships.
Engineer measures that will be incorporated into the design of the infrastructure as they relate
to the management of dust include:
Dust extraction system on shed;
Water misters in the storage sheds;
Partially enclosed train load out with dust extraction associated with the bottom dump
hopper system.
For the purposes of the dust dispersion modelling consideration has been given to the
emission sources outlined in Table 21 and depicted in Figure 17.
Due to the current alignment of the two main sheds, a total of two scenarios were considered.
These project-only emissions scenarios have assumed worst-case 24-hour operations in
which all coal delivered to the port is stacked in one of the two sheds, and ship load out is
assumed to require the operation of the reclaimers within the same shed as the coal stacking
is occurring. This assumption regarding material handling will have the largest potential for
the generation of localized fugitive dusts when compared with the scenario of stacking and
reclaiming from different sheds or the optimal environmental scenario of bypassing all
stacking and reclaiming activities via one of the conveyor bypass options.
Specifically, the Project-only emissions Scenario A assumes all stacking and reclaiming
activities are occurring within Shed 2 while the Project-only emissions Scenario B assumes all
stacking and reclaiming activities are occurring within Shed 3.
Emission sources and source characteristics are detailed in Appendix F.
__________________________________________________________________________
33
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 17: Infrastructure Layout and Dust Emission Sources.
__________________________________________________________________________
34
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Table 21:
Project Related Dust Emission Sources
Category
Conveyors
Emission Source
Emission Source
CV_1 (Shed 3 rising conveyer)
CV_Shed_1 ( Shed 1 Staking conveyer)
CV_2 (Shed 3 conveyer)
CV_3 (Shuttle building to TP7 (above ground)
CV_Shed_1 ( Shed 1 Reclaim conveyer)

CV_8 (Shed 2 conveyer)
CV_9 (Bypass Conveyer between shed 1 and 2)
CV_11 (Shed 2 to Shuttle building2)
CV_12 (Shuttle building2 to Berth)
CV_13 (Shed 1 to Shuttle building2)
CV_14 (Berth Conveyer at Ship load out)
CV_18 (Truck load out to Shuttle building )
Stockpile Loading
(inside shed)
Shed 1 Track Hopper
Stockpile
Unloading (inside
sheds)
Shed 1A Scraper Reclaimer
Shed 2B Scraper Reclaimer
Ventilation Outlet 1A (Shed_1)
Ventilation Outlet 3B (Shed_3)
Ventilation Outlet 3C(Shed_3)
Ventilation Outlet 3D (Shed_3)
Shed Ventilation
Shed 3 Track Hopper
Shed 2 Track Hopper

Ventilation Outlet 2C (Shed_2)
SHED_TR (Ventilation Shuttle building1)
SHED_SH (Ventilation Shuttle building2)
TP_1
TP_13
TP_2
TP_14
TP_3
TP_15
TP_4
TP_16
TP_5
TP_17
TP_6
TP_18
TP_7
TP_19
TP_8
TP_20
TP_9
TP_21
TP_10
TP_22
TP_11
TR_SHED
TP_12
SH_SHED
Train Unloading
P1_TLI (West side of train enclosure)
P2_TLI (East side of train enclosure)
Ship load out
P3_SLO
P4_SLO
Transfer Points
__________________________________________________________________________
35
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
C.4
Emission Factors
Emission factors for dust generating activities associated with the project were developed
based on the methodology outlined in the NPI Emissions Estimation Manual (EETM) for
Mining (June 2011).
As the conveyors are fully enclosed, it has been assumed that during operation, the
conveyors will be a negligible source of dust.
Although enclosed, we have adopted a conservative approach and have assumed that the
transfer points are associated with some fugitive dust emissions.
Dust emissions generated within the shed have been used to estimate the emissions of dust
from the sheds ventilation outlets.
A summary of the emission factors and controls that have been applied are included as Table
22.
Table 22:
Emission Factors and Applied Controls
Category
Units
Conveyors
Stockpile Loading
Kg/tonne
Stockpile Unloading
Kg/tonne
Shed Ventilation
Outlets
TSP Emission
Factor
(uncontrolled)
0.004
PM10 Emission
Factor
(uncontrolled)
0.0017
Control
Reason for control
100%
50%
Fully Enclosed
Water Sprays
-
0.004
0.0017
0%
Based on shed
total
Based on shed
total
99%
Dust Extraction System
Main Shed Feeder

Transfer Point
Kg/tonne
0.00011
0.000053
95%
Enclosure Dust
Extraction
All Other Transfer

Points
Kg/tonne
0.00011
0.000053
85%
Enclosure and water

sprays
Train Load Out
Kg/tonne
0.00011
0.000053
65%
Ship Load Out
Kg/tonne
0.00011
0.000053
75%
C.5
Partially Enclosed and

Dust Extraction
Telescopic chute and
Water Sprays
Emissions Inventory
Presented in Table 23 is the emission rate associated with project-related dust generating
activities where the following assumptions apply:
Activities occur 24/7 with the emission rate based on the daily dust loading for the actual
duration of the activity. For example, ship loading may occur for up to 16 hours per day at
a rate of 4375 tonnes/hour or equivalently at an assumed rate of 2917 tonnes per hour
over a 24 hour period. This introduces an equivalent amount of dust into the airshed over
a 24 hour period.
All coal unloaded from the trains is stacked within Shed 2 (Scenario A) or Shed 3
(Scenario B).
__________________________________________________________________________
36
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Ship loading involves reclaiming of coal from Shed 2 (Scenario A) or Shed 3 (Scenario B).
Table 23
Emissions Inventory
TSP Emission
Rate
-
% of
Total
-
PM10 Emission
Rate
-
% of
Total
-
Stockpile Loading
Stockpile Unloading
Shed Ventilation
Outlets (total)
Transfer Points
(total)
Train Unloading
g/s
0.035
18.9%
0.015
17.3%
g/s
0.093
50.4%
0.044
51.4%
g/s
0.034
18.4%
0.016
18.8%
Scenario
Category
Units
Conveyors
Ship Load Out
g/s
0.023
12.3%
0.011
12.5%
g/s
0.184
0.085
Conveyors
Stockpile Loading
Stockpile Unloading
Shed Ventilation
Outlets (total)
Transfer Points
(total)
Train Unloading
g/s
0.035
18.5%
0.015
17.0%
g/s
0.096
51.3%
0.045
52.3%
g/s
0.034
18.1%
0.016
18.4%
g/s
0.023
12.1%
0.011
12.3%
g/s
0.187
0.087
Total
B
Ship Load Out

Total
__________________________________________________________________________
37
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Appendix D
Development of Meteorological Wind Fields
This Appendix presents the methodology used to develop the three dimensional wind fields
used in the dust dispersion modelling and to drive the hydrodynamic model used to predict
the transport and fate of sediments associated with the dredging of Berth 14(PER Appendix 6
Hydrodynamic and Sediment Transport Modelling).
Relevant Appendices include:
Appendix E: Meteorological Wind Fields used for the Purposes of Driving the Coastal
Hydrodynamic Model
Appendix F: Pollutant Dispersion Modelling
D.1
Overview of The Meteorological Modelling Methodology
Presented in Figure 18 is a flow diagram overviewing the methodology used to develop the
meteorological fields used in this assessment. The concept of the methodology includes the
following main key points:
The synoptic fields of The Air Pollution Model (TAPM) developed by the Commonwealth
Scientific and Industrial Research Organisation (CSIRO) were utilised above the height of
the daytime boundary layer (assumed to be c. 1000 m) in order to allow CALMET as
much freedom as possible to develop near-surface flows based on observational data.
The limiting of TAPM to upper air flow fields will eliminate the possibility of areas of
conflict within the horizontal flow field as a result of discrepancies in wind direction
(Figure 19) between observational data and numerically simulated wind fields. Areas of
conflict are instead developed in the vertical profile as opposed to the horizontal flow
fields. Areas of conflict may still result in the horizontal flow field as a result of differences
in the observational flow field though these are assumed to be real flow phenomena and
not artificially produced as a result of the numerical development of the wind fields.
Multiple resolution CALMET (3 km, 1 km and 100 m) grids were developed in order to be
able to incorporate the influence of as much observational data as possible into each of
the grids.
The output from a larger resolution CALMET grid is used as input into a finer resolution
grid.
Numerically simulated wind fields were used from TAPM only for the CALMET 3 km grid
for hours when observational data did not exist from any of the observational data sets.
A total of six years of meteorology was developed 2005 through 2010 for use in the dust
dispersion modelling.
__________________________________________________________________________
38
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 18: Meteorological Modelling Methodology Overview
__________________________________________________________________________
39
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 19: Example of Issues Caused by the Simultaneous Use of Observational Data
and Numerically Simulated Wind Fields. Numerical Wind Fields Included
(upper) and Excluded (lower).
__________________________________________________________________________
40
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
D.2
Meteorological Data Sets Used in the Development of the

Meteorological Wind Fields
Presented in Figure 20 are the locations of the meteorological monitoring sites from which
data was included in the development of the wind fields. (Note that due to issues with data
quality and frequency of availability, Beacon 10 data was only used to develop wind fields for
the 2011 hydrodynamic model calibration period (Appendix E).
Figure 20: Location of Monitoring Sites
Table 24:
Monitoring Locations, Parameters Monitored, and Data Availability
Station
Name
Description
Parameters
Monitored
Data Availability
Estuary
Drive
BPA operated met and

particulate (TEOM)
monitoring station
PM10, WS,
WD
Bunbury
BoM operated
meteorological station
at Bunbury Racetrack
BPA operated
BoM operated
BoM operated
BoM operated
WS, WD, T,
RH, P
PM10:June2006 June2008
(unreliable dataset)
PM10:July2008 June2011
Met: (see following table)
Met: See met availability table
Beacon 3
Busselton
Aero
Busselton
Jetty
Cape
Naturaliste
WS, WD
WS, WD, T,
RH, P
WS, WD, T,
RH, P
WS, WD, T,
RH, P

Eastings
GDA 94
(km)
376.876
Northings
GDA 94
(Km)
6311.839
373.900
6308.347
374.024
6315.284
351.771
6271.533
345.932
6277.508
316.048
6287.389
For the purposes of preparing (in particular) the Bunbury Port Authoritys meteorological data
for use as input into CALMET, the raw data was sampled for a period close (in time) to the
hour for which it was to be applied and that value used to represent the hourly wind fields.
This methodology of sampling of data around the hour as opposed to performing an hourly
average of the data is comparable with the methodology adopted by BoM (typically based on
a 10 minute average) and thus has been adopted here for this assessment.
__________________________________________________________________________
41
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Note that some data processing was required in order to fill gaps, remove obvious outliers,
and or missing data. As noted previously, a detailed QA of all meteorological data supplied
was not undertaken.
Table 25:
Percentage Data Availability of Meteorological Data, 2005 through 2010.
Station
Estuary Drive
Beacon 3
Bunbury
Busselton Aero
Busselton Jetty
Cape Naturaliste
Year
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
Wind
Speed
0.0
0.0
0.0
50.3
99.9
100.0
99.5
96.1
99.8
93.1
98.6
99.1
98.8
99.2
98.9
99.0
99.9
99.9
98.1
98.8
96.0
99.0
99.8
100.0
94.4
96.6
95.0
97.4
98.1
99.7
92.7
98.7
97.5
98.5
97.5
99.9
Wind
Direction
0.0
0.0
0.0
50.3
99.9
100.0
99.5
96.1
99.8
93.1
98.6
99.1
98.8
99.2
98.9
99.0
99.9
99.9
98.1
98.8
96.0
96.5
99.8
100.0
94.4
96.6
95.0
97.4
98.1
99.7
91.0
98.7
97.5
98.5
97.5
99.9
Temp
RH
Pressure
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
98.8
99.2
98.9
99.0
99.9
99.9
98.1
98.8
96.0
99.0
99.8
100.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
92.7
98.7
97.5
98.5
97.5
99.9
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
98.8
99.2
98.9
99.0
99.9
99.9
98.0
98.8
96.0
99.0
99.8
100.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
92.7
98.7
97.5
98.5
97.5
99.9
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
98.8
99.2
98.9
99.0
99.9
99.9
98.1
98.8
96.0
99.0
99.8
99.9
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
92.7
98.7
97.5
98.5
97.5
99.9
Note: Cells have been colour-coded based on percentage availability of data: 0% 50% Red, 50% 75% Orange,
75% 95% Blue, 95 % 100% Green
__________________________________________________________________________
42
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
D.3
TAPM
TAPM (version 4.0.4) was used to develop the initial phase of three-dimensional meteorology
for the larger study region. In general, output from TAPM includes (but is not be limited to)
wind speed, wind direction, temperature, water vapour, cloud, rain, mixing height, and
atmospheric stability. Technical details of the model equations, parameterisations and
numerical methods are described in the technical paper by Hurley (2008). Details of the
TAPM configuration are summarised in Table 26.
Table 26:
TAPM Configuration
Parameter
Years modelled
Units
Value
2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010
Lat, Long
-33.325, 115.675
Local centre coordinates
UTM zone 50 (m)
376675 , 6311899
Number of nested grids
Grid dimensions (nx, ny)
40,40
Number of vertical grid levels (nz)
40
Outermost (Grid 1) spacing (dx, dy)
Km
30,30
Third Innermost (Grid 2) spacing
Km
10,10
Km
3,3
Km
1,1
Local hour
GMT + 8
Local Met Assimilation
Surface vegetation database
Default database at 3-minute grid spacing
Terrain database
Default database at 9-second grid spacing
Grid centre
(dx, dy)
Second Innermost (Grid 3) spacing
(dx, dy)
Innermost (Grid 4) spacing (dx, dy)
No
(1)
(2)
Note (1): Australian vegetation and soil type data provided by CSIRO Wildlife and Ecology.
Note (2): Australian terrain height data from Geoscience Australia
D.4
CALMET
CALMET (version 6.326) was used to simulate meteorological conditions in the Bunbury port
region. CALMET is a diagnostic three dimensional meteorological pre-processor for the
CALPUFF modelling system (developed by Earth Tech, Inc.).
Prognostic output from TAPM was used as upper air data for input (above c. 1000 m) into the
CALMET model. Using high resolution geophysical datasets and surface observational data,
CALMET then develops the higher resolution flow fields to include (in general) the kinematic
effects of terrain, slope flows, blocking effects and 3-dimensional divergence minimisation as
well as differential heating and surface roughness associated with variations in land use
categories across the modelling domain.
Three resolution CALMET grids were developed in order to derive high resolution
meteorological fields at 100 m resolution which was used as input into the CALPUFF
__________________________________________________________________________
43
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
dispersion model. The domain size and grid resolution of these CALMET are specified in
Table 27 and the extent of the CALMET domains is shown in Figure 21.
Table 27:
CALMET Domain Specifications
CALMET Grid
Domain Size
Resolution
Number of Nodes in
Grid Spacing
X and Y
(m)
3 km
123 km x 123 km
41 x 41
3000 x 3000
1 km
41 km x 41 km
41 x 41
1000 x 1000
100 m
10 km x 10 km
101 x 101
100 x 100
Figure 21: Areal Extent of CALMET Domains
__________________________________________________________________________
44
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
The development of each of the three CALMET grids requires input datasets along with the
control file where the CALMET run parameters are specified. These input datasets include:
Geophysical data
Upper air meteorological data
Surface meteorological data
The inputs to CALMET models for the above mentioned datasets for the set of three CALMET
models are discussed in detail in the following sections.
D.4.1
The 3 Kilometre Resolution CALMET Grid
Geophysical dataset
The Geophysical dataset contain terrain and land use information for the modelling domain.
Traditionally, TAPM generated terrain information and land use data are used as an input in
CALMET. However TAPM datasets are coarser than other publically available datasets and
hence these datasets were replaced by high resolution datasets as input for CALMET.
For this assessment, the terrain for the 3 km resolution CALMET grid was extracted from 3arc second (90m) spaced elevation data obtained via NASAs Shuttle Radar Topography
1
Mission (SRTM) in 2000. (Downloaded from USGS website )
A three-dimensional view of the terrain data at 3 km resolution overlayed over the base map
is shown in Figure 22. The figure highlights the relatively flat terrain along the coastline with
the elevation increasing inland.
Figure 22: Terrain used for the CALMET 3km Resolution Grid
http://dds.cr.usgs.gov/srtm/version2_1/SRTM3/Australia/
__________________________________________________________________________
45
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
The land use or land cover data for the modelling domain was derived from the 300 m
resolution Globcover land cover map ( ESA 2010 and UCLouvain, published by European
Space science, Dec 2010). The ESA dataset utilised different classification system than that
used by CALMET and hence the dataset was mapped to adopt the CALMET classification
system.
A comparison between Default TAPM land use and ESA mapped custom land use category
at a CALMET grid resolution of 3 km is shown in Figure 23. As shown in Figure 23, TAPM
default land use database is coarse and does not show urban land use (red) in the vicinity of
the Bunbury port.
Figure 23: Comparison of Default TAPM land use (left) and ESA Mapped Land Use
(right)
Upper air dataset

Upper air data was extracted from TAPM output for the innermost and second innermost grid
at 17 points as shown by yellow circles in Figure 24. The outer 8 yellow circles correspond to
TAPM upper air data extracted from TAPM second innermost grid and inner 9 yellow circles
correspond to the upper air data extracted from TAPM innermost grid. The circumference of
the circle represent the influence of that particular upper air data (radius of influence 10 km)
and the centre of the circle (not shown in figure) represents the location of the data.
Coordinates of these upper air locations are presented in Table 29.
__________________________________________________________________________
46
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 24: Location of Upper Air Data Extracted from TAPM
Table 28:
Coordinates of Upper Air Data Extracted From TAPM
Station Name
ID
Source
Easting( km)
Northing (Km)
US1
22201
TAPM
363.175
6298.399
US2
22202
TAPM
363.175
6311.399
US3
22203
TAPM
363.175
6324.399
US4
22204
TAPM
376.175
6298.399
US5
22205
TAPM
376.175
6311.399
US6
22206
TAPM
376.175
6324.399
US7
22207
TAPM
389.175
6298.399
US8
22208
TAPM
389.175
6311.399
US9
22209
TAPM
389.175
6324.399
US10
22210
TAPM
336.175
6271.399
US11
22211
TAPM
336.175
6310.399
US12
22212
TAPM
336.175
6349.399
US13
22213
TAPM
375.175
6271.399
US14
22215
TAPM
375.175
6349.399
US15
22216
TAPM
414.175
6271.399
US16
22217
TAPM
414.175
6310.399
US17
22218
TAPM
414.175
6349.399
__________________________________________________________________________
47
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Surface observations dataset
Surface observations from monitoring stations operated by BoM as well as site-specific
meteorological observations available from BPA were collated and used as input in CALMET.
The following figure illustrates the location of these observation stations. The radius of the red
circles represents the applied radius of influence (6 km) for that particular surface station and
centre of the circle represent the location of the surface observations.
Assimilation of surface observations in CALMET requires that at least one station has a nonmissing value for wind speed and wind direction for each hour of simulation. Values of wind
speed and wind direction from the TAPM generated surface station location (northwest corner
of the modelling domain) were only used in the absence of observational data from at least
one of the other monitoring locations. Coordinates and source of these surface stations used
as input into CALMET are presented in Table 29.
Table 29:
Station
Name
Coordinates of Surface Data

ID
Easting(
km)
Northing
(Km)
Anemometer
Height (m)
Source
SS1
11100
336.175
6349.399
10
TAPM
SS2
11101
373.9
6308.347
10
Bunbury Racetrack (BoM)
SS3
11102
345.932
6277.508
10
Busselton Jetty (BoM)
SS4
11103
351.771
6271.533
10
Busselton Aero (BoM)
SS5
11104
316.048
6287.389
10
Cape Naturaliste (BoM)
SS7
11106
374.024
6315.284
10
Beacon 3 (BPA)
SS8
11107
376.876
6311.839
10
Estuary Drive (BPA)
Figure 25: Location of Surface Data
__________________________________________________________________________
48
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
D.4.2
The CALMET Model at One Kilometre Resolution
Geophysical dataset
The terrain for the 1 km resolution CALMET grid was extracted from 3-arc second (90m)
spaced elevation data obtained via NASAs Shuttle Radar Topography Mission (SRTM) in
2
2000. (Downloaded from USGS website ). A three dimensional view of the terrain data at 1
km resolution overlayed over the base map is shown in Figure 26.
Figure 26: Terrain
The land use or land cover data for the modelling domain was derived from 300 m resolution
Globcover land cover map ( ESA 2010 and UCLouvain, published by European Space
science, Dec 2010). The ESA dataset utilised different classification system than that used by
CALMET and hence the dataset was mapped to adopt the CALMET classification system. A
comparison between Default TAPM land use and ESA mapped custom land use category at a
CALMET grid resolution of 1 km is shown in Figure 27.
__________________________________________________________________________
49
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 27: Comparison of Default TAPM land use (left) and ESA Mapped Land Use
(right)
Upper air dataset

Upper air data was extracted from TAPM output for the innermost grid at 9 points as shown
by yellow circles in Figure 28. The radius of the circle represents the radius of influence of
that particular upper air data (6 km) and the centre of the circle represents the location of the
data. Coordinates of these upper air stations are presented in Table 30.
Table 30:
Coordinates of Upper Air Data
Station Name
ID
Source
Easting( km)
Northing (Km)
US1
22201
TAPM
363.175
6298.399
US2
22202
TAPM
363.175
6311.399
US3
22203
TAPM
363.175
6324.399
US4
22204
TAPM
376.175
6298.399
US5
22205
TAPM
376.175
6311.399
US6
22206
TAPM
376.175
6324.399
US7
22207
TAPM
389.175
6298.399
US8
22208
TAPM
389.175
6311.399
US9
22209
TAPM
389.175
6324.399
__________________________________________________________________________
50
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Surface observations from monitoring stations operated by BoM and BPA operated
monitoring sites were collated and used as input in CALMET. Also, surface datasets
generated from output from the 3 km resolution CALMET grid were also assimilated into the 1
km resolution CALMET model to cover the regions where observations were not available.
Figure 28 shows the location of these observation stations in reference to the 1 km resolution
CALMET modelling domain.
Red Circle Actual observations from BoM and BPA monitoring stations
Orange Circle Surface data from CALMET - 3K meteorological model
Black Circle - Surface data from TAPM 1 km grid without values for wind speed and wind
direction removed.
Yellow Circle Upper air station locations extracted from TAPM
Circumference of the red orange and black circles represent the area of influence (radius of
influence 3 km) for that particular surface station and centre of the circle (not shown in figure)
represent the location of the surface observations. Coordinates and source of these surface
stations are presented in Table 31.
Table 31:
Station
Name

ID
Easting(
km)
Northing
(Km)
Anemometer
Height (m)
Source
SS1
11100
362.175
6297.399
10
CALMET-3 km
SS2
11101
362.175
6312.399
10
CALMET-3 km
SS3
11102
362.175
6324.399
10
CALMET-3 km
SS4
11103
377.175
6297.399
10
CALMET-3 km
SS5
11104
377.175
6324.399
10
CALMET-3 km
SS6
11105
389.175
6297.399
10
CALMET-3 km
SS7
11106
389.175
6312.399
10
CALMET-3 km
SS8
11107
389.175
6324.399
10
CALMET-3 km
SS9
11108
374.024
6315.284
10
Beacon 3 (BPA)
SS10
11109
373.9
6308.347
10
(BoM)
SS11
11110
376.876
6311.839
10
Estuary Drive (BPA)
SS12
11111
389.175
6297.399
10
Bunbury Racetrack
TAPM-1 km with
missing WS WD
__________________________________________________________________________
51
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 28: Location of Surface Data and Upper Air Data
D.4.3
The CALMET Model at 100 m Resolution
Geophysical dataset
The terrain for the 100 m resolution CALMET grid was extracted from 3-arc second (90m)
spaced elevation data obtained via NASAs Shuttle Radar Topography Mission (SRTM) in
3
2000. (Downloaded from USGS website ). A three-dimensional view of the terrain data at
100m resolution overlayed over the base map is shown in Figure 29.
The ESA land use dataset at 300m resolution utilised in the 3km and 1 km resolution grids
was not suitable for a 100m resolution modelling domain. Hence land use or land cover data
for the modelling domain was generated manually by comparing with aerial imagery.
A comparison between default TAPM land use and manually generated land use category at
a CALMET grid resolution of 100m is shown in Figure 30.
__________________________________________________________________________
52
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 29: Terrain used in the 100 m Resolution CALMET 100m Grid
Figure 30: Comparison of Default TAPM land use (left) and Manually Generated Land
Use (right).
__________________________________________________________________________
53
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Upper air dataset
Upper air data was extracted from TAPM output for the innermost grid at 9 points as shown
by yellow circles in Figure 31. The yellow circles correspond to TAPM upper air data extracted
from TAPM innermost grid. The radius of the circle represents the radius of influence of that
particular upper air data (2 km) and the centre of the circle represents the location of the data.
Coordinates of these upper air stations are presented in Table 32.
Table 32:
Coordinates of Upper Air Data Extracted from TAPM
Station Name
ID
Source
Easting( km)
Northing (Km)
US1
22201
TAPM
373.175
6308.399
US2
22202
TAPM
373.175
6311.399
US3
22203
TAPM
373.175
6314.399
US4
22204
TAPM
376.175
6308.399
US5
22205
TAPM
376.175
6311.399
US6
22206
TAPM
376.175
6314.399
US7
22207
TAPM
379.175
6308.399
US8
22208
TAPM
379.175
6311.399
US9
22209
TAPM
379.175
6314.399

Surface observations from monitoring stations operated by BoM and BPA operated
monitoring sites were collated and used as input into the 100 m resolution CALMET model. A
surface datasets generated from output of CALMET was also assimilated into the model to
ensure that the input data set did not contain any missing hours.
Illustrated in Figure 31 are the locations of the upper air and surface stations in reference to
the CALMET modelling domain.
Red Circle Actual observations from BoM and BPA monitoring stations
Orange Circle Surface data from CALMET 1 km resolution
Black Circle - Surface data from TAPM innermost grid with values for wind speed and
wind direction removed
The radius of the red orange and black circles represents the area of influence (1 km) for that
particular surface station and centre of the circle represents the location of the surface
observations. Coordinates and source of these surface stations are presented in Table 33.
__________________________________________________________________________
54
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Table 33:
Station

ID
Name
Easting(
Northing
Anemometer
km)
(Km)
Height (m)
Source
SS1
11100
379.675
6307.889
10
CALMET-1 km resolution
SS2
11101
374.024
6315.284
10
Beacon 3 (BPA)
SS3
11102
373.900
6308.374
10
Bunbury Racetrack (BoM)
SS4
11103
376.876
6311.839
10
Estuary Drive (BPA)
SS5
11104
379.175
6308.399
10
TAPM-1K without WS WD
Figure 31: Location of Surface and Upper Air Data
D.5
Developed Wind Fields for the Period 2005 Through 2010
Presented in the following table is a summary of the annual wind speed statistics for wind
fields extracted from a location in the Outer Harbour and at Estuary Drive (Figure 32). Results
th
th
for the 70 to 100 percentiles are also presented in Figure 33 and highlight the variability in
the annual wind speed profiles for the years considered.
Further variability in the wind fields is highlighted in the quarterly wind roses for these two
sites that are presented in Figure 34 through Figure 40. Quarterly as opposed to seasonal
__________________________________________________________________________
55
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
roses were developed in support of the MODIS analysis undertaken in support of the Berth 14
Expansion PER (PER Appendix 5 Environmental Quality Report).
Table 34:
Summary of Annual Wind Speed Statistics, 2005 through 2010.
Percentile
100%
99%
98%
95%
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
40%
30%
20%
10%
2005
19.6
14.1
12.9
11.2
9.7
8.1
7.1
6.3
5.5
4.7
4.0
3.2
2.2
2006
18.8
13.7
12.5
10.7
9.3
7.9
6.9
6.0
5.3
4.7
3.9
3.2
2.3
Percentile
100%
99%
98%
95%
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
40%
30%
20%
10%
2005
16.2
11.6
10.4
9.2
8.1
6.8
6.0
5.3
4.6
4.0
3.3
2.6
1.6
2006
16.3
11.3
10.1
8.8
7.8
6.7
5.9
5.2
4.6
4.0
3.4
2.6
1.7
Outer Harbour
2007
2008
25.7
26.2
15.3
15.0
13.8
13.9
12.0
12.1
10.5
10.5
8.7
8.7
7.6
7.5
6.6
6.5
5.7
5.6
5.0
4.7
4.2
3.9
3.4
3.0
2.4
2.2
Estuary Drive
2007
2008
16.3
15.3
12.2
10.2
11.1
9.4
9.9
8.5
8.6
7.5
7.3
6.3
6.4
5.4
5.5
4.5
4.8
3.8
4.2
3.0
3.5
2.3
2.7
1.7
1.8
1.1
2009
25.6
18.5
16.8
14.6
12.5
10.3
8.9
7.6
6.6
5.7
4.8
3.8
2.7
2010
21.6
14.4
13.5
12.1
10.7
9.1
7.8
6.8
5.9
5.2
4.4
3.6
2.7
2009
16.7
10.7
9.7
8.0
6.8
5.4
4.6
3.9
3.3
2.7
2.1
1.5
1.1
2010
13.1
8.3
7.5
6.6
5.7
4.7
4.1
3.4
2.8
2.3
1.8
1.3
0.9
Figure 32: Location of the Timeseries of Wind Fields Extracted From the Outer
Harbour And Estuary Drive.
__________________________________________________________________________
56
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 33: Percentile of Annual Wind Speeds, Outer Harbour (upper) and Estuary
Drive (lower), 2005 Through 2010.
__________________________________________________________________________
57
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 34: Quarterly Wind Rose Composites for the Six Year Period 2005 through
2010.
Berth 2 (2005-2010)
JFM
Estuary Drive (2005-2010)

JFM
AMJ
AMJ
(1)
JAS
JAS
OND
OND
Note (1): The discrepancies in the wind roses for this period appear to be primarily associated with JAS 2010. The
cause of the discrepancy has not been investigated further.
__________________________________________________________________________
58
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 35: Quarterly Wind Roses, 2005.
Berth 2 (2005)
JFM
Estuary Drive (2005)

JFM
AMJ
AMJ
JAS
JAS
OND
OND
__________________________________________________________________________
59
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Berth 2 (2006)
JFM

JFM
AMJ
AMJ
JAS
JAS
OND
OND
__________________________________________________________________________
60
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Berth 2 (2007)
JFM

JFM
AMJ
AMJ
JAS
JAS
OND
OND
__________________________________________________________________________
61
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Berth 2 (2008)
JFM

JFM
AMJ
AMJ
JAS
JAS
OND
OND
__________________________________________________________________________
62
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Berth 2 (2009)
JFM

JFM
AMJ
AMJ
JAS
JAS
OND
OND
__________________________________________________________________________
63
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Berth 2 (2010)
JFM

JFM
AMJ
AMJ
JAS
JAS
OND
OND
__________________________________________________________________________
64
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Appendix E
Meteorological Wind Fields used for the

Purposes of Driving the Coastal Hydrodynamic
Model
In addition to the development of the wind fields discussed in the previous appendix, AED
also developed wind fields in support of the hydrodynamic model calibration (PER Appendix 6
Hydrodynamic and Sediment Transport Modelling) based on field experiments during the
period May through July.
This appendix provides an overview of the methodology used to develop the wind fields for
the hydrodynamic model calibration period (01/05/11 through 10/07/11).
E.1
Calibration Period
The same process using a combination of TAPM, and CALMET at three grid resolutions (3
km, 1 km and 100m) was used to develop wind fields for the hydrodynamic model calibration
period.
Due to the comparatively high wind speeds that were in general recorded when compared
with either the BoM Bunbury site or the BPA Estuary Drive site, wind data from Beacon 3 is
considered to be a critical meteorological monitoring site particularly for the representation of
the off shore wind fields within the model.
Unfortunately, Beacon 3 monitor ceased operating late April 2011, just days prior to the field
studies. Thus the development of wind fields for the purposes of driving the hydrodynamic
wind fields during the period 01/05/2011 through 10/07/2011 relied on data from Beacon 10,
Stirling Street, BoM Bunbury and Estuary Drive monitoring locations. Noting however, that the
wind speed and wind direction sensors at Stirling Street are approximately 2.5 m in height
and winds from the east are likely to be affected by a building adjacent to the monitoring site.
Nonetheless, in order to construct a complete wind field data set for this period, the timeseries
of data from both Beacon 10 and BoM Bunbury were manually edited. In general, gaps of
only one hour duration were filled using an average of the data from the hour immediately
before and after the gap. Gaps of longer duration in the BoM Bunbury or Beacon 10 data set
were filled in with data from the other when available. Gaps which occurred at the same time
in both the Beacon 10 and BoM Bundury data sets were filled in with data from Stirling Street.
When using Stiriling Street data to fill gaps in either Beacon 10 or BoM Bunbury, the data was
scaled based on the ratio of the relevant wind fields from the preceding hour(s). Other than for
use to assist in filling in gaps in the Beacon 10 and BoM Bunbury monitoring sites, data from
Stirling Street was not assimilated into CALMET.
The timeseries of manually edited Beacon 10 data is presented in Figure 41.
__________________________________________________________________________
65
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 41: Timeseries of Manually Edited Hourly Beacon 10 Data. Calibration Period
01/05/11 through 10/07/2011.
E.2
Dredge Log Modelling
AED provided developed wind fields for the six year period 2005 through 2010 from each of
the 3 km, 1 km and 100 m resolution wind fields for the purposes of driving the hydrodynamic
model used in the determination of the transport and fate of sediment from the dredging of
Berth 14 (PER Appendix 6 Hydrodynamic and Sediment Transport Modelling). Wind fields
were provided as hourly snap shots consisting of the horizontal surface wind components.
The application of the derived wind fields (primarily) from the 1 km resolution CALMET grid
will be discussed in detail in the (PER Appendix 6 Hydrodynamic and Sediment Transport
Modelling).
__________________________________________________________________________
66
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Appendix F
Pollutant Dispersion Modelling
This appendix presents an overview of the dispersion modelling methodology including

source locations and source characteristics.
Other relevant appendices include:
Appendix B: Development of the Emissions Inventory for the Existing Environment
Appendix C: Development of the Emissions Inventory for Future Emission Sources
Appendix D: Development of Meteorological Wind Fields
Appendix G: Dispersion Model Validation for the Period 01/07/08 through 31/12/10
F.1
Dispersion Model
Dust dispersion modelling was undertaken using the US EPA approved CALPUFF model
based on the 100 m resolution wind fields developed using CALMET. A total of four scenarios
were considered:
Existing emission sources based on meteorology for the period 01/07/08 through
31/12/10 (dust dispersion model validation period);
Existing emission sources based on a worst-case year of port operations (i.e. maximum
throughput at the port) and the six years of meteorology 2005 through 2010;
Project only dust emission sources; and
The future environment based on the cumulative impacts due to current and projectrelated dust emission sources.
F.2
Particle Size Distribution
A total of four particle size bins were considered. Their ranges and the assumed fraction for
the existing and project dust emission sources is summarised in the following table.
Table 35:
Particle Size Distribution used in the Dispersion Modelling.

Source
Existing emission sources

Bemax Stack Emissions
(3)
(3)
Project-related emission sources
< 2.5
m
2.5 5.0
5.0 10.0
10.0 30.0
15%
42%
43%
100%
35.7
35.7
28.6
100%
15%
42%
43%
Variable
Note (1): Ratio of PM10 to TSP based on values calculated using the NPI EETM for mining.
Note (2): Conservative assumption.
Note (3): Based on information provided in Air assessments (2006).
(2)
(2)
(1)
__________________________________________________________________________
67
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
F.3
Existing Emission Sources
Presented in Table 36 and Table 37 are the source characteristics of the emission sources for
current activities Figure 42.
Table 36:
Source Characteristics of Existing Emission Sources
Source
No.
Activity
(km)
(km)
(m)
373.278
6313.634
373.320
373.593
B1 Ship Loading
5
6
7
Sigma
Sigma
(m)
(m)
5.00
1.00
6313.602
5.00
1.00
6313.852
40
0.25
0.50
373.846
6313.929
10
15.00
3.00
373.244
6313.602
5.00
1.00
374.897
6312.123
1.00
0.50
374.977
6312.032
120.00
1.50

B3 Ship Loading Transfer Points
Woodchips
375.076
6312.170
40
0.25
0.50
B3 Ship Loading
375.112
6312.188
10
15.00
3.00
10
374.918
6312.007
33.00
1.00
11
376.028
6312.516
13.00
2.50
12
375.840
6312.735
40
0.25
0.50
13
376.161
6312.416
40
0.25
0.50
14
375.578
6312.554
40
0.25
0.50
15
B4 Ship Loading
375.652
6312.410
10
15.00
3.00
16
B6 Ship loading
B5 Truck dumping based on ship times
Mineral sands
375.822
6312.229
10
15.00
3.00
375.144
6311.912
1.00
0.50
375.370
6311.992
10
15.00
3.00
376.193
6312.346
1.00
0.50
20
B5 Ship loading
Mineral sands
B8 Ship Loading Transfer Point Mineral
Sands
375.962
6312.150
40
0.25
0.50
21
375.953
6312.071
10
15.00
3.00
22
376.437
6312.213
5.00
1.00
23
376.378
6312.141
1.00
0.50
24

Wood chips
376.193
6312.346
1.00
0.50
25
375.962
6312.150
40
0.25
0.50
26
375.953
6312.071
10
15.00
3.00
27
376.437
6312.213
33.00
1.00
28

B8 truck dumping based on ship times
Spodumene
Spodumene
376.319
6312.021
25.00
1.00
376.193
6312.346
1.00
0.50
375.962
6312.150
40
0.25
0.50
B8 Ship Loading Spodumene

B8 truck dumping based on ship times
Silica sands
375.953
6312.071
10
15.00
3.00
376.193
6312.346
1.00
0.50
17
18
19
29
30
31
32
__________________________________________________________________________
68
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Source
No.
Activity
Sigma
Sigma
(km)
(km)
(m)
(m)
(m)
33
B8 Ship Loading Transfer Point Silica

Sands
375.962
6312.150
40
0.25
0.50
34
375.953
6312.071
10
15.00
3.00
35
374.717
6312.344
120.00
1.50
36
374.793
6312.276
25.00
1.00
Table 37:
Source
No.
(1)
Source Characteristics of the Bemax Stacks .

Description
(km)
(Km)
Effective
Diameter
Temp
Exit
(m)
(K)
Velocity
Height(m)
(m/s)
37
Non Mag Drier
374.673
6312.377
22.00
0.90
320.14
12.60
38
HT Drier
374.682
6312.381
24.00
0.90
325.14
7.40
39
Secondary Drier
374.688
6312.383
19.00
0.50
311.14
20.50
40
ION Blast
374.696
6312.386
27.00
1.01
293.14
16.50
Note (1): Based on information provided in Air Assessments (2009).
Figure 42: Location of Existing Emission Sources
__________________________________________________________________________
69
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Future Emission Sources
F.4
Summarised in Table 38 and Table 39 are the project-related dust emission source
characteristics for Scenario A. Source locations corresponding to Scenario A are depicted in
Figure 43.
Table 38:
Source Characteristics of Project-Related Emission Sources Scenario A
Description
Effective Height
Sigma Y
Sigma Z
(km)
(Km)
(m)
(m)
(m)
TP_5 (Transfer Point)
376.201
6313.168
4.0
0.5
2.0
376.057
6313.346
4.0
0.5
2.0
376.029
6313.323
25.0
0.5
12.5
375.573
6313.007
4.0
0.5
2.0
375.415
6312.887
4.0
0.5
2.0
375.399
6312.855
4.0
0.5
2.0
375.375
6312.748
4.0
0.5
2.0
375.336
6312.688
4.0
0.5
2.0
375.241
6312.599
4.0
0.5
2.0
P3_SLO (Ship Load out)
375.363
6312.661
10.0
10.0
5.0
375.267
6312.572
10.0
10.0
5.0
P1_TLI (Truck Load in)
375.908
6313.033
3.0
1.5
1.5
375.941
6313.050
3.0
1.5
1.5
Table 39:
Source
Source Characteristics of Project-Related Emission Sources Scenario A

Description
Effective
Diameter
Temp
Exit
(km)
(Km)
Height
(m)
(K)
Velocity
(m)
(m/s)
Shed 2 Dust
Ventilation Outlet 2A
375.609
6313.009
35
1.5
303.000
9.431
Extraction
Ventilation Outlet 2B
375.808
6313.160
35
1.5
303.000
9.431
System
Ventilation Outlet 2C
376.007
6313.311
35
1.5
303.000
9.431
TR_Shed
Ventilation outlet
376.197
6313.154
1.5
303.000
9.431
375.411
6312.898
1.5
303.000
9.431
shuttle building near

train load in
SH_Shed
Ventilation outlet
shuttle building near
ship loading
__________________________________________________________________________
70
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 43: Location of Project-Related Emission Sources Scenario A
Summarised in Table 40 and Table 41 are the project-related dust emission source
characteristics for Scenario B. Source locations corresponding to Scenario B are depicted in
Figure 44.
__________________________________________________________________________
71
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Table 40:
Source Characteristics of Project-Related Emission Sources Scenario B
Description
Effective Height
Sigma Y
Sigma Z
(km)
(Km)
(m)
(m)
(m)
376.272
6313.058
25.0
0.5
12.5
376.210
6313.143
4.0
0.5
2.0
376.296
6313.074
4.0
0.5
2.0
376.233
6313.153
4.0
0.5
2.0
376.032
6313.384
4.0
0.5
2.0
375.430
6312.934
4.0
0.5
2.0
375.399
6312.855
4.0
0.5
2.0
375.375
6312.748
4.0
0.5
2.0
375.336
6312.688
4.0
0.5
2.0
375.241
6312.599
4.0
0.5
2.0
375.363
6312.661
10.0
10.0
5.0
375.267
6312.572
10.0
10.0
5.0
375.908
6313.033
3.0
1.5
1.5
375.941
6313.050
3.0
1.5
1.5
Table 41:
Source Characteristics of Project-Related Emission Sources Scenario B
Source
Description
Effective
Diameter
Temp
Exit
(km)
(Km)
Height
(m)
(K)
Velocity
(m)
(m/s)
Shed 3 Dust
Ventilation Outlet 3A
376.287
6313.039
35
1.5
303.000
9.431
Extraction
Ventilation Outlet 3B
376.427
6312.862
35
1.5
303.000
9.431
System
Ventilation Outlet 3C
376.566
6312.686
35
1.5
303.000
9.431
Ventilation Outlet 3D
376.705
6312.509
35
1.5
303.000
9.431
376.197
6313.154
1.5
303.000
9.431
375.411
6312.898
1.5
303.000
9.431
TR_Shed
Ventilation outlet shuttle

building near train load
in
SH_Shed
Ventilation outlet shuttle

building near ship
loading
__________________________________________________________________________
72
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 44: Location of Project-Related Emission Sources Scenario B
__________________________________________________________________________
73
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Appendix G
Dispersion Model Validation for the Period

01/07/08 through 31/12/10
Presented in this appendix is a comparison of the modelled output with observational data
from the Bunbury Port Authorities Estuary Drive, Stirling Street, Workshop and Naval Cadets
TEOM monitoring locations. As note previously, the purpose of this comparison is not to
undertake a detailed modelled calibration. Instead, the objective is to demonstrate that the
model tends to over predict the highest percentiles and to identify a reasonable percentile for
reporting of the existing environment results for the worst-year of port activities scenario.
G.1
Overview of Results Comparison for PM10
Presented in Table 42 is a comparison of the predicted and observed values for the 24 hour
average concentration of PM10 for each of the four BPA TEOM monitoring locations. With the
th
exception of the Naval Cadets, the model is found to over predict the maximum through 10
highest observed concentrations. Recall that the validation period includes the 30 months
from 01/07/08 through 31/12/10. Data from the Naval Cadets monitoring site has been
previously identified as recording higher than anticipated levels of PM 10 (Environmental
Alliances, 2011). It was concluded that there was potentially a non-port related dust emission
source or sea salts that were contributing significantly to recorded levels at this location. The
th
70 percentile concentration at the Naval Cadets monitoring site is notably elevated when
compared with the other three TEOM locations.
th
As noted previously, the average of the 70 percentile from all four sites was used to estimate
background levels of PM10 and is included in the model results presented in the table. The
artificial nature of the addition of a constant value for the background level of PM10 is
highlighted in the percentile plots presented in Figure 45 which shows that the lower
percentiles of the observations continually decreasing while the model results level off at a
3
constant value of 21.2 g/m .
Table 42
Percentile
Comparison of Observational Data and Model Output for the 24-Hour

Average Concentration of PM 10 for the Model Validation Period 01/07/08
through 31/12/10.
Estuary Drive(1)
Stirling Street(1)
Workshop(1)
Naval Cadets(1)
Obs
Model(2)
Obs
Model(2)
Obs
Model(2)
Obs
Model(2)
Maximum
93.5
80.3
57.2
102.7
60.3
63.9
87.1
49.0
2nd Highest
63.5
71.0
54.4
87.2
56.8
62.0
80.2
48.9
rd
61.5
64.3
47.3
82.9
54.8
58.1
72.7
45.4
th
4 Highest
54.2
59.6
44.0
69.3
44.6
58.0
63.8
41.0
5th Highest
44.5
53.4
42.7
62.4
42.6
54.8
49.3
40.1
10th Highest
43.4
44.0
40.1
54.3
39.9
46.8
47.2
36.5
19.5
21.2
24.0
24.1
3 Highest
th
70 Percentile
20.6
21.2
20.5
21.2
Note (1): Data for the 28th and 29th of April 2010 has been excluded.
Note (2): Includes a background concentration of 21.2 g/m 3.
__________________________________________________________________________
74
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 45: Percentile Plots of the 24-Hour Average Concentration of PM 10 for the
Model Validation Period. Estuary Drive (top), Stirling Street (lower left) and
Workshop (lower right).
G.2
Comparison of Estuary Drive Data and Model Output
As meteorological data from estuary drive is considered to be more reliable than those
obtained at Stirling Street (for example), a more detailed comparison of the model outputs
and the Estuary Drive monitoring data has been conducted. Note that in the following figures
the 5-minute average data from the Estuary Drive monitoring site has been presented while
the one-hour average model output is presented. It was decided to include the 5-minute data
in order to capture as much as possible the features of the data, some of which may be lost
through post-processing.
Presented in Figure 47 through Figure 50 are scatter plots of wind direction versus PM10
concentration, wind speed versus PM10 concentration, PM10 concentration versus hour of day,
and model predicted stability class versus PM10 concentration, respectively.
Figure 47 highlights the similarity in the principal direction of key dust emission sources for
both the observational data and the model output with port-related activities at an angle of
between 270 and 315 (from north) to the monitoring site.
Some interesting differences in the observational data and the model output in relation to
wind speed can be seen in Figure 48. The model predicts that elevated levels of dust will be
__________________________________________________________________________
75
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
associated with two wind classes: light wind conditions and wind speeds greater than c. 8
m/s. The observations suggest however, that elevated levels of dust are associated with
winds between 3 m/s and 8 m/s. This may suggest that some refinement of the description
wind speed dependency used in the model may be warranted, but this has not been
investigated further here.
The plots of PM10 concentration versus hour of day highlights (Figure 49) some additional
discrepancies between the model results and the observational data. Though only a weak
signature, the model does predict that elevated dust levels are slightly more likely to occur
during the evening and night time than during the day. There does not appear to be any
biasing towards elevated levels during the night time period in the observational data.
Presented in Figure 50 is a scatter plot of model predicted stability class and 1-hour average
concentration of PM10. It highlights the significance of D class stability (Class 4) (Figure 46) at
this location, which differs from inland locations where F class stability (Class 6, i.e. stable
conditions) is typically predicted by the model to be associated with a much higher
percentage of the periods of elevated levels of dust.
Figure 46: Atmospheric Stability Class Frequency, 2005 through 2010 (CALMET).
__________________________________________________________________________
76
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 47: Scatter Plots of Wind Direction versus Concentration of PM 10 for the Model
Validation Period. Estuary Drive Observations (upper) and Model
Predictions (lower).
__________________________________________________________________________
77
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 48: Scatter Plots of Wind Speed versus Concentration of PM 10 for the Model
__________________________________________________________________________
78
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 49: Scatter Plots of Concentration of PM 10 versus Hour of Day for the Model
__________________________________________________________________________
79
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Figure 50: Scatter Plot of Stability Class versus Concentration of PM 10 for the Model
Validation Period. Model Predictions.
__________________________________________________________________________
80
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Appendix H
Existing Environment Results for PM10
This Appendix presents the results of the dispersion modelling for the existing environment
based on worst-case volumes of material through the port. Specifically, results for the
predicted 24-hour average ground-level concentration of PM10 are presented for each of the
years individually and based on the entire six year meteorological data set.
Stirling
Street
Workshop
Dolphin
Centre
South
Bunbury
Beacon 3
Bunbury
BoM
Naval
Cadets
Beacon 10
Percentile
Summary of Results for the 24-Hour Average Ground-Level Concentration

of PM10 for the Existing Environment (Maximum Year Scenario) based on
Hourly Meteorology, 2005.
Estuary
Drive
Table 43:
100%
74.3
125.3
50.4
159.4
32.7
49.2
25.6
65.2
222.8
98.90%(1)
45.6
66.5
47.4
92.5
25.1
33.7
23.4
49.3
87.3
(2)
40.9
52.3
36.8
79.3
23.9
30.6
22.7
39.8
71.4
95%
34.5
41.7
32.5
55.7
22.7
27.5
22.3
33.4
54.0
90%
29.0
36.5
28.5
45.6
22.1
25.5
21.6
28.5
45.4
80%
24.7
28.6
24.2
36.2
21.5
23.7
21.3
25.2
34.6
75%
23.8
24.8
23.2
32.2
21.4
23.1
21.2
24.4
32.3
70%
22.7
23.5
22.5
30.3
21.3
22.6
21.2
23.6
30.6
97.53%
Note (1): Corresponds to the 5th highest.

Note (2): Corresponds to the 10th highest
Stirling
Street
Workshop
Dolphin
Centre
South
Bunbury
Beacon 3
Bunbury
BoM
Naval
Cadets
Beacon 10

Estuary
Drive
Table 44:
100%
77.9
75.4
78.6
152.6
27.1
46.5
23.7
56.6
96.1
98.90%
(1)
49.1
48.3
47.5
106.0
24.5
30.5
22.4
51.5
65.0
97.53%
(2)
42.0
44.3
39.4
93.6
23.9
30.0
22.1
43.3
59.0
95%
35.6
39.5
35.6
70.1
22.6
27.5
21.7
39.1
51.2
90%
30.0
30.6
28.0
55.8
21.9
25.7
21.4
32.7
42.6
80%
23.8
25.4
24.4
41.7
21.4
23.5
21.3
27.8
34.2
75%
22.5
24.1
22.6
38.3
21.3
22.8
21.2
26.5
32.2
70%
21.8
23.4
22.1
34.9
21.3
22.5
21.2
25.5
30.8
Percentile

__________________________________________________________________________
81
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Stirling
Street
Workshop
Dolphin
Centre
South
Bunbury
Beacon 3
Bunbury
BoM
Naval
Cadets
Beacon 10

Estuary
Drive
Table 45:
100%
67.1
105.1
72.4
172.0
26.7
40.2
24.6
82.7
93.3
98.90%
(1)
58.8
60.5
50.3
119.5
24.6
30.9
24.0
52.5
76.5
97.53%
(2)
53.8
51.0
41.4
83.7
23.6
29.4
22.6
42.3
57.7
95%
42.5
37.7
36.6
70.0
22.9
26.7
22.0
35.1
50.3
90%
34.5
31.7
31.9
47.3
21.8
24.7
21.5
30.1
40.1
80%
26.3
25.9
25.4
37.4
21.4
23.3
21.3
26.4
33.4
75%
23.8
24.3
23.7
34.2
21.3
22.7
21.2
25.6
32.0
70%
22.7
23.4
22.5
32.8
21.2
22.3
21.2
24.4
30.2

Naval
Cadets
Beacon 10
Bunbury
BoM
Beacon 3
Workshop
South
Bunbury
Stirling
Street
Percentile

Estuary
Drive
Table 46:
Dolphin
Centre
Percentile
100%
51.0
84.9
46.2
175.6
28.6
35.1
27.4
78.4
87.9
98.90%(1)
39.5
53.3
42.8
127.6
26.1
31.2
23.8
51.9
62.3
(2)
35.2
44.4
34.2
89.0
24.3
27.8
22.7
45.4
53.6
95%
31.2
40.5
30.9
78.2
23.1
26.2
22.2
38.0
45.0
90%
27.5
31.7
26.5
53.7
22.2
23.9
21.5
32.5
37.6
80%
24.0
26.2
24.1
40.6
21.4
22.7
21.3
27.2
32.5
75%
23.1
25.1
23.1
36.3
21.4
22.4
21.2
25.8
31.0
70%
22.4
24.3
22.5
34.0
21.3
22.1
21.2
24.9
29.3
97.53%

__________________________________________________________________________
82
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Stirling
Street
Workshop
Dolphin
Centre
South
Bunbury
Beacon 3
Bunbury
BoM
Naval
Cadets
Beacon 10

Estuary
Drive
Table 47:
100%
83.9
102.8
68.7
98.2
25.4
30.4
23.4
46.6
79.0
98.90%
(1)
58.9
53.2
55.9
60.7
24.4
26.5
22.9
33.8
63.2
97.53%
(2)
43.1
44.4
46.2
49.4
22.6
25.0
21.9
32.0
53.0
95%
35.6
34.0
34.3
46.3
22.0
24.3
21.6
29.1
45.2
90%
29.4
28.4
28.8
41.8
21.7
23.5
21.3
27.0
39.0
80%
23.8
24.7
23.7
34.0
21.4
22.6
21.3
25.1
32.3
75%
23.2
23.6
22.9
32.4
21.3
22.4
21.2
24.3
30.9
70%
22.6
22.8
22.1
30.6
21.2
22.2
21.2
23.8
29.7
Percentile

Stirling
Street
Workshop
Dolphin
Centre
South
Bunbury
Beacon 3
Bunbury
BoM
Naval
Cadets
Beacon 10
Percentile

Estuary
Drive
Table 48:
100%
54.6
127.6
38.9
121.8
30.5
31.8
25.2
48.2
88.0
98.90%(1)
30.2
59.9
34.8
85.6
25.1
28.0
23.0
37.4
63.7
(2)
28.3
49.0
29.1
61.7
23.9
26.7
22.5
34.4
55.1
95%
26.6
40.4
26.7
51.0
23.2
24.8
21.9
31.6
45.5
90%
23.7
34.0
24.6
43.4
22.4
23.7
21.6
28.7
39.9
80%
22.3
25.9
22.7
36.5
21.5
22.8
21.3
26.0
33.1
75%
21.9
24.5
22.1
34.7
21.4
22.5
21.2
25.3
31.5
70%
21.8
23.7
21.7
33.4
21.3
22.3
21.2
24.9
30.2
97.53%

__________________________________________________________________________
83
Date: 04/10/2012
_________________________________________________________________________
Stirling
Street
Workshop
Dolphin
Centre
South
Bunbury
Beacon 3
Bunbury
BoM
Naval
Cadets
Beacon 10

Hourly Meteorology, 2005 through 2010.
Estuary
Drive
Table 49:
100%
83.9
127.6
78.6
175.6
32.7
49.2
27.4
82.7
222.8
99.82%
(1)
67.1
102.8
59.4
159.4
27.7
39.0
25.1
60.4
93.3
99.59%
(2)
62.7
81.7
54.9
145.6
26.4
33.6
24.3
54.0
87.3
98.68%(3)
48.2
55.1
44.7
98.9
24.7
30.1
23.1
46.6
70.5
95%
34.9
39.9
33.3
61.0
22.8
26.3
21.9
34.7
50.1
90%
28.7
32.1
27.9
46.7
21.9
24.4
21.5
29.8
40.8
85%
25.4
28.6
25.3
41.9
21.6
23.6
21.3
27.5
35.9
80%
23.8
25.8
23.9
37.4
21.4
22.9
21.3
26.2
33.3
75%
22.8
24.4
22.9
34.6
21.3
22.6
21.2
25.2
31.6
70%
22.3
23.5
22.2
33.0
21.3
22.3
21.2
24.5
30.1
Percentile

__________________________________________________________________________
84
Appendix F
Project process flow description
Process Flow Modelling
Prepared By: David L Trench Executive General Manager Project Development
Revision 001
23 Jan 2013
Revision 001
1. Mine Site
a. Via means of Collie(Muja South) Mine Site based operations a Coal Handling Plant
will be established, a supporting Sized Coal Stockpile will be maintained and a new
rail loading system designed and installed
b. The stockpile built for export quality coal ranging in size from 50mm to 70mm with
no finer particles or larger particles shipped.
2. Transport
a. Using a small number of train sets, currently under investigation, a loaded train will
consist of a number of locomotive engine units and up to 50 wagons.
b. Each wagon specifically designed to be loaded from the top via the site-based train
loading system.
c. Each wagon is designed that once the required tonnage of coal has been loaded a
cover of either a mechanical or a sealing nature is used on top of the wagon to
prevent any ingress of water and or escape of coal particles.
d. Each train could transport from site up to 5,000 tonnes of coal in designated wagons
e. The train will stop prior to travelling to port to ensure all wagons are suitable for
transit and that system safety procedures are observed
f.
The journey to Port consists of travelling along track via Collie, Worsely Junction,
Brunswick Junction, and Picton and into the Port of Bunbury area.
g. Once inside the Port Boundary the train will arrive on to a dedicated loop track
h. The fourth Loop will have a dedicated unloading terminal that is a fully covered
subterranean and negatively pressured facility to capture associated dust with
unloading.
i.
The train can stop prior to unloading to ensure all wagons are suitable for unloading
and that system safety procedures are observed
j.
Once the train is ready to unload the dust management system of the unloader will
operate, each wagon as it passes over the top of the unloader will automatically
open bottom of wagon discharge doors.
k. This creeping method of unloading ensures no wagons are disturbed until they
unload and that each wagon is dust managed whilst unloading.
l.
Recovered Coal transfers via a covered and dust managed closed conveyor system
to the Port side fully covered stockpile.
23 Jan 2013
Revision 001
3. Port Side Facilities

a. Stockpile
i. Design the main storage facility at Berth 14A facility will be a
covered/enclosed shed. The sealing of the shed is along its length and ends
and the roof section angling will reduce visible profile whilst maintaining
integrity of enclosure. The shed constructed in three stages, with each stage
being integral as well as allowing for separation of internal structure. The
internals of the shed will accommodate stacking and reclaiming mechanisms
as well as misting water sprays for internal cooling and dust suppression.
ii. Capacity the shed is designed to hold up to 400,000 tonnes of product
iii. Fire Management the internal misting sprinklers can be set to deluge in
worst case, under normal operations the internal stacking and reclaiming
machines will be able to excavate prior to and after the identified hot spot.
Once cleared and accessible tracked loaders will remove the product and
recover it to a bunded wash down area within the water treatment system.
iv. Noise the shed itself generates very little noise as all activities occur within
the structure.
v. Dust- the stockpile is fully enclosed; Coal is not open to the atmosphere.
vi. Water runoff is managed within the sheds bunded operations area and
collected via drains and pipes for removal to the water treatment facility.
Recovered water reused for dust management and other utilities.
b. Site Conveyor and Material Handling all conveyors onsite are covered and
enclosed, dust extraction and dust suppression by way of water misting inside
conveyor galleries as required.
c. Ship Loading
i. Stockpile transfer coal required for ship loading will be transferred by site
conveyor system to Berth side ship loading facility.
ii. Ship loader consists of one transverse or travelling discharge system. Only
one ship loader at this phase will be constructed and used in operations.
iii. Once the vessel is alongside and moored accordingly, the ship loader
extends its boom-unloading arm to the open and prepared hatch of the
awaiting vessel.
iv. The unloading process can only begin once the boom-unloading arm extends
and is in correct location, then the delivery spout extends into the hold of
the vessel. Under this process, delivered coal deposits directly into the
bottom of the hold and coal does not fall freely into the open hold.
23 Jan 2013
Revision 001
v. As the hold of the vessel fills, the nozzle adjusts and retracts to ensure the
coal does not freely fall into the hold.
vi. At the end of the discharge nozzle is water misting spray system to suppress
any possibility of finer dust particle escape.
vii. Once the hold is at deliver capacity that is not over 85% the discharge
system retracts and the hold hatch closed.
viii. The process is repeated for the required delivery tonnage, nominally 65,000
tonnes
Note: The process flow modelling description read in conjunction with the Public Environmental
Review for berth 14A and the detailed site engineering works for the same location. It is not an
exhaustive description and highlights only the main areas for operational clarity.
23 Jan 2013
EPBC Act Protected Matters Report

This report provides general guidance on matters of national environmental significance and other
matters protected by the EPBC Act in the area you have selected.
Information on the coverage of this report and qualifications on data supporting this report are
contained in the caveat at the end of the report.
Information is available about Environment Assessments and the EPBC Act including significance
guidelines, forms and application process details.
Report created: 01/05/14 13:51:28

Summary
Details
Matters of NES
Other Matters Protected by the EPBC Act
Extra Information
Caveat
Acknowledgements
This map may contain data which are

Commonwealth of Australia
(Geoscience Australia), PSMA 2010
Coordinates
Buffer: 10.0Km
Summary
Matters of National Environmental Significance
This part of the report summarises the matters of national environmental significance that may occur
in, or may relate to, the area you nominated. Further information is available in the detail part of the
report, which can be accessed by scrolling or following the links below. If you are proposing to
undertake an activity that may have a significant impact on one or more matters of national
environmental significance then you should consider the Administrative Guidelines on Significance.
World Heritage Properties:
None
National Heritage Places:
None
Wetlands of International Importance:
None
Great Barrier Reef Marine Park:
None
Commonwealth Marine Areas:
Listed Threatened Ecological Communities:
Listed Threatened Species:
52
Listed Migratory Species:
35

This part of the report summarises other matters protected under the Act that may relate to the area
you nominated. Approval may be required for a proposed activity that significantly affects the
environment on Commonwealth land, when the action is outside the Commonwealth land, or the
environment anywhere when the action is taken on Commonwealth land. Approval may also be
required for the Commonwealth or Commonwealth agencies proposing to take an action that is likely
to have a significant impact on the environment anywhere.
The EPBC Act protects the environment on Commonwealth land, the environment from the actions
taken on Commonwealth land, and the environment from actions taken by Commonwealth agencies.
As heritage values of a place are part of the 'environment', these aspects of the EPBC Act protect the
Commonwealth Heritage values of a Commonwealth Heritage place and the heritage values of a
place on the Register of the National Estate.
This part of the report summarises other matters protected under the Act that may relate to the area
you nominated. Approval may be required for a proposed activity that significantly affects the
environment on Commonwealth land, when the action is outside the Commonwealth land, or the
environment anywhere when the action is taken on Commonwealth land. Approval may also be
required for the Commonwealth or Commonwealth agencies proposing to take an action that is likely
to have a significant impact on the environment anywhere.
A permit may be required for activities in or on a Commonwealth area that may affect a member of a
listed threatened species or ecological community, a member of a listed migratory species, whales
and other cetaceans, or a member of a listed marine species.
Commonwealth Land:
Commonwealth Heritage Places:
None
Listed Marine Species:
56
Whales and Other Cetaceans:
13
Critical Habitats:
None
Commonwealth Reserves Terrestrial:
None
Commonwealth Reserves Marine
None
Extra Information
This part of the report provides information that may also be relevant to the area you have nominated.
Place on the RNE:
50
State and Territory Reserves:
Regional Forest Agreements:
None
Invasive Species:
30
Nationally Important Wetlands:

Key Ecological Features (Marine)
None
2
Details
Commonwealth Marine Areas
[ Resource Information ]
Approval may be required for a proposed activity that is likely to have a significant impact on the
environment in a Commonwealth Marine Area, when the action is outside the Commonwealth Marine
Area, or the environment anywhere when the action is taken within the Commonwealth Marine Area.
Generally the Commonwealth Marine Area stretches from three nautical miles to two hundred
nautical miles from the coast.
Name
EEZ and Territorial Sea
Marine Regions
If you are planning to undertake action in an area in or close to a Commonwealth Marine Area, and a
marine bioregional plan has been prepared for the Commonwealth Marine Area in that area, the
marine bioregional plan may inform your decision as to whether to refer your proposed action under
the EPBC Act.
Name
South-west
Listed Threatened Ecological Communities
For threatened ecological communities where the distribution is well known, maps are derived from
recovery plans, State vegetation maps, remote sensing imagery and other sources. Where threatened
ecological community distributions are less well known, existing vegetation maps and point location
data are used to produce indicative distribution maps.
Name
Claypans of the Swan Coastal Plain
Status
Critically Endangered
Subtropical and Temperate Coastal Saltmarsh
Vulnerable
Listed Threatened Species

Name
Birds
Anous tenuirostris melanops
Australian Lesser Noddy [26000]
Type of Presence
Community likely to
occur within area
Community likely to
occur within area
Status
Type of Presence
Vulnerable
Species or species
habitat may occur within
area
Botaurus poiciloptilus
Australasian Bittern [1001]
Endangered
Species or species
habitat known to occur
within area
Calyptorhynchus banksii naso

Forest Red-tailed Black-Cockatoo [67034]
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Name
Calyptorhynchus baudinii
Baudin's Black-Cockatoo, Long-billed BlackCockatoo [769]
Calyptorhynchus latirostris
Carnaby's Black-Cockatoo, Short-billed BlackCockatoo [59523]
Diomedea epomophora epomophora
Southern Royal Albatross [25996]
Status
Type of Presence
Vulnerable
Breeding known to occur

within area
Endangered
Breeding likely to occur

within area
Vulnerable
Foraging, feeding or
related behaviour likely
to occur within area
Diomedea epomophora sanfordi

Northern Royal Albatross [82331]
Endangered
Diomedea exulans amsterdamensis

Amsterdam Albatross [82330]
Endangered
Species or species
area
Diomedea exulans exulans

Tristan Albatross [82337]
Endangered
Species or species
area
Diomedea exulans (sensu lato)

Wandering Albatross [1073]
Vulnerable
Halobaena caerulea
Blue Petrel [1059]
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Macronectes giganteus
Southern Giant-Petrel [1060]
Endangered
Species or species
area
Macronectes halli
Northern Giant-Petrel [1061]
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Pterodroma mollis
Soft-plumaged Petrel [1036]
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Rostratula australis
Australian Painted Snipe [77037]
Endangered
Species or species
area
Sternula nereis nereis

Australian Fairy Tern [82950]
Vulnerable
Species or species
habitat likely to occur
within area
Thalassarche carteri
Indian Yellow-nosed Albatross [64464]
Vulnerable
related behaviour may
occur within area
Thalassarche cauta cauta

Shy Albatross, Tasmanian Shy Albatross [82345]
Vulnerable
Thalassarche cauta steadi

White-capped Albatross [82344]
Vulnerable
Thalassarche melanophris
Black-browed Albatross [66472]
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Thalassarche melanophris impavida

Campbell Albatross [82449]
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Fish
Nannatherina balstoni
Balston's Pygmy Perch [66698]
Vulnerable
Species or species
Name
Status
Type of Presence
area
Mammals
Balaenoptera musculus
Blue Whale [36]
Endangered
Congregation or
aggregation known to
occur within area
Dasyurus geoffroii
Chuditch, Western Quoll [330]
Vulnerable
Species or species
within area
Eubalaena australis
Southern Right Whale [40]
Endangered

within area
Megaptera novaeangliae
Humpback Whale [38]
Vulnerable
Congregation or
occur within area
Neophoca cinerea
Australian Sea-lion [22]
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Pseudocheirus occidentalis
Western Ringtail Possum, Ngwayir [25911]
Vulnerable

within area
Setonix brachyurus
Quokka [229]
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Plants
Andersonia gracilis
Slender Andersonia [14470]
Endangered
Species or species
area
Banksia nivea subsp. uliginosa

Swamp Honeypot [82766]
Endangered
Species or species
area
Banksia squarrosa subsp. argillacea

Whicher Range Dryandra [82769]
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Brachyscias verecundus
Ironstone Brachyscias [81321]
Species or species
area
Endangered
Species or species
within area
Centrolepis caespitosa
[6393]
Endangered
Species or species
within area
Chamelaucium sp. C Coast Plain (R.D.Royce 4872)

Royce's Waxflower [82023]
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Darwinia foetida
Muchea Bell [83190]
Species or species
within area
Darwinia whicherensis
Abba Bell [83193]
Endangered
Species or species
area
Diuris drummondii
Tall Donkey Orchid [4365]
Vulnerable
Species or species
within area
Diuris micrantha
Dwarf Bee-orchid [55082]
Vulnerable
Species or species
Caladenia huegelii
King Spider-orchid, Grand Spider-orchid, Rusty
Spider-orchid [7309]
Name
Status
Type of Presence
within area
Diuris purdiei
Purdie's Donkey-orchid [12950]
Endangered
Species or species
area
Endangered
Species or species
within area
Drakaea micrantha
Dwarf Hammer-orchid [56755]
Vulnerable
Species or species
within area
Lambertia echinata subsp. occidentalis

Western Prickly Honeysuckle [64528]
Endangered
Species or species
area
Synaphea stenoloba
Dwellingup Synaphea [66311]
Endangered
Species or species
area
Reptiles
Caretta caretta
Loggerhead Turtle [1763]
Endangered
related behaviour known
Chelonia mydas
Green Turtle [1765]
Vulnerable
Dermochelys coriacea
Leatherback Turtle, Leathery Turtle, Luth [1768]
Endangered

within area
Natator depressus
Flatback Turtle [59257]
Vulnerable
Sharks
Carcharias taurus (west coast population)
Grey Nurse Shark (west coast population) [68752]
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Carcharodon carcharias
Great White Shark [64470]
Vulnerable
Species or species
within area
Rhincodon typus
Whale Shark [66680]
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Drakaea elastica
Glossy-leafed Hammer-orchid, Praying Virgin
[16753]
Listed Migratory Species
* Species is listed under a different scientific name on the EPBC Act - Threatened Species list.
Name
Threatened
Type of Presence
Migratory Marine Birds
Apus pacificus
Fork-tailed Swift [678]
Species or species
within area
Diomedea amsterdamensis
Endangered*
Species or species
area
Diomedea dabbenena
Endangered*
Species or species
area
Diomedea epomophora (sensu stricto)
Vulnerable*
Name
Threatened
Type of Presence
Vulnerable
Diomedea sanfordi
Endangered*
Endangered
Species or species
area
Macronectes halli
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Puffinus carneipes
Flesh-footed Shearwater, Fleshy-footed
Shearwater [1043]
Species or species
within area
Sterna anaethetus
Bridled Tern [814]
Sterna caspia
Caspian Tern [59467]
Vulnerable
occur within area
Thalassarche cauta (sensu stricto)

Vulnerable*
Thalassarche impavida
Vulnerable*
Species or species
area
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Thalassarche steadi
Vulnerable*
Migratory Marine Species

Balaenoptera edeni
Bryde's Whale [35]
Blue Whale [36]
Species or species
area
Endangered
Caperea marginata
Pygmy Right Whale [39]
Congregation or
occur within area
Species or species
area
Vulnerable
Species or species
within area
Caretta caretta
Endangered
Chelonia mydas
Green Turtle [1765]
Vulnerable
Name
Eubalaena australis
Threatened
Type of Presence
Endangered

within area
Endangered

within area
Lagenorhynchus obscurus
Dusky Dolphin [43]
Species or species
area
Manta birostris
Giant Manta Ray, Chevron Manta Ray, Pacific
Manta Ray, Pelagic Manta Ray, Oceanic Manta Ray
[84995]
Humpback Whale [38]
Vulnerable
Congregation or
occur within area
Natator depressus
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Orcinus orca
Killer Whale, Orca [46]
Rhincodon typus
Whale Shark [66680]
Species or species
area
Vulnerable
Migratory Terrestrial Species

Haliaeetus leucogaster
White-bellied Sea-Eagle [943]
Species or species
within area
Merops ornatus
Rainbow Bee-eater [670]
Species or species
area
Migratory Wetlands Species

Ardea alba
Great Egret, White Egret [59541]

within area
Ardea ibis
Cattle Egret [59542]
Rostratula benghalensis (sensu lato)

Painted Snipe [889]
Species or species
area
Species or species
within area
Endangered*
Species or species
area

Commonwealth Land
The Commonwealth area listed below may indicate the presence of Commonwealth land in this
vicinity. Due to the unreliability of the data source, all proposals should be checked as to whether it
impacts on a Commonwealth area, before making a definitive decision. Contact the State or Territory
government land department for further information.
Name
Commonwealth Land Defence - BUNBURY TRAINING DEPOT
Listed Marine Species
* Species is listed under a different scientific name on the EPBC Act - Threatened Species list.
Name
Threatened
Type of Presence
Birds
Australian Lesser Noddy [26000]
Vulnerable
Species or species
Name
Threatened
Apus pacificus
Type of Presence
area
Species or species
within area
Ardea alba
Great Egret, White Egret [59541]

within area
Ardea ibis
Species or species
within area
Catharacta skua
Great Skua [59472]
Species or species
area
Endangered*
Species or species
area
Diomedea dabbenena
Endangered*
Species or species
area
Diomedea epomophora (sensu stricto)

Vulnerable*

Vulnerable
Diomedea sanfordi
Endangered*
Species or species
within area
Halobaena caerulea
Blue Petrel [1059]
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Endangered
Species or species
area
Macronectes halli
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Merops ornatus
Species or species
area
Pandion haliaetus
Osprey [952]
Pterodroma mollis
Puffinus assimilis
Little Shearwater [59363]
Puffinus carneipes
Flesh-footed Shearwater, Fleshy-footed
Shearwater [1043]

within area
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Species or species
within area
Name
Rostratula benghalensis (sensu lato)
Painted Snipe [889]
Threatened
Type of Presence
Endangered*
Species or species
area
Sterna anaethetus
Bridled Tern [814]
Sterna caspia
Caspian Tern [59467]
Vulnerable
occur within area

Vulnerable*
Thalassarche impavida
Vulnerable*
Species or species
area
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Thalassarche steadi
Vulnerable*
Fish
Acentronura australe
Southern Pygmy Pipehorse [66185]
Campichthys galei
Gale's Pipefish [66191]
Heraldia nocturna
Upside-down Pipefish, Eastern Upside-down
Pipefish, Eastern Upside-down Pipefish [66227]
Hippocampus angustus
Western Spiny Seahorse, Narrow-bellied Seahorse
[66234]
Hippocampus breviceps
Short-head Seahorse, Short-snouted Seahorse
[66235]
Hippocampus subelongatus
West Australian Seahorse [66722]
Histiogamphelus cristatus
Rhino Pipefish, Macleay's Crested Pipefish, Ringback Pipefish [66243]
Lissocampus caudalis
Australian Smooth Pipefish, Smooth Pipefish
[66249]
Lissocampus fatiloquus
Prophet's Pipefish [66250]
Lissocampus runa
Javelin Pipefish [66251]
Species or species
area
Species or species
area
Species or species
area
Species or species
area
Species or species
area
Species or species
area
Species or species
area
Species or species
area
Species or species
area
Species or species
area
Name
Maroubra perserrata
Sawtooth Pipefish [66252]
Threatened
Type of Presence
Species or species
area
Mitotichthys meraculus
Western Crested Pipefish [66259]
Species or species
area
Nannocampus subosseus
Bonyhead Pipefish, Bony-headed Pipefish [66264]
Species or species
area
Phycodurus eques
Leafy Seadragon [66267]
Species or species
area
Phyllopteryx taeniolatus
Common Seadragon, Weedy Seadragon [66268]
Species or species
area
Pugnaso curtirostris
Pugnose Pipefish, Pug-nosed Pipefish [66269]
Species or species
area
Solegnathus lettiensis
Gunther's Pipehorse, Indonesian Pipefish [66273]
Species or species
area
Stigmatopora argus
Spotted Pipefish, Gulf Pipefish [66276]
Species or species
area
Stigmatopora nigra
Widebody Pipefish, Wide-bodied Pipefish, Black
Pipefish [66277]
Species or species
area
Urocampus carinirostris
Hairy Pipefish [66282]
Species or species
area
Vanacampus margaritifer
Mother-of-pearl Pipefish [66283]
Species or species
area
Vanacampus phillipi
Port Phillip Pipefish [66284]
Species or species
area
Vanacampus poecilolaemus
Longsnout Pipefish, Australian Long-snout
Pipefish, Long-snouted Pipefish [66285]
Species or species
area
Mammals
Arctocephalus forsteri
New Zealand Fur-seal [20]
Species or species
area
Neophoca cinerea
Vulnerable
Species or species
area
Reptiles
Caretta caretta
Endangered
Chelonia mydas
Green Turtle [1765]
Vulnerable
Endangered

within area
Name
Natator depressus
Threatened
Type of Presence
Vulnerable
Whales and other Cetaceans

Name
Mammals
Balaenoptera acutorostrata
Minke Whale [33]
Status
Species or species
area
Balaenoptera edeni
Bryde's Whale [35]
Blue Whale [36]
Species or species
area
Endangered
Caperea marginata
Species or species
area
Endangered
Grampus griseus
Risso's Dolphin, Grampus [64]
Orcinus orca
Stenella attenuata
Spotted Dolphin, Pantropical Spotted Dolphin [51]
Tursiops aduncus
Indian Ocean Bottlenose Dolphin, Spotted
Bottlenose Dolphin [68418]
Tursiops truncatus s. str.

within area
Species or species
area
Dusky Dolphin [43]
Humpback Whale [38]
Congregation or
occur within area
Species or species
area
Delphinus delphis
Common Dophin, Short-beaked Common
Dolphin [60]
Eubalaena australis
Type of Presence
Species or species
area
Vulnerable
Congregation or
occur within area
Species or species
area
Species or species
area
Species or species
within area
Species or species
area
Extra Information
Places on the RNE
Note that not all Indigenous sites may be listed.

Name
Natural
Lower Brunswick, Collie and Wellesley Rivers
Rocky Point Basalt Formation
South West Irrigation Area
Cathedral Avenue and Wetlands
Historic
Australind Memorial
Bunbury Timber Jetty
CBH Grain Silos
Commonwealth Bank Building (former)
Forrest House
Gibson Residence (former)
Henton Cottage
House
Lyric Theatre (former)
St Nicholas Anglican Church
The Bungalow Cottage
The Gordons (former)
Apex House
Boarding House (former)
Bunbury Boys School (former)
Bunbury Post Office (former)
Bunbury Railway Station (former)
Burlington Hotel
Convent of Mercy Group (former)
Craigie Lee
Cronshaws Store
Eagle Towers
House
House
House
House
House
House
House
House
House
House (former)
King Cottage
Leschenault Homestead
Lilydale
Myrniong House
Old Grand Central Hotel
Old Picton Inn
Prince of Wales Hotel
Rose Hotel and former Sample Room
St Marks Anglican Church and Graveyard (former)
The Residency
Tuart Street Group
Turner Street Group
Upton House
WA Bank Building (former)
State and Territory Reserves

Name
Leschenault Peninsula
Morangarel
Unnamed WA40552
State
Status
WA
WA
WA
WA
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Registered
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
WA
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
State
WA
WA
WA
Invasive Species
Weeds reported here are the 20 species of national significance (WoNS), along with other introduced
plants that are considered by the States and Territories to pose a particularly significant threat to
biodiversity. The following feral animals are reported: Goat, Red Fox, Cat, Rabbit, Pig, Water Buffalo
and Cane Toad. Maps from Landscape Health Project, National Land and Water Resouces Audit,
2001.
Name
Birds
Anas platyrhynchos
Mallard [974]
Columba livia
Rock Pigeon, Rock Dove, Domestic Pigeon [803]
Passer domesticus
House Sparrow [405]
Passer montanus
Eurasian Tree Sparrow [406]
Streptopelia chinensis
Spotted Turtle-Dove [780]
Streptopelia senegalensis
Laughing Turtle-dove, Laughing Dove [781]
Mammals
Canis lupus familiaris
Domestic Dog [82654]
Felis catus
Cat, House Cat, Domestic Cat [19]
Feral deer
Feral deer species in Australia [85733]
Mus musculus
House Mouse [120]
Oryctolagus cuniculus
Rabbit, European Rabbit [128]
Rattus rattus
Black Rat, Ship Rat [84]
Sus scrofa
Pig [6]
Vulpes vulpes
Red Fox, Fox [18]
Plants
Anredera cordifolia
Madeira Vine, Jalap, Lamb's-tail, Mignonette Vine,
Anredera, Gulf Madeiravine, Heartleaf
Madeiravine, Potato Vine [2643]
Asparagus asparagoides
Bridal Creeper, Bridal Veil Creeper, Smilax,
Florist's Smilax, Smilax Asparagus [22473]
Status
Type of Presence
Species or species
within area
Species or species
within area
Species or species
within area
Species or species
within area
Species or species
within area
Species or species
within area
Species or species
within area
Species or species
within area
Species or species
within area
Species or species
within area
Species or species
within area
Species or species
within area
Species or species
within area
Species or species
within area
Species or species
within area
Species or species
Name
Status
Asparagus declinatus
Bridal Veil, Bridal Veil Creeper, Pale Berry
Asparagus Fern, Asparagus Fern, South African
Creeper [66908]
Asparagus plumosus
Climbing Asparagus-fern [48993]
Type of Presence
within area
Species or species
within area
Species or species
within area
Brachiaria mutica
Para Grass [5879]
Species or species
area
Cenchrus ciliaris
Buffel-grass, Black Buffel-grass [20213]
Species or species
area
Chrysanthemoides monilifera
Bitou Bush, Boneseed [18983]
Species or species
area
Genista linifolia
Flax-leaved Broom, Mediterranean Broom, Flax
Broom [2800]
Species or species
within area
Genista sp. X Genista monspessulana

Broom [67538]
Species or species
area
Lycium ferocissimum
African Boxthorn, Boxthorn [19235]
Species or species
within area
Olea europaea
Olive, Common Olive [9160]
Species or species
area
Pinus radiata
Radiata Pine Monterey Pine, Insignis Pine, Wilding
Pine [20780]
Species or species
area
Protasparagus plumosus
Climbing Asparagus-fern, Ferny Asparagus
[11747]
Species or species
within area
Rubus fruticosus aggregate

Blackberry, European Blackberry [68406]
Species or species
within area
Salix spp. except S.babylonica, S.x calodendron & S.x reichardtii

Willows except Weeping Willow, Pussy Willow and
Sterile Pussy Willow [68497]
Solanum elaeagnifolium
Silver Nightshade, Silver-leaved Nightshade,
White Horse Nettle, Silver-leaf Nightshade,
Tomato Weed, White Nightshade, Bull-nettle,
Prairie-berry, Satansbos, Silver-leaf Bitter-apple,
Silverleaf-nettle, Trompillo [12323]
Species or species
within area
Species or species
within area
Key Ecological Features (Marine)
Key Ecological Features are the parts of the marine ecosystem that are considered to be important
for the biodiversity or ecosystem functioning and integrity of the Commonwealth Marine Area.
Name
Commonwealth marine environment within and
Western rock lobster
Region
South-west
South-west
Coordinates
-33.31801 115.66017
Caveat
The information presented in this report has been provided by a range of data sources as acknowledged at
the end of the report.
This report is designed to assist in identifying the locations of places which may be relevant in determining
obligations under the Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999. It holds mapped
locations of World Heritage and Register of National Estate properties, Wetlands of International
Importance, Commonwealth and State/Territory reserves, listed threatened, migratory and marine species
and listed threatened ecological communities. Mapping of Commonwealth land is not complete at this
stage. Maps have been collated from a range of sources at various resolutions.
Not all species listed under the EPBC Act have been mapped (see below) and therefore a report is a general
guide only. Where available data supports mapping, the type of presence that can be determined from the
data is indicated in general terms. People using this information in making a referral may need to consider
the qualifications below and may need to seek and consider other information sources.
ecological community distributions are less well known, existing vegetation maps and point location data
are used to produce indicative distribution maps.
For species where the distributions are well known, maps are digitised from sources such as recovery plans
and detailed habitat studies. Where appropriate, core breeding, foraging and roosting areas are indicated
under 'type of presence'. For species whose distributions are less well known, point locations are collated
from government wildlife authorities, museums, and non-government organisations; bioclimatic
distribution models are generated and these validated by experts. In some cases, the distribution maps are
based solely on expert knowledge.
Only selected species covered by the following provisions of the EPBC Act have been mapped:
- migratory and
- marine
The following species and ecological communities have not been mapped and do not appear in reports
produced from this database:
- threatened species listed as extinct or considered as vagrants
- some species and ecological communities that have only recently been listed
- some terrestrial species that overfly the Commonwealth marine area
- migratory species that are very widespread, vagrant, or only occur in small numbers
The following groups have been mapped, but may not cover the complete distribution of the species:
- non-threatened seabirds which have only been mapped for recorded breeding sites
- seals which have only been mapped for breeding sites near the Australian continent
Such breeding sites may be important for the protection of the Commonwealth Marine environment.
Acknowledgements
This database has been compiled from a range of data sources. The department acknowledges the
following custodians who have contributed valuable data and advice:
-Department of Environment, Climate Change and Water, New South Wales
-Department of Sustainability and Environment, Victoria
-Department of Primary Industries, Parks, Water and Environment, Tasmania
-Department of Environment and Natural Resources, South Australia
-Parks and Wildlife Service NT, NT Dept of Natural Resources, Environment and the Arts
-Environmental and Resource Management, Queensland
-Department of Environment and Conservation, Western Australia
-Department of the Environment, Climate Change, Energy and Water
-Birds Australia
-Australian Bird and Bat Banding Scheme
-Australian National Wildlife Collection
-Natural history museums of Australia
-Museum Victoria
-Australian Museum
-SA Museum
-Queensland Museum
-Online Zoological Collections of Australian Museums
-Queensland Herbarium
-National Herbarium of NSW
-Royal Botanic Gardens and National Herbarium of Victoria
-Tasmanian Herbarium
-State Herbarium of South Australia
-Northern Territory Herbarium
-Western Australian Herbarium
-Australian National Herbarium, Atherton and Canberra
-University of New England
-Ocean Biogeographic Information System
-Australian Government, Department of Defence
-State Forests of NSW
-Geoscience Australia
-CSIRO
-Other groups and individuals
The Department is extremely grateful to the many organisations and individuals who provided
expert advice and information on numerous draft distributions.
Please feel free to provide feedback via the Contact Us page.
Commonwealth of Australia
Department of the Environment
GPO Box 787
Canberra ACT 2601 Australia
+61 2 6274 1111
Attachment 4 Flora & Fauna Assessment
Technical Report 12
Flora and fauna assessment
November 2012
Development of Berth 14A at

Bunbury Port: Flora and
Fauna Assessment
14 November 2011

ABN 80 078 004 798
Level 5
503 Murray Street
Perth WA 6000
PO Box 7181
Australia
Telephone
+61 8 9489 9700
Facsimile
+61 8 9489 9777
Email
perth@pb.com.au
2162530A.RPT.001 LC Flora.docx

A+ GRI Rating: Sustainability Report 2010
Revision
Details
Date
00
Original
11/10/2011
01
Typographical and other edits.
14/11/2012
Amended By
L E Conole
Parsons Brinckerhoff Australia Pty Limited [2012].

Brinckerhoff. This document and the information are solely for the use of the authorised recipient and this document may not be
used, copied or reproduced in whole or part for any purpose other than that for which it was supplied by Parsons Brinckerhoff.
Parsons Brinckerhoff makes no representation, undertakes no duty and accepts no responsibility to any third party who may use
or rely upon this document or the information.
Author:
Lawrie Conole (Principal Ecologist) ...............................................
Signed:
........................................................................................................
Reviewer:
Martin Predavec (Technical Executive Ecology) .......................
Signed:
........................................................................................................
Approved by:
Emma Dean (Senior Environmental Scientist)..............................
Signed:
........................................................................................................
Date:
14 November 2012 .........................................................................
Distribution:
........................................................................................................
Please note that when viewed electronically this document may contain pages that have been intentionally left blank. These
blank pages may occur because in consideration of the environment and for your convenience, this document has been set up
so that it can be printed correctly in double-sided format.
2162530A.RPT.001 LC FLORA FINAL.DOCX
Development of Berth 14 at Bunbury Port: Flora and Fauna Assessment
Contents
Page number
1.
2.
3.
Introduction
1.1
Project overview
1.2
Objectives and scope
Methods
2.2
Desktop
2.3
Field
2.4
Flora
2.5
2.4.1
2.4.2
Fauna
2.6
2.5.1
Fauna habitat
Limitations
6
7
7
7
7
Results
3.1
Landscape context
3.2
Flora
8
Broad vegetation types
Vegetation condition
3.3
3.2.1
3.2.2
Fauna
8
14
14
3.3.1
3.3.2
Fauna habitat and species

Baudins Black-Cockatoo (Calyptorhynchus baudinii) and Carnabys BlackCockatoo (C. latirostris)
Other significant species
14
3.3.3
4.
Condition of vegetation communities

Species of plant
15
16
Likely impacts on ecological values
17
4.1
Loss of vegetation/habitats
17
4.2
Direct loss of threat-listed species
18
4.3
Habitat fragmentation and barrier effects
18
4.4
4.3.1
Barrier effects
4.3.2
Edge effects
Potential environmental impact of noise on wildlife
18
19
19
4.5
Weeds
20
4.6
Erosion
20
4.7
Coastal set-backs or buffers
20
PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF
Page i
5.
Recommendations
22
5.1
Habitat mitigation
22
5.2
5.1.1
Black-Cockatoos
Targeted surveys
22
22
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
22
26
27
27
Shorebirds
Australasian Bittern Botaurus poiciloptilus
Western Ringtail Possum Pseudocheirus occidentalis
EPBC significance assessments
6.
Summary
28
7.
References
29
List of tables
Page number
Table 2.1
Table 2.2
Table 3.1
Table 4.1
Contributors and their roles

Databases searched for species records
Study area location
Potential impacts associated with the Project
5
5
8
17
List of figures
Page number
Figure 1.1
Figure 1.2
Figure 3.1
Figure 5.1
Proposed development footprint, Berth 14, Port of Bunbury

Land parcel boundaries, Berth 14, Bunbury Port
Vegetation map for Berth 14, Bunbury Port
Recommended survey sites for shorebirds and the Australasian Bittern, Berth 14,
Bunbury Port
2
3
12
25
List of photographs
Page number
Photo 3.1
Photo 3.2
Photo 3.3
Photo 3.4
Photo 3.5
Photo 3.6
Photo 3.7
Page ii
Typical hardstand landscape in the study area

Degraded Dwarf Scrub outside study area (Olearia axillaris, *Trachyandra divaricata)
Stand of the invasive Victorian Teatree
Invasive Sandplain Lupin *Lupinus cosentinii
Invasive Soursob *Oxalis pes-caprae in non-indigenous plantation
Mixed Australian, non-indigenous plantations
Example of remnant native vegetation (Dwarf Scrub)
9
10
10
11
11
13
13
Photo 3.8
Photo 3.9
Photo 5.1
Photo 5.2
Typical ephemeral wetland in bulldozer scrape

Baudins Black-Cockatoos, study area
Potential high tide shorebird roost near Berth 14
Preston River estuary
14
15
23
26
Appendices
Appendix A
Flora list from August 2011 site visit
Appendix B
Fauna recorded during August 2011 site visit
Appendix C
EPBC Protected Matters Search
Appendix D
Statement of Limitations
Page iii
1.
1.1
Introduction
Project overview
Lanco Resources Australia Pty Ltd (Lanco) has proposed a development of Berth 14A
located within the Bunbury Port Inner Harbour (OEPA 2011), to facilitate the export of 15
million tonnes per annum (tpa) of coal for power generation in India. In order to support this
increased volume of coal, the following works are required:
construction of a coal handling facility including a new rail loop,
enclosed stockpile shed, conveyor systems,
ship loading facilities and a new berth (including dredging of the seabed).
It has been proposed that the new rail loop will accommodate a train length of 950 metres of
coal-loaded wagons to be unloaded at a rate of 8,000 tonnes per hours (tph).
To increase flexibility and maintain efficiency, the proposed coal handling facility is designed
to receive coal by rail and unload either directly to a berthed ship, or to the proposed
enclosed stockpile shed. The enclosed shed will allow up to a seven day supply of stockpiled
coal. The stockpiled coal will act as a buffer between the unloading and loading processes to
ensure a waiting ship is loaded as quickly as possible, as well as allowing train unloading to
proceed if a ship is not available.
The proposed dredging of Berth 14A and its approach is necessary to provide sufficient
space to allow bulk carriers to enter and depart the new berth. Dredging works are estimated
to take approximately 40 weeks and would include both marine and terrestrial footprints. The
dredging may include some basalt rock fracturing by blasting in limited areas. The berth also
requires construction of an armoured sea wall with sheet piles along the berth length, in
addition to rock armoured slope protection at the entrance to the basin and construction of a
wharf facility.
The projected development footprint of the site is shown as Figure 1.1. The land parcel
boundaries are shown in Figure 1.2.
The Environmental Protection Act 1986 (EP Act) sets out that where a proposal is
considered to have a significant environmental impact it will be subject to an assessment by
the Environmental Protection Authority (EPA) under section 38 of the EP Act. Consequently,
the proposed development of Berth 14 is being assessed by way of a Public Environmental
Review (PER) because it raises significant environmental factors (OEPA 2011). The PER is
required to be prepared in accordance with an approved Environmental Scoping Document
(ESD) prepared by the Office of the EPA (OEPA 2011).
Page 1
1.2

A Level 1 (reconnaissance) vegetation, flora and fauna investigation was conducted at the
proposed Berth 14 site on August 9 and 10, 2011, in accordance within Section 2.2 of the
Environmental Scoping Document (ESD) (EPA 2011) dealing with Terrestrial Flora and
Vegetation as follows:
Complete a Level 1 (Reconnaissance) flora and vegetation survey as described in EPA
Guidance Statement 51 within the proposal footprint and immediate adjacent area. The
survey should identify flora present, and describe and map the vegetation communities
present and condition as per Keighery (1994), as well as identify the ecological value of
the proposal area in local, regional and State context using the criteria for determining
regional significance in EPA Guidance Statement 10. Identify the construction and
operational elements of the proposal that may affect significant flora and vegetation.
Describe and assess the potential direct and indirect impacts that may result from
construction and operations of the proposal on flora and vegetation. This should be
done in accordance with EPA Guidance Statement No. 51 and the degree to which the
advice has been followed should be provided.
Identify and assess all direct and indirect impacts to native vegetation in regional and
public open space and the adjacent Leschenault Estuary from the proposal.
Identify any coastal set-backs or buffer zones that will be required between the
development and adjacent flora and vegetation as well as how they will be incorporated
into the design of the proposal.
Define the specific environmental outcome(s) to be achieved for loss of native
vegetation consistent with the Draft EPA Environmental Assessment Guideline No. 4 Towards Outcome Based Conditions.
Identify management measures to mitigate adverse impacts on the significant flora and
vegetation so that the EPAs objectives can be met.
The only exception to the above points is that no specific environmental outcomes for loss of
native vegetation have been formulated because the detailed design for the project, and
therefore the precise quantum of vegetation loss, has not yet been finalised.
The survey was largely based on a broad scale vegetation assessment and included:
A broad scale vegetation assessment
Incidental observations of flora and fauna
Vegetation and fauna habitat condition assessment
Active searching and listening for fauna
This report describes the approach and results for the August 2011 reconnaissance survey,
as well as results of earlier surveys of the site.
This report also includes recommendations for further work, consistent with the Terrestrial
Fauna elements of the ESD, to be conducted in November 2011, based on observations
made during the August 2011 site visit.
Page 4
2.
Methods
This biodiversity assessment is based on a desktop review of available information and a
field inspection of the study area and surrounding landscape.
2.1
Personnel
The contributors to the preparation of this report, their qualifications and roles are listed in
Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
Contributors and their roles

Name
2.2
Qualification
Role
Lawrie Conole
GradCertOrnith,
PhD (in prep.)
Principal Ecologist field surveys, report

preparation
Clifford Bennison
BSc(Hons)
Ecologist field surveys
Chad Browning
BAppSci
Ecologist - mapping
Martin Predavec
PhD
Technical review
Desktop
Records of Threatened species known or predicted to occur were obtained from a range of
databases as detailed in Table 2.2.
Table 2.2
Databases searched for species records
Database
Search date
Area searched
Reference
WA NatureMaps
5 August 2011
10 km buffer around the

study site
WA DEC
Birds Australia Bird

Data
5 August 2011

study site
Birds Australia
www.birdata.com.au
EPBC Protected
Matters Search Tool
9 October 2011
(flora and fauna)

study site
Department of
Sustainability,
Environment, Water,
Population and
Communities (2011)
This report also relies on information presented in earlier consultants reports, namely
Bennett (2008) and Harewood (2008).
Page 5
2.3
Field
The field inspection within the study area was carried out on between 9 10 August 2011,
following the method outlined in EPA Guidance No. 51 (2004) for flora and vegetation. The
inspection sought primarily to ground-truth information provided by the desk-based review,
particularly in relation to the following:
native vegetation
listed threatened ecological communities or species
significant habitat for Threatened and Migratory species or locally significant species.
2.4
Flora
2.4.1
Condition of vegetation communities
The condition of vegetation was assessed through general observation and comparison
against Keighery (1994; in Government of Western Australia 2000) scale, from 1 6 as
below:
Page 6
2.4.2
Species of plant
The floristic diversity and possible presence of threat-listed species was assessed using the
random meander technique (Cropper 1993), whereby the recorder walks in a random
manner throughout the site recording all species observed, boundaries between various
vegetation communities and condition of vegetation. The time spent in each vegetation
community was generally proportional to the size of the community and its species richness,
and covered the entire site.
2.5
Fauna
2.5.1
Fauna habitat
Fauna habitat assessments were completed to assess the likelihood of threat-listed species
of animal occurring in the study area. Habitat assessments included the identification of
habitat features, hollow trees and random meander surveys.
Fauna habitats were assessed generally by examining characteristics such as the structure
and floristics of the canopy, understorey and ground vegetation, the structure and
composition of the litter layer, and other habitat attributes important for feeding, roosting and
breeding. The following criteria were used to evaluate habitat values:
Good:
A full range of fauna habitat components are usually present (for example,
old-growth trees, fallen timber, feeding and roosting resources) and habitat
linkages to other remnant ecosystems in the landscape are intact.
Moderate: Some fauna habitat components are missing (for example, old-growth trees and
fallen timber), although linkages with other remnant habitats in the landscape
are usually intact, but sometimes degraded.
Poor:
2.6
Many fauna habitat elements in low quality remnants have been lost, including
old growth trees (for example, due to past timber harvesting or land clearing)
and fallen timber, and tree canopies are often highly fragmented. Habitat
linkages with other remnant ecosystems in the landscape have usually been
severely compromised by extensive past clearing.
Limitations
A common limitation of ecological surveys is the short time period in which they are
undertaken and the lack of seasonal sampling, which can lead to low capture rates or lack of
detection of some species. For this reason, no sampling technique can totally eliminate the
possibility that a species is present on a site. The conclusions in this report are based on
information obtained from the desk-based assessment and site inspection. The results are
indicative of the environmental condition of the site at the time of assessment, including the
presence or otherwise of species. Also, it should be recognised that site conditions, including
the presence of threat-listed species, can change with time.
Page 7
3.
Results
3.1
Landscape context
The study area is located at the Port of Bunbury within the City of Bunbury, south-west
Western Australia. Location information for the study area is outlined in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1
Study area location
Location information
Study area
Bioregion
Swan Coastal Plain
Botanical Province
Southwest
Botanical Subdistrict
Drummond
Local government area
City of Bunbury
Bunbury is situated 175 kilometres south of Perth, near the mouth of the Collie River at the
southern end of the Leschenault Inlet. Bunbury has a Mediterranean climate with warm
summers and mild winters, and rainfall is distributed throughout the year with a Winter
maximum. The Port of Bunbury is a highly developed industrial precinct, close to residential
and industrial estates. The landscape surrounding the study area is devoid of large areas of
natural vegetation, but functions as a mosaic of developed land with natural inclusions and
linear features such as watercourses and roadside vegetation.
3.2
Flora
3.2.1
Broad vegetation types
As previously documented by Bennett (2008), the vegetation of the study area is

predominantly exotic, but does include some small areas of degraded remnant or pioneering
native vegetation. There is very little native vegetation within the boundaries of the study
area; and most of what remains is extensively degraded by weed invasion.
Quadrating and multivariate statistical analyses were not undertaken as the present
confirmatory study confirmed the initial results of Bennett (2008) and by extension these
results were applied to analogous areas in the previously unsurveyed eastern sections of the
site and Lot 2.
Remnant native vegetation present fell broadly into groups as follows:
Dwarf Scrub (Olearia axillaris, Scaevola crassifolia, Rhagodia baccata ssp. dioica) over
weeds FCT29a Coastal shrublands on shallow sands.
Thickets of Acacia cyclops and Acacia cochlearis FCT29b Acacia shrublands on
taller dunes.
Page 8
The extent of Dwarf Scrub that occurs other than in a degraded mosaic with the invasive
Victorian Teatree #Leptospermum laevigatum is estimated to occupy <0.5 hectares, and is
confined to an area traversed by the western study area boundary (a chain mesh fence).
Acacia saligna thickets occurred mainly on reclaimed land, and were therefore opportunistic
colonisers in nature rather than remnant vegetation. Wetland aquatic vegetation (Typha,
Phragmites, etc.) was found in a number of inundated bulldozer scrapes on site (see Photo
3.4), and was ephemeral and opportunistic in character.
None of these assemblages are listed as Threatened Ecological Units by DEC (2008), and
no Declared Rare or Priority Flora were recorded during the survey.
The largest areas of the site are treeless and covered in a range of pasture weeds and nonnative grasses (particularly Part Lot 963 (east)) (Figure 3.1). Large stands of exotic herbs
such as Sandplain Lupin (*Lupinus consentinii), Strapweed (*Trachyandra divaricata) and
Rose Pelargonium (*Pelargonium capitatum) occur, both on coastal sands as well as dredge
spoil in reclaimed areas. Shaded areas have high levels of infestation of Soursob (*Oxalis
pes-caprae). Some areas are largely without vegetation including old hardstand, scalped
sites, and road bases (particularly in Lots 428, 429, 2, 962, 963) (see Photo 3.1).
The non-native Victorian Teatree (#Leptospermum laevigatum) has established copses of
scrub vegetation across the site; again both on coastal sands as well as dredge spoil in
reclaimed areas (Photo 3.3). Victorian Teatree is still spreading on the site, and areas of
active colonisation/regeneration were observed.
On western sections of the site (mostly Lots 1 and 2), extensive plantations of mixed exotic,
local native and non-native Australian plants have been established (Figure 3.1). Important
amongst these is the frequent presence of Peppermint (Agonis flexuosa), which though
planted on the site is a locally indigenous species. Its possible significance for the Nationally
threatened Western Ringtail Possum (Pseudocheirus occidentalis) is discussed below (see
5.2.3).
Photo 3.1
Typical hardstand landscape in the study area (Lot 1)
Page 9
Photo 3.2
Degraded Dwarf Scrub outside study area (Olearia axillaris,

*Trachyandra divaricata)
Several discrete stands of Golden Wreath Wattle (Acacia saligna) occur across the site
(Figure 3.1). Where infested with galls these are of limited significance (principally because
of their small extent) as foraging habitat for two of the Nationally threatened black-cockatoo
species (Calyptorhynchus baudinii and C. latirostris see discussion below).
Photo 3.3
Page 10
Stand of the invasive Victorian Teatree
Photo 3.4
Invasive Sandplain Lupin *Lupinus cosentinii
Photo 3.5
Invasive Soursob *Oxalis pes-caprae in non-indigenous plantation
Page 11
\\auperf\PROJ\L\Lanco_Infratech\2162530a_LANCO_PB_LABOUR\05_WrkPapers\WP\Draft\Ecology\Temp_GIS\Projects
Z
Level 15
28 Freshwater Place
Southbank VIC. 3006
ABN 84 797 323 433
PO Box 19016
Southbank VIC. 3006
Australia
Telephone +61 3 9861 1111

Facsimile +61 3 9861 1144
Email: melbourne@pb.com.au
100
Drawing Number: 2162530A_Vegetation
200
metres
Scale (at A3) 1:6,000

Coordinate System: GDA 1994 MGA Zone 50
Study site
Brazilian Pepper
Moonah
Revision: A1
Artificial Ephemeral Wetland
Athel Pine
Swamp Sheoak
Date: 13/10/11
Mixed Exotic Trees
Norfolk Island Pine
Victorian Teatree
Mixed stand (Eucalyptus, Acacia, Agonis etc)
Acacia saligna
Author: CSB
Checked by: LC
Victorian Teatree and Dwarf Scrub Mosaic
Pasture grass
and weeds
Parsons Brinckerhoff Australia Pty Limited ("PB") Copyright in the drawings, information and data recorded in this document ("the information") is the property of PB. This document and the information are solely for the use of the authorised recipient and this document may not be
used, copied or reproduced in whole or part for any purpose other than that for which it was supplied by PB. PB makes no representation, undertakes no duty and accepts no responsibility to any third party who may use or rely upon this document or the information.
Figure 3.1
Vegetation map for

Berth 14, Bunbury Port
Photo 3.6
Mixed Australian, non-indigenous plantations
Photo 3.7
Example of remnant native vegetation (Dwarf Scrub)
Wetland aquatic vegetation on the site is opportunistic and ephemeral; present in a series of
bulldozer scrapes that hold water for varying periods after rain (Figure 3.1).
Page 13
The estuary of the Preston River adjoins the site along its eastern margin. The aquatic
vegetation there, dominated as it is by a range of tussock-forming graminoids
(Restionaceae, Juncaceae, Cyperaceae, Poaceae, etc), forms suitable habitat for the
Nationally threat-listed Australasian Bittern Botaurus poiciloptilus. Further discussion of this
species can be found in section 5.2.2 below.
3.2.2
Vegetation condition
A small patch of Dwarf Scrub of less than a hectare was of Good (4) condition on Keigherys
(1994) scale, whilst the rest in a mosaic with Victorian Teatree and other invasive weeds was
Degraded (5). The balance of the pasture, weeds and plantation vegetation was Completely
Degraded (6). Wetland vegetation was generally Degraded (5), and in drier parts Completely
Degraded (6).
Photo 3.8
3.3
Typical ephemeral wetland in bulldozer scrape
Fauna
3.3.1
Fauna habitat and species
The suitability, size and configuration of the fauna habitats correlated broadly with the
structure, floristic and quality of the local and regional vegetation types. Fauna habitats
within the study area were generally in poor condition and provided only limited habitat for
only some opportunistic birds and common amphibians associated with disturbed coastal
landscapes.
A total of 62 bird species, three mammals and two frogs were detected in the study area
during the site visit (Appendix 2). The species encountered were typical of the mosaic of
disturbed and semi-natural habitats found in the coastal zone in the vicinity of Bunbury.
Page 14
The confirmed presence on the site of the Nationally threatened Baudins Black-Cockatoo
and Carnabys Black-Cockatoo is discussed below.
3.3.2
Baudins Black-Cockatoo (Calyptorhynchus baudinii) and
Carnabys Black-Cockatoo (C. latirostris)
EPBC: Baudins Black-Cockatoo - Vulnerable; Carnabys Black-Cockatoo - Endangered.
WA: Baudins Black-Cockatoo - Rare or likely to become extinct (Wildlife Conservation Act
1950); Carnabys Black-Cockatoo - Rare (Wildlife Conservation Act 1950); Endangered
(DEC 2010).
The site is within the modelled range of all three threat-listed black-cockatoos, but only
Baudins and Carnabys Black-Cockatoos have been confirmed as using the site for nonbreeding season foraging (i.e. the Forest Red-tailed Black-Cockatoo C. magnificus naso was
not identified on site, nor was there suitable habitat for the species). Harewood (2008)
regarded these two species as potential visitors to the site.
In the morning on 10/8/2011 a mixed flock of Baudins and Carnabys Black-Cockatoos (~6
birds in total) were observed foraging on galls in an Acacia saligna thicket in the extreme SE
corner of the site (Figure 3.1). There is no breeding habitat (large hollow-bearing Eucalyptus
trees) present on the site for black-cockatoos, and though the birds may range up to 15km
from their nest site when foraging, the nearest known breeding sites for Baudins BlackCockatoo are >20km south of Bunbury (SEWPaC 2011b).
Photo 3.9
Baudins Black-Cockatoos in Acacia saligna, study area
Baudins Black-Cockatoo breeds in the eucalypt forests of the south-west, but in the nonbreeding season (Autumn-Winter) flocks migrate north to the central and northern parts of
the Darling Scarp and the southern Swan Coastal Plain, Perth hills and south coast
Page 15
(SEWPaC 2011b). Carnabys Black-Cockatoo breeds in the wheatbelt and some locations
along the south and west coasts, and in the non-breeding season (late Summer-AutumnWinter) move towards the coast (SEWPaC 2011b). During the non-breeding period, birds
assemble into flocks (sometimes mixed flocks of the two species) and move through the
landscape searching for food. The presence of two of the black-cockatoo species in the
study area in August is entirely consistent with their known movement patterns and foraging
habits.
The most relevant trigger for an EPBC referral for these species would be the clearing of
>1ha of high quality foraging habitat (SEWPaC 2011b). It is unlikely that this threshold will be
met at this site, as although there are scattered A. saligna thickets across the site, they cover
less than a hectare, and it also is unlikely that the stands will all be lost during the life of the
project. It is more likely that the cover of A. saligna on the site will increase in targeted
plantings plus retention of some existing stands.
3.3.3
Other significant species
Two black-cockatoo species were the only threat-listed species confirmed to occur on the
site during the series of surveys including this current study. Suitable habitat occurs on the
site and in the adjacent Preston River estuary for a further two threat-listed fauna species.
The Western Ringtail Possum and Australasian Bittern are discussed elsewhere in this
report (sections 5.2.2 and 5.2.3).
The wider landscape around the site includes suitable habitat for a wide range of listed
migratory fauna, including shorebirds, waterbirds and raptors (birds of prey).
The use by the Eastern Osprey (Pandion cristatus) of two purpose-built nest platforms within
Bunbury Port was observed during the recent visit. A number of other raptor species were
observed over the site (see Appendix 2).
Several shorebird or waterbird species were observed in close proximity to the site Eastern
Great Egret, Little Egret, Whimbrel, Common Sandpiper, Australian Pied Oystercatcher and
Crested Tern. A wider range of shorebirds is expected to occur in Leschenault Inlet during
the summer period, after migratory species have arrived from Northern Hemisphere breeding
grounds. These species will be assessed in a series of targeted surveys planned to occur in
November 2011.
Page 16
4.
Likely impacts on ecological values

Potential impacts to biodiversity resulting from the construction and operation phases of the
proposed activity are considered in this section and summarised in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
Potential impacts associated with the Project
Potential impact
Potential phase of impact

Construction
Operation
Direct loss of individuals of a threat-listed species
Weed and pest invasion
Erosion and sedimentation
Altered hydrology
4.1
Loss of vegetation and habitats result in a range of direct and indirect impacts to vegetation
communities and species of plant and animal including:
reduction in the extent of vegetation communities and associated habitats
loss of local populations of species
fragmentation of remnants of vegetation communities or local populations of individual
species
increased edge effects and habitat for invasive species
reduction in the viability of ecological communities resulting from loss or disruption of
ecological functions (e.g. increased desiccation, light penetration, herbivore, weed
invasion, predation, parasitism)
destruction of flora and fauna habitat and associated loss of biological diversity (habitat
removal may include removal of hollow bearing trees, loss of leaf litter layer, and
resultant changes to soil biota)
soil exposure and altered water flow patterns resulting in increased erosion and
sedimentation.
Construction of the Project will require the removal of approximately 2ha of native
vegetation. Modified habitats for a range of locally abundant bird and amphibian species will
also be lost or further modified on the site.
It is unlikely that the project will cause direct loss of any native vegetation outside the
development footprint. Loss or degradation of estuarine vegetation could result from
uncontrolled sediment flows from the site during construction, but as these sources of
damage will be controlled, such indirect loss or damage is also unlikely.
Page 17
4.2
Direct loss of threat-listed species

Fauna injury or death could occur as a result of the proposed activities during the
construction phase, particularly when vegetation is being cleared. The risk of vehicle collision
is also present during the operation of the new rail loop as a result of collision with trains or
during maintenance activities.
While some mobile species, such as birds, have the potential to move away from the path of
clearing, other species that are less mobile, or those that are nocturnal and restricted by
access to foraging or denning resources, may have difficulty moving over relatively large
distances. Owing to the small extent of vegetation proposed to be removed and the limited
habitat available within the study area, it is considered that vehicle strike during construction
and maintenance works will not be significant. The proposed extension to rail track and
roading is unlikely to significantly increase the risk of wildlife colliding with trains or road
vehicles.
It is proposed to locate new plantings of Acacia saligna as far away as practicable from road
and rail corridors to minimise the risk of vehicle collision with the two Nationally threat-listed
black-cockatoos.
4.3

Habitat fragmentation is the division of a single area of habitat into two or more smaller
areas, with the occurrence of a new habitat type in the area between the fragments. This
new dividing habitat type is often artificial and inhospitable to the species remaining within
the fragments (Bennett 1990, 1993; Johnson et al. 2007).
In addition to the loss of total habitat area, the process of fragmentation can affect species
within the newly created fragments in a number of ways, including barrier effects, genetic
isolation, and edge effects. The degree to which these potential impacts affect the flora and
fauna within the newly created fragments depends on a number of variables, including
distance between the fragments, local environmental conditions, the species present and
any proposed mitigation measures.
4.3.1
Barrier effects
Barrier effects occur where particular species are either unable or are unwilling to move
between suitable areas of fragmented habitat due to the imposition of a barrier (e.g. a newly
created inhospitable habitat type). This could result in either a complete halt to species
movement or a reduced level of species movement between fragments. Species most
vulnerable to barrier effects include rare species (where even a small reduction in
movements can reduce genetic continuity within a population, hence reducing the effective
population size), smaller ground-dwelling species and relatively sessile species with low
mobility. Species least vulnerable to barrier effects tend to be those that are highly mobile
(e.g. birds), although even these species can vary in their response to barriers.
Genetic isolation occurs where individuals from a population within one fragment are unable
to interbreed with individuals from populations in adjoining fragments. Genetic isolation can
lead to problems with inbreeding and genetic drift for populations isolated within a fragment.
This may lead to reduced fitness (in the form of inbreeding depression resulting from
Page 18
expression of deleterious recessive genes in offspring) and consequently reduced viability of

populations that are isolated in habitat fragments as a result of the proposed activity.
The project will result in the widening of existing barriers. Given the width and management
of the existing port facilities it is likely that this corridor already forms a firm barrier to the
majority of locally occurring fauna species. Furthermore, some of the surrounding landscape
is highly modified and cleared as a result of past land use and provides limited habitat for
fauna, except highly mobile species tolerant of such disturbance, such as common species
of bird.
Exceptions to this are the tidal estuaries of the Collie and Preston Rivers, and sections of
Leschenault Inlet to the north and south of Bunbury Port (including mangroves to the south).
To the extent that some of the proposed structures and activities of the site may interfere
with movements of shorebirds to and from roosts and feeding areas in the wider landscape,
the proposed project may constitute an additional barrier to some fauna movement.
4.3.2
Edge effects
Edge effects are zones of changed environmental conditions (e.g. altered light levels, wind
speed, temperature) occurring along the edges of habitat fragments. These new
environmental conditions along the edges can promote the growth of different vegetation
types (including weeds), promote invasion by pest animals specialising in edge habitats,
or change the behaviour of resident animals (Moenting & Morris 2006). Edge zones can
be subject to higher levels of predation by introduced mammalian and native avian
predators. The distance of edge effects influence can vary, with edge effects in roads having
been recorded greater than 1 km (Forman et al. 2000) and as little as 50 m away (Bali 2000;
2005).
Feral species recorded within the study area include the Laughing Dove, Fox and Rabbit.
Given the highly modified nature of the surrounding landscape, the project is unlikely to
increase edge effects such that these species would increase in number or distribution.
Within the study area, the majority of vegetation/habitat is already fragmented by existing
linear infrastructure and tracks, and as a result is already subject to significant edge effects.
4.4

Many animals detect and depend on sound to communicate, navigate, evade danger and
find food, but human-made noise can alter the behaviour of animals or interfere with their
normal functioning (Bowles 1997). In some cases it can harm their health, reproduction,
survivorship, habitat use, distribution, abundance, or genetic composition (Forman et al.
2000).
However, variation in ambient noise, such as from wind or other animals, is part of the
natural environment (Eve 1991) and many animals display behavioural adaptations to this
variation. For example, certain species of frogs avoid vocalising during loud calling by
cicadas (Paez et al. 1993) or other frogs (Matsui et al. 1993), and some species will time
their calls during brief periods of silence (Schwartz & Henderson 1991).
During construction, there will be increased noise and dust in the study area and surrounds
due to ground disturbance, machinery and vehicle movements and vegetation clearing. This
Page 19
may cause disturbance for some fauna. A number of factors are thought to influence the
reaction of animals to noise including the volume, the frequency and the characteristic of the
noise (e.g. short and percussive versus long and constant).
The study area is already affected by noise levels associated with the existing port facility.
How fauna located in the local area will respond to the increased noise is not known, but
given the degree of current habitat disturbance in the local area and the existing noise
environment, it is not likely to be significant.
Strategically located screening plantations will assist in minimising the noise (and light) from
the port reaching surrounding waterways.
4.5
Weeds
The majority of the vegetation within the study area is already substantially weed-invaded;
therefore, the overall extent of habitat modification is not likely to increase significantly.
Spread of weeds during the operation phase would relate generally to maintenance
activities. Given the high level of weed invasion within the majority of the corridor,
construction and to a lesser extent, operation phase, has the potential to spread weed from
the study area to other sites, if vehicles, machinery and equipment are not cleaned of weed
propagules before leaving the study area.
Standard industry protocols for vehicle hygiene will be implemented to guard against the
spread of Phytophthora cinnamomi to or from the site.
Hygiene protocols will also include measures to prevent the introduction of new weed
species (particularly those capable of colonising waterways and estuaries) to the site and
surrounding landscape.
4.6
Erosion
Excavation and earthworks undertaken during the construction phase would expose soils
that have the potential to enter surrounding areas of vegetation and waterways, if not
properly managed. Erosion during the operation stage of the Project would generally relate
to maintenance activities and is likely to be minor if properly managed.
4.7
Coastal set-backs or buffers

The proposed development footprint involving the construction of buildings and ship loading
facilities is largely confined to areas already degraded or completely degraded in Lots 1 and
2 and adjacent areas in the west of the site, and outside the coastal dunes.
Parts of Storage Shed 1 and the loading facility are currently shown as overlapping areas of
Dwarf Scrub/Victorian Teatree mosaic. Little development is indicated for much of Lot 2. In
Lot 963, the proposed new rail loop falls entirely inside the area currently bounded by roads.
Page 20
Consequently, it appears that some existing buffers to native vegetation outside the site will
remain in their current state, and the incursion into the near-coastal zone will occur
predominantly in areas already completely or partly degraded, and currently covered in
hardstand or exotic vegetation.
The maintenance of set-backs and buffers in their current state could be enhanced by
targeted plantings of screening species including those which can be used by fauna on the
site. In keeping with the recommendation in section 5.1.1 to place plantings of Acacia saligna
as far as practicable from roads and rail lines to minimise collision risk for threat-listed blackcockatoos, such plantings should be confined to interior parts of Lots 2 and 963.
Page 21
5.
Recommendations
5.1
Habitat mitigation
5.1.1
Black-Cockatoos
Two Nationally threatened black cockatoos (Baudins and Carnabys Black-Cockatoos)

utilise Acacia saligna scrub on site for foraging in the non-breeding season.
The following recommendations are made:
seek to minimise losses of existing stands of Acacia saligna;
ensure that landscape plantings associated with the Berth 14 development Include
clustered plantings of A. saligna;
monitor plantings and assure that maintenance schedules include targeted replacement
plantings for any seedlings which fail to establish;
place Acacia saligna plantings as far away from roads and rail lines as practicable (e.g.
the interior of Lots 2 and 963), to minimise the risk of collisions between birds and
vehicles.
Note that the Acacia saligna scrub currently occurring on the site amounts to less than 1ha,
and as it predominantly occurs on reclaimed land appears not to be remnant native
vegetation, but rather opportunistic colonising vegetation. Nonetheless, it constitutes habitat
for foraging, non-breeding, Nationally threat-listed black-cockatoos, and therefore has
conservation significance.
5.2
Targeted surveys
Targeted Level 2 surveys for shorebirds, Australasian Bittern and Western Ringtail Possum
will be conducted in November 2011. The timing of these surveys has been chosen to
coincide with the peak numbers of shorebirds arriving in the area from the Northern
Hemisphere, tidal patterns, and breeding season for the bittern. Timing is less crucial for the
possum, which will be surveyed for concurrently with the bird surveys.
5.2.1
Shorebirds
Migratory and sedentary shorebirds of the order Charadriiformes include sandpipers,

plovers, dotterels, stilts and their relatives. All are listed under the migratory and marine
schedules of the Commonwealth Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act
1999 (EPBC), which formalises their inclusion in a range of international bilateral treaties.
They are similarly recognised under Schedule 3 of the Wildlife Conservation Act 1950 of
Western Australia.
Page 22
In Australia a number of sites have been rated for their significance for shorebirds, but none
of these sites occur within or immediately adjacent to the study area. In the national
inventory of known high tide roosts, or targeted national wader survey sites, no sites occur
within or immediately adjacent to the study area.
The inner harbour site has relatively little obvious shorebird habitat within it, but sits in a
wider landscape with a diverse range of potential shorebird foraging and roost sites.
Understanding the significance of these adjacent areas will be important for assessing the
local and regional likelihood of off-site impacts from construction and operational aspects of
the harbour expansion. Some indication of at least potential small high tide roosts was noted
during the site visit, on rock walls throughout the area (used by at least one Whimbrel
Numenius phaeopus during our visit). Observations of bird use and signs (abundant guano)
on rock walls suggest that these sites are currently mainly used by cormorants
(Phalacrocoracidae). One Common Sandpiper Actites hypoleucos was observed using tree
roots for foraging platforms in Vittoria Bay and the Collie River estuary opposite the study
area. A number of Australian Pied Oystercatcher Haematopus longirostris were observed in
Leschenault Inlet south of the Inner Harbour during the site visit; including some foraging on
manicured lawn at the east end.
Photo 5.1
Potential high tide shorebird roost near Berth 14
In accordance with the shorebird survey described in the EPAs ESD, and conforming to
SEWPaCs (2011a) survey guidelines, the following indicative scope is offered.
Recommended regional survey sites (see Figure 5.1):
Preston River estuary delta as foraging site
Collie River estuary foraging and potential roost sites
Leschenault Inlet/Vittoria Bay cut potential rock wall roosts
Leschenault Inlet cut and mangroves potential rock wall and mangrove roosts
inner harbour rock walls potential rock wall roosts
Page 23
Recommended survey methods:

roost searches
roost counts
counts of foraging shorebirds
documentation of flight paths
Page 24
Z
Level 15
28 Freshwater Place
Southbank VIC. 3006
ABN 84 797 323 433
PO Box 19016
Southbank VIC. 3006
Australia
Telephone +61 3 9861 1111

Facsimile +61 3 9861 1144
100
Drawing Number: 2162530A_Recommended_survey

Revision: A1
200
metres
Figure 5.1
Legend
Date: 13/10/11
Author: CSB
Checked by: LC
Recommended sites for shorebird surveys
Recommended sites for Australasian Bittern survey
Scale (at A3) 1:15,000

Recommended survey sites for

shorebirds and Australasian
Bittern, Berth 14, Bunbury Port
5.2.2
Australasian Bittern Botaurus poiciloptilus
EPBC: Endangered
WA: Rare (Wildlife Conservation Act 1950); Endangered (DEC 2010)
In Australia, the Australasian Bittern occurs in terrestrial wetlands and estuarine habitats,
mainly in the temperate southeast and southwest. It favours wetlands with tall dense
vegetation, where it forages in still, shallow water up to 0.3 m deep, often at the edges of
pools or waterways, or from platforms or mats of vegetation over deep water. It favours
permanent and seasonal freshwater habitats, particularly those dominated by sedges,
rushes and/or reeds growing over muddy substrates (SEWPaC 2011).
Suitable, though marginal, habitat (saltmarsh, aquatic herbfield and reed beds) is present in
the Preston River estuary along the eastern edge of the study area. There are few known
sites for this species between Perth and Busselton, and few records since the 1960s in the
region.
Photo 5.2
Preston River estuary
Recommendation: A spring survey. Listening at dusk and at night for booming male
Australasian Bitterns, in combination with other nocturnal fieldwork. In most habitats, the
recommended method for surveying the Australasian Bittern is by nocturnal survey with
detection by call. Surveys should be conducted during the spring-summer breeding season,
when calls are most often heard (SEWPaC 2011b). Surveys would be most effective during
calm weather.
Page 26
5.2.3
Western Ringtail Possum Pseudocheirus occidentalis
EPBC: Vulnerable
WA: Rare or likely to become extinct (Wildlife Conservation Act 1950); Vulnerable (DEC
2010)
No known remnant habitat for the Western Ringtail is present within the study area.
Additionally, there were also no obvious signs (dreys, scats) found during the site visit.
Harewood (2008) in his desktop study regarded this species as unlikely to occur on the site.
However, the site features extensive plantings of Peppermint Agonis flexuosa, a key element
of known Western Ringtail habitat, and the site is within the broadly known range of the
species (Leschenault Peninsula and the Collie River form the northern boundary) (SEWPaC
2011). No spotlight surveys were conducted during the reconnaissance site visit in August.
Consequently, there is a small likelihood that Western Ringtail may have reached the site
from nearby natural populations, and it would be prudent to conduct two simple spotlight
surveys of suitable habitat on site to establish its presence or absence. Ringtails (genus
Pseudocheirus) are relatively simple to detect in spotlight surveys when present.
Recommendation: Two nights of spotlight surveys (2 x 2 hours) within denser patches
containing of A. flexuosa plantings. These surveys can be conducted during the same period
as shorebird/waterbird surveys. Nights without rainfall and high winds are preferred.
5.2.4
EPBC significance assessments
Two EPBC threat-listed fauna species are known to utilise habitat on the site, and a further
two EPBC threat-listed fauna species may be present on or immediately adjacent to the site.
Recommendation: After the completion of the targeted surveys in November 2011, it is
recommended that the significance of any confirmed occurrences, or species for which
likelihood of presence is rated at Moderate or higher, are assessed against the overarching
EPBC guidelines and any species-specific guidelines which may exist or be released in the
interim.
Page 27
6.
Summary
Key biodiversity issues within the study area are:
The presence of small areas of remnant native vegetation within a larger, degraded
landscape (including reclaimed land).
Areas of habitat within the Leschenault Estuary and the wider landscape suitable for
use as foraging and roost sites for listed migratory shorebirds.
The potential for the development to disrupt the movements or other activities of
threatened or migratory fauna in the area due to barrier and noise effects.
A targeted survey for shorebirds has already been scheduled to occur in November
2011.
An assessment of significance under EPBC guidelines will be required following
completion of the survey.
The confirmed presence on site of the Nationally threatened Baudins and Carnabys
Black-Cockatoos, and the presence of small areas of low moderate quality foraging
habitat for these species in the non-breeding season.
An assessment of significance under EPBC guidelines will be required following
completion of the November 2011 surveys.
The unresolved issue of the presence of the Nationally threatened Western Ringtail
Possum, due to the presence of low quality potential habitat for the species within its
known range.
A confirmatory survey is recommended to run concurrently with the targeted
shorebirds survey in November 2011.
If found to be present, an assessment of significance under EPBC guidelines will
be required.
The presence in the adjacent Preston River estuary of marginal habitat for the
Nationally threatened Australasian Bittern.
A confirmatory survey is recommended to run concurrently with the targeted
shorebirds/Western Ringtail survey in November 2011.
If found to be present, an assessment of significance under EPBC guidelines will
be required.
Page 28
7.
References
Bali, R 2000, Discussion paper - Compensating for Edge Effects, Biosis Research for the
Roads and Traffic Authority, Sydney.
Bali, R 2005, Discussion Paper - Compensating for Edge Effects, Ecosense Consulting for
the NSW Roads and Traffic Authority, Sydney.
Bennett, AF 1990, Habitat corridors: Their role in wildlife management and conservation,
Arthur Rylah Institute for Environmental Research, Melbourne.
Bennett, AF 1993, 'Fauna Conservation in Box and Ironbark Forests: A Landscape
Approach', Victorian Naturalist, vol. 110, no. 1, pp. 15-23.
Bennett, E. (2008). Flora and vegetation, Port expansion, City of Bunbury. Report prepared
for Bunbury Port Authority. (Bennett Environmental Consulting Pty Ltd, Kalamunda.)
Bennett, E. (2008). Flora and vegetation, Port expansion, City of Bunbury. Report prepared
for Bunbury Port Authority. (Bennett Environmental Consulting Pty Ltd, Kalamunda.)
Bowles, AE 1997, 'Responses of wildlife to noise', in RL Knight & KJ Gutzwiller (eds),
Wildlife and Recreationists: Coexistence through Management and Research, Island Press,
Washington DC.
Cropper, SC 1993, Management of Endangered Plants, CSIRO Australia, Melbourne.
Eve, R 1991, 'The sound environment of a tropical forest bird community - order or chaos',
Revue D Ecologie La Terre Et La Vie, vol. 46, pp. 191-220.
Forman, RTT, Sperling, D, Bissonette, JA, Clevenger, AP, Cutshall, CD, Dale, VH, Fahrig, L,
France, R, Goldman, CR, Heanue, K, Jones, JA, Swamson, FJ, Turrentine, T & Winter, TC
2000, Road Ecology. Science and Solutions., Island Press, Washington.
Government of Western Australia 2000, Bush Forever. Volume 2. Directory of Bush Forever
Sites, Government of Western Australia, Perth.
Harewood, G. (2008). Fauna assessment (Level 1), Bunbury Inner Harbour, Proposed
redevelopment. The author, Bunbury.
Johnson, M, Reich, P & Mac Nally, R 2007, 'Bird assemblages of a fragmented agricultural
landscape and the relative importance of vegetation structure and landscape pattern',
Wildlife Research, vol. 34, no. 3, pp. 185-93.
Matsui, M, Wu, GF & Yong, HS 1993, 'Acoustic characteristics of 3 species of the genus
Amolops (amphibia anura, ranidae)', Zoological Science, vol. 10, pp. 691-5.
Moenting, AE & Morris, DW 2006, 'Disturbance and habitat use: is edge more important than
area?' Oikos, vol. 115, no. 1, pp. 23-32.
Paez, VP, Bock, BC & Rand, AS 1993, 'Inhibition of evoked calling of Dendrobates pumilio
due to acoustic interference from cicada calling', Biotropica, vol. 25, pp. 242-5.
Page 29
Robinson, D, Davidson, I & Tzaros, C 2001, Biology and conservation of the Grey-crowned
Babbler in Victoria, Department of Natural Resources and Environment, East Melbourne.
Schwartz, A & Henderson, RW 1991, Amphibians and Reptiles of the West Indies:
descriptions, distributions and natural history, University of Florida Press, Gainesville,
Florida.
SEWPaC (2010). Survey guidelines for Australias threatened birds. Guidelines for detecting
birds listed as threatened under the Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation
Act 1999. Department of Sustainability, Environment, Water, Population and Communities,
Canberra.
SEWPaC (2010). Survey guidelines for Australias threatened birds. Guidelines for detecting
birds listed as threatened under the Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation
Act 1999. Department of Sustainability, Environment, Water, Population and Communities,
Canberra.
SEWPaC (2011a). Species Profile and Threats (SPRAT) Database, Department of
Sustainability, Environment, Water, Population and Communities, Canberra. Available from:
http://www.environment.gov.au/sprat. Accessed Thu, 6 Oct 2011 14:47:06 +1100.
SEWPAC (2011b). Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999 draft
referral guidelines for three threatened black cockatoo species: Carnabys cockatoo
(endangered) Calyptorhynchus latirostris; Baudins cockatoo (vulnerable) Calyptorhynchus
baudinii; Forest red-tailed black cockatoo (vulnerable) Calyptorhynchus banksii naso.
Department of Sustainability, Environment, Water, Population and Communities, Canberra.
Thackway, R & Cresswell, ID 1995, An Interim Biogeographic Regionalisation of Australia,
Australian Nature Conservation Agency, Canberra.
Wilson, A & Lindenmayer, DB 1995, Wildlife Corridors and the Conservation of Biodiversity:
A Review., National Corridors of Green Program, Green Australia Ltd., Canberra.
Page 30
Appendix A
Flora list from August 2011 site visit
Common Name
Binomial
Status
Rigid Wattle
Acacia cochlearis
Western Coast Wattle
Acacia cyclops
Golden Wreath Wattle
Acacia saligna
Prickle Lily
Acanthocarpus preissii
Peppermint
Agonis flexuosa var. flexuosa
Sea Box
Alyxia buxifolia
Marram Grass
Ammophila arenaria
Norfolk Island Pine
Araucaria heterophylla
Capeweed
Arctotheca calendula
Bridal Creeper
Coast Saltbush
Atriplex isatidea
Sea Rocket
Cakile maritima
Slender Cypress-pine
Callitis preisii
Pigface
Carpobrotus pulcher
Calothamnus species
Calothamnus sp.
Swamp Sheoak
Casuarina obesa
Marri
Corymbia calophylla
Red-flowering Gum
Corymbia ficifolia
Couch
Cynodon dactylon
Perennial Veldt-grass
Ehrharta calycina
Willow-herb
Epilobium hirtigerum
Coral Tree
Erythrina sp.
River Red Gum
Eucalyptus camaldulensis
Bushy Yate
Eucalyptus conferruminata
Illyarrie
Eucalyptus erythrocorys
Tuart
Eucalyptus gomphocephala
Flooded Gum
Eucalyptus rudis ssp. rudis
Moort
Eucalyptus utilis
Sea Spurge
Euphorbia paralias
Geraldton Carnation Weed
Euphorbia terracina
Knobby Club-rush
Ficinia nodosa
Common Sea-heath
Frankenia pauciflora
Coast Saw-sedge
Gahnia trifida
Cut-leaf Hibbertia
Hibbertia cuneifolia
Norfolk Island Hibiscus
Lagunaria patersonii
Coast Sword-sedge
Lepidosperma gladiatum
Victorian Teatree
Leptospermum laevigatum
Sandplain Lupin
Lupinus cosentinii
Declared Plants
(Noxious Weeds) In
Wa
Common Name
Binomial
Status
Moonah
Melaleuca lanceolata
Oleander
Nerium oleander
Olive
Olea europaea
Coast Daisy-bush
Olearia axillaris
Sour-sob
Oxalis pes-caprae
Rose Pelargonium
Pelargonium capitatum
Common Reed
Phragmites australis
Radiata Pine
Pinus radiata
Berry Saltbush
Rhagodia baccata ssp. baccata
Thick-leaved Fan-flower
Scaevola crassifolia
Brazilian Pepper
Schinus terebinthifolius
Variable Groundsel
Senecio pinnafitida
Hairy Spinifex
Spinifex hirsutus
Beach Spinifex
Spinifex longifolius
Basket Bush
Spyridium globulosum
Athel Pine
Tamarix aphylla
Strapweed
Trachyandra divaricata
Cumbungi
Typha sp.
*/-
Buffalo Grass
Stenotaphrum secundatum
Declared Plants
(Noxious Weeds) In
Wa
P1
* = exotic species, not native to Australia

# = Australian native species naturalised outside its normal distribution
Declared plants under WA Biosecurity and Agriculture Management Act 2007.
P1 The movement of plants or their seeds is prohibited within the State. This prohibits the
movement of contaminated machinery and produce including livestock and fodder.
Appendix B
Fauna recorded during August 2011
site visit
Common name
Scientific name
Australian Pelican
Pelecanus conspicillatus
EPBC
Little Black Cormorant
Phalacrocorax sulcirostris
Great Cormorant
Phalacrocorax carbo
Pied Cormorant
Phalacrocorax varius
Little Pied Cormorant
Microcarbo melanoleucos
Australasian Darter
Anhinga novaehollandiae
Eastern Great Egret
Ardea modesta
Mi/Ma
White-faced Heron
Egretta novaehollandiae
Mi/Ma
Little Egret
Egretta garzetta
Mi/Ma
Black Swan
Cygnus atratus
Mi/Ma
Grey Teal
Anas gracilis
Mi/Ma
Pacific Black Duck
Anas superciliosa
Mi/Ma
Musk Duck
Biziura lobata
Mi/Ma
Eastern Osprey
Pandion cristatus
Mi/Ma
Black-shouldered Kite
Elanus axillaris
Mi/Ma
Whistling Kite
Haliastur sphenurus
Mi/Ma
White-bellied Sea-Eagle
Mi/Ma
Little Eagle
Hieraaetus morphnoides
Mi/Ma
Nankeen Kestrel
Falco cenchroides
Mi/Ma
Australian Hobby
Falco longipennis
Mi/Ma
Stubble Quail
Coturnix pectoralis
Mi/Ma
Australian Pied Oystercatcher
Haematopus longirostris
Mi/Ma
Whimbrel
Numenius phaeopus
Mi/Ma
Common Sandpiper
Actitis hypoleucos
Mi/Ma
Silver Gull
Croicocephalus novaehollandiae
Mi/Ma
Crested Tern
Thalasseus bergii
Mi/Ma
*Rock Dove
Columba livia
*Laughing Dove
Streptopelia senegalensis
Common Bronzewing
Phaps chalcoptera
Crested Pigeon
Ocyphaps lophotes
Baudin's Black-Cockatoo
VU
Carnabys Black-Cockatoo
EN
Galah
Eolophus roseicapillus
Red-capped Parrot
Purpureicephalus spurius
Port Lincoln Ringneck
Barnardius zonarius
Western Rosella
Platycercus icterotis
Horsfield's Bronze-Cuckoo
Chalcites basalis
Sacred Kingfisher
Todiramphus sanctus
Welcome Swallow
Hirundo neoxena
Tree Martin
Petrochelidon nigricans
Australian Pipit
Anthus australis
Mi/Ma
Black-faced Cuckoo-shrike
Coracina novaehollandiae
Mi/Ma
Little Grassbird
Megalurus gramineus
Mi/Ma
Willie Wagtail
Rhipidura leucophrys
Grey Fantail
Rhipidura albiscapa
Red-capped Robin
Petroica goodenovii
Western Yellow Robin
Eopsaltria griseogularis
Rufous Whistler
Pachycephala rufiventris
Splendid Fairy-wren
Malurus splendens
WA
Common name
Scientific name
Western Gerygone
Gerygone fusca
Striated Pardalote
Pardalotus striatus
Silvereye
Zosterops lateralis
Brown Honeyeater
Lichmera indistincta
Singing Honeyeater
Lichenostomus virescens
White-plumed Honeyeater
Lichenostomus penicillatus
New Holland Honeyeater
Phylidonyris novaehollandiae
White-cheeked Honeyeater
Phylidonyris niger
Western Wattlebird
Anthochaera lunulata
Red Wattlebird
Anthochaera carunculata
Grey Butcherbird
Cracticus torquatus
Australian Magpie
Cracticus tibicen
Australian Raven
Corvus coronoides
Western Grey Kangaroo
Macropus fuliginosus
*Fox
Vulpes vulpes
*Rabbit
Quacking Frog
Crinia georgiana
Motorbike Frog
Litoria moorei
Legend:
VU = Vulnerable
EN = Endangered
Mi/Ma = Migratory and marine schedule species
EPBC
WA
Appendix C
EPBC Protected Matters Search
EPBC Act Protected Matters Report: Coordinates

This report provides general guidance on matters of national environmental significance and other matters
protected by the EPBC Act in the area you have selected.
Information on the coverage of this report and qualifications on data supporting this report are contained
in the caveat at the end of the report.
Information about the EPBC Act including significance guidelines, forms and application process details
can be found at http://www.environment.gov.au/epbc/assessmentsapprovals/index.html
Report created: 10/10/11 13:38:29
Summary
Details
Matters of NES
Other matters protected by
the EPBC Act
Extra Information
Caveat
Acknowledgements
This map may contain data which are
Commonwealth of Australia (Geoscience
Australia), PSMA 2010
Coordinates
Buffer: 1.0Km
Summary
This part of the report summarises the matters of national environmental significance that may occur in,
or may relate to, the area you nominated. Further information is available in the detail part of the report,
which can be accessed by scrolling or following the links below. If you are proposing to undertake an
activity that may have a significant impact on one or more matters of national environmental significance
then you should consider the Administrative Guidelines on Significance - see
http://www.environment.gov.au/epbc/assessmentsapprovals/guidelines/index.html.
World Heritage Properties:
None
National Heritage Places:
None
Wetlands of International
None
Significance (Ramsar
Wetlands):
Great Barrier Reef Marine
None
Park:
Commonwealth Marine Areas:None
Threatened Ecological
Communitites:
Threatened Species:
None
Migratory Species:
29
37

This part of the report summarises other matters protected under the Act that may relate to the area you
nominated. Approval may be required for a proposed activity that significantly affects the environment on
Commonwealth land, when the action is outside the Commonwealth land, or the environment anywhere
when the action is taken on Commonwealth land. Approval may also be required for the Commonwealth
or Commonwealth agencies proposing to take an action that is likely to have a significant impact on the
environment anywhere.
The EPBC Act protects the environment on Commonwealth land, the environment from the actions taken
on Commonwealth land, and the environment from actions taken by Commonwealth agencies. As
heritage values of a place are part of the 'environment', these aspects of the EPBC Act protect the
Commonwealth Heritage values of a Commonwealth Heritage place and the heritage values of a place on
the Register of the National Estate. Information on the new heritage laws can be found at
http://www.environment.gov.au/heritage/index.html
Please note that the current dataset on Commonwealth land is not complete. Further information on
Commonwealth land would need to be obtained from relevant sources including Commonwealth
agencies, local agencies, and land tenure maps.
A permit may be required for activities in or on a Commonwealth area that may affect a member of a
listed threatened species or ecological community, a member of a listed migratory species, whales and
other cetaceans, or a member of a listed marine species. Information on EPBC Act permit requirements
and application forms can be found at http://www.environment.gov.au/epbc/permits/index.html.
Commonwealth Lands:
Commonwealth Heritage
Places:
Listed Marine Species:
None
47
Whales and Other Cetaceans: 13
Critical Habitats:
None
Commonwealth Reserves:
None
Report Summary for Extra Information

This part of the report provides information that may also be relevant to the area you have nominated.
Place on the RNE:
42
State and Territory Reserves: 2

Regional Forest Agreements: None
Invasive Species:
14
Nationally Important
Wetlands:
None
Details
Threatened Species
Name
BIRDS
Australian Lesser Noddy
[26000]
Botaurus poiciloptilus
Australasian Bittern [1001]
Status
Type of Presence
Vulnerable
Species or species habitat may occur within area
Endangered
Species or species habitat known to occur within area

Forest Red-tailed
Vulnerable
Black-Cockatoo [67034]
Baudin's Black-Cockatoo,
Vulnerable
Long-billed Black-Cockatoo
[769]
Carnaby's Black-Cockatoo,
Endangered
Short-billed Black-Cockatoo
[59523]
Diomedea exulans amsterdamensis
Amsterdam Albatross [82330] Endangered
Endangered
Diomedea exulans gibsoni
Gibson's Albatross [82271]
Halobaena caerulea
Blue Petrel [1059]
Breeding known to occur within area
Breeding likely to occur within area

Foraging, feeding or related behaviour may occur
within area
Vulnerable
Vulnerable
Vulnerable
Endangered
Macronectes halli
Northern Giant-Petrel [1061] Vulnerable
Pterodroma mollis
Vulnerable
Sternula nereis nereis
Fairy Tern (Australian) [82950] Vulnerable
Indian Yellow-nosed Albatross Vulnerable
[64464]
Shy Albatross, Tasmanian Shy
Albatross [82345]
Black-browed Albatross
[66472]
FISH
Balston's Pygmy Perch [66698]
MAMMALS
Blue Whale [36]
Dasyurus geoffroii
Chuditch, Western Quoll [330]

Species or species habitat likely to occur within area

within area
Vulnerable
Vulnerable
Vulnerable
Endangered
Vulnerable
Eubalaena australis
Endangered
Humpback Whale [38]
Vulnerable
Congregation or aggregation known to occur within

area
Vulnerable
Vulnerable
Neophoca cinerea
Western Ringtail Possum
[25911]
Setonix brachyurus
Quokka [229]
Vulnerable
PLANTS
Andersonia gracilis
Slender Andersonia [14470]
Endangered
Ironstone Brachyscias [81321] Critically
Endangered
[6393]
Endangered
Darwinia foetida
Muchea Bell [83190]
Isopogon uncinatus
Critically
Endangered

Hook-leaf Isopogon [20871]

Endangered
Verticordia fimbrilepis subsp. fimbrilepis
Shy Featherflower [24631]
Endangered
REPTILES
Caretta caretta
Endangered
Chelonia mydas
Green Turtle [1765]
Vulnerable
Leatherback Turtle, Leathery Endangered
Turtle, Luth [1768]
SHARKS
Carcharias taurus (west coast population)
Grey Nurse Shark (west coast Vulnerable
population) [68752]
Vulnerable
Rhincodon typus
Whale Shark [66680]
Vulnerable


Migratory Species
Name
Status
Migratory Marine Birds
Apus pacificus
Ardea alba
Great Egret, White Egret
[59541]
Ardea ibis
Amsterdam Albatross [64405] Endangered*
Diomedea dabbenena
Endangered*
Vulnerable
Diomedea gibsoni
Vulnerable*
Southern Giant-Petrel [1060] Endangered
Macronectes halli
Indian Yellow-nosed Albatross Vulnerable
[64464]
Shy Albatross, Tasmanian Shy Vulnerable*
Albatross [64697]
Thalassarche chlororhynchos
Type of Presence


within area
within area
Yellow-nosed Albatross,
Vulnerable*
Atlantic Yellow-nosed
Albatross, Indian Yellow-nosed
Albatross [66481]
Black-browed Albatross
Vulnerable
[66472]
Migratory Marine Species
Balaenoptera edeni
Bryde's Whale [35]
Blue Whale [36]
Endangered
Caperea marginata
Vulnerable
Caretta caretta
Endangered
Chelonia mydas
Green Turtle [1765]
Leatherback Turtle, Leathery
Turtle, Luth [1768]
Eubalaena australis
Dusky Dolphin [43]
Humpback Whale [38]

Vulnerable
Endangered
Endangered

Vulnerable
Orcinus orca
Rhincodon typus
Whale Shark [66680]
Vulnerable
Migratory Terrestrial Species
Merops ornatus
Migratory Wetlands Species
Ardea alba
[59541]
Ardea ibis

within area

area

Commonwealth Lands
The Commonwealth area listed below may indicate the presence of Commonwealth land in this vicinity.
Due to the unreliability of the data source, all proposals should be checked as to whether it impacts on a
Commonwealth area, before making a definitive decision. Contact the State or Territory government land
department for further information.
Commonwealth Land -
Listed Marine Species

Name
Status
Birds
Australian Lesser NoddyVulnerable
[26000]
Apus pacificus
Ardea alba
[59541]
Ardea ibis
Catharacta skua
Great Skua [59472]
Amsterdam Albatross [64405] Endangered*
Diomedea dabbenena
Endangered*
Vulnerable
Diomedea gibsoni
Vulnerable*
Halobaena caerulea
Blue Petrel [1059]
Vulnerable
Southern Giant-Petrel [1060] Endangered
Macronectes halli
Merops ornatus
Pterodroma mollis
Vulnerable
Indian Yellow-nosed AlbatrossVulnerable
[64464]
Shy Albatross, Tasmanian ShyVulnerable*
Albatross [64697]
Yellow-nosed
Albatross,Vulnerable*
Atlantic
Yellow-nosed
Type of Presence


within area

within area

within area
Albatross, Indian Yellow-nosed

Albatross [66481]
Black-browed
AlbatrossVulnerable
[66472]
Fish
Acentronura australe
Southern Pygmy Pipehorse
[66185]
Campichthys galei
Gale's Pipefish [66191]
Heraldia nocturna
Upside-down Pipefish, Eastern
Upside-down Pipefish, Eastern
Upside-down Pipefish [66227]
Hippocampus angustus
Western Spiny Seahorse,
Narrow-bellied
Seahorse
[66234]
Hippocampus breviceps
Short-head
Seahorse,
Short-snouted Seahorse [66235]
Hippocampus subelongatus
West Australian Seahorse
[66722]
Histiogamphelus cristatus
Rhino Pipefish, Macleay's
Crested Pipefish, Ring-back
Pipefish [66243]
Lissocampus caudalis
Australian Smooth Pipefish,
Smooth Pipefish [66249]
Lissocampus fatiloquus
Prophet's Pipefish [66250]
Lissocampus runa
Javelin Pipefish [66251]
Maroubra perserrata
Sawtooth Pipefish [66252]
Mitotichthys meraculus
Western Crested Pipefish
[66259]
Nannocampus subosseus
Bonyhead
Pipefish,
Bony-headed Pipefish [66264]
Phycodurus eques
Leafy Seadragon [66267]
Phyllopteryx taeniolatus
Common Seadragon, Weedy
Seadragon [66268]
Pugnaso curtirostris
Pugnose Pipefish, Pug-nosed
Pipefish [66269]
Solegnathus lettiensis
Gunther's Pipehorse, Indonesian



Pipefish [66273]
Stigmatopora argus
Spotted Pipefish, Gulf Pipefish
[66276]
Stigmatopora nigra
Widebody
Pipefish,
Wide-bodied Pipefish, Black
Pipefish [66277]
Urocampus carinirostris
Hairy Pipefish [66282]
Vanacampus margaritifer
Mother-of-pearl
Pipefish
[66283]
Vanacampus phillipi
Port Phillip Pipefish [66284]
Vanacampus poecilolaemus
Longsnout Pipefish, Australian
Long-snout
Pipefish,
Long-snouted Pipefish [66285]
Mammals
Arctocephalus forsteri
New Zealand Fur-seal [20]
Neophoca cinerea
Vulnerable
Reptiles
Caretta caretta
Endangered
Chelonia mydas
Green Turtle [1765]
Vulnerable
Leatherback Turtle, LeatheryEndangered
Turtle, Luth [1768]



Whales and Other Cetaceans

Name
Status
Mammals
Balaenoptera acutorostrata
Minke Whale [33]
Balaenoptera edeni
Bryde's Whale [35]
Blue Whale [36]
Endangered
Caperea marginata
Delphinus delphis
Common Dophin, Short-beaked
Common Dolphin [60]
Eubalaena australis
Endangered
Grampus griseus
Type of Presence

Risso's Dolphin, Grampus [64]

Dusky Dolphin [43]
Humpback Whale [38]
Vulnerable
Orcinus orca
Stenella attenuata
Spotted Dolphin, Pantropical
Spotted Dolphin [51]
Tursiops aduncus
Indian Ocean Bottlenose
Dolphin, Spotted Bottlenose
Dolphin [68418]
Tursiops truncatus s. str.

area
Extra Information
Places on the RNE
Note that not all Indigenous sites may be listed.

Name
Natural
Lower Brunswick, Collie and Wellesley Rivers
WA
Rocky Point Basalt Formation WA
Historic
Australind Memorial WA
Bunbury Timber Jetty WA
CBH Grain Silos WA
Commonwealth Bank Building (former) WA
Henton Cottage WA
Lyric Theatre (former) WA
St Nicholas Anglican Church WA
The Gordons (former) WA
Apex House WA
Boarding House (former) WA
Bunbury Boys School (former) WA
Bunbury Post Office (former) WA
Bunbury Railway Station (former) WA
Burlington Hotel WA
Convent of Mercy Group (former) WA
Craigie Lee WA
Cronshaws Store WA
House WA
House WA
House WA
House WA
House WA
House WA
House WA
Status
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Indicative Place
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
House WA
House WA
House (former) WA
King Cottage WA
Leschenault Homestead WA
Lilydale WA
Old Grand Central Hotel WA
Old Picton Inn WA
Prince of Wales Hotel WA
Rose Hotel and former Sample Room WA
St Marks Anglican Church and Graveyard
(former) WA
The Residency WA
Tuart Street Group WA
Turner Street Group WA
Upton House WA
WA Bank Building (former) WA
State and Territory Reserves
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Registered
Morangarel, WA
Leschenault Peninsula, WA
Invasive Species
Weeds reported here are the 20 species of national significance (WoNS), along with other introduced
plants that are considered by the States and Territories to pose a particularly significant threat to
biodiversity. The following feral animals are reported: Goat, Red Fox, Cat, Rabbit, Pig, Water Buffalo
and Cane Toad. Maps from Landscape Health Project, National Land and Water Resouces Audit, 2001.
Name
Status
Type of Presence
Mammals
Felis catus
Cat, House Cat, Domestic Cat
[19]
Rabbit, European Rabbit [128]
Sus scrofa
Pig [6]
Vulpes vulpes
Red Fox, Fox [18]
Plants
Bridal Creeper, Bridal Veil
Creeper, Smilax, Florist's
Smilax, Smilax Asparagus
[22473]
Brachiaria mutica
Para Grass [5879]
Cenchrus ciliaris
Buffel-grass, Black Buffel-grass
[20213]
Chrysanthemoides monilifera

Bitou Bush, Boneseed [18983]

Genista sp. X Genista monspessulana
Broom [67538]
Lycium ferocissimum
African Boxthorn, Boxthorn
[19235]
Olea europaea
Olive, Common Olive [9160]
Pinus radiata
Radiata Pine Monterey Pine,
Insignis Pine, Wilding Pine
[20780]
Rubus fruticosus aggregate
Blackberry, European
Blackberry [68406]


Salix spp. except S.babylonica, S.x calodendron & S.x reichardtiji

Willows except Weeping
Willow, Pussy Willow and
Sterile Pussy Willow [68497]
Caveat
The information presented in this report has been provided by a range of data sources as acknowledged at
the end of the report.
This report is designed to assist in identifying the locations of places which may be relevant in
determining obligations under the Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999. It
holds mapped locations of World Heritage and Register of National Estate properties, Wetlands of
International Importance, Commonwealth and State/Territory reserves, listed threatened, migratory and
marine species and listed threatened ecological communities. Mapping of Commonwealth land is not
complete at this stage. Maps have been collated from a range of sources at various resolutions.
Not all species listed under the EPBC Act have been mapped (see below) and therefore a report is a
general guide only. Where available data supports mapping, the type of presence that can be determined
from the data is indicated in general terms. People using this information in making a referral may need to
consider the qualifications below and may need to seek and consider other information sources.
ecological community distributions are less well known, existing vegetation maps and point location data
are used to produce indicative distribution maps.
For species where the distributions are well known, maps are digitised from sources such as recovery
plans and detailed habitat studies. Where appropriate, core breeding, foraging and roosting areas are
indicated under 'type of presence'. For species whose distributions are less well known, point locations are
collated from government wildlife authorities, museums, and non-government organisations; bioclimatic
distribution models are generated and these validated by experts. In some cases, the distribution maps are
based solely on expert knowledge.
Only selected species covered by the following provisions of the EPBC Act have been mapped:
- migratory and
- marine
The following species and ecological communities have not been mapped and do not appear in reports
produced from this database:
- threatened species listed as extinct or considered as vagrants
- some species and ecological communities that have only recently been listed
- some terrestrial species that overfly the Commonwealth marine area
- migratory species that are very widespread, vagrant, or only occur in small numbers.
The following groups have been mapped, but may not cover the complete distribution of the species:
- non-threatened seabirds which have only been mapped for recorded breeding sites;
- seals which have only been mapped for breeding sites near the Australian continent.
Such breeding sites may be important for the protection of the Commonwealth Marine environment.
Coordinates
-33.32608 115.63421,-33.32608 115.63421,-33.30187 115.64457,-33.27476 115.67838,-33.27583
115.72985,-33.31299 115.72452,-33.31786 115.70975,-33.34238 115.6732,-33.32608 115.63421
Acknowledgements
This database has been compiled from a range of data sources. The department acknowledges the
following custodians who have contributed valuable data and advice:
-Department of Environment, Climate Change and Water, New South Wales
-Department of Sustainability and Environment, Victoria
-Department of Primary Industries, Parks, Water and Environment, Tasmania
-Department of Environment and Natural Resources, South Australia
-Parks and Wildlife Service NT, NT Dept of Natural Resources, Environment and the Arts
-Environmental and Resource Management, Queensland
-Department of Environment and Conservation, Western Australia
-Department of the Environment, Climate Change, Energy and Water
-Birds Australia
-Australian Bird and Bat Banding Scheme
-Australian National Wildlife Collection
-Natural history museums of Australia
-Museum Victoria
-Australian Museum
-SA Museum
-Queensland Museum
-Online Zoological Collections of Australian Museums
-Queensland Herbarium
-National Herbarium of NSW
-Royal Botanic Gardens and National Herbarium of Victoria
-Tasmanian Herbarium
-State Herbarium of South Australia
-Northern Territory Herbarium
-Western Australian Herbarium
-Australian National Herbarium, Atherton and Canberra
-University of New England
-Ocean Biogeographic Information System
-Australian Government, Department of Defence
-State Forests of NSW
-Other groups and individuals
The Department is extremely grateful to the many organisations and individuals who provided expert
advice and information on numerous draft distributions.
Please feel free to provide feedback via the Contact Us page.
Accessibility | Disclaimer | Privacy | Commonwealth of Australia | Help

Last updated: Thursday, 16-Sep-2010 09:13:25 EST
Department of Sustainability, Environment, Water, Population and Communities
GPO Box 787
Canberra ACT 2601 Australia
+61 2 6274 1111 ABN
| Australian Government |
Appendix D
Statement of Limitations
Scope of services and reliance of data

This environmental impact study (the study) has been prepared in accordance with the scope of
work/services set out in the contract, or as otherwise agreed, between PB and the client. In preparing this
environmental impact study, PB has relied upon data, surveys, analyses, designs, plans and other
information provided by the client and other individuals and organisations, most of which are referred to in
the environmental impact study (the data). Except as otherwise stated in the environmental impact study,
PB has not verified the accuracy or completeness of the data. To the extent that the statements, opinions,
facts, information, conclusions and/or recommendations in this environmental impact study (conclusions)
are based in whole or part on the data, those conclusions are contingent upon the accuracy and
completeness of the data. PB will not be liable in relation to incorrect conclusions should any data,
information or condition be incorrect or have been concealed, withheld, misrepresented or otherwise not
fully disclosed to PB.
Study for benefit of client
This environmental impact study has been prepared for the exclusive benefit of the client and no other
party. PB assumes no responsibility and will not be liable to any other person or organisation for or in
relation to any matter dealt with in this environmental impact study, or for any loss or damage suffered by
any other person or organisation arising from matters dealt with or conclusions expressed in this
environmental impact study (including without limitation matters arising from any negligent act or omission
of PB or for any loss or damage suffered by any other party relying upon the matters dealt with or
conclusions expressed in this environmental impact study). Other parties should not rely upon the
environmental impact study or the accuracy or completeness of any conclusions and should make their
own inquiries and obtain independent advice in relation to such matters.
Other limitations
To the best of PBs knowledge, the proposal presented and the facts and matters described in this
environmental impact study reasonably represent the clients intentions at the time of printing of the
environmental impact study. However, the passage of time, the manifestation of latent conditions or the
impact of future events (including a change in applicable law) may have resulted in a variation of the
Proposal and of its possible environmental impact.
PB will not be liable to update or revise the environmental impact study to take into account any events or
emergent circumstances or facts occurring or becoming apparent after the date of the environmental
impact study.
Attachment 5 Level 2 Surveys. Waterbirds and Western Ringtail
Technical Report 13
Level 2 Surveys - Waterbirds
and Western Ringtail
November 2012
Level 2 Surveys
Waterbirds and Western
Ringtail, Bunbury Port,
Western Australia
14 November 2012
Lanco

ABN 80 078 004 798
Level 5
503 Murray Street
Perth WA 6000
PO Box 7181
Australia
Telephone
+61 8 9489 9700
Facsimile
+61 8 9489 9777
Email
perth@pb.com.au
12-0171-00-2162530B

A+ GRI Rating: Sustainability Report 2010
Revision
Details
Date
Amended By
00
Original
1 March 2012
L Conole
01
Added reference
14 November 2012
L Conole
Parsons Brinckerhoff Australia Pty Limited [2012].

Brinckerhoff. This document and the information are solely for the use of the authorised recipient and this document may not be
used, copied or reproduced in whole or part for any purpose other than that for which it was supplied by Parsons Brinckerhoff.
Parsons Brinckerhoff makes no representation, undertakes no duty and accepts no responsibility to any third party who may use
or rely upon this document or the information.
Author:
Lawrie Conole (Principal Ecologist) ...............................................
Signed:
........................................................................................................
Reviewer:
Allan Richardson (Senior Ecologist) ..............................................
Signed:
........................................................................................................
Approved by:
Emma Dean (Senior Environmental Scientist)..............................
Signed:
........................................................................................................
Date:
14 November 2012 .........................................................................
Distribution:
Lanco, Parsons Brinckerhoff..........................................................
Please note that when viewed electronically this document may contain pages that have been intentionally left blank. These
blank pages may occur because in consideration of the environment and for your convenience, this document has been set up
so that it can be printed correctly in double-sided format.
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX
Level 2 Surveys Waterbirds and Western Ringtail,

Bunbury Port, Western Australia
Contents
Page number
1.
2.
Introduction
1.1
Project overview
1.2
1.3
Study area
Methodology
2.1
Survey sites
2.2
Survey methods
2.2.1
2.2.2
7
8
2.3
3.
Waterbirds
Western Ringtail
Limitations
Results and discussion
10
3.1
Waterbird species
10
3.2
Fairy Tern Sternula nereis
13
3.3
Bar Island
13
3.4
Western Ringtail (Ngwayir) Pseudocheirus occidentalis
13
3.5
Ambient levels of disturbance
13
3.6
Important points on the migratory shorebird annual timeline
14
3.7
Opportunities for mitigation or offset
14
4.
Conclusions
17
5.
Acknowledgements
19
6.
References
21
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX
Page i

List of tables
Page number
Table 1.1
Table 2.1
Table 3.1
Study area location

Survey effort
Summary table of observations of target bird species recorded during
surveys in Bunbury Port study area, January 2012
2
7
10
List of figures
Page number
Figure 2.1
Map of the study area in and around Bunbury Port,

showing waterbird survey sites (17)
List of photographs
Page number
Photo 2.1
Photo 2.2
Photo 3.1
Photo 3.2
Typical rock wall breakwater, Bunbury

Preston River estuary at high tide
Pied Cormorant roost at Site 3 (Berth 14)
Saltmarsh on Duoro Point (Area 7) degraded by offroad vehicle use
4
5
12
15
Appendices
Appendix A
Page ii
List of all bird species recorded in Bunbury Port study area for this study, January 2012
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX

1.
Introduction
1.1
Project overview
Lanco Resources Australia Pty Ltd (Lanco) has proposed a development of Berth 14 located
within the Bunbury Port Inner Harbour (OEPA 2011), to facilitate the export of 15 million
tonnes per annum (tpa) of coal for power generation in India. In order to support this
increased volume of coal, the following works are required:
construction of a coal handling facility including a new rail loop
three enclosed stockpile sheds, conveyor systems
ship loading facilities and a new berth (including dredging of the seabed).
It has been proposed that the new rail loop will accommodate a train length of 950 m of coalloaded wagons to be unloaded at a rate of 8,000 tonnes per hours (tph).
To increase flexibility and maintain efficiency, the proposed coal handling facility is designed
to receive coal by rail and unload either directly to a berthed ship, or to the proposed
enclosed stockpile sheds. The enclosed sheds will allow up to a seven-day supply of
stockpiled coal. The stockpiled coal will act as a buffer between the unloading and loading
processes to ensure a waiting ship is loaded as quickly as possible, as well as allowing train
unloading to proceed if a ship is not available.
The proposed dredging of Berth 14 and its approach is necessary to provide sufficient space
to allow bulk carriers to enter and depart the new berth. Dredging works are estimated to
take approximately 40 weeks and would include both marine and terrestrial footprints. The
dredging may include some basalt rock fracturing by blasting in limited areas. The berth also
requires construction of an armoured sea wall with sheet piles along the berth length, in
addition to rock armoured slope protection at the entrance to the basin and construction of a
wharf facility.
The Environmental Protection Act 1986 (EP Act) sets out that where a proposal is
considered to have a significant environmental impact it will be subject to an assessment by
the Environmental Protection Authority (EPA) under section 38 of the EP Act. Consequently,
the proposed development of Berth 14 is being assessed by way of a Public Environmental
Review (PER) because it raises significant environmental factors (OEPA 2011).The PER is
required to be prepared in accordance with an approved Environmental Scoping Document
(ESD) prepared by the Office of the EPA (OEPA 2011).
1.2

In accordance within Section 2.2 of the ESD, a Level 2 targeted waterbird survey was
conducted at the proposed Berth 14 site and within a broader study area in the period
18-21 January 2012.
In addition to the ESD mandated scope, a survey for Western Ringtail (Pseudocheirus
occidentalis) was also included in areas of planted Peppermint (Agonis flexuosa) in the
vicinity of Berth 14.
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX
Page 1

1.3
Study area
The study area is located within the City of Bunbury, south-western Western Australia.
Location information for the study area is outlined in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
Page 2
Study area location
Location information
Study area
Bioregion
Swan Coastal Plain
Local government area
City of Bunbury
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX

12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX
Page 3

2.
Methodology
2.1
Survey sites
Areas of potential shorebird roosting and foraging habitat, and Western Ringtail habitat, were
identified during the Level 1 survey of the site carried out in August 2011. (Parsons
Brinckerhoff 2011). Suggested sites for shorebird surveys (numbered 17) are shown in
Figure 2.1, and include areas of rock wall breakwater (e.g. Photo 2.1) and tidal estuary and
mud flats (Photo 2.2).
Photo 2.1
Page 4
Typical rock wall breakwater, Bunbury
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX

Photo 2.2
Preston River estuary at high tide
Suggested areas for Western Ringtail surveys were mapped as Mixed stand (Eucalyptus,
Acacia, Agonis) in the vegetation map for Berth 14 (Figure 3.1 in Parsons Brinckerhoff
2011).
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX
Page 5
7
4
1
5
Z
Level 15
28 Freshwater Place
Southbank VIC. 3006
ABN 84 797 323 433
PO Box 19016
Southbank VIC. 3006
Australia
Telephone +61 3 9861 1111

Facsimile +61 3 9861 1144
250
Client
Drawing Number: 2162530A_Waterbird_Survey_Map

Revision: A1
500
metres
Legend
Date: 10/02/12
Author: CSB
Checked by: LC
Sites for shorebird surveys
Scale (at A3) 1:15,125

Site
Title
Lanco Infratech
Preliminary
Site Por
Investigation
Berth
14A, Bunbury
t
Waterbird Survey Map,
Bunbury Port

2.2
Survey methods
2.2.1
Waterbirds
Waterbirds were surveyed at high and low tide over a period of three days, from
18-20 January 2012. The seasonal timing was aligned with the period when most migratory
shorebirds were likely to be still present in southern Australia. Both high and low tide
surveys were conducted in order to identify areas that may be important for feeding as well
as resting and roosting. Weather throughout the period was fine and warm, with light
moderate breezes blowing. Methods were consistent with those recommended by (SEWPAC
2010).
The surveys encompassed seven areas (17), within the Bunbury Inner Harbour and
immediate surrounding areas of Leschenault Inlet and Vittoria Bay, including the estuaries of
the Preston and Collie Rivers (Figure 2.1).
Area 1: Rock-wall lined entrance to landlocked southern end of Leschenault Inlet.
Area 2: Mangroves in landlocked southern end of Leschenault Inlet.
Area 3: Berth 14 and immediate surrounds. Rock wall breakwater and beach.
Area 4: The Cut.
Area 5: Enclosed lagoon and Preston River estuary, Vittoria Bay.
Area 6: Bar Island and Collie River estuary, Leschenault Inlet.
Area 7: Sand bars on north side of Duoro Point, Stingaree Bay, Leschenault Inlet.
Area 8: Beach at Australind/Pelican Point.
Waterbirds were observed with binoculars (10x40 Swarovski Optik WB) and a spotting scope
(Kowa 20-45 zoom) and the numbers of birds, their locations and their activities (feeding,
loafing flying overhead) were recorded. One survey of each area was carried out during each
sampling period with follow up surveys to account for tidal variations.
The low tide surveys ranged from 3090 minutes in length, based on the size of the area and
state of the tide. In some cases the change of tide was observed to lag behind the Bureau of
Meteorology predictions for Bunbury by up to 90 minutes. Tidal exposure of mudflats was
minimal within the study area, so additional surveys were focused on those areas which
were observed to contain exposed mud or sand bars at low tide (areas 5, 6, 7).
Table 2.1
Survey effort
Area
Date/Time
Tide
Duration
18/1/2012; 05h00
High; no exposed mud.
10 minutes
18/1/2012; 05h15
Low; exposed mud.
40 minutes
18/1/2012; 06h15
High; no exposed mud, narrow beach.
15 minutes
18/1/2012; 17h20
High; no exposed mud.
20 minutes
18/1/2012; 17h50
High; rock-wall
20 minutes
19/1/2012; 06h55
Low tide; exposed mud.
90 minutes
6&7
19/1/2012; 17h50
High; no exposed mud
60 minutes
6&7
20/1/2012; 07h05
Low; exposed mud.
90 minutes
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX
Page 7

2.2.2
Western Ringtail
Surveys for the Western Ringtail were undertaken over two nights (1819 January 2012)
using a handheld LED narrow-spot flashlight (Arlec). Areas of planted Agonis and other
species were scanned by flashlight for periods of 4560 minutes. Animal species
encountered were identified and details recorded.
2.3
Limitations
A common limitation of ecological surveys is the short time period in which they are
undertaken and the lack of seasonal sampling, which can lead to low capture rates or lack of
detection of some species. For this reason, no sampling technique can totally eliminate the
possibility that a species is present on a site. The conclusions in this report are based on
information obtained from the desk-based assessment and site inspection. The results are
indicative of the environmental condition of the site at the time of assessment, including the
presence or otherwise of species. Also, it should be recognised that site conditions, including
the presence of Threatened species, can change with time.
Page 8
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX

12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX
Page 9

3.
Results and discussion
3.1
Waterbird species
A total of 71 bird species were recorded in the broader study area around Bunbury Port
during fieldwork conducted for this study in the week of 18 January 2012.
Of those 71, a total of 34 species were waterbirds or shorebirds (approximately 650
individual birds) and therefore targeted in the surveys, and three (3) were either feral
(denoted by an asterisk *) or out of range native (denoted by a hash symbol #) species. The
total results are summarised in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1
Page 10
Summary table of observations of target bird species recorded during

Common
name
Scientific name
Max.
count
Notes
Black Swan
Cygnus atratus
80
Large group foraging in Vittoria Bay at Australind;

smaller groups in the wider area foraging in
shallows.
Pacific Black
Duck
Anas superciliosa
15
Widespread in ponds on site and in Vittoria Bay.
Chestnut Teal
Anas castanea
20
Small flock with Black Swans in shallow water

over seagrass, Duoro Point.
Little Black
Cormorant
Phalacrocorax
sulcirostris
At distributed smaller roosts on dead trees
Great
Cormorant
Phalacrocorax
carbo
10
At distributed smaller roosts on dead trees.
Pied Cormorant
Phalacrocorax
varius
300
Large roosts on rock walls, distributed smaller

roosts on dead trees. Very abundant species
locally, with ~300 birds at one roost near Berth 14,
and probably up to 500 in the wider study area.
Little Pied
Cormorant
Phalacrocorax
melanoleucos
Uncommon, tidal creeks.
Australasian
Darter
Anhinga
novaehollandiae
25
Australian
Pelican
Pelecanus
conspicillatus
10
Roosting on sand spits at Bar Island and Duoro

Point; foraging in Preston River estuary.
Eastern Great
Egret
Ardea modesta
Foraging in Preston River estuary.
White-faced
Heron
Egretta
novaehollandiae
Little Egret
Egretta garzetta
Eastern Reef
Egret
Egretta sacra
Flying overhead.
Australian
White Ibis
Threskiornis
molucca
25
Straw-necked
Ibis
Threskiornis
spinicollis
Flying overhead.
Yellow-billed
Spoonbill
Platalea flavipes
Buff-banded
Rail
Gallirallus
philippensis
One bird, Duoro Point
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX

Common
name
Scientific name
Max.
count
Notes
Masked
Lapwing
Vanellus miles
Roosting on Bar Island.
Grey Plover
Pluvialis
squatarola
Maximum of 5, with Pacific Golden Plover on spits

off Duoro Point and Preston River estuary.
Pacific Golden
Plover
Pluvialis fulva
20
Maximum of 20, with Grey Plover on spits off

Duoro Point and Preston River estuary. Also on
exposed mud on land at Duoro Point.
Red-capped
Plover
Charadrius
ruficapillus
10
Common on eastern shore of Leschenault Inlet

south of Australind
Black-fronted
Dotterel
Elseyornis
melanops
In borrow pit, Bunbury Port
Australian Pied
Oystercatcher
Haematopus
longirostris
Foraging on sandy shore of Vittoria Bay, and on

sand spits near Duoro Point and Bar Island.
Black-winged
Stilt
Himantopus
leucocephalus
Roosting in Preston River estuary.
Common
Sandpiper
Actitis hypoleucos
Roosting/foraging in Preston River estuary and on

rock walls throughout area. Also on exposed mud
on land at Duoro Point. Usually single birds.
Common
Greenshank
Tringa nebularia
Maximum of 5 birds, Preston River estuary.
Eastern Curlew
Numenius
madagascariensis
On spit off Duoro Point
Bar-tailed
Godwit
Limosa lapponica
Red Knot
Calidris canutus
Red-necked
Stint
Calidris ruficollis
Silver Gull
Chroicocephalus
novaehollandiae
25
Notably less abundant than at many other coastal

sites, Distributed throughout in small flocks and
single birds.
Fairy Tern
Sternula nereis
30
Observed foraging in Vittoria Bay and roosting on

sand spits at Bar Island and Duoro Point.
Courtship behaviour (pair bonding) observed on
several occasions, and probable attempted
nesting on small island on north side of Duoro
Point.
Caspian Tern
Hydroprogne
caspia
10

Crested Tern
Thalasseus bergii
20

Migratory and sedentary shorebirds of the order Charadriiformes include sandpipers,

plovers, dotterels, stilts and their relatives. All migratory species are listed under the
migratory and marine schedules of the Commonwealth Environment Protection and
Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999 (EPBC), which formalises their inclusion in a range of
international bilateral treaties. They are similarly recognised under Schedule 3 of the Wildlife
Conservation Act 1950 of Western Australia.
In Australia a number of sites have been rated for their significance for shorebirds, but none
of these sites occur within or immediately adjacent to the study area. In the national
inventory of known high tide roosts, or targeted national wader survey sites, no sites occur
within or immediately adjacent to the study area.
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX
Page 11

Areas of exposed mudflats suitable for use by migratory shorebirds were small and restricted
in distribution. Suitable sites were only found in Areas 5, 6 and 7.
With the exception of single Common Sandpipers, no aggregations of roosting shorebirds
were found at any of the rock-wall sites surveyed. Numbers of shorebird species counted
were very low. This is consistent with previous assessments of the Leschenault Inlet
(Department of Environment 2004; Ninox Wildlife Consulting 1989) and the Bunbury Port
area (Bennelongia Pty Ltd 2008), which also found both low species diversity and low
species counts for shorebirds in particular. The findings of this study support the earlier
findings (Bennelongia Pty Ltd 2008) that the Bunbury Port area is not important habitat for
shorebirds.
The results for other waterbirds can also be extrapolated from those obtained by the
Bunbury Port by Bennelongia (2008), with Silver Gulls in relatively low abundance
throughout.
The most abundant species recorded in the current study is the Pied Cormorant, with the
highest single count of ~300 birds roosting on a rock-wall breakwater at Site 3 (Berth 14)
(see Photo 3.1). Bennelongia (2008) only recorded seven Pied Cormorants in the inner
harbour, but the species is very abundant in more open waters of Vittoria Bay and
Leschenault Inlet, and at numerous tree and rock-wall roosts. Even at the estimated 500
individuals level, the species only occurs at 5% of the threshold levels for significance
(Ramsar and Wetland Directory 2012).
No other waterbird species recorded in this survey approach any of the significance
thresholds, and therefore the study area cannot be regarded as a significant site for
waterbirds more generally, or migratory shorebirds in particular.
Photo 3.1
Page 12
Pied Cormorant roost at Site 3 (Berth 14)
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX

3.2
Fairy Tern Sternula nereis

Approximately 30 Fairy Terns were observed using Areas 5, 6 and 7. Courtship behaviour
was observed at Area 7 (adult birds exchanging small baitfish, exhibiting site defence
behaviour when approached by people). The species is not regarded as threatened in
Western Australia, but the attempts to breed by the local population in the Bunbury area are
clearly being hampered by relatively high levels of disturbance at nest sites, and
loafing/roosting sites.
3.3
Bar Island
As the numbers of migratory shorebirds were small by state and national standards, the
discovery of aggregated roosting groups was difficult, and none were found. However, mixed
groups of waterbirds were observed loafing on a small sand spit on the north side of Bar
Island at various states of the tide (low, high and between). The significance of this
conservation reserve, where boat landings are not allowed, is reinforced for waterbirds in the
study area. It is one of few sites where human disturbance is at very low levels; mostly from
passing small boats rather than people on foot.
3.4
Western Ringtail (Ngwayir) Pseudocheirus occidentalis

No Western Ringtails were observed during the targeted surveys at Berth 14.
No known remnant habitat for the Western Ringtail is present within the study area.
Additionally, there were also no obvious signs (dreys, scats) found during the August 2011
site visit (Parsons Brinckerhoff 2011). However, the site features extensive plantings of
Peppermint Agonis flexuosa, a key element of known Western Ringtail habitat, and the site
is within the broadly known range of the species (Leschenault Peninsula and the Collie River
form the northern boundary) (SEWPaC 2011). Consequently, there was judged to be a
small likelihood that Western Ringtail may have reached the site from nearby natural
populations, and that it would be prudent to conduct two simple spotlight surveys of suitable
habitat on site to establish its presence or absence. Ringtails (genus Pseudocheirus) are
relatively simple to detect in spotlight surveys when present.
The combination of evidence from spotlighting surveys and the lack of obvious indirect signs
(dreys, scats) indicates that it is unlikely that this species occurs within the Berth 14 study
area.
3.5
Ambient levels of disturbance

As discussed above, background levels of human disturbance in the study area are relatively
high. During the January 2012 fieldwork, people were observed in close proximity to
feeding, loafing/roosting and possibly nesting waterbirds:
fishing by handline, rod and nets
wading and sweeping for baitfish or crustacea
walking and swimming with dogs or in small groups of people only
criss-crossing the area in small medium sized boats.
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX
Page 13

Refuge areas for birds in the study area were few and, apart from Bar Island (where landings
are disallowed), probably restricted to more remote locations on the Leschenault Peninsula.
Background levels of direct disturbance in waterbird habitat are high.
3.6
Important points on the migratory shorebird annual timeline

Migratory shorebird numbers are at their greatest in the southern Australian section of the
East Asian-Australasian Flyway in the period from October to March. Migratory shorebirds
are vulnerable to disturbance during daytime roosting and foraging periods (Department of
Heritage and Environment 2006), when humans are most active. Shorebirds preparing for
the long flight to the Northern Hemisphere breeding grounds typically forage intensively to
accumulate energy stores prior to departure and disturbance at this time may compromise
their capacity to build enough energy reserves to undertake their migration (Department of
Heritage and Environment 2006).
3.7
Opportunities for mitigation or offset

Important local habitats for migratory shorebirds and other waterbirds are clustered around
the estuary of the Collie River, and include Duoro Point and Bar Island. Duoro Point is
heavily used by recreational offroad vehicle drivers, with vehicles such as motorbikes and
4WD vehicles, including in areas which are inundated at high tide. Consequent damage to
vegetation, and levels of disturbance, is high (Photo 3.2).
Some of the highly disturbed areas are marginally used by shorebirds such as Common
Sandpiper and Pacific Golden Plover at high tide. Channels within the point are used for
foraging by waterbirds such as Eastern Great Egret, Little Egret, Yellow-billed Spoonbill,
Australian White Ibis, Australasian Darter, and various cormorant species.
Page 14
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX

Photo 3.2
Saltmarsh on Duoro Point (Area 7) degraded by offroad vehicle use
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX
Page 15

Page 16
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX

4.
Conclusions
A total of 71 bird species were recorded in the broader study area around Bunbury Port
during fieldwork conducted for this study in the week of 18 January 2012. Of those 71, a total
of 34 species were waterbirds or shorebirds (approximately 650 individual birds) and
therefore targeted in the surveys, and three (3) were either feral or out of range native
species.
No waterbird species recorded in this survey approach significance thresholds, and therefore
the study area cannot be regarded as a significant site for waterbirds more generally, or
migratory shorebirds in particular.
The combination of evidence from spotlighting surveys and the lack of obvious indirect signs
(dreys, scats) indicates that it is unlikely that the Western Ringtail occurs within the Berth 14
study area.
Refuge areas for birds in the study area were few, and apart from Bar Island (where boat
landings are disallowed), are probably restricted to more remote locations on the
Leschenault Peninsula. Background levels of direct disturbance in waterbird habitat
throughout the study area are high.
Migratory shorebird numbers are at their greatest in southern Australia in the period from
October to March. Shorebirds preparing for the long flight to the Northern Hemisphere
breeding grounds typically forage intensively to accumulate energy stores prior to departure.
Therefore if construction activities occur outside the October March period, and particularly
late February March, adverse disturbance is likely to be minimised.
An opportunity to minimise and even reverse some of the high levels of damage and
disturbance to natural systems on Duoro Point exists. Measures such as public education
programs, track closures and revegetation could be contemplated as mitigation or offset for
likely localised disturbances flowing from construction and operation of an expanded
Berth 14 area within the Port of Bunbury.
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX
Page 17

Page 18
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX

5.
Acknowledgements
Duncan Gordon (Bunbury Port Authority).
Allan Richardson, Emma Dean and Emma Grogan (Parsons Brinckerhoff).
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX
Page 19

Page 20
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX

6.
References
Bennelongia Pty Ltd. 2008. Report on the Shorebird and Waterbird Values of the Bunbury
Inner Harbour. Unpublished report prepared by Bennelongia Pty Ltd for 360 Environmental
Pty Ltd., Bennelongia Pty Ltd, Jolimont WA.
Department of Conservation. 2004. The Leschenault Inlet/Estuary - A Changing
Environment.
Department of Heritage and Environment 2006. Background Paper to the Wildlife
Conservation Plan for Migratory Shorebirds. Commonwealth of Australia, Canberra.
http://www.environment.gov.au/biodiversity/migratory/publications/shorebird-plan.html
OEPA. 2011. Bunbury Port Berth 14 Expansion and Coal Storage and Loading Facility.
Assessment number 1886. OEPA2011/00311-1.in E. P. Agency, editor.
Ninox Wildlife Consulting . 1989. The Significance of mosquito breeding areas to the
waterbirds of Leschenault Estuary, Western Australia. Report prepared for Mosquito Control
Review Committee, Waterways Commission. (Ninox Wildlife Consulting, Albany.
Parsons Brinckerhoff. 2011. Development of Berth 14 at Bunbury Port: Flora and fauna
assessment. Unpublished report prepared by Parsons Brinckerhoff for Lanco. . Perth.
Ramsar and wetland directory. 2012. Available at:
http://www.environment.gov.au/water/topics/wetlands/database/index.html
SEWPAC. 2010. Protected Matters Search Tool. Department of Sustainability, Environment,
Water, Population and Communities.
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX
Page 21
Appendix A
List of all bird species recorded in
Bunbury Port study area for this
study, January 2012
Appendix A
List of all bird species recorded in Bunbury Port
study area for this study, January 2012
Summary table of all bird species recorded during

Common name
Scientific name
Max.
count
Notes
Black Swan
Cygnus atratus
80
Large group foraging in Vittoria Bay at Australind; smaller

groups in the wider area foraging in shallows.
Pacific Black Duck
Anas superciliosa
15
Widespread in ponds on site and in Vittoria Bay.
Chestnut Teal
Anas castanea
20
Small flock with Black Swans in shallow water over

seagrass, Duoro Point.
Little Black
Cormorant
Phalacrocorax
sulcirostris
At distributed smaller roosts on dead trees
Great Cormorant
Phalacrocorax
carbo
10
Pied Cormorant
Phalacrocorax
varius
300
Large roosts on rock walls, distributed smaller roosts on

dead trees. Very abundant species locally, with ~300 birds
at one roost near Berth 14, and probably up to 500 in the
wider study area.
Little Pied
Cormorant
Phalacrocorax
melanoleucos
Uncommon, tidal creeks.
Australasian Darter
Anhinga
novaehollandiae
25
Australian Pelican
Pelecanus
conspicillatus
10
Roosting on sand spits at Bar Island and Duoro Point;

foraging in Preston River estuary.
Eastern Great
Egret
Ardea modesta
White-faced Heron
Egretta
novaehollandiae
Little Egret
Egretta garzetta
Eastern Reef Egret
Egretta sacra
Flying overhead.
Australian White
Ibis
Threskiornis
molucca
25
Straw-necked Ibis
Threskiornis
spinicollis
Flying overhead.
Yellow-billed
Spoonbill
Platalea flavipes
Osprey
Pandion haliaetus
Flying overhead.
Whistling Kite
Haliastur
sphenurus
Flying overhead.
Brown Goshawk
Accipiter fasciatus
Hunting in scrub on site.
Nankeen Kestrel
Falco cenchroides
Foraging over grassy areas on site.
Buff-banded Rail
Gallirallus
philippensis
One bird, Duoro Point
Masked Lapwing
Vanellus miles
Roosting on Bar Island.
Grey Plover
Pluvialis squatarola
Maximum of 5, with Pacific Golden Plover on spits off

Duoro Point and Preston River estuary.
Pacific Golden
Plover
Pluvialis fulva
20
Maximum of 20, with Grey Plover on spits off Duoro Point

and Preston River estuary. Also on exposed mud on land
at Duoro Point.
Red-capped Plover
Charadrius
ruficapillus
10
Common on eastern shore of Leschenault Inlet south of

Australind
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX
Page A.1
Appendix A
Common name
Scientific name
Black-fronted
Dotterel
Elseyornis
melanops
In borrow pit, Bunbury Port
Australian Pied
Oystercatcher
Haematopus
longirostris
Foraging on sandy shore of Vittoria Bay, and on sand spits

near Duoro Point and Bar Island.
Black-winged Stilt
Himantopus
leucocephalus
Roosting in Preston River estuary.
Common
Sandpiper
Actitis hypoleucos
Roosting/foraging in Preston River estuary and on rock

walls throughout area. Also on exposed mud on land at
Duoro Point. Usually single birds.
Common
Greenshank
Tringa nebularia
Maximum of 5 birds, Preston River estuary.
Eastern Curlew
Numenius
madagascariensis
Bar-tailed Godwit
Limosa lapponica
Red Knot
Calidris canutus
Red-necked Stint
Calidris ruficollis
Silver Gull
Chroicocephalus
novaehollandiae
25
Notably less abundant than at many other coastal sites,

Distributed throughout in small flocks and single birds.
Fairy Tern
Sternula nereis
30
Observed foraging in Vittoria Bay and roosting on sand

spits at Bar Island and Duoro Point. Courtship behaviour
(pair bonding) observed on several occasions, and
probable attempted nesting on small island on north side of
Duoro Point.
Caspian Tern
Hydroprogne
caspia
10

spits at Bar Island and Duoro Point.
Crested Tern
Thalasseus bergii
20

spits at Bar Island and Duoro Point.
*Laughing Dove
Streptopelia
senegalensis
Duoro Point.
Common
Bronzewing
Phaps chalcoptera
Preston River estuary.
Crested Pigeon
Ocyphaps lophotes
Widespread.
Carnaby's BlackCockatoo
Calyptorhynchus
latirostris
Galah
Eolophus
roseicapilla
Western Corella
Cacatua pastinator
20
Australind (Pelican Point Estate).
#Sulphur-crested
Cockatoo
Cacatua galerita
Bunbury town. Out of range native species.
*Rainbow Lorikeet
Trichoglossus
haematodus
Bunbury town. Introduced species.
Red-capped Parrot
Purpureicephalus
spurius
Duoro Point, Casuarina woodland.
Port Lincoln Parrot
Barnardius
zonarius
Tawny Frogmouth
Podargus
strigoides
Bunbury Port, Berth 14 area.
*Laughing
Kookaburra
Dacelo
novaeguineae
Duoro Point. Introduced species.
Sacred Kingfisher
Todiramphus
sanctus
Page A.2
Max.
count
25
Notes
Australind outskirts.
Widespread.
Widespread.
Preston River estuary, Duoro Point.
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX
Appendix A
Common name
Scientific name
Max.
count
Notes
Rainbow Bee-eater
Merops ornatus
Splendid Fairywren
Malurus splendens
Duoro Point.
Singing
Honeyeater
Lichenostomus
virescens
Widespread.
Red Wattlebird
Anthochaera
carunculata
Widespread.
New Holland
Honeyeater
Phylidonyris
novaehollandiae
Bunbury town.
Striated Pardalote
Pardalotus striatus
Widespread.
Bunbury Port, Berth 14 area.
Western Gerygone
Gerygone fusca
Black-faced
Woodswallow
Artamus cinereus
Grey Butcherbird
Cracticus torquatus
Bunbury town.
Australian Magpie
Gymnorhina tibicen
Widespread.
Black-faced
Cuckoo-shrike
Coracina
novaehollandiae
Widespread.
Willie Wagtail
Rhipidura
leucophrys
Widespread.
Magpie-lark
Grallina
cyanoleuca
Widespread.
Australian Raven
Corvus coronoides
Widespread.
Western Yellow
Robin
Eopsaltria
griseogularis
Duoro Point.
Welcome Swallow
Hirundo neoxena
Widespread.
Tree Martin
Petrochelidon
nigricans
Widespread.
Little Grassbird
Megalurus
gramineus
Preston River estuary, Duoro Point.
Silvereye
Zosterops lateralis
Widespread.
Australasian Pipit
Anthus australis
Duoro Point.
Duoro Point.
6
Duoro Point
12-0171-00-2162530B FINAL.DOCX
Page A.3
Attachment 6 Marine Fauna Studies
Technical Report 7
Marine fauna studies
April 2012
Wave solutions
This page has been intentionally left blank.

Phone: +61 (08) 9204 0700 Fax: +61 (08) 9244 7311
Email: Email: enquiries@wavesolutions.com.au Web: www.wavesolutions.com.au
Standard Report
Project Brief
Job Number
Work Pack
04 Marine Fauna Studies
Project Brief
Review of Marine Fauna in the Bunbury region in the southwest

region of Western Australia. This review addresses elements of the
Marine Fauna scope identified in the requirements of WA EPA
Environmental Scoping Document: Bunbury Port Berth 14 Expansion
and Coal Storage and Loading facility (Assessment No. 1886).
Client Contact
Pranab Thakur
Client Address

C/- GPO Box G474
PERTH WA 6841
Document Reference
2419-004-003-002
Prepared By
Damian Ogburn
Signature
Reviewed By
Kris Waddington
Signature
Approved By
Damian Ogburn
Signature
Document Status
Rev
Date
Description
19/09/2011
Client Review
01/12/2011
Final Report
23/04/2012
Final Report Revision 1
23/10/2012
Final Report Revision 2
Disclaimer
This document has been produced on behalf of, and for the exclusive use of the nominated recipient,
and is issued for the purposes of the proposed works only. Wave Solutions accepts no responsibility
or liability whatsoever in respect to use of this document by any third party.
The information contained within the document is confidential and subject to copyright.
This document shall not be copied, transmitted or divulged to other parties without the prior written
consent of Wave Solutions duly authorised representative.
Table of Contents
1
Introduction ...................................................................... 7
1.1 Project Description........................................................................ 7

1.2 Background ................................................................................. 10
Existing Information ....................................................... 11
2.1 EPBC Referral .............................................................................. 11

2.2 Marine Megafauna ....................................................................... 11
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
Cetaceans dolphins and whales ............................................................... 11

Marine Turtles .............................................................................................. 15
Pinnipeds Sea Lions and Seals ................................................................ 16
Sharks ......................................................................................................... 16
Shy Albatross............................................................................................... 17
2.3 Fish and Fisheries ....................................................................... 17

2.4 Penguins ...................................................................................... 19
2.4.1
2.4.2
Existing environment ................................................................................... 19

Potential Impacts ......................................................................................... 19
Impact Assessment and Monitoring ............................. 21
3.1 Cetaceans Dolphins and Whales ............................................. 21

3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Acoustic Disturbance ................................................................................... 21

Passive Acoustic Monitoring ........................................................................ 22
Increase in Ship Movements........................................................................ 26
Marine Turtles .............................................................................. 28

Pinnipeds - Sea Lions and Seals ................................................ 28
Shy Albatross .............................................................................. 29
Penguins ...................................................................................... 29
Sharks .......................................................................................... 29
Summary ...................................................................................... 29
Marine Biosecurity ......................................................... 31
4.1 Introduced Marine Pests ............................................................. 31

4.1.1
4.1.2
Ballast Water ............................................................................................... 31

Biofouling ..................................................................................................... 31
4.2 Bunbury Port Monitoring ............................................................ 32

4.3 Managing Marine Pests ............................................................... 32
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
Management in Australia ............................................................................. 32

Western Australian Management Practices ................................................. 33
Risk Management ........................................................................................ 33
Management Measures for the Project ........................................................ 35
Ongoing Studies ............................................................. 37
5.1 South West Marine Research Program ...................................... 38
6
7
Conclusions .................................................................... 39
References ...................................................................... 41
2419-004-003-001
Page iii
23-Apr-2012
List of Figures
disposal locations and existing BPA anchorages. ...................................................... 9
Figure 2: a) seasonal patterns in dolphin abundance and b) birth rates in Koombana
Bay and the broader region. .................................................................................... 12
Figure 3: Seasonal distribution of adult female dolphins around the Koombana Bay
region. ...................................................................................................................... 12
Figure 4: Humpback whale migration pathways along the lower Western Australian
coast. ....................................................................................................................... 14
Figure 5: Location of acoustic listening stations that detect the location of tagged
sharks in the Perth region. ....................................................................................... 23
Figure 6: Example of a click-train captured by a T-Pod. Time is shown on the
horizontal (x) axis while the inter-click interval is shown on the vertical (y) axis. As
the dolphin approaches an object of interest, the inter-click interval becomes shorter.
................................................................................................................................. 25
Figure 7: Location and ranges of the C-POD loggers currently deployed in the
Project area. ............................................................................................................ 26
Figure 8: Showing existing ship visits to Bunbury Port relative to additional visits
upon Lanco Berth 14 being fully operational and number of visits at nearby
Fremantle................................................................................................................. 28
Figure 9: Biosecurity Risk Management Framework for the Project. ....................... 35
List of Tables
Table 1: Key characteristics of the proposed works. .................................................. 8
Table 2: Numerical abundance of the top ten fish species recorded in Koombana
Bay........................................................................................................................... 18
Table 3: General temporal or biotic succession of biofouling colonisation and
accumulation............................................................................................................ 31
Table 4: Summary of existing studies on marine fauna in the Project area and
broader region. ........................................................................................................ 37
List of Appendices
Appendix 7.A: EPBC Table
Appendix 7.B: Review of Marine Megafauna
Appendix 7.C: Review of Commercial and Recreational Fishing in the Bunbury
Region
Appendix 7.D: Humpback Whale Migration Route near Geographe Bay and the
Project area
Appendix 7.E: Underwater Noise Modelling
2419-004-003-001
Page v
23-Apr-2012
Introduction
Lanco Resources Australia Pty Ltd (Lanco) proposed to construct and operate a coal export facility at
Berth 14, located within the Port of Bunbury Inner Harbour, Western Australia. The proposal includes
capital dredging, involving both marine and land based footprints to complete the proposed marine
elements of the development. This document provides information on the marine fauna that may
utilise the Project area or has the potential to be impacted by project activities.
1.1 Project Description

in India and other countries. In order to handle this increased volume of coal, a new rail loop,
per hour.
The proposed dredging of Berth 14 and its approaches is necessary to provide sufficient space to
2419-004-003-001
Page 7
23-Apr-2012

Marine Components
Description
Berth pocket
Dredging
Dredge volume of up to 1,900,000 m. Underwater rock
Capital
rock.
Maintenance
ground
Berth structure
Likely to comprise of a reinforced concrete jetty structure
concrete.
operation.
Description
Materials handling
infrastructure
Rail
Construction period
Water requirements
Still to be determined as designs for the Berth 14 are still
under preparation.
Vegetation loss
removed.
Terrestrial ground
disturbance
proposed to be dredged to approximately - 12.7 m CD and navigational areas to approximately 12.2 m CD to accommodate bulk carriers with at least 225 m LOA. They will access the berth via the
be removed for establishment of the berth is estimated to be up to 2,700,000 m of which up to
2419-004-003-001
Page 8
23-Apr-2012

2419-004-003-001
Page 9
23-Apr-2012
1.2 Background
Marine fauna include a variety of taxa including cetaceans, pinnipeds, sharks and predatory fish.
These megafauna are present along the south-west coastline of Western Australia, though
information on their occurrence, abundance, distribution and movements is relatively limited,
particularly for some of the less common species.
The purpose of the document is to summarise available information on key marine fauna species that
may utilise the Project area and surrounds, to assess key aspects and receptors and to advise on
ongoing monitoring proposed for the Project.
2419-004-003-001
Page 10
23-Apr-2012
Existing Information
2.1 EPBC Referral
The Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999 (EPBC Act) Referral details the
potential for the project to impact on Matters of National Environmental Significance (Appendix 7.A)
and is summarised below.
An EPBC Act Protected Matters Report was generated on the 12 April 2011. The report was
generated for a radius of 10 km from the centre of the proposed action. There are 36 listed threatened
species identified in the Protected Matters Report. Of the 36 species identified, four are likely to occur
and a further three possibly occur in the area covered by the Protected Matters Report:
No threatened ecological communities were identified in the EPBC Protected Matters Report.
There are 29 listed migratory species identified in the EPBC Protected Matters Report. Twenty of the
Ardea modesta (great egret) likely to occur;
Apus pacificus (fork-tailed swift) likely to occur (flyover only);
Merops ornatus (rainbow bee-eater) possibly occurs;
Haliaeetus leucogaster (white-bellied sea-eagle) possibly occurs; and
Actitis hypoleucos (common sandpiper) known to occur.
Further details on the key marine species identified and discussed in the EPBC Referral and other
species considered to be relevant for the proposed project are included in the following sections.
2.2 Marine Megafauna

As part of the current project, a desktop review of marine fauna was undertaken by the Centre for
Marine Futures (CMF) at the University Of Western Australia (UWA). The review assessed the current
status of marine megafauna known to occur in the vicinity of the Project area. Marine megafauna
include a variety of taxa; cetaceans, pinnipeds, seabirds, sharks and large predatory fish
(Leatherwood and Reeves, 1983). Various species of megafauna are present along the south-west
coastline of Western Australia (Limbourn and Westera, 2006). However, information on their
occurrence, abundance, distribution, and movements is relatively limited, particularly for some of the
less common species. A Review of Marine Megafauna in Koombana Bay and Geographe Bay in the
south west region of Western Australia is provided in Appendix 7.B and is summarised below.
2.2.1
Cetaceans dolphins and whales
resident bottlenose dolphin population. Dolphins are apex predators that are dependent on sustaining
fish populations as their food source. For example, dolphins are known to consume between 10 and
20 kg of fish per day, equating to approximately 15% of their body weight. Given approximately 200
dolphins inhabit the project area and surrounds, these dolphins are responsible for consuming
between 2 and 4 tonnes of fish per day and between 750 and 1500 tonnes per annum. The large
population of resident dolphins would therefore be a significant factor in structuring the fish
assemblages of the local marine area. Other species that may regularly occur on a seasonal basis in
2419-004-003-001
Page 11
23-Apr-2012
southern right whales.
Koombana Bay has a resident dolphin population and is also the location of the Bunbury Dolphin
Discovery Centre. Opened in 1994, the Dolphin Discovery Centre attracts around 60,000 visitors per
year, and educates visitors on dolphin ecology, conservation and management (Zeppel, 2007). The
dolphin population in Koombana Bay and the broader region is the focus of the South West Marine
Research Program (SWMRP), a partnership between the Dolphin Discovery Centre, Murdoch
University, Government, Industry and the Community. This program has led to substantial current and
ongoing research on aspects of dolphin biology, dolphin health and the surrounding ecosystem.
Studies undertaken to date identified 196 individual dolphins occurred in the region and determined
that dolphin abundance varies seasonally, with greater numbers of dolphins occurring during summer
and autumn (Figure 2). Birth rates were also found to vary seasonally, with a peak in calving activity
during February and March (Figure 2). The birthing season is a critical time to dolphin populations as
newborn calves are particularly vulnerable to disturbance.
a
The distribution of adult female dolphins within their home ranges has also been demonstrated to vary
seasonally. During winter, the sighting density of female dolphins was fairly evenly distributed across
the SWMRP study area, while in summer and autumn; the density of female dolphin sightings was
concentrated in Koombana Bay and around the mouth of the Leschenault Estuary (Figure 3).
Figure 3: Seasonal distribution of adult female dolphins around the Koombana Bay region. Source
SWMRP newsletter.
Eight dolphin deaths have been recorded in the inner waters around Bunbury. These inner waters
encompass the Leschenault Estuary and Inlet, the Inner and Outer Harbour and the Collie and
Brunswick rivers (Murdoch University Press Release 2009). The cause for these dolphin deaths is the
focus of a dolphin health investigation as part of the SWMRP (SWMRP Newsletter). These eight dead
dolphins, were part of a group of 16 which almost exclusively ranged within the inner waters in
Bunbury (Murdoch University Press Release 2009). There appears to be no clear trend in the timing
of the deaths and the cause remains unknown.
2419-004-003-001
Page 12
23-Apr-2012
Humpback whales were the other key cetacean species known to occur in the wider Project area. It
has been well established that humpback whales utilise Geographe Bay (McCauley et al, 2000,
Jenner et al, 2001, Bannister et al, 2006). Specifically, mother and calf pairs migrate through
protected waters close to the shore, with Geographe Bay their final resting stop en route to Antarctic
feeding grounds (Salgado-Kent et al, In review).
Humpback Whales migrating along the Western Australian coast belong to the Group IV population of
Humpback whales. This population undergoes an annual migratory path of some 3,600 nautical miles
between their feeding grounds in the Southern Ocean (south of 56S and between 70E and 110E)
and their calving grounds in the Kimberley (Jenner et al, 2001). Their northbound migration takes
them up the Western Australian coast between mid-June and mid-July while their return southbound
migration occurs during September and October annually, with a peak in the Bunbury region during
the first two weeks in October (Jenner et al, 2001). While southbound migratory whales are
consistently sighted within 20 nm of the coastline, fewer northbound whales are sighted within this
distance of the coast (Jenner et al, 2001). A summary of migratory pathways of Humpback whales
along the Western Australian coast is shown in Figure 4. Further information on the humpback whale
migratory pathways in the vicinity of Geographe Bay is shown in Appendix 7.D.
2419-004-003-001
Page 13
23-Apr-2012
Northbound
Southbound
June/July (peak early to mid July)
September/October (peak during first

two weeks of October)
Pods consistently sighted within 20 nm
of the coastline.
Fewer pods consistently sighted within

20 nm of the coastline.
Historic
Whaling
Data
CWR
Aerial
Surveys
Figure 4: Humpback whale migration pathways along the lower Western Australian coast
(taken from Jenner et al, 2001).
The strong coastal affiliation of humpback whales makes them especially vulnerable to nearshore
anthropogenic activities (Johnson and Wolman, 1984; Oviedo and Sols, 2008). The baleen whale
monitoring program undertaken annually in Geographe Bay currently documents and will continue to
record humpback whale numbers in Geographe Bay between the months of September and
December, corresponding to the timing of the southbound migration.
Blue whales are considered a cosmopolitan species and range from polar to tropical waters. Blue
whale sightings in Australian waters have been widespread, and it is likely that the whales occur right
around the continent at various times of the year. However, much of the Australian continental shelf
and coastal waters have no particular significance to the whales and are used only for migration and
opportunistic feeding. Blue whales aggregate in feeding areas and then, presumably, migrate large
distances to winter breeding areas, the location of which are currently unknown. Two blue whale
2419-004-003-001
Page 14
23-Apr-2012
feeding locations have been identified around the Australian Coast including the Bonney Upwelling
(South Australia/Victoria), and the Perth Canyon region. There is no evidence of significant genetic
differentiation within or between the two Australian blue whale feeding aggregations (Attard et al,
2010), suggesting one breeding stock utilises both feeding areas.
Within Geographe Bay, blue whales are observed primarily in the southern section of the shallow bay
adjacent to Cape Naturaliste, which is a resting point during the slow transit west through the bay.
Observations frequently occur from October to December in southern Geographe Bay where
maximum water depth is 35 to 50 m. The whales are regularly sighted in depths of 10 to 30 m and as
close as 200 m from the Cape. Seasonal oceanographic conditions include injections of warmer water
into the Bay from the south flowing Leeuwin Current, while from November to December, stronger
southerly winds force a north-flowing, cold water, wind-driven 'Capes Current' which begins outside of
the Bay. Little specific habitat data is available for this area. In addition, blue whales sometimes
aggregate in Geographe Bay, north of Cape Leeuwin, possibly at a migratory bottleneck.
Despite a southern right whale mother calf pair being sighted 200 m off Binningup Beach
(approximately 20 km north of the development) in October 2007 and another mother calf pair being
sighted off the back beach in Bunbury (approximately 5 km south of the development) in July 2010,
southern right whales occur in Geographe Bay in low densities with only ten and four pods sighted in
Geographe Bay in 2007 and 2008 respectively (Gedamke et al, 2008).
A number of other species have been recorded in the region, but the region does not represent a
frequent or regular habitat for the following species; minke whales, false killer whales, long finned pilot
whales and Grays beaked whales.
2.2.2
Marine Turtles
Six of the worlds seven marine turtle species occur in Australian waters and for a number of species
nesting activity in Australia is globally significant. Two species of marine turtle are known to occur in
southern Western Australian waters (loggerhead turtle and leatherback turtle), and there is anecdotal
evidence that green turtles may also occur. Importantly, the southern Western Australian region does
not constitute important nesting habitat for any species of marine turtle. Marine turtles are long-lived
and late maturing with maturity reached at between 30 and 50 years of age (Miller, 1996). Marine
turtles nest on mainland coastal beaches and offshore islands. Female marine turtles emerge from
the water, generally at night, and move up the shoreline to select a nesting location. Changes to
lighting regime can affect hatchlings if light sources are at the nesting beach, on the foreshore
adjacent to the nesting beach, or offshore. Lights at a nesting beach can result in turtle hatchlings
heading inland rather than into the ocean with subsequent mortality.
Loggerhead turtle nest on beaches and use various marine habitats for foraging. In Australia, the
loggerhead turtle occurs in the waters of coral and rocky reefs, seagrass beds and muddy bays
throughout eastern, northern and western Australia (Limpus et al, 1992). While nesting is
concentrated in southern Queensland and from Shark Bay to the North West Cape in Western
Australia, foraging areas are more widely distributed. Loggerhead turtles choose a wide variety of tidal
and sub-tidal habitat as feeding areas and individual animals show fidelity to both their foraging and
breeding areas (Limpus, 2008). Loggerhead turtles are carnivorous, feeding primarily on benthic
invertebrates in habitat ranging from nearshore to 55 m (Plotkin et al, 1993). Loggerhead turtles are
one of the most commonly sighted turtles south of Perth, with resident adult and large subadult
turtles sometimes found (WA DEC 2010).
The leatherback turtle has a worldwide distribution, from tropical to sub-polar oceans and is the most
pelagic of the marine turtle species. The leatherback is known to occur in the south-west waters of
Western Australia. No major nesting has been recorded in Australia, although scattered isolated
nesting (one to three nests per annum) occurs in southern Queensland (Limpus and MacLachlan,
1979) and the Northern Territory (Hamann et al, 2006). The leatherback turtle is principally a pelagic
feeder during its life history and utilises temperate regions for foraging more than other marine turtle
species (Houghton et al, 2006). It is considered that the species only ventures near the coast during
the nesting season.
2419-004-003-001
Page 15
23-Apr-2012
Green turtles are found in tropical and subtropical waters throughout the world. They usually remain
within the 20C isotherms, although individuals may also stray into temperate waters. Nesting occurs
on beaches in tropical and subtropical regions. Green turtles spend their first five to ten years drifting
on ocean currents. During this pelagic (ocean going) phase, they are often found in association with
current lines and rafts of algae such as the brown algae Sargassum spp., species. Once green turtles
reach 30 cm to 40 cm curved carapace length, they settle in shallow benthic foraging habitats such as
tropical tidal and sub-tidal coral and rocky reef habitat or inshore seagrass beds. Sub-tropical and
tropical seagrass beds are generally recognised as the most important foraging habitat (BrandGardner et al, 1999). While green turtles typically occur in northern half of Western Australia,
anecdotally some green turtles have been sighted in the Geographe Bay region but the exact
identification of the species observed has not been verified.
2.2.3
Seals, sea-lions and walruses belong to the sub-order Pinnipedia. There are 33 species of pinnipeds,
divided into three families. The family Otariidae contains 14 species, including the fur seals and sealions. The family Phocidae is made up of the 'true seals' and contains 18 species. Of the pinnipeds,
the Australian sea lion and the New Zealand fur seal may migrate through Koombana Bay and
Geographe Bay though they are not found in the area.
Australian sea lions are endemic to Australia and occur in coastal habitats, waters and islands
offshore from South Australia and Western Australia, however most of the population (86%) is found
in South Australia. Australian sea lions feed on the continental shelf in the region, most commonly in
depths of 20 m 100 m. The species hauls out (or rests) and breeds on rocks and sandy beaches
on the sheltered sides of islands, although there are some small colonies on the Australian mainland.
The key breeding locations for the Australian sea-lion are all in South Australia and include:
Dangerous Reef and Lewis Island (Southern Eyre Peninsula), North and South Page Islands, West
Waldegrave and Olive Islands (Western Eyre Peninsula), Seal Bay (Kangaroo Island) and Purdie
Island (Nuyts Archipelago).
Geographically isolated populations of New Zealand fur seals occur off New Zealand (both South and
North Islands) and southern Australia (South Australia, the south-west coast of Western Australia with
expansions into Victorian and Tasmanian coastal waters). New Zealand fur seals are considered nonmigratory. There are no New Zealand fur colonies recorded in the Bunbury region. While it is plausible
that individual animals may transit through the region, such occurrences are extremely rare.
2.2.4
Sharks
Sharks are a diverse group of animals with Australia home to approximately 166 species (Last and
Stevens, 2009). Of these, a number are of conservation concern globally and within Australia.
Additionally, Australian fisheries target a number of shark species. Two species of conservation
significance, the great white shark (Carcharodon carcharias) and western population of the grey nurse
shark (Carcharias taurus), may occur in the Bunbury region.
The great white shark is a cosmopolitan species occupying oceans throughout the world however it is
most concentrated in temperate coastal waters (Last and Stevens, 2009). The great white shark is a
pelagic species that frequents temperate continental shelf waters and can be found in the surf zone,
but is also known to range into the open ocean in far offshore waters. Its depth ranges from the
surface down to over 1200 m, and while it has been recorded in all Australian states (except the
Northern Territory), it is most commonly encountered in waters off the southern half of the continent
(Bruce et al, 2006). Western Australian waters are thought to be a potential migratory pathway for
great white sharks migrating between South Australia, the Southern and Indian oceans, and South
Africa. Sightings and attacks have occurred in Geographe Bay.
The grey nurse shark has a broad inshore distribution, primarily in subtropical to cool temperate
waters around continental landmasses (Last and Stevens, 2009). Grey nurse sharks tend to be found
on the continental shelf from the surf zone down to at least 190 m (Last and Stevens, 2009). The grey
nurse shark has been recorded in all Australian State waters, excluding Tasmania. In Australia there
are two distinct populations of the grey nurse shark; the east coast and west coast populations. The
2419-004-003-001
Page 16
23-Apr-2012
west coast population of grey nurse shark is predominantly found in the south-west coastal waters of
Western Australia.
2.2.5
Shy Albatross
The shy albatross (Thalassarche cauta) is endemic to Australia and ranges over all Australian coastal
waters south of 25S. It is most commonly observed over the shelf waters around Tasmania and
south-eastern Australia. Most adult shy albatross remain in the waters off southeast Australia all year
round, and seldom venture more than 600 km from the breeding colony. Breeding occurs on
Albatross Island, Bass Strait, and Mewstone and Pedra Branca, off southern Tasmania. No shy
albatrosses breed outside of the Australian Fishing Zone (AFZ), however, they do disperse to areas
outside of the AFZ, with immature shy albatross migrating as far as South Africa. While the species
plausibly occurs in the Bunbury region, the region is not considered important habitat for the species.
2.3 Fish and Fisheries

The structure and function of fish assemblages in the estuarine and inshore waters of the south
western corner of Western Australia has been well studied in comparison to many regions of
Australia. Potter et al (2000) undertook and published a collation of information on the fish
assemblage of Leschenault Estuary while fish assemblages occurring on nearshore limestone reefs
and associated with seagrass beds in the temperate south-west of Western Australia have also been
well studied (Howard 1989).
Nearshore limestone reefs and seagrass beds have been shown to be important habitats for fish
fauna and are known to support significant abundances and diversities of fish fauna (Howard 1989).
These productive reef and seagrass habitats provide essential habitat for juvenile fish and may
function as diurnal sheltering sites (Howard 1989). Benthic habitats in the Project area are similar in
composition to benthic habitats in the south-west region (Technical Report 5), indicating the area is
unlikely to support distinct communities of fish fauna. Similarly, unvegetated surf zone environments
(such as those occurring near Power Station Beach) are also known to support significant fish
assemblages, predominantly comprised of juvenile fish fauna (Ayvazian and Hyndes 1995; Crawley et
al. 2006; Hyndes et al. 1998), with detached macrophytes common in surf zones shown to be an
important determinant of the abundance of fish in these habitats (Crawley et al. 2006).
A survey of fish assemblages in the Leschenault Estuary, adjacent to Koombana Bay identified 42
fish species occurring in the estuary (Potter et al 2000). The most abundant of these species
occurring in the nearshore, shallow waters of the estuary were the long-finned goby Favonigobius
lateralis, the sandy sprat Hyperlophus vittatus and the atherinids Leptatherina presbyteroides and
Atherinosoma elongata; these four species collectively contributing 83.0% to the total number of fish
caught (Potter et al 2000).
The fish assemblage in the deeper waters of the estuary basin and Collie River comprised larger
species and, unlike the situation in shallow waters, were dominated by marine estuarine opportunists
and the semi-anadromous Perth herring (Nematalosa vlaminghi). However, the composition of the
fish fauna in offshore, deeper waters of the estuary basin differed markedly from that in corresponding
waters in the Collie River. This was mainly due to the presence in the estuary basin of far more
species and relatively greater numbers of species, such as yellow-eye mullet (Aldrichetta forsteri),
tailor (Pomatomus saltatrix) and Australian herring (Arripis georgiana), and to the occurrence in the
river of relatively greater numbers of Perth herring and sea mullet (Mugil cephalus).
Of the 42 species recorded by Potter et al (2000) in the Leschenault Estuary, 20 were marine species
which use the estuary as a nursery area (marine estuarine-opportunists), while 13 species completed
their life cycles in the estuary and seven are also represented by marine populations. The contribution
made to the total number of individuals by marine estuarine-opportunists and marine stragglers
collectively (32.1%) was far lower than that of species which complete their life cycles in the estuary
(67.9%). The percentage composition of species that complete their life cycles in the estuary is far
greater than that recorded in the large Swan River and Peel Harvey estuaries to the north, but far less
than those in Wilson Inlet and the Nornalup-Walpole Estuary on the south coast of Western Australia.
2419-004-003-001
Page 17
23-Apr-2012
The ten numerically dominant fish species in the shallow sections of Koombana Bay (including
adjacent to Koombana Beach and Power Station Beach) are presented in Table 2. These ten species
numerically represented approximately 93.2% of the total fish assemblage recorded in Koombana
Bay.
Table 2: Numerical abundance of the top ten fish species recorded in Koombana Bay
(modified from Potter et al, 2000).
Species
Numerical
Abundance (%)
24.8
16.7
15.4
14.9
8.1
3.3
3.1
3.0
2.0
1.9
The fish fauna of Koombana Bay is largely distinct from that of Leschenault Estuary. The numerically
dominant species in Koombana Bay (Lesueurina platycephala) was not recorded in Leschenault
Estuary. The fish caught in nearshore, shallow waters of Koombana Bay contained six species that
were not recorded in the estuary and five that only occasionally strayed into the estuary. These 11
species collectively accounted for over 45% of the total number of fish caught in the bay.
region of Western Australia is provided as Appendix 7.C. Most target species and the fisheries that
exploit them operate at much broader spatial scales than the Project area; therefore, relevant
fisheries are identified on the basis of their regional presence. Fisheries data that is collected by the
Department of Fisheries is at a scale that makes it difficult to identify significant fisheries at the scale
of Koombana Bay. This is an issue that is common in inshore fisheries in Western Australia in general
and indeed the rest of the country (McPhee, 2008).
Fisheries in Western Australia include commercial, recreational and Indigenous sectors. Western
Australia has over 35 commercial fisheries with specific management plans under the Fish Resources
Management Act 1994, with another 15 under management through regulations and a variety of
subsidiary legislation. On average, commercial fisheries in Western Australia are worth over
$400,000,000 annually. Commercial fisheries are generally focussed on food production, but may
also include the collection of material for aquarium and hobbyist interests (domestically and
internationally). Recreational fishing is an important leisure activity that involves around 34% of the
states population. Recreational fishing also supports a number of regional businesses, including bait
and tackle businesses.
fisheries were likely to overlap spatially with the project area. From this initial review it was identified
that the following fisheries had potential to occur at the Project area:
Western Rock Lobster Fishery;
Abalone Fishery;
South West Trawl Fishery;
Blue Swimmer Crab Fisheries;
West Coast Estuarine (Interim) Managed Fishery;
West Coast Beach Bait Managed Fishery;
South West Coast Salmon Managed Fishery;
West Coast Demersal Scalefish Fishery ;
Octopus Fisheries;
Temperate Shark Fisheries;
Marine Aquarium Fishery; and
2419-004-003-001
Page 18
23-Apr-2012
Specimen Shell Fishery.
The blue swimmer crab fishery was identified as being particularly important in the Bunbury region. In
Western Australia the blue swimmer crab occurs in bays, estuaries and intertidal areas to depths of
60 m, preferring muddy or sandy bottoms, but is also found on rubble, seagrass and macroalgae. Its
distribution extends along Western Australias entire coast with most of the fished stock concentrated
in coastal embayments between Geographe Bay and Port Hedland. Meagher (1971) provided the first
data on the biology of the crab in the Leschenault Estuary and Koombana Bay and concluded that the
crab emigrates from the estuary into Koombana Bay in autumn and returns in spring and that these
movements are related to temperature differences between the estuary and the embayment. It was
also concluded that the female crabs reach maturity within the estuary during their second year of life
prior to migrating out to sea where the fertilised eggs are released and larval development occurs.
The crab is known to spawn in Koombana Bay (Kangas, 2000). Potter and de Lestang (2000)
identified that the mean monthly densities of crabs, in nearshore, shallow waters of Leschenault
Estuary, based on data derived from seine net sampling, were highest between mid-spring and midautumn and declined to very low or zero levels during winter and early spring.
While blue swimmer crabs are abundant in the Leschenault Estuary and surrounding coastal waters,
the Geographe Bay blue swimmer crab commercial fishery was officially closed in 2005 to reduce
conflict between the commercial and recreational fishing sectors while the Leschenault Estuary
commercial fishery closed in 2000. There remains commercial crabbing around Bunbury and these
areas are likely important given the restrictions on commercial crabbing in other regions.
The catch of blue swimmer crabs by recreational fishers within the Bunbury region is substantial and
centred on the Leschenault Estuary. The Leschenault Estuary and the Peel-Harvey Estuary provide
much of the states focus for recreational crabbing.
Detail on each of these fisheries is provided in the full report in Appendix 7.C.
2.4 Penguins
2.4.1
Existing environment
Little Penguins (Eudyptula minor) breed across southern Australia and the islands of New Zealand. In
Australia, their breeding distribution extends from the Shoalwater Island Group (Penguin and Carnac
Islands), near Perth in Western Australia, across the south coast (including Bass Strait and
Tasmania), and up the east coast as far as South Solitary Island in New South Wales (near Coffs
Harbour) (Marchant and Higgins, 1990). Near Shoalwater Islands in Western Australia at the northern
part of their range, the penguins make an important contribution to eco-tourism. Little Penguins
usually breed on offshore islands or, less commonly, along parts of the mainland coast that are
inaccessible to mammalian predators. Most breeding sites are adjacent to these, with burrows in sand
or soil or under vegetation, but in some areas the birds nest in caves or crevices in rock falls. A few
sites are in urban areas and some are on anthropogenic structures such as breakwaters.
While no recorded published information on the presence of little penguins nesting along the Bunbury
foreshore could be found, anecdotal information from the Bunbury Dolphin Discovery Centre identified
that penguins may utilise the Bunbury foreshores as nesting habitat. As such, it was considered
prudent to include the species in the environmental assessment.
2.4.2
Potential Impacts
Nonetheless, foreshore inspections will be undertaken prior to and during construction work to identify
the presence of any penguins. Prior to commencing the project, the proponent will work with the
Dolphin Discovery Centre on approaches to mitigate impacts from the project on penguins.
2419-004-003-001
Page 19
23-Apr-2012
Impact Assessment and Monitoring

3.1 Cetaceans Dolphins and Whales
apparatus, boat strike, pollution (including acoustic pollution), and eco-tourism (Hall et al, 2000;
Constantine, 2001; Kennish, 2002; Vanderlaan and Taggart, 2007; Weilgart, 2007; Jenkins et al,
2009). Anthropogenic disturbances can result in the direct mortality of cetaceans or various indirect
impacts including changes to social structures and/or alienation from key habitats (Chilver et al, 2003;
Weilgart, 2007).
A range of anthropogenic activities have the potential to degrade habitat important to the survival of
cetaceans, or impact cetaceans directly. These activities may alter habitat use by operating at times
that coincides with the presence of whales, or they may occur by degrading habitat suitability on a
permanent or semi-permanent basis when cetaceans are absent.
It is not considered plausible that the proposed project will lead to pollution or changes in water quality
that will affect cetaceans. While dredging is proposed as part of this project, dredging is in the Inner
Harbour only which is not utilised by whales. The proposed location for a new dredge material
placement disposal location is in offshore waters which will ensure that current regimes are not
altered. The proposed project is not an aquaculture or fishing activity and will not introduce any
marine debris into the environment.
3.1.1
Acoustic Disturbance
With respect to acoustic disturbance, the proposed Project does not involve seismic survey activity;
however additional vessel noise will be introduced as a result of additional ship movements to and
from the loading and berthing facility. The area of the proposed project is an existing port facility and
as such acoustic disturbance is already present. In terms of cumulative impacts, acoustic impacts are
not cumulative in magnitude, but additional shipping movements will increase the frequency of
disturbance. Whether cetaceans are more likely to habituate to an acoustic disturbance or avoid an
area if the frequency of disturbance increases is unknown. This disturbance is only relevant during the
periods that whales are present.
SLR Consulting Australia Pty Ltd has carried out an assessment of the potential underwater noise
impacts of construction activities associated with the proposed expansion of Bunbury Port (Appendix
7.E). This report has been peer reviewed by an independent industry specialist, Adjunct Professor
Magnus Wahlberg from Southern Denmark University. This incorporates a review of available
literature and SLRs modelling report from the potential impact of acoustic noise from the construction
work of Berth 14 on marine life with special emphasis on the resident population of bottlenose
dolphins (Tursiops aduncus) in the area.
The construction scenarios that have been assessed are drilling and rock fracturing (blasting)
operations, dredging operations (both cutter suction dredging and backhoe dredging) and piling. The
assessment process for determining underwater noise impacts from rock fracturing (blasting) and
other construction scenarios have been undertaken in the following stages:
Identification of likely source noise levels for the project construction activities;
Identification of appropriate noise impact criteria and thresholds for marine fauna, particularly
for dolphins;
Prediction of the underwater noise transmission loss and hence the noise level across the
project area caused by proposed project construction activities; and
Identification of the area of exceedance of the noise impact criteria and thresholds.
The assessment of underwater noise indicates that for most construction scenarios (with the
exception of rock fracturing (blasting)), adverse impacts on marine fauna are not expected away from
the immediate vicinity of the works. Noise from rock fracturing (blasting) has the potential to impact on
marine fauna at distances of up to 1000 m from the source, if rock fracturing (blasting) occurs near
the entrance to the inner harbour. However, the impact of rock fracturing (blasting) on Koombana Bay
2419-004-003-001
Page 21
23-Apr-2012
is reduced for locations further inside the inner harbour and nearer the northern end of the Berth 14
area.
The predicted rock fracturing (blasting) impacts require consideration and implementation of blast
noise mitigation and management measures, based on the Exceedance Zone identified in the report
provided in Appendix 7.E. This Exceedance Zone is based on the area inside which marine mammals
may experience TTS, or temporary hearing damage.
Detonation of the blast should not occur if a marine mammal is detected within the Exceedance Zone
or the Inner Harbour and will be delayed until the animals move out of the Zone. A programme of
marine mammal detection and monitoring is proposed to manage the rock fracturing (blasting) works
and to allow a go or no go decision to be made prior to each blast
The acoustical impact assessment is mainly based on the assumption that animals are disturbed if
their hearing threshold is affected by the noise from the construction work (so called temporary
threshold shift or TTS). At a closer range, the animal may be permanently damaged either in their ear
(PTS, permanent threshold shift) or in body tissues. From the modelling and literature work, it is
concluded that the effects on dolphins will be restricted to a relatively small area around the
construction site. It is proposed that this area will be visually and acoustically monitored so that no
construction work will be made that risk to harm or affect the hearing abilities of the animals.
The report identifies major issues to consider and they are summarised as:
The current knowledge of marine mammals in the area based on a number of studies that
have been undertaken in the area, it is known that the Project area is visited by a number of
bottlenose dolphins and penguins. Other mammals, although known to occur in the area
would rarely make use of the habitat of interest for Berth 14 construction;
The importance of the dolphins to local community of Bunbury the dolphins are an important
asset for the local community as they are among the biggest draw-cards to the city of
Bunbury, especially for tourism activities, mainly based at the Dolphin Discovery Centre. If the
dolphins leave the area for both shorter and longer periods, this could be both a financial
problem for the Centre as well as for the tourism industry in Bunbury as a whole; and
The effects of construction work on dolphins it is difficult to assess the effects of
construction work on marine mammals as data on impacts is still crude and new observations
provide surprising results. Possible effects may be immediate and catastrophic (i.e. direct
injury), short term (i.e. disappear during construction) and long term effects (may last for
years).
3.1.2
Passive Acoustic Monitoring
Passive acoustic monitoring is an increasingly used tool to continuously assess habitat use and
movements of marine animals. Passive acoustic monitoring can involve the tagging of animals (e.g.
with acoustic tags) and utilising a field of receivers to detect their locations. The Australian
government along with a number of state governments have invested significantly in the
establishment of acoustic listening stations to examine habitat use and movement patterns of
species of conservation interest (in particular sharks). For example, the Department of Fisheries,
Western Australia in collaboration with CSIRO have established a network of listening stations to
determine habitat use and movements of tagged sharks in the Perth region. There is also the LIDO
(Listening to the Deep Ocean Environment), an international project that is allowing the real-time long
term monitoring of marine ambient noise as well as marine mammal sounds at cabled and standalone
observatories (Andr et al, 2011).
2419-004-003-001
Page 22
23-Apr-2012
Figure 5: Location of acoustic listening stations that detect the location of tagged sharks in
the Perth region (Source: Department of Fisheries, WA).
Odontocetes (toothed whales, dolphins and porpoises) utilise sound for various purposes including
communicating with conspecifics, assessing their habitat and navigating through it, and detecting
prey. Dolphins (and other toothed whales) produce high pitched clicks. These clicks are produced
high up in the air passages, close to the blowhole, in a structure sometimes called "phonic lips". The
melon, a fatty structure in the dolphin's forehead, serves as an acoustical lens and focuses the clicks
into a narrow beam. When these clicks hit an object, some of the sound will echo back to the
"sender". By listening to the echo and interpreting the time it took before the echo came back, the
dolphin estimates the distance of the object. The term echolocation refers to an ability that dolphins
(and some other marine mammals and most bats) possess that enables them essentially to "see" with
their ears by listening for echoes. A dolphin will always wait for an echo before sending out the next
click. It is possible, that the dolphin will adjust the next click based on the information derived from the
received echo. When the target is far away, the echoes take some time to return and the interval
between the clicks will be long. When the dolphin approaches the target, the echoes will return faster
and the interval between clicks will be shorter. Although the human ear cannot hear an individual
click, it can hear the series of clicks (a click train) as a buzzing sound. When a dolphin approaches
its target, the pitch of that buzzing sound will go up.
For many cetacean species, the fact that they emit various acoustic signals provides the opportunity
for non-invasive monitoring. That is, examining habitat use, and in many instances behaviour, without
the need to capture and tag animals. Acoustic monitoring for cetaceans can be through the use of
boat-based receivers or through an array of fixed receivers (passive acoustic monitoring or PAM). It is
stationary fixed monitors which has been the focus of much applied research interest (Andr et al,
2011).
Static acoustic monitoring equipment consists of a hydrophone and a hardware data-logger, which
detects cetacean echolocation clicks. Processing software assists in separating noise generated by
odontocetes from that generated from other underwater sources (natural and anthropogenic). Static
acoustic monitoring (SAM) has become increasingly useful in studies of odontocete habitat use and
behaviour. A number of examples that have utilised SAM for odonocetes include: Havisides dolphins
(Cephalorhynchus heavisidii) in Namibia (Leeney et al, 2011); harbour porpoises (Phocoena
phocoena) in Ireland (Philpott et al, 2007), common bottlenose dolphins (Tursiops truncatus) in Italy
2419-004-003-001
Page 23
23-Apr-2012
(Lauriano and Bruno, 2007), common bottlenose and harbour porpoises in Scotland (Bailey et al,
2010) and bottlenose dolphins (Tursiops aduncus) in Port Stephens, NSW (Murray and Roberts,
2007).
The choice of a monitoring approach and the design of a monitoring program are always dependent
on a number of factors. Identifying the objective of monitoring is paramount, and other important
issues include consideration of the temporal and spatial scale of monitoring that is desirable and
feasible, and the resolution required to effectively and efficiently address the monitoring objectives.
The advantage of static acoustic monitoring is that it is continuous and can simultaneously cover a
wide spatial scale (including separate locations). For odontocetes, the use of acoustic monitor allows
assessment of habitat use and behaviour during the night which is not possible with visual monitoring.
Studies have found differences in dolphin behaviour during the day and night (Leeney et al, 2011).
C-PODs have been installed in three locations in Koombana Bay for this Project. The C-POD mostly
receives short segments of the trains of clicks produced by the dolphins as they scan past it. The
software algorithm identifies these as click trains and assesses the probability of such trains arising by
chance from other broadband sources such as snapping shrimp, rain, propellers etc. The C-POD
records the time and duration of each detected click and allows calculation of interclick intervals
(ICIs). The ICI is the time between the start of successive clicks. The software classifies the trains into
four classes: Cet Hi and Cet Lo for high probability trains while those resembling chance trains or
boat sonar are placed in doubtful and very doubtful categories. The C-POD has superseded a
previous instrument the T-POD. Some of the advantages of the C-POD over the T-POD include a
longer battery life and wider bandwidth capabilities. The latter is particular important for recording the
presence of bottlenose dolphins due to the relatively low frequency of dolphin clicks (typically 50
KHz, but ranging from 30 KHz to 130 KHz). The T-POD was known to potentially underestimate
bottlenose dolphin use of an area, but the modifications to the C-POD have rectified this issue.
Nonetheless, the T-POD performed well in detecting bottlenose dolphins with 82% of the schools
sighted within 500 m detected (Philpott et al, 2007). Additionally, further development of the software
associated with the C-PODs/T-PODs has further decreased the likelihood of other underwater noise
(e.g. noise from snapping shrimp) being confused with dolphin vocal activities.
Figure 6 provides an example of a click train recording. Analysis of the inter-click interval (ICI)
provides insight to possible dolphin behaviour at the time of detection. The click train ICI in Figure 6
declines rapidly (0 to 0.72 secs on the xaxis) from an initial ICI of 46 m/secs (y-axis) to an endpoint
of 20 m/secs after the dolphin reaches its target.
2419-004-003-001
Page 24
23-Apr-2012
Figure 6: Example of a click-train captured by a T-Pod. Time is shown on the horizontal (x)
axis while the inter-click interval is shown on the vertical (y) axis. As the dolphin approaches
an object of interest, the inter-click interval becomes shorter.
The key objective in the present Project is to examine habitat use of bottlenose dolphin in Koombana
Bay before, during, and after proposed construction activities associated with the development of
Berth 14. The current project team are undertaking research in and around Koombana Bay and the
inner harbour by deploying three C-POD acoustic loggers on 25 August 2011 to establish a baseline
of dolphin movement within the Project area.
Each logger has a detection range of 800 m and detects dolphins in a line of sight. The location of
the loggers in the Project area is shown in Figure 7.
2419-004-003-001
Page 25
23-Apr-2012
Figure 7: Location and ranges of the C-POD loggers currently deployed in the Project area.
The use of C-PODs represents an additional approach to augment current community based visual
dolphin monitoring activities based at the Bunbury Dolphin Discovery Centre. The visual monitoring
undertaken by the Discovery Centre potentially provides a validation method for the operation of the
C-PODs. Together, the visual surveys undertaken by the Bunbury Dolphin Discovery Centre and the
deployment and operation of the C-PODs represent a survey approach that is temporally and spatially
relevant with respect to the scale of the proposed project and of sufficient resolution to detect
ecologically meaningful changes to habitat use of dolphins in Koombana Bay at and adjacent to the
proposed project footprint.
The baleen whale monitoring program undertaken annually in Geographe Bay currently documents
and will continue to record humpback whale numbers in Geographe Bay between the months of
September and December, corresponding to the timing of the southbound migration.
3.1.3
Increase in Ship Movements
Vessel strikes (i.e. collisions with cetaceans - in particular whales), are identified as an increasing
threat to some cetacean populations and the increase in traffic of faster and larger ships has been
identified as a potential risk to the population of cetaceans. The potential for vessel strikes during the
construction and operational phases of Berth 14 are discussed below.
Construction
with the exception of dredge hoppers that will transit between the inner harbour area and the
proposed offshore disposal location approximately 13 km north-west of the inner harbour. Dredges
are effectively stationary during dredging activity so the likelihood of them striking marine fauna is
remote. Dredge hopper barges will use the existing shipping channel to transit through Koombana
Bay. Beyond Koombana Bay, the hopper barges will traverse waters where that activity currently does
not occur, however, slow displacement type vessels such as barges and tugs are not considered to
pose a significant risk to megafauna including whales (Laist et al, 2001). No interactions between
dredge vessels and marine fauna have been recorded during maintenance dredging activity in
Bunbury Port.
2419-004-003-001
Page 26
23-Apr-2012
The migratory path of Humpback whales along the Western Australian coast is inshore of the
continental shelf boundary (<200 m depth). Humpback whales are known to take different routes
during their northbound migration (occurring during June/July) compared to their southbound
migration (occurring during October/November) (Jenner et al 2001). During their northbound
migration, pods occur further offshore (>20 nm) than during their southbound migration when pods
are consistently sighted within 20 nm of shore (Appendix 7.D). During their southern migration, there
is evidence that mother calf pairs use Geographe Bay as their final resting stop on their southern
migration en route to Antarctic feeding grounds (Salgado-Kent et al in review). However, the area
identified as a potential resting area is in the vicinity of Bunker Bay, located approximately 55 km to
the south-west of Bunbury Port and so vessel movements will not affect this location. While southern
right whales and blue whales are known to occur in coastal waters, sightings in nearshore areas near
Bunbury Port are rare.
Operational
The operational phase of the port will require significantly fewer vessels than the construction phase.
The additional shipping will follow the current shipping channel and as such, the spatial scale of
shipping activity will not be altered as a result of the Project when operating. Once construction of the
berth is complete, it is estimated that an additional 275 ships will visit the port per annum (Figure 8).
This is substantially lower than visits to nearby Fremantle Port. There has been no record of vessels
striking a ship in the history of Bunbury Port. Further, of the deceased cetaceans that have been
found washed up in the Bunbury area, none of them displayed any evidence of ship strikes. The
speed of vessels within the nearshore area encompassing the port boundaries is dictated by harbour
regulations (8 knots) with the vessels only reaching cruising speed (approximately 14 knots) once
they are well clear of the port in deep water with no obstructions. Operational vessel activity will
largely be restricted to the shipping channel and inner harbour areas that are currently utilised by
port vessels.
Based on a numerical model created by Collier (2011) for Humpback Whales in Western Australia
along with reported vessel strike rates from the International Whaling Commission (IWC), it was
calculated that the increased volume of shipping as a result of Lanco port operations will result in less
than <0.1 cetacean-ship interactions annually.
The Australian Government is working on improving the management of ship strikes in its waters with
reference to actions identified in the United States guidance document for minimising the risk of ship
strikes, endorsed by the Marine Environment Protection Committee (MEPC) of the International
Maritime Organisation (IMO), at its meeting in July 2009. As a first step, the Australian Government is
gathering information to assess the risks and impacts of ship strikes on cetaceans in Australian
waters to help to inform a National Ship Strike Reduction Strategy. The proponent will assist with
Strategy where requested.
2419-004-003-001
Page 27
23-Apr-2012
2000
1800
Number of Ship Visits p.a.
1600
1400
1200
Existing Visits
1000
Existing + Additional Visits once

Lanco Operational
800
Fremantle
600
400
200
0
Figure 8: Showing existing ship visits to Bunbury Port relative to additional visits upon Lanco
Berth 14 being fully operational and number of visits at nearby Fremantle.
3.2 Marine Turtles

While both green and loggerhead turtles may be present in the Bunbury region, the region is not
coasts to the Northern Territory border.
Mortality from dredging operations is known from Queensland, particularly in the regions where the
abundance of marine turtles is high (for example adjacent to major rookeries) (Greenland et al, 2002).
Given the very low abundance of turtles in the region of the proposed project compared to other
locations where mortalities are recorded, the chance of interaction between dredging equipment and
marine turtles in the current instance is extremely unlikely. Nonetheless, should it be deemed
necessary a suite of operational management strategies can be applied to mitigate risk and these are
documented in Section 4. Given no nesting of any marine turtle species occurs in the region,
impacting processes (e.g. changes to light regime) that affect animals in nesting areas are not
relevant.
Overall, it is concluded that the impacts of the proposed project as described, will not significantly
impact the green loggerhead turtles. This conclusion is based on assessment of the proposed project
against the Matters of National Environmental Significance Significant Impact Guidelines 1.1.
(Appendix 7.A). No specific monitoring of marine turtles is proposed.
3.3 Pinnipeds - Sea Lions and Seals

that the impacts of the proposed project as described, will not significantly impact the Australian sealion. This conclusion is based on assessment of the proposed project against the Matters of National
Environmental Significance Significant Impact Guidelines 1.1. (Appendix 7.A). No specific monitoring
of pinnipeds is proposed.
2419-004-003-001
Page 28
23-Apr-2012
3.4 Shy Albatross

as described, will not significantly impact the shy albatross. This conclusion is based on assessment
of the proposed project against the Matters of National Environmental Significance Significant Impact
Guidelines 1.1. (Appendix 7.A). No specific monitoring of the shy albatross is proposed.
3.5 Penguins
Nonetheless, foreshore inspections will be undertaken prior to and during construction work to identify
the presence of any penguins. Prior to commencing the project, the proponent will work with the
Dolphin Discovery Centre on approaches to mitigate potential impacts on any identified penguin
colonies.
3.6 Sharks
Threats to shark species ostensibly arise from fisheries that either target shark species or interact with
shark species as by-catch. No specific monitoring of shark species is proposed.
3.7 Summary
Information collected during this review suggest bottlenose dolphins and humpback whales are the
two key marine megafauna species that should be considered as part of the proposed development
activities in Koombana Bay. The Project area including Koombana Bay is home to a resident
population of bottlenose dolphins while humpback whales are known to migrate within 2 km of the
coastline in this area during the months of September and October on their southbound migration to
Antarctica. The project has identified that monitoring of bottlenose dolphins, before, during and
immediately after port construction is the highest priority and passive acoustic monitoring has been
proposed as an approach to augment existing visual observations of dolphin habitat use and
behaviour at and adjacent to the proposed development location. While blue whales and southern
right whales are known to occur in the Project area and may be at risk from ship strikes, it was judged
that given there is no record of any ships striking a whale in the history of the Bunbury Port and
southern right whales and blue whale sightings are rare in the Project area. The overall risk of the
Project to these species was assessed to be very low.
2419-004-003-001
Page 29
23-Apr-2012
Marine Biosecurity
4.1 Introduced Marine Pests
Australian waters are abundant with a collection or marine plants and animals that have formed
complex marine ecosystems. The introduction of exotic marine species from other countries can
seriously threaten these long established ecosystems.
Introduced marine pests can cause long-term economic, ecological and health consequences for the
ocean, for its inhabitants, and for the people and industries who rely on it. Introduced species can
cause shifts in ecosystem structure, reduce biodiversity and cause disease in endemic species,
including humans.
There are currently about 250 introduced marine species in Australia, 60 of which were introduced to
Western Australia. Most are cool water, temperate species (37 species) that occur south of Geraldton;
six are tropical species that occur to the north of Shark Bay and 17 introduced species occur in both
the southern and northern halves of Western Australia.
The majority of marine pests were introduced via international ships from biofouling or ballast waters.
Different vessels pose different risks in terms of introduced marine pests. Vessels that are well
maintained, regularly cleaned, anti-fouled and stay in ports for short periods of time are considered
low risk while high risk vessels are those that are slow moving and stay in a single area for months at
a time, increasing the risk of species settling on the vessel.
4.1.1
Ballast Water
Large vessels use ballast waters to maintain a specific position in the water. Light vessels often take
on water so that the ship settles at an optimum depth in the water. When in port, a large vessel may
discharge water as cargo is loaded, maintaining this optimum depth in the water. Such ballast water
exchange represents a potential vector for the introduction of non-native species, through either
mature or larval life history stages of the introduced species. If conditions are suitable, species
introduced through ballast water may survive and develop populations. Small vessels and non-trading
vessels do not use ballast water.
4.1.2
Biofouling
Biofouling is considered as the major source of introduced marine pests. Biofouling can occur on any
vessel in seawater where a surface is available for marine organisms to grow. As many as 75% of the
marine species that have been introduced to Australia are thought to have been introduced through
biofouling. The three successional phases of biofouling are shown in Table 3.
Table 3: General temporal or biotic succession of biofouling colonisation and accumulation
Primary
Secondary
Tertiary
Biochemical/bacterial
conditioning
Microalgae (<1 mm)
Filamentous algae (<5 mm)
2419-004-003-001
Acorn barnacles
Sponges
Gooseneck barnacles
Bryozoans
Hydroids
Serpulid worms
Spirorbid worms
Algal tufts
Coralline algae
Amphipods
Ascidians
Mussels
Oysters
Clams
Gastropods
Crabs, shrimps
Seastars
Sabellid worms
Sea anemones
Macroalgae
Page 31
23-Apr-2012
Primary. In the earliest stages of biofouling, biochemical and bacterial conditioning occurs on
the newly exposed surface. A thin layer of microalgae then develops, with filamentous algae
growing to a length of approximately 5 mm.
Secondary. The primary biofouling rapidly becomes secondary as the first animals begin to
settle and grow on the surface, including barnacles, bryozoans, hydroids and worms. As the
secondary fouling becomes thicker, mobile amphipods begin to colonise the surface.
Tertiary. In the tertiary stage of biofouling, the community has become fully developed with
sponges, ascidians, bivalve molluscs (mussels, oysters, and clams), sea anemones, worms,
etc. The biofouling community is now three dimensional, with numerous nooks and crannies
where mobile faunal species can seek shelter. These species may include starfish,
gastropods, crustaceans, bryozoans and tunicates.
4.2 Bunbury Port Monitoring

Invasive marine species surveys have been undertaken by Bunbury Port every two years since 1998
(SKM 2006, 2009a, 2009b). Three survey areas, the Outer Harbour, Koombana Bay and Inner
Harbour, were selected as they have areas considered at high risk for containing introduced marine
species. These areas have:
frequent and persistent domestic and international vessel activity (commercial and
recreational);
permanent artificial structures (e.g. moorings, berths and pylons);
reduced flow or high residence times of the water column; and
known intertidal and subtidal habitat characteristic of the region.
There were 37 species targeted in the surveys as they had been previously identified in the Port area.
The summer survey of 2008 identified the presence of two of the 37 targeted species (SKM 2009a).
Both of these were dinoflagellates and it was suggested that they were likely to have been introduced
via ballast waters. The previous survey, undertaken in 2006 identified one species, the Japanese
Goby, in the inner harbour area.
4.3 Managing Marine Pests

Management of marine pests is a complex problem that is being addressed at local, state, federal and
international levels. Approaches and regulations to manage the introduction of marine pests are
constantly evolving.
4.3.1
Management in Australia
In the Australian Government, the Department of Agriculture, Fisheries and Forestry (DAFF) is the
lead agency responsible for developing management policies for marine pest issues.
Within DAFF, the Invasive Marine Pest Species Program coordinates the development and
implementation of the marine pest management strategies. The Australian Quarantine Inspection
Service (AQIS) is the agency responsible for implementing the marine pest management policies
within DAFF. This is achieved primarily through the Commonwealth Quarantine Act 1908, which was
modified by the Quarantine Amendment Act 1999, which defines ballast water as goods.
The Australian and state/territory governments, along with marine industries and marine scientists are
implementing Australia's National System for the Prevention and Management of Marine Pest
Incursions (the National System). The National System is a suite of measures aimed at:
preventing marine pests from arriving in Australian waters or spreading to new areas
providing a coordinated emergency response should a new pest arrive in Australian waters
controlling and managing marine pests already here, where eradication is not feasible.
There are also four supporting components:
monitoring - ongoing national program to provide early detection of new pests
communication - industry and community awareness and education
2419-004-003-001
Page 32
23-Apr-2012
research and development - targeted research to assist with development of policy and
management measures
evaluation and review - evaluating the effectiveness of the National System.
The measures and arrangements under the National System are being implemented by the National
Introduced Marine Pests Coordination Group (NIMPCG).
The National Biofouling Management Guidelines for Non-Trading Vessels have been developed
because non-trading vessels have been identified as a high risk for introducing marine pests. The
Guidelines only cover biofouling and cover vessels including (but not limited to):
Barges;
Cable ships;
Dredges;
Heavy lift vessels;
Research vessels; and
Tug and line handling boats.
4.3.2
Western Australian Management Practices

4.3.2.1
The Department of Fisheries, Western Australia (DoF) is the lead agency for management of marine
pest issues under the Western Australian State government. While the department operates under
several acts, the primary legislative tool is the Fish Resources Management Act 1994. The act
prohibits the importation of a live fish not endemic to the State or its translocation within the State to
an area where it is not endemic. Note that fish in this sense is defined as: an aquatic organism of
any species (whether alive or dead) and includes:
a) the eggs, spat, seeds, spawn, spores, fry, larvae or other source of reproduction or offspring of an
aquatic organism; and
b) a part only of an aquatic organism (including the shell or tail), but does not include aquatic
mammals, aquatic reptiles, aquatic birds, amphibians or (except in relation to Part 3 and Division 1
of Part 11) pearl oysters.
Thus, the restriction is on a broad range of plants and animals, and not just fish. In managing marine
pest issues, DoF cooperates closely with Department of Environment and Conservation (DEC), the
Environmental Protection Authority (EPA), port authorities and other Commonwealth and State
agencies.
4.3.2.2
Port Authorities
Under the WA Port Authorities Act 1999 and its associated Port Authorities Regulations 2001, the
Harbourmaster of each port has powers to manage marine pests or suspected pests. The
Harbourmaster can deny entry or order the departure of any vessel that contains marine pests, is
leaking oil or poses any other marine pollution risk to the harbour.
4.3.3
Risk Management
There are a number of factors that need to be considered when determining risk of a vessel in the
introduction of marine pests into Western Australian Waters. The National Biofouling Management
Guidelines for Non-Trading Vessels detail a number of factors that need to be considered including:
Surface cleaning;
Cleaning of internal systems;
Presence of antifouling coating and its status;
Length of working periods;
Number and size of niche areas where marine species can grow;
Voyage transit speed, route and duration;
Method of transit; and
Environmental compatibility between departure and arrival destinations.
2419-004-003-001
Page 33
23-Apr-2012
A risk assessment should be taken to determine the potential for each vessel to introduce marine
pests into the Project area. If vessels are found to have heaving biofouling or are classed as high risk
then treatment measures are needed to be implemented.
This project has identified Barges and Dredgers to be the main vessels for undertaking an introduced
marine pest risk assessment. They are susceptible to introducing marine pests because:
They spend long periods stationery or in one port or location;
Towed barges efficiency isnt impacted by biofouling so few have antifouling;
Regular translocation between destinations;
Damage to antifouling due to work activities; and
Capture of mud and sediments in equipment and fittings.
The framework to be applied to the project is depicted in Figure 9.
2419-004-003-001
Page 34
23-Apr-2012
Figure 9: Biosecurity Risk Management Framework for the Project.
4.3.4
Management Measures for the Project
Vessels used on the project must adhere to Commonwealth and State Government requirements for
introduced marine pest management. The framework that will be implemented for this project will
ensure that a risk assessment is undertaken and that all medium and high risk vessels are inspected
by qualified marine scientists. All vessels identified as having the potential to introduced marine pests
to the Port area will be required to be cleaned prior to entering the Port or within 48 hours of entering
waters. Should, for some reason, the initial risk assessment process be not successful and the
2419-004-003-001
Page 35
23-Apr-2012
presence of introduced marine pests is confirmed, an emergency management system will be

implemented.
Discussions will occur with Department of Fisheries to ensure that all management plans developed
for biosecurity are adequate for the area. As there is currently ongoing monitoring in the Port,
additional monitoring will not be required, however a Quarantine Management plan will be developed
to manage those vessels that come from foreign waters that have the potential to introduce marine
pests.
2419-004-003-001
Page 36
23-Apr-2012
Ongoing Studies
There are a number of studies that are currently being undertaken within the Project area and the
broader region. These studies are detailed in Table 4.
Table 4: Summary of existing studies on marine fauna in the Project area and broader region.
Species
Nature
of
work/
sightings
Authors
Year
Title
Bottlenose
Dolphins
Various
studies
detailed
below.
Dr Lars Bejder et
al
2007ongoing
South West
(SWMRP).
Bottlenose
Dolphins
Vessel
surveys (PhD
research)
Holly Smith
2007ongoing
Population abundance, social structure, ranging

patterns and habitat use as part of SWMRP.
Bottlenose
Dolphins
Conservation
genetics
Claire Daniel
2007ongoing
Conservation genetics as part of SWMRP.
Bottlenose
Dolphins
Foraging
ecology
Shannon
McCluskey
2007ongoing
Foraging ecology as part of SWMRP.
Bottlenose
Dolphins
Species
habitat
interactions
Kate Sprogis
2011ongoing
Predictive habitat modelling and population

dynamics as part of SWMRP.
Bottlenose
Dolphins
Dolphin
Health
Bejder et al
2011ongoing
Dolphin Health via veterinarian and pathological

investigations as part of SWMRP.
Humpback
Whales
Aerial
surveys,
vessel
surveys,
historic data
Jenner et al, 2001
2001
Geographical and temporal movements of

humpback whales in Western Australian waters.
Humpback
Whales
Tracking
study
of
baleen whales
in Geographe
Bay
Salgado Kent et
al
2011 AMSA
presentation
Identified whale species present in Geographe

Bay and how the whales use Geographe Bay.
Baleen
Whales
Tracking
study
of
baleen whales
in Geographe
Bay
Glencross
Burton
2005ongoing
Surveys of baleen whales in Geographe Bay

between September and December.
as
and
Southern
Right
Whales
Elscot
and
Bancroft, 1999
Long
Finned
Pilot
Whales
Described
in
James
and
Chalmers, 2005
2419-004-003-001
Marine
Research
Program
Evidence that sheltered bays of the south-west

and west coasts are used for resting and
nursing of southern right whale calves between
July and October
August 1996;
April 2005
Page 37
320 Whales stranded to the southeast of

Busselton in August 1996. A further 19 whales
stranded to the northeast and west of Busselton
in April 2005.
23-Apr-2012
Species
Nature
of
work/
sightings
Authors
Year
Title
Gray's
Beaked
Whale
Described
in
James
and
Chalmers, 2005
January
2003
Six whales stranded to the west of Busselton.
False Killer
Whale
Described
in
James
and
Chalmers, 2005
April 2005
120 whales stranded to the west of Busselton in

June 2005.
5.1 South West Marine Research Program

Holly Smith, a PhD candidate from Murdoch University, studied the population of bottlenose dolphins
within the Bunbury region from 2007 to 2009. Although research papers have not been published as
yet, the summary from the South West Marine Research Program updates provides the following
summary of this research.
Using dorsal fins for identification, the following was undertaken as part of the research:
Calculate accurate abundance estimates and determine how many dolphins are in the
Bunbury population;
Describe group composition, including each animals sex and age;
Investigate associations and interactions between dolphins;
Determine seasonal residency and extent of home ranges; and
Identify benthic habitat types available to Bunbury dolphins.
2
The study area covered 120 km of coastal waterways around Bunbury, from Peppermint Beach in
the south to Binningup in the north. A total of 196 different dolphins were identified from 544 dolphin
groups during 217 boat-based surveys. The number of dolphins did vary throughout the year. The
highest numbers of dolphins were encountered during summer.
During the survey, 35 new dolphin calves were encountered with the main calving season beginning
in summer and peaking during autumn. New born calves are vulnerable to disturbance. Density,
home range and habitat preferences of adult female dolphins changed with each season with some
staying within estuaries and inshore waters. In summer and autumn, Koombana Bay and the mouth of
the Leschenault Estuary were where the main concentration of female dolphin sightings occurred.
2419-004-003-001
Page 38
23-Apr-2012
Conclusions
The proposed project is located in an area that is utilised by many marine species including protected
marine megafauna such as dolphins, whales, pinnipeds, turtles, sharks and marine birds. The Project
has identified that monitoring of bottlenose dolphins, before, during and after port construction is the
highest priority and passive acoustic monitoring has been proposed as an approach that will
complement existing visual observations of dolphin habitat use and behaviour at and adjacent to the
The Project area has also been identified as part of an important area for recreational and commercial
fishing. Potential impacts of the Project on fisheries primarily relate to potential habitat degradation via
dredging or displacement. Such impacts are most relevant where habitat degradation affects nursery
areas and other critical habitats; however, there is little published information on the presence of any
such habitats in the Bunbury region. Other potential impacts of the Project relate to displacement
where fishers lose access to areas. While there is insufficient spatial information to accurately assess
the magnitude of this potential impact, modelling results indicate that the dredge plume will be largely
confined to the Inner Harbour an area in which fishing is prohibited.
The risk posed by introduced marine pests due to Project activities has also been considered. The
introduction of non-native marine species into the Project area has the potential to impact the
fisheries, habitats and ecosystems within and adjacent to the Project area. The guidelines and
legislation relevant to managing introduced marine pests have been identified and will be followed
during the Project while appropriate risk management measures including management plans will be
developed in collaboration with Western Australian Government departments to ensure the risk of
introduced marine species is minimised for this Project.
While a number of potential impacts have been identified for the marine environment, the
development and implementation of appropriate management and mitigation measures and the
coordination of ongoing monitoring will ensure that these potential impacts are minimised and the
risks to the marine environment are reduced.
2419-004-003-001
Page 39
23-Apr-2012
References
Andr M., van der Schaar M., Zaugg S., Houegnigan L., Sanchez A. M. and Castell J. V. (2011).
Listening to the deep: Live monitoring of ocean noise and cetacean acoustic signals. Marine Pollution
Bulletin 63(1-4): 18-26.
Attard C.R.M., Beheregaray L.B., Jenner C., Gill P., Jenner M., Morrice M., Bannister J., LeDuc R.
and Moller L. (2010). Genetic diversity and structure of blue whales (Balaenoptera musculus) in
Australian feeding aggregations. Conservation Genetics 11: 2437-2441.
Ayvazian S.G., and Hyndes G.A. (1995). Surf-zone fish assemblages in south-western Australia: Do
adjacent nearshore habitats and the warm Leeuwin Current influence the characteristics of the fish
fauna? Marine Biology 122: 527-536.
Bailey H., Clay G., Coates E.A., Lusseau D., Senior B. and Thompson P. M. (2010). Using T-PODs to
assess variations in the occurrence of coastal bottlenose dolphins and harbour porpoises. Aquatic
Conservation: Marine and Freshwater Ecosystems 20: 150-158.
Bannister J.L., Burton C.L.K., Dunlop R., Hedley S.L. and Paxton C. (2006). Aerial Survey for
Humpback Whales off Shark Bay, WA 2005. Final Report to the Department of Environment and
Heritage. Canberra.
Brand-Gardner S.J., Lanyon J.M. and Limpus C.J. (1999). Diet selection by immature green turtles,
Chelonia mydas, in subtropical Moreton Bay, south-east Queensland. Australian Journal of Zoology
47(2): 181-191.
Bruce B.D., Stevens J.D. and Malcolm H. (2006). Movements and swimming behaviour of white
sharks (Carcharodon carcharias) in Australian waters. Marine Biology 150: 161-172.
Chilvers B.L., Corkeron P.J. and Puotinen M.L. (2003). Influence of trawling on the behaviour and
Collier T. (2011). A numerical model created to estimate the co-occurrence of vessels and migrating
Humpback whales at a new West Australian port. Paper presented at Coastal and Ports Conference,
Perth, September 2011.
truncatus) due to long-term exposure to swim-with-dolphin tourism. Marine Mammal Science 17(4):
689-702.
Crawley K.R., Hyndes G.A., and Ayvazian S.G. (2006). Influence of different volumes and types of
detached macrophytes on fish community structure in surf zones of sandy beaches. Marine Ecology
Progress Series 307: 233-246.
Gedamke J., Rafic M. and Hinten G. (2008). Progress report on cetacean research, January 2008 to
December 2008, with statistical data for the calendar year 2008. Department of Environment and
Conservation. Australia.
Greenland J.A., Limpus D.J. and Currie K.J. (2002). Queensland Marine Wildlife Stranding and
Hall M.A., Alverson D.L. and Metuzals K.I. (2000). By-catch: Problems and solutions. Marine Pollution
Bulletin 41(1-6): 204-219.
Hamann M., Limpus C., Hughes G., Mortimer J., Pilcher N. (2006). Assessment of the conservation
status of the leatherback turtle in the Indian Ocean and South East Asia. Bangkok: IOSEA Marine
Turtle MoU Secretariat.
2419-004-003-001
Page 41
23-Apr-2012
Harris M.P. and Bode K.G. (1981). Populations of Little Penguins, Short-tailed Shearwaters and other
Seabirds on Phillip Island, Victoria, 1978. Emu 81(1): 20-28.
Houghton J., Doyle T., Wilson T., Davenport J., Hays G. (2006). Jellyfish aggregations and
leatherback turtle foraging patterns in a temperate coastal environment. Ecology 8: 1967-1972.
Howard R.K. (1989). The structure of a nearshore fish community of Western Australia: diel patterns
and the habitat role of limestone reefs. Environmental Biology of Fishes 24:93-104.
Hyndes G.A., Platell M.E., Potter, I.C., and Lenanton R.C.J. (1998). Age composition, growth,
reproductive biology and recruitment of King George whiting, Sillaginodes punctata, in south-western
Australia. Fish Bulletin, U. S. 96: 258-270.
Jenkins R., Brown R. and Phillips M. (2009). Harbour porpoise (Phocoena phocoena) conservation
Jenner K.C.S., Jenner M-N. M. and McCabe K. A. (2001). Geographical and temporal movements of
Johnson J.A. and Wolman A.A. (1984). The Humpback Whale Megaptera novaeangliae. Marine
Fisheries Review 46(4): 30-37.
Kangas M.I. (2000). Synopsis of the biology and exploitation of the blue swimmer crab, Portunus
pelagicus Linnaeus. Fisheries Research Report.
Kennish M.J. (2002). Environmental threats and environmental future of estuaries. Environmental
Laist D.W., Knowlton A.R., Mead J.G., Collet A.S. and Podesta M. (2001). Collisions between ships
Last P.R. and Stevens J.D. (2009). Sharks and Rays of Australia. CSIRO Division of Fisheries.
Melbourne.
Lauriano G. and Bruno S. (2007). A note on the acoustic assessment of bottlenose dolphin behaviour
around fishing gears in the Asinara Island National Park, Italy. Journal of Cetacean Research and
Management 9(2): 137-141.
Leeney R., Carslake D. and Elwen S. (2011). Using static acoustic monitoring to describe
echolocation behaviour of heavisides dolphins (Cephalorhynchus heavisidii) in Namibia. Aquatic
Mammals 37(2): 151-160.
Leatherwood S. and Reeves R.R. (1983). The Sierra Club Handbook of Whales and Dolphins. San
Francisco. Sierra Club Books.
Limbourn A.J. and Westera M.B. (2006). Part A of Project C1-G1: A review, gap analysis and
assessment of current information relating to marine and coastal environments in the SW region.
South West Catchments Council 2009.
Limpus C.J. and MacLachlin N. (1979). Observations on the leatherback turtle, Dermochelys coriacea
(L.), in Australia. Australian Wildlife Research 6: 105-116.
Limpus C.J., Miller J.D., Parmenter C.J., Reimer D., McLachlan N. and Webb R. (1992). Migration of
green (Chelonia mydas) and loggerhead (Caretta caretta) turtles to and from eastern Australian
rookeries. Wildlife Research 19(3): 347-358.
Limpus C.J. (2008). A Biological Review of Australian Marine Turtles. 1. Loggerhead Turtle Caretta
caretta
(Linneaus).
Queensland
Environment
Protection
Agency.
http://www.derm.qld.gov.au/register/p02785aa.pdf
2419-004-003-001
Page 42
23-Apr-2012
Marchant S. and Higgins P.J. (eds.) (1990). Handbook of Australian, New Zealand and Antarctic
Birds. Volume 1. Part A. Oxford University Press, Melbourne.
McCauley R.D., Fewtrell J., Duncan A.J., Jenner C., Jenner M.N., Penrose J.D., Prince R.I.T., Adhitya
A., Murdoch T. and McCabe K. (2002). Marine Seismic Surveys- A study of environmental
implications. Australian Petroleum Production and Exploration Association (APPEA) Journal 2000:
692-705.
McPhee D.P. (2008). Fisheries Management in Australia. Federation Press (Annandale).
Meagher T.D. (1971). Ecology of the Crab Portunus pelagicus (Crustacea: Portunidae) in South
Miller J.D. (1996). Reproduction in sea turtles. In: The Biology of Sea Turtles (Eds: P.L. Lutz and J.A.
Musick). CRC Press pp 51-81.
deaths. Available from: http://media.murdoch.edu.au/investigation-of-eight-bunbury-dolphin-deaths
Murray S. and Roberts D. (2007). Baseline Report On Dolphin Monitoring Prior To Establishment Of
Port Stephens Pearl Leases In Salamander Bay.
Oviedo L. and Solis M. (2008). Underwater topography determines critical breeding habitat for
humpback whales near Osa Peninsula, Costa Rica: implications for Marine Protected Areas. Revista
de Biologia Tropical 56(2): 591-602.
Philpott E., Englund A., Ingram S. and Rogan E. (2007). Using T-PODs to investigate the
echolocation of coastal bottlenose dolphins. Journal of the Marine Biological Association of the United
Kingdom 87: 1117.
Plotkin P.T., Wicksten M.K. and Amos A.F. (1993). Feeding ecology of the loggerhead sea turtle
Caretta caretta in the northwestern Gulf of Mexico. Marine Biology (Berlin) 115: 1-5.
Potter I.C., Chalmer P.N., Tiivel D.J., Steckis R.A., Platell M.E. and Lenanton R.C.J. (2000). The fish
fauna and finfish fishery of the Leschenault Estuary in south-western Australia. Journal of the Royal
Society of Western Australia 83: 481-501.
Potter I.C. and de Lestang S. (2000). Biology of the blue swimmer crab Portunus pelagicus in
Salgado-Kent C., Marley S., Bouchet P. and Nagy J. (In review). A theodolite tracking study of baleen
whales in Geographe Bay, Western Australia.
SKM (2006). Marine Pest Species Survey: Fifth biennial surveillance of Bunbury Harbour 2006.
Produced for the Bunbury Port Authority. 20 July 2006.
SKM (2009a). Bunbury Port Authority Invasive Marine Species Survey 2008: Preliminary Survey
Report. Produced for the Bunbury Port Authority. 28 January 2009.
SKM (2009b). Bunbury Port Authority Invasive Marine Species Survey 2008: Part I (Summer Survey).
Produced for the Bunbury Port Authority. 22 May 2009.
Vanderlaan A.S.M. and Taggart C.T. (2007). Vessel collisions with whales: The probability of lethal
WA DEC (Western Australia Department of Environment and Conservation) (2010). Marine Turtles in
Western Australia, DEC (Perth). http://www.naturebase.net/content/view/2462/1401
2419-004-003-001
Page 43
23-Apr-2012
th
Zeppel H. (2007). Meeting Flipper in the wild: Managing swim with dolphin tourism in Australia. In: 5
International Coastal and Marine Tourism Congress: Balancing Marine Tourism, Development and
Sustainability
(CMT2007),
11-15
Sep
2007,
Auckland,
New
Zealand.
2419-004-003-001
Page 44
23-Apr-2012
Appendix 7.A: EPBC Table
Threatened and migratory flora and fauna species occurring within 10 km of the Project location.
Family Name
Scientific and Common Name
EPBC
Preferred Habitat
1
Status
BIRDS
Anous tenuiostris melanops
Laridae
V
The Australian lesser noddy usually occupies coral-limestone
islands that are densely fringed with white mangrove Avicennia
Australian lesser noddy
marina. It occasionally occurs on shingle or sandy beaches. The
Australian lesser noddy breeds on the Morley, Wooded and
Pelsaert Islands (Houtman Abrolhos Islands group) and possibly
Ashmore Reef.
Cacatuidae
V
The Forest red-tailed black cockatoo inhabits the dense Jarrah
(Eucalyptus marginata), Karri (E. diversicolor) and Marri (Corymbia
Forest red-tailed black-cockatoo
calophylla) forests.
Cacatuidae
V
Baudin's black-cockatoo occurs in high-rainfall areas, usually at
sites that are heavily forested and dominated by Marri (Corymbia
Baudin's black-cockatoo
calophylla) and Eucalyptus species, especially Karri
(E. diversicolor) and Jarrah (E. marginata). However, it also occurs
in woodlands of Wandoo (E. wandoo), Blackbutt (E. patens),
Flooded Gum (E. rudis), Yate (E. cornuta) and in orchards, and is
occasionally recorded in farmland and grasslands
Cacatuidae
E
Carnaby's black-cockatoo mainly occurs in uncleared or remnant
Carnaby's black-cockatoo
native eucalypt woodlands, especially those that contain Salmon
Gum (Eucalyptus salmonophloia) and Wandoo (E. wandoo), and in
shrubland or kwongan heathland dominated by Hakea, Dryandra,
Banksia and Grevillea species. It is a seasonal visitor to plantations
of exotic pines (Pinus spp. )
Diomedea exulans
Diomedeidae
E, M
The Amsterdam albatross is a non-resident visitor to Australia and
amsterdamensis
breeds on Amsterdam Island (territory of France), in the southern
Amsterdam albatross
Indian Ocean. It mainly forages in the southern hemisphere in the
ocean surrounding this island.
Family Name
EPBC
Preferred Habitat
3
Status
Diomedea exulans gibsoni
Diomedeidae
V, M
Gibson's albatross is marine, pelagic and aerial. It breeds on
1
V = Vulnerable, E = Endangered, CE = Critically Endangered, M = Migratory.

U = Unlikely, P = Possible, L = Likely, F = Flyover Only, K = Known to Occur.
3
4
2
Likelihood of
2
Occurrence
U
Likelihood of
4
Occurrence
U
Diomedeidae
Gibson's albatross
Tristan albatross
E, M
Diomedeidae
Diomedea exulans
wandering albatross
VM
Procellariidae
Halobaena caerulea
blue petrel
Southern giant-petrel
V, M
Procellariidae
Macronectes halli
Northern giant-petrel
V, M
Procellariidae
Pterodroma mollis
Soft-plumaged petrel
Yellow-nosed albatross
Procellariidae

Shy albatross
V, M
Family Name
Procellariidae
Black-browed albatross
EPBC
5
Status
V, M
Procellariidae
Procellariidae
5
6
E, M
V, M
islands in New Zealand.

The Tristan albatross is a marine, pelagic seabird. It forages in
open water in the Atlantic Ocean near the Cape of Good Hope,
South Africa. It sleeps and rests on ocean waters when not
breeding. It is not recorded as breeding in Australia
The wandering albatross is marine, pelagic and aerial. It does not
nest on the Australian mainland but does breed on Macquarie
Island.
The blue petrel is marine pelagic species of the Sub-antarctic and
Antarctic seas.
The southern giant-petrel is marine pelagic species that occurs in
Antarctic to subtropical waters. The species breeds on the Antarctic
Continent, Peninsula and islands, and on sub-antarctic islands and
South America
The northern giant-petrel is marine and oceanic. It mainly occurs in
sub-Antarctic waters, but regularly occurs in Antarctic waters of the
southwestern Indian Ocean, the Drake Passage and west of the
Antarctic Peninsula
The soft-plumaged petrel is a marine, oceanic species and are
mainly sub-antarctic.
The Indian yellow-nosed albatross is a marine bird, located in
subtropical and warmer sub-antarctic waters, but is most abundant
over the warmer parts of the subtropical zone. The Indian Yellownosed albatross breeds on islands of the southern Indian Ocean
The shy albatross is a marine species occurring in subantarctic and
subtropical waters, reaching the tropics in the cool Humboldt
Current off South America. The species occurs both inshore and
offshore and does enter harbours and bays. It is the only albatross
that breeds in Australia with breeding recorded off Tasmania.
Preferred Habitat
The Black-browed Albatross is a marine species that inhabits
Antarctic, subantarctic and temperate waters and occasionally
enters the tropics. The Black-browed Albatross breeds on

U
U
U
U
Likelihood of
6
Occurrence
U
Ardeidae
Ardea modesta
Great egret
Ardeidae
Ardea ibis
Cattle egret
Accipitridae
White-bellied sea-eagle
Family Name
Apodidae
Apus pacificus
Fork-tailed swift
EPBC
7
Status
M
7
8
subantarctic and peri-antarctic islands and is rarely sighted near

land away from its nesting areas
The Eastern Great Egret has been reported in a wide range of
wetland habitats (for example inland and coastal, freshwater and
saline, permanent and ephemeral, open and vegetated, large and
small, natural and artificial). These include swamps and marshes;
margins of rivers and lakes; damp or flooded grasslands, pastures
or agricultural lands; reservoirs; sewage treatment ponds; drainage
channels; salt pans and salt lakes; salt marshes; estuarine
mudflats, tidal streams; mangrove swamps; coastal lagoons; and
offshore reefs.
The Cattle Egret occurs in tropical and temperate grasslands,
wooded lands and terrestrial wetlands. It has occasionally been
seen in arid and semi-arid regions however this is extremely rare.
High numbers have been observed in moist, low-lying poorly
drained pastures with an abundance of high grass; it avoids low
grass pastures. It has been recorded on earthen dam walls and
ploughed fields. It is commonly associated with the habitats of farm
animals, particularly cattle, but also pigs, sheep, horses and deer.
The Cattle Egret is known to follow earth-moving machinery and
has been located at rubbish tips. It uses predominately shallow,
open and fresh wetlands including meadows and swamps with low
emergent vegetation and abundant aquatic flora. They have
sometimes been observed in swamps with tall emergent vegetation.
The White-bellied Sea-Eagle is found in coastal habitats (especially
those close to the sea-shore) and around terrestrial wetlands in
tropical and temperate regions of mainland Australia and its
offshore islands. The habitats occupied by the sea-eagle are
characterised by the presence of large areas of open water (larger
rivers, swamps, lakes, the sea). Birds have been recorded in (or
flying over) a variety of terrestrial habitats.
Preferred Habitat
The Fork-tailed Swift is almost exclusively aerial, flying from less
then 1 m to at least 300 m above ground and probably much higher.

Likelihood of
8
Occurrence
F
Meropidae
Merops ornatus
Rainbow bee-eater
Scolopacidae
Actitis hypoleucos
Common sandpiper
Family Name
EPBC
9
Status
In Australia, they mostly occur over inland plains but sometimes

above foothills or in coastal areas. In Western Australia, there are
sparsely scattered records of the Fork-tailed Swift along the south
coast, ranging from near the Eyre Bird Observatory and west to
Denmark. They are widespread in coastal and sub-coastal areas
between Augusta and Carnarvon, including some on nearshore and
offshore islands. They are scattered along the coast from southwest Pilbara to the north and east Kimberley region, near
Wyndham. There are sparsely scattered inland records, especially
in the Wheatbelt, from Lake Annean and Wittenoom.
The Rainbow Bee-eater occurs mainly in open forests and
woodlands, shrublands, and in various cleared or semi-cleared
habitats, including farmland and areas of human habitation. It
usually occurs in open, cleared or lightly-timbered areas that are
often, but not always, located in close proximity to permanent water.
It also occurs in inland and coastal sand dune systems, and in
mangroves in northern Australia, and has been recorded in various
other habitat types including heathland, sedgeland, vine forest and
vine thicket, and on beaches.
The Common sandpiper mainly breeds in parts of Europe and Asia,
and occasionally Africa. The population that migrates to Australia
breeds in the Russian far east. It occurs in south western Australia
as a non breeding migrant The species utilises a wide range of
coastal wetlands and some inland wetlands, with varying levels of
salinity, and is mostly found around muddy margins or rocky shores
and rarely on mudflats. The Common Sandpiper has been recorded
in estuaries and deltas of streams, as well as on banks farther
upstream; around lakes, pools, billabongs, reservoirs, dams and
claypans, and occasionally piers and jetties. The muddy margins
utilised by the species are often narrow, and may be steep. The
species is often associated with mangroves, and sometimes found
in areas of mud littered with rocks or snags.
Preferred Habitat
FISH
9

10
Likelihood of
10
Occurrence
Nannopercidae
Balston's pygmy perch
Carcharhinidae
Carcharias taurus (Grey nurse

shark (west coast population))
Lamnidae
Great white shark
V, M
Rhincodontidae
Rhincodon typus
Whale shark
V, M
Family Name
EPBC
11
Status
Blue whale
E, M
MAMMALS
Balaenopteridae
11
12
Balston's pygmy perch inhabits acidic, tannin-stained freshwater

pools, streams and lakes in peat flats within 30 km of the coast of
south-west Western Australia, preferring shallow water, and
commonly associated with tall sedge thickets and inundated
riparian vegetation.
Grey nurse sharks occur in or near deep sandy-bottomed gutters or
rocky caves, and in the vicinity of inshore rocky reefs and islands.
The species has been recorded at varying depths, but is generally
found between 1540 m. Grey nurse sharks often occur at
aggregation sites. Numerous sightings occur in the Cape
Naturaliste area, however, the sharks rarely utilise marine habitats
such as those at the site of the proposed project.
Great white sharks are widely but not evenly distributed in
Australian waters. Areas where white shark observations are more
frequent include waters in and around some fur seal and sea lion
colonies such as the Neptune Islands (South Australia), areas of
the Great Australian Bight, the Recherche Archipelago and the
islands off the lower west coast of Western Australia. Most white
shark movements and activities in Australian waters occur between
the coast and the 100 m depth contour.
The Whale Shark is an oceanic and coastal, tropical to warmtemperate pelagic shark. It is often seen far offshore, but also
comes close inshore and sometimes enters lagoons of coral atolls.
Whale Sharks are generally found in areas where the surface
temperature is 2125 C, preferably with cold water of 17 C or less
upwelling into it. No whale shark aggregation areas have been
identified in south Western Australia.
Preferred Habitat
Blue whales are considered a cosmopolitan species and range from

polar to tropical waters. There are a number of blue whale feeding
locations along the Australian Coast including Geographe Bay and
the Perth Canyon. Within Geographe Bay, blue whales are
observed primarily in the southern section of the shallow bay

Likelihood of
12
Occurrence
Balaenidae
Eubalaena australis
Southern right whale
E, M
Balaenopteridae
Humpback whale
V, M
Family Name
Balaenopteridae
Balaenoptera edeni
Bryde's whale
EPBC
13
Status
M
Neobalaenidae
Caperea marginata
Pygmy right whale
13
14
adjacent to Cape Naturaliste, which is a resting point during the

slow transit west through the bay. Observations frequently occur
OctoberDecember in southern Geographe Bay where maximum
water depth is 3550 m. The whales are regularly sighted in depths
of 1030 m and as close as 200 m from the Cape.
Southern right whales are seasonally present on the Australian
coast between about May to November, and have been recorded in
the coastal waters of all Australian states except the Northern
Territory. The entire coastline from Kangaroo Island westward and
south of the Perth Canyon is thought to be an important migratory
pathway. Important calving areas in Western Australia includes:
Doubtful Island Bay (including the Point Ann to Point Charles area),
Israelite Bay area, Twilight Cove, Flinders Bay, Albany to Cape
Riche area and Yokinup Bay to Cape Arid area.
Humpback whales migrate annually between their summer feeding
grounds in Antarctica to their tropical and subtropical breeding
grounds in winter. In general, humpback whales are sighted in
southern Australian waters in May and migrate slowly up the east
and west coasts. By October, most whales have started their
southward migration and sightings are rarer after November.
Humpback whales migrate through coastal areas between
Esperance and Kalbarri and rest in the following three areas: waters
between the Houtman Abrolhos Islands and the coast near
Geraldton; waters from Geographe Bay to Rottnest Island; and,
waters to the east of Augusta.
Preferred Habitat
Insufficient information exists as to how Bryde's Whales use their
habitat, as no specific feeding or breeding grounds have been
discovered off Australia. There are few reliable records of the
species from Western Australia.
Pygmy right whales have primarily been recorded in areas
associated with upwellings and with high zooplankton abundance,
which constitute their main prey. A paucity of sightings of live
Pygmy right whales has led to a limited understanding of the

Likelihood of
14
Occurrence
U
Delphinidae
Dusky dolphin
Delphinidae
Orcinus orca
Killer whale
Dasyuridae
Dasyurus geoffroii
Western quoll
Family Name
Otariidae
Neophoca cinerea
Australian sea-lion
EPBC
15
Status
V
Petauridae
Western ringtail possum
Macropodidae
Setonix brachyurus
Quokka
15
16
species' non-biological habitat. They appear to have a circumpolar

distribution, preferring water temperatures of between 5 C and 20
C
Dusky dolphins occur mostly in temperate and sub-Antarctic waters.
They are considered to primarily inhabit inshore waters but may
also be pelagic at times. In Australia, Dusky Dolphins are known
from only 13 reports since 1828.
The preferred habitat of killer whales includes oceanic, pelagic and
neritic (relatively shallow waters over the continental shelf) regions,
in both warm and cold waters. They may be more common in cold,
deep waters, but off Australia, Killer Whales are most often seen
along the continental slope and on the shelf, particularly near seal
colonies.
Western quoll previously occupied habitat in a variety of climatic
zones across Australia, but are now restricted to the south-west of
Western Australia. Western quoll currently inhabit most kinds of
wooded habitat within its current range including eucalypt forest
(especially Jarrah, Eucalyptus marginata), dry woodland and mallee
shrublands.
Preferred Habitat
Australian sea lions feed on the continental shelf in the region, most
commonly in depths of 20100 m. The species is almost entirely
confined to Southern Western Australia and South Australia but is
more abundant in the latter.
Western ringtail possums occur in and near coastal Peppermint
Tree (Agonis flexuosa) forest and Tuart (Eucalyptus
gomphocephala) dominated forest with a Peppermint Tree
understorey.
The main habitat for mainland populations of the quokka is dense
streamside vegetation, but the species is also found in a variety of
habitats ranging from heaths and shrublands on the mainland coast
and both offshore islands to Agonis linearifolia-dominated swamps
in the Jarrah (Eucalyptus marginata) forest. Habitat for this species

Likelihood of
16
Occurrence
P
also includes swamp shrublands, swordgrass-dominated

understorey and regrowth areas of the Karri (E. diversicolor) forest.
PLANTS
Epacridaceae
Andersonia gracilis
Slender Andersonia
Andersonia gracilis is currently known from the Badgingarra,

Dandaragan and Kenwick areas where it is found on seasonally
damp, black sandy clay flats near or on the margins of swamps,
often on duplex soils supporting low open heath vegetation with
species such as Calothamnus hirsutus, Verticordia densiflora and
Kunzea recurva over sedges. The habitat critical to the survival of
Andersonia gracilis includes the remnant vegetation in which
important populations occur, and areas of similar habitat (i. e.
winter-wet areas of black, sandy clay flats of open, low heath over
sedges).
Family Name
Preferred Habitat
Apiaceae
Ironstone Brachyscias
EPBC
17
Status
CE
Likelihood of
18
Occurrence
U
Orchidaceae
Caladenia huegelii
King spider-orchid
Centrolepidaceae
Matted Centrolepis
Darwinia foetida
Muchea Bell
Myrtaceae
17
18
CE
Ironstone Brachyscias is endemic to ironstone soils in the Busselton

region. It grows in winter-wet clay over ironstone in open to tall
shrubland.
The king spider-orchid grows in well-drained, deep sandy soils in
low mixed woodlands of Coast Banksia (Banksia attenuata),
Firewood Banksia (B. menziesii), Holly-leaved Banksia (Banksia
ilicifolia), Western Sheoak (Allocasuarina fraseriana) and Jarrah
(Eucalyptus marginata). It tends to favour areas of lush
undergrowth
Centrolepis caespitosa occurs in winter-wet clay pans dominated by
low shrubs and sedges
Muchea bell occurs in grey-white sand on swampy, seasonally wet
sites under Regelia inops and Kunzea recurva tall shrubland, over
Pink-flowered Myrtle (Hypocalymma angustifolium) low shrubland
or low Melaleuca spp. shrubland.

U
U
Orchidaceae
Drakaea micrantha
Dwarf Hammer-orchid
Myrtaceae
Verticordia fimbrilepis subsp.

Fimbrilepis
Shy featherflower
Caretta caretta
Loggerhead turtle
E, M
Family Name
Cheloniidae
Chelonia mydas
Green Turtle
EPBC
19
Status
V, M
REPTILES
Cheloniidae
19
20
The Dwarf hammer-orchid occurs in infertile grey sands, in Jarrah

(Eucalyptus marginata) and Common Sheoak (Allocasuarina
fraseriana) woodland or forest associated with Banksia species. It is
often found under thickets of Spearwood (Kunzea ericifolia) with the
Flying Duck-orchid (Paracaleana nigrita) and other Drakaea
species. The Dwarf Hammer-orchid is usually found on cleared
firebreaks or open sandy patches that have been disturbed, where
competition from other plants has been removed.
The shy featherflower occurs in low heath in brown sandy loam
around outcropping granite. It is currently known from two
populations in Albany and on the Kent River
In Australia, loggerhead turtles nest on open, sandy beaches in

sub-tropical and tropical regions. No nesting activity is known from
the region of the proposed project. Adults and large juveniles
inhabit environments with both hard and soft substrata, including
rocky and coral reefs. Loggerhead turtles are one of the most
commonly sighted turtles along the southern Western Australian
coast, with resident adult and large subadult turtles sometimes
found in the Perth region between Rottnest Island and Geographe
Bay. The region is considered to be a nesting migration pathway for
reproductive adults.
Preferred Habitat
Green Turtles nest, forage and migrate across tropical northern

Australia. They usually occur between the 20C isotherms, although
individuals can stray into temperate waters, and immature green
turtles have been recorded foraging in water temperatures of 15 C.
Nesting occurs on beaches, but no nesting activity is known from
the region of the proposed project. Adult Green Turtles eat mainly
seagrass and algae, although they will occasionally eat other items.

Likelihood of
20
Occurrence
P
Dermochelyidae
Leatherback Turtle
E, M
The Leatherback Turtles is a highly pelagic species, venturing close

to shore mainly during the nesting season No major breeding
aggregation sites have been recorded in Australia for this species.
Southern Western Australia is important foraging habitat for this
species, however most foraging occurs around and beyond the
continental shelf which is remote from the project location.
Appendix 7.B: Review of Marine Megafauna
Appendix 7.C: Review of Commercial and Recreational

Fishing in the Bunbury Region
Appendix 7.D: Humpback Whale Migration Route near

Geographe Bay and the Project area (modified from
Jenner et al. 2001)
Humpback Whale Migration Route near Geographe Bay and the Project area (modified from Jenner et al. 2001).
Appendix 7.E: Underwater Noise Modelling
Development of Coal Handling and Export Facility at Berth 14

Bunbury Port
Underwater Construction Noise Impact Assessment
Report Number 675.10110+R1
15 November 2011
Wave Solutions
Lvl 1, 475 Scarborough Beach Road
OSBORNE PARK WA 6017
Version: Revision 0
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port
Report Number 675.10110-R1

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 2

Bunbury Port
PREPARED BY:
SLR Consulting Australia Pty Ltd
ABN 29 001 584 612
2 Lincoln Street Lane Cove NSW 2066 Australia

(PO Box 176 Lane Cove NSW 1595 Australia)
T: 61 2 9427 8100 F: 61 2 9427 8200
E: sydney@slrconsulting.com www.slrconsulting.com
DOCUMENT CONTROL
Reference
Status
Date
Prepared
Checked
Authorised
675.10110-R1
Revision 0
15 November 2011
Briony Croft
Andrew Parker
Andrew Parker
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 3
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
This report describes an assessment of the potential underwater noise impacts of construction
activities associated with the proposed expansion of Bunbury Port. The proposed expansion consists
of the construction of a new berth, Berth 14, in the Inner Harbour. The construction scenarios that
have been assessed are rock fracturing using drilling and blasting methods, dredging operations (both
cutter suction dredging and backhoe dredging) and sheet piling. Basalt rock is known to underlay
marine sediments in the Bunbury Inner Harbour and along the shipping channel. At this early stage of
the Project, it is unclear if basalt rock fracturing by blasting will be required in the Berth 14 pocket.
However, a conservative approach to include potential blasting impacts has been adopted in the
overall underwater construction noise assessment and consideration of potential mitigation measures.
This enables greater certainty in the prediction of Project specific environmental outcomes for marine
fauna as required by the Western Australia EPA.
The assessment process for the determinination of underwater noise impacts from blasting and other
construction scenarios has been undertaken in the following stages:
1
Identification of likely source noise levels for the project construction activities. Besides the level
of the sound, other parameters such as its frequency content, repetition rate and duration of
exposure has been considered
Identification of appropriate noise impact criteria and thresholds for marine fauna, particularly for
dolphins
Prediction of the underwater noise transmission loss and hence the noise levels across the
Project area as a result of the construction activities
Identification of the area of exceedance of the noise impact criteria and thresholds
There are inherent difficulties in predicting and mitigating longer term impacts of construction noise on
animal behavior. Therefore this impact assessment concentrates on modelling immediate short-term
physical impacts on marine fauna and does not attempt to predict longer term behavioural responses.
The assessment of underwater noise indicates that for most construction scenarios (with the exception
of blasting), adverse short-term impacts on marine fauna are not expected away from the immediate
vicinity of the works. Blasting noise has the potential to impact on marine fauna at distances of up to
1000 m from the blast location, if blasting occurs near the entrance to the inner harbour. However, the
impact of blasting on Koombana Bay is reduced for potential blasting locations further inside the inner
harbour and nearer the northern end of the Berth 14 area. The predicted noise impacts for each
construction scenario are summarised as follows in terms of the Exceedance Zone (the area inside
which marine mammals may experience TTS, or temporary hearing damage):
Construction Scenario
Maximum Distance From Blast Location to Edge of Exceedance Zone

Worst Case Source Location
Representative Source Location
Blasting
990 m
630 m
Piling
20 m
20 m
<1m
<1m
Backhoe Dredging
<1m
<1m
Drilling
<1m
<1m
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 4
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
The following figures show the Exceedance Zones predicted for two blast locations intended to
represent the worst case and a more representative or probable blasting location if required for the
Project (noting that blasting may also occur at other locations inside the berth footprint). In each of
these figures, the outer shaded area indicates area where marine mammals may experience
temporary hearing loss (TTS). The inner shaded area indicates area where marine mammals may
experience permanent hearing loss or other injury.
Worst Case Blast Location

Exceedance Zone (TTS)
Permanent Injury Zone
Representative Blast Location

Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 5
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
The predicted blasting impacts require consideration and implementation of blast noise mitigation and
management measures, based on the Exceedance Zone identified in this assessment.
Detonation of the blast should not occur if a marine mammal or swimming bird is detected within the
Inner Harbour or the Exceedance Zone and should be delayed until the animals move, or are moved,
out of the Zone. A programme of marine mammal detection would be used to manage the blasting
works, if required and to allow a go or no-go decision to be made prior to each blast.
In addition to the exclusion zone, the following recommendations are made to minimise the risk of
adverse impacts of underwater blasting on dolphins:
Schedule construction work for periods of the year when dolphins are less numerous in
Koombana Bay. In particular, avoid blasting in peak calving months (between November and
April) when dolphins may be more vulnerable to disturbance. The timing of blasting should be
determined in consultation with dolphin experts, as calving may occur during several periods of
the year.
Careful planning of the blast programme to minimise the size of the charge. During the initial
blasting, an MIC not exceeding 28 kg (ANFO equivalent) should be used, with a view to ramping
up the peak underwater pressure pulse while monitoring blast pressure levels.
Where practicable, scheduling of blasting should aim to begin works in locations where impacts
on Koombana Bay are minimised due to shielding by the land mass.
These recommendations are intended to allow a period of blast monitoring at the commencement of
the blasting works to confirm the predicted noise levels and impacts and to verify the noise modelling.
It is noted that this assessment is based on a number of assumptions about construction equipment,
construction scenarios and construction noise source levels. In addition, the prediction of underwater
noise propagation is based on a numerical model. While every effort has been made to ensure that
the model is representative of Bunbury Harbour and Koombana Bay, all results should be treated with
caution until the predicted transmission losses can be verified on site.
Finally, while the identification of marine fauna impact thresholds is based on the best available
information, it is recognised that variation in the responses of different species and individual animals
to underwater noise are likely. In particular, behavioural responses of animals are difficult to predict
and it is possible that there will be longer term impacts on marine fauna that extend beyond the
identified Exceedance Zones in this report. The possibility of conducting longer term dolphin
monitoring and observation in consultation with dolphin specialists should therefore be considered, for
example in conjunction with the existing South West Marine Research Program research partnership.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................9
1.1
Project Background ..............................................................................................................9
1.2
Project Description ...............................................................................................................9
1.3
Underwater Noise Assessment Overview and Objectives ................................................11
EXISTING NOISE ENVIRONMENT .............................................................................................12

2.1
Maintenance Dredging .......................................................................................................12
2.2
Shipping Movements .........................................................................................................12
PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES AND SOURCE NOISE LEVELS ..........................13

3.1
Drilling from Platforms........................................................................................................14
3.2
Blasting ..............................................................................................................................14
3.3
Cutter Suction Dredging .....................................................................................................15
3.4
Backhoe Dredging .............................................................................................................15
3.5
Piling ..................................................................................................................................15
3.6
Summary of Construction Source Noise Levels ................................................................15
MARINE FAUNA UNDERWATER NOISE IMPACT CRITERIA ..................................................16

4.1
Overview ............................................................................................................................16
4.2
Criteria and Thresholds for Impact of Noise on Marine Life ..............................................17

4.2.1 Mortality .................................................................................................................17
4.2.2 Injury ......................................................................................................................18
4.2.3 Temporary Hearing Damage .................................................................................19
4.2.4 Behavioural Modification .......................................................................................20
4.3
Summary of Criteria and Thresholds .................................................................................21
4.4
Controlling Criteria .............................................................................................................22
UNDERWATER NOISE MODELLING .........................................................................................22

5.1
Objectives ..........................................................................................................................22
5.2
Transmission Loss .............................................................................................................22
5.3
Modelling Software ............................................................................................................23
5.4
Modelling Inputs and Assumptions ....................................................................................24
5.5
Source Locations ...............................................................................................................24

Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.6
Comparison of Predicted Transmission Loss with Geometric Spreading..........................25
5.7
Predicted Noise Impacts Worst Case .............................................................................25
5.8
Predicted Noise Impacts Typical.....................................................................................25
5.9
Summary of Predicted Noise Impacts................................................................................25
NOISE MITIGATION AND MANAGEMENT OPTIONS ...............................................................25

6.1
Blasting Location Planning .................................................................................................25
6.2
Potential Mitigation Measures ............................................................................................25
6.3
Monitoring ..........................................................................................................................25
6.3.1 Visual Monitoring ...................................................................................................25
6.3.2 Passive Acoustic Monitoring (PAM) ......................................................................25
6.3.3 Noise Model Validation and Blast Monitoring ........................................................25
6.3.4 Longer Term Behavioural Monitoring ....................................................................25
CONCLUSION .............................................................................................................................25
CLOSURE ....................................................................................................................................25
TABLES
Table 1
Table 2
Table 3
Table 4
Table 5
Table 6
Table 7
Berth Pocket Excavation Requirements

Summary of Noise Produced by Shipping and Levels at 1 m
Source Noise Levels by Scenario
Underwater Noise Impact Physical Injury and Hearing DamageThresholds
Model Input Parameters
Summary of Predicted Noise Impacts
10
13
16
21
24
25
25
Locality Plan
Conceptual design of the Berth 14 Project
Scale of Effects from Underwater Noise on Marine Life
Potential Zones of Impact on Marine Life from Underwater Blasting
Noise Modelling Assumed Source Locations
Predicted Transmission Loss vs Geometric Spreading
Location 1 Blasting Underwater Noise Criterion Exceedance Area
9
10
11
17
25
25
25
25
FIGURES
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
Figure 5
Figure 6
Figure 7
Figure 8
APPENDICES
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Review of Noise Impacts on Marine Fauna

Review of Underwater Construction Noise Sources
Underwater Noise Contours
References
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 8
GLOSSARY
Abbreviation
Description
1Pa
Micropascal
ANFO
Ammonium Nitrate Fuel Oil
BPIH
Bunbury Port Inner Harbour
CSD
dB
Decibel
EFD
Energy Flux Density
EPA
Environmental Protection Authority
Exceedance Zone
The area inside which marine mammals may experience short-term physical impacts
(Temporary Threshold Shift) during a noisy construction activity
Hz
Hertz
kg
Kilogram
kHz
Kilohertz
kPa
Kilopascal
LAT
Lowest Astronomical Tide
LOA
Length Overall
LRAPL
Metre
MIC
Maximum Instantaneous Charge
MMO
Marine Mammal Observer
MMPE
Monterey-Miami Parabolic Equation
ms
Millisecond
Pa
Pascal
PAM
Passive Acoustic Monitoring
PTS
Permanent Threshold Shift
Distance from noise source to receiver
RMS
Root Mean Square
Second
SEL
Sound Exposure Level (dB re 1 Pa .s). The total sound energy contained in a noise
event.
Source Level
The Sound Pressure Level referenced to a defined distance from the noise source
(normally 1 m).
SPL
Sound Pressure Level (dB re 1 Pa). The peak SPL is the maximum instantaneous sound
pressure level occurring during a noise event.
TL
Transmission Loss
TNT
Tri-Nitro Toluene
TSHD
Trailer Suction Hopper Dredging
TTS
Temporary Threshold Shift
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 9
INTRODUCTION
SLR Consulting Australia Pty Ltd has been commissioned by Wave Solutions to assess the potential
underwater noise impacts of construction activities associated with the proposed expansion of
Bunbury Port. The proposed expansion consists of the construction of a new berth, Berth 14, in the
Inner Harbour. The port expansion will require dredging operations and piling works, with the potential
for drill and blast operations, which have the potential to result in noise impacts on marine fauna in
Koombana Bay. A location map of the project area is shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1
1.1
Locality Plan
Project Background
Lanco Resources Australia Pty Ltd (LRAPL) is proposing to establish a coal export facility by
developing Berth 14 of the Bunbury Port Inner Harbour (BPIH). The mine providing the coal resource
is located within the Collie Basin of Western Australia. The Port project will occupy an area of
approximately 50 hectares and will be comprised of two main components: Berth 14; and the materials
handling component. The coal export facility is proposed to be operational by the end of 2013 and
would be progressively ramped up to its full capacity.
The LRAPL proposal will provide significant economic and employment opportunities for the Bunbury
Region and assist in realising the expansion objectives of the port in accordance with the Structure
Plan for the BPIH.
1.2
Project Description
The proposed infrastructure required to support the proposal includes:
Dredging of the Berth 14 approach and Berth 14 pocket
Construction of Berth 14 to accommodate Bulk Carriers
Materials handling infrastructure including train unloading, conveyers, stackers, storage and ship
loading facilities.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 10
The project will require deepening the seabed at Berth 14 through dredging of lower strength material
and potential drilling and fracturing of some underlying basalt rock by blasting. The berth pocket is
proposed to be dredged to -12.7 m Lowest Astronomincal Tide (LAT) with navigational areas dredged
to -12.2 m LAT to accommodate bulk carriers with a maximum length overall (LOA) of 225 m. Until
further geotechnical investigations are conducted later in the Project design phase, the requirement for
rock fracturing is unclear. Hence a conservative approach has been adopted and an allowance of
3
20,000 m of rock excavation may be required. The indicative excavation requirements and duration
for the development of the Berth pocket are shown in Table 1.
Table 1
Berth Pocket Excavation Requirements

3
Material
Indicative Duration
Dry excavation
800,000
40 weeks
Marine Sediments
1,150,000
Weakly Cemented
590,000
Cemented Material
168,000
Basalt Rock
20,000
3 weeks rock fracturing and 2 weeks removal
In addition, the development will require construction of a rock armour seawall 450 m in length, with a
pile wall along the berth length and at the basin entrance corners. Approximately 350 m of additional
rock armour slope protection would be required at the entrance to the basin. Additional activities
would be required for construction of the wharf facility. The conceptual design of the Berth 14 Project
is shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2
Conceptual design of the Berth 14 Project
Reproduced from Wave Solutions Draft Hydrodynamic Modelling Plan
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port
1.3

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 11
Underwater Noise Assessment Overview and Objectives
In order to provide an objective and quantitative assessment of the range and severity of impacts from
blasting and other underwater noise sources, it is necessary to be able to estimate, measure or predict
the following parameters:
The source noise level.
The transmission loss, that is, the rate at which sound from the source is attenuated as it
propagates underwater.
The impact threshold, that is, the level of sound at which a particular impact such as death, injury,
or annoyance is experienced by a particular species.
The first two parameters define the sound level at all points in the water for the various construction
activities. The impact threshold is used to determine the impacts of underwater noise on marine
fauna.
The potential impact of man-made noise on a marine animal depends on the level of noise exposure.
At moderate exposure levels, underwater noise may cause an overt change in the behaviour of a
marine animal. At high exposure levels, underwater noise can induce a reduction in hearing sensitivity
or even physical injury. The impact of noise exposure generally depends on a number of factors
relating to the physical and spectral characteristics of the sound (e.g., the intensity, peak pressure,
frequency, duration, duty cycle), and relating to the animal under consideration (e.g., hearing
sensitivity, age, gender, behavioural status, prior exposures). The type and level of the impact also
depends on whether the noise consists of single-pulse, multiple-pulse or non-pulsed sounds (Southall
et al., 2007).
A scale of effects of underwater noise on marine life is presented in Figure 3. The following three
effect groups are of major significance:
Lethal effects: life threatening physical injuries, including death and severe physical
injury. These are often associated with the impulse of a blast wave, although peak
pressure is also sometimes used.
Sub-lethal effects: non-life threatening physical injuries, and in particular auditory

damage, which is often associated with the peak pressure of a blast.
Behavioural effects: include perceptual, stress and indirect effects of which the most
common is avoidance of an area.
Figure 3
Scale of Effects from Underwater Noise on Marine Life
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 12
The objective of this assessment is to develop a model of underwater noise propagation for the site,
and to use this model to predict underwater noise levels across the project area for different
construction scenarios. The predicted noise levels will be assessed against identified criteria for
impacts on marine fauna, with the aim of identifying zones where marine fauna may experience
immediate adverse impacts in the absence of mitigation measures.
While the identification of marine fauna impact thresholds is based on the best available information, it
is recognised that variation in the responses of different species and individual animals to underwater
noise are likely. In particular, behavioural responses of animals are difficult to predict. In some cases
the adverse impacts of behavioural responses such as startling may be worse than TTS, for example if
a dolphin calf is separated from its mother. It is possible that there will be longer term impacts on
marine fauna that extend beyond the identified Exceedance Zones in this report.
EXISTING NOISE ENVIRONMENT
Background or ambient noise in the ocean is caused by a number of sources, including shipping noise
or industrial noise sources, wind and weather and noise from biological sources including snapping
shrimp.
The level of background or ambient noise determines if a particular noise source is audible to marine
fauna at a particular location. At Bunbury, existing anthropogenic underwater noise sources include
noise from shipping and boating activities (Jensen et al, 2009). Typical ambient noise levels in
Koombana Bay are likely to vary considerably with changes in shipping traffic and weather conditions
and during activities such as periodic maintenance dredging.
2.1
Maintenance dredging has historically been undertaken on a three year cycle in the Outer Harbour
and Main Channel to the Inner Harbour (Shore Coastal report SCR0905 Bunbury Harbour Siltation
Investigation dated August 2009). There have been 12 maintenance dredging campaigns at Bunbury
since 1988. These have generally been undertaken using floating Trailer Suction Hopper Dredges
3
(TSHD) at three to four yearly intervals, with dredging volumes ranging from 340,000 m to
3
660,000 m . In recent years, there have been four smaller campaigns using the Volvox Anglia, with
3
3
dredge volumes ranging from 30,000 m to 230,000 m .
There has been a large variety of trailer suction hopper dredges used for maintenance dredging at
Bunbury. Hopper capacities for the earlier campaigns were generally in the order of 5,000 m 3. Larger
dredges have been used in recent years, including the Pearl River with a hopper capacity of 24,000 m 3
in 2004 and the Lange Wapper with a capacity of 13,700 m3 in 2007. The larger dredging campaigns
in 1994, 1997, 2001, 2004 and 2007 have taken from 2 weeks up to 9 weeks. Duration is related to
the size of the vessel but is influenced by other factors such as weather, dredge area, depth and
nature of material and the disposal site. The earlier campaigns were all undertaken in autumn, whilst
the latest campaign (by the Lange Wapper) was undertaken in summer.
2.2
Shipping Movements
Vessels of all types and all sizes produce noise underwater and are well known contributors to the
overall ambient noise levels in the sea. During port facility construction, the propeller noise and
hydrodynamic noise from boats or ships underway and the hull radiated noise from stationary vessels
conducting works may be significant sources. In addition to this, navigational aids such as depth
sounders and side scan sonars radiate high level sound energy into the surrounding water when
operating. The noise sources associated with shipping activities can be summarised as follows:
Propeller noise including cavitation and propeller singing.
Propulsion machinery including engines (steam, diesel, gas turbine) and gears.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 13
Auxiliary machinery including generators, pumps, fans and blowers.
Hydrodynamic flow over the hull.
Cargo equipment including pumps, deck cranes and hydraulic lifts.
Depth finders and sonars.
A summary of dominant noise sources produced by shipping (including overall source levels and
frequencies) is provided in Table 2. While the dominant frequencies of many shipping noise sources
tend to be relatively low, higher frequencies may also be important when considering impacts on
marine mammals which hear much better at higher frequencies than at low frequencies (Madsen et al,
2006).
Table 2
Summary of Noise Produced by Shipping and Levels at 1 m
Type of Vessel
Dominant
Frequency
Source Level
(dB re. 1
Pa@1 m)
References
650cc Jetski
800 Hz 50 kHz
75 - 125
Evans and Nice, 1996
5 m Zodiac (rigid inflatable)
6.3 kHz
152
Malme et al., 1989
7 m outboard motor boat
630 Hz
156
Malme et al., 1989
Fishing boat
250 Hz 1 kHz
151
Greene, 1985
Fishing Trawler
1 kHz
158
Malme et al., 1989
Tug pulling empty barge
37 Hz
1 kHz
166
164
Buck and Chalfant, 1972;

Miles et al., 1989
Tug pulling loaded barge
1 kHz
5 kHz
170
161
Miles et al., 1989
34 m (twin diesel engine)

workboat
630 Hz
159
Malme et al., 1989
Tanker (135 m)
Tanker (179 m)
Supertanker (266 m)
Supertanker (340 m)
430 Hz
63 Hz
8 Hz
7 Hz
169
180
187
190

Ross, 1976;
Thiele and degaard,1983
Containership (219 m)
Containership (274 m)
Freighter (135 m)
33 Hz
8 Hz
41 Hz
181
181
172

Ross, 1976;
Thiele and degaard,1983
PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES AND SOURCE NOISE LEVELS
SLR Consulting has been provided with a proposed dredging methodology 2419-008-001-002
Indicative Dredge Plan for Modelling Purposes dated 8 August. This methodology is the basis of the
following construction scenarios, with the activities to be assessed being:
Drilling
Blasting
Backhoe Dredging
Piling
The following sections describe assumptions made as to construction activities and source levels for
each of the above scenarios.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port
3.1

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 14
Drilling from Platforms
Special equipment is required for the drilling and blasting of rock. A fixed platform supported above
water with extendable legs to the sea bed is used for the drilling and charging operations.
The platforms are typically equipped with two to three hydraulic drilling machines, which can be moved
horizontally on tracks in two directions for greater flexibility.
One of the most common methods presently in use for underwater drilling and blasting in swell
effected areas is the method of conducting the work from a stable, Self Elevating Platform (SEP). This
is the work method assumed to be implemented at the BPIH.
As a residual layer of overburden may cover the rock at BPIH, the OD method (ie Overburden Drilling)
is likely to be used. In this method, a set of steel tubes with ringbits is used to drill through the
overburden and a short distance into the bedrock. Drilling is then carried out through the tubes with
extension rods and a drill bit. When the hole is completed, the set of drill rods is withdrawn and plastic
tubes containing explosives and a detonator are inserted through the steel tube and the collar into the
drill hole. The drilling tube is then withdrawn and the plastic tube remains in the blasthole ready for
detonation.
Underwater noise measurements of drill and blast programs undertaken by SLR Consulting on
previous projects and current literature have been used to estimate the source levels for the proposed
drilling at BPIH.
3.2
Blasting
A four boom jack up marine drilling and blasting barge would be drilling 24 hours per day. Blasting
would be confined to daylight hours and the instantaneous charge limited to a maximum of 50 kg per
delay using precision rock fracturing techniques. Rock material may be used for construction fill or be
disposed of at a suitable site.
For noise modelling purposes, it has been assumed that each blast event will consist of up to 24
blastholes with 50kg MIC in each, a 60 ms delay between each detonation and that due diligence will
be followed with regard to confinement of the blasts (ie no unconfined blasts). It is assumed there will
be one blast event per day for the estimated duration of 3 weeks.
Underwater noise measurements of blasting programs using similar parameters as proposed here
have been undertaken by SLR Consulting on previous projects and have been used to estimate the
peak pressure and SEL source levels for the proposed blasts at BPIH (in addition to current literature
on the topic). It was found that the results agreed well with a source level for the blasting of
2
approximately SEL 231 dB re. 1 Pa .s@1 m and peak pressure 250 dB re. 1Pa@1 m.
It should be noted that the explosive used during the aforementioned blast measurements was
specified with a minimum velocity of detonation (VOD) of 3.4 km/s, nominal density 1.21 g/cc, Relative
Weight Strength of 121% and Relative Bulk Strength of 183% (to ANFO @ 0.8g/cc). The minimum
VOD quoted is based on unconfined test firing data. VOD will depend on application including
explosive density, blasthole diameter, temperature and degree of confinement. Should explosives be
used with a different specification, it is expected that the corresponding blast noise level would differ
and further assessment may be required. For example use of TNT explosive (explosive velocity
6900 m/s, density 1.654g/cc) may result in blast noise source levels of up to 279 dB re. 1Pa@1 m
peak pressure for 20kg TNT at 60 m depth (Greene et al, 1995), approximately 30 dB higher than
used in the acoustic model.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port
3.3

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 15
Cutter Suction Dredging (CSD) comprises of moored ships using a cutter head to loosen sediment,
suction pipes to collect sediment from the sea floor and discharge pipes to deposit to the discharge
site, which in this case is likely to be an adjacent self-propelled hopper barge.
The transmission of dredging underwater sound is dependent upon the type of substrate being
dredged, ambient suspended sediment loads (which tend to scatter and attenuate sound),
geomorphology of the waterway, hydrodynamic conditions, condition of the equipment, and the skill of
the dredge operator.
CSD produces relatively continuous sounds made by the cutterhead rotating through the substrate.
Typically, a cutter suction dredge in operation generates source levels of approximately 180 dB re.
1 Pa@1 m at frequencies centred around 100 Hz.
3.4
Backhoe Dredging
Clamshell/bucket/backhoe dredging is where the dredger scoops sand and gravel using the bucket(s)
and deposits this either at the discharge site or on a barge. As with CSD operations, the transmission
of dredging underwater sound is dependent upon the type of substrate being dredged, ambient
suspended sediment loads (which tend to scatter and attenuate sound), geomorphology of the
waterway, hydrodynamic conditions, condition of the equipment, and the skill of the dredge operator.
Bucket dredges have repetitive sequences of sounds, including winch, bucket impact, bucket closing
and bucket emptying.
3.5
Piling
Piling activities may encompass a wide range of operations, piling equipment, substrate types and
water depths etc, giving a wide range of possible noise source levels and transmission losses.
Typically, pile driving sounds underwater are characterised by multiple rapid increases and decreases
in sound pressure over time lasting approximately 300 to 500 ms. The peak pressure is the highest
absolute value of the measured waveform, and can be a negative or positive pressure peak. Most pile
driving acoustic energy is relatively low frequency (< 2000 Hz) and analysis of frequency spectra for
each pile condition indicates that most noise energy from pile driving is in the range of 80 to 1250 Hz.
Notwithstanding, significant noise energy can be produced up to 100 kHz during piling (Tougaard et al,
2009).
3.6
Summary of Construction Source Noise Levels
The source noise levels to be used in the assessment for the construction activities discussed in
Sections 3.1 to 3.5 are summarised in Table 3. These source levels represent SLR Consultings best
estimate based on the information available, as reviewed in Appendix B. As with shipping noise,
while the dominant frequencies of many construction noise sources tend to be relatively low, higher
frequencies may also be important when considering impacts on marine mammals.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port
Table 3

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 16
Source Noise Levels by Scenario
Scenario
Source Levels (dB re. 1 Pa@1 m)

2
Broadband
1/3 Octave Band Centre Frequencies (Hz)
45 Hz 7 kHz
50
100
200
500
1000
2000
Drilling
155
144
142
146
146
138
CSD Dredging
185
170
177
177
171
153
148
Backhoe Dredging
140
127
134
134
128
110
105
Continuous Sources
Transient Sources
Piling
200
174
Piling
peak 230
204
Blasting
231
Blasting
peak 250
190
220
189
219
187
217
186
216
182
212
Broadband
Broadband
Note 1: Sound Exposure Level (dB re 1 Pa .s@1 m)

Note 2: For clarity, not all 1/3 octave bands are listed in this table, however the model includes all 1/3 octave bands from
50 Hz to 5000 Hz.
2
MARINE FAUNA UNDERWATER NOISE IMPACT CRITERIA
4.1
Overview
To evaluate the severity of any impact of underwater noise on marine life, it is useful to define zones
or areas within which various effects are expected. The relevant zones (represented graphically in
Figure 4) are as follows:
The Mortality Zone is the smallest zone within which death, acute injury, or permanent hearing
loss is expected.
The Temporary Hearing Loss Zone is the zone within which adverse effects on marine life are
expected including non-injurious effects such as Tempory Threshold Shift (TTS).
The Responsiveness Zone is the larger zone within which animals are expected to respond
behaviourally to a noise source or to experience disturbance with potentially greater significance
on the short and long term.
The Audibility Zone is the zone within which the blasting sound is expected to be detectable by
the animal.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port
Figure 4
4.2

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 17
Potential Zones of Impact on Marine Life from Underwater Blasting
Criteria and Thresholds for Impact of Noise on Marine Life
This section summarises a review of the literature of noise impacts on marine life. A more detailed
review is attached as Appendix A.
4.2.1 Mortality
Marine Mammals
The mortality criterion for marine mammals is the onset of severe lung injury. This is conservative in
that it corresponds to a 1 % chance of mortal injury, and yet any animal experiencing onset of severe
lung injury is counted as a lethal take. The threshold is stated in terms of the Goertner (1982) lung
injury model based on the modified positive impulse with value indexed to 210 kPa-ms. Since the
Goertner approach depends on propagation, source/animal depths, and animal mass in a complex
way, the actual impulse value prediction is a complicated calculation. The acoustic mortality threshold
is derived from:
I(1%) = 296 (M/34)
Where,
and
1/3
I(1%) = minimum impulse for onset of mortality in kPa.ms

M
= animal mass in kg.
A conservative approach is to use the mass of a small mammal such as the calf dolphin (at 12.2 kg),
so that the threshold index is 210 kPa.ms.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 18
Sea Turtles
There is little experimental or theoretical data upon which to base mortality or acute injury criteria for
sea turtles (OKeeffe and Young, 1984; Young, 1991). Therefore, the mortality criterion for turtles
used in this assessment is identical to the 210 kPa.ms mortality threshold determined for small marine
mammals. This threshold assumes that sea turtle lungs and other gas-containing organs would be
similarly affected by shock waves and is conservative as it should generally overestimate the turtle
mortality impact (U.S. Dept of the Navy, 2001).
Fish
The mortality criterion for fish depends on the size and mass of the fish. A general mortality limit for
fish has been reported for values of lethal peak overpressures of 275 kPa - 344 kPa (229-231 dB
re. 1 OPa) for dynamite explosion (Rasmussen, 1967; Trasky, 1976).
A direct correlation was found between body mass and the received sound impulse which caused
50% mortality (Yelverton et al., 1975). The correlation was independent of peak overpressure, thus
indicating that sound energy may be more relevant than peak pressure in determining damage
thresholds. Based on the study data from Munday et al. (1986), impulse strength levels of
111 kPa.ms and 360 kPa.ms are responsible for 21% and 100% mortality, respectively.
More recent studies have shown that the Energy Flux Density (EFD) is a good predictor of damage to
fish for explosive blasts. EFD is the time integral of the squared pressure divided by the impedance in
2
values of dB re. 1 Pa .s. Because early studies of injury and mortality reported only peak pressure,
there is conflicting information in the literature since little or nothing is known about the temporal
characteristics of the waveform. For 50% mortality, the lethal EFD is reported to be approximately
2
208 dB re. 1 Pa .s for seawater (Sakaguchi et al., 1976; Wright, 1982).
4.2.2 Injury
Marine Mammals
There are established criteria for determining thresholds for non-lethal injury from underwater
explosions. For non-lethal injury from explosives, the criteria are established as the peak pressure
that will result in:
The onset of slight lung haemorrhage (Goertner, 1982). The impulse threshold associated with
onset of slight lung injury to a calf dolphin is 175 kPa.ms.
A 50% probability level for a rupture of the tympanic membrane (TM). The 50% probability of
eardrum rupture is considered as an injury criterion because it is a standard, statistically
meaningful measure that has been estimated in a variety of mammals (Ketten, 1995; Ketten,
1998). The threshold for TM rupture corresponds to a 50% rate of rupture and is stated in terms
2
of an EFD value of 205 dB re. 1 Pa .s.
This recognises that TM rupture is not necessarily a life-threatening injury, and indeed TM rupture is
not of concern for whales and dolphins as they do not have a TM. However, it is a useful index of
possible injury that is well-correlated with measures of permanent hearing impairment. Ketten (1998)
2
indicates a 30% incidence of Permanent Threshold Shift (PTS) at 205 dB re. 1 Pa .s. Southall et al.
(2007) state a possible PTS injury criteria for cetaceans exposed to pulsed noise sources of 198 dB
2
re. 1 Pa .s (M-Weighted Sound Exposure Level) or 230 dB re. 1 Pa (unweighted sound pressure
level).
M-Weighting is the filtering of noise to reflect the sensitivity of an animal to different frequencies, as
(like humans) animals do not hear equally well at all frequencies. Different M-Weighting filters exist for
different groups of marine mammals. For dolphins, the M-weighting filter is reasonably flat in the
frequency range from around 500 Hz up to 5 kHz.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 19
Sea Turtles
Sea turtles were intentionally exposed to underwater explosions during an experiment to determine
the extent of injuries from underwater explosion (O'Keeffe and Young, 1984; Klima et al., 1988). The
turtles were placed at 230 m, 365 m, 550 m, and 915 m from a simultaneous explosion of four 23 kg
unconfined charges. Using the prediction model in Richardson et al. (1995), the estimated peak
pressures at 230 m, 365 m, 550 m, and 915 m are 644 kPa, 392 kPa, 253 kPa and 147 kPa,
respectively. All turtles within 365 m of the explosion were unconscious, as was one loggerhead at
915 m. Turtles exposed at 230 m presented further injury suffering everted cloaca and vasodilation.
Unconscious turtles recovered when removed from the cages but would have certainly drowned if left
in the water.
Fish
There is a wide range of reported peak pressure thresholds related to injury on fish, and it is
recognised that the potential for injury for fish depends heavily on the size of the fish. A study by
McAnuff and Booren (1989) reports that the overpressure range from underwater confined blasting
associated with acute internal injury to fish ranged from 30 kPa to 150 kPa (209 dB to 223 dB
re. 1 OPa). Hirst and Rodhouse (2000) state that studies of caged fish indicate that received peak
pressure levels greater than 180 dB re. 1 OPa (1 kPa) from air guns and explosives produce significant
physiological damage to fish, ranging from ear and eye damage to swim bladder rupture and death,
although studies found variation in the level at which injury is severe. Some studies have found
minimal damage up to levels as high as 231 dB re. 1 OPa (354 kPa) (Weinhold and Weaver, 1973;
Dalen and Knutsen, 1987).
The Canadian Department of Fisheries and Oceans bases its criteria on studies showing that an
overpressure in excess of 100 kPa (220 dB re. 1 OPa) will result in injurious effects on fish (Wright,
1982). This is the criterion used in this assessment.
4.2.3 Temporary Hearing Damage

Marine Mammals
A criterion commonly used to represent the threshold for non-permanent impacts is the temporary
(auditory) threshold shift (TTS), which is a slight, recoverable loss of hearing sensitivity. A reported
2
criterion for TTS is 183 dB re. 1 Pa .s for cetaceans (Southall et al. 2007).
A second criterion used for estimating TTS threshold is a peak pressure of 83 kPa (218 dB re. 1 Pa)
cited by Ketten, 1995 as associated with a safe outer limit for minimal, recoverable auditory trauma.
This criterion was originally established for estimating the impact of large explosive to be employed for
open-water explosion and was introduced to provide a more conservative range for TTS when the
explosive or the animal approaches the sea surface (for which cases the explosive energy is reduced
but the peak pressure is not).
The determining factor as to which criterion governs is based on the explosive charge weight. For
smaller and confined detonations, the ranges for the two TTS thresholds may be quite different.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 20
Sea Turtles
In contrast to marine mammals, little is known about the role of sound and hearing in sea turtle
survival. There is no data for TTS or PTS in sea turtles. Ridgway et al. (1969) reported maximal
sensitivity for green sea turtles occurred at 300 Hz to 400 Hz, with a rapid decline in sensitivity for
lower and higher tones. Similarly, Moein et al., 1994 reported a hearing range of about 250 Hz to
1,000 Hz for loggerhead sea turtles, and Lenhardt, 1994 stated that maximal sensitivity in sea turtles
generally occurs in the range from 100 Hz to 800 Hz. Calculated in-water hearing threshold within the
useful range appear to be as high as 160 dB to 200 dB re. 1 Pa. Based on this information, the TTS
threshold for marine mammals using frequencies greater than 100 Hz should be conservative for sea
turtles.
Fish
Hastings and Popper (2005) tested three species after stimulation with five blasts of a seismic air gun.
The received mean peak pressure level was about 205 dB re. 1 OPa (18 kPa). The broad whitefish
did not exhibit TTS, whereas northern pike (Esox lucius) and lake chub (Couesius plumbeus) showed
10 dB to 15 dB of hearing loss and complete recovery within 24 hours after exposure.
While extrapolation between species must be done with considerable caution, this study suggests that
limited exposure to high-level sounds of some types does not result in death, and that fish hearing loss
can also be temporary.
4.2.4 Behavioural Modification

Marine Mammals
In areas beyond the temporary hearing loss zone, marine mammals may detect and respond to
underwater noise (Richardson et al., 1995). Underwater noise could then cause disruption to
behavioural patterns. Avoidance of vessels, construction areas, and dredging has been observed in
humpbacks and other baleen whale species (Richardson et al., 1995; Simmonds et al., 2004).
Humpback and other baleen whales typically react to sound at frequencies below 1 kHz (Richardson
et al., 1995), consistent with their hearing sensitivity. Humpbacks often avoid vessels approaching
nearer than about 2-4 km, and occasionally show aggression toward approaching vessels. McCauley
et al. (2000) found that humpbacks began to display avoidance to sound from seismic air guns at
calculated received sound levels of 140 dB re 1 OPa rms, and migrating humpbacks would not allow
the seismic vessel to approach any nearer when received levels reached 157-164 dB re 1 OPa rms.
Watkins (1986) found that humpback reactions to whale-watching boats changes over time from
variable, often negative responses to more positive responses including attraction to the boats.
The wide range of sound levels at which avoidance behaviours are observed reflects the fact that
mammals respond differently to sound levels depending on their activity at the time. Studies of
humpbacks, bowhead and grey whales (Richardson et al., 1995) indicate that whales are less
responsive when migrating or feeding than when suckling, resting or socialising.
Some researchers have shown longer-term adverse impacts on marine mammals exposed to longterm disturbance (Bejder et al, 2006; Lusseau and Bedjer 2007). These impacts may include a
decline in relative abundance.
The Australian Government Department of the Environment, Water, Heritage and the Arts background
paper to Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act Policy Statement 2.1 states the
following:
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 21
Qthe Australian west coast humpback whale population appears to be growing at a comparable rate
to the east coast population despite migrating along a region of much greater seismic activity
compared to the east coast. These factors are at least suggestive that exposure to seismic sounds is
unlikely to be having any large(scale detrimental population level impact on these animals.
Sea Turtles
Sea turtles are thought to be capable of hearing low frequency sounds, and it is assumed that sea
turtles may hear the brief acoustic signal created by an underwater blast. Evidence from air-gun
explosion experiment results from McCauley et al., 2000 suggests that sea-turtles may:
Show behavioural responses at a received peak pressure around 166 dB re. 1 OPa rms (0.3 kPa)
2
or 155 dB re. 1 Pa .s.
Show erratic swimming patterns and avoidance around 175 dB re. 1 OPa rms (0.8 kPa) or 164 dB
2
re. 1 Pa .s.
To date however, the available evidence on sea turtle responses to air-gun detonation is based on
very few observations, few individuals with a limited age span and few species.
Fish
Fish can hear and produce behavioural responses such as avoidance, alarm and startle reactions
(Popper and Fay, 1993). Hearing ability differs greatly among species. McCauley et al. (2000)
reported modelling studies of fish otoliths and examined otoliths of fish that had been exposed to a
single airgun and concluded that extreme movement of the otoliths would take place at received
sound pressure levels greater than 171 dB re. 1 OPa rms (0.5 kPa). Any behavioural response to lowfrequency sounds from blasting would be expected to be short term and reversible.
4.3
Summary of Criteria and Thresholds
Table 4 summarises the (non-behavioural) criteria and thresholds applicable to marine mammals, sea
turtles and fish, as described in Section 4.2
Table 4
Underwater Noise Impact Physical Injury and Hearing DamageThresholds
Species
Impact Category
Criteria
Threshold
Marine
Mammals
Mortality
Onset of extensive lung

haemorrhage (1% mortality)
210 kPa.ms (impulse)

(226 dB re 1 OPa)
Permanent injury
Onset of slight lung haemorrhage

(225 dB re 1 OPa)
2
205 dB re. 1 Pa .s (SEL)
Tempory hearing loss
50% probability level for a rupture of

the tympanic membrane.
Permanent threshold shift
Temporary threshold shift
2
2
83 kPa (peak pressure)

(218 dB re 1 OPa)
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 22
Species
Impact Category
Criteria
Threshold
Sea
Turtles
Mortality
Onset of extensive lung

haemorrhage

(226 dB re 1 OPa)
Injury
Unconsciousness and minor injury

(223 dB re 1 OPa)
Mortality
50% mortality
275 kPa344 kPa (peak pressure)

(229 dB - 231 dB)
Pelagic
Fish

(230 dB re 1 OPa)
2
Injury
Note:
4.4
Acute injury

(220 dB re 1 OPa)
Source references for each threshold are described in Section 4.2.
Controlling Criteria
There are inherent difficulties in predicting and mitigating impacts of construction noise on animal
behaviour. It is recognised that in some instances behavioural impacts may be more significant than
TTS, and also that TTS is not necessarily harmful to an animal in the longer term. However this
impact assessment concentrates on immediate short-term physical impacts on marine fauna and does
not attempt to predict behavioural responses. This approach is similar to that taken in other
underwater construction noise impact assessments.
In order to minimise the effect on marine mammals and other aquatic life, an objective criterion for the
definition of adverse effect on marine life should be represented by the threshold that creates the least
immediate impact on all marine species. From Table 4, the determining criterion is the TTS for marine
mammals and the Exclusion Zone is therefore determined from the dual criteria of 83 kPa (acceptable
2
peak pressure level) and 183 dB re. 1 Pa .s that relates to TTS. The acceptable peak pressure level
criterion of 83 kPa is equivalent to 218 dB re. 1 Pa.
UNDERWATER NOISE MODELLING
5.1
Objectives
The aim of an underwater noise model is to determine the Transmission Loss (TL) between a noise
source and a receiver location. The TL is effectively the change in signal strength with range. It is
defined as the ratio in decibels between the acoustic intensity at a field point and the intensity at a
distance of 1 m from the noise source. TL is frequency dependent, ie some frequencies will propagate
further than others, depending on the situation.
In conjunction with information on the source noise level, TL can be used to predict the noise level at a
particular location. The objective of the noise modelling is to obtain the best possible prediction of TL,
recognising that in shallow water there are many factors that may influence the result.
5.2
Transmission Loss
The TL at any particular location is the result of geometric spreading of the signal, combined with any
losses or attenuations. Losses can be due to volume attenuation, to the conversion of acoustic
energy to heat, to scattering, as well as losses due to interactions with the seafloor and surface
(although a water surface is typically a very efficient reflector of sound, especially when the surface is
smooth). Sound propagation underwater is also highly dependent on the speed of sound, which
varies as a function of water temperature, ocean salinity and depth.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 23
If the medium is assumed to be homogeneous, unbounded and lossless, then the TL at a distance R
from the noise source would be wholly due to spherical spreading:
TL=20 log R
(dB re 1m)
If the medium is assumed to be homogeneous, lossless but bounded above and below, then the TL at
distance r from the source could be described by cylindrical spreading (where r is significantly greater
than the fluid depth):
TL=10 log R
(dB re 1m)
The above formulae form a worst case for noise transmission underwater in deep water and shallow
water respectively, by neglecting all losses due to factors other than geometric spreading.
In terms of underwater noise, bodies of water up to 200 m deep are considered to be shallow. In
shallow water, noise propagation is highly dependent on the properties of the bottom and the surface
as well as the properties of the fluid. The following points are relevant to the prediction of noise
propagation in shallow water (see Jensen et al 2000):
The properties of the water are reasonably constant with depth. In particular, the speed of sound
may be assumed to be constant (although it may vary seasonally with water temperature).
TL is dominated by bottom interaction effects at lower frequencies (< 1 kHz) and by scattering
losses at high frequencies.
There is a low-frequency cutoff, below which energy is transferred directly into the sea floor.
There is an optimum transmission frequency which is dependent on the water depth.
Parameters such as depth and the bottom properties can vary with range.
5.3
Modelling Software
Jensen et al (2000) describes a number of modelling techniques that may be used to model
underwater sound propagation by solving a wave equation with parameters and boundary conditions
that are representative of the ocean environment. For this assessment, a Parabolic Equation (PE)
model has been selected. This type of model is applicable to the shallow water environment, with
range dependant bathymetry and bottom properties.
The noise model is based on the Monterey-Miami Parabolic Equation (MMPE) Model, version
mmpe2dbbv2. MMPE calculates the TL as a function of range and frequency, for a two-dimensional
radial section with range-dependent inputs.
In order to predict three-dimensional noise impacts across the project area and to display the results in
an accessible fashion, MMPE has been incorporated into a pre- and post-processing code to compute
results along N evenly spaced radial sections (N x 2D modelling). For each radial section, the TL is
calculated for a number of depths and a number of ranges (horizontal distance from the source). The
frequency-dependence of the TL is accounted for by carrying out the calculation for one specific
frequency (the centre frequency) of each one-third octave frequency band from 50 Hz up to 5 kHz,
and assuming that the calculated TL is applicable to the whole one-third octave band. For a validation
of this approach, see Hannay and Racca (2005).
The resulting frequency-dependent TLs are then added to the source level for each scenario to predict
the resulting noise spectrum at each location (range and depth). Results are displayed on contour
plots by selecting the minimum TL across all depths at every range point, giving a conservative
illustration of noise impacts at each location.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port
5.4

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 24
Modelling Inputs and Assumptions
Table 5 lists the input parameters used in the TL modelling along with notes on assumptions where
relevant. In addition to the input parameters below, bathymetry data has been supplied to SLR
Consulting across the project area on a 5 m resolution grid.
Table 5
Model Input Parameters
Medium
Parameter
Value
Notes
Water
Ocean Temperature
19 C
Assumed constant with

depth.
Sediment Layer
Bedrock
Calculation
parameters
Salinity
31 parts per thousand
Speed of sound in water
1515 m/s
Speed of sound
1575 m/s
3
Bottom sediment density
1700 kg/m
Compressional attenuation
0.5 dB/m/kHz
Shear wave speed
n/a
Shear attenuation
n/a
Speed of sound
3000 m/s
3
Density
2400 kg/m
Compressional attenuation
0.1 dB/m/kHz
Shear wave speed
1500 m/s
Shear attenuation
0.2 dB/m/kHz
Maximum calculation depth
30m
Maximum range
3 km
Number of results in depth
30
Number of results in range
150
Number of radial sections N
201
Assumed source depth
6m
Assumed constant with

depth.
Sediment layer
modelled as a fluid (ie
does not support shear
waves).
Bedrock is assumed at
all depths 15m and
below, except at land
outcrops where
bedrock level is
increased to 1m below
ground level.
Note: maximum water
depth in the input
bathymetry is 17.3 m.
In the Inner Harbour
and Koombana Bay,
depths are typically
below 12.7 m.
While it is recognised that higher frequencies than 5 kHz are important to marine mammals, an
extremely high level of computational effort would be required to simulate the full frequency range of
hearing sensitivity. In the shallow water of Koombana Bay the optimum transmission frequency is of
the order of 1000 Hz, and higher frequencies are expected to attenuate more rapidly than the
frequencies covered by the model. Since the construction noise sources are either broadband or
contain more energy at low frequencies than at high frequencies, then it is sufficient to predict an
overall noise level at each location based only on the frequency range from from 50 Hz up to 5 kHz.
Higher frequencies, although they may be present, will not contribute significantly to the overall noise
level predicted for comparison with the identified criteria (which are overall levels).
5.5
Source Locations
The model has been used to predict underwater noise contours across Koombana Bay for two source
locations and for the five construction activities (drilling, blasting, cutter suction dredging, backhoe
dredging and piling). The two source locations were selected to represent worst case and
representative construction locations as follows (see Figure 5):
Location 1: Construction activities are assumed to take place in the entrance to the Inner Harbour.
This represents a Worst Case scenario in terms of noise impacts across Koombana Bay.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 25
Location 2: Construction activities are assumed to take place in the Inner Harbour as shown in
Figure 5. This is intended to be a more representative scenario in terms of noise impacts across
Koombana Bay (noting that blasting may also occur at other locations inside the berth footprint).
Figure 5
5.6
Noise Modelling Assumed Source Locations
Comparison of Predicted Transmission Loss with Geometric Spreading
As a check on the transmission losses predicted by the model, Figure 6 shows the predicted
transmission loss at 500 Hz along a single line from a source at Location 1 along the dredged shipping
channel across Koombana Bay. The predicted transmission loss corresponds to approximately
15 log R. The predicted transmission losses are higher than would be expected with purely cylindrical
spreading, as attenuation will occur due to bottom and surface interactions.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port
Figure 6

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 26
Predicted Transmission Loss vs Geometric Spreading
It can also be seen in Figure 6 that where the water depth decreases suddenly (in this case, where
the dredged channel veers away from the straight line slice) there is a corresponding increase in the
transmission loss. As the depth reduces, there will be increased bottom and surface interactions
leading to higher losses. The low frequency cutoff also increases as depth decreases. For the
parameters used in this assessment, the low frequency cutoff is around 115 Hz in 12 m of water, but
this increases to 230 Hz when the depth reduces to 6 m. For this reason, very low frequency noise is
not expected to propagate through the water in the shallower areas of Koombana Bay.
5.7
Predicted Noise Impacts Worst Case
Based on the source noise levels for the construction activities, it is clear that the key construction
scenario (ie the scenario with the highest potential impacts) will be blasting. It is noted that these
predictions are for short-term physical impacts only, and that behavioural response cannot be
modelled.
For the assumed blasting method, the controlling noise criterion is the Sound Exposure Level (SEL)
criterion rather than the peak pressure level criterion. Figure 7 shows the worst case predicted
underwater noise contours for blasting, along with the area of predicted exceedance of the controlling
noise criterion (the level that has been identified with the onset of TTS). Detailed noise contour plots
for blasting and piling (both SEL and peak pressure levels) at the worst case location (Location 1) are
attached as Appendix C.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port
Figure 7

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 27
Worst Case Blast Location

Examination of the shaded SEL criterion exceedance zone for blasting indicates that in the worst case
exceedances of the criterion are expected at distances of up to 990 m from the source. The noise
from the blast is highest along the existing dredged channel. In shallower water, noise is attenuated
more rapidly due to the increased number of bottom and surface interactions. Exceedances of the
noise criteria are therefore expected to extend out into the middle of Koombana bay, but the extent of
predicted impacts decreases closer to the shore and in shallower water.
The injury threshold for marine mammals stated in Southall et at 2007 is 15 dB higher than the onset
2
2
of TTS (ie 198 dB re. 1 Pa .s rather than 183 dB re. 1 Pa .s). This noise level would be exceeded
at around 280 m from the source. In Figure 7, the inner shaded area represents the area of potential
injury to marine mammals.
The 1000 m distance stated here is the maximum distance, and has been identified for a blast taking
place at a location in the entrance to the inner harbour, with clear line of sight across Koombana Bay.
Impacts will reduce for blasts occurring inside the inner harbour, particularly for blasts towards the
northern end of the proposed Berth 14, where Koombana Bay is shielded from direct impacts by the
land mass.
For piling, and for other construction activities (all of which have lower source noise levels than
blasting or piling) the potential noise impacts are less than for blasting. Exceedances of the noise
criteria are not predicted to extend significantly beyond the entrance to the Inner Harbour. Therefore
for piling and other activities, noise impacts on dolphins and other marine fauna are expected to be
limited to the Inner Harbour.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port
5.8

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 28
Predicted Noise Impacts Typical
Figure 8 shows the predicted underwater noise contours for blasting in a more typical blasting
location, along with the area of predicted exceedance of the controlling noise criterion (the level that
has been identified with the onset of TTS).
Examination of the shaded SEL criterion exceedance zone for blasting at Location 2 indicates that
exceedances of the criterion are expected at distances of up to 630 m from the source. The noise
from the blast is highest along the existing dredged channel. In shallower water, noise is attenuated
more rapidly due to the increased number of bottom and surface interactions. Exceedances of the
noise criteria are therefore expected to extend to just outside the entrance to the inner harbour.
Figure 8
5.9
Representative Blast Location

The predicted short term physical noise impacts for all scenarios are summarised in Table 6 in terms
of the maximum range of exceedance of the relevant criteria. Behavioural responses cannot be
modelled.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port
Table 6

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 29
Maximum Distance to Edge of Exceedance Zone
Source Location 1
Source Location 2
990 m
630 m
Piling
20 m
20 m
<1m
<1m
Backhoe Dredging
<1m
<1m
Drilling
<1m
<1m
Blasting
Note 1: In all cases, the exceedance zone is determined by the Sound Exposure Level criteria rather than the Peak Pressure
Criteria. This is the case for the blast design assumed, but may change for different blast designs.
of blasting), adverse physical impacts on marine fauna are not expected away from the immediate
vicinity of the works. Blasting noise has the potential to impact on marine fauna 1 km from the blast
location, for blasting near the entrance to the inner harbour. However, the impact of blasting on
Koombana Bay is reduced for blasting locations further inside the inner harbour and nearer the
northern end of the Berth 14 area.
NOISE MITIGATION AND MANAGEMENT OPTIONS
For piling and for all other assessed marine construction scenarios with the exception of blasting, it is
recommended that construction works do not commence while dolphins are in the immediate vicinity.
In addition, it is recommended that the commencement of piling works each day begins with a rampup procedure to reduce initial noise impacts and to allow dolphins to move away from the piling
location.
The predicted blasting noise impacts require more in depth consideration of mitigation and
management options.
6.1
Blasting Location Planning
It is clear that blasting impacts are likely to be significantly less at some locations than at others.
Where practicable, it is recommended that blasting works commence as far as possible from the
entrance to the inner harbour (ie as far inside the proposed berthing pocket as possible). Scheduling
the location of blasts to minimise impacts will allow a period of blast monitoring to confirm the
predicted noise levels and impacts.
6.2
Potential Mitigation Measures
or the Inner Harbour and should be delayed until the animals move, or are moved, out of the Zone.
Marine mammal detection and monitoring is proposed to be conducted for approximately half an hour
before (during the period that the last blastholes are being charged and the drilling platform is moved
off the blast) and half an hour after the time of each detonation.
Recommended additional measures to mitigate the impacts of underwater blasting on dolphins are:
the year.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 30
on Koombana Bay are minimised due to shielding by the land mass (ie as far inside the proposed
berthing pocket as possible).
Use of exclusion zones whereby blasting is not permitted if marine mammals are observed to be
inside the identified Exceedance Zone.
Additional mitigation measures that may be considered to reduce impacts of underwater blasting
include:
Where practicable, use of explosive products with lower detonation velocities. However, this
would require more explosives to achieve the same blast result.
Use of detonating caps with built-in time delays, as this effectively reduces each detonation into a
series of small explosions.
Use of a procedure ("decking the charge") which subdivides the charge in one blasthole into a
series of explosions with drill patterns restricted to a minimum separation from any other loaded
hole.
Over drilling the holes to ensure fracturing of the rock.
Use of gravel (road base) or similar material to stem the blasthole to the seabed level after the
charge is in place. Noting that appropriate confinement of each hole is very important as an
unconfined blast has been shown to have significantly higher noise levels than the confined
equivalent.
Staggering the detonation for each blasthole in order to spread the explosive's total overpressure
over time.
Matching, to the extent possible, the energy needed in the work effort of the borehole to the rock
mass to minimise excess energy vented into the water column.
Use of acoustic deterrent devices. The use of acoustic deterrent devices and or physically
removing fauna from an established exclusion zone should be carefully considered in the context
of their potential impacts (eg will these measures result in additional or equivalent impacts to the
works themselves).
It is noted that the assumed blast design incorporates some of the above elements (see Section 3.2),
and that any changes from the assumed blast design will require further assessment of potential
impacts.
6.3
Monitoring
In addition to the mitigation measures listed above, additional measures may be considered in a
mitigation/monitoring programme to further reduce the risk of marine mammals being injured or killed
if rock fracturing by blasting is required in the berth construction phase of the Project. The programme
could involve both visual monitoring, passive acoustic monitoring, blast noise monitoring and longer
term behavioural monitoring.
Effectiveness of each monitoring component is defined as the proportion of marine animal groups
present that are expected to be detected. Visual monitoring is subject to the limitation that it can only
detect animal at or near the surface. Passive acoustic monitoring is designed to detect submerged
mammals, but only if they are making detectable sounds. Each monitoring technique will complement
the other as a silent animal can not be detected acoustically and diving animals can not be detected
visually at the surface. Together, these monitoring techniques offer the possibility of detecting most
marine animals near a blasting site.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 31
6.3.1 Visual Monitoring

In the event that rock fracturing is required, a team of land and boat boat-based observers could be
based near the perimeter of the Exceedance Zone and in close proximity to the works. The main task
of the visual observers would be to perform the visual monitoring of the exceedance zones around the
entrance to BPIH and in the immediate vicinity of the works. This operator will be a qualified Marine
6.3.2 Passive Acoustic Monitoring (PAM)

Passive acoustic monitoring refers to the detection of animals by listening to the sounds that they
make. The past decade has brought extensive growth in the application of passive acoustic sensing
of marine mammals together with automated signal processing tools for localisation purposes. Marine
mammals use underwater sounds to navigate, feed and communicate and these sounds can be
detected with towed hydrophone arrays, stationary hydrophones from ships or shore, autonomously
recording bottom hydrophones, or drifting radio-linked sonobuoys.
Each monitoring system has unique advantages and disadvantages, and the optimal system choice
depends on the frequency structure of the sounds of interest, the depth at which the animals vocalise,
and the logistics of mitigation (a stationary hydrophone might be inappropriate for a moving sound
source, and a sea bottom recorder may not be appropriate for real-time monitoring).
As will be described in Section 6.3.3, a program of underwater noise monitoring is proposed to be
implemented in order to validate the underwater noise predictions and confirm (where and if practical
with the MMO) any site specific behavioural responses to the BPIH construction activities.
It is proposed that the noise monitoring (model validation) personnel could also undertake passive
acoustic monitoring of the site in the event that rock fracturing is required. This would be conducted
during the rock fracturing campaign to have in-situ assessment of blasting activities , and to further
confirm that the exclusion zones are clear of marine mammals. As described above, the passive
acoustic detection of marine mammals can be achieved using a number of approaches and
technologies. The extent to which passive acoustic monitoring should be implemented depends on
the final construction methodology and requirements of the berth construction program.
Hence options for passive acoustic monitoring at this site if rock fracturing and blasting is required
could include one or two boat or land based PAM operators for high noise generating works. As
described above it is proposed that two boat based acoustic marine mammal observers be
implemented (the same team that would undertake underwater noise model validation
measurements).
6.3.3 Noise Model Validation and Blast Monitoring

It is proposed that in the event that the need for rock fracturing is determined in the development of
Berth 14 that underwater noise measurements be undertaken in order to validate the noise model
predictions and to confirm that the proposed management measures are appropriate. This is
particularly important for blasting operations where the area of affectation has the potential to extend
up to approximately 1 km from the modelled blast centre.
The underwater noise predictions for blasting would be validated on site using two boat based
acoustic monitoring stations that would simultaneously measure the underwater noise emissions from
key construction activities. A land based monitoring station is also recommended in order to measure
near field noise levels. This information would be processed in the form of a site law (measured TL for
the site used to validate the predictions). As described in Section 6.2, any high noise generating
works should commence using a ramp up procedure (eg commence blasting with lower MICs) such
that the management zones can be confirmed and progressively refined with increase in production
rates (eg increased MICs and total charge mass).
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 32
6.3.4 Longer Term Behavioural Monitoring

Compared to immediate and short-term effects, it is much more difficult to estimate long-term effects
on the animals. There is some evidence of permanent disruptions of marine mammal populations
presumably due to human activities, but it has rarely or perhaps never been possible to obtain clear
casual links between the human activities and the response of dolphins.
The possibility of conducting of longer term dolphin behavioural monitoring and observation in
consultation with dolphin specialists should therefore be considered, for example in conjunction with
the existing South West Marine Research Program research partnership. This would allow for
identification of any longer term impacts in response to construction.
CONCLUSION
SLR Consulting Australia Pty Ltd has carried out an assessment of the potential underwater noise
impacts of construction activities associated with the proposed expansion of Bunbury Port. The
proposed expansion consists of the construction of a new berth, Berth 14, in the Inner Harbour. The
construction scenarios that have been assessed are drilling and blasting operations, dredging
operations (both cutter suction dredging and backhoe dredging) and piling.
The assessment process for determining underwater noise impacts from blasting and other
construction scenarios has been undertaken in the following stages:
Identification of likely source noise levels for the project construction activities. Besides the level
of the sound, other parameters such as its frequency content, repetition rate and duration of
exposure has been considered
Identification of appropriate noise impact criteria and thresholds for marine fauna, particularly for
dolphins
Prediction of the underwater noise transmission loss and hence the noise level across the project
area caused by the project construction activities
Identification of the area of exceedance of the noise impact criteria and thresholds
of blasting), adverse impacts on marine fauna are not expected away from the immediate vicinity of
the works. Blasting noise has the potential to impact physically on marine fauna at distances of up to
1000 m from the blast location, if blasting occurs near the entrance to the inner harbour. However, the
impact of blasting on Koombana Bay is reduced for blasting locations further inside the inner harbour
and nearer the northern end of the Berth 14 area. The predicted noise impacts for each construction
scenario are summarised in Table 7.
Table 7
Maximum Distance From Blast Location to Edge of Exceedance Zone

Worst Case Source Location
Representative Source Location
Blasting
990 m
630 m
Piling
20 m
20 m
<1m
<1m
Backhoe Dredging
<1m
<1m
Drilling
<1m
<1m
The predicted blasting impacts require consideration and implementation of blast noise mitigation and
management measures, based on the Exceedance Zone identified in this assessment. This
Exceedance Zone is based on the area inside which marine mammals may experience TTS, or
temporary hearing damage.
Wave Solutions
Bunbury Port

15 November 2011
Revision 0
Page 33
or the Inner Harbour and will be delayed until the animals move out of the Zone. A programme of
marine mammal detection and monitoring is proposed to manage the blasting works and to allow a go
or no go decision to be made prior to each blast.
In addition to the exclusion zone, the following recommendations are made to minimise the risk of
adverse impacts of underwater blasting on dolphins:
the year.
on Koombana Bay are minimised due to shielding by the land mass (ie as far inside the proposed
berthing pocket as possible).
It is noted that this assessment is based on a number of assumptions about construction equipment,
construction scenarios and construction noise source levels. In addition, the prediction of underwater
noise propagation is based on a numerical model. While every effort has been made to ensure that
the model is representative of Bunbury Harbour and Koombana Bay these recommendations are
intended to allow a period of underwater noise monitoring at the commencement of the construction
works to confirm the predicted noise levels and impacts and to verify the noise modelling.
Finally, while the identification of marine fauna impact thresholds is based on the best available
information, it is recognised that variation in the responses of different species and individual animals
to underwater noise are likely. In particular, behavioural responses of animals are difficult to predict
and it is possible that there will be impacts on marine fauna that extend beyond the identified
Exceedance Zones in this report. The possibility of conducting longer term dolphin monitoring and
observation in consultation with dolphin specialists should therefore be considered, for example in
conjunction with the existing South West Marine Research Program research partnership.
CLOSURE
This report has been prepared by SLR Consulting Australia Pty Ltd with all reasonable skill, care and
diligence, and taking account of the manpower and resources devoted to it by agreement with the
client. Information reported herein is based on the interpretation of data collected and has been
accepted in good faith as being accurate and valid.
This report is for the exclusive use of Wave Solutions. No warranties or guarantees are expressed or
should be inferred by any third parties. This report may not be relied upon by other parties without
written consent from SLR Consulting.
SLR Consulting disclaims any responsibility to the client and others in respect of any matters outside
the agreed scope of the work.
Appendix A
Report 675.10110R1
Page 1 of 9
This appendix provides a review of underwater noise impacts on marine fauna. The review is divided into
two sections: the first deals with dredging noise impacts and the second with blasting impacts. Of these
two, dredging represents a scenario with reasonably continuous noise emissions contained in a particular
area. In contrast, blasting represents a scenario with a sudden noise impulse, with high peak pressure
levels.
This review emphasises direct injuries as this has been the subject of the bulk of the research in the field.
However, it is recognised that longer term or behavioural effects may also be significant in changing
habitat use and in animal stress levels.
Impact of Dredging Noise on Marine Fauna
The impact of dredging noise (or other underwater construction activities with reasonably continuous noise
emissions) may be divided into indirect impacts (including behavioural responses), and direct physical
impacts.
1.1
Indirect Impacts of Dredging Noise
Dredging operations contribute to increasing the ambient noise levels around the construction site and
have the potential to create the following indirect impacts on marine life:
Masking of communication with individuals from the same species and of other biologically important
noises.
Interference with ability to acoustically interpret the environment.
Adaptive shifting of vocalisations (with efficiency and energetic consequences).
Gross interruption of normal behaviour (ie behaviour acutely changed for a period of time).
Displacement from area (short or long term).
Decreased viability of individual.
Increased vulnerability to disease.
Increased potential for impacts from negative cumulative effects (eg chemical pollution combined with
noise5induced stress).
Sensitisation to noise (or other stresses) 5 exacerbating other effects.
Habituation to noise 5 causing animals to remain close to damaging noise sources.
Noise from dredging activities might create an avoidance response and dissuade marine mammals from
approaching the construction site within a radius of several kilometres. However, marine animals
sometimes exhibit considerable tolerance for such noise and might therefore approach closer to the
construction activities. Also, marine mammals can habituate to steady dredge noise even if they are
disturbed when they first encounter it. Even if habituated to the noise, marine mammals could possibly
experience some of the indirect adverse effects listed above.
Several studies have documented the behavioural responses of cetaceans to underwater noise produced
by dredging operations. For example, grey whales avoided the Laguna Guerro Neggro, Baja, California,
for several years after dredging operations started in the area (Bryant et al., 1984). In addition, bowhead
whales exposed to playbacks of dredge noise recordings at broadband received levels of 1225131 dB
re. 1 <Pa were displaced from the area (Richardson et al., 1985). Bowhead whales stopped feeding and
moved until they were over 2 km away from the sound source. Moreover, whale vocalisations decreased
and changes in surfacing, respiration and diving patterns were recorded.
(675.10110R1 Appendix A.docx)
Appendix A
Report 675.10110R1
Page 2 of 9

However, bowhead whales were also observed within 800 m of suction dredgers where noise levels of
120 dB were detected at 1.2 km from the site (Richardson et al., 1985). Although dredging has been
shown to be a source of underwater noise emissions, no quantitative impact assessment on marine
mammals has been found.
Avoidance responses have been noted when some whales are exposed to high level of stationary
dredging and construction noise but responsiveness varies considerably. Reactions have been found
mainly when received noise levels were well above the ambient levels. The few species of cetaceans
studied apparently did not react overtly if they could barely hear the industrial noise. (Richardson
et al.,1995).
The variations in observed behavioural responses involve:
The level of construction noise above the ambient noise level.
The degree of exposure or habituation of the animals to the source.
The on5going activity at the time of exposure to the noise.
The species involved.
1.2
Direct Physical Impacts of Dredging Noise
The direct physical impacts of dredging and other construction operations on marine mammals have
received little or no study. However, it is recognised that noise from dredging may have direct physical
impacts on marine life in the project area.
Sublethal impacts are those in which a hearing loss is caused by exposures to sounds that exceed the
ear's tolerance to some acoustic parameter. To determine whether any one animal or species is subject to
a sublethal noise impact from a particular sound requires understanding on how its hearing abilities interact
with that sound. Dredging noise has the ability to damage hearing by causing decreased sensitivity. The
loss of sensitivity is called a threshold shift. Not all noises will produce equivalent damage at some
constant exposure level.
The extent and duration of a threshold shift depends upon the combined effect of several acoustic
features, including how sensitive the subject is to the sound. Most recent research efforts have been
directed at understanding the basics of how frequency, intensity, and duration of exposures interact to
produce damage rather than specific differences: that is, what sounds, at what levels, for how long, or how
often the sounds produce recoverable (TTS 5 Temporary Threshold Shift) vs. permanent (PTS 5 Permanent
Threshold Shift) hearing loss. It has also been established that repeated exposures to TTS level stimuli
without adequate recovery periods can induce PTS.
TTS and PTS effects are complex. One important aspect of PTS is that signal rise5time and duration of
peak pressure are significant factors. If the exposure is short, hearing may be recoverable; if the exposure
is long, or has a sudden, intense onset and is broadband in nature, hearing (particularly in the higher
frequencies) can be permanently lost.
The literature suggests that very long exposure to continuous noise above about 120 to 140 dB re. 1 <Pa,
at the frequency at which a species is sensitive, can result in PTS in marine mammals. Such received
levels would likely only occur at relatively close range to a dredging source. It is very unlikely that marine
mammals would stay long enough in such a close range to the dredge.
1.3
Summary of Dredging Noise Impacts
The risk of direct impacts on marine mammals from dredging is very small, however continuous dredging
noise could cause indirect or behavioural impacts with potential negative consequences. These include
masking, panic and impaired foraging or predator detection. Overall, the potential for this type of extended
or delayed impact from any sound source is not well understood for any mammal.
Appendix A
Report 675.10110R1
Page 3 of 9

In general, impacts on marine life from dredging are generally considered to be low. Dredging noise may
discourage marine mammals from approaching the construction site, unless tolerance or habituation
develops.
Impacts of Underwater Blasting on Marine Life
Underwater explosions produce shock waves with fronts of intense pressure that form when matter
displaced by the blast hits supersonic speed; as these fronts pass through an animal, the pressure impacts
on the lungs and viscera. Natural pockets of air and body tissue may burst internal structures, with
bleeding into cavities possibly resulting in death.
Much of the information available regarding the effects of blasting on marine life addresses blast fishing on
coral reefs, weapons testing, seismic surveys, and explosive severance of offshore platforms using open5
water (unconfined) charges. There are very few studies that specifically address the effects of buried
(confined) charges in underwater blasting. In confined blasting, the borehole in which the explosive
material is placed is capped with material such as crushed rock. Such confined blasts have a greater than
90% reduction in the strength of the pressure wave released, compared to unconfined blasts of the same
charge weight (Jordan et al., 2002, Keevin 1998 cited in Lawler et al., 2002). It is therefore reasonable to
expect that the effects on marine life of a confined blast will be much less than the effects of a similar sized
unconfined blast.
A summary of findings on the effects of underwater blasting on fish, marine mammals, sea turtles and birds
is presented below.
2.1
Fish
2.1.1
The acoustico&lateralis system
Fish detect underwater sound through the acoustico5lateralis system which includes the swim bladder,
lateral line organ and the inner ear (Popper and Carlson, 1998).
The swim bladder is an air5filled sack that is generally located near the centre of gravity between the dorsal
kidney and the liver for regulating buoyancy. If the swim bladder becomes ruptured, the fish is unable to
regulate the volume of its swim bladder and thus is unable to control its buoyancy. Most pelagic fish and
many bottom fish have swim bladders but some others such as flatfish, bat rays and sharks do not. There
is, however, much variation in the position of the swim bladder in the body and the thickness of the swim
bladder wall, which are factors that influence the vulnerability of the fish to high pressures or sudden
changes in pressure. Increased pressure compresses the swim bladder and decreasing pressure results
in its expansion. Fish without swim bladders are generally much less susceptible to injury from explosives
than fish with swim bladders (Gaspin, 1975; Goertner et al., 1994).
All fish, with or without swim bladders, have lateral line organs. The lateral line organ runs the length of
the body of the fish. It consists of fluid filled canals with microscopic sensory hairs that respond to
vibrations in the water. The inner ear is comprised of three symmetrically paired sets of chambers
containing small bony otoliths. The chambers are also lined with fine sensory hairs. Hearing in fish is
affected by the differential displacement of the bony otoliths against the sensory hairs and the vibration of
the sensory hairs along the lateral line organ. The proper functioning of the inner ear and lateral line organ
are essential for avoiding predators, feeding and maintaining position in a school.
Fish with injuries to their acoustico5lateralis organs probably have very little chance of survival in the wild.
The liver, spleen, and sinus venous also may rupture and haemorrhage. The kidneys are also easily
injured and even slight bruising could seriously affect efficiency of osmoregulation.
Appendix A
Report 675.10110R1
Page 4 of 9

Hubbs et al. (1960) used the following scale to assess the degree of injury to fish from an underwater blast:
Light haemorrhaging, principally in tissues covering the kidney.
Light haemorrhaging throughout the body cavity with some damage to the kidney, but swim bladder
intact.
Rupture of the swim bladder but no external indication of injury.
Gross damage to the kidney.
Incomplete break through the body wall but with bleeding about the anus.
Rupture of the body cavity.
In many cases indirect mortality may be higher than instantaneous kills. Injuries sustained by a fish may
necessitate a higher expenditure of energy or render the fish more vulnerable to predation.
2.1.2
Range of Effects of Blasting on Fish
The effects of underwater sounds created by confined underwater blasting on fish may range from a brief
acoustic annoyance to instantaneous lethal injury depending on many factors including the distance from
the charge, the depth of the water column, the amount of air in the water, the texture of the surface of the
water (amount of waves on the water surface), the bottom substrate composition and texture, and the size,
species and physical condition of the fish.
Some attributes of underwater sound that determine the degree of its impact on fish include frequency,
sound pressure level, acoustic impulse, near5field effect, cavitation, distance from the source and sound
scattering.
Frequency. Fish generally detect only relatively low frequency sounds < 400 Hz (Popper, 1997). For
example, optimum sound detection for salmon and steelhead is below 200 Hz (Abbott, 1973; Popper,
1997).
Acoustic Impulse. Experimental studies with explosives indicate the acoustic impulse (in kPa.ms) or
the time integral of the pressure is a better method to predict tissue damage than the peak pressure
(overpressure in kPa) (Yelverton et al., 1975). The detonation of explosives underwater produces
post5detonation compressive shock waves characterised by a rapid rise to a high peak pressure
lasting a few milliseconds followed by a rapid decay to below ambient hydrostatic pressure. It is this
pressure deficit that causes most impacts on fish. Large fish are able to withstand a much larger
impulse than small fish.
Near Field Effect. The extent of the near5field effect, or molecular displacement, is directly correlated
with the frequency of the sound. Low frequency sounds have larger near5field effects than high
frequency sounds. Underwater sound detection at very low frequencies (< 20 Hz) is due to molecular
displacement. The motion of a fish through the water also results in a near5field effect as water
molecules are displaced. Fish use near5field vibrations for detecting objects in the water such as a
predator moving towards them or other fish in their school.
Cavitation. Cavitation occurs as a pressure wave is followed by a rarefaction wave that produces tiny
bubbles. Cavitation will only occur near the epicentre of the acoustic source such as on the water
surface just above a depth charge or underwater explosive. Cavitation results in instantaneous
production of small air bubbles in the water and presumably in fish tissue. The strains on tissues
resulting from cavitation can be expected to be fatal to fish whether or not they have a swim bladder
(Craig and Hearn, 1998).
Appendix A
Report 675.10110R1
Page 5 of 9
Mortality
The main cause of mortality for examined fish was the rapid expansion and contraction of the swim
bladder. The criterion for mortality is the cessation of all gill movements. Shock waves result in injuries to
the swim bladder, kidney and liver at a macroscopic level. A fish floating on the surface or sinking to the
bottom may be easily categorised as a mortality. However, experiments with explosives indicate that many
fish with injuries do not die immediately. Studies on fish exposed to detonation shock waves indicate that
90% die within four hours (Yelverton et al., 1975). However, there is some indication that fish may die up
to five days after an exposure to a shock wave. The delayed mortality study was not conducted with
predators in the immediate environment. Few injured fish live more than a few hours in a natural setting
with a balanced community of predators.
Injury
Any macroscopically discernible injury or change in behaviour is likely to result in excessive predatory
pressure and near term mortality even though many fish might be able to recover in a protected
environment. No standard criterion for fish injury or harassment exists at this time. The rupture of the
swim bladder, the loss of function of the lateral line organ and inner ear are equivalent to the loss of a body
organ and would constitute an injury.
Moreover, the results from McCauley et al., 2003 clearly showed extensive damage to the sensory hair
cells of the ear in several of the caged fish exposed to several air gun emissions at different distances.
The extent of damage increased with the post5exposure period up to at least 58 days.
It should be noted that hair cell damage observed in these fish was only a visual manifestation of what may
have been a much greater effect, and that observable physical evidence took days to show up. It may be
of greater importance to evaluate the more immediate effects of the sounds on hearing capabilities of the
fish. Even if there is only TTS as a result of a loud sound, temporary deafness could result in a fish being
unable to respond to other environmental sounds that indicate the presence of predators and facilitate the
location of prey and mates. Effects, however, depend on the use of sound by that species in those
situations.
Acoustic Discomfort
The criteria for acoustic discomfort is not defined for fish in the literature, but for purposes of this study
may be defined as the level of acoustic energy that elicits a startle response. The startle response is a
quick burst of swimming that may be involved in avoidance of predators (Popper, 1997). It is associated
with the Mauthener cell in the base of the brain. A fish that exhibits a startle response is not in any way
injured, but it is exhibiting behaviour that suggests it perceives acoustic stimuli indicating potential danger
in its immediate environment. Fish do not exhibit a startle response every time they experience a strong
hydro5acoustic stimulus. The startle response extinguishes after a few repeated exposures.
Long Term Effect

Hirst and Rodhouse (2000) question whether longer term increases in mortality rates have been missed by
short term studies of caged fish. However, Gausland (1993) quotes a study of the effects of explosives on
cod which found that no deaths, in addition to those caused by the initial explosion, occurred in the sample
population over a 65month period after exposure. These studies suggest that injury to fish will be limited to
the immediate region around a powerful source.
Most pelagic fish such as anchovy, sardine and herring sink when they die although some may flounder on
the surface for a few minutes. Observations of fish mortalities after underwater explosions indicate a good
deal of variability in floating versus sinking between species of fish injured, the type of explosive, and
circumstances of the explosion; however, a general conclusion is that approximately 50% of the fish sink to
the bottom immediately (Gitschlag, 1994). Fish closest to the explosion tend to have the air from the swim
bladder forced out of their body and sink.
Appendix A
Report 675.10110R1
Page 6 of 9
2.1.3
Case Studies of Impacts of Blasting on Fish
There is a large body of literature on the use of fish held in cages to study the impact of underwater
explosions.
Munday et al. (1986) address the effects of buried underwater blasting charges on fish populations in
shallow water areas. This study was carried out in Vancouver Harbour during a 3 month blasting
programme with charges buried at various depths within rock in water depths of 10 m to 20 m. Caged fish
(juvenile coho salmon) were used to compare lethal and sublethal ranges.
Table A1 summarises the percentage of caged fish killed or damaged at various impulse strength levels.
Table A1 Impulse Strengths and Effects on Fish
Percentage Mortalities (3 Weeks
Post Exposure)
Percentage of Remaining
Survivors Showing Damage
76
111
12
10
360
88
100
59
71
83
10
146
12
10
160
12
20
175
182
30
216
17
322
96
357
54
363
10
412
Maximum Blast Impulse Strength

(kPa.ms)
Mortality of test fish occurred within a range of impulse strengths between 111 kPa.ms (21% mortality) and
360 kPa.ms (100% mortality) on the assumption that fish still showing damage after 3 weeks would
ultimately die. However, a well defined relationship between impulse strength and mortality was not
evident based on the study's test results. The data indicated a 50% lethal level at impulse strength of
approximately 300 kPa.ms; yet some groups of caged fish survived at higher impulse levels, with one test
group showing no effect at impulse strength of 412 kPa.ms.
McAnuff and Booren (1989) report the results of fish mortality investigations during underwater blasting for
the construction of a dock facility in Lake Erie, Canada. The results of a monitoring programme involving
water overpressure recordings were correlated with observations of caged fish specimens at various
distances from the blast source. The overpressure range associated with acute internal injury to the fish
specimens in this case ranged from 30 kPa to 150 kPa. This is a much lower overpressure range than
was indicated by previous studies involving explosive products with lower average detonation velocities
and appears to confirm that fish mortality is better related to the rate of change of pressure than to peak
overpressure alone. This finding is supported by the time integral impulse strength approach developed by
Yelverton et al. (1975) and discussed by Munday et al. (1986). Table A2 illustrates the magnitude of
acoustic impulse associated with a 50% mortality response to underwater blasts for different size fish,
adapted from Yelverton et al. (1975).
Appendix A
Report 675.10110R1
Page 7 of 9

Table A2
The 50% Mortality Response to Underwater Blasts Based on Impulse
Size of Fish by Weight (g)
Impulse (kPa.ms)
Impulse (dB re. 1 Pa .ms)
0.1
13
203
1.0
34
211
10
103
220
100
172
225
500
275
229
1000
344
231
2.2
Marine Mammals
Generally, impacts to marine mammals from underwater blasting vary based on mitigation methods
employed before, during and after detonation. On one end of the spectrum, brief acoustic affects such as
temporary threshold shifts (TTS), tactile perception and physical discomfort could occur, and to the other
end of the spectrum, non5lethal and lethal internal injuries to lungs, intestines and auditory system (ears)
could occur.
2.2.1
Physiological Effects of Blasting on Marine Mammals
Research on blast damage to animals suggests that the impact of a short duration pressure pulse (positive
acoustic impulse) is correlated with organ damage (Greene and Moore, 1995).
Marine mammals may be killed or injured as a result of an explosive detonation due to the response of air
cavities in the body such as the lungs and bubbles in the intestines. Effects are likely to be most severe in
near5surface waters where the reflected shock wave creates a region of negative pressure called
cavitation. This is a region of near total physical trauma within which no animals would be expected to
survive.
A second possible cause of mortality or lethal injury is the onset of extensive lung haemorrhage. Extensive
lung haemorrhage is considered debilitating and potentially fatal. Suffocation caused by lung haemorrhage
is likely to be the major cause of marine mammal death from underwater shock waves. The onset of
extensive lung haemorrhage for marine mammals will vary depending upon the animal's weight, with the
smallest mammals having the greatest potential hazard range.
Dolphins and whales, having much greater mass than fish, could presumably withstand physiological injury
at closer distances, but the lack of any direct evidence in this regard should caution regulators toward
conservatism.
2.2.2
Acoustic Effects of Blasting on Marine Mammals
The same sharp, impulsive sounds that cause physiological damage can also harm the ear. At particularly
close distances, the small bones, or ossicles, that carry sound waves from the eardrum to the inner ear
may suffer damage, bringing on permanent deafness. More severly, the oval window that protects the
inner ear may rupture, causing a fatal loss of cerebrospinal fluid. Further from the blast, the animal may
experience other debilitating effects including disruption to equilibrium or balance and hearing.
Appendix A
Report 675.10110R1
Page 8 of 9

Hearing thresholds may be degraded by exposure to high5intensity sound. Hearing losses are classified
as either TTS or PTS, where repeated TTS may lead to PTS. The extent of hearing loss is related to the
sound power spectrum, the hearing sensitivity, and the duration of exposure. High5intensity, impulsive
blasts can damage cetacean ears (Ketten et al., 1993). Hearing losses may result in poor communication,
lessened abilities for echolocation and foraging, and erratic behaviour with respect to migration, mating,
stranding, and vulnerability to predators. For cetaceans, which are highly dependent on their acoustic
sense, both TTS and PTS must be considered serious.
2.2.3
Marine Mammal Case Studies
Experiments have been undertaken on bottlenose dolphins and white whales to test if any permanent
changes in hearing thresholds occurred from exposure to intense signals (Schlundt et al., 2000). Pure
tones in the range 40 Hz to 7500 Hz with levels up to 202 dB re. 1 Pa (within the frequency and acoustic
intensity ranges for seismic surveys and vocalisations of cetaceans) caused temporary threshold shifts in
hearing, but the animals returned to normal within a few days.
Finneran et al. (2002) found that TTS can be induced from single impulses at a peak pressure level of
2
160 kPa, peak5to5peak pressures of 226 dB re. 1 Pa, and total energy flux density of 186 dB re. 1 Pa .s
(tested in belugas). Thresholds returned to within 2 dB of the pre5exposure value approximately 4 minutes
post exposure. However, no masked TTS was observed in the single bottlenose dolphin tested at the
highest exposure conditions: peak pressure of 207 kPa, peak5to5peak pressures of 228 dB re. 1 <Pa and
2
total energy flux density of 188 dB re. 1 Pa .s.
Humpback whales in Newfoundland remained in a feeding area near where seafloor blasting was being
conducted (Todd et al., 1996). Received sound pressure levels at 1 mile from the explosions were
typically 1455150 dB re. 1 <Pa at 240 Hz5450 Hz, with presumed source levels of 2955300 dB re. 1 <Pa at
1 m. The whales showed no clear reaction to the blasting in terms of behaviour, movement, or residence
time. However, increased entrapment in nets followed the blast exposure and according to researchers,
the increased entrapment rate may have been influenced by the long5term effects of exposure to
deleterious levels of sound. This incident highlights the difficulty of using overt behavioural reactions to
monitor marine mammal harassment by noise or high intensity sound.
2.3
Sea Turtles
Potential effects from underwater blasting to marine turtles include non5injurious effects (acoustic
annoyance and mild tactile detection or physical discomfort), non5lethal injuries (minor injuries to the
turtle's auditory system and certain internal organs), and lethal injuries. OKeeffe and Young (1984)
assumed that shock waves injured the lung and other organs which contain gas, as is known to occur in
mammals. Researchers also expect the ear drums of turtles to be sensitive and smaller turtles to suffer
greater injuries from shock waves than larger turtles.
There have been no laboratory studies of explosive impacts on sea turtles, and only limited field
observations and experiments. In several instances, turtle injuries and mortalities (and in some cases,
stranding) have been noted following underwater detonations.
The potential for damage to sea turtles from explosives first became apparent in 1986 when 51 dead sea5
turtles, primarily Kemp's ridleys, washed ashore on Texas beaches after the removal of platforms in state
waters that involved multiple underwater explosions.
Appendix A
Report 675.10110R1
Page 9 of 9

Several observations of sea turtles severely wounded by underwater explosives have been made. At the
removal site of a caisson, within one minute of detonation, a loggerhead with a fracture down the length of
its carapace surfaced (Gitschlag, 1995). The turtle was 5 m to 30 m from the detonation site. External
inspection of a loggerhead found dead 2 days following a nearshore explosion revealed a bloated carcass
with green flesh and gas bubbles beneath the scutes. Necropsy showed lung haemorrhage, rupture of the
right atrium, and bloody fluid in the pericardial sac. Two immature green turtles (30 m to 45 m away) were
killed by an open water detonation. Necropsies revealed extensive internal damage, particularly to the
lungs (Schroeder, 1995).
McCauley et al., 2000 studied the behavioural response of a green and a loggerhead turtle housed in a
cage and approached with an operating air5gun. As the air5gun level increased a corresponding increase
in the turtles swimming behaviour was observed. At higher air5gun levels the turtles behaviour became
increasingly erratic, possibly indicating that if they were not constrained they would have avoided the
approaching source.
2.4
Seabirds
The seabirds most at risk would appear to be diving species, and in particular, shags. Shags are usually
the most numerous of the fish5eating species and appear to be evenly distributed where water depth is
suitable for feeding. They feed only on the bottom and almost exclusively in water less than 5 m deep.
If stunned fish appear on the surface after blasting, this may attract seabirds.
Appendix B
Report 675.10110R1
Page 1 of 12
This appendix provides a review of underwater construction noise sources and noise levels.
underwater construction scenarios are included: dredging, piling and blasting.
Three
The construction noise sources described here have dominant components in the low frequency range. It
is noted that the noise sensitivity of most animals covers a very large range (for mid/frequency cetaceans
from 150 Hz up to 160 kHz), and that higher frequency noise may also have an impact. However in
shallow water there is an optimum frequency for noise propagation and higher frequency sound is more
prone to scattering losses than lower frequencies. For this reason, it is assumed that construction noise
impacts on fauna are adequately represented by the frequency range described here (for the construction
activities considered).
Dredging Noise Sources
1.1
Overview of Dredging Noise
Marine dredging is commonly conducted in coastal waters to deepen channels and harbours, reclaim land,
and mine seabed resources. Dredges can be strong sources of continuous noise with both broadband and
tonal characteristics. The highest levels usually occur during loading. Received levels of dredging noise
can exceed ambient levels out to considerable distances.
The strongest underwater sound from dredging is primarily at low frequencies. However, high/frequency
tones can possibly be present emerging well above the levels of broadband dredge and ambient noise.
Dredging techniques include:
Cutter suction dredging (CSD), where moored ships use a cutter head to loosen gravel and suction
pipes to collect sand and gravel from the sea floor and discharge pipes to deposit to the discharge
site.
Trailer hopper suction dredging (THSD), where a ship moving over a dredging site will fill its hoppers
with material and offload at the discharge site via gates in the bottom of the ship.
Clamshell dredging (and backhoe dredging), where the dredger scoops sand and gravel between two
buckets and deposits this either at the discharge site or on a barge.
The mechanics of noise transmission during dredging will vary with dredging technique but is likely to
consist of machinery noise, transmitted via the dredger's hull and submersed machinery, and sediment
transportation noise, for example the motion of slurry along a pipe or the scraping of sediment with
buckets.
Sound intensity, periodicity, and spectra vary by type of dredge (reviewed by Clarke et al., 2002). Bucket
dredges have repetitive sequences of sounds, including winch, bucket impact, bucket closing and bucket
emptying. CSD have relatively continuous sounds made by the cutterhead rotating through the substrate.
THSD produce a combination of sounds from the engine/propeller and from the draghead in contact with
substrate.
The transmission of dredging underwater sound is dependent upon the type of substrate being dredged,
ambient suspended sediment loads (which tend to scatter and attenuate sound), geomorphology of the
waterway, hydrodynamic conditions, condition of the equipment, and the skill of the dredge operator.
(675.10110R1 Appendix B.docx)
Appendix B
Report 675.10110R1
Page 2 of 12
1.2
Typical Source Levels from Dredging
Measurements of two cutter suction dredgers, the Aquarius and Beaver Mackenzie, are shown in Figure 1
as source level octave band spectra (Greene, 1987). Their octave band spectra peak between 80 Hz and
200 Hz, with the Aquarius having the higher of the two spectra peaking at approximately 177 dB re.
1 Pa@1 m. In the 20/1000 Hz band the Beaver Mackenzie and the Aquarius were measured to have a
133 dB re. 1 Pa level at 0.19 km and a 140 dB re. 1 Pa level at 0.2 km, respectively. Typically, a cutter
suction dredge in operation generates source levels of approximately 180 dB re. 1 Pa@1 m, with
predominant frequencies around 100 Hz.
Figure 1
1/3 Octave Band Source Levels for Two Cutter Suction Dredgers Working
Source: Nedwell and Howell, 2004
Measurements of a hopper dredger, the Cornelis Zanen, loading at a range of 0.93 km and pumping out at
a range of 13.3 km gave 20/1000 Hz band levels of 142 and 117 dB re. 1 Pa respectively in 20 m deep
water (Greene, 1987). In the same paper measurements of the Geopotes X whilst loading where 138 dB
re. 1 Pa at 0.43 km in bands between 20 Hz and 1 kHz in 21 m deep water, and the Gateway whilst
dumping in 12 m deep water of 131 dB re. 1 Pa at 1.5 km in the same band.
The Clarke et al. (2002) review found that sound of bucket impact with the substrate was at the limit of
detection by a low/noise hydrophone. Cutterhead sounds peaked at 100/110 dB in the frequency range of
70/1000 Hz and were inaudible at approximately 500 m from the source. The hopper dredge sound
peaked at 120/140 dB within a frequency range of 70/1000 Hz. In a study at Cook Inlet, Alaska, the sound
of the bucket striking a mixed sand and/or gravel substrate was the most intense sound generated from all
aspects of bucket dredge operations and was measured up to 3 km from the dredging site (Dickerson et
al., 2001). Peak sound pressure levels were 124 dB re. 1 Pa at a peak frequency of 163 Hz measured at
150 m from the bucket strike location, 51 dB above peak ambient noise levels.
Measurement and modelling of TSHD activities has been reported by Hannay (2004) in the context of
Sakhalin Energys 2004 noise programs. Rough weather had caused all other operations to stop so the
measurements made at this time were representative only of the TSHD vessel in operation. Underwater
noise measurements were made on five anchored sonobuoys placed at interval distances from the work
site. The broadband levels at the receiver locations are shown in Figure 2.
Appendix B
Report 675.10110R1
Page 3 of 12

Figure 2
Broadband (10 Hz, 2 kHz) Noise Levels Measurements during TSHD Dredging
Source: Hannay, 2004
Noise source levels of some specific dredging platforms and support vessels involved in the dredging
activities were also systematically measured during the Sakhalin Energys 2004 noise programs and are
presented in Table 1.
Table 1
Source Levels of Dredgers and Support Vessels Involved in CSD and THSD Dredging
Vessels
Cutter Suction Dredger (CSD)
1/3 Octave Band Source Levels

(dB re. 1 Pa@1 m)
Broadband
Source Level
(dB re
1 Pa@1 m)
183
while
dredging
JFJ de Nul
Appendix B
Report 675.10110R1
Page 4 of 12

Vessels
Trailer Hopper Suction Dredger

(THSD)

(dB re. 1 Pa@1 m)
Broadband
Source Level
(dB re
1 Pa@1 m)
188
while
dredging
Gerardus Mercator
CSD Support Vessel / Floating

hose
184
while
discharging
spoil
Pompei
CSD Support Vessel / Floating

hose
191
while
transiting
Fujisan Maru
Appendix B
Report 675.10110R1
Page 5 of 12

Vessels

(dB re. 1 Pa@1 m)
CSD Support Vessel / Shore

approach survey
Broadband
Source Level
(dB re
1 Pa@1 m)
180
while
transiting at
full speed
DN 43
Source: Hannay, 2004.
Piling Noise Sources
Harbour infrastructures constructions generate sounds of high intensities at low and mid frequencies, as
documented by Wrsig et al. (2000) for percussive hammering piling in order to create a wharf. In
assessing the noise from pile driving activities it should be noted that there are many variations in pile
hammer design, and that a pile may be hammered from both above and below the water surface. These
factors may have a considerable effect on the radiated noise level.
Published measurements of underwater noise from piling are relatively sparse and piling activities may
encompass a wide range of operations, piling equipment, substrate types, water depths, etc giving a wide
range of possible noise source levels and transmission losses.
2.1
The Noise,Generating Mechanisms
Pile driving activities create impact sounds which result from a rapid release of energy when two objects hit
one another. The physical characteristics of impact sounds primarily depend on the mechanical properties
of the impacting objects. Pile driving noise is usually characterised by high peak overpressure, rapid rise
and fall times, and relatively short durations.
When a pile/driving hammer strikes a pile above water, impact sound propagates in the air and a transient
stress wave, or pulse, propagates down the length of the pile. The impact will also create flexural (or
transverse) stress waves in the wall of the pile which couple with the surrounding fluids (air and water) to
radiate sound into the water and additional sound into the air. The contribution from the sound generated
at the interface between the pile surface and the water body around it is thought to give the greatest
contribution to the sound underwater. The complex structural vibrations of the pile, which may consist of
both propagating compressional and shear waves and non/propagating whole body motions, will generate
sound waves in the surrounding water.
Appendix B
Report 675.10110R1
Page 6 of 12

Moreover, the pulse propagating down the length of the pile couples to the substrate at the water bottom.
An impulsive force is exerted on the seafloor by the pile and energy is transmitted from the hammer by the
pile not only by the mean force exerted on the sea floor but also by the structural waves radiating down the
pile inducing lateral waves in the seabed. These may travel as compressional waves (in a similar manner
to the sound in the water), as shear waves (where wave motion is perpendicular to the direction of
propagation), or as more complex wave types such as Rayleigh waves (surface waves).
The waves can travel outwards through the bottom sediment, and since the speed of sound is generally
greater in consolidated sediments than in water, these waves usually arrive before the waterborne wave.
These transient sound waves (or pulses) in the substrate can be transmitted from the bottom into the water
at some distance away from the pile to create localised areas of very low and/or very high sound pressure
and acoustic particle motion because of destructive or constructive interference with the sound pulse
travelling outward through the water directly from the pile. Thus it is possible that at certain locations
received levels of sound could be higher further from the pile than at locations closer to it and this has
been observed in some monitoring data (Caltrans, 2001).
2.2
Characteristics of Pile Driving Noise
Typically, pile driving sounds underwater are characterised by multiple rapid increases and decreases in
sound pressure over time lasting approximately 300 to 500 ms as shown in the measured waveform
displayed in Figure 3 (a). The peak pressure is the highest absolute value of the measured waveform,
and can be a negative or positive pressure peak. Most pile driving acoustic energy is relatively low
frequency (< 2000 Hz) and analysis of frequency spectra for each pile condition indicates that most noise
energy from pile driving is in the range of 80 to 1250 Hz (Illingworth & Rodkin, 2001) as illustrated in
Figure 3 (b).
Appendix B
Report 675.10110R1
Page 7 of 12

Figure 3
Pile Driving Sound Characteristics: (a) Measured Sound Pressure Form in the Water; (b)
Narrow,band Frequency Content; (c) Cumulative Sound Exposure over Time
Source:
Illingworth and Rodkin, 2001
Another measure of the pressure waveform that can be used to describe the pile driving pulse is the sound
energy. Typically, the effects of short/duration or transient sounds are not only characterised by rise time,
duration, and peak pressure, but also total energy received over time (or dose). The energy contained in a
sound wave is a measure of the amount of work it does pushing on the fluid (or substrate material) as it
travels. The sound wave pushes with pressure, or force acting over a unit area, and this force causes the
fluid to move locally. This fluid motion is called acoustic particle velocity.
The cumulative sound pressure squared (also commonly referred to as accumulated sound energy) plotted
in Figure 3 (c) provides a comparison of the differences in estimated energy between transient waveforms
because it contains aspects related to the effects of both peak pressure and rise time. If a sound pulse
contains higher pressure peak amplitudes and/or faster rise and fall times, then the cumulative pressure
squared will increase at a higher rate than for a pulse with lower peak amplitudes and longer rise and fall
times.
Appendix B
Report 675.10110R1
Page 8 of 12
2.3
Additional Noise Phenomena Associated with Pile Driving
In the case of pile driving, there is rarely a plane wave because the sounds are produced in shallow water
near shore with numerous boundaries and may interact with sound travelling in the substrate. These
conditions produce a very complex sound field that does not have a simple relationship between sound
pressure and particle velocity. Because of the complexity of the sound field produced in pile driving
environments, relatively simple models, such as the one developed by Dzwilewski and Fenton, 2003, are
not very useful in predicting site laws and radiated levels. More detailed models of the acoustic
environment are needed to understand where sound energy is concentrated and adequately predict site
laws and impact zones (Ward et al., 1998).
Cavitation occurs as a pressure wave is followed by a rarefaction wave that tears the water into tiny
bubbles. Cavitation will only occur near the epicentre of the acoustic source such as on the water surface
just above a depth charge or underwater explosive. Cavitation results in instantaneous production of small
air bubbles in the water. The water near the pile during the San Francisco/Oakland Bay Bridge East Span
pile installation tended to appear whitish at times, suggesting the presence of many tiny air bubbles and
that cavitation was occurring around the pile driving site even with the use of the small hammer (Caltrans,
2001). This suggests a strong near/field effect extending at least one meter outward from the pile.
2.4
Typical Source Levels from Pile Driving
Different piles are driven with different types of hammers and in different types of environments, resulting
in different sound levels. This section summarises results from several measurements of pile driving
noise.
Nedwell et al. (2003a) reports on monitoring measurements of the waterborne noise resulting from
construction operations at Red Funnels Southampton Terminal. The piling involved impact piling and
vibropiling of piles of 508 mm diameter and 914 mm diameter and the average source level of the impact
piling in both cases was found to be about 189 dB re. 1 Pa@1 m and 201 dB re. 1 Pa@1 m,
respectively. Further measurements undertaken in very shallow water reported in Nedwell et al. (2003b)
showed that piling activities at North Hoyle gave a significant source level of 260 dB re. 1 Pa@1 m in 5 m
water depth, and 262 dB re. 1 Pa@1 m in 10 m water depth.
Wrsig et al. (2000) reports on piling in shallow water in Hong Kong, and the use of a bubble curtain to
attenuate the noise. The piling was by a 6 tonne diesel hammer, with a blow energy of 90 kJ. The noise
was measured on two days at distances of 250, 500 and 1000 m. By using a correction factor between
peak and averaged levels it was found that the results agreed well with a source level for the piling of
approximately 198 dB re. 1 Pa@1 m.
Nedwell et al. (2001) reports on the noise created during piling in water of approximately 180 m depth
during construction in the Magnus Field. The piling was characterised by short impulsive events as the pile
driver struck the pile; the impulses occurred at intervals of about 1.5 s with the peak pressures of sound
recorded varying somewhat from impact to impact. The peak/to/peak pressures of the impulses were,
within the variability of the results, independent of the depth of the measurement. The corresponding
effective source level of the pile driving was about 246 dB re. 1 Pa@1 m.
Appendix B
Report 675.10110R1
Page 9 of 12

Table 2 provides a brief summary of numerous measurements in the San Francisco Bay Area (Caltrans,
2001). Large diameter cast in steel shell (CISS) piles driven with impact hydraulic hammers clearly
resulted in the greatest sound exposure. Timber piles that were driven with relatively small hammers
produced relatively low amplitude sound pressure levels of less than 180 dB re. 1 NPa (peak) at 10 m from
the pile. Concrete piles produced peak sound pressures of about 188 dB re. 1 NPa, also at 10 m from the
pile. The larger CISS piles (i.e., 762 mm diameter or greater) produced much greater sound pressures.
For instance, 762 mm diameter CISS piles driven with a diesel impact hammer produced 208 dB re. 1 NPa
(peak) at 10 m from the pile and very large (2.4 m diameter) CISS piles produced levels in excess of
220 dB re. 1 NPa (peak) within 10 m of the pile. Close to CISS piles, the RMS (impulse) was typically
about 10 to 15 dB lower than the peak value and the sound exposure level (SEL) was about 24 to 28 dB
lower than the peak. These levels, however, were dependent not only on the pile and hammer
characteristics, but also on the geometry and boundaries of the surrounding underwater environment.
Table 2
Summary of Measured Underwater Sound Levels near Marine Pile Driving

Distance
from Pile
(m)
Peak Pressure
(dB re. 1 ;Pa)
RMS (impulse)
Pressure
(dB re. 1 ;Pa)
SEL
2
(dB re. 1 ;Pa ,s)
Timber (300 mm) Drop
10
177
165
157
CISS (300 mm) Drop
10
177
165
152
Concrete (600 mm) Impact (diesel)
10
188
176
166
Pile Type
Various Projects
Steel H/Type Impact (diesel)
10
190
175
//
CISS (300 mm) Impact (diesel)
10
190
180
165
10
203
190
178
10
208
192
180
219
202
//
10
210
195
//
20
204
189
//
227
215
201
10
220
205
194
20
214
203
190
25
212
198
188
50
212
197
188
100
204
192
180
Richmond,San Rafael Bridge

CISS (1.67 m) Impact (diesel)
Benicia Martinez Bridge

CISS (2.4 m) Impact (Hydraulic)
SFOBB East Span

CISS (2.4 m) Impact (Hydraulic)
Source: Caltrans, 2001
Vagle (2003) provides a review of several underwater pile installation investigations conducted in coastal
waters in Canada. Results ranged from a 20 kPa, 206 dB re. 1 Pa (peak) peak overpressure level for a
203 mm cedar pile measured at 25 m, to a 150 kPa, 223 dB re. 1 Pa@1 m (peak) for a 914 mm closed
end steel pile.
Table 3 presents the source levels at 1 m from pile driving for several frequencies.
Appendix B
Report 675.10110R1
Page 10 of 12

Table 3
Source Noise Levels from Pile Driving Activities
Source Levels (dB re. 1 Pa@1 m)
Predominant
Broadband
1/3 Octave Band Centre Frequencies (Hz)
1/3 Octave Band
45 Hz , 7 kHz
50
100
200
500
1,000
2,000
Freq
Level
165
134
145
158
154
141
136
250
159
Source: Evans and Nice (1996)
Vagle (2003) also compared noise levels from pile driving using a cedar pile and a steel pile. The same
hammer and driver type were used at the same location. The piles were typically hit once every 5/8
seconds with from 3 to 15 hits to reach the desired depth. The hammer was dropped from different heights
with 4 m up the boom being typical. The pile driver parameters are presented in Figure 4 (a). When
comparing the pressure results in Figure 4 (c) and Figure 4 (d) it was clear that steel piles generated
more sound during initial hits but that the maximum pressure levels overall were comparable between the
two types of piles. However, the spectral characteristics of the two types of piles were quite different as
seen in Figure 4 (b). The cedar piles generated more low frequency noise than the steel piles and at
frequencies above approximately 2 kHz, the steel piles had higher sound levels.
Figure 4
Sound Pressure Results Measured during Driving of a Cedar Pile and a Steel Pile
(a)
(c)
(b)
(d)
Source: Vagle, 2003
SLR Consulting has conducted underwater noise measurements from pile driving during the construction
of ship berths for previous projects. Recent measurements were conducted over several days between
9 and 11 March 2010.
The piling equipment used at the time of the measurements is specified in Table 4.
Appendix B
Report 675.10110R1
Page 11 of 12

Table 4
Pile Driving Equipment Specification
System
Specifications
Hydraulic Impact Hammer

Junttan HHK 16S
Ram weight
16000 kg
Drop height
5 / 1500 mm
Max. impact energy
235 kNm (kJ)
Blows per minute
30/100
Diameter
1200 mm
Piles
Type
Steel, open end
Wall thickness
16 mm
Length
46 51 m
Provisional driven length
20 m
The piles for which measurements were recorded were typically driven in less than 1 hour, cumulating
approximately 2,000 blows. A typical blow rate was about 40 blows/minute.
The water depth at the piling locations was approximately 20 m plus or minus tidal variation. The sea
bottom at this location is predominantly sandy.
At 10 m from the pile, the peak noise and SEL levels were 211 dB re. 1 Pa and 181 dB re 1 Pa .s
respectively. From the site propagation laws derived for the test site this equates to 215 dB re. 1 Pa@1m
2
and 189 dB re 1 Pa .s@1m for the peak noise and SEL levels respectively. Using a more conservative
20log(R) relationship to determine the source noise levels gives 230 dB re. 1 Pa@1m and 200 dB re
2
1 Pa .s@1m for the peak noise and SEL levels respectively.
2
Blasting Noise Sources
SLR Consulting has undertaken a series of underwater blast noise measurements in order to validate
prediction models used on other projects.
The following observations were made during the reported monitoring period with regard to actual versus
modelled blast parameters.
The MIC varied from 9.4 kg to 37.5 kg with an average of approximately 30 kg.
The total weight of explosives per blast varied between 9.4 kg and 634 kg.
The total number of holes per blast varied between 1 and 24 drill holes.
The water depth at the blast and monitoring locations was approximately 15 m plus or minus tidal variation.
The sea bottom at this location was predominantly sandy.
Peak Sound Pressure Level

Figure 5 presents the measured peak blast pressure levels versus distance.
Appendix B
Report 675.10110R1
Page 12 of 12

Figure 5
Peak Sound Pressure Level versus Distance

Peak Sound Pressure Level vs Distance
Berth 1
1150 m
2000 m
19 Log(D)
250
240
Peak Pressure Level (dB)
230
220
210
200
190
180
170
160
150
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
Distance (m)
Sound Exposure Level

Figure 6 presents the measured sound exposure levels versus distance.
Figure 6
SEL vs Distance
SEL vs Distance
1150 m
2000 m
19Log (Distance)
200
190
S
oundE
xposureLevel (dB
)
180
170
160
150
140
130
0
500
1000
1500
Scale
2000
2500
3000
(m)
The blast noise was measured at distances of 300, 1150 and 2000 m over 35 days (24 blasts in total). It
was found that the results agreed well with a source level for the blasting of approximately SEL 231 dB
2
re. 1 Pa .s@1 m and peak pressure 250 dB re. 1Pa@1 m.
Appendix C
Report 675.10110R1
Page 1 of 5
Underwater Noise Contours
(675.10110R1 Appendix C.docx)
75 dB
LEGEND
_
^
Source Location
Injury Threshold (198 dB)
dB
1 50 B
d
125
50 dB
TTS Threshold (> 183dB)

5 dB Contours
0
15
Major
dB
150 dB
100 dB
Minor
dB
5
17
dB
10
0
dB
MGA 50
dB
50
100
200
Metres
300
400
NOTES
150
dB
75
d
175 dB
15
0
0 dB
dB
150 dB
100 dB
125 dB
125 dB
75
150 dB
_
^
dB
25
dB
150
dB
2 Lincoln Street
Lane Cove
NSW 2066
Australia
T: +61 2 6287 0800
F: +61 2 6287 0801
www.slrconsulting.com
Bunbury Port Expansion

Berth 14
10 0 dB
dB
175
d
125
75
75
d
H:\Projects-SLR\610-SrvSYD\675-PER\675.10110 Bunbury Port Underwater Noise Modelling\Heggies Data\GIS\675.10110.001.1.mxd, 18/08/2011, 13:47, by ssobhani
125
125
dB
15
0
75 d
B
dB
100
d
15
0
dB
125
d
15
0
5 dB
125 dB
Blasting
Blasting SEL Noise Contours
Location 1
675.10110
Scale
1:10,000
@ A3
Drafted
Sepehr Sobhani
Date
Approved
16/08/2011
Briony Croft
100 dB
LEGEND
_
^
Source Location
TTS Threshold (> 218dB)
175
125 dB
5 dB Contours
dB
Major
dB
Minor
150 dB
150
dB
175
d
5
17
dB
dB
12
175 dB
15
0d
5
12
17
5
MGA 50
dB
dB
0
10
125
dB
50
100
200
Metres
400
NOTES
15
0
100
dB
dB
15
300
0
15
dB
200 dB
175 dB
10
0d B
0d
10
125 dB
100
d
150 dB
12
5
dB
175 dB
_
^
200
d
B
1
5 0 dB
175
dB
2 Lincoln Street
Lane Cove
NSW 2066
Australia
T: +61 2 6287 0800
F: +61 2 6287 0801
125 dB
12 5
dB
dB
150 dB
100 dB
15
0
150 dB
dB

Berth 14
Blasting
Blasting Peak Pressure Contours
Location 1
675.10110
Scale
1:10,000
@ A3
Drafted
Sepehr Sobhani
Date
Approved
16/08/2011
Briony Croft
50 dB
LEGEND
_
^
Source Location
5 dB Contours
Minor
dB
dB
125
dB
100
75 dB
Major
25 dB
12
5
dB
dB
75
12
10 5 d B
0d
B
125 dB
100
dB
100 dB
125
d
5
12
dB
75
MGA 50
0
15
0
50
100
200
Metres
300
400
NOTES
100 d
B
10
0
50 d B
150
125
dB
75
d
dB
_
^
dB
50
d
100 dB
50
d B
dB
125 dB
17
50
75 dB
dB
100 dB
5 0 dB75 dB
50
10 0
dB
10
0
15
dB
0d
75
2 Lincoln Street
Lane Cove
NSW 2066
Australia
T: +61 2 6287 0800
F: +61 2 6287 0801
dB
dB
12
5

Berth 14
100
dB
75 dB
0 dB
10
25 d B
10
0d
dB
10
dB
0
dB
Piling
Piling SEL Noise Contours
Location 1
675.10110
Scale
1:10,000
@ A3
Drafted
Sepehr Sobhani
Date
Approved
15/09/2011
Briony Croft
75 dB
LEGEND
_
^
Source Location
5 dB Contours
0 dB
150
100 dB
Major
dB
dB
Minor
12
0d
125 dB
125
dB
150 dB
50
dB
0
15
15
0d
0d
B
5d
dB
10
MGA 50
15
0
10
0
dB
dB
50
100
200
Metres
300
400
dB
5
12
125 d
dB
150 dB
1 75 d B
dB
_
^
150 dB
20
175
d
12
2 5 dB
75
dB
15
dB
0d
2 Lincoln Street
Lane Cove
NSW 2066
Australia
T: +61 2 6287 0800
F: +61 2 6287 0801
dB
dB
dB
75
150 dB
125
100 dB 125 dB
75

Berth 14
00
Piling
NOTES
12
5
75
125
dB
10
0
dB
Piling Peak Pressure Contours

Location 1
675.10110
Scale
1:10,000
@ A3
Drafted
Sepehr Sobhani
Date
Approved
15/09/2011
Briony Croft
Appendix D
Report 675.10110R1
Page 1 of 5
References
Abbott, R.R., (1973), Acoustic Sensitivity of Salmonids, Thesis, Univ. of Washington, Seattle, WA.
Bejder, L., Samuels, A., Whitehead, H., Gales, N., Mann, J., Connor, R., Heithaus, M.R., Watson3Capps,
J., Flaherty, C. and Krtzen, M. (2006). Decline in relative abundance of bottlenose dolphins exposed to
long3term disturbance. Conservation Biology, 20 (6): 179131798.
Bryant, P.J., Lafferty, C.M. and Lafferty, S.K., (1984), Reoccupation of Laguna Guerrero Negro, Baja
California, Mexico, by gray whales, In The Gray Whale, Eschrichtius robustus (ed. M.L. Jones et al.), pp.
3753387, Academic Press, Orlando, Florida, 600pp.
Buck, B.M. and Chalfant, D.A. (1972), Deep water narrowband radiated noise measurement of merchant
ships. Delco TR72328. Santa Barbara, California: Delco Electronics. 30pp.
Caltrans, (2001), Pile installation demonstration project, fisheries impact assessment, PIDP EA 012081,
Caltrans Contract 04A0148, San Francisco 3 Oakland Bay Bridge East Span Seismic Safety Project.
Clarke, D., Dickerson, C. and Reine, K., (2002), Characterization of underwater sounds produced by
rd
dredges, Proc. of the 3 Speciality Conference on Dredging and Dredged Material Disposal, Orlondo,
Florida , USA, May 538. Published by ASCE.
Dalen, J. and Knutsen, G.M., (1987), Scaring effects in fish and harmful effects on eggs, larvae and fry by
offshore seismic exploration. In Progress in Underwater Acoustics, Merklinger, H.M., (ed) Plenum Press,
New York, pp933102.
Dickerson, C., Reine, K.J. and Clarke, D.G., (2001), Characterization of underwater sounds produced by
bucket dredging operations, DOER Technical Notes Collection (TN DOER3E14), U.S. Army Engineer
Research and Development Center, Vicksburg, MS.
Dzwilewski, P. and Fenton, G. (2003), Shock wave/sound propagation modeling results for calculating
marine protected species impact zones during explosive removal of offshore structures, U.S. Dept. of the
Interior, Minerals Management Service, Gulf of Mexico OCS Region, New Orleans, LA.
Evans, P.G.H. and Nice, H. (1996). Review of the effects of underwater sound generated by seismic
surveys in cetaceans. Seawatch Foundation, Oxford, UK.
Finneran, J.J., Schlundt, C. E., Dear, R., Carder, D. A., and Ridgway, S. H., (.2002), Temporary shift in
masked hearing thresholds in odontocetes after exposure to single underwater impulses from a seismic
watergun, Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 111, pp292932940.
Gaspin, J.B., (1975), Experimental investigations of the effects of underwater explosions on swim bladder
fish, I: 1973 Chesapeake Bay tests, Naval Surface Weapons Center Report NSWC/WOL/TR 75358.
Gausland, I., (1993), Impact of offshore seismic on marine life. 55th Meeting of the European Association
of Exploration Geophysicists, Stavanger, Norway.
Gitschlag, G.R. and Herczeg, B.A., (1994), Sea turtle observations at explosive removals of energy
structures, Marine Fisheries Review 56(2):1 3 8.
Godson, R.A., (1992), Effects of Noise and Blast Emissions Beach Street Wharf Deepening, Port
Chalmers N.Z, Richard Heggie Associates Pty Ltd Report R083R1, Unpublished.
Goertner, M.L., Wiley, G.A., Young, G.A., and McDonald, W.W., (1994), Effects of underwater explosions
on fish without swimbladders, Naval Surface Warfare Center Report NSWC TR 883114.
Goertner J.F., (1982) Prediction of Underwater Explosion Safe Ranges for Sea Mammals, Surface Warfare
Center Report NSWC TR 823188.
(675.10110R1 Appendix D.docx)
Appendix D
Report 675.10110R1
Page 2 of 5
References
Greene, C.R. (1985). Characteristics of waterborne industrial noise. In: Behaviour, Disturbance Responses
and Distribution of Bowhead Whales, Balaena mysticetus, in the Eastern Beaufort Sea, 1980384 (ed. W.J.
Richardson), pp. 1973253. Report to U.S. Minerals Management Service, Reston, VA. 306pp.
Greene Jr, C.R. and Moore, S.E., (1995), Man3made Noise, In: Marine Mammals and Noise, (ed.
Richardson, W.J., Greene, C. R., Mame, C.I. and Thomson, D.H.,), p. 1013158, Academic Press Inc, San
Diego, USA.
Greene Jr, C.R., (1987), Characteristics of oil industry dredge and drilling sounds in the Beaufort Sea,
Journal of the Acoustical Society of America, Volume 82, Issue 4, p. 131531324.
Hannay, D., A. MacGillivray, M. Laurinolli and R. Racca (2004) Source Level Measurements from 2004
Acoustics Program. Technical report prepared for Sakhalin Energy Investment Company by JASCO Research
Ltd.
Hannay, D., and R. Racca (2005), Acoustic Model Validation. Technical Report 00003S3903043T370063003
E, Revision 2 prepared for Sakhalin Energy Investment Company by JASCO Research Ltd.
Hastings, M. C. and Popper, A. N., (2005), Effects of sound on fish. California Department of
Transportation Contract 43A0139 Task Order, 1.
Hirst, A.G. and Rodhouse, P.G., (2000), Impacts of geophysical seismic surveying on fishing success. Fish
Biology and Fisheries Review 10:1133118.
Hubbs, C.L., Shultz, E.P., Wisner, R.L., (1960), Preliminary Report on Investigations of the Effects on
Caged Fishes of Underwater Nitrocarbonitrate Explosions Data Report, University of California, Scripps
Institution of Oceanography.
ICI Australia Operations Pty Ltd (1987) Handbook of Blasting Tables.
Illingworth and Rodkin Inc., (2001), Noise and vibration measurements associated with the pile installation
demonstration project for the San Francisco3Oakland Bay Bridge East Span, Final Report prepared for
California Department of Transportation, Task Order No. 2, Contract No. 43A0063, Illingworth&Rodkin,
Inc., Petaluma, CA.
Jensen, F.B., W.A. Kuperman, M.B. Porter, H.Schmidt (2000). Computational Ocean Acoustics Springer3
Verlag, New York.
Jensen, F.H., Bejder, L., Wahlberg, M., Aguilar Soto, N. and Madsen, P.T. (2009). Vessel noise effects on
delphinid communication. Marine Ecology Progress Series, 395: 1613175.
Jordan, T.L., Hollingshead K.R. & Skrupky A. (2005) Dodge Lummus Island Turning Basin Project:
Protecting Dolphins and Manatees during Underwater Blasting www.saj.usace.army.mil/pao/hot
topics/miami_harbour (pdf).
Keevin, T.M. (1998) A review of natural resource agency recommendations for mitigating the impacts of
underwater blasting Reviews in Fisheries Science 6 pp 2813313 cited in Lawler Matusky Skelly Engineers
LLP (Environmental Science & Engineering Consultants) Impact Assessment and Mitigation Plan for
Blasting on the Millenium Pipeline Haverstraw Bay Crossing Prepared for: Millenium Pipeline Company
(April 2003).
Ketten, D.R., (1998) Marine Mammal Auditory Systems: A Summary of Audiometric and Anatomical Data
and its Implications for Underwater Acoustic Impacts, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration,
National Marine Fisheries Service, Southwest Fisheries Science Center Report NOAATM3NMFS3SWFSC3
256.
Appendix D
Report 675.10110R1
Page 3 of 5
References
Ketten, D.R., Ridgway, S. and Early, G., (1995), Apocalyptic Hearing: Aging, Injury, Disease, and Noise in
th
Marine Mammal Ears, 11 Biennial Conference. on the Biology of Marine Mammals, Orlando, FL, Dec. 143
18, pp94.
Ketten, D.R., Lien, J., and Todd, S. (1993), Blast injury in humpback whale ears: Evidence and
implications. Journal of the Acoustic Society of America 94:184931850.
Klima, E.F., Gitschlag, G.R., Renaud, M.L., (1988), Impacts of the Explosive Removal of Offshore
Petroleum Platforms on Sea Turtles and Dolphins, Marine Fisheries Review Report 50:(3)33342.
Lusseau, D. and Bejder, L. (2007). The long3term consequences of short3term responses to disturbance:
Experiences from whalewatching impact assessment. International Journal of Comparative Psychology,
20:2283236.
Madsen, P.T., Wahlberg, M., Torgaard, J., Lucke, K., Tyack, P. (2006), Wind turbine underwater noise and
marine mammals: implications of current knowledge and data needs. Marine Ecology 3 Progress Series
309: 2793295.
Malme, C.I. Miles, P.R., Miller, G.W., Richardson, W.J., Roseneau, D.G., Thomson, D.H. and Greene Jr,
C.R. (1989). Analysis and ranking of the acoustic disturbance potential of petroleum industry activities and
other sources of noise in the environment of marine mammals in Alaska. BBN Rep. 6945, OCS Study
MMS 8930006. Cambridge, Massachusetts: BBN Systems & Technology Corporation.
McAnuff, A.L., Booren, R.T., (1989), Fish Mortality Study During Underwater Blasting Operations in Lake
Erie off Nanticoke Ontario, Proceedings of the 15th Conference on Explosives and Blasting Technique,
Society of Explosives Engineers.
McCauley, R.D., Fewtrell, J., and Popper. A. N., (2003), High intensity anthropogenic sound damages fish
ears. Journal of Acoustical Society of America, 113, pp6383642.
McCauley, R.D., Fewtrell, J., Duncan, A.J., Jenner, C., Jenner, M.N., Penrose, J.D., Prince, R.I.T., Adhitya,
A., Murdoch, J. and McCabe, K. (2000). Marine seismic surveys: analysis and propagation of air3gun
signals and effects of air3gun exposure on humpback whales, sea turtles, fishes and squid, Australian
Petroleum Production Exploration Association. Curtin University of Technology, Centre for Marine Science
and Technology, Perth.
Miles, P.R., Malme, C.I. and Richardson, W.J. (1989). Prediction of drilling site3specific interaction of
industrial acoustic stimuli and endangered whales in the Alaskan Beaufort Sea. OCS Study MMS 8730084.
BBN Report No. 6509. BBN Inc., Cambridge, Massachusetts. 341pp.
Munday, D.R., Ennis, G. L., Wright, D. G., Jeffiies, D. C., McGreer, E. R., and Mathers, J. S., (1986),
Development and evaluation of a model to predict effects of buried underwaterblasting charges on fish
populations in shallow water areas, Canadian Technical Report of Fisheries and Aquatic Sciences 1418.
Nedwell, J., Turnpenny, A., Langworthy, J. and Edwards, B., (2003a), Measurements of underwater noise
during piling at the Red Funnel Terminal, Southampton, and observations of its effect on caged fish,
Subacoustech Report 558 R 0207, Hampshire, UK.
Nedwell, J., Langworthy, J. and Howell, D.. (2003b). Assessment of sub3sea acoustic noise and vibration
from offshore wind turbines and its impact on marine wildlife; initial measurements of underwater noise
during construction of offshore windfarms, and comparison with background noise, Subacoustech Report
544 R 0424, Hampshire, UK.
Nedwell, J.R, Edwards, B. and Needham, K., (2001), Noise measurements during pipeline laying
operations around the Shetland Islands for the Magnus EOR project, Subacoustech Report 473R0112,
Hampshire, UK.
Appendix D
Report 675.10110R1
Page 4 of 5
References
O'Keeffe, D.J., and Young, G.A., (1984), Handbook on the Environmental Effects of Underwater
Explosions. Naval Surface Warfare Center Report NSWC TR 83240.
Olofsson, S.O., (1988), Applied Explosives Technology for Construction and Mining, Applex, RLA
Sweden.
Popper, A., and Carlson, T., (1998), Application of sound and other stimuli to control fish behaviour,
Transaction of the American Fishery Society Report 5:6733707.
Popper, A.N., and Edds3Walton, P.L., (1997). Bioacoustics of marine vertebrates. In Handbook of
Acoustics, Crocker, M. (ed.), John Wiley and Sons, New York, pp183131836.
Rasmussen, B. (1967). The effect of underwater explosions on marine fauna, Translated from Norwegian,
Bergen, Norway, pp17.
Richardson, W.J., Greene, C. R., Mame, C.I. and Thomson, D.H., (1995), Marine Mammals and Noise,
Academic Press Inc, San Diego, CA.
Richardson, W.J., Fraker, M.A., Wrsig, B. and Wells, R.S., (1985), Behavior of bowhead whales, Balaena
mysticetus, summering in the Beaufort Sea: reactions to industrial activities, Biological Conservation 32:
1953230.
Ridgway, S.H., Carder, D.A., Smith, R.R., Kamolmick, T., Schlundt, C.E., and Elsberry, W.R., (1997).
Behavioral Responses and Temporary Shift in Masked Hearing Threshold of Bottlenose Dolphins,
Tursiops truncatus, to 13second Tones of 141 to 201 dB re 1 LPa, Technical Report 1751, Naval
Command, Control and Ocean Surveillance Center, RDT&E Division.
Ridgway S.H., Wever E.G., Mccormick J.G., Palin J., and Anderson J.H., (1969). Hearing in the giant sea
turtle, Chelonia mydas, In Proceedings of the National Academy of Science 64:884890.
Ross, D. (1976). Mechanics of underwater noise. New York: Pergamon Press. 375pp.
Sakaguchi, S., Fukuhara, D., Umezawa, S., Fujiya, M., and Ogawa, T., (1976). The influence of
underwater explosions on fishes, Bulletin of Nansei National Fisheries Research Institute, 9:33365.
Schlundt, C.E., Finneran, J.J., Carder, D.A., and Ridgway, S.H., (2000). Temporary shift in masked
hearing thresholds (MTTS) of bottlenose dolphins, Tursiops truncatus, and white whales, Delphinapterus
leucas, after exposure to intense tones, Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 107(6):34963508.
Simmonds, M., Dolman, S., and Weilgart, L., (2004). Oceans of Noise 2004. WDCS Science Report.
Whale and Dolphin Conservation Society.
Southall, B.L., A.E. Bowles, W.T. Ellison, J.J. Finneran, R.L. Gentry, C.R. Greene Jr., D. Kastak,
D.R. Ketten, J.H. Miller, P.E. Nachtigall, W.J. Richardson, J.A. Thomas, P.L. Tyack (2007). Marine
Mammal Noise Exposure Criteria: Initial Scientific Recommendations. Aquatic Mammals 33(4), 4113414.
Thiele, L. and degaard, J. (1983). Underwater noise from the propellers of a triple screw container ship.
degaard & Danneskiold3Samse K/S, Copenhagen, Denmark, 51 pp.
Tougaard, J., J. Carstensen, J. Teilmann, H. Skov (2009). Pile driving zone of responsiveness extends
beyond 20 km for harbor porpoises (Phocoena phocoena (L.). Journal of the Acoustical Society of America
126(1): 11314.
Trasky, L.L., (1976). Environmental impact of seismic exploration and blasting in the aquatic environment,
Alaska Department of Fish and Game Report, Anchorage, AK, pp23.
Appendix D
Report 675.10110R1
Page 5 of 5
References
United States Department of the Navy, (2001), Final environmental impact statement: Shock trial of the
Winston S. Churchill (DDG81). Southern Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command, North
Charleston, SC.
Vagle, S., (2003), On the impact of underwater pile3driving noise on marine life, Internal Report, Ocean
Science and Productivity Division Institute of Ocean Sciences, DFO/Pacific, Canada.
Ward, P.E., Donnelly, M.K., Heathershaw, A.D., Marks, S.G. and Jones, S.A.S., (1998), Assessing the
impact of underwater sound on marine mammals, Defence Evaluation and Research Agency Report, UK.
Watkins, W.A., Moore, K.e>, Wartzok, D., and Johnson, J.H., (1986), Radio tracking of fin back
Balaenoptera physalus and humpback (Megaptera Movaeangliae) whales in Prince William Sound, Alaska,
Deep3sea Research, 28 (6), p 5773588.
Weinhold, R.J. and Weaver, R.R., (1973), Seismic air guns effect on immature salmon, Society of
Exploration Geophysicists, Unpublished.
Wright, D.G., (1982), A discussion paper on the effects of explosives on fish and marine mammals in the
waters of the Northwest Territories, Canadian Technical Report of Fisheries and Aquatic Sciences, 1052.
Wrsig B., Greene Jr, C.R. and Jefferson, T.A., (2000), Development of an air bubble curtain to reduce
underwater noise of percussive piling, Journal of the Marine Environmental Research, Volume 49, p. 793
93.
Yelverton, J.T., Richmond, D.R., Hicks, W., Saunders, K., and Fletcher, E.R., (1975), The relationship
between fish size and their response to underwater blast, Lovelace Foundation for Medical Education and
Research, Albuquerque, NM.
Young, G.A., (1991), Concise methods for predicting the effects of underwater explosions on marine life,
Naval Surface Warfare Center Report NAVSWC MP 913220. Research & Technology Department.
Attachment 7 Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan
Bunbury Port Berth 14 Expansion and Coal

Storage and Loading Facility (Assessment No.
1886)
Technical Report 10: Draft Dredging and

Spoil Disposal Management Plan
Prepared for Lanco Resources Australia Pty Ltd
Prepared by Wave Solutions
2 February 2013

Phone: +61 (08) 9204 0700Fax: +61 (08) 9244 7311
Email: enquiries@wavesolutions.com.auWeb: www.wavesolutions.com.au
Standard Report
Project Brief
Job Number
Work Pack
11 Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan
Project Brief
This document has been prepared as a best practice initiative to

dredge management as well as a vehicle for addressing statutory
approvals and de velopment condition requirements associated with
the Berth 14A Public Environmental Review (PER). The document
outlines management and mitigation measures for dredging to be
implemented on the Bunbury Port Berth 14 development.
Client Contact
Pranab Thakur
Client Address

c/- GPO Box G474
PERTH WA 6841
Document Reference
2419-011-001-001
Prepared By
KW/ MD/ DO
Signature
Reviewed By
Kris Waddington
Signature
Approved By
Damian Ogburn
Signature
Document Status
Rev
Date
Description
08/05/2012
Client Review
23/05/2012
First Draft
26/10/2012
Second Draft Response to initial Regulator comments
19/11/2012
Post EPA Marine Branch Mtg
20/11/2012
Post EPA Comments
1/02/2013
Updated to include details of Offshore Placement
Disclaimer
This document has been produced on behalf of, and for the exclusive use of the nominated
recipient, and is issued for the purposes of the proposed works only. Wave Solutions accepts
no responsibility or liability whatsoever in respect to use of this document by any third party.
Table of Contents
1
Introduction .............................................................11
1.1
Project Description ........................................................... 11
Area of Interest .......................................................14
2.1
2.2
2.3
Port Development ............................................................. 14

Current Operation of the Port .......................................... 15
Previous Dredging and Disposal Programs .................... 15
3
4
Technical Studies ...................................................17

Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan .18
4.1
4.2
4.3
Purpose and Scope........................................................... 18

Operational Objectives ..................................................... 18
Implementation ................................................................. 19
Management Framework .......................................20
5.1
5.2
5.3
National Assessment Guidelines ..................................... 20

State Assessment Guidelines .......................................... 20
Legislation and Approvals ............................................... 20
5.4
Technical Advisory and Consultative Committee .......... 22
Dredging Proposal .................................................23
6.1
6.2
Location and Volumes ...................................................... 23

Dredging Methodology ..................................................... 24
6.3
6.4
6.5
Dredge Schedule ............................................................... 25

Dredge Material Placement Grounds ............................... 26
Dredge Material ................................................................. 26
6.6
Disposal Ground ............................................................... 34
Potential Impacting Processes .............................35
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
Barge Mounted Back Hoe Dredge.................................... 35

Cutter Suction Dredging and Overflow ........................... 35
Vessel Transit.................................................................... 35
Material Disposal .............................................................. 35
Underwater Noise.............................................................. 36
Potential Impact on Existing Environment ..........37
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
4.3.1
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.4.1
6.2.1
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.5.4
Capital Dredging ..................................................................................15

Maintenance Dredging .........................................................................16
Existing Dredge Material Placement Grounds......................................16
Responsibilities ....................................................................................19
Commonwealth ....................................................................................20
State.....................................................................................................21
Conditions of Approval .........................................................................21
TACC Meeting Outcomes ....................................................................22
Rock Excavation ..................................................................................25
Physical Characteristics .......................................................................26

Marine Dredge Footprint COPCs .........................................................30
Terrestrial Dredge Footprint .................................................................32
Dredge Material COPC Summary ........................................................33
2419-011-001-001
Page iii
20-November-2012
8.1
Coastal Processes ............................................................ 37
8.2
Water Quality ..................................................................... 42
8.3
Sediment Characteristics ................................................. 59
8.4
Marine Fauna and Significant Species ............................ 61
8.5
Marine Fisheries Resources............................................. 68
8.6
Benthic Habitat.................................................................. 69
8.7
Introduced Marine Pests................................................... 74
9
10
Key Receptors ........................................................76

Environmental Management Sub-plans ...............78
10.1
Adaptive Management ...................................................... 78
10.2
Monitoring of Dredge Plume Extent ................................ 80
10.3
Management of Underwater Noise................................... 82
10.4
Water Quality ..................................................................... 84
10.5
Marine Fauna ..................................................................... 91
10.6
Benthic Habitats ................................................................ 98
10.7
At Sea Disposal of Dredge Material ............................... 100
10.8
Dredging Operations Management ................................ 105
8.1.1
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.2.7
8.2.8
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.5.1
8.5.2
8.6.1
8.6.2
8.7.1
8.7.2
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.2.1
10.3.1
10.4.1
10.4.2
10.5.1
10.5.2
10.5.3
10.6.1
10.7.1
10.7.2

Baseline Marine Water Quality Monitoring Program ............................45
Predicted Dredge Plume ......................................................................50
Predicted Dredge Plume during Campaign ..........................................51
Zone of Moderate Impact (ZoMI) and Ambient Turbidity ......................53
Zone of Influence (ZoI) and Ambient Turbidity .....................................54
Seasonal, Wave and Wind Effects on Turbidity ...................................55
Chemical Water Quality .......................................................................56
Potential Impact ...................................................................................60
Previous Surveys .................................................................................74
Continuous Improvement Process ....................................................78

Sub-plans - Management Actions and Preventative Measures ........79
Monitoring Dredge Plume Extent: Sub-plan 1 ...................................80
Underwater Noise Monitoring: Sub-plan 2 ........................................82
Turbidity from Dredge Plumes: Sub-plan 3 .......................................84
Chemical Water and Sediment Quality: Sub-plan 4 ..........................88
Bottlenose Dolphins: Sub-plan 5 .......................................................91
Marine Turtles: Sub-plan 6................................................................94
Rock Fracturing (blasting) on Marine Megafauna: Sub-plan 7 ..........95
Benthic Habitats in Koombana Bay: Sub-plan 8 ...............................98
Ocean Disposal Activities: Sub-plan 9 ............................................100
Transit of Vessels: Sub-plan 10 ......................................................103
2419-011-001-001
Page iv
20-November-2012
10.8.1
10.8.2
10.8.3
10.8.4
10.8.5
10.8.6
11
Atmospheric Noise: Sub-plan 11.....................................................105

Introduced Marine Pests: Sub-plan 12 ............................................106
Waste Management: Sub-plan 13...................................................109
Hazardous Substances Management: Sub-plan 14 ........................110
Emergency Response: Sub-plan 15 ...............................................112
Maritime Safety: Sub-plan 16 ..........................................................114
References ............................................................115
2419-011-001-001
Page v
20-November-2012
List of Figures
disposal locations and existing BPA anchorages. .................................................... 13
Figure 2: Locality plan of the Port of Bunbury. ......................................................... 14
Figure 3: Indicative diagram showing bathymetry of Berth 14 before and after
dredging (Evans and Peck, 2009). ........................................................................... 23
Figure 4: Proposed port and Berth 14A layout. ........................................................ 24
Figure 5: Examples of backhoe and cutter suction dredges (Source: Jan de Nul). .. 25
Figure 6: Qualitative assessment of sediment types within the dredge footprint. ..... 28
Figure 7: Particle size distribution within dredge footprint. ....................................... 29
Figure 8: Sediment induration (hardness) results through the dredge profile at Berth
14A at different boreholes and depth of first encounter of basalt layer (WML
Consultants, 2009). .................................................................................................. 29
Figure 9: Average total organic carbon (TOC) within the proposed dredge footprint.
Error bars represent standard error. ......................................................................... 33
Figure 10: Particle size distribution of sediment samples collected from the offshore
disposal location and the proposed dredge footprint. ............................................... 34
Figure 11: Geomorphology of the Project area integrated with LiDAR bathymetry. . 38
Figure 12: Wave heights recorded from Beacon 3 (top) and Beacon 10 (bottom). .. 39
Figure 13: Current roses for Beacon 3 for summer (left) and winter (right). The roses
indicate the direction to which the current is flowing as oceanographic convention
(to). ........................................................................................................................... 40
Figure 14: Wind roses for the Bunbury Outer Harbour for 2008 and 2010 showing
average wind speed (m/s) and direction and inter-annual variation in quarterly
statistics. The roses indicate the direction from which the wind is blowing as
meteorological convention........................................................................................ 42
Figure 15: Spatial pattern for e-folding times in May and November 2009. .............. 45
Figure 16: Water quality, wave and current loggers are located at ABS1, OBS1 and
OBS2 in Koombana Bay. ......................................................................................... 46
Figure 17: Sampling stations on flushing map.......................................................... 47
Figure 18: An example map-form presentation of: a) the predicted Zone of Influence
and the predicted zones of High Impact and Moderate Impact associated with
channel dredging (represented by the black line) from EAG 7. ................................ 48
................................................................................................................................. 49
................................................................................................................................. 49
Figure 21: Contours showing depth-averaged TSS concentrations exceeded 25% of
the time for Scenario 1 based on a 40 week simulation. Concentrations are in excess
of ambient TSS concentrations. 10 mg/L contour represents Zone of Moderate
Impact (ZoMI) ........................................................................................................... 50
Figure 22: 12-hour time sequence of depth-averaged dredge plume behaviour for
Scenario 1. ............................................................................................................... 51
Figure 23: Location of time-series extraction points (Location A-D) and baseline
monitoring site (M).................................................................................................... 51
Figure 24: Time series of depth-averaged concentrations for the four locations for
Scenario 1. Concentrations are in excess of ambient TSS concentrations. ............. 53
2419-011-001-001
Page vi
20-November-2012
Figure 25: 95%ile (red) 90%ile (green) and 80%ile (yellow) turbidity (TSS mg/l)
statistics at the three logging stations from December 2011-October 2012 and the
predicted 10 mg/L 80%ile dredge plume (Zone of Moderate Impact). ...................... 53
Figure 26: Time series of predicted dredge plumes at selected locations in
Koombana Bay and the 80%ile (red line) for baseline turbidity at each of those sites.
................................................................................................................................. 54
Figure 27: Zone of Influence and respective continuous monitoring sites. ............... 55
Figure 28: Wave height and turbidity profile from continuous acoustic logger in
central Koombana Bay ............................................................................................. 56
Figure 29: Water sampling quality locations (8) on predicted Zone of Influence
dredge plume. .......................................................................................................... 57
monitoring for metals and chlorophyll at harbour (low) and bay (moderate) during
2012 baseline monitoring program. Red arrows are suggested key metals for
monitoring. ............................................................................................................... 58
monitoring for metals at harbour (low) and bay (moderate) during 2012 baseline
monitoring program. ................................................................................................. 58
Figure 32: Surface sediment median particle size contours and sampling stations in
Koombana Bay. ........................................................................................................ 60
Figure 33: Predicted sediment deposit at end of 40 week dredge operations
assuming final density of 400 kg/m3. ........................................................................ 61
Figure 34: a) seasonal patterns in dolphin abundance and b) birth rates in
Koombana Bay and the broader region. Source: SWMRP newsletter. .................... 62
Figure 35: Seasonal distribution of adult female dolphins around the Koombana Bar
region. Source SWMRP newsletter. ......................................................................... 63
Figure 36: Spectrum of underwater noise impacts from no response through stress,
distress and system failure. ...................................................................................... 65
Figure 37: Noise impact contours worst case propagation scenario derived from
Figure 38: Noise impact contours mid range propagation scenario derived from
Figure 39: Distribution of benthic habitats across the Project area and showing the
location of the proposed dredge material placement ground.................................... 70
Figure 40: Distribution of seagrasses across the Project area. ................................ 71
Figure 41: Zone of Influence in respect to Benthic Habitat in Koombana Bay.......... 73
Figure 42: Zone of Influence defined for the Berth 14A development and turbidity
logger sites. .............................................................................................................. 86
Figure 43: Decision tree outlining a draft framework for management response in the
event that trigger values are exceeded during water quality monitoring. .................. 87
Figure 44: Water sample stations with respect to dredge plume. WSQ6 is key
indicator site for metals. ........................................................................................... 89
Figure 45: Water and sediment quality spot sampling locations overlayed on
sediment particle size contours in Koombana Bay ................................................... 90
................................................................................................................................. 93
Figure 47: Dolphin activity recorded by each of the passive acoustic loggers.......... 94
2419-011-001-001
Page vii
20-November-2012
............................................................................................................................... 100
2419-011-001-001
Page viii
20-November-2012
List of Tables
Table 1: Key characteristics of the proposed works. ................................................ 12

Table 2: Current berth facilities at the Port of Bunbury. ............................................ 15
Table 3: Previous capital dredging programs. .......................................................... 16
Table 4: Previous maintenance dredging programs. ................................................ 16
Assessment No. 1886). ............................................................................................ 18
Table 6: Western Australian Ministerial Implementation Statement which requires
compliance to the following conditions regarding dredging operations. ................... 21
assessment report for the Berth 14A Project and Sea Dumping Permit. .................. 21
Table 8: TACC representatives chart ....................................................................... 22
Table 9: Indicative dredge volumes and durations. .................................................. 26
Table 10: Physical sample characteristics................................................................ 26
Table 11: Summary of metal results from marine dredge footprint. .......................... 30
Table 12: Inorganic parameter levels within marine dredge footprint ....................... 30
Table 13: Summary of organic parameters results from marine dredge footprint..... 31
Table 14: Summary of metal results from terrestrial dredge footprint. ...................... 32
Table 15: Summary of organic parameters results from terrestrial dredge footprint. 32
Centre, Power Station Beach and Centre Koombana Bay 5% of the time. .............. 55
Table 17: Turbidity %iles for TSS (mg/l) for central Koombana Bay. ....................... 56
Table 18: Total and dissolved metals in Koombana Bay water (n=6)....................... 59
Table 19: Summary of predicted noise impacts. ...................................................... 65
................................................................................................................................. 68
Table 21: Interaction summary for the proposed Bunbury Port Berth 14A dredging
and disposal program. .............................................................................................. 76
<HOLD> Insert List of Appendices as applicable.
2419-011-001-001
Page ix
20-November-2012
Acronyms
ABS
ADCP
AHD
ANZECC
AWAC
BHD
BPA
CD
CEMP
CSD
CTD
DEC
DoE
DSDMP
DSEWPaC
EPA
EPBC
LiDAR
LOA
LOR
Lanco
MODIS
NAGD
NTU
PER
PSD
ROV
TACC
TBT
TSS
UCL
WQBMP
2419-011-001-001
Definition
Acoustic Back Scatter method for logging TSS
Acoustic Doppler Current Profiler same as AWAC
Australian Height Datum (+0.54 m above chart datum)- approx. Sea level
Australian New Zealand Environment Conservation Council
Acoustic Wave and Current Profiler same as ADCP
Back Hoe Dredge
Chart Datum = Lowest Astronomical Tide (LAT)
Construction Environment Management Plan
Cutter Suction Dredge
Conductivity Temperature Depth measured in marine waters
Department Environment Conservation Western Australia
Department of Environment Western Australia (now DEC)
Dept. Sustainability Environment Water Population & Community - Cwth.
Environment Protection Agency Western Australia
Environment Protection Biodiversity Conservation Act, 1999
Light Detection And Ranging optical remote sensing technology
Length Over All
Limits of Reporting
Referred as Lanco Resources Australia Pty Ltd
MODerate resolution Imaging Spectroradiometer remote sensing satellite
National Assessment Guidelines for Dredging
Nephelometric Turbidly Units
Particle size distribution sediment grain size measured in microns
Remote Operated Vehicle underwater videography and GPS system
Technical Advisory and Consultative Committee - dredging
Tri-butyl tin
Total Suspended Solids
Upper Confidence Limit
Water quality baseline monitoring program
Page x
20-November-2012
Introduction
Lanco Resources Australia Pty Ltd (Lanco) is undertaking field investigations for the development of a
coal export facility at Berth 14, located within the Port of Bunbury Inner Harbour, Western Australia.
The proposal includes capital dredging, involving both marine and land based footprints to complete
the marine elements of the development. This document outlines management and mitigation
measures for dredging to be implemented on the Bunbury Port Berth 14A development.
1.1
Project Description
in India and other countries. In order to handle this increased volume of coal, a ne w rail loop,
per hour.
The proposed dredging of Berth 14 a nd its approaches is necessary to provide sufficient space to
2419-011-001-001
Page 11
20-November-2012

Marine Components
Description
Berth pocket
Dredging
Dredge volume of up t o 1,900,000 m. Underwater rock
Capital
rock.
Maintenance
ground
Berth structure
Likely to comprise of a r einforced concrete jetty structure
concrete.
operation.
Description
Materials handling
infrastructure
Rail
Construction period
Water requirements
Still to be d etermined as designs for the Berth 14 are still
under preparation.
Vegetation loss
removed.
Terrestrial ground
disturbance
proposed to be dr edged to approximately - 12.7 m CD and navigational areas to approximately 12.2 m CD to accommodate bulk carriers with at least 225 m LOA. They will access the berth via the
be removed for establishment of the berth is estimated to be up to 2,700,000 m of which up t o
2419-011-001-001
Page 12
20-November-2012
2419-011-001-001
Page 13
20-November-2012
Area of Interest
The Port of Bunbury is located in Koombana Bay on the south-western coast of Western Australia
and is operated by the Bunbury Port Authority. Sandy beaches extend along the coast to the north
and south of the Port. The Leschenault Estuary is located to the northeast of the Port and the
Leschenault Inlet, a remnant of the estuary is located to the southwest. Both of these water bodies are
connected to Koombana Bay via man made channels. These features are shown on the locality plan
below (Figure 2).
Figure 2: Locality plan of the Port of Bunbury.
2.1
Port Development
The development of the Bunbury Port commenced with the construction of the original wooden jetty in
the Outer Harbour in 1864. Jetty extensions continued between 1900 and 1952 and the breakwater
was extended in a north easterly direction between 1906 and 1961 (PWD, 1978). The construction of
a spur groyne near the breakwater abutment on the ocean side (Western Spur) commenced in 1948
and was later extended in 1961. This spur although very effective in trapping littoral sand was soon
saturated. A further spur groyne (Eastern Spur) was constructed in 1949 by extending the original
main breakwater in a north-easterly direction to increase the sand trap (PWD, 1978).
In 1951, the natural outlet for Leschenault Estuary to the ocean at Point MacLeod was closed to
eliminate the accumulation of river silt in the port area and mitigate risk of flooding in the township. At
the same time, a connection to the ocean was cut through the sand dunes opposite the mouth of the
Collie River (The Cut). In 1968-69, the Preston River downstream of the Australind Road bridge was
realigned to allow for the construction of the Inner Harbour.
The Outer Harbour was for many years the focus of shipping trade for Bunbury. However, due to its
operational constraints, limited expansion potential, and proximity to the Bunbury central business
district, there was a necessity to shift the principal port focus to a location that was more sheltered,
more readily accessed by land transport and with substantial room for expansion. This resulted in the
development of the Inner Harbour and progressive acquisition of adjoining land to provide for
expansion.
2419-011-001-001
Page 14
20-November-2012
In 1969, the Western Australian government approved the expansion of the Inner Harbour including
deepening to -12.2 m CD. This involved removing approximately 6,750,000 m of material by cutter
suction dredge, most of which was used to reclaim large tidal wetland areas around the Inner Harbour
providing land for four berths. The basalt rock underlying the turning basin and entrance channel at
varying depths was unable to be r emoved with the dredger. This led to drilling, rock fracturing
(blasting) and removal of the bedrock in 1974.
On completion of the Inner Harbour in 1976, a channel was cut at Point MacLeod (The Plug) to allow
water circulation to this body of water and passage of boats to and f rom Koombana Bay. These
modifications resulted in the renaming of the water bodies; the smaller isolated water body at Point
MacLeod is now known as the Leschenault Inlet and the main water body to the north is known as the
Leschenault Estuary (see Figure 2).
2.2
Current Operation of the Port
The Bunbury Port is divided into two primary commercial areas; the Outer Harbour and the Inner
Harbour. The port has seven berths totalling 1,485 m in length that are capable of handling ships with
an overall draft of up t o 11.6 m in the Inner Harbour. The current berth facilities at the port are
The major products imported through the port are caustic soda, methanol, vegetable oils, phosphate
and potash, and petroleum coke. The products exported are alumina, aluminium hydroxide, mineral
sands, silica sands, silicon dross, spodumene (lithium based mineral) and woodchips. Mineral sands
include ilmenite, rutile and leucoxene (containing titanium), xenotime and m onazite (containing rare
earth metals) and industrial minerals zircon, kyanite and garnet.
Table 2: Current berth facilities at the Port of Bunbury.
Berth
Location
Berth Facilities
Berth 1 Outer Harbour Primarily export of mineral sands.
Berth 2 Outer Harbour General purpose berth equipped with facilities for discharging
methanol from tankers.
General purpose berth with mobile road hoppers for loading of
mineral sands, silica sand and silicon dross. As well as bulk
discharge of petroleum coke, phosphate and potash, and
vegetable oils.
Specialised bulk alumina loading and discharging of bulk caustic
soda.
General purpose berth with shiploader connected to bulk storage
shed and road hoppers for loading of aluminium hydroxide,
mineral sands, silica sand and spodumene. As well as
discharging of phosphate and potash, and vegetable oils.
2.3
Previous Dredging and Disposal Programs
Numerous dredging programs have been undertaken at the Port of Bunbury as part of the
development of berths and shipping channels as well as maintenance of navigational depths.
2.3.1
Capital Dredging
The records of capital dredging associated with the development of the Outer Harbour are not
presently available. There may not be any factual accounts of dredging volumes or disposal areas for
the Outer Harbour development.
The Inner Harbour was developed during two capital dredging programs. In the early 1970s
approximately 7,400,000 m of material was removed and us ed for reclamation works. In 1991, the
Inner Harbour basin was extended with the removal of approximately 2,000,000 m of material, which
was used for development of land to the east of the Inner Harbour. The capital dredging programs
undertaken at the port are summarised in Table 3.
2419-011-001-001
Page 15
20-November-2012
Table 3: Previous capital dredging programs.

Year
Disposal Location
1971-75
Reclamation for port development
1991
Land disposal
Total
2.3.2
Approximate Volume (m)

7,400,000
2,000,000
9,600,000
Since completion of the breakwater and spur groyne extensions in 1961 and construction of Berths 1
and 2, regular maintenance dredging has been undertaken. To date, at least 8,100,000 m of dredge
material has been removed as summarised in Table 4.
Since 1988, records show maintenance dredging of 400,000 to 600,000 m by trailer suction hopper
dredges on a t hree to four year cycle. This is an av erage and reasonably steady rate of
210, 000 m/year. Sand is also removed from sand traps by land based plant with weed cleared from
the shipping channel in smaller volumes through trawling.
Table 4: Previous maintenance dredging programs.
Year
Disposal Location
1965-66
1966-67
1967-68
1969-70
1971-72
1973-74
1974-75
1975-76
1976-77
1977
1979
1982
1985
1988-89
1990
1992
1994
1997
2001
2004
2007
2008
2010
Total
Reclamation
Reclamation
Pumped to ocean side of breakwater
2.3.3
Approximate
Volume (m)
Unknown
70,000
Unknown
Unknown
76,630
320,000
6,200
Unknown
17,000
19,000
Unknown
300,000
140,000
1,650,000
627,000
900,000
416,518
656,000
665,500
506,354
603,123
1,040,250
165,000
8,178,575
Existing Dredge Material Placement Grounds
The existing dredge material placement grounds have been in use since at least 1976 (PWD, 1978).
The dredge material placement grounds were originally 1,000 m long north to south and 400 m wide
east to west and were located, in part, inshore of the present placement ground location. The grounds
have been shifted to the west and expanded to the north and west. The locations of the previous and
existing dredge material placement grounds are shown in Figure 1 and the material placed at the
grounds from maintenance dredging is listed in Table 4.
2419-011-001-001
Page 16
20-November-2012
Technical Studies
the requirement for factor specific scopes of work to be conducted to inform the environmental impact
assessment process for Bunbury Port Berth 14A Development for Coal Storage and Loading Facility.
Desktop reviews of available information and detailed baseline studies conducted in the Project area,
industry expert consultation and predictive modelling address these scopes of work and i nform the
environmental risk assessment. The following technical reports for Bunbury Port Berth 14A
Development for Coal Storage and Loading Facility contain the results of the studies conducted for
the relevant scopes of work identified in the Environmental Scoping Document and are relevant to this
draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP):
PER Appendices
A- Commonwealth Referral of Proposed Action
B- Environmental Scoping Document (Assessment No. 1886)
Technical Reports
1.
Indicative Dredge Plan for Modelling
2.
Site Selection for Offshore Placement of Dredge Material
3.
Marine Environmental Quality Studies
4.
Hydrodynamic and Sediment Transport Modelling
5.
Benthic Habitats near Bunbury, Western Australia
6.
Benthic Primary Producer Habitat Loss Assessment
7.
Marine Fauna Studies
8.
Marine Sediment Sampling and Analysis Report (and Plan)
9.
Air Quality- Dust Emissions
10.
Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan
2419-011-001-001
Page 17
20-November-2012

4.1
Purpose and Scope
Lanco is implementing this Draft Dredging and Spoil Disposal Management Plan (DSDMP) as a best
practice initiative to dredge management as well as a vehicle for addressing statutory approvals and
development condition requirements associated with the Berth 14 Public Environmental Review
(PER). The draft DSDMP follows guidance outlined within the NAGD (Commonwealth of Australia
2009a), and requirements for dredging impact assessment described within the Western Australian
Environmental Protection Authorities Environmental Assessment Guideline No. 7 Marine Dredging
Proposals (EPA, 2011).
The draft DSDMP includes the following information:
Overall Management Framework, including:
o Commonwealth guidance;
o State approvals and permits;
o Conditions of approval (PER Assessment Report); and
o Role of the Technical Advisory and Consultative Committee (TACC).
Description of the dredging works, including:
o Dredge location and volumes for disposal;
o Dredge methodology;
o Dredge schedule; and
o Material characterisation.
Description of the existing environment;
Description of potential impacts;
Management strategies and actions;
o Proposed monitoring arrangements and management response; and
o Capital works dredge management.
This draft DSDMP has been prepared to support the proposed management and m onitoring
measures proposed within the Berth 14 PER. The finalised DSDMP will address requirements of
regulatory approvals and conditions of approval outlined within the PER assessment report, and
Commonwealth approvals as required in support of a Commonwealth Sea Dumping Permit.
4.2
Operational Objectives
This draft DSDMP identifies a range of operational, monitoring and management measures proposed
for implementation during the development of the Berth 14 project. These measures are aimed at
maintaining environmental and socioeconomic objectives for the Project area.
OEPA for the Project identifies relevant factor specific environmental objectives (Table 5). The
objectives also include potential social impact considerations.
Assessment No. 1886).
Environmental Factors
EPA Objective
To maintain the quality of waters, sediment and/or biota so
Marine Environmental Quality that the environmental values, both ecological and social, are
protected.
To maintain marine ecological integrity through protection,
Marine Benthic Habitats
management and improved knowledge of benthic habitats,
including benthic primary producer habitats.
To maintain the abundance, diversity, geographic distribution
and productivity of fauna at species and ecosystem levels
Marine Fauna
through the avoidance or management of adverse potential
impacts and improvement in knowledge.
2419-011-001-001
Page 18
20-November-2012
The objectives for these environmental factors are guided where appropriate by relevant regulatory
guidance material including:
Australian and New Zealand Guidelines for Fresh and Marine Water Quality (ANZECC, 2000);
National Assessment Guidelines for Dredging (Commonwealth of Australia, 2009a);
State Water Quality Management Strategy Document No.6 (Government of Western
Australia, 2004);
Environmental Protection Authority Position Statement No. 7: Principles of Environmental
Protection (EPA, 2007);
Background Quality for Coastal Marine Waters of Perth, Western Australia (McAlpine et al., 2005);
Perth's Coastal Waters: Environmental Values and Objectives, Environmental Protection
Authority Position Statement (EPA, 2000);
State Environmental (Cockburn Sound) Policy (2005);
Revised Draft Environmental Protection (Cockburn Sound) Policy (EPA, 2002);
Pilbara Coastal Water Quality Consultation Outcomes: Environmental Values and
Environmental Quality Objectives (DoE, 2006);
Environmental Assessment Guideline 3: Protection of benthic primary producer habitat in
Western Australia (EPA, 2009);
Matters of National Environmental Significance Significant Impact Guidelines (DSEWP&C, 2009);
National Biofouling Management guidance for Non-trading Vessels (Commonwealth of
Australia, 2009);
A guideline for managing the potential impacts of dust and associated contaminants from land
development sites contaminated sites remediation and other related activities (DEC, 2011);
and
Draft Environmental Protection Authority Environmental Assessment Guideline No. 4:
Towards Outcome-based Conditions (EPA, 2009).
4.3
Implementation
The draft DSDMP implementation process is designed as an operational management plan for
potential environmental and social impacts within operational management of the dredging and
excavation process for the Berth 14A development.
4.3.1
Responsibilities
<HOLD> Further information on responsibilities required to be provided by Lanco.

Contact Details
<HOLD> Applied to finalisation of a working document for management, to be updated upon final
DSDMP.
2419-011-001-001
Page 19
20-November-2012
Management Framework
Dredging and disposal of dredge material for the Bunbury Port Berth 14A development is to be
managed under both Commonwealth and State legislation, including relevant conditions of
development approval based upon the assessment of the Berth 14 PER. In support of these formal
instruments are the management, monitoring and reporting standards outlined within the National
Assessment Guidelines for Dredging ((NAGD), Commonwealth of Australia, 2009a) and the . The
following sections detail the requirements of the NAGD, Commonwealth and State regulatory
authorities with regards to dredging approvals and permits.
This section also details the role of the Technical Advisory Consultative Committee (TACC), for
dredging and outlines the broader management framework developed by Lanco in discharging their
environmental commitments.
5.1
National Assessment Guidelines
The process by which dredge operations are to be managed by Lanco will follow those outlined within
the NAGD. The NAGD recognises the strong association between dredging and the economic viability
of many of Australias port developments, and on-going trade opportunities. The coordinated and
timely approach to environmental investigations, permitting, management and approvals is
considered important to maximising economic opportunity, whilst maintaining sustainability of our
coastal resources (Commonwealth of Australia, 2009a).
5.2
State Assessment Guidelines
The OEPA draws upon information presented by proponents in the context of relevant regulatory
frameworks and t he advice of relevant regulators, both Commonwealth and State, during its
assessment of dredging proposals (EPA, 2011). These environmental issues include sea dumping,
contaminated site assessments and protection of wildlife. Proponents are responsible for addressing
the requirements of all relevant legislative and regulatory frameworks and guidance issued by other
agencies.
The Environmental Assessment Guideline for Marine Dredging Proposals (EAG 7) (EPA, 2011) is
specifically designed to ensure that the predicted extent, severity and duration of impacts to benthic
habitats associated with significant dredging activities, which are subject to formal environmental
impact assessment by the EPA, are presented in a clear and consistent manner.
5.3
Legislation and Approvals
The following sections outline the legislative framework under which this dredging is to be managed.
This includes routine approvals and applications directly related to dredging and disposal and
conditions of approval specifically developed for application to this Project via the PER process.
5.3.1
Commonwealth
5.3.1.1
Sea Dumping Act
The Sea Dumping Act 1981 (Sea Dumping Act) implements Australias obligations under the Protocol
to the Convention on the Prevention of Marine Pollution by Dumping Wastes and other Matter, 1972
(the London Protocol). Under the Sea Dumping Act, the NAGD (Commonwealth of Australia, 2009a)
sets out the framework for the assessment and permitting of the ocean disposal of dredged material.
Status of Approval: Lanco have submitted an application for for a Sea Dumping Permit for ocean
disposal of dredge material. Once the assessment is completed, and if the application is approved,
the permit and its associated conditions will be incorporated into the draft DSDMP management
strategies. Details will be provided following assessment of the Sea Dumping Permit. <HOLD>
5.3.1.2
Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act
For all sea dumping activities that are the subject of a permit application under the Sea Dumping Act,
the Department of Sustainability Environment Water Population and Community (DSEWPaC) will
2419-011-001-001
Page 20
20-November-2012
make a determination (in accordance with Section 160 of the Environment Protection and Biodiversity
Conservation Act 1999 (EPBC Act) whether approval is also required under this Act. The Minister will
consider whether the action will have significant impact on the environment. The EPBC Act promotes
the conservation of biodiversity by providing strong protection for:
Listed species and c ommunities in Commonwealth areas (this includes listed threatened
species and ecological communities, listed migratory species and listed marine species);
Cetaceans (all whales, dolphins and porpoises) in Commonwealth waters and outside
Australian waters; and
Protected areas (World Heritage properties; Ramsar wetlands; Biosphere reserves;
Commonwealth reserves; Great Barrier Reef Marine Park; and conservation zones.
Status of Approval: An EPBC referral has been provided to DSEWPaC. Relevant matters of
National Environmental Significance are considered within the Sea Dumping permit approval process,
and detailed within Section 8.4.1.1 of this draft DSDMP. The outcomes of the EPBC review and
determination of assessment requirements have been used to scope t his draft DSDMP regarding
management of Matters of National Environmental Significance
<HOLD> To be adopted from the Commonwealth assessment report generated for the finalised Sea
Dumping Permit. Finalised conditions will be incorporated within the monitoring, management and
response measures. Details of approval conditions will be provided within Appendix.
5.3.2
State
<HOLD> Approvals and permits to conduct capital dredging in WA to be incorporated here. The draft
DSDMP would be amended as required to reference conditions of approval for the PER. Detailed
conditions of approval will be provided within Appendices.
5.3.3
Conditions of Approval
The following tables summarise the conditions of approval obtained from the OEPA (Table 6) and
Commonwealth Government (Table 7) based upon the finalised PER Assessment Report and Sea
Dumping Permit approval. The relevant requirements are detailed and a reference to the section of
the draft DSDMP which addresses them is provided. Complete conditions of approval are
incorporated within Appendix <HOLD>.To be c ompleted post PER and Sea Dumping Permit
approval.
Table 6: Western Australian Ministerial Implementation Statement which requires compliance
to the following conditions regarding dredging operations.
Condition
Section
Condition
Section of
DSDMP
assessment report for the Berth 14A Project and Sea Dumping Permit.
Condition
Section
2419-011-001-001
Condition
Page 21
Section of
DSDMP
20-November-2012
5.4
Technical Advisory and Consultative Committee
Under the NAGD, development of a Technical Advisory and Consultative Committee (TACC) is
required to assist in the consultation process required for the Sea Dumping Permit application.
Appendix C of the NAGD states that The TACC is intended to assist port, other proponents and the
Determining Authority to access local knowledge and reconcile various stakeholder interests. A
TACC is to be established for the Berth 14A Project. The role of the TACC is to provide:
Continuity and direction and effort in protecting the environment;
A forum where issues and concerns can be discussed and resolved;
Review management of dredging and dumping activities, and permitting arrangements);
Recommendations to the proponent and the determining authority as necessary or
appropriate;
Coordination of multiple uses and users; and
The principal mechanism for communication and community engagement.
The TACC includes representatives from: <HOLD>
Koombana Bay Sailing Club

<HOLD>
<HOLD>
Table 8: TACC representatives chart

Independent Chair
Bunbury Port
Authority
5.4.1
Environment
Group
Community
Bunbury
City Council
Dolphin
Discovery
Centre
TACC Meeting Outcomes
<HOLD>
2419-011-001-001
Page 22
20-November-2012
Dredging Proposal
6.1
Location and Volumes
The marine components of the Project include deepening of the seabed at Berth 14A through
dredging of sediments and potentially, rock fracturing (blasting) of the underlying material. The berth
pocket is proposed to be dredged to approximately -12.7 m CD with berth approach areas dredged to
approximately -12.2 m CD to accommodate bulk carriers with at least 225 m LOA. They will access
the berth via the existing shipping channel through Koombana Bay (Figure 1).
The footprint of the swing basin and its approaches are currently located in very shallow water
(approximately -3m CD), with the berth and wharf frontage to be ex cavated from the present land
frontage. Historical aerial photography identifies these shallow waters as including part of the original
Leschenault Estuary and shoreline sand dune system. The Inner Harbour was separated from the
northern estuary system during port development and reclamation processes occurring since the
1950s.
The total volume of material required to be removed for establishment of the berth is estimated to be
up to 2,700,000 m of which up to 1,900,000 m may be placed at sea. The dredging and rock
excavation program is estimated to last up to 45 weeks. It is estimated that up to 20,000 m of rock
excavation may be required to finalise dredge depths within the berth pockets (Figure 3).
Figure 3: Indicative diagram showing bathymetry of Berth 14 before and after dredging (Evans
and Peck, 2009).
The proposed indicative layout of Berth 14A is presented in Figure 4.
2419-011-001-001
Page 23
20-November-2012
Figure 4: Proposed port and Berth 14A layout.
6.2
Dredging Methodology
At this early stage of design, the preferred method for dredging and removal of material is to conduct
land based excavation down to approximately sea level. This would be removed for construction use
in the adjoining terrestrial footprint of the Project in consultation with Bunbury Port Authority. Backhoe
dredge (BHD) and/or cutter suction dredge (CSD) (Figure 5) may then be used to remove material
from the marine and land footprint for disposal at the proposed off-shore disposal ground. Some
potential exists for the occurrence of basalt rock at depth near the limits of the proposed design.
Should rock be present this material may be fractured and barge mounted excavators would be used
to remove material to arrive at the final design profile. The rock material would be used for
construction purposes.
The proposed indicative steps during the dredge operations are outlined below:
Jumbo size backhoe dredger (BHD) loading into hopper barges;
BHD: Loads direct into barges as for offshore disposal;
Large Cutter Suction Dredger (CSD) loading all material other than rock direct into split
hopper barges; and
CSD Working: Hopper barge will commence overflowing after about 20 minutes then for the
remainder of the loading time overflowing will take place through a hopper overflow system at
about 4 to 5 m below water level.
CSD will be direct-loading into hopper barges. There will be no s ide-casting or double
handling of dredge material for subsequent pick-up to hopper barges.
2419-011-001-001
Page 24
20-November-2012
Example of backhoe dredge
Example of cutter suction dredge

Figure 5: Examples of backhoe and cutter suction dredges (Source: Jan de Nul).
6.2.1
Rock Excavation
Exposed rock at Casuarina Point, which forms the western boundary of Koombana Bay, includes a
mixture of basalt and limestone. Elsewhere throughout Bunbury and its surrounds, these rock layers
are overlain by sands and estuarine muds. The Bunbury basalt layer exists at varying depth
throughout the Bunbury Port area.
Experience based on the extensive rock removal work undertaken in the area during previous capital
dredging projects indicates rock fracturing (blasting) by explosives may be required to remove basalt
if it is encountered at the lower depths of the dredge profile in Berth 14A. Marine drilling and rock
fracturing (blasting) is a slow process and it is expected that a four boom jack up marine drilling and
3
rock fracturing (blasting) barge would be able to fragment approximately 7,500 m /week, drilling 24
hours per day. Rock fracturing (blasting) would be confined to daylight hours and the instantaneous
charge limited to a maximum of 50 kg per delay using precision rock fracturing (blasting) techniques.
Rock material would be used for construction fill. During the initial rock fracturing (blasting), a
maximum instantaneous charge (MIC) not exceeding 28 kg (ANFO equivalent) is proposed.
6.3
Dredge Schedule
<HOLD> Insert a high level GANT Chart when schedule is better defined.
A previous study undertaken by Evans & Peck (2009) for the Bunbury Port Authority for the
development of the proposed Project provides general detail and order of magnitude estimates of
material to be removed for the Berth 14A construction. Table 9 indicates the indicative volumes of
material to be dredged and an estimated duration (from Technical Report 1).
2419-011-001-001
Page 25
20-November-2012
Table 9: Indicative dredge volumes and durations.

3
Material
Dry excavation
800,000 to land disposal
Marine Sediments
1,150,000
Weakly Cemented
590,000
Cemented Material
168,000
Total to Ocean Disposal
1,908,000
Basalt Rock
Indicative Duration
40 weeks
A total of 5 weeks rock
fracturing (blasting) and
BHD Grab
20,000
It is assumed that a l arge CSD will direct cut material and alternately load two large self propelled
3
hopper barges (3,700m ) for disposal at a proposed offshore placement ground. Based on a typical
speed of 10 k nots, placement time of 10 minutes and a m ooring time of 5 minutes, the cycle time
available to go t o and from the proposed dredge material placement ground is 90 and 60 m inutes
respectively, for the two hopper barges. These calculations are based on the location of the proposed
placement ground approximately 13 km northwest from the Berth 14A construction site. Average
3
production for ocean disposal is conservatively assumed to be 10,000 m /day including allowance for
weather.
6.4
Dredge Material Placement Grounds
The location of the proposed dredge material placement ground in relation to the development and
the existing BPA dredge material placement ground is shown in Figure 1. The site is located at
approximately 22 m CD. The site is approximately 8.5 km directly west from the nearest shoreline
and approximately 13 km north-west of the entrance to the Inner Harbour. It i s separated from the
shore by a reef complex and is on the northern side of submarine sediment fan or delta. It appears to
be in a depression between two submarine sediment fans. Sediment in the area is coarse sand. Any
movement of sediment placed in the area is therefore likely to be confined. It also occurs well offshore
and seaward of existing inshore reefs.
Site selection assessments have been undertaken confirming the preferred location of the spoil
ground (Technical Report 2).
6.5
Dredge Material
The following provides details of the physical and chemical characteristics of the material to be dredged.
6.5.1
Physical Characteristics
Unconsolidated surface marine sediments in the dredge footprint to a depth of 2.0 m were physically
characterised in the field; details are provided within Table 10. A summary of particle size description
(PSD) results are presented in Figure 7 and Figure 10 for samples within the marine area of the
dredge footprint. The results identify that the upper unconsolidated sediments within the dredge area
are dominated by fine to medium sand fractions (70%), with lesser silt and clay sized materials (30%).
PSD appears generally consistent across sites within the upper profile of the dredge area, consisting
of unconsolidated marine sands, silts and clays.
Sample Depth
Field
Presence of Shell
ID
(m)
Texture
SED6
0-0.5
Clay loam
Nil
SED6
0.5-1.0
Light clay
Nil
SED6
1.0-1.9
Nil
SED9
SED9
0-0.4
0.4-0.8
Medium
clay
Sand
Sand
2419-011-001-001
Shell fragments
Shell fragments
Page 26
Presence of
Organics
Fibrous material
and some twigs
Fibrous material
and some twigs
Fibrous material
and some twigs
Few twigs
Few twigs
Odour Detected
Slightly anoxic
Anoxic
Anoxic
Nil
Nil
20-November-2012

Sample Depth
Field
Presence of Shell
ID
(m)
Texture
SED14
0-0.5
Light clay
Nil
SED14 0.5-0.8
Light clay
Nil
SED18
0-0.5
Light
Nil
medium
clay
SED18 0.5-1.0
Medium
Nil
clay
SED18 1.0-2.1
Sand
Multiple bivalve
shells
SED23
0-0.5
Clay loam
Nil
SED23 0.5-1.0
Light
Nil
medium
clay
SED23 1.0-1.8
Sand
Nil
SED46
0-0.5
Clay loam
Nil
SED46 0.5-0.9
Clay loam
Nil
SED71
0-0.4
Clay loam
One bivalve shell
SED71
0.4-1.1
Sand
SED76
0-0.5
SED76
0.5-1.0
Light
medium
clay
Heavy clay
SED76
SED82
1.0-1.8
0-0.5
Heavy clay
Sandy clay
SED82
0.5-1.2
Sand
SED86
SED86
0-0.5
0.5-1.0
SED86
1.0-1.6
Clay loam
Light
medium
clay
Sandy clay
SED90
SED90
SED102
0-0.5
0.5-1.2
0-0.5
Clay
Sand silt
Sandy clay
SED102
0.5-1.1
Sand
SED106
SED106
SED107
SED107
0-0.5
0.5-1.1
0-0.5
0.5-1.0
Clay loam
Loamy sand
Clayey sand
Loamy sand
SED107
1.0-1.9
Loamy sand
Fine shell
fragments
Nil
Nil
Nil
Fine shell
fragments
Fine shell
fragments
Two shells
Few shell
fragments
Few shell
fragments
One mussel shell
Nil
Some bivalve
shells
Some shell
fragments
Nil
One bivalve shell
Shell fragments
Some shell
fragments
Some shell
fragments
Presence of
Organics
Multiple twigs
Multiple twigs
Nil
Odour Detected
Some fibrous
material
Nil
Slightly anoxic
Nil
Fibrous material
and two twigs
Low anoxic
Slightly anoxic
Nil
Fibrous organics
Fibrous organics
Fibrous material
and one twig
Nil
Nil
Slightly anoxic
Anoxic
Nil
Fibrous material
and two twigs
Slightly anoxic
Some fibrous
material
Two small twigs
Fibrous material
Nil
Very low anoxic
Nil
Nil
Nil
Fibrous material
High fibrous
material
Anoxic
Anoxic
High fibrous
material
Fibrous material
Fibrous material
Some twigs
Anoxic
Anoxic
Anoxic
Very low anoxic
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Slightly anoxic
Nil
Very low anoxic
Nil
Nil
Nil
Slightly anoxic
Anoxic
Slightly anoxic
Nil
Nil
To confirm the composition of the deeper sediment profile within the footprint, a q ualitative
assessment of core logs sampled in previous studies as well as during the current baseline sediment
sampling program was undertaken. The indicative sediment profile is shown in Figure 6. Silt and clay
fractions are expected to increase within the dredge profile with depth.
2419-011-001-001
Page 27
20-November-2012
Figure 6: Qualitative assessment of sediment types within the dredge footprint.

CLS: Clay loam sandy (30-35% clay); MHC: Medium heavy clay (50% or more clay); SCL:
Silty clay loam (20-30% clay); and BA: Basalt (McDonald and Isbell, 2009).
The PSD was analysed from four samples taken from each of three sediment cores from within the
dredge footprint. In addition, PSD results from previous studies (n = 30) undertaken within the Project
area was extracted, adjusted to Australian Height Datum (AHD) and a dded to the data collected in
this study. The average percentage passing across the depth profile is shown in Figure 7 .
2419-011-001-001
Page 28
20-November-2012
100%
Percenatge Passing
80%
60%
>500m PSD
250-500m PSD
125-250m PSD
40%
63-125m PSD
30-63m PSD
10-30m PSD
<10m PSD
20%
0%
Depth Below AHD (m)
Figure 7: Particle size distribution within dredge footprint.

Sediment induration (hardness) results through the dredge profile at Berth 14A at different boreholes
and depth of first encounter of basalt layer (WML Consultants, 2009) are presented in Figure 8. The
results suggest the bulk of the material within the dredge footprint is weakly cemented (<100 kPa).
Borehole 6 (BH 6) where weathered basalt was encountered in previous studies near the bottom of
the dredge profile was investigated in the current environmental assessment using a stem core auger
drill used for sediment sampling profile on the terrestrial footprint. Rock was encountered within < l m
of the proposed bottom of the dredge area at BH 6 location only in the current field sampling exercise.
The material was crumbly and greenish in appearance and resembled highly weathered basalt
material confirming previous reports.
45
Basalt encountered
40
35
Penetration Test
30
25
Moderately
cemented
20
15
BH1
10
BH2
BH3
5
0
BH4
0
10
12
14
16
BH6
Depth Below AHD (m)
Figure 8: Sediment induration (hardness) results through the dredge profile at Berth 14A at
different boreholes and depth of first encounter of basalt layer (WML Consultants, 2009).
2419-011-001-001
Page 29
20-November-2012
6.5.2
Marine Dredge Footprint COPCs
Sediments within the existing marine footprint of the proposed development at Berth 14A are
considered suitable for unconfined ocean disposal (Technical Report 8). Although some elevated TBT
levels have been recorded, detailed analysis following the Phase 3 sampling protocols provided within
the NAGD, have confirmed 95%UCL concentrations are below the nominated disposal guidelines. All
metals, organic compounds, and radionucleides meet the criteria for ocean disposal without the need
for further testing.
6.5.2.1
Metals
A summary of the metal results from the marine dredge footprint is provided in Table 11. All metals
were below the relevant screening level
Table 11: Summary of metal results from marine dredge footprint.
Screening
Standard
Units
Mean
Level
Deviation
Aluminium
mg/kg
13,652
10,489
Antimony
mg/kg
2
1.2
0.9
Arsenic
mg/kg
20
8.1
5.9
Cadmium
mg/kg
1.5
0.1
0.1
Chromium
mg/kg
80
23.7
15.8
Cobalt
mg/kg
4.5
2.9
Copper
mg/kg
65
13.1
9.7
Iron
mg/kg
17,756
12,479
Lead
mg/kg
50
9.1
5.7
Manganese
mg/kg
128
70.8
Mercury, total
mg/kg
0.2
0.0
0.0
Nickel
mg/kg
21
8.8
7.2
Selenium
mg/kg
0.4
0.2
Silver
mg/kg
1
<0.1
Vanadium
mg/kg
33.2
22.4
Zinc
mg/kg
200
32.4
19.9
6.5.2.2
95% UCL
16,696
1.4
9.8
0.1
28.3
5.4
15.9
21,378
10.8
149.3
0.0
10.9
0.4
<0.1
39.8
38.2
Inorganics
Total nitrogen had a mean of 1,500 mg/kg with concentrations ranging from 70 to 4,020 mg/kg.
Total phosphorous had a mean of 360 mg/kg with concentrations ranging from 43 to 680mg/kg.
No criteria are defined within the NAGD for nutrient parameters. The results are summarised in
Table 12.
Table 12: Inorganic parameter levels within marine dredge footprint
Parameter
Units
Min
0.22
%
Total Nitrogen
%
0.01
Ammonium
mg/kg
1.00
Nitrate
mg/kg
0.50
Nitrite
mg/kg
0.50
Total Phosphorus
mg/kg
43.00
Available Phosphorus
mg/kg
3.00
Cyanides
mg/kg
<0.5
6.5.2.3
Max
9.46
0.40
12.00
4.00
0.50
680.00
96.00
<0.5
Average
3.25
0.15
4.62
0.66
0.50
336.76
35.32
<0.5
Organochlorine and Organophosphate Pesticides
Organophoshate pesticides were below the LOR (<10 ug/kg).

With the exception of DDD and DDE, all organochlorine pesticides were below the LOR (<1 ug/kg).
DDD and DDE organochlorine pesticides were reported above the LOR in 3 samples. However,
normalisation of results to 1% TOC resulted in values below the NAGD screening criteria
(2 ug/kg).
2419-011-001-001
Page 30
20-November-2012
Calculation of the 95% UCL for the overall DDE concentration within dredge footprint was
0.58 ug/kg.
Sediments are compliant to the NAGD guideline criteria. The results are summarised in Table 13.
6.5.2.4
Organotins
TBT concentrations above the laboratory limits of reporting (LOR) were recorded at most
sites. At 2 s ampling locations one sample following normalisation to 1% Total Organic
Carbon (TOC) reported concentrations above the criteria.
Phase 3 t esting (raw sediment and el utriate analysis) was undertaken to collect additional
information from this section of the dredge footprint. Sampling density followed that required
within the NAGD.
Normalised TBT concentrations from sites reassessed following Phase 3 requirements
ranged between 0.2 ug/kg and 6.4 ug/kg, resulting in a mean concentration of 2.1 ug/kg and
95% UCL of 4.5 ug/kg. These results returned compliant concentrations as compared to the
NAGD screening criteria of 9 ug/kg.
The 24 samples submitted for elutriate analysis at SED100, SED102, SED104 and SED106
also reported water quality concentrations below the LOR (<0.002 ug/L) from all samples.
TBT within the sediments to be dredged represent concentrations below the nominated
guideline criteria established within the NAGD. The results are summarised in Table 13.
6.5.2.5
Hydrocarbons
All TPH fractions remained below the laboratory limits of reporting at all sites.
6.5.2.6
PAHs
Minor concentrations of fluoranthene, pyrene, benzo(a)anthracene and chrysene were

recorded at SED46 (0-0.5m). Similar concentrations of fluoranthene and pyrene were recorded
at SED71 (0-0.5m). There are no NAGD screening levels for individual PAHs for comparison to
criteria.
Total reportable PAHs (normalised to 1% TOC) remained below the LOR for all sites (< 170 ug/kg)
and well below the NAGD screening level criteria for total PAHs (10,000 ug/kg). The results are
Table 13: Summary of organic parameters results from marine dredge footprint.
Screening
Standard
Units
Mean
Level
Deviation
%
3.2
2.5
Organotins
Monobutyltin as Sn
g/kg
<0.5
Dibutyltin as Sn
g/kg
0.5
0.6
Tributyltin as Sn
g/kg
9.0
13.8
50.6
PAHs
Pyrene
g/kg
4.9
0.4
Benz(a)anthracene
g/kg
4.8
0.6
Chrysene
g/kg
4.8
0.6
Total PAH
g/kg
10,000
<20
OC Pesticides
pp-DDE
g/kg
2.2
0.2
0.3
pp-DDD
g/kg
2.0
0.3
0.7
2419-011-001-001
Page 31
95% UCL
3.9
<0.5
0.7
28.5
5.0
5.3
<20
0.3
0.6
20-November-2012
6.5.2.7
Radionucleides
Radionucleides (alpha) remained below the LOR at 0.6 Bq/g. Beta radiation was detected well
below the NAGD screening (35 Bq/g), recording a mean of 0.125 Bq/g.Sediments are
compliant to the NAGD criteria.
6.5.3
Terrestrial Dredge Footprint
A summary of the metal results from the terrestrial dredge footprint is provided in Table 14. All metals
were below the relevant screening levels.
6.5.3.1
Metals
Table 14: Summary of metal results from terrestrial dredge footprint.

Screening
Standard
Units
Mean
Level
Deviation
Aluminium
mg/kg
1,352.8
1,785.5
Antimony
mg/kg
2
<2
Arsenic
mg/kg
20
3.3
2.3
Cadmium
mg/kg
1.5
0.04
0.03
Chromium
mg/kg
80
25.2
8.6
Cobalt
mg/kg
0.8
0.7
Copper
mg/kg
65
1.1
1.7
Iron
mg/kg
3,276.3
3,408.9
Lead
mg/kg
50
1.8
1.0
Manganese
mg/kg
51.6
54.6
Mercury, total
mg/kg
0.2
<0.02
Nickel
mg/kg
21
1.8
1.2
Selenium
mg/kg
0.06
0.08
Silver
mg/kg
1
0.03
0.04
Vanadium
mg/kg
7.1
6.8
Zinc
mg/kg
200
1.2
1.2
Screening level (effects range-low) from the NODGDM (DE&H, 2002)
6.5.3.2
95% UCL
5,888.5
<2
7.2
0.1
41.2
1.9
5.0
9,145.0
2.6
193.0
<0.02
4.0
0.12
0.04
19.8
2.7
Organotins, Pesticides and Hydrocarbons
A summary of the organic parameters for the terrestrial dredge footprint is provided in Table 15. The
results of the analysis for organic parameters indicate the following:
For all locations, the raw TBT levels were below the NAGD screening levels (9 g/kg). Raw
TBT levels were also below the laboratory limits of reporting (LOR) (<0.5 g/kg). According to
NAGD guidelines, samples less than the laboratory limits of reporting will remain as half of
the LOR.
All TPH fractions remained below the laboratory limits of reporting at all sites;
Fluoranthene, pyrene, benzo(a)anthracene and chrysene were below the laboratory limits of
reporting (<10 g/kg) at all locations. There are no NAGD screening levels for individual
PAHs for comparison to criteria;
Total reportable PAHs (normalised to 1% TOC) remained below the LOR for all sites
(< 170 g/kg) and well below the NAGD screening level criteria for total PAHs (10,000 ug/kg);
Organophoshate pesticides were below the LOR (<10 g/kg);
All organochlorine pesticides were below the LOR (<1 g/kg) at all locations.
Table 15: Summary of organic parameters results from terrestrial dredge footprint.
Screening
Standard
Units
Mean
Level
Deviation
%
0.6
1.1
Organotins
Monobutyltin as Sn
g/kg
0.29
0.19
Dibutyltin as Sn
g/kg
<0.5
-
2419-011-001-001
Page 32
95% UCL
1.9
0.2925
<0.5
20-November-2012
Tributyltin as Sn
PAHs
Pyrene
Benz(a)anthracene
Chrysene
Total PAH
OC Pesticides
pp-DDE
pp-DDD
6.5.3.3
g/kg
<0.5
<0.5
g/kg
g/kg
g/kg
g/kg
10,000
<10
<10
<10
<170
<10
<10
<10
<170
g/kg
g/kg
2.2
2
<1
<1
<1
<1
The total organic carbon (TOC) averaged 2.2% (0.24 SE, n= 96 samples) across the dredge
footprint. In the marine footprint, TOC averaged 3.2% (0.32 SE, n=54 samples) while in the
terrestrial footprint, TOC averaged 0.6% (0.18 SE, n=38 samples). Figure 9 shows average TOC by
sampling interval across the dredge footprint. Comparatively higher TOC is found in the marine
footprint as typically expected in estuarine environmental conditions.
4.5
4
TOC Content (%)
3.5
3
2.5
2
1.5
1
0.5
0
0-0.5
0.5-1.0
Marine
1.0-2.0
0-1.5
1.5-3
3.0-6.0
6.0-9.0
9.0-12.0
Terrestrial
Depth below AHD (metres)
Figure 9: Average total organic carbon (TOC) within the proposed dredge footprint. Error bars
represent standard error.
6.5.4
Dredge Material COPC Summary
marine dredge footprints at Berth 14A indicate that it is compliant with NAGD (Commonwealth of
Australia 2009a) criteria and on this basis is assessed as suitable for unconfined ocean disposal.
2419-011-001-001
Page 33
20-November-2012
6.6
Placement Ground
Sediment characterisation at the proposed dredge material placement ground has also been
determined.
Sediment grab samples were collected from the proposed dredge material placement ground. The
portion of large, coarse sediment (> 500 m) was high in comparison to the dredge area. The fine
grain percentage was very low across all of the samples with an a verage of less than 5% below
250 m (fine sand to clay fractions). Comparison of particle size distribution of sediments at the
disposal ground and area to be dredged is provided within Figure 10.
100%
90%
80%
Percentage Passing
70%
>500m PSD
250-500m PSD
60%
125-250m PSD
50%
63-125m PSD
30-63m PSD
40%
10-30m PSD
30%
<10m PSD
20%
10%
0%
Placement Ground
Dredge Footprint
Figure 10: Particle size distribution of sediment samples collected from the offshore disposal
location and the proposed dredge footprint.
2419-011-001-001
Page 34
20-November-2012
Potential Impacting Processes
The following potential impact summary has been identified through the consideration of predictive
modelling (hydrodynamic and sediment transport; underwater noise propagation; benthic habitat
mapping) and conclusions from detailed field and desktop studies. The findings of a project specific
risk assessment have also been adopted in characterising potential impacts is undertaken in the
corresponding PER for Berth 14
The proposed dredging works identified in Technical Report 1 (Indicative Dredge Plan for Modelling)
present several physical processes whereby potential environmental impacts may arise. Manipulating
these processes by way of changed dredge methodology, productivity, duration etc. may alter the
predicted impacts.
7.1
Barge Mounted Back Hoe Dredge
To conduct the dredging as proposed in Technical Report 1, a barge mounted Back Hoe Dredge
(BHD) excavator may be used during the early phase of dredging. This method provides access for
the cutter suction dredge operations to establish a working position for the bulk of the dredge works.
Large dredge buckets will remove material from the seabed and transfer it to waiting hopper barges.
BHD is a c omparatively low energy dredging process, with recovered material remaining in a bu lk
form, unlike cutter suction dredging which breaks down bed materials during cutting, transport and
pumping into smaller size materials. The release of fine materials forming turbidity plumes from the
BHD method is comparatively limited.
7.2
Cutter Suction Dredging and Overflow
For purposes of sediment transport modelling in the environmental assessment, a conservative base
case for dredging has been assumed using a Cutter Suction Dredge (CSD) for the entire excavation
of Berth 14A below sea level as outlined in the Indicative Dredge Plan. The process of cutter suction
dredging generates comparatively minor turbidity plumes from the cutter head, with the majority of
material being entrained within the suction pumps and disposed to waiting hopper barges.
It is the overflow from the hopper barges as they are filled with dredged sediment from the CSD which
presents the primary release point of fine sands, silts and clays to the water column in the dredging
process. This fine fraction release material disperses under prevailing hydrodynamic forces (wind
forcing, wave action, currents and tides) away from the dredge area as a water column turbidity plume
and benthic deposition front. The overflow from hopper barges typically commences approximately
20 minutes after commencement of pumping from the CSD. Overflow allows for the increased loading
of dredged solids in the hopper barge. Based on the characteristics of the dredge material at Berth
14A, it is expected that the overflow will continue for a period of 25-30 min as the hopper barge fills up
with solids.
The loaded hopper barge then departs to unload at the dredge material placement site and an empty
hopper barge comes to position and commences to fill from the CSD. Dredging using the CSD
process will extend up to a 40 week period under the Indicative Dredge Plan. Dredging operations are
programmed for 24hrs/day with an average operational period of 16 hours in a 24 hour cycle. Short
periods of shutdown would be anticipated for maintenance, refuelling and miscellaneous processes.
7.3
Vessel Transit
The transit of hopper barges from the dredge to the disposal area will increase Port traffic. Support
vessel traffic is also likely to increase within the inner and outer harbour areas, as well as along the
route to the proposed spoil ground. The vessels will be of predominately heavy displacement design,
operating at slow speeds.
7.4
Dredge Material Placement
Barges will place dredged material at the approved offshore dredge material placement location.
Placement of dredged material will be based on a geo-referenced grid network, allowing the hopper
barge to place the material in each grid cell, ensuring regular placement of dredge material across the
2419-011-001-001
Page 35
20-November-2012
placement ground. As outlined in the Indicative Dredge Plan (Technical Report 1), two barges may
operate during the project, with a load placement every 1.5-2hrs. Disposal of dredge material in
approximately 200 ha dredge material placement area is proposed in Commonwealth waters as
outlined in Technical Report 2 (Site Selection and Assessment for Offshore Placement of Dredge
Material). GPS located placement of each load at the placement ground is expected to take 5-10 min.
Placement will generate a dispersion plume, with the majority of material entrained to the seabed
during the disposal process. The resulting disposal plume and erosion analysis is assessed in the
Sea Dumping Permit.
The dispersion of the plume upon placement is expected to be short-term (<40 weeks), with 75% of
effects restricted to within 250 m of the placement ground and 95% of effects restricted to within
1,500 m of the placement ground. Hydrodynamic modelling also indicates declines in water quality
are likely to be short-term and intermittent within the Zone of Influence.
7.5
Underwater Noise
The operation of the BHD, CSD, hopper barges and miscellaneous shipping will increase the
underwater noise profile of the southern reaches of Koombana Bay and Bunbury Port in general
during the Berth excavation phase. Should basalt rock materials not suited to removal by CSD be
encountered in the dredge footprint, then drilling and rock fracturing (blasting) may be undertaken.
The rock fracturing (blasting) may occur over a 5 week period depending upon material volumes and
rock type encountered during the conclusion of the dredging process.
2419-011-001-001
Page 36
20-November-2012
Potential Impact on Existing Environment
This section outlines the existing environment of the Project Area and potential impacts as defined by
relevant technical studies. The interaction summary consolidates the impacting issues so that
monitoring and management strategies can be focused on critical areas of importance to ensure that
the predicted project specific environmental objectives (outcomes) contained within the PER are
achieved.
8.1
Coastal Processes
8.1.1
Koombana Bay is formed by a l ong breakwater that extends out from Point Casuarina. Prior to the
construction of the breakwater, the embayment was formed by the basalt rock outcrop off Casuarina
Point and submerged rock reef that extends in a northeast direction (PWD, 1978). Construction of the
breakwater commenced in 1870, construction of a spur groyne in 1949 and further extensions to 1961
(PWD, 1978). Koombana Bay has a m ean depth of 7 m with a dredged shipping channel,
approximately 250 m wide and 13 m deep, running north to south across the bay. The northwest
corner of the bay has also been dredged to create the Outer Harbour.
Bunbury, adjacent to Casuarina Point, effectively marks a natural boundary between the sandy coast
of Geographe Bay to the south and the rock ridge and coastal lagoon sequence that lies between
Bunbury and Mandurah to the north (Searle and Semeniuk, 1985). The continental shelf in this region
is relatively broad and shallow, with shelter from the prevailing southwest ocean swells provided by
the Leeuwin-Naturaliste ridge. Although some rock features can be obs erved, they are typically
present on the shore itself, or patchy in nature.
8.1.1.4
LiDAR Bathymetry and Multispectral Satellite Imagery
Analysis of subsea laser (LiDAR) bathymetry and multispectral satellite imagery of the coastal
seafloor area adjacent to Bunbury indicates a complex sequence of submerged remnants of coastal
and riverine features, many of which are lithified and partially covered by unconsolidated sediment
(Figure 11).
South of Casuarina Point the sequence begins with a sandy sediment apron approximately 0.5 to
0.75 km wide that includes the sandy beach extending along the shore. This apron overlies a broad
3.5 km wide, shallow submerged rock platform close to the shore. The inner half of the platform differs
in its topographic patterns from the second half further offshore, which suggests they may be of
different geological age or have different modes of formation. The two platforms are also separated by
bare seabed.
The inner platform terminates abruptly at an east-west line close to the southern shore of Koombana
Bay and merges with the basaltic topography. Seaward of the platform are two relict barrier systems
separated by flattish expanses of apparent interdune swale or lagoonal basins. The ridge systems are
roughly parallel to the modern shore and approximately 3.5 km and 5 km offshore from the modern
coastline.
North of Casuarina Point, the platform has an i rregular surface and extends further seaward with
some dissection by forms resembling drainage channels. These may be a broad palaeochannel at the
confluence of the Collie and Preston rivers. The channel appears to be a transport pathway and
sediment sink for material being moved off the inner shelf. Immediately north of the channel, two ridge
systems terminate on a broad flattish surface that may have been coastal wetland or alluvial flats in
the past. The inner ridge is difficult to discern and may merge with the platform. The outer ridge
system forms a fan shaped series of ridges and s wales curving north east towards the shore. The
seabed is bare in many of the swales as well as along the outer edge of the most seaward ridge.
2419-011-001-001
Page 37
20-November-2012
Figure 11: Geomorphology of the Project area integrated with LiDAR bathymetry.
8.1.1.5
Tides
The tides at Bunbury are micro-tidal and mixed diurnal-semidiurnal character (although predominantly
diurnal), which is typical of south Western Australia. Tides have a t ypical range of 0.5 m or less
2419-011-001-001
Page 38
20-November-2012
between highs and lows. Fluctuations due to pressure systems, storm surges or coastal waves can
create larger fluctuations in water level. T idal levels at Bunbury Harbour were obtained from the
Bunbury Port Authority. The spring-neap cycle is apparent, with a spring tide range of about 60 cm.
8.1.1.6
Waves and Currents
Wave data has been analysed from Beacon 3 an d Beacon 10 locations (Figure 12) located within
Koombana Bay. There is a seasonal variation in the peak significant wave heights, with the largest
waves occurring during the winter months. At Beacon 3, there is a s easonal variation in the peak
significant wave heights, with the large waves occurring during the winter months. The local sea
component wave heights are generally higher than the swell component. Peak sea heights reach 2 m,
and the swell component has peak wave heights on the order of 1.5 m (Figure 12). The swell
component has a period in the range of 12 to 14 seconds, whereas the sea component is much less,
on the order of 3 to 4 seconds. The waves generally propagate from the southwest, west and north
directions. Data from Beacon 10 do es not capture ocean swell due to its sheltered location in
Koombana Bay. The swell component is minimal since offshore swell rarely propagates to the inner
harbour due to the sheltered location. Locally generated sea component wave heights are generally
low in Koombana Bay but can reach nearly 1 m at times (Figure 12). The sea component period is on
the order of 2 seconds.
Figure 12: Wave heights recorded from Beacon 3 (top) and Beacon 10 (bottom).
Current data was also analysed from Beacon 3 and Beacon 10. Current roses were developed for the
Beacon 3 data for the combined 2009-2010 period for the summer (December to March) and winter
(June to September) periods (Figure 13). The roses show that during the summer the currents are
generally to the east-northeast, due to the prevailing winds. In the winter months, the current direction
is more varied, and aligns with the east-northeast to west-southwest direction. The depth averaged
currents are low and generally in the range of 4 to11 cm/s, and occasionally peaking above 20 cm/s.
2419-011-001-001
Page 39
20-November-2012
Figure 13: Current roses for Beacon 3 for summer (left) and winter (right). The roses indicate the
direction to which the current is flowing as oceanographic convention (to).
8.1.1.7
Wind
Long term wind data is available from several gauges within the Project area. Wind roses indicate
that winds from October through March for each year exhibit similar patterns, with winds from the
southeast and o ccasionally the southwest. In the other months, the winds are predominantly
lighter and from the east, but high winds will occur occasionally from all directions. There is a
strong sea breeze effect which is evident in the wind data. The wind speed peaks each afternoon
as the winds rotate from the north to the west. The winds continue to rotate counter-clockwise
through the night, repeating the pattern.
2419-011-001-001
Page 40
20-November-2012
2419-011-001-001
First Quarter 2008
Second Quarter 2008
Third Quarter 2008
Fourth Quarter 2008
Page 41
20-November-2012
First Quarter 2010
Second Quarter 2010
Third Quarter 2010
Fourth Quarter 2010
Figure 14: Wind roses for the Bunbury Outer Harbour for 2008 and 2010 showing average wind
speed (m/s) and direction and inter-annual variation in quarterly statistics. The roses indicate the
direction from which the wind is blowing as meteorological convention.
8.2
Water Quality
8.2.1
8.2.1.1
Depth Profiling
Depth profiling showed little variability in temperature, dissolved oxygen, pH and conductivity levels
across sample locations, both within Koombana Bay and offshore, and throughout the profile during
the sampling period (July to August 2011). River flows were low at this time. Mean temperature levels
within Koombana Bay ranged from 14.9C to 15.9 C. Mean dissolved oxygen levels within the bay
ranged from 7.1 to 8.3 mg/L (87.5 to 106.8 ODO%), reducing slightly with depth (delta = 1.2 mg/L).
There was little variation (< 0.1 pH units) in pH for both the Koombana Bay and offshore locations
with averages of 8.1 and 8.2 respectively.
2419-011-001-001
Page 42
20-November-2012
Mean conductivity levels within Koombana Bay ranged from 52,124 to 53,920 S/cm with slightly
higher levels recorded at the surface. At the offshore locations, average conductivity levels were
53,962 S/cm with little variation across the sampling dates and through the profile.
Turbidity levels within Koombana Bay were more variable. Turbidity levels within Koombana Bay
ranged from 9.6 to more than 300 NTU, with higher levels and variability in depths greater than 4 m.
The high turbidity levels measured close to the seafloor confirmed the presence of a nepheloid layer
in Koombana Bay during July and August. Turbidity was less variable at the offshore locations
ranging from 7.1 to 113.5 NTU, with some variability at the surface. For full details of depth profiling of
key water quality parameters (turbidity, salinity, dissolved oxygen) see Technical Report 3.
8.2.1.2
MODIS Imagery Analysis
Analysis of historic MODIS images provided an understanding of regional quarterly Total Suspended
Matter (TSM) statistics in marine waters of the Project area and s urrounds. Generally, the highest
average TSM levels within Koombana Bay were recorded during the third (July to September) and
fourth (October to December) quarters with TSM levels between 10 and 30 mg/L. The second quarter
(April to June) had the lowest TSM levels and lowest variation in the bay ranging from 4 to 15 mg/L.
The first quarter (January to March) had high variability with average TSM ranging from 2 to 30 mg/L.
For full details of MODIS imagery analysis see Technical Report 3.
8.2.1.3
Nutrients
Analysis of nutrients from previous water quality studies indicate the following exceedances in the
ANZECC (2000) Guidelines for Fresh and Marine Water Quality - Estuaries of SW Australia:
Nitrate-nitrate levels at the Inner and Outer Harbour surface waters in 2002;
Ammonium levels at all sampling locations in 1998, and Inner Harbour in 2006;
Orthophosphate levels at all sites in 2002, and Inner and Outer Harbour in 2006; and
Total phosphate levels at all sites in 2002 and 2004.
Chlorophyll a levels exceeded the guidelines at Inner Harbour surface waters and dredge material
placement ground bottom waters in 2002, and Inner and Outer Harbour in 2004.
Higher nutrient levels in the Inner and O uter Harbour are indicative of a w ider spread source than
activities within the port alone. Chlorophyll-a is a potential measure of available phytoplankton. The
major nutrients that govern phytoplankton growth are phosphorus and nitrogen. From the previous
monitoring surveys conducted in the port, there does not seem to be a s trong correlation between
nutrient and chlorophyll-a levels within the port area. However, this lack of direct correlation is typical
of plankton-nutrient dynamics in coastal systems. For full details of analysis of previous reports see
Technical Report 3.
8.2.1.4
Metals
Analysis of metals from previous baseline and routine water sampling indicates the following
exceedances in the environmental guideline (low reliability trigger value) (ANZECC, 2000):
Total aluminium levels at all sites during both baseline studies; and
Total aluminium levels at all sites during routine sampling, and selenium at all sites in during
November 2010 routine sampling.
The only exceedance of metals during both baseline studies and r outine sampling undertaken in
th
November 2010 was total aluminium. The 95 percentile of total aluminium levels in the Inner
Harbour was not significantly different to the reference sites suggesting that activities within the Inner
Harbour are not elevating ambient seawater levels. For full details of analysis of previous reports see
Technical Report 3.
8.2.1.5
Oceanic Exchange Study
To assist in spatially informing the design of the baseline water quality monitoring program (BWQMP)
and to assist in interpreting results of the BWQMP, a m odelling assessment of water flushing (i.e.
residence) time for Koombana Bay and the Bunbury Inner Harbour was conducted. The analysis was
conducted using the 3D hydrodynamic and transport model developed for the Bunbury Inner harbor
dredge plume analysis (Technical Report 4). Residence time was measured in terms of e-folding time
2419-011-001-001
Page 43
20-November-2012
where e-folding refers to exponential decay, the timescale for a quant ity to decrease to 1/e of its
previous value. The analyses indicated that e-folding times were relatively fast in the Bay, ranging
from 4 t o 6 d ays, and relatively slow in the Inner Harbour, ranging from 40 t o 90 days. This is
consistent with the geometry of Koombana Bay and the Inner Harbour. The bay is open to the
adjacent ocean, allowing for large-scale wind driven circulation to flush the area while the harbour has
a restricted entrance, limiting the flushing rate.
The analysis also indicated that the e-folding time varies seasonally, and also depends on the wind
characteristics occurring over the period of interest as shown in Figure 15. Full details of analysis are
provided in Technical Report 3, Appendix 3.E.
May 2009
2419-011-001-001
Page 44
20-November-2012
November 2009
Figure 15: Spatial pattern for e-folding times in May and November 2009.
8.2.2
Baseline Marine Water Quality Monitoring Program
the requirement to conduct a bas eline water quality monitoring program (BWQMP) to characterise
baseline marine physical and chemical water criteria occurring in the Project area which
encompasses Koombana Bay and the Inner Harbour.
To characterise seasonal continuous time series trends in baseline water quality and oceanographic
conditions in the area predicted to be potentially affected by dredging, two water quality loggers and
rd
an AWAC were deployed in Koombana Bay on t he 23 of December 2011 ( Figure 16). The water
quality loggers (OBS1 and OBS2) measure water quality parameters including turbidity (NTU),
dissolved oxygen (DO), conductivity, temperature and depth against time. The AWAC (ABS1) collects
current and wave profiling (height, velocity, direction) against time while post-processing of the
acoustic backscatter (ABS) signal from the AWAC is used to derive profiles of turbidity throughout the
water column at the site. The wave, current and TSS measurement capabilities of the AWAC also
enable the investigation of the relationship between physical processes and TSS variability. The
location of these loggers is based on the conservatively predicted extent of the 5 mg/l dredge plume
contour (5% of the time) from modelling (Figure 19). ABS1, OBS1 and OBS2 are located at the
boundaries of the expected impact zone. The water quality loggers are equipped with anti-fouling
devices to mitigate the risk of marine biofouling of the optical and dissolved oxygen sensors. The
AWAC (1 MHz) is configured to provide adequate precision for post processing for derivation of
turbidity from acoustic back scatter while capturing the key characteristics of wave and current profiles
with sufficient resolution (number of depth interval bins) and sampling rate for use in hydrodynamic
model re-validation. The loggers are serviced and data downloaded at approximately six week
intervals.
2419-011-001-001
Page 45
20-November-2012
Figure 16: Water quality, wave and current loggers are located at ABS1, OBS1 and OBS2 in
Koombana Bay.
Spot sampling was conducted at each of eight prescribed sites shown in Figure 17 at the time of
service of the loggers. Sampling design location was based on the Koombana Bay flushing study (see
example in Figure 15) to incorporate potential hotspots of reduced water quality. An YSI Multiparameter Water Quality Sonde consisting of sensors to measure temperature, conductivity, pH,
turbidity (NTU) and dissolved oxygen levels with depth was used to obtain the depth-profile for these
parameters at each location. Continuous depth profiles were recorded at each site.
2419-011-001-001
Page 46
20-November-2012
Figure 17: Sampling stations on flushing map

At each site a 1 litre Van Dorn water sampler was used to obtain a water sample approximately 1 m
above the seabed. C ollected water samples at each site were placed in labelled lab supplied
containers as follows:
Transferred directly to 200 ml containers for total and dissolved metals analysis;
Transferred directly to 500 ml for chlorophyll-a and TSS analysis. Dredge Plume
Management Zones (EAG 7)
The EPA has developed a spatially-based zonation scheme for proponents to use as a common basis
to describe the predicted extent, severity and duration of impacts associated with their dredging
proposals (EPA, 2011). Environmental Assessment Guideline 7 (EAG 7) sets out the preferred
approach for presenting impacts of dredging proposals that are subject to formal environmental
impact assessment. The scheme consists of three zones that represent different levels of impact:
EAG7 outlines the proposed framework for monitoring. These are described in Figure 18.
2419-011-001-001
Page 47
20-November-2012
Figure 18: An example map-form presentation of: a) the predicted Zone of Influence and the predicted
zones of High Impact and Moderate Impact associated with channel dredging (represented by the
black line) from EAG 7.
The equivalent Zone of Influence (ZOI) for dredging at Berth 14A is shown in Figure 19. Please refer
to Technical Report 4 to determine how these were derived. The 2 mg/L contour has been selected
as the boundary of the ZOI for the Berth 14A development as this concentration of total suspended
solids is approximately the lowest limit of visible detection which is appropriate for Koombana Bay
where social impacts are of key concern as no impacts on benthic habitat are anticipated due to its
absence in the Bay. The modelling predicts the extent of the Zone of Influence depicted in Figure 19
may occur 5% of the time (95%ile). Dredging will be managed through this management plan to
conform to the predicted Zone of Influence as outlined in the sub plans below.
2419-011-001-001
Page 48
20-November-2012
The Zone of Moderate Impact (ZOMI) for dredging at Berth 14A is shown in Figure 20. Please refer
to Technical Report 4 to determine how these predicted dredge plumes were derived. The 10 mg/L
contour has been selected as the boundary of the ZOMI for the Berth 14A. This is equivalent to the
ANZECC criteria for Water Quality Guideline trigger values for turbidity levels in estuarine systems of
approximately 6 N TU based on the calibration derived in the baseline water quality monitoring in
Koombana Bay. The modelling predicts the extent of the Zone of Moderate Impact may occur 25% of
the time. Dredging will be managed through this management plan to conform to the predicted Zone
of Influence as outlined in the sub plans below.
2419-011-001-001
Page 49
20-November-2012
8.2.3
Predicted Dredge Plume
Hydrodynamic and Sediment Transport modelling to assess the impacts of dredging on the
surrounding environment has been undertaken and is described in PER Technical Report 4.
Modelling simulations were run for 2009 as this year displayed representative winds and other
meteorological conditions. Modelling simulations indicate that the dredge plume will remain mostly
within the Inner Harbour and south eastern portion of Koombana Bay as shown in Figure 21 and
Figure 22. The dredge plume is predicted to largely be contained within the inner harbour and
infrequently extend outside of the Inner Harbour and partly along Koombana and P ower Stations
beaches.
Figure 21: Contours showing depth-averaged TSS concentrations exceeded 25% of the time
for Scenario 1 based on a 40 week simulation. Concentrations are in excess of ambient TSS
concentrations. 10 mg/L contour represents Zone of Moderate Impact (ZoMI)
2419-011-001-001
Page 50
20-November-2012
Figure 22: 12-hour time sequence of depth-averaged dredge plume behaviour for Scenario 1.
8.2.4
Predicted Dredge Plume during Dredging Campaign
Time-series extracts from four key locations (Figure 23) have been presented from the model (Figure
24). The predicted time-series data shows the highly variable plume concentrations that can be
expected, with extended periods of respite during the earlier phases of dredging. Based on the
Indicative Dredge Plan (Technical Report 1), and dredge material characterisation information, the
highest turbidity concentration is predicted to occur near the end of the dredging operations and
corresponds to the times when clay lenses are likely to be encountered in the deeper section of the
sediment profile.
Figure 23: Location of time-series extraction points (Location A-D) and baseline monitoring
site (M).
2419-011-001-001
Page 51
20-November-2012
The highest TSS concentrations from the four time-series extract locations in Koombana Bay are
predicted to occur at Location B, which is to the west of the dredge operations offshore of Koombana
Beach. In that area, the simulations indicate that suspended sediment concentrations remain below
20 mg/L for the majority of the dredge campaign, increasing to a mean of 30-40 mg/L, with shorter
period spikes nearing 16 0mg/L.
The impacts are predicted to be less in the other areas of Koombana Bay, with Location A having the
second highest recordings in this modelling output. At this location, the concentrations generally do
not exceed 5 mg/L except when the clay lenses are encountered during which the concentrations
reach 20 mg/L for brief periods and spikes up to 60 mg/L.
2419-011-001-001
Page 52
20-November-2012
Figure 24: Time series of depth-averaged concentrations for the four locations for Scenario 1.
Concentrations are in excess of ambient TSS concentrations.
Comparison of predicted dredge plume effects against measured TSS levels baseline at M in the
middle of Koombana Bay (Figure 23) is presented as percentiles in Table 16. M1 was initially
selected to represent the potential impact of turbidity as it is within the zone of influence and
represents a gradient point on the pathway to social amenity receptors and potentially sensitive
benthic habitats identified in Koombana Bay (Technical Report 5).
8.2.5
Zone of Moderate Impact (ZoMI) and Ambient Turbidity
The summary results of turbidity in the baseline monitoring program conducted from December
2011 at 3 stations in Koombana Bay using continuous turbidity loggers are shown in Figure 25.
The predicted Zone of Moderate Impact (ZoMI) predicted for the dredge plume (equivalent to the
80%ile dredge plume contours) is also shown in Figure 25. The logging stations used for baseline
monitoring sit outside the predicted ZoMI. It is apparent that the background values within the bay
are generally higher than that predicted for the ZoMI. The modelling suggests that the Zone of
High Impact will be contained within the Inner Harbour.
Figure 25: 95%ile (red) 90%ile (green) and 80%ile (yellow) turbidity (TSS mg/l) statistics at the three
logging stations from December 2011-October 2012 and the predicted 10 mg/L 80%ile dredge plume
(Zone of Moderate Impact).
2419-011-001-001
Page 53
20-November-2012
The predicted Zone of Moderate Impact (Figure 25) is therefore the anticipated boundary of
potential ecologic effect on benthic habitats. H owever, no ben thic habitat is found within in or
adjoining the dredge influence area in the ZoMI. No ecological effect on benthic habitat due to
dredging at Berth 14A is therefore anticipated.
Time series predictions of the dredge plume showing the effect of clay lenses in the dredge profile
on resultant dredge plumes is shown in Figure 26. The 80%ile for baseline turbidity at each of
those sites is also indicated on t he relevant graph to support the inference that risk of turbidity
impacts on benthic habitats is very low.
Figure 26: Time series of predicted dredge plumes at selected locations in Koombana Bay and the
80%ile (red line) for baseline turbidity at each of those sites.
8.2.6
Zone of Influence (ZoI) and Ambient Turbidity
The Zone of Influence (ZoI) is more relevant to the proposed construction activities in relation to
Koombana Bay. The extent of the predicted visible plume is a community sensitive issue and the
protection of recreational and aesthetic values in Koombana Bay in an area with high community
focus is a key matter of potential concern in relation to dredging Activities at Berth 14A. As
discussed, the boundary of the ZOI for the Berth 14A dredging activity has been established as the
approximate limit of the visible plume (2 mg/L contour) predicted to occur 5% of the time (
Figure 27).
2419-011-001-001
Page 54
20-November-2012
Figure 27: Zone of Influence and respective continuous monitoring sites.

The sum effect of background and predicted dredge plume effects in the ZoI (events occurring 5% of
the time) at each of these logging sites is shown in Table 16.
Centre, Power Station Beach and Centre Koombana Bay 5% of the time.
Site
Baseline
Dredge
Sum Effect
AWAC
14
5
19
DDC
19
2
21
PSB
95
50
145
These results indicate that the predicted effect of dredging on turbidity in the ZoI in Koombana Bay
will be variable and is predicted to increase TSS for approximately 5% of the time as follows:
Dolphin Discovery Centre - 19 to 21 mg/L.

Centre of Koombana Bay 14 to 19 mg/L
Power Station Beach 95 to 145 mg/L
In relative terms the largest effect is predicted at Power Station beach which already incurs relatively
high background turbidity values of 95 mg/L.
8.2.7
Seasonal, Wave and Wind Effects on Turbidity
Seasonal variation in %iles in the results is shown in Table 17. Spring is the most turbid period and
summer the clearest. Differences at a significantly relevant detectable level of change (95%ile)
between spring (10.8 mg/l) and summer (6.6 mg/l) is approximately 30%.
2419-011-001-001
Page 55
20-November-2012
Table 17: Turbidity %iles for TSS (mg/l) for central Koombana Bay.
Results of continuous wave height and turbidity profiling in Central Koombana Bay from
December 2011 t hrough October 2012 are shown in Figure 28. There is a s ignificant positive
relationship between wave height and turbidity (TSS). A significant positive relationship was also
found between wind speed and turbidity with a lag phase.
Figure 28: Wave height and turbidity profile from continuous acoustic logger in central Koombana Bay
8.2.8
Chemical Water Quality
The outputs of the hydrodynamic and sediment transport modelling predict the dredge plume will
only extend seaward of the Inner Harbour mouth for approximately 25% of the dredge period so
the level of risk to predicted water quality outcomes for turbidity effects on be nthic areas may
largely be confined to the industrialised Inner Harbour basin. However, whilst dredging plumes
are not predicted to affect benthic habitats due to their distance from the Berth 14A dredge
footprint, the extended dredge period combined with the low flushing regime in Koombana Bay
that results from low tides and c urrents has the potential to induce changes in other physicochemical and biological characteristics of water quality during the dredging period and for a short
period thereafter.
The analysis of dredge sediments under the NAGD (see Technical Report 8) concluded that
chemical contaminants of potential concern (COPCs) do not occur at concentrations in which
2419-011-001-001
Page 56
20-November-2012
dredging attributable COPC impacts to benthic fauna or water quality are anticipated. The dredge
material was therefore determined to be suitable for unconfined disposal. However, based upon
what is known of the dredge sediment chemical characteristics, there is potential for increased
organic matter and as sociated nutrients and dissolved materials other than COPCs contained
within the pore water and fine sediments of the dredge material to be mobilised to the water
column during dredging. An increase in nutrients and other chemical characteristics may result in
a build up of algal blooms etc. in areas of Koombana Bay where lower flushing occurs.
The flushing study examining residence time of water in Koombana Bay and the Inner Harbour
indicates e-folding times of 4-6 days in Koombana Bay and 40-90 days in the Inner Harbour.
Results also indicated that the e-folding time can vary, and depends on the wind characteristics
occurring over the period of interest. Therefore flushing simulations were conducted for a range of
conditions to estimate the range of variability (e.g. Figure 15). This assessment predicted a
spatially distributed range of water flushing rates within the study area and assists in identifying
potential hotspots for adverse water quality in Koombana Bay resulting from lower water
flushing rates. Monitoring of key water quality criteria, other than turbidity, in low flushing areas
will enable improved risk management in the dredging program to provide certainty in achieving
predicted environmental outcomes for the project.
These hotspots may also serve as risk indicators for adverse water quality as a r esult of
dredging. A program of chemical and physical water quality monitoring is proposed for key
receptor locations within the adjacent Koombana Bay area and areas identified as low flushing
potential hotspots that are considered useful risk indicator sites. These will be monitored during
baseline (BWQMP) and dredging periods.
Figure 29: Water sampling quality locations (8) on predicted Zone of Influence dredge plume.
2419-011-001-001
Page 57
20-November-2012
and chlorophyll at harbour (low) and bay (moderate) during 2012 baseline monitoring program. Red
arrows are suggested key metals for monitoring.
0.035
Concentration (mg/L)
0.03
0.025
0.02
0.015
0.01
Manganes
e (Total)
Aluminium
(Total)
Zinc (Total)
Zinc
(Dissolved)
Nickel
(Total)
Nickel
(Dissolved)
0.005
at harbour (low) and bay (moderate) during 2012 baseline monitoring program.
The key metals that may be influenced by acid sulphate effects of sediment during dredging are
aluminium and iron. pH may also be affected but given the strong buffering effects of seawater, are
unlikely to be significant. This is because the dredge material will be taken directly to ocean disposal
and significant oxidation of potential acid sulphate soil (including the suite of acid volatile sulphides),
generating acidity, is most unlikely. However, impacts on a fish health have been found in recent
dredging operations in other jurisdictions and mobilisation of metal suites in acid volatile sulphides in
the water column have been implicated in the impact. Particular metals of concern are aluminium and
iron. Baseline values for these metals are shown in
Table 18.
2419-011-001-001
Page 58
20-November-2012
Table 18: Total and dissolved metals in Koombana Bay water (n=6)
To monitor and manage this risk, proposed trigger levels for further investigation in the Zone of
Moderate Impact at WSQ5 (Figure 29) are:
pH < 7.0
8.3
Sediment Characteristics
8.3.1
Koombana Bay is predominantly comprised of bare sand and silt with the exception of a line of reef
on the north-eastern margin of the bay. Sediment in the shipping channel is predominantly less than
26 m with a high organic content (28-35%) (SKM, 2001). The nearshore environment in the Bunbury
region is highly modified. The opening of the Leschenault Estuary to the Indian Ocean at The Cut in
1951 and the realignment of the Preston River to allow for the construction of the Inner Harbour
removed the capacity for normal estuary sediment filtration processes to occur in the lower reaches of
the Leschenault Estuary. The Cut also transformed the Leschenault Estuary from a tidally influenced
estuary to an estuary dominated by wave influences (McComb et al. 2001; DoW 2007). Nowadays,
the discharge of water is directly from the central mud-basin of the estuary. It is estimated that of the
average 170,000 m of sediment that is estimated to accumulate annually in Koombana Bay, over
50% of this sediment is fine silt material, suggesting delivery from the estuary via The Cut (SKM 2001,
3
Shore Coastal 2009). Analysis of siltation rates suggests 45,000 m /yr is deposited in the sand trap
3
and Outer Harbour, while 125,000 m /yr is deposited in the Main Channel and Inner Harbour. The
rates appear to be primarily driven by high mean wave heights and influenced by winter water level
fluctuations (Shore Coastal 2009).
The PSD characteristics of existing surface sediments in Koombana Bay were assessed via field
survey. An interpolated sediment map of surficial sediment PSD in Koombana Bay is shown in Figure
32. The centre of the bay is characterised by fine silt (<65 m) while fine sand (66-250 m) occurs
along Koombana Beach, along the entrance to the Inner Harbour and a long Power Station Beach.
Fine sand also occurs between McKenna Point and the shipping channel. Medium (250-500 m) and
coarse (501-800 m) sand occur at the opening of The Cut.
Sediment in the shipping channel is predominantly less than 26 m with a high organic content (2835%) (SKM, 2001).
2419-011-001-001
Page 59
20-November-2012
Figure 32: Surface sediment median particle size contours and sampling stations in Koombana
Bay.
8.3.2
Potential Impact
marine dredge footprints at Berth 14A indicate that it is compliant with NAGD (2009) criteria and on
this basis is assessed as suitable for unconfined ocean disposal. Consequently, potential impacts
arising from contaminants of potential concern (COPC) on sediments in Koombana Bay as a result of
dredging Berth 14A is assessed as very low. This will be confirmed by taking benthic grab samples of
sediments at the same sites as the stations used for spot monitoring in the BWQMP (Figure 32).
Dispersion modelling results using a conservative assumption for final density of dredge plume
material of 400 kg/m3 indicates that sedimentation is not predicted to be a critical issue in the capital
dredging program for Berth 14A. Sedimentation outside the Inner Harbour from the dredging
operation is predicted to not exceed 1 mm (Figure 33). Moreover, evidence of the existing distribution
of fine fraction sediments within Koombana Bay indicates that the central portion of the Bay including
the shipping channel may present a natural location of increased deposition of fine fraction materials
and potentially exacerbated by maintenance dredging and s hipping operations (Figure 32). This
location remains remote from benthic habitats, and offshore from important recreational and local
tourism ventures such as the Dolphin Discovery Centre.
Sedimentation risks to the environment of Koombana Bay from dredging are considered to be minor.
Consequently, sediment deposition monitoring is not proposed for environmental purposes.
2419-011-001-001
Page 60
20-November-2012
Figure 33: Predicted sediment deposit at end of 40 week dredge operations assuming final
3
density of 400 kg/m .
8.4
Marine Fauna and Significant Species
8.4.1
8.4.1.1
Protected Matters Report
An EPBC Act Protected Matters Report was generated on t he April 12, 2011 for the Project. The
protected matters report identified 36 listed threatened species, four of which are likely to occur and
a further three that possibly occur in the area covered by the Protected Matters Report:
No threatened ecological communities were identified in the EPBC Protected Matters Report. There
are 29 listed migratory species identified in the EPBC Protected Matters Report. Twenty of the
Ardeamodesta (great egret) likely to occur;
Apuspacificus (fork-tailed swift) likely to occur (flyover only);
Meropsornatus (rainbow bee-eater) possibly occurs;
Haliaeetusleucogaster (white-bellied sea-eagle) possibly occurs; and
Actitishypoleucos (common sandpiper) known to occur.
2419-011-001-001
Page 61
20-November-2012
A desktop review of marine fauna was undertaken by the Centre for Marine Futures (CMF) at the
University of Western Australia (UWA, 2011). The review assessed the current status of marine
megafauna known to occur in the vicinity of the Project area and is summarised below. Full details are
available in Technical Report 7.
Cetaceans Whales and Dolphins
resident bottlenose dolphin population. Other species that may regularly occur on a seasonal basis in
southern right whales. Bottlenose dolphins and h umpback whales are two key marine megafauna
species that commonly occur in close proximity to the development area. Koombana Bay is home to a
resident population of bottlenose dolphins while humpback whales are known to migrate within two
kilometres of the coastline in this area during the months of September and October on their
southbound migration to Antarctica.
Approximately 196 individual resident bottlenose dolphins occur in and around Koombana Bay.
Dolphins are apex predators that are dependent on sustainable fish populations as their food source.
The large population of resident dolphins would be a significant factor in structuring the fish
assemblages of the local marine area. Dolphin abundance varies seasonally in Koombana Bay and
environs, with greater numbers of dolphins apparent during summer and aut umn (Figure 34). Birth
rates are also thought to vary seasonally, with a peak in calving activity during February and March
(Figure 34). The birthing season is a c ritical time to dolphin populations as newborn calves are
particularly vulnerable to disturbance.
The distribution of adult female dolphins within their apparent home range has also been
demonstrated to vary seasonally. During winter, the sighting density of female dolphins was fairly
evenly distributed across the Project area, while in summer and autumn, the density of female dolphin
sightings was concentrated in Koombana Bay and around the mouth of the Leschenault Estuary
(Figure 35).
Eight dolphin deaths have been recorded in the inner waters around Bunbury in recent years. These
inner waters encompass the Leschenault Estuary and Inlet, the Inner and Outer Harbour and the
Collie and Brunswick rivers (Murdoch University Press Release, 2009). The cause for these dolphin
deaths is the focus of a d olphin health investigation as part of the SWMRP (SWMRP Newsletter).
These eight dead dolphins were part of a group of 16 which almost exclusively ranged within the inner
waters in Bunbury (Murdoch University Press Release, 2009). There appears to be no clear trend in
the timing of the deaths and the cause remains unknown.
2419-011-001-001
Page 62
20-November-2012
Figure 35: Seasonal distribution of adult female dolphins around the Koombana Bar region.
Source SWMRP newsletter.
Humpback Whales migrate along the Western Australian between their feeding grounds in the
Southern Ocean and t heir calving grounds in the Kimberley (Jenner et al, 2001). Their northbound
migration takes them up t he Western Australian coast between mid-June and m id-July while their
return southbound migration, accompanied by calves, occurs during September and O ctober
annually, with a peak in the Bunbury region during the first two weeks in October (Jenner et al, 2001).
While southbound migratory whales are consistently sighted within 20 nm of the coastline, fewer
northbound whales are sighted within this distance from the coast (Jenner et al, 2001). Further
information on the humpback whale migratory pathways in the vicinity of Geographe Bay is provided
within Technical Report 7.
A number of other cetacean species have been recorded in the region, but the Project area does not
appear to represent a frequent or regular habitat for the following species; minke whales, false killer
whales, long finned pilot whales and Grays beaked whales.
Turtles
Two species of marine turtle are known to occur in southern Western Australian waters (loggerhead
turtle and leatherback turtle), and there is anecdotal evidence that green turtles may also occur.
Importantly, the southern Western Australian region does not constitute important nesting habitat for
any species of marine turtle.
The Australian sea lion and the New Zealand fur seal may migrate through Koombana Bay and
Geographe Bay though they are not found as residents in the Project area. While it is plausible that
sea lions may transit through the region, such occurrences are extremely rare.
Sharks
Two species of conservation significance, the great white shark (Carcharodon carcharias) and
western population of the grey nurse shark (Carcharias taurus), may occur in the Bunbury region.
Western Australian waters are thought to be a potential migratory pathway for great white sharks
migrating between South Australia, the Southern and Indian oceans, and South Africa.
The grey nurse shark has a br oad inshore distribution, primarily in subtropical to temperate waters
around continental landmasses (Last and Stevens, 2009). Grey nurse sharks tend to be found on the
continental shelf from the surf zone down to at least 190 m (Last and Stevens, 2009). The west coast
population of grey nurse shark is predominantly found in the south-west coastal waters of Western
Australia with aggregations tending to occur in basalt canyons off the coast.
Penguins
Little Penguins (Eudyptula minor) breed across southern Australia and the islands of New Zealand.
Little Penguins usually breed on offshore islands or less commonly, along parts of the mainland coast
that are inaccessible to mammalian predators. While no r ecorded published information on t he
presence of little penguins nesting along the Bunbury foreshore could be found, anecdotal information
from the Bunbury Dolphin Discovery Centre identified that penguins may utilise the Bunbury
2419-011-001-001
Page 63
20-November-2012
8.4.2
Potential Impacts
8.4.2.1
Cetacean Whales and dolphins
apparatus, boat strike, pollution (including acoustic pollution), and eco-tourism (Hall et al., 2000;
Constantine, 2001; Kennish, 2002; Vanderlaan and Taggart, 2007; Weilgart, 2007; Jenkins et al.,
2009). Such disturbances can result in the direct mortality of cetaceans or various indirect impacts
including changes to social structures and/or alienation from key habitats (Chilvers et al., 2003;
Weilgart 2007). A range of anthropogenic activities also have the potential to degrade habitat
important to the survival of cetaceans, or impact cetaceans directly. These activities may alter habitat
use by operating at times that coincide with the presence of whales, or they may occur by degrading
habitat suitability on a permanent or semi-permanent basis when cetaceans are absent. The
excavation of the shallow dredge footprint and development of infrastructure for Berth 14A will
permanently alter the habitat in that immediate area.
It is considered unlikely that the proposed project will lead to pollution or changes in water quality that
will adversely affect cetaceans. While dredging is proposed as part of this project, dredging is to be
located within the Inner Harbour. This area is not frequented by whales, though dolphins frequent the
area. The proposed dredge material placement ground is in offshore waters with placement to occur
over short periods during the length of dredging.
A program using a continuous passive acoustic monitoring array to assess dolphin use patterns at the
entrance to the inner harbour and surrounds during baseline and dredging periods has commenced.
In addition a baseline dolphin habitat use pattern assessment for the existing area at Berth 14A is
also proposed using visual identification methods. This information will be integrated with the passive
acoustic array information to improve overall interpretation of the effect on dolphins due to the
permanent alteration of the Berth 14A area.
8.4.2.2
Underwater Noise
The potential impact of anthropogenic noise on a marine animal depends on the level of noise
exposure. At low and moderate exposure levels, underwater noise may cause a c hange in the
behaviour of a marine animal. At high exposure levels, underwater noise can induce a reduction in
hearing sensitivity, physical injury or death. The impact of noise exposure generally depends on a
number of factors relating to the physical and spectral characteristics of the sound (e.g., the intensity,
peak pressure, frequency, duration, duty cycle), and relates to the animal under consideration (e.g.,
hearing sensitivity, age, gender, behavioural status, prior exposures). The type and level of the impact
also depends on whether the noise consists of single-pulse, multiple-pulse or non-pulsed sounds
(Southall et al., 2007).
The potential scale of effects of underwater noise on marine life is presented in Figure 36. The
following three effect groups are of major significance:
Lethal effects: life threatening physical injuries, including death and severe physical injury.
Sub-lethal effects: non-life threatening physical injuries, and in particular auditory damage.
Behavioural effects: include perceptual, stress and indirect effects of which the most common
is avoidance of an area.
2419-011-001-001
Page 64
20-November-2012
Figure 36: Spectrum of underwater noise impacts from no response through stress, distress
and system failure.
More detail on the project specific underwater noise modelling methods, assessment and predicted
outcomes are provided in Technical Report 7, Appendix 7.E.
8.4.2.3
Noise Propagation
Of the activities described within the excavation process for the Berth 14A dredge footprint, rock
fracturing (blasting) is considered the most acute noise propagation source (to a distance of ~1000 m
from source). The potential adverse physical impacts on marine fauna from piling is predicted to be
restricted to approximately 20 m from source, while cutter suction dredging, backhoe dredging and
drilling prior to blasting result in predicted permanent injury noise impact contours less than 1 m from
the source (Table 19).
Underwater noise modelling and assessment for the project has considered two conservative
potential source locations for rock fracturing (blasting) activity, (if required) for the Berth 14A dredge
footprint. Source location 1, near the entrance to the inner harbour is considered as the worst case for
underwater noise propagation resulting from rock fracturing (blasting). Source location 2, situated mid
way within the proposed dredge footprint, and away from line of sight to the inner harbour entrance is
considered as a mid-range propagation site. The distances nominated within the impact table (Table
19) represent distance where marine mammals may experience permanent hearing loss or other
injury. The area of permanent hearing loss and injury, along with the zone where marine mammals
may experience temporary hearing loss are plotted in Figure 37 and Figure 38 for both source
location scenarios.
Table 19: Summary of predicted noise impacts.
Noise generating activity
Source Location 1
Source Location 2
Rock fracturing (blasting)
990 m
630 m
Piling
20 m
20 m
<1 m
<1 m
Backhoe Dredging
<1 m
<1 m
Drilling
<1 m
<1 m
In the event that rock fracturing (blasting) is required for the project, then site specific noise model
validation and monitoring measures are proposed as described in Section 10.3. The Management
and mitigation measures outlined in Section 10.3 have also been proposed should rock fracturing
(blasting) be required on the project.
8.4.2.4
Increased Background Noise Levels
Typical ambient noise levels in Koombana Bay are likely to vary considerably with changes in
shipping traffic and weather conditions and during activities such as periodic maintenance dredging.
2419-011-001-001
Page 65
20-November-2012
The operation of the cutter suction dredge and associated marine plant will reflect a similar
underwater noise profile to existing harbour operations, and p eriodic maintenance dredging, though
the proposed dredging operations will extend for several months, between 4 to 10 times the duration
of previous maintenance dredging activities.
As shown in Figure 36, increase in a baseload noise profile may induce behavioural effects such as
avoidance, abandonment or displacement. While it is difficult to predict the response of marine
mammals to an increase in background noise conditions the occurrence of sustained dolphin
populations within operational industrial areas such as Fremantle, Kwinana and Western Australias
urbanised estuaries suggests a temporary affect is likely, perhaps leading to a level of habituation to
increased noise profiles over the duration of dredging.
Figure 37: Noise impact contours worst case propagation scenario derived from rock
2419-011-001-001
Page 66
20-November-2012
Figure 38: Noise impact contours mid range propagation scenario derived from rock
8.4.2.5
Vessel movements
with the exception of dredge hopper barges that will transit between the Inner Harbour area and the
proposed offshore disposal location approximately 13 kilometres north-west of the Inner Harbour.
Dredges are effectively stationary during dredging activity so the likelihood of them striking marine
fauna is remote. Dredge hopper barges will use the existing shipping channel to transit through
Koombana Bay and out to the area adjacent to the nominated ship anchoring areas for vessels
waiting to enter Bunbury Port. In 2010 there were 402 ships that entered and departed Bunbury Port
with associated support vessels. There is no reported incidence of ships or tugs striking whales in the
history of Bunbury Port. Slow displacement type vessels such as hopper barges and t ugs are not
considered to pose a s ignificant risk to megafauna including whales (Laist et al., 2001). No
interactions between dredge vessels and marine fauna have been recorded during maintenance
dredging activity or previous capital dredging programs in Bunbury Port. The agility of dolphins and
limited use of fast moving support vessels within the dredging works is thought to preclude risk of
collisions with these fauna.
Management measures focused on m inimising interaction with larger cetaceans (whales) during
hopper barge disposal are presented in Section 1.
Marine Turtles
While loggerhead and potentially green turtles may be present in the Bunbury region, the region is not
coasts to the Northern Territory border. Mortality from dredging operations is known from
Queensland, particularly in the regions where the abundance of marine turtles is high (for example
adjacent to major rookeries) (Greenland et al., 2002). Given the very low abundance of turtles in the
region of the proposed project compared to other locations where mortalities are recorded, the
chance of interaction between dredging equipment and marine turtles in the current instance is
extremely unlikely and so no specific monitoring of marine turtles is proposed. However, mitigation
measures are proposed for minimising interactions with significant marine fauna in general.
2419-011-001-001
Page 67
20-November-2012

that the impacts of the proposed project as described, will not significantly impact the Australian sealion and so no specific monitoring or management of pinnipeds is proposed.
Sharks
Impacts to shark species ostensibly arise from fisheries that either target shark species or interact
with shark species as by-catch. Impacts attributable from the proposed dredging operations are not
are not considered significant and so no specific monitoring or management of shark species is
proposed.
Shy Albatross
as described, will not significantly impact the shy albatross and so no specific monitoring or
management of the shy albatross is proposed.
Penguins
Nonetheless, foreshore inspections will be undertaken prior to construction work to identify the
presence of any penguins. No further monitoring or management of Penguins is proposed.
8.5
Marine Fisheries Resources
8.5.1
In a detailed study of fish assemblages in Koombana Bay and Leschenault Estuary, Potter et al.
(2000) identified the ten numerically dominant fish species in the shallow sections of Koombana Bay
(including adjacent to Koombana Beach and Power Station Beach). These are presented in Table 20.
Numerically, these ten species represent approximately 93.2% of the total fish assemblage recorded
in Koombana Bay.
Species
Numerical Abundance (%)
24.8
16.7
15.4
14.9
8.1
3.3
3.1
3.0
2.0
1.9
region of Western Australia (UWA, 2011) is provided in Technical Report 7, Appendix 7.C. Most
targeted species and the fisheries that exploit them operate at much broader spatial scales than the
Project area, therefore, relevant fisheries are identified on the basis of their regional presence.
Fisheries data that is collected by the Department of Fisheries is at a br oad scale that makes it
difficult to identify significant fisheries at the scale of Koombana Bay. This lack of spatial resolution in
fisheries data is an i ssue that is common in inshore fisheries in Western Australia in general and
indeed the rest of the country (McPhee, 2008).
2419-011-001-001
Page 68
20-November-2012
Potential Fisheries
fisheries were likely to overlap spatially with the project area (Technical Report 7). From this review it
was identified that 12 fisheries had potential to occur at the Project area. However, the fishery with the
greatest potential to be affected by development activities is the blue swimmer crab fishery.
Blue Swimmer Crab
The blue swimmer crab fishery was identified as being particularly important in the Bunbury region.
The blue swimmer crab is known to occur in Koombana Bay and the Leschenault estuary where they
emigrate from the estuary into Koombana Bay in autumn and return in spring. These movements are
related to water temperature differences between the estuary and the embayment (Meagher 1971).
The blue swimmer crab is known to spawn in Koombana Bay (Kangas, 2000). The mean monthly
densities of crabs in nearshore, shallow waters of Leschenault Estuary were highest between midspring and mid-autumn and declined to very low or zero levels during winter and early spring (Potter
and de Lestang, 2000). Commercial crabbing occurs around Bunbury with these areas likely
important given the restrictions on commercial crabbing in other regions such as Geographe Bay and
the Peel Harvey inlet. The catch of blue swimmer crabs by recreational fishers within the Bunbury
region is substantial and centred on the Leschenault Estuary.
8.5.2
Potential Impacts
Threats to existing fisheries in the Bunbury region are not predicted from dredging activities. The
effects of dredging on water quality are not predicted to extend across a large area in Koombana Bay.
The extent of the dredge plume (turbidity) will be monitored during dredging and m anagement
measures applied. Areas identified as risk indicators of other water quality criteria will be monitored as
discussed previously. There is not predicted to be any effects on benthic habitats or other critical fish
habitats in the Bunbury area as a result of the dredging program. No specific monitoring or
management of fisheries is proposed during dredging.
8.6
Benthic Habitat
8.6.1
8.6.1.1
Habitat Survey
Over 240 km of benthic habitat was surveyed across the Project area (Figure 39). Biotic coverage
was typically low compared to surrounding areas with an average of 32.0% biotic coverage observed
across the Project area. As expected, biotic coverage of reef (51.1% 2.2% SE) and sand inundated
reef (52.8% 2.2%) was higher than biotic coverage of sand (25.0% 1.1% SE).
A map of benthic habitats occurring across the Project area is shown in Figure 39. A full description of
benthic habitat surveys undertaken across the Project area is provided in Technical Report 5.
2419-011-001-001
Page 69
20-November-2012
Figure 39: Distribution of benthic habitats across the Project area and showing the location of
the proposed dredge material placement ground.
Seagrass
Seagrasses observed during the survey of benthic assemblages included Posidonia spp., Amphibolis
spp., Thalassodendron pachyrhizum and Halophila ovalis. All seagrasses occurred a c onsiderable
distance from shore in at least 9 metres water depth (Figure 40). No seagrasses occurred in
Koombana Bay, the area predicted to be impacted by dredging activities.
2419-011-001-001
Page 70
20-November-2012
Figure 40: Distribution of seagrasses across the Project area.

8.6.1.2
Koombana Bay
Benthic biota occurring in Koombana Bay (an area of 400 ha) are of particular interest as these
communities are nearest the proposed dredging activity, and may potentially be impacted by the
dredge plume. Results from the benthic surveys conducted for the Project indicate Koombana Bay is
dominated by sand and silt with only one area of reef comprising approximately 15 hectare occurring
on the eastern margin of the bay, extending south of The Cut (Figure 39).
2419-011-001-001
Page 71
20-November-2012
Sand habitats occurring in Koombana Bay were observed to have trace amounts of foliose and turf
algae occurring on t hem during the survey. The reef habitat occurring on t he eastern margin was
observed to have 29.1% biotic coverage and was dominated by foliose algae (22.0%), though canopy
algae (5.8% coverage of Ecklonia radiata) also occurred. Sand habitats occurring within Koombana
Bay had low biotic cover (<2%). While no sponges were observed in Koombana Bay, sponge gardens
(6.0% coverage) were observed on the reef areas just north of Koombana Bay and The Cut.
8.6.1.3
Offshore Dredge Material Placement Ground
The proposed offshore dredge material placement ground is shown in Figure 39. Habitats occurring at
the proposed offshore dredge material placement ground (an area of approximately 200 ha) are of
particular interest as they will be impacted by the dredge material placement activities. The offshore
disposal location is situated approximately 13 kilometres to the north-west of the entrance to Bunbury
Port inner-harbour (Technical Report 2 - Site Selection and Assessment for Offshore Placement of
Dredge Material).
The multi-spectral satellite image obtained for the Project area indicated a lack of discrete substrata at
the offshore disposal location, with ROV surveys confirming that sand was the only substrata
occurring in the proposed disposal location. This sand area, covering an area of approximately
1200 ha was intensively sampled to identify a suitable disposal location. This offshore area had an
average 12.2% biotic coverage with biotic groups present including Amphibolis griffithii, Posidonia
angustifolia and turf algae. A 200 ha area with lower biotic cover (6.3%) from within this domain was
selected as the proposed dredge material placement ground (See Figure 39).
8.6.2
Potential Impacts
8.6.2.1
Dredge Turbidity Plume
Outputs from the hydrodynamic model are shown in Figure 22. The area predicted to be impacted by
the sediment plume from dredging activities is predominantly restricted to the south-eastern half of
Koombana Bay. Within this area, benthic habitats are limited to a limestone reef area occurring on the
north-eastern margin of the bay. This community predominantly consist of canopy forming and foliose
algae. Outputs from the hydrodynamic and sediment transport model indicate these habitats are likely
to be exposed to 2-5 mg/L of suspended sediments above ambient levels 5% of the time as a result of
dredging activities.
Ambient levels of suspended sediment in the predicted dredge plume area routinely exceed 20 mg/L
due to shipping traffic, discharge from the Leschenault estuary and wind driven sediment
resuspension in Koombana Bay. In addition, similar benthic communities that occur to the north of
Koombana Bay adjacent to The Cut are routinely exposed to levels of turbidity exceeding cumulative
levels predicted to occur during dredging. Consequently there is predicted to be no l oss of benthic
habitat as a result of dredging (Technical Report 6). This is a significant finding for the project, limiting
the potential for longer term impacts from an environmental perspective for dredging operations.
Microphytobenthos (microscopic photosynthetic algae) may also occur on bare sand and marine silts
within Koombana Bay. The occurrence of microphytobenthic communities are known to be negatively
affected by reductions in light availability, reductions in temperature and increases in sediment
resuspension (Barranguet et al. 1998; Sundbck et al. 2000; Schreiber and Pennock 1995). The low
light climate and frequent wind driven and anthropogenic sediment re-suspension in Koombana Bay
is characteristic of low microphytobenthic communities and s o microphytobenthic communities are
expected to contribute little to benthic productivity in the Project area. Furthermore, due to the rapid
turnover rates of microphytobenthos (in the order of days), any microphytobenthic communities
disturbed due to indirect effects of dredging activities will quickly recover.
8.6.2.2
Habitat Loss Assessment
Dredge Footprint
While benthic habitats are not considered at risk of impact or degradation as a result of dredging
operations at Berth 14A, monitoring of several sentinel sites within the algal reef system of northeastern Koombana Bay, and reference locations north of the Cut will be undertaken during and after
the dredging program.
2419-011-001-001
Page 72
20-November-2012
Figure 41: Zone of Influence in respect to Benthic Habitat in Koombana Bay

Offshore Placement Ground
For the offshore placement ground there will be loss of up t o 200 ha of seagrass with an average
cover of 6.3%. The location of the offshore disposal ground has been chosen to minimise the impact
on adjacent benthic habitats and s ensitive receptors. The loss of benthic habitat as a r esult of
offshore disposal activities will be as sessed as part of the Sea Dumping Permit application to the
Commonwealth. Monitoring and management at the disposal ground is not incorporated within this
draft DSDMP.
Loss of seagrass outside of the offshore placement ground due to indirect effects of a r eduction in
water quality and increased sedimentation is considered unlikely. The dispersion of the plume upon
placement is expected to be short-term (<40 weeks), with 75% of effects restricted to within 250 m of
the placement ground and 95% of effects restricted to within 1,500 m of the placement ground.
Benthic biota in the vicinity of the placement ground are restricted to <10% coverage of Amphibolis
spp. and Posidonia spp.. Research undertaken on bot h of these seagrass groups in temperate
Western Australian ecosystems have indicated that they are reasonably resilient to short term light
limitation likely to occur during the dredging program. Further, sedimentation outside of the placement
ground due to placement Activities was estimated to be <0.1 mm over 12 months and so is unlikely to
have an ecological effect on benthic communities. This indicates that indirect loss of biota outside of
the placement area driven by reductions in water quality or increased sedimentation is unlikely.
2419-011-001-001
Page 73
20-November-2012
8.7
Introduced Marine Pests
Introduced marine pests (IMP) are those species introduced into, or translocated within Australian
waters that pose a s ignificant risk to environmental values, biodiversity, ecosystem health, human
health, fisheries, aquaculture, shipping, ports or tourism (DAFF, 2009). The non-deliberate
introduction of marine pests occurs in two main ways either through ballast or biofouling.
In Australia, there are existing protocols in place to minimise the risk of the introduction of marine
pests and to ensure the early detection if an i ncursion occurs. Since the Australian Quarantine
Inspection Service (AQIS) introduction of mandatory ballast water regulations, where ballast water
must be ex changed outside territorial waters (12 nautical miles off the Australian coast, including
islands), risk of IMP from international ballast has been greatly reduced. However, there is no
domestic ballast water regulation and many Australian ports have not been surveyed for IMPs.
There is now a global understanding that the risk from ballast while still considerable may have been
overstated relative to biofouling. Biofouling species contribute approximately 75% of the introduced
species we currently have in Australia, therefore unmanaged biofouling is currently the greatest risk.
In 2009, the Commonwealth of Australia released a series of guidance documents setting out a
consensus view of effective biofouling management practices. These include the National Biofouling
Management Guidelines for Non-trading Vessels (Commonwealth of Australia, 2009b); and National
Biofouling Management Guidelines for Commercial Vessels (Commonwealth of Australia, 2009c). The
purpose of the documents was to provide guidance and recommendations for practical management
options for the management of biofouling hazards associated with vessels and equipment.
Further to Commonwealth requirements for waters in their jurisdiction, Western Australian has
requirements for State waters regarding introduced marine pests. The Department of Fisheries (DoF)
is the lead agency for marine biosecurity in Western Australia. Biosecurity is underpinned by the Fish
Resources Management Act 1994 and Fish Resources Management Regulations 1995.
Also under the Port Authorities Act 1999 and Port Authorities Regulations 2001, the Harbour Master
of each port has powers to manage marine pests or suspected pests. The Harbour Master can deny
entry or order the departure of any vessel that contains marine pests, is leaking oil or poses any other
marine pollution risk to the harbour.
8.7.1
Previous Surveys
Whilst national protocols have not identified the Bunbury Port as one of the eighteen Australian ports
to be s urveyed as part of the National System for the Prevention and Management of Marine Pest
Incursions, it is clearly a significant Port catering for both commercial and r ecreational activities.
Therefore the Bunbury Port Authority has commissioned regular invasive marine species surveys in
the Bunbury Port every two years since 1998. Three survey areas, the Outer Harbour, Inner Harbour
and Koombana Bay, have been surveyed as they have areas considered at high risk for containing
introduced marine species. These areas have:
Frequent and persistent domestic and international vessel activity (commercial and
recreational);
Permanent artificial structures (e.g. moorings, berths and pylons);
Reduced flow or high residence times of the water column; and
Known intertidal and subtidal habitat characteristic of the region.
A total of 37 species have been identified as species of concern for this specific area according to the
National System for the Prevention and Management of Marine Pest Incursions. These species were
targeted in the biennial surveys.
The survey undertaken in 2006 identified one species, the Japanese Goby, in the Inner Harbour. A
single new introduced species was observed during this survey, namely the bryozoan (Zoobotryon
verticillatum) in moderate numbers in the Outer Harbour and low numbers in the Inner Harbour (SKM,
2006).
2419-011-001-001
Page 74
20-November-2012
The summer survey of 2008 (December 2008) identified the possible presence of two of the 37
targeted species. Both of these were dinoflagellates. One was an empty Alexandrium tamarense cyst
and the other was vegetative cells of A. catenalla. Neither toxicity assessment nor confirmation of
species/strain identification by recognised authorities on these notably cryptogenic species was
undertaken. Neither species were identified in the winter survey undertaken in September 2009
(SKM, 2009). This would suggest that these species, while present, remain in low concentrations
throughout alternate seasons. An additional target IMP of concern, Acartia tonsa, was suspected
during the Part II survey. Samples were sent to the University of Tasmania for further assessment, but
at the time of writing the report the final species confirmation was outstanding.
8.7.2
Potential Impacts
Different types of vessels provide different risks for the introduction of marine species. High risk
vessels are generally those that are slow moving, have numerous spaces where marine species can
gain purchase, and come in close contact with the sea bottom (DoF, 2009). Some of these vessels
stay in a single area for months, enhancing the opportunities for species to settle at the source and
then be introduced to new regions. Such high risk vessels include dredges, supply boats, drilling rigs
and some fishing boats (DoF, 2009).
The potential for marine pest introductions during dredging has previously been addressed as part of
development approvals under the Environmental Protection Act 1986. Increasingly, if a dr edge is
being brought into Western Australia for a dredging program, one of the Ministerial Conditions is that
it be surveyed for introduced marine species before it is allowed to dredge (DoF, 2009).
2419-011-001-001
Page 75
20-November-2012
Key Receptors
To assist in concluding the impact of a d isturbance or development upon t he environment, key

receptors have been identified. These receptors can be considered as being potentially sensitive to
the proposed dredging and disposal processes, and may be subject to some form of acute interaction
or long term pressure. Table 21 provides summary of key project receptors identified by recent
studies which demonstrate a level of impact requiring monitoring and/or mitigation. From the results of
these investigations and impact descriptions above, a concise description of the significance of this
interaction is provided. The categories of key impact receptors applied to the Berth 14A capital
dredging program include:
Benthic habitats key primary producers and structure forming benthos within the study area;
Marine megafauna species of specific conservation concern, including dolphins;
Physical alteration potential changes in water quality and sediment resulting from the
process of dredging; and
Other users recreational, fisheries, tourism ventures etc.
Table 21: Interaction summary for the proposed Bunbury Port Berth 14A dredging and
disposal program.
Category
Interaction
Benthic Habitats
Macro algal
A finger of shallow macroalgal dominated reef extends south of The Cut
communities
for a distance of ~ 1km. These communities represent the nearest
sensitive benthic habitat receptors to the proposed dredging activities.
Modelling defines that minor increases in turbidity/TSS are predicted to a
concentration of 2-5mg/L at the 5% exceedance probability. Some
potential for minor increased deposition regimes and l ight reductions
may exist. These changes in light and depositional regimes are not
expected to impact benthic habitat during dredging operations with
modelling suggesting only minor changes in TSS, deposition and light
regimes.
Significant Species
Megafauna
The most significant pathway for the impact upon significant marine
species (primarily dolphins) will be v ia the process of rock fracturing
(blasting). Modelling indicates a l ocalised zone of high impact
(permanent hearing loss or injury) within the inner harbour, extending a
zone of moderate impact (temporary hearing loss) within the outer
harbour and southern reaches of Koombana Bay. Some level of
interaction may also be applicable to large cetaceans during transit of
hopper barges to and from the offshore disposal ground.
The effects of reduced water quality and increases in ambient noise
profile due to dredge operation may potentially affect behaviour and
utilisation of the study area by dolphins. If realised, such impacts present
both ecological and economic issues for management. However, given
that a relatively high level of habituation to anthropogenic disturbance
can be demonstrated by regional dolphin populations, alterations in
behaviour which influence economic viability of the Dolphin Discovery
Centre and associated tourism revenue may be of potentially greatest
concern (see other users).
Management and monitoring is proposed to mitigate impacts to dolphins
during rock fracturing (blasting). Management measures are proposed to
limit interactions with larger cetaceans during dredge disposal.
Chemical and Physical changes
Invasive species
The use of dredges and marine plant from overseas or elsewhere in
Australia has the potential to introduce invasive marine species.
Management and mitigation measures are proposed. A risk assessment
2419-011-001-001
Page 76
20-November-2012
Water quality
to determine the risk that a vessel or associated equipment is harbouring

introduced marine pests (IMPs) will be un dertaken in accordance with
DoF requirements. An ongoing IMP monitoring program for exists for the
Port of Bunbury.
Water quality within Koombana Bay along its southern and eastern
foreshores are likely to experience sustained low level increases in
turbidity during the dredging period. Such increases will present visual
changes to water clarity. In addition, the sustained entrainment of
organically enriched sediments within the water column has the potential
to release nutrients and other materials leading to increased algal
productivity and potential fluctuations in dissolved oxygen. The study
area experiences broad fluctuations in water quality during the year.
However, the sustained elevations in turbidity are likely to exceed natural
processes during the dredging program on a l ocal scale. An ongoing
baseline water quality monitoring program (BWQMP) was established in
December 2011 to provide baseline information for the Project area.
A program of monitoring and management is proposed to enable key
water quality conditions to be monitored, in particular ecological
conditions and water quality conditions suited to primary and secondary
contact for recreational purposes. Continuous monitoring of the turbidity
plume against baseline and reference conditions at key locations is
proposed. A series of selected risk indicator sites to be monitored
periodically against baseline and reference conditions for a r ange of
selected water quality criteria is proposed.
Other users
Recreational
users and tourism
operations
Koombana Bay is utilised by recreational users for swimming, water

sports and c oastal leisure pursuits. Key areas of visitation include
Koombana Beach, Power Station Beach, the marina and a djacent
waters for sailing and pleasure craft use. Bunbury is also the focal point
of Dolphin based tourism within the region, led by the Dolphin Discovery
Centre on K oombana Beach. Dolphin interactions occur on Koombana
Beach, and at locations nearer The Cut.
Modelling indicates that 75% of the time the plume will extend only 23km north of the inner harbour entrance, affecting a small percentage of
Power Station Beach. Beaches adjacent to the dolphin discovery centre
and the majority of Koombana Bay will remain largely unaffected by the
dredge plume, however, modelling does predict that turbid waters will
migrate along the beaches of Koombana Bay less than 25% of the time,
with concentrations exceeding 5 to 10 mg/L. Peak levels may approach
160 mg/L.
As noted in the section above (significant species), turbidity as well as
increased background noise may elicit as yet undefined behavioural
responses to the local Dolphin population. Such effects may impact upon
the economic sustainability of recreational and tourism ventures and
their connected businesses over an extended dredge program (up to 40
weeks).
Monitoring and management of water quality is proposed. The ongoing
observation of dolphins, and use of passive monitoring techniques will
assist management in defining the effects associated with dredging
operations.
A visual monitoring program for dolphins is proposed to occur prior to
and following development activities. This monitoring program, proposed
to be undertaken in conjunction with the Dolphin Discovery Centre will
examine the effects of development activities on t he distribution and
prevalence of individual dolphins in and around the development area.
2419-011-001-001
Page 77
20-November-2012
10
Environmental Management Sub-plans
Environmental monitoring and management response strategies adopted within this draft DSDMP are
defined within the following sub-plan sections:
1. Monitoring of Dredge Plume Extent
2. Management of Underwater Noise
3. Water Quality
o Turbidity
4. Water and Sediment Quality
o Chemical
5. Marine Fauna
o Bottlenose Dolphins
6. Marine Fauna
o Marine Turtles
7. Marine Fauna
o Potential Impact of Rock Fracturing (blasting) on Marine Megafauna
8. Benthic Habitats in Koombana Bay
o Disposal Activities
o Transit of Vessels
o Atmospheric Noise
o Introduced Marine Species
o Waste Management
o Hazardous Substances, Spills and Leaks
o Emergency Response
o Maritime Safety
The scope of monitoring and management has been prioritised based upon the predicted interactions
between impact and receptor as summarised within Section 5.
10.1
Adaptive Management
A combination of telemetered and in-field survey techniques will collect and collate the data directly. A
tiered response strategy proposed for management during dredging is provided in Figure 43.
The development and dredging site is restricted in space making movement to alternative dredging
locations limited. However, there are opportunities to move to different sections of the dredge profile
which have varying levels of fines. Other effective options available for practical intervention would
be based upon reductions in dredge productivity, such as reducing production rates, limiting over flow,
ceasing overflow, or ceasing dredging. The adoption of such methods would require careful attention
to the significance of impacts, the additional costs placed upon dredging, and the extension of the
dredge schedule. Such changes, while potentially addressing short-term issues may indirectly
influence other potential impacts, such as economic loss associated with reduced recreational
amenity, or conduct of tourism ventures.
10.1.1
Continuous Improvement Process
Lanco strive for continual improvement of environmental management. Regular communication with
State and C ommonwealth environmental agencies, and the TACC are important tools for obtaining
up-to-date information on environmental management and best practice initiatives for Lanco to
consider and adopt.
2419-011-001-001
Page 78
20-November-2012
Lanco will record and track all dredging works and any incidents recorded during dredging activities.
These incidents and t heir corrective actions will be reviewed on a weekly basis by Lanco and the
dredging contractor. Close out reports will be completed following the completion of dredging and
distributed to the project TACC as lessons learnt recommendations for consideration during future
10.1.1.1 Involvement with the TACC
Incidents will be reported to the TACC as they occur. Lessons learnt and continuous improvement
discussions will be held during each TACC meeting as a standing agenda item.
10.1.2
Sub-plans - Management Actions and Preventative Measures
This section contains the sub-plans that describe the specific management actions and preventative
measures that will be implemented during dredging works at Berth 14A. This will be implemented to
mitigate the risk to achieve predicted environmental outcomes and manage the impacts from dredge
related activities.
The sub-plans outline specific management objectives and performance criteria that can measure the
relative success of an implemented plan. These sub-plans also detail specific monitoring and
reporting requirements associated with the potential environmental impacts. The results of the
monitoring will be used to assess the effectiveness of management actions and site compliance with
performance indicators.
Each sub-plan is intended to stand alone as a detachable page, detailing the specific management
actions and preventative measures relevant to each issue. The sub-plan format is presented below for
reference purposes.
Sub-plan #: Title
Topic
Predicted
Outcome
Management
Objective
Statutory
Requirement or
Guidance
Performance
Criteria
Implementation
Strategy
Monitoring
Reporting
Management
Response on
Contingency
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
Relevant management action.

Outcome predicted from risk assessment process identified through PER.
A specific desired management outcome.
Relevant statutory requirements or guidance.
To ensure outcomes associated with management outcomes are met.
The methods or specific tasks to be utilised to achieve the nominated
performance criteria
Methods or specific tasks to be utilised to determine the effectiveness of
the implementation strategy.
To report to relevant recipient at appropriate frequency
The actions to be implemented if monitoring indicates performance
criteria are not being met.
The frequency of the techniques or the timing of their implementation.
Person/agency responsible for implementation.
Page 79
20-November-2012
10.2
Monitoring of Dredge Plume Extent
10.2.1
Monitoring Dredge Plume Extent: Sub-plan 1
A hydrodynamic model has been applied to assess the predicted dredge plume attributable to the
proposed dredging operations at Berth 14A. Available data has been applied in developing and
calibrating this model to maximise the level of accuracy. However, it is important that the findings
adopted from this model are validated by field measurements during dredging, particularly in the initial
stages to determine frequency of dredge plume mapping.
Validation of the hydrodynamic modelling of the predicted dredge plume by dredge plume mapping
shall be undertaken as soon as dredging commences.
Sub-plan 1: Monitoring of dredge plume extent
Topic
Monitoring of the dredge plume to validate the predicted outcomes of the
hydrodynamic modelling.
Predicted
Actual dredge plume dispersion does not vary significantly from the
Outcome
predicted dredge plume generated by the hydrodynamic model as
Management
Dredge plume conforms with predicted values from dredge model..
Objective
Statutory
Requirement or
Marine Water Quality (ANZECC, 2000).
Guidance
Performance
Turbidity monitoring of dredge plume distribution and intensity over time
Criteria
Implementation
Prior to dredging (COMPLETED):
Strategy
- Determine predicted dispersion of the dredge plume for the
dredging activities through hydrodynamic modelling.
- Undertake one week of field sampling for turbidity (NTU) and
Total Suspended Solids (TSS) in a grid pattern throughout Inner
Harbour and Koombana Bay prior to dredging commencing to
establish existing conditions.
Monitoring
Auditing and
Reporting
Management
Response
2419-011-001-001
During the initial four weeks of dredging:

- Dredge plume mapping conducted in first four weeks
- Water samples shall be collected:
From the hopper barge overflow;
Within the extent of the visible dredge plume; and
50 m beyond the extent of the visible dredge plume.
These samples shall be analysed for TSS, particle size
distribution and particle settling speed.
- Collection of wave, current and t ide data from data loggers
deployed within Koombana Bay.
- For dredging operations, barge overflow rates shall be collected.
The data loggers deployed as part of the water quality monitoring (see
Sub-plan 3) will provide data on the dredge plume throughout the
dredging program.
Mobile monitoring/mapping of dredge plume with CTD and N TU casts
and analytes as per current BWQMP program of stations
A report summarising the model validation process including predicted
and actual dredge plume outputs to be delivered to the Regulator/TACC
as soon as possible upon commencement of dredging.
the predicted dredge plume, reconsideration of impact potential and
associated monitoring and management controls would be initiated via
Page 80
20-November-2012
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
the lead monitoring consultant, client, contractor and advised to the

Regulator/TACC.
Hydrodynamic model validation program will be started one week prior to
commencement of dredging to establish existing conditions and will
continue for four (4) weeks following the commencement of dredging.
Proponent
Dredge contractor
Page 81
20-November-2012
10.3
Management of Underwater Noise

10.3.1
Underwater Noise Monitoring: Sub-plan 2
A noise model has been applied to assess the predicted underwater noise levels attributable to rock
fracturing (blasting) which may be required as part of the development of Berth 14A. Available data
has been applied in developing and calibrating this model to maximise the level of accuracy. However
it is important that if rock fracturing (blasting) is required, underwater noise measurements are
undertaken to validate the noise model predictions and c onfirm that the proposed management
measures are appropriate.
Sub-plan 2: Management of underwater noise levels.
Topic
Monitoring of underwater noise levels to validate the predicted outcomes
of the noise modelling.
Predicted
Actual underwater noise levels does not vary significantly from predicted
Outcome
noise levels generated from the noise model as outlined within the PER.
Management
No injury to dolphins or other conservation significant fauna due to
Objective
underwater noise from rock fracturing (blasting).
Statutory
The Project will require dredging operations and piling works, with the
Requirement or
potential for drill and blast operations, which have the potential to result in
Guidance
noise impacts on marine fauna.
Performance
When determining if the level of variation of the underwater noise levels is
Criteria
substantial from the predicted levels, sensitive receptors and t heir
respective tolerance limits have been identified refer to Technical Report
7. The relationship between the actual measured transmission loss from
the site, receptors and t heir tolerance limits, and predicted transmission
loss will be used to validate the model if rock fracturing (blasting) is
required.
Implementation
Implementation Plan:
Strategy
An Underwater Noise Monitoring Implementation Plan shall be prepared
prior to the commencement of rock fracturing (blasting), if required. The
plan should outline the proposed methodologies, implementation
strategies and i ssue response protocols for the proposed noise
monitoring program with reference to the guidance presented in the PER.
Prior to piling operations:
Visual inspection of presence of dolphins within the potential zone of
noise influence and surrounds. Soft start-up of piling machinery to
enable adjustment and adaptive response in the event that dolphins are
in the area. It should be noted that the governing criteria identified within
the PER for all non-rock fracturing (non-blasting) activities are only
predicted to be exceeded in the areas directly adjacent to the works.
Monitoring
2419-011-001-001

A selection of near field underwater noise measurements may be
undertaken in order to confirm the source noise levels for each activity. It
should be noted that the governing criteria identified within the PER for all
non-rock fracturing (non-blasting) activities are only predicted to be
exceeded in the areas directly adjacent to the works.
In contrast to the less noise intensive activities, it was predicted that rock
fracturing (blasting) has the potential to result in exceedances of the
governing criteria at distances of up to 1 km from the source location. It is
therefore important to measure the underwater sound transmission loss
characteristics of the site in order to validate the assumptions and
outcomes of the noise modelling. This monitoring would occur at the
outset of rock fracturing (blasting) operations in accordance with the
methodologies described in the Underwater Noise Monitoring
Implementation Plan.
Page 82
20-November-2012
Near field underwater noise measurements for each major construction

activity in order to validate the source noise levels.
Underwater pressure levels for each blast should be measured for at
least three or four offset distances simultaneously in order to measure the
transmission loss characteristics of the site (for a particular transect) such
as:
- Location 1 (Near Field): between 10 m and 50 m from blast centre;
- Location 2: 500 m from blast centre;
- Location 3: 1,000 m from blast centre; and
- Location 4: 2,000 m from blast centre.
Reporting
Management
Response
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
The monitoring should remain in place until full production rock fracturing
(blasting) has commenced (i.e. ramp up/testing etc is complete).
The report containing full details of the measured underwater noise levels
for each construction activity/plant item would be prepared for the
proponent, as appropriate.
The underwater blast noise levels would be reported in the form of a site
law analysis. The site law analysis would be compared with the predicted
transmission loss characteristics of the site. Any significant discrepancies
would inform a review of the exclusion zones and management strategy
for potential underwater noise impacts.
the predicted underwater noise levels, review of exclusion zones and
management strategy for rock fracturing (blasting) activities would be
initiated.
Noise model validation may be undertaken during the commencement of
rock fracturing (blasting). Rock fracturing (blasting), if required, is likely to
be at the end of the dredging program.
Proponent
Rock Fracturing (blasting) contractor
DEC
Initial rock fracturing (blasting) works may benefit from a r amp up i n charge size such that
management zones can be confirmed and pr ogressively refined with increases in production rates.
Such information may lead to defining a maximum charge level which best limits the extent of impact
zones, whilst maximising operational productivity, and reducing the duration of rock fracturing
(blasting) works.
The underwater noise predictions for rock fracturing (blasting) would be validated onsite using two
boat-based acoustic monitoring stations that would simultaneously measure the underwater noise
emissions from key construction activities.
A land based monitoring station is also recommended in order to measure near field noise levels. This
information would be processed in the form of revised impact contours.
2419-011-001-001
Page 83
20-November-2012
10.4
Water Quality
The liberation of dredge material into the water column from dredging operations may impact on water
quality adjacent to the dredge footprint. Monitoring shall be undertaken to measure water quality
parameters for one year prior to dredging commencing and throughout the dredging program.
Background and port operational activities may also contribute to turbidity and other water quality
indicators and need to be considered in any potential management responses during construction
activities for Berth 14A.
10.4.1
Turbidity from Dredge Plumes: Sub-plan 3
Time series data shall be collected from fixed stations and used to characterise the dispersion of
dredge derived turbidity plumes within Koombana Bay.
Sub-plan 3: Water quality Turbidity
Topic
Monitoring of marine water quality to detect any impacts of dredging
operations.
Predicted
Predicted dredge plume generated from the hydrodynamic model as
Outcome
Management
- Dredging activities will be managed to ensure the predicted zones
Objective
of impact are achieved and that water and sediment quality
Statutory
EAG 7 - Environmental Assessment Guideline for Marine Dredging
Requirement or
Proposals
Guidance
Background Quality for Coastal Marine Waters of Perth, Western Australia
(McAlpine et al, 2005)
Perth's Coastal Waters: Environmental Values and O bjectives,
Performance
The table below lists baseline turbidity criteria (TSS mg/l) at the Zone of
Criteria
Moderate Impact (95%ile) and the Zone of Influence (80%ile) for each of
the data logger locations, the predicted dredge effects and s um effect of
both background and dredging effects.
Site
AWAC 95%ile
DDC 95%ile
PSB 95%ile
AWAC 80%ile
DDC 80%ile
PSB 80%ile
Baseline
14
19
95
9
6
9
Dredge
5
2
50
5
2
10
Sum Effect
19
21
145
14
8
30
Analysis of data from loggers will be used to monitor overall performance

during dredging operations
Implementation
Strategy
2419-011-001-001
Prior to dredging:
- Three (3) data loggers were established in December 2011 to
collect existing water quality information at key receptor locations
prior to the commencement of dredging (Figure 42). This includes
one AWAC, located within the centre of Koombana Bay (ABS 1)
and two optical turbidity sensors established offshore from
Koombana Beach near the Dolphin Discovery Centre (OBS 2) and
offshore of Power Station Beach (OBS 1).
During dredging:
- Time series turbidity data will be collected from these three
stations to monitor the dispersion of dredge turbidity plumes within
Koombana Bay.
Page 84
20-November-2012
Monitoring
Reporting
Management
Response
During dredging operations, data from these three stations will be

downloaded every four weeks to assess conformance of predicted
turbidity levels from dredging and previous baseline data in
Koombana Bay.
- Monitoring of turbidity at spot sampling stations with CTD casts and
water samples for metal analysis will be conducted at the same time.
- Exceedances in turbidity attributable to dredging will be determined as
soon as practicable, enabling efficient implementation of management
measures to mitigate impacts to benthic habitat and social amenity.
- Reports every two weeks for submission to the regulator and TACC
presenting TSS results against the performance indicators.
- Significant anomalous conditions reported as required
If a t urbidity plume is detected, wave height, wind and rainfall data will
analysed to determine if the elevated/anomalous values are due to natural
variation (such as Cut discharge and wind/wave seabed re-suspension),
or other effects including Port operations or dredging.
If TSS levels attributable to dredging exceed the performance indicators
for seven (7) days, applicable management options shall be identified.
The dredge operations management and c orrective actions shall be in
accordance with the dredge contractors CEMP and final DSDMP. A
decision tree outlining a draft framework for management response in the
event that trigger values are exceeded is presented in Figure 43.
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
It should be noted that slowing down or stopping dredging to mitigate

visual amenity or recreational water quality impacts would require careful
consideration and s upport from the TACC. This level of intervention may
only facilitate to extend the impacting process, rather than expediting its
completion and recovery of recreational, economic and pu blic use goals.
Rather than the intervention in productivity, high TSS concentrations
impacting amenity and recreational water quality may be addressed by
issuing public notices, and advising of potentially extended reductions in
water clarity and suitability for recreational pursuits.
Water quality monitoring shall be undertaken prior to the commencement
of dredging to determine background levels as outlined in the BWQMP.
Turbidity monitoring shall be undertaken throughout the dredge program
to monitor potential dredge plumes.
Proponent
Dredge contractor
Page 85
20-November-2012
Figure 42: Zone of Influence defined for the Berth 14A development and turbidity logger sites.
2419-011-001-001
Page 86
20-November-2012
Regular Water Quality

Monitoring Using ABS and OBS
Compared to water
quality management
triggers for each area
Trigger not Exceeded
Continue Dredging
and Monitoring Plan
Timeframe
Trigger value
exceeded
Verify
values
Trigger value not

Exceeded
Within 24 hours:
Review observed
levels relative to
reference sites
Verify
values
Reference sites
indicate
exceedance due
to other factor
Within 48 hours:
Visually ID source
of exceedance
(Visual Inspection
or MODIS)
Verify
values
Exceedance
due to some
other factor
(i.e. Outflow
from adjacent
river system)
Dredging
identified as
source of
exceedance
The dredging
TACC should
be notified of
exceedance
between 84
and 108 hours
of the
exceedance
occurring
Within 72 hours:
Confirm
exceedance using
vessel based
surveys
Verify
values
Trigger value not

Exceeded
Within 84 hours:
Relocate dredge
to another part of
dredge footprint
(i.e. move from
clay to sand)
Verify
values
Trigger value not

Exceeded
Verify
values
Trigger value not

Exceeded
Verify
values
Trigger value not

Exceeded
Trigger value
exceeded
Within 96 hours:
Reduce overflow
on dredge
Trigger value
exceeded
Within 108 hours:
Reduce dredge
productivity until
water quality
objectives
achieved
Figure 43: Decision tree outlining a draft framework for management response in the event that
trigger values are exceeded during water quality monitoring.
2419-011-001-001
Page 87
20-November-2012
10.4.2
Chemical Water and Sediment Quality: Sub-plan 4
Vessel based monitoring shall be undertaken to collect chemical water and sediment quality data.
Sub-plan 4: Water and Sediment quality Chemical
Topic
Monitoring of marine water and sediment quality to detect any impacts of
Predicted
Water and sediment quality parameters monitored shall be assessed
Outcome
against baseline values. Water trigger values for further investigation are:
pH < 7.0
Management
- Aquatic animal health not at risk due to adverse water and
Objective
sediment quality impacts from the Project
- Dredging activities will be managed to ensure the predicted
zones of impact are achieved and that water and sediment quality
Statutory
Requirement or
Guidance
Background Quality for Coastal Marine Waters of Perth, Western
Australia (McAlpine et al, 2005)
Perth's Coastal Waters: Environmental Values and Objectives,
Performance
- Dredging will managed in conformance with predicted Zone of
Criteria
Influence (Figure 44) criteria for management for recreation and
aesthetic values.
- Dredging will be m anaged in conformance with pH, aluminium
and iron triggers in the water column at reference points
- Sediment will be monitored and non-conformance with baseline
values interpreted and reported
Implementation
Prior to dredging:
Strategy
During dredging:
commencement of dredging
- Water quality surveys will be c onducted during routine service
periods at sites within Koombana Bay (Figure 45) at four weekly
intervals.
Monitoring
Prior to dredging:
During dredging:
commencement of dredging (Figure 44)
- Water and sediment quality surveys will be c onducted during
routine service periods at sites within Koombana Bay (Figure 45)
at four weekly intervals.
Reporting
Summary reports will be provided upon receipt of laboratory results and
reported to the MRG.
Should water quality investigations conclude an absence of significant
fluctuations with the potential to impact ecological processes or human
use, and that plumes do NOT migrate over sensitive receptor locations (a
predicted outcome based upon dr edge plume modelling) during initial
phase of dredging then the implementation of the program will be scaled
2419-011-001-001
Page 88
20-November-2012
Management
Response
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
back to service intervals.

Changes to water quality will be assessed using the adopted performance
indicators. Where water quality conditions exceed the performance
indicators over two consecutive occasions management options will
considered by the MRG. Potential options may include:
- Consideration of baseline/background variation;
- Move the location of the dredge within the dredge footprint;
- Reduction in hopper barge overflow;
- No hopper overflow dredging;
- Shutdown to allow for water quality improvement; or
- Restriction in waterway use.
Modest changes in water quality are unlikely to require the high level
intervention of dredge productivity controls. Monitoring is likely to continue
to further define temporal and s patial scales of impact. However, in the
event that acute changes in water quality are experienced the full
spectrum of dredging intervention, including dredge shut down would be
explored. Such impacts may be related to drastic reductions in dissolved
oxygen, or occurrence of potential algal bloom activity.
Validation at commencement of dredging and subsequently at service
intervals or where an investigation is warranted
Proponent
Dredging Contractor
Figure 44: Water sample stations with respect to dredge plume. WSQ6 is key indicator site for metals.
2419-011-001-001
Page 89
20-November-2012
Figure 45: Water and sediment quality spot sampling locations overlayed on sediment particle size
contours in Koombana Bay
2419-011-001-001
Page 90
20-November-2012
10.5
Marine Fauna
Lanco and its contractors will seek to expedite the dredging schedule, ensuring that the campaign will
be conducted so that it achieves the required engineering and navigational objectives in the shortest
time possible in accordance with the dredge log.
Two periods of increased operational sensitivity have been identified for dredging operations within
the Bunbury Region. One relates to environmental concerns and the other is socio-economic. These
time windows have been identified not as shut down periods per se, but periods of increased
sensitivity, monitoring and operational scrutiny.
Tourism/recreation
The recreational amenity of the Bunbury beaches is considered of concern during the peak holiday
periods surrounding the Christmas School Holidays and the Easter Break.
Dolphin calving
Dolphin calving and the occurrence of dolphins in general peaks during summer and autumn months
each year. These periods are considered particularly important to recruitment, and a time for
increased diligence with regards to potential impacting activities and m onitoring for dolphin
occurrence. Based upon available information presented within the draft DSDMP, a preferential
window for undertaking high impact activities, such as rock fracturing (blasting) would be the July to
October period.
10.5.1
Bottlenose Dolphins: Sub-plan 5
Sub-plan 5: Dolphins
Topic
Change in distribution and/or abundance of bottlenose dolphins as a
result of dredging.
Predicted
- There will be no detectable change in the abundance, diversity,
Outcome
geographic distribution or productivity of bottlenose dolphins at a
species or ecosystem level.
distribution of dolphin populations in the environs of the inner
harbour and Koombana Bay through the use of passive acoustic
loggers.
Berth 14A area.
Management
- No harm to bottlenose dolphins due to dredging activities.
Objective
Statutory
Requirement or
Regulations (2000).
Guidance
Performance
No significant detectable changes in dolphin movement patterns in
Criteria
Project area based on passive acoustic monitoring
Implementation
- A passive acoustic monitoring program implemented to determine
Strategy
a 1-year baseline relative abundance and distribution of dolphins
in the Inner Harbour and Koombana Bay.
- A visual monitoring program to be implemented before and after
the dredging program to characterise behaviour of dolphins and
assess changes in the distribution and abundance of individual
dolphins at the scale of the proposed development.
- The length of the dredging campaign should be minimised as far
as practicable.
- The Dredging Contractor is to be required to check for the
presence of turtles and other significant marine fauna, particularly
within the path of dredging. Prior to commencing dredging and
disposal, the Dredging Contractor must check for significant
marine fauna from within a 300 metre monitoring zone of the
dredge area.
- Dredging and disposal activities may only commence if no
2419-011-001-001
Page 91
20-November-2012
dolphins have been observed in the monitoring zone.

If any dolphins are sighted in the vicinity of the dredge footprint,
dredging and dumping activities must not commence until after
the last dolphin mammal is observed to leave the monitoring zone
- If dolphins are observed to enter the dredge footprint during
dredging then adaptive management response protocols will
need to be developed with the TACC.
- The dredgers pump will start operation only after the cutter head
touches the seabed and stop working on clearing the sea bed
Any change in the distribution or abundance of dolphins in Koombana
Bay and the Inner Harbour area as a result of the proposed development
activities will be assessed using a c ombination of passive acoustic and
visual monitoring methods.
-
Monitoring

Passive acoustic monitoring is continuous and can simultaneously cover
a wide spatial scale (including separate locations). The use of acoustic
monitor also allows assessment of habitat use and behaviour during the
night which is not possible with visual monitoring. To assess the
distribution of dolphins in Koombana Bay and the Inner Harbour, three
passive acoustic loggers were deployed in August 2011 (Figure 46).
These loggers provide a baseline of dolphin abundance and spatial
distribution in the Project area.
Visual Monitoring to Detect Impacts:
A visual survey of dolphins will be undertaken to assess the behaviour of
dolphins in the Berth 14A area and assess changes in the distribution and
abundance of individual dolphins at the scale of the proposed
development. Four years of boat-based surveys have been undertaken in
the Bunbury region as part of the South-west Marine Research Program
(SWMRP). Additional visual monitoring program is proposed to be
undertaken in collaboration with the Bunbury Dolphin Discovery Centre
and will complement work undertaken to date as part of the SWMRP.
Data will be collected by experienced marine dolphin observers familiar
with the dolphin population in the area to assess the effect of the
development on dolphin abundance, distribution and habitat use at Berth
14A and environs.
Reporting
Management
Response
Together, the two monitoring approaches represent a survey approach

that is temporally and spatially relevant with respect to the scale of the
proposed project and of at sufficient resolution to detect ecologically
meaningful changes in habitat use of dolphins in Koombana Bay at and
adjacent to the proposed development area.
- In the event of an incident involving dolphins, the Dredging
The TACC will be not ified of any dolphin incidents and Lanco will liaise
directly with DEWHA and State regulatory authorities (DEC) regarding the
matter.
As detailed within the impact assessment, the habituation of resident
dolphin populations to changes in water quality and noise background
levels is considered plausible. Appropriate management responses need
to be considered by the TACC if significant deviations from expected
dolphin behaviour or related activities (e.g. tourism) occur.
Where impacts are defined as being sub-lethal, management would be
best served allowing operations to continue unhindered, rather than
delaying dredging, or reducing productivity, which would only serve to
extend the potential period of impact prior to respite and recovery.
2419-011-001-001
Page 92
20-November-2012
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
Should dolphin observations record lethal impacts associated with the

dredge operations, TACC shall be informed and consulted
- The passive acoustic monitoring program was implemented in
August 2011 and will continue until dredging activities commence
(expected to be for a period of at least 12 months).
- The passive acoustic monitoring program will continue during
dredging.
- The visual survey is proposed to occur for a per iod of up to 20
days prior to development and up to 20 days following
development.
Proponent
Dredging Contractor
DEC
2419-011-001-001
Page 93
20-November-2012
Koombana Bay East (C-Pod Site 1)
30
Dolphin Beach (C-Pod Site 2)
25
Inner Harbour (C-Pod Site 3)
20
15
31/03/2012
17/03/2012
3/03/2012
18/02/2012
4/02/2012
21/01/2012
7/01/2012
24/12/2011
10/12/2011
26/11/2011
12/11/2011
29/10/2011
15/10/2011
1/10/2011
17/09/2011
3/09/2011
10
20/08/2011
Average number of clicks per minute
35
Day
Figure 47: Dolphin activity recorded by each of the passive acoustic loggers.
10.5.2
Marine Turtles: Sub-plan 6
Marine fauna such as turtles are mobile and can generally avoid impacted areas for the duration of
dredging activities. However, maintenance dredging occurring elsewhere in Australia has caused a
small number of turtles to be killed by being hit by the dredge or being entrained by the dredge head.
Should turtles be s ighted in the Project dredging area during the dredging campaign, and this is
considered most unlikely, management and operational practices will be adopted to mitigate such
interactions. These management and operational practises include the possible use of turtle excluding
devices on t he dredge head to reduce the possibility of capture and/or controlling of the dredge
pumps to reduce operation while the dredge head is off the sea floor.
Sub-plan 6: Turtles
Topic
Co-occurrence of dredging activities and turtles
Predicted
- There will be no change in the abundance, diversity, geographic
Outcome
distribution and productivity of fauna at species and ecosystem
levels.
Management
No harm to marine turtles as a result of dredging activities.
Objective
Statutory
Environment Protection Biodiversity Conservation (EPBC) Regulations
Requirement or
(2000).
Guidance
Performance
No change in the abundance, diversity, geographic distribution and
Criteria
productivity of fauna at the species level.
Implementation
- The proponent is to consider the application of turtle exclusion
Strategy
devices on t he dredge heads if appropriate for the duration of
works.
- The Dredging Contractor is to implement procedural controls to
minimise off-bed suction time if appropriate.
- The length of the campaign should be minimised as far as
practicable.
- The Dredging Contractor will be r equired to check for the
presence of turtles and other marine fauna, particularly within the
path of dredging. Prior to dredging and disposal, the Dredging
Contractor must check for within a 300 metre monitoring zone of
the dredge operation.
- Dredging and disposal activities may only commence if no turtles
2419-011-001-001
Page 94
20-November-2012
have been observed in the monitoring zone.

If turtles are sighted in the monitoring zone, dredging activities
must not commence until after the last turtle is observed to leave
the monitoring zone, or until thirty minutes after the last sighting.
Visual monitoring by trained observer having experience in marine fauna
or a qualified Marine Mammal Observer (MMO).
- In the event of an incident involving turtles, the Dredging
- The TACC will be notified of any turtle incidents and Lanco will
liaise directly with DEWHA and S tate regulatory authorities
regarding the matter.
- Any marine mammal fatality will be reported as per the Marine
mammal sighting Report Form
The crew will be trained in spotting turtles during dredging activities.
-
Monitoring
Reporting
Management
Response
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
10.5.3
Throughout the day time. After 7 weeks of continuous dredging if no

sighting is observed then this is reduced
Proponent
Dredging Contractor
DEC
Rock Fracturing (blasting) on Marine Megafauna: Sub-plan 7
The requirement for rock fracturing (blasting) during development activities will be established
following a detailed geotechnical survey of the dredge footprint. Should rock-fracturing be required,
the following management strategies will be implemented to mitigate the risks to marine megafauna
associated with rock-fracturing activities.
Sub-plan 7: Marine Megafauna
Topic
Marine megafauna co-occurring during rock fracturing (blasting) activities.
Predicted
- No change in the abundance, diversity, geographic distribution or
Outcome
productivity of marine megafauna at species and ecosystem
levels.
distribution of dolphin populations in the environs of the Inner
Harbour and Koombana Bay.
Berth 14A area.
Management
Adopt industry best-practise measures to minimise the risk of harm to
Objective
marine megafauna should rock fracturing (blasting) be required.
Statutory
Requirement or
Regulations (2000).
Guidance
Performance
- No detectable impact of rock fracturing (blasting) activities on
Criteria
marine megafauna populations in the Project area.
- No marine megafauna present within defined exceedance zones
during rock fracturing (blasting) activities.
- No harm or injury to individual marine megafauna due to rock
fracturing (blasting) activities.
Implementation
- Validation of noise modelling will be undertaken as described in
Strategy
Sub-plan 2
- The scheduling of any rock fracturing (blasting) will occur to
minimise interactions with marine megafauna within the modelled
exceedance zones and Inner Harbour. In particular, rock
fracturing (blasting) should be a voided during peak calving
months when dolphins may be more vulnerable to disturbance.
- Should rock fracturing (blasting) be required, a visual observation
program will be implemented to monitor the location of marine
2419-011-001-001
Page 95
20-November-2012
mammals within Koombana Bay and the Inner harbour area.

Marine mammal detection and monitoring is proposed to be
conducted in collaboration with the Bunbury Dolphin Discovery
Centre. Marine mammal observations will occur for approximately
half an hour before (during the period that the last blast-holes are
being charged and the drilling platform is moved off the blast) and
half an hour after the time of each detonation.
No detonation will occur if a m arine mammal is detected within
the modelled Exceedance Zones or the Inner Harbour, and
should be de layed until the animals move, or are moved, out of
the Zone.
Rock fracturing (blasting) should be s cheduled to commence in
locations where impacts on Koombana Bay are minimised due to
shielding by the land mass (i.e. as far inside the proposed berth
pocket as possible).
Careful planning of the rock-fracturing to minimise the size of the
charge. During the initial rock fracturing (blasting) an MIC not
exceeding 28 kg (ANFO equivalent) should be used, with a view
to ramping up t he peak underwater pressure pulse while
monitoring rock fracturing (blasting) pressure levels.
Additional mitigation measures that may be considered to reduce impacts

of rock fracturing (blasting) include:
- Where practicable, use of explosive products with lower
detonation velocities. However, this would require more
explosives to achieve the same blast result.
- Use of detonating caps with built-in time delays, as this effectively
reduces each detonation into a series of small explosions.
- Use of a procedure ("decking the charge") which subdivides the
charge in one blast-hole into a s eries of explosions with drill
patterns restricted to a minimum separation from any other
loaded hole.
- Over drilling the holes to ensure fracturing of the rock.
- Use of gravel (road base) or similar material to stem the blasthole to the seabed level after the charge is in place. Noting that
appropriate confinement of each hole is very important as an
unconfined blast has been shown to have significantly higher
noise levels than the confined equivalent.
- Staggering the detonation for each blast-hole in order to spread
the explosive's total overpressure over time.
- Matching, to the extent possible, the energy needed in the work
effort of the borehole to the rock mass to minimise excess
energy vented into the water column.
- Use of acoustic deterrent devices. The use of acoustic deterrent
devices and or physically removing fauna from an established
exclusion zone should be carefully considered in the context of
their potential impacts (e.g. will these measures result in
additional or equivalent impacts to the works themselves).
Monitoring
2419-011-001-001
It is noted that the assumed design for rock fracturing (blasting)

incorporates some of the above elements, and that any changes from the
assumed design will require further assessment of potential impacts.
Visual Monitoring:
In the event that rock fracturing (blasting) is required, a team of land and
boat-based observers could be based near the perimeter of the
Exceedance Zone and in close proximity to the works. The main task of
the visual observers would be t o perform the visual monitoring of the
exceedance zones around the entrance to the inner harbour and in the
immediate vicinity of the works. This operator will be a qualified Marine
Page 96
20-November-2012

Passive acoustic monitoring refers to the detection of animals by listening
to the sounds that they make. Passive acoustic monitoring will also be
used to detect visual monitoring methods. While visual monitoring is
subject to the limitation that it can only detect animals at the surface,
passive acoustic monitoring can detect submerged animals if they make
detectable sounds. Marine mammals use underwater sounds to navigate,
feed and communicate. These sounds will be monitored using
hydrophones as part of the passive acoustic monitoring of marine
megafauna.
Reporting
Management
Response
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
The use of these complementary approaches for monitoring marine

mammals will provide the most robust approach for detecting of marine
mammals within the area of interest.
Weekly reporting on the results of the rock fracturing (blasting) activity to
the TACC will occur during the rock fracturing (blasting) program (should
rock fracturing (blasting) be required).
Scheduling of rock fracturing (blasting) to minimise temporal interactions
with dolphins.
Should rock fracturing (blasting) be observed, no detonation to occur
while dolphins are within specified exceedance zones.
Weekly reporting as specified above should rock fracturing (blasting) be
required.
Proponent
Rock Fracturing (blasting) Contractor
DEC
Page 97
20-November-2012
10.6
Benthic Habitats
10.6.1
Benthic Habitats in Koombana Bay: Sub-plan 8
Impact predictions have concluded that benthic habitat community loss is not considered a significant
risk. Benthic habitats within the area of influence from dredging activities are restricted to the northeastern margin of Koombana Bay. These benthic habitats occur on a l imestone reef complex and
predominantly consist of foliose algae, with lower densities of canopy forming algae (Ecklonia
radiata), and low densities of filter feeders (predominantly sponges).
Sub-plan 8: Benthic Habitats in Koombana Bay
Topic
Predicted Outcome
No loss of benthic habitat due to dredging as outlined in the WA EPAs
EAG No. 3. (this should be the outcome predicted from our studies )
Management
No benthic habitat will be affected by dredging due to remoteness from
Objective
dredge site, background turbidity values and limited plume dispersion.
Statutory
- Western Australian EPAs EAG No. 3 Protection of Benthic
Requirement or
Primary Producer Habitats in Western Australias Marine
Guidance
Environment.
- Western Australian EPAs EAG No. 7 Marine Dredging
Proposals.
Performance
- N/A.
Criteria
Implementation
Prior to dredging:
Strategy
- Determine baseline coverage of benthic communities
occurring in the Project area and potentially affected by
development activities (completed).
- Identify sentinel sites suitable for the monitoring of benthic
habitats during and following the dredge program. These
should include impact and reference sites.
- Delineate zones of high impact, zones of moderate impact and
zones of influence during the dredge program.
Monitoring
During dredging:
- Water and S ediment Quality Monitoring Program includes
stations near to benthic habitat adjacent to the Cut in
Koombana Bay (Figure 48)
Reporting
- N/A.
Management
It is not envisaged that impacts attributable to dredging operations will
Response
be reflected in changes to benthic habitat structure or health. Should
these locations demonstrate impacts, consideration of extended
habitat monitoring would be developed in coordination with the TACC.
Frequency/timing
N/A.
Responsibility/
Proponent
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
Page 98
20-November-2012
2419-011-001-001
Page 99
20-November-2012
10.7
At Sea Placement of Dredge Material
10.7.1
Ocean Placement Activities: Sub-plan 9
Within the dredge footprint, up t o 1.9 M m of sediment will be removed from below sea level and
disposed of in the proposed offshore dredge material placement ground. To minimise the amount of
dredge material required to be disposed on at sea, opportunities for onshore placement and beneficial
use of dredge material have been investigated as outlined in Appendix G of the Sea Dumping Permit
3
Application. Approximately xxxxm of suitable material from the top of the dredge footprint has been
identified as suitable for construction fill in the lanbase facilties for Berth 14A. However, the balance of
the material is composed of silty sand interspersed with clay lenses and is considered unsuitable for
beneficial use such as construction fill or beach nourishment.Sea disposal of dredge material is
required for the balance of the material to be removed from the dredge footprint and the proposed
offshore dredge material placement ground has been selected to minimise impacts on t he
surrounding ecosystem as described in Technical Report 2 Site Selection for Offshore Placement of
Dredge Material. The dredge material placement ground comprises an area of approximately 200 ha.
Impacts to the spoil ground and adjacent areas will be reduced through disposal of the dredge spoil in
such a manner as to uniformly spread it over the spoil ground. This is achieved through deposition
patterns that vary with the prevailing current direction. Uniform distribution of the spoil also maximises
the potential capacity of the disposal area and reduces off-site impacts associated with material
winnowing and mobilisation. More details will be provided in the Sea Dumping Permit Application.
Sub-plan 9: Ocean Placement of dredge material
2419-011-001-001
Page 100
20-November-2012
Topic
Predicted
Outcome
Management
Objective
Statutory
Requirement or
Guidance
Performance
Criteria
Implementation
Strategy
Monitoring
2419-011-001-001

- Loss of benthic habitat with an average cover of 6.3% from within
the proposed dredge material placement ground due to
smothering.
- No loss of benthic habitat from outside the proposed dredge
material placement ground due to placement activities.
- Conformance with Sea Dumping Permit requirements.
-
Environment Protection Biodiversity Conservation (EPBC) Act

(1999).
- National Assessment Guidelines for Dredging (NADG 2009).
- Deposition of dredge material at proposed offshore disposal
location within boundaries of proposed area.
- Project attributable loss of seagrass beds outside spoil ground
area
- Detailed habitat surveys and modelling of benthic habitats have
been undertaken at proposed offshore disposal location
(completed).
- Greater number of benthic habitat sites surveyed in vicinity of
proposed offshore disposal location to increase certainty in
habitat predictions (completed).
- Clear physical, biological, economic and operational criteria used
to select a s uitable dredge spoil disposal location (refer to
Technical Report 2 - Site Selection and Assessment for Offshore
Placement of Dredge Material).
- Hydrodynamic modelling undertaken to determine the direct and
indirect impacts of disposal activities on be nthic habitats in the
vicinity of the dredge material placement ground (completed).
- Loss assessment undertaken to determine loss of benthic habitat
at proposed dredge material placement ground upon sediment
placement.
- Wave and c urrent generated shear stress acting on dr edge
material following placement calculated (completed).
- Erosion rate of dredge material calculated and when combined
with shear stress will allow determination of re-suspension and
dispersion of dredge material upon placement (completed).
- Bathymetry of proposed dredge material placement ground
determined using LiDAR or multispectral techniques to provide a
baseline bathymetric profile (completed).
During Dredging and Dredge Material Placement:
- Placement of dredge material within the placement ground is
evenly distributed through GPS assisted placement.
- Validation of the extent of dredge plume during the early stages
(within the first month) of placement to ensure predictions of
plume extent are accurate. Monitoring will particularly focus on
validating the extent of the plume to the east (inshore) of the
placement ground as:
i)
Hydrodynamic modelling of disposal activities indicates
the plume is expected to extend furthest in this direction,
and
ii)
Most of the sensitive receptors (including the Binningup
desalination plant and greatest density of benthic
habitats) occur to the east of the placement ground.
- Vessel logs detailing disposal of dredge material to be kept by the
- Sonar observations taken during placement activities to ensure
the material is evenly distributed across the placement area
- Placement of dredge material to be conducted by capping the
Page 101
20-November-2012
Reporting
Management
Response
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
mound with coarser grain dredge material (PSD as a function of

dredge profile) so as to bury finer grain silt/clay material to
improve long term mound stability
- Minimize the effect on o ther users of the marine environment
during the execution of the work scope.
Following Dredging and Dredge Material Placement:
- Characterisation of bathymetry/biota of dredge mound and
surrounds determined using remote sensing methods.
- Dredge logs to be kept by dredging contractor detailing volume
and proximate composition (sand/silt/clay) of material, location
and time of placement of dredge material within the placement
ground.
- Results of characterisation survey of offshore disposal area to be
communicated to TACC and key stakeholders (e.g. BPA) upon
completion of bathymetric surveys and assessment of spoil
mound cap particle size distribution.
- Routine monthly reports of disposal volumes at dredge material
placement ground provided to the approval agency and TACC.
The placement of the dredge material through pumps on t he Hopper
linked to a vertical pipeline reaching down to the sea bed.
Underwater diffuser can be fitted at lower end of the discharge outlet .
- Monthly reporting of disposal volumes to TACC.
Proponent reporting to approval agency.
Dredging contractor vessel operations and disposal volumes.
DSEWPaC
Page 102
20-November-2012
10.7.2
Transit of Vessels: Sub-plan 10
<HOLD> To be reviewed upon appointment of dredge contractor.

Sub-plan 10: Vessel Transit
Topic
Transit of vessels during development.
Predicted
- No incidents or spills to marine environment
Outcome
- No interactions between vessels and marine megafauna
- No time lost due to human injury
- No restriction of vessel access to Bunbury Port
Management
Objective
vessels
- No impedance to planned port activities or shipping movements
without prior agreement/arrangements with Bunbury Port
Statutory
- Workplace Health and Safety Act 2007
Requirement or
- EPBC Act
Guidance
- Lancos HSE contract conditions
Performance
Criteria
vessels during development
- Zero collisions between Project vessels and marine megafauna
during transit or disposal activities.
- Zero environmental incidents due to transit of vessels during
development
- Lanco HSE Policy and regular Review
Implementation
- Dredging operations to be conducted so as to minimize the effect
Strategy
on port operations and port users during the execution of the
work scope.
- Suitable qualified vessel masters will be used at all times.
- Vessel master and crew to maintain adequate lookout for marine
megafauna at all times during vessel transit.
- Vessel master to ensure no marine megafauna are nearby (within
100 metres) during release of dredge material.
- Movement of dredging vessels to be coordinated with the BPA.
- Communications procedure between the proponent and the BPA
to be developed.
- Dredges to keep to designated shipping channels at all times
when within port limits.
- Dredging locations, movement of dredging vessels, dredge log
and schedule to be determined in consultation with the BPA.
- Proponent to issue a notice to mariners to advise port users of
dredging vessel operations within the port.
- Existing designated anchorage areas to be used where
appropriate.
- Dredging and related plant equipment to be maintained and
appropriately calibrated by dredging contractor for optimal
performance
Monitoring
Reporting
- Vessel logs and incident reporting log to be kept by dredging
contractor.
- Emergency Response Reporting Procedures (ERP) to be
activated as required by BPA
- Routine weekly reports to be provided to the BPA by dredging
contractor.
- Routine monthly updates shall be r eported to the approval
agency and TACC.
- Audit by AMSA representatives.
Management
- Limit speed of the hopper barges especially at bad weather
Response
- Vessel crew to be vigilant and communicate incidents.
2419-011-001-001
Page 103
20-November-2012
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
- Monitoring and assessment as described above.

Proponent.
Dredging Contractor.
BPA
Page 104
20-November-2012
10.8
Dredging Operations Management
10.8.1
Atmospheric Noise: Sub-plan 11
Sub-plan 11: Atmospheric Noise

Topic
Management of nuisance noise
Predicted
Outcome
Management
- Complaints from noise anomalies due t o dredging activities do
Objective
not exceed 15% of BPA monthly complaints register
Statutory
There is no statutory requirement to include noise generated during
Requirement or
dredging operations in noise modelling. However, recognised best
Guidance
practises will be employed during dredging operations to minimise the
impact of atmospheric noise on nearby land users.
Ships noise standards to be followed.
Performance
- Complaints registered with BPA or Lanco due to noise anomalies
Criteria
due to dredging activities.
Implementation
Atmospheric noise to be managed by the proponents Environmental
Strategy
Management Plan.
- The Dredging Contractor must ensure that all equipment is
optimally maintained and operated in a safe and efficient manner.
- Use of best practise measures for noise minimisation including
low noise engines, noise inhibiting covers; dredging contractor to
ensure all dredge and related plant equipment is calibrated
correctly and properly maintained for optimal environmental
performance.
- Any noise complaints received during dredging will be reported to
the TACC immediately by the Dredging Contractor or Lancos
representative.
- Lanco will investigate the complaint and determine what action
can be taken in the event to minimise impact.
Monitoring
The proponent will maintain a noise complaints log book or register,
recording the time and date of each complaint, the name of the
complainant, the nature of the complaint, the action taken and follow up.
Reporting
- Periodic reports to TACC to include any noise complaints
received and detail all follow up actions taken.
- Noise complaints log to be m ade available to TACC upon
request.
Management
Any noise complaints to be followed up by proponent within 48 hours.
Response
Frequency/timing Whenever it exceeds
Responsibility/
Proponent
Responsible
Dredging contractor
Agency
2419-011-001-001
Page 105
20-November-2012
10.8.2
Introduced Marine Pests: Sub-plan 12
With regards to dredging, the impact of introduced marine pests (IMP) may stem from:
An infested dredge vessel being used at the Port leading to the establishment of a v iable
potentially invasive marine pest population;
Vessel becoming infected at Bunbury and servicing another Port; or
When dredging the dredge footprint, IMP are translocated from the Port to the dredge
material placement ground.
Sub-plan 12: Introduced marine pests (IMP)
Topic
Management of potential IMP.
Predicted
- No additional IMP entering and/or becoming established within
Outcome
the Inner Harbour due to Dredging Project.
Management
- Zero Project attributable introductions of previously undetected
Objective
IMP from the National Monitoring Target Species List (NMTSL).
Statutory
General provisions:
- Fish Resources Management Act 1994 and Fish Resources
Requirement or
Guidance
Management Regulations 1995.
- Australian Ballast Water Management Requirement under
Quarantine Act 1908
- National Introduced Marine Pest Identification System
- National Biofouling Management Guidance for Non-trading
Vessels (Commonwealth of Australia 2008).
- Port Authorities Act 1999 and Port Authorities Regulations 2001
- Any Ministerial Conditions imposed under Environment Protection
Act 1986.
- Marine Environmental Management Plan
Performance
- Routine IMP survey conducted by BPA
Criteria
- Compliance with risk assessment protocols for Non-Trading
vessels.
Implementation
Vessel Clearance for IMPs:
Strategy
To achieve clearance (of containing marine species of concern), all nontrading vessels and equipment will undergo a risk assessment prior to
mobilisation based on a format endorsed by the Department of Fisheries
(DoF).
Risk assessments are required to be submitted to DoF at least 14 days
acceptable level of risk of introducing IMP will be issued with a
vessel movement clearance by DoF.
unacceptable level of risk will be required to provide further
information to DoF within a specified timeframe to determine their
final risk ratings.
Vessels and associated equipment determined to pose an unacceptable
level of risk have various management options to facilitate entry into WA
State waters including, but not limited to the following:
- Biofouling inspection performed by an accredited inspector to
demonstrate to DoF satisfaction the absence of IMP; or
- Hull cleaning followed by a biofouling inspection performed by an
accredited inspector to demonstrate to DoF satisfaction the
absence of IMP; or
- Alternative vessel with an acceptable level of risk be proposed for
entry to WA State waters.
Vessel inspections carried out on all vessels deemed to pose an
unacceptable level of risk will need certification including but limited to the
following:
- There is no significant amounts of consolidated sediment on or
within the vessel or associated equipment;
- Ballast water (if any) has been, or will be, managed according to
2419-011-001-001
Page 106
20-November-2012
the Australian Quarantine and Inspection Service (AQIS) ballast

water requirements;
No invasive marine species or any other species demonstrating
invasive characteristics, have been identified on or within any
vessel or immersible equipment inspected;
Any cleaning or treatment activities undertaken to address
invasive marine species risk, has been undertaken to an extent
that the vessel or associated equipment is considered to
represent an acceptable level of risk to the WA marine
environment; and
Vessel and equipment inspections shall be conducted either;
(a) immediately (no more than 7 days) prior to vessel or
equipment departure for the project area; or
(b) within 48 hours following arrival of vessel or equipment within
the project area.
Ballast Water:
Ballast water management for vessels from international waters shall be
managed in accordance with the Quarantine Act 1908 and Quarantine
Regulations 2000; and AQIS (2011) Australian Ballast Water
Management Requirements. Particularly the implicit mandatory ballast
water management requirements stating that the discharge of high-risk
ballast water in Australian ports or waters is prohibited. Where high risk
waters are considered to be all salt water from ports and coastal waters
outside of Australias territorial sea. Masters must also complete the AQIS
Ballast Water Management Summary (AQIS Form 026).
Monitoring
2419-011-001-001
Domestic vessels must obtain the approval of the Harbour Master prior to
ballast water being discharged within port waters. Such approval may be
granted if acceptable to the DoF.
In the event that IMP or significant amounts of fouling organisms or
sediment (as deemed by an Officer of DoF or accredited biofouling
inspector) are found on a vessel or equipment during any inspection, the
requirements may include but are not limited to the following:
- Notification of relevant agencies: DoF must be notified within 24
hours of any known or suspected marine pest detection in
Western Australian State waters.
- DoF will provide direction and advice on management options for
the introduced marine pest detection.
Potential management options include:
- Movement of vessel and/or equipment offshore to a s pecified
water depth until suitable management options have been
identified;
- Removal of vessel or equipment from water for cleaning;
- Appropriate cleaning at a suitable local haul-out location;
- For internal seawater systems, destruction of the suspected living
biofouling via treatment/s using suitable commercial preparations
(e.g. Rydlyme, Conquest or Quatsan, copper sulphate or boiling
water treatments), plus replacement of any remaining blocked
components; or
- In-water cleaning according to the requirements above.
All of these options would be required within specific timeframes and will
be under the direction of DoF.
If cleaning occurs, a pos t clean inspection performed by an ac credited
inspector will be required for submission to DoF for assessment. If DoF is
satisfied that the level of vessel or equipment hygiene represents an
acceptable level of risk and all conditions have been met, a vessel
movement clearance will be issued by DoF, with specific timeframes for
movements.
Page 107
20-November-2012
Reporting
Management
Response
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
Targeted introduced marine pest monitoring may be required in the

location where introduced marine pest was detected (vessel or equipment
berthed) and may be required in areas associated with the vessels
previous movements, as directed by DoF. This monitoring will be at the
companys cost.
Clearance to be obtained by dredge contractor from DOF for dredge and
related plant equipment entering Bunbury Port. This is to be provided to
Lanco.
Should a m arine pest be i dentified on a dredge vessel (or equipment),
following its clearance into Australian waters, the Dredge Contractor of
Lanco would immediately notify the agency responsible for the
management of marine pests in Western Australia, and AQIS. Under this
approach an appropriate course of action would be developed.
Prior to entry in the Bunbury Port.
Proponent/ Dredging Contractor for clearance of vessels and equipment.
DoF and AQIS for positive identification and management direction.
Page 108
20-November-2012
10.8.3
Waste Management: Sub-plan 13
Incorrect handling and storage of waste materials aboard the dredge may result in the introduction of
wastes into the marine environment. A process of waste management, handling and storage is to be
implemented so as to minimise the risk of release of waste to the environment.
Sub-plan 13: Waste management
Topic
Minimise the risk of release of waste to the marine environment.
Predicted
No waste to be introduced into the marine environment from dredging
Outcome
operations.
Management
Objective
Statutory
Requirement or
Guidance
Performance
Criteria
Compliance with regulatory requirements and bes t practice waste

material protocols
onboard of the dredge and related plant and
equipment.
(Controlled Waste) Regulations 2004
Waste Avoidance and Resource Recovery Act 2007
Protection of the Sea (Prevention of Pollution from Ships) Act 1983
based on MARPOL 73/78.
-
Implementation
Strategy
Monitoring
Reporting
Management
Response
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
All waste materials are handled and stored in a safe and

appropriate manner.
There is no environmental impact on, and disturbance to, the
surrounding marine area from waste.
The dredge is maintained in a clean and tidy manner.
Work areas, including the dredge, shall be kept free of loose litter
at all times.
- Waste materials shall be handled and stored in a safe and
environmentally acceptable manner.
- Any waste transferred off the dredge is to be transported to an
approved landfill site. Should recycling facilities be available, they
will be utilised.
- Under no circumstances is any waste to be r eleased into the
marine environment or incinerated.
- Hazardous waste (oils, chemicals, etc) will be retained in secure
containers onboard the dredge and removed to an appr opriate
onshore location for transport and disposal by a licensed
controlled waste carrier.
- Sewage and grey water disposed appropriately
Harbour Master of BPA would make visual inspections
- Implement appropriate management and pr eventative housekeeping measures to reduce the potential for inappropriate waste
disposal
Proponent
Dredging Contractor
BPA
Page 109
20-November-2012
10.8.4
Hazardous Substances Management: Sub-plan 14
The handling, transport and use of hazardous substances, including hydrocarbons such as petrol,
hydraulic fluid and engine oil will be managed to minimise the risk of accidental spillage and
subsequent impact on the marine environment.
Sub-plan 14: Hazardous substances management.
Topic
Minimise the risk of release of hazardous substances into the marine
environment.
Predicted
No hazardous substances to be introduced into the marine environment
Outcome
from dredging operations.
Management
Objective
Statutory
Requirement or
Guidance
Performance
Criteria
Implementation
Strategy
Prevent accidental release, leaks or spills of hazardous

substances, including hydrocarbons, to the surrounding marine
environment.
Rapid and complete response to any accidental release, leaks or
spills of hazardous substances, including hydrocarbons.
MARPOL 73-78: International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution

from Ships 1973
Pollution of the Sea (Prevention of Pollution from Ships) Act 1983
Waters by Oil and Noxious Substances Act 1987
Emergency Management Act 2005 and Emergency Management
Regulations 2006
Regulations 1987; Environmental Protection (Unauthorised Discharges)
Regulations 2004
-
No contamination of port waters from hazardous substances.

Preparation, review and readiness of the Dredge Contractors
Storage and Handling:

- Minimum volumes of hazardous substances will be s tored
onboard in accordance with relevant Australian standards
(AS1940:2004).
- Maintain the hazardous substances storage area in a clean, safe
and environmentally acceptable manner.
- MSDSs shall be onboard for all hazardous substances.
- Hazardous substances handling is to be c arried out by suitably
trained personnel only.
Vessel Operations:
- High quality, well maintained hydraulic system components
- Only essential maintenance works in the port are permitted.
- No bilge water will be discharged into the water at any time. This
includes any bilge water treated via oily water separators on
arrival at site, all vessels will have bilge water outlets tagged and
closed. All bilge water will either be contained onboard or
discharged onshore and disposed of via a licensed waste
management contractor.
- Inventories of hydrocarbon and c hemicals on and of f vessels to
ensure no unaccounted for losses (spills)
- Contaminated drainage waters will be contained (eg. diverted to a
sump) or will be cleaned to prevent overboard discharge.
Refuelling:
- Refuelling procedure to be developed,
2419-011-001-001
Page 110
documented
and
20-November-2012
Monitoring
Reporting
Management
Response
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
Undertaken in port at suitable facilities and in accordance with

BPA requirements.
Conducted by experienced personnel, using well maintained
equipment and during daytime and not during adverse weather
conditions (that is, high swell, bad visibility, strong winds).
Spill response:
- Spill response procedures to be developed, documented and
- Any fuel and oil spills within Port limits will be managed in
accordance with BPAs oil spill arrangements and procedures.
- Spill kits will be provided and located in close proximity to storage
and operational areas. Personnel shall be trained in the locations
of the spill kits on the dredge and their use.
- Equipment, including hoses and fuel tanks, will be checked prior
to and during refuelling activities. These checks will be recorded
in the vessel log books and will be made available as requested.
- Regular inspections will be undertaken to ensure that the bilge
outlets have not been opened.
- Record (by photograph and document) and investigate any oil
sheens or water discoloured detected during routine visual
- Any environmental incident, including spills and leaks will be
reported to the TACC.
- Routine (weekly) operations reports to be provided to Lanco by
- Any oil spills should be reported to the Department of Transport
and the BPA.
- Apply the spill response procedures developed by the Dredge
Contractor.
Proponent
Dredging Contractor
BPA
Page 111
20-November-2012
10.8.5
Emergency Response: Sub-plan 15
Emergency situations or environmental incidents during the dredging operations have the potential to
result in environmental harm which requires management preparedness and response.
Sub-plan 15: Emergency preparedness and response.
Topic
Minimise the risk of emergency situations
Predicted
No emergency situations throughout the dredging operations.
Outcome
Management
- Identify and reduce the potential for emergency situations or
Objective
environmental incident before it occurs to prevent damage to the
surrounding marine environment.
- Respond quickly and effectively in the event of an emergency or
environmental incident.
Statutory
- MARPOL 73-78: International Convention for the Prevention of
Requirement or
Pollution from Ships 1973
- Pollution of the Sea (Prevention of Pollution from Ships) Act 1983
Guidance
- Waters by Oil and Noxious Substances Act 1987
- Marine and Harbours Act 1981
- Emergency Management Act 2005 and Emergency Management
Regulations 2006
- Environmental Protection Act 1986 and Environmental Protection
Regulations 1987
- Environmental Protection (Unauthorised Discharges) Regulations
2004
Performance
- No contamination of marine waters from an emergency situation
Criteria
or environmental incident.
- Preparation, review and readiness of the Dredge Contractors
Implementation
Emergency response:
Strategy
- Ensure that the potential for environmental incidents is prevented
and reduced by implementation of best practice management
throughout the project.
- Emergency response procedures to be developed, documented
and implemented by the Dredge Contactor in consultation with
Harbour Master of BPA.
- Emergency response equipment will be provided and located in
close proximity to storage and operational areas. Personnel shall
be trained in these locations on the dredge and their use.
- For spill response, see Sub-plan 13: Hazardous Wastes.
Monitoring
Reporting
Management
Response
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
2419-011-001-001
Regular inspections will be undertaken to ensure that equipment

is well maintained.
Record (by photograph and document) and investigate any oil
potential environmental incidents detected during routine visual
Lanco to inspect dredging contractor operations.
Dredging Contractor must also retain a r ecord of the incident,
including details of the date, time, nature of the incident,
immediate action taken, cause of the incident and
reporting/notification taken.
Lanco will be responsible for notifying DSEWPC and the TACC of
environmental incidents.
Apply the spill response procedures developed by the Dredge
Contractor.

Proponent
Page 112
20-November-2012
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001
Dredge Contractor
BPA
Page 113
20-November-2012
10.8.6
Maritime Safety: Sub-plan 16
The operation of the dredges will be managed to minimise risk of incursion on port shipping
movements or vessel collision thereby managing the risk of impact to the marine environment.
Sub-plan 16: Maritime safety.
Topic
Minimise the risk of incursion on port shipping movements, vessel
collision or founding.
Predicted
No impact on vessel movements or vessel collisions.
Outcome
Management
- Avoid vessel collisions or unsafe vessel operations.
Objective
- No impedance to planned port operations and shipping
movements without approval from BPA.
Statutory
Requirement or
Guidance
Performance
- No time lost to human injury or vessel access to port.
Criteria
- No incidents or spills to marine environment.
Implementation
- Dredging operations will be conducted, so as to minimise the
Strategy
effect on por t operations and port users and to ensure the safe
work execution.
- Dredge operations will be carefully coordinated with the BPA
including adopting existing procedures.
- In consultation with BPA, Dredge Contractor will advise the
expected dredging locations, shipping routes, dredge log and
schedule and anchoring or berthing locations.
- BPA will issue a Notice to Mariners to advise other port users of
the dredging vessels movements and adjust as conditions
change.
- During shipping movements, will advise incoming/outgoing
vessels of the location and operations of the dredges.
Monitoring
- Notice to Mariners, records of BPA communications including
pilotage certificates.
Reporting
Dredging Contractor to keep vessel logs
Management
Response
Apply the spill response procedures developed by the Proponent

or dredging contractor.
Frequency/timing
Responsibility/
Responsible
Agency
2419-011-001-001

Proponent
Dredge Contractor
BPA
Page 114
20-November-2012
11
References
Australia and New Zealand Environment and Conservation Council (ANZECC) (2000).Australian and
New Zealand Guidelines for Fresh and Marine Water Quality. National Water Quality Management
Strategy Paper No 4, Australian and New Zealand Environment and Conservation Council and
Agriculture and Resource Management Council of Australia and New Zealand, Canberra, Australia.
Barranguet C., Kromkamp J., Peene J. (1998). Factors controlling primary production and
photosynthetic characteristics of intertidal microphytobenthos. Marine Ecology Progress Series 173:
117-126.
Chilvers B. L., Corkeron P. J. and Puotinen M. L. (2003). Influence of trawling on the behaviour and
Commonwealth of Australia (2009a). National Assessment Guidelines for Dredging. Department of
the Environment, Water, Heritage and the Arts. Commonwealth of Australia, Canberra, Australia.
Commonwealth of Australia (2009b). National Biofouling Management Guidance for Non-trading
Vessels.
Commonwealth of Australia (2009c). National Biofouling Management Guidelines for Commercial
Vessels.
truncates) due to long-term exposure to swim-with-dolphin tourism. Marine Mammal Science 17(4):
689-702.
Department of Agriculture, Fisheries and Forestry (DAFF) (2009). Marine Pests. Available from:
http://www.daff.gov.au/animal-plant-health/pests-diseases-weeds/marine-pests (Accessed December,
2011).
Department of the Environment and Heritage (DE&H) (2002). National Ocean Disposal Guidelines for
Dredged Material. Environment Australia, Australian Government.
Department of Fisheries (2009). Introduced Marine Species in Western Australia. Published by
Department of Fisheries, Perth, Western Australia.
Department of Water (DoW) (2007).The Leschenault Estuarine System, South-Western Australia,
Condition Statement and Recommendations for Management.
EPA (2011). Environmental Assessment Guideline for Marine Dredging Proposals. EAG No. 7.
Western Australian Environmental Protection Authority
Evans & Peck (2009).Inner Harbour Expansion Berth 14 Option Study Report. Prepared for
Greenland J. A., Limpus D. J. and Currie K. J. (2002). Queensland Marine Wildlife Stranding and
Hall M. A., Alverson D. L. and Metuzals K. I. (2000). By-catch: Problems and solutions. Marine
Pollution Bulletin41(1-6): 204-219.
Harris M. P. and Bode K. G. (1981). Populations of Little Penguins, Short-tailed Shearwaters and
other Seabirds on Phillip Island, Victoria, 1978. Emu 81(1): 20-28.
Jenkins R., Brown R. and Phillips M. (2009). Harbour porpoise (Phocoenaphocoena) conservation
2419-011-001-001
Page 115
20-November-2012
Jenner K. C. S., Jenner M-N.M. and McCabe K. A. (2001).Geographical and temporal movements of
Kangas M. I. (2000). Synopsis of the biology and exploitation of the blue swimmer crab,
Portunuspelagicus Linnaeus. Fisheries Research Report.
Kennish M. J. (2002). Environmental threats and environmental future of estuaries. Environmental
Laist D. W., Knowlton A. R., Mead J. G., Collet A. S. and Podesta M. (2001). Collisions between ships
Last P. R. and Stevens J. D. (2009).Sharks and R ays of Australia.CSIRO Division of Fisheries.
Melbourne.
McComb A. J., Qui S., Paling E. I., Hill N. A. (2001). Sediments of Leschenault Inlet: A comparison
with other estuaries in southwestern Australia. Journal of the Royal Society of Western Australia. 83:
275-284.
McDonald R. and Isbell R. (2009). In Australian soil and land survey field handbook 3rd edition.
National committee on Soil and Terrain.CSIRO Publishing Melbourne.
McPhee D. P. (2008).Fisheries Management in Australia. Federation Press (Annandale).
Meagher T. D. (1971). Ecology of the Crab PortunuspelagicusI (Crustacea: Portunidae) in South
Meagher T. D. (1971). Ecology of the Crab Portunus pelagicus (Crustacea: Portunidae) in South
deaths. Available from: http://media.murdoch.edu.au/Investigation-of-eight-Bunbury-dolphin-deaths
Potter I. C., Chalmer P. N., Tiivel D. J., Steckis R. A., Platell M. E. and Lenanton R. C. J. (2000). The
fish fauna and finfish fishery of the Leschenault Estuary in south-westen Australia. Journal of the
Royal Society of Western Australia 83: 481-501.
Potter I. C. and de Lestang S. (2000). Biology of the blue swimmer crab Portunus pelagicus in
Public Works Department of Western Australia (PWD) (1978). Bunbury Outer Harbour Siltation
Investigations, Public Works Department of Western Australia, Harbours and Rivers Branch, Coastal
Investigations Section.
Schreiber R. A. and P ennock J. R. (1995). The relative contribution of benthic microalgae to total
microalgal production in a shallow sub-tidal estuarine environment. Ophelia 42: 335-352.
Searle, D.J. and Semeniuk, V. (1985). The natural sectors of the inner Rottnest Shelf coast adjoining
the Swan Coastal Plain. Royal Society of Western Australia. Journal 67(3/4) p116-136.
Shore Coastal (2009). Bunbury Harbour Siltation Investigation. Prepared for Bunbury Port Authority.
SKM (2001).Sediment Assessment Assessment of Shipping Channel Sediment Origin. Prepared for
SKM (2001). Sediment Assessment- Assessment of Shipping Channel Sediment Origin. Prepared by
SKM (2006). Marine Pest Species Survey. Fifth Biennial Surveillance of Bunbury Harbour 2006.
2419-011-001-001
Page 116
20-November-2012
SKM (2009). Bunbury Port Authority Invasive Marine Species Survey Part II Winter Survey.
Southall B. L, Bowles A. E., Ellison W. T., Finneran J. J., Gentry R. L., Greene C. R. Jr, Kastak D.,
Ketten D. T., Miller J. H., Nachtigall P. E., Richardson W. J., Thomas J. A., Tyack P. L. (2007). Marine
Mammal Noise Exposure Criteria: Initial Scientific Recommendations. Aquatic Mammals 33(4): 411414.
Sundbck K., Miles A., and Gransson E. (2000). Nitrogen fluxes, denitrification and the role of
nucrophytobenthos in microtidal shallow-water sediments: an annual study. Marine Ecology Progress
Series 200: 59-76.
Vanderlaan A. S. M. and Taggart C. T. (2007). Vessel collisions with whales: The probability of lethal
WML Consultants (2009). Proposed Berth 14, Bunbury Port- Site Investigation. Prepared for Bunbury
Port Authority.
2419-011-001-001
Page 117
20-November-2012
Appendix 1
<HOLD> Summary table of key trigger values.
2419-011-001-001
Page 118
20-November-2012

Lanco Referral 2014 7200 Including Attachments

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lanco Referral 2014 7200 Including Attachments

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1.

001 Referral of proposed action v July 2013

Latitude and longitude

Degrees, minutes, seconds

Degrees, minutes, seconds

001 Referral of proposed action v July 2013

Locality and property description

Size of the development

Street address of the site

Leschenault Drive, Bunbury.

Table 1 below describes the land tenure of the site.

Land owner/Primary interest holder

Local Government Area and Council contact (if known)

Yes, you must also complete section 2.2

Alternative time frames etc

001 Referral of proposed action v July 2013

Component of larger action

Great Barrier Reef Marine

001 Referral of proposed action v July 2013

Yes, provide details:

2.1 Description of proposed action

001 Referral of proposed action v July 2013

Environmental Protection (Sea Dumping) Act 1981

001 Referral of proposed action v July 2013

001 Referral of proposed action v July 2013

001 Referral of proposed action v July 2013

Details of the OEPA assessing officer is:

Public consultation has been undertaken as described in Section 2.5.

001 Referral of proposed action v July 2013

3.1 (b) National Heritage Places

3.1 (c) Wetlands of International Importance (declared Ramsar wetlands)

Nature and extent of likely impact

001 Referral of proposed action v July 2013

3.1 (d) Listed threatened species and ecological communities

(Baudins Black Cockatoo) known to occur.

001 Referral of proposed action v July 2013

Table 3 Application of the Matters of National Environmental Significance Significant Impact

Reduce the area of occupancy of

Fragment an existing population

Modify, destroy, remove, isolate or

The project will not plausibly result in the introduction of invasive

Table 4 Application of the Matters of National Environmental Significance Significant Impact

Reduce the area of occupancy of

Fragment an existing population

001 Referral of proposed action v July 2013

vulnerable species habitat.

Reduce the area of occupancy of

Fragment an existing population

The project will not plausibly result in the introduction of invasive

001 Referral of proposed action v July 2013

Table 6 Application of the Matters of National Environmental Significance Significant Impact

Reduce the area of occupancy of

Fragment an existing population

The project will not plausibly result in the introduction of invasive

001 Referral of proposed action v July 2013

001 Referral of proposed action v July 2013

Reduce the area of occupancy of

Fragment an existing population

Modify, destroy, remove, isolate or

Result in invasive species that are

Reduce the area of occupancy of

Fragment an existing population

001 Referral of proposed action v July 2013

into two or more populations